Eaton Volume 4 CA08100005E

Electrical Sector Solutions

Volume 4 Circuit Protection

Eaton Corporation Electrical Sector 1111 Superior Ave. Cleveland, OH 44114 United States 877-ETN-CARE (877-386-2273) Eaton.com © 2010 Eaton Corporation All other trademarks are property of their respective owners. All Rights Reserved Printed in USA Publication No. CA08100005E / MSC December 2010

Volume 4:

Circuit Protection

Volume 4—Circuit Protection Tab 1—Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors . . . . . . . . . . .

V4-T1-1

Tab 2—Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . .

V4-T2-1

Tab 3—Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses . . . . .

V4-T3-1

Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions . . . . . . . . . .

V4-A1-1

Appendix 2—Catalog Parent Number Index . . . . . . .

V4-A2-1

Appendix 3—Alphabetical Product Index . . . . . . . . .

V4-A3-1

4

Copyright Dimensions, Weights and Ratings Dimensions, weights and ratings given in this catalog are approximate and should not be used for construction purposes. Drawings containing exact dimensions are available upon request. All listed product specifications and ratings are subject to change without notice. Photographs are representative of production units.

Terms and Conditions All prices and discounts are subject to change without notice. When price changes occur, they are published in Eaton’s Price and Availability Digest (PAD). All orders accepted by Eaton’s Electrical Sector are subject to the general terms and conditions as set forth in Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions.

Technical and Descriptive Publications This catalog contains brief technical data for proper selection of products. Further information is available in the form of technical information publications and illustrated brochures. If additional product information is required, contact your local Eaton Products Distributor, call 1-800-525-2000 or visit our website at www.eaton.com.

Compliance with Nuclear Regulation 10 CFR 21 Eaton products are sold as commercial grade products not intended for application in facilities or activities licensed by the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission for atomic purposes, under 10 CFR 21. Further certification will be required for use of these products in a safety-related application in any nuclear facility licensed by the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission.

WARNING The installation and use of Eaton products should be in accordance with the provisions of the U.S. National Electrical Code® and/or other local codes or industry standards that are pertinent to the particular end use. Installation or use not in accordance with these codes and standards could be hazardous to personnel and/or equipment.

These catalog pages do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to provide for every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes, the matter should be referred to the local Eaton Products Distributor or Sales Office. The contents of this catalog shall not become part of or modify any prior or existing agreement, commitment or relationship. The sales contract contains the entire obligation of Eaton’s Electrical Sector. The warranty contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of Eaton. Any statements contained herein do not create new warranties or modify the existing warranty.

Copyright ©2015 Eaton, All Rights Reserved.

Introduction

Eaton is a global leader in power distribution, power quality, control and automation, and monitoring products. At Eaton, we believe a reliable, efficient and safe power system is the foundation of every successful enterprise. Through innovative technologies, cutting-edge products and our highly skilled services team, we empower businesses around the world to achieve a powerful advantage. In addition, Eaton is committed to creating and maintaining powerful customer relationships built on a foundation of excellence. From the products we manufacture to our dedicated customer service and support, we know what’s important to you.

Solutions Eaton takes the complexity out of power systems management with a holistic and strategic approach, leveraging our industry-leading technology, solutions and services. We focus on the following three areas in all we do: ●

Reliability—maintain the appropriate level of power continuity without disruption or unexpected downtime

●

Efficiency—minimize energy usage, operating costs, equipment footprint and environmental impact

●

Safety—identify and mitigate electrical hazards to protect what you value most

Using the Eaton Catalog Library As we grow, it becomes increasingly difficult to include all products in one or two comprehensive catalogs. Knowing that each user has their specific needs, we have created a library of catalogs for our products that when complete, will contain 15 volumes. Since the volumes will continuously be a work in progress and updated, each volume will stand alone. Refer to our volume directory, MZ08100001E, for a quick glance of where to look for the products you need. The 15 volumes include: ●

●

●

●

●

●

Volume 1—Residential and Light Commercial (CA08100002E) Volume 2—Commercial Distribution (CA08100003E) Volume 3—Power Distribution and Control Assemblies (CA08100004E) Volume 4—Circuit Protection (CA08100005E) Volume 5—Motor Control and Protection (CA08100006E) Volume 6—Solid-State Motor Control (CA08100007E)

●

●

●

●

●

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions (CA08100008E) Volume 8—Sensing Solutions (CA08100010E) Volume 9—Original Equipment Manufacturer (CA08100011E) Volume 10—Enclosed Control (CA08100012E) Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls (CA08100013E)

●

●

●

●

Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions (CA08100014E) Volume 13—Counters, Timers and Tachometers (CA08100015E)—Available in electronic format only Volume 14—Fuses (CA08100016E)—Available in electronic format only Volume 15—Solar Inverters and Electrical Balance of System (CA08100018E)

These volumes are not all-inclusive of every product, but they are meant to be an overview of our product lines. For our full range of product solutions and additional product information, consult Eaton.com/electrical and other catalogs and product guides in our literature library. These references include: ●

The Consulting Application Guide (CA08104001E)

●

The Eaton Power Quality Product Guide (COR01FYA)

If you don’t have the volume that contains the product or information that you are looking for, not to worry. You can access every volume of the catalog library at Eaton.com/electrical in the Literature Library. By installing our Automatic Tab Updater (ATU), you can be sure you always have the most recent version of each volume and tab. Volume 4—Circuit Protection

CA08100005E—April 2015

www.eaton.com

i

Introduction

Icons Green Leaf Eaton Green Solutions are products, systems or solutions that represent Eaton benchmarks for environmental performance. The green leaf symbol is our promise that the solution has been reviewed and documented as offering exceptional, industry-leading environmental benefits to customers, consumers and our communities. Though all of Eaton’s products and solutions are designed to meet or exceed applicable government standards related to protecting the environment, our products with the Green Leaf designation further provide “exceptional environmental benefit.”

Learn Online When you see the Learn Online icon, go to Eaton.com/electrical and search for the product or training page. There you will find 100-level training courses, podcasts, webcasts or games and puzzles to learn more.

Drawings Online When you see the Drawings Online icon, go to Eaton.com/electrical and find the products page. There you will find a tab that includes helpful product drawings and illustrations.

Contact Us If you need additional help, you can find contact information under the Customer Care heading of Eaton.com/electrical.

ii

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—April 2015

www.eaton.com

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors

1.1

Industrial Circuit Breakers QUICKLAG®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QUICKLAG Plug-On Types HQP, QPHW, QHPX, QHPW . . . . . . . . . . . QUICKLAG Plug-On Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QPHGFT, QPHGFT, QPGFEP, QPHGFEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bolt-On Types BAB, QBHW, HBAX, HBAW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bolt-On Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter Types QBAF, QBCAF . . . . . . . . . Bolt-On Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QBGFT, QBHGFT, QBGFEP, QBHGFEP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable-In/Cable-Out Types QC, QCD, QCHW, QHCX, QHCW . . . . . . . Cable-In/Cable-Out, 1/2-Inch Wide, Types QCR, QCF, QCRH, QCFH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable-In/Cable-Out Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QCGFT, QCHGFT, QCGFEP, QCHGFEP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solenoid-Operated, Remote-Controlled Latching Types BABRP, BABRSP, BRRP and CLRP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solenoid Operator—Remote-Controlled Latching for Type GHBS, GBHS and GHQRSP Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . International Rated Types HQP, BA, QC, GFMB, GFXBC. . . . . . . . . . . Special Application Breakers, Types HQP, BA, QC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2

1.4

1

V4-T1-8

1

V4-T1-11 V4-T1-14

1

V4-T1-17

1

V4-T1-20

1

V4-T1-24

1

V4-T1-28

1

V4-T1-31

1

V4-T1-34

1

V4-T1-37 V4-T1-40

V4-T1-49

UL 1077 DIN Rail Supplementary Protectors FAZ Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V4-T1-67

UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB 480/277 Vac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB 208Y/120 Vac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

V4-T1-5

UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers FAZ-NA Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.3

V4-T1-2

V4-T1-87 V4-T1-93

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Learn Online

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-1

1.1 1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

Contents

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors

Description

1

Quick Reference

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

QUICKLAG

1

Quick Reference

1

Eaton’s QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers 1 Plug-In, Bolt-On, Cable-In/Cable-Out

1

Circuit Breaker Type

1 1

Circuit Breaker Type Code

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C

Interrupting Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes Number of Poles

Vac

Vdc

Federal Spec. W-C-375b

Vac Ratings 120

120/240

240

24–48

62.5

80

Vdc Ratings 2

Page Number

HQP

P

10–70

1

120/240

24, 48, 62.5

10a, 11a, 12a

—

10,000

—

5000

3

—

V4-T1-6

HQP

P

10–125

2

120/240

24, 48, 80

10a, 12a

—

10,000

—

5000

5000

5000

V4-T1-6

HQP

P

10–100

2, 3

240

—

10b, 11b, 12b

—

—

10,000

—

—

—

V4-T1-6

—

V4-T1-6

1

QPHW

P

15–70

1

120/240

24, 48, 62.5

14a

—

22,000

—

5000

3

1

QPHW

P

15–125

2

120/240

24, 48, 80

14a

—

22,000

—

5000

5000

5000

V4-T1-6

QPHW

P

15–100

2, 3

240

—

14b

—

—

22,000

—

—

—

V4-T1-6

1

QHPX

P

15–70

1

120/240

24, 48, 62.5

—

—

42,000

—

5000

3

—

V4-T1-7

QHPX

P

15–100

2

120/240

24, 48, 80

—

—

42,000

—

5000

5000

5000

V4-T1-7

1

QHPX

P

15–100

3

240

—

—

—

—

42,000

—

—

—

V4-T1-7

QHPW

P

15–30

1

120/240

24, 48, 62.5

15a

—

65,000

—

5000

3

—

V4-T1-7

QHPW

P

15–30

2

120/240

24, 48, 80

15a

—

65,000

—

5000

5000

5000

V4-T1-7

1 1 1 1 1 1

QHPW

P

15–20

3

240

—

15b

—

—

65,000

—

—

—

V4-T1-7

QPGFT

P, GF

15–40

1

120

—

10a, 11a, 12a

10,000

—

—

—

—

—

V4-T1-9

QPGFT

P, GF

15–50

2

120/240

—

10a, 11a, 12a

—

10,000

—

—

—

—

V4-T1-9

Notes 1 QUICKLAG circuit breakers are suitable for application in relative humidity 0–95% noncondensing. 2 Two-pole DC interrupting ratings based on two poles connected in series. Not UL® listed. 3 62.5 Vac interrupting rating is 3800 AIC 10–50A and 2500 AIC 55–100A continuous. Circuit Breaker Type Codes: P Plug-In; B Bolt-On; C Cable-In/Cable-Out; GF Ground Fault, 5 mA; GFEP Ground Fault, 30 mA. For Types GHBS, GBHS and BABRP solenoid-operated, remote-controlled circuit breakers, see Pages V4-T1-31 to V4-T1-36.

1 V4-T1-2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

1.1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

Eaton’s QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers 1 Plug-In, Bolt-On, Cable-In/Cable-Out, continued Circuit Breaker Type

Circuit Breaker Type Code

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C

1

Interrupting Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes Number of Poles

Vac

Vdc

Federal Spec. W-C-375b

Vac Ratings 120

120/240

Vdc Ratings 240

24–48

2

62.5

80

Page Number

QPHGFT

P, GF

15–30

1

120

—

10a, 11a, 12a

22,000

—

—

—

—

—

V4-T1-9

QPHGFT

P, GF

15–50

2

120/240

—

10a, 11a, 12a

—

22,000

—

—

—

—

V4-T1-9

QPGFEP

P, GFEP

15–40

1

120

—

—

10,000

—

—

—

—

—

V4-T1-9

QPGFEP

P, GFEP

15–50

2

120/240

—

—

—

10,000

—

—

—

—

V4-T1-9

QPHGFEP

P, GFEP

15–30

1

120

—

—

22,000

—

—

—

—

—

V4-T1-9

BABRSP

B

15–30

1

120

—

—

10,000

—

—

—

—

—

V4-T1-12

BABRSP

B

15–30

2

120/240

—

—

—

10,000

—

—

—

—

V4-T1-12

BRRP

P

15–30

1

120

—

—

10,000

—

—

—

—

—

V4-T1-32

BRRP

P

15–30

2

120/240

—

—

—

10,000

—

—

—

—

V4-T1-32

CLRP

P

15–30

1

120

—

—

10,000

—

—

—

—

—

V4-T1-32

—

—

V4-T1-32

3

—

V4-T1-12

CLRP

P

15–30

2

120/240

—

—

—

10,000

—

—

BAB

B

10–70

1

120/240

24, 48, 62.5

10a, 11a, 12a

—

10,000

—

5000

BAB

B

10–125

2

120/240

24, 48, 80

10a, 12a

—

10,000

—

5000

5000

5000

V4-T1-12

BAB

B

10–100

2, 3

240

—

10b, 11b, 12b

—

—

10,000

—

—

—

V4-T1-12

BABRP

B

15–30

1

120

—

—

10,000

—

—

—

—

—

V4-T1-32

BABRP

B

15–30

2

120/240

—

—

—

10,000

—

—

—

—

V4-T1-32

QBAF

B, AF

15–20

1, 2

120/240

—

—

—

10,000

—

—

—

—

V4-T1-15

QBCAF

B, AF, GF

15–20

1, 2

120/240

—

—

—

10,000

—

—

—

—

V4-T1-15

QBHW

B

15–70

1

120/240

24, 48, 62.5

14a

—

22,000

—

5000

3

—

V4-T1-12

QBHW

B

15–125

2

120/240

24, 48, 80

14a

—

22,000

—

5000

5000

5000

V4-T1-12

QBHW

B

15–100

2, 3

240

—

14b

—

—

22,000

—

—

—

V4-T1-12

HBAX

B

15–70

1

120/240

24, 48, 62.5

—

—

42,000

—

5000

3

—

V4-T1-13

HBAX

B

15–100

2

120/240

24, 48, 80

—

—

42,000

—

5000

5000

5000

V4-T1-13

HBAX

B

15–100

3

240

—

—

—

42,000

—

—

—

V4-T1-13

HBAW

B

15–30

1

120/240

24, 48, 62.5

15a

—

65,000

—

5000

3

—

V4-T1-13

HBAW

B

15–30

2

120/240

24, 48, 80

15a

—

65,000

—

5000

5000

5000

V4-T1-13

HBAW

B

15–20

3

240

—

15b

—

—

65,000

—

—

—

V4-T1-13

QBGFT

B, GF

15–40

1

120

—

10a, 11a, 12a

10,000

—

—

—

—

—

V4-T1-18

QBGFT

B, GF

15–50

2

120/240

—

10a, 11a, 12a

—

10,000

—

—

—

—

V4-T1-18

QBHGFT

B, GF

15–30

1

120

—

10a, 11a, 12a

22,000

—

—

—

—

—

V4-T1-18

QBHGFT

B, GF

15–30

1

120/240

—

10a, 11a, 12a

—

22,000

—

—

—

—

V4-T1-18

QBGFEP

B, GFEP

15–40

1

120

—

—

10,000

—

—

—

—

—

V4-T1-18

QBGFEP

B, GFEP

15–50

2

120/240

—

—

—

10,000

—

—

—

—

V4-T1-18

QBHGFEP

B, GFEP

15–30

1

120

—

—

22,000

—

—

—

—

—

V4-T1-18

QBHGFEP

B, GFEP

15–30

2

120/240

—

—

22,000

22,000

—

—

—

—

V4-T1-18

QC

C

10–70

1

120/240

24, 48, 62.5

10a, 11a, 12a

—

10,000

—

5000

3

—

V4-T1-41

QC

C

10–100

2

120/240

24, 48, 80

10a, 12a

—

10,000

—

5000

5000

5000

V4-T1-41

QC

C

10–100

2, 3, 4

240

—

10b, 11b, 12b

—

—

10,000

—

—

—

V4-T1-41

QCD

C

10–60

1, 2

120/240

24, 48, 62.5

—

10,000

10,000

—

3000

3000

—

V4-T1-23

QCD

C

10–100

2, 3

240

24, 48, 62.5

—

—

10,000

—

3000

3000

—

V4-T1-23

QCF

C

10–60

1, 2

120/240

24, 48, 62.5

—

10,000

10,000

—

3000

3000

—

V4-T1-42

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Notes 1 QUICKLAG circuit breakers are suitable for application in relative humidity 0–95% noncondensing. 2 Two-pole DC interrupting ratings based on two poles connected in series. Not UL listed. 3 62.5 Vac interrupting rating is 3800 AIC 10–50A and 2500 AIC 55–100A continuous.

1

Circuit Breaker Type Codes: P Plug-In; B Bolt-On; C Cable-In/Cable-Out; GF Ground Fault, 5 mA; GFEP Ground Fault, 30 mA. For Types GHBS, GBHS and BABRP solenoid-operated, remote-controlled circuit breakers, see Pages V4-T1-31 to V4-T1-36.

1

1 1

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-3

1.1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

1

Eaton’s QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers 1 Plug-In, Bolt-On, Cable-In/Cable-Out, continued

1

Circuit Breaker Type

1

QCF

C

15–20

1

QCF

C

15–30

QCR

C

10–60

1

QCR

C

QCR

1 1

Circuit Breaker Type Code

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C

Interrupting Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes Number of Poles

Vac

Vdc

Federal Spec. W-C-375b

1, 2

120/240

24, 48, 62.5

—

22,000

—

—

3000

3000

—

V4-T1-27

2, 3

240

24, 48, 62.5

—

—

10,000

—

3000

3000

—

V4-T1-27

1, 2

120/240

24, 48, 62.5

—

10,000

10,000

—

3000

3000

—

V4-T1-27

15–20

1, 2

120/240

24, 48, 62.5

—

22,000

—

—

3000

3000

—

V4-T1-27

C

15–30

2, 3

240

24, 48, 62.5

—

—

10,000

—

3000

3000

—

V4-T1-27

QCHW

C

15–70

1

120/240

24, 48, 62.5

14a

—

22,000

—

5000

—

V4-T1-22

QCHW

C

15–100

2

120/240

24, 48, 80

14a

—

22,000

—

5000

5000

5000

V4-T1-22

—

—

V4-T1-22

3

—

V4-T1-22

Vdc Ratings 2

Vac Ratings 120

120/240

240

24–48

62.5

80

Page Number

3

QCHW

C

15–100

2, 3

240

—

14b

—

—

22,000

—

1

QHCX

C

15–70

1

120/240

24, 48, 62.5

—

—

42,000

—

5000

QHCX

C

15–100

2

120/240

24, 48, 80

—

—

42,000

—

5000

5000

5000

V4-T1-22

1

QHCX

C

15–100

3

240

—

—

—

—

42,000

—

—

—

V4-T1-22

QHCW

C

15–30

1

120/240

24, 48, 62.5

15a

—

65,000

—

5000

3

—

V4-T1-22

QHCW

C

15–30

2

120/240

24, 48, 80

15a

—

65,000

—

5000

5000

5000

V4-T1-22

1

QHCW

C

15–20

3

240

—

15b

—

—

65,000

—

—

—

V4-T1-22

QCGFT

C, GF

15–40

1

120

—

—

10,000

—

—

—

—

—

V4-T1-29

1

QCGFT

C, GF

15–50

2

120/240

—

—

—

10,000

—

—

—

—

V4-T1-29

QCHGFT

C, GF

15–30

1

120

—

—

22,000

—

—

—

—

—

V4-T1-29

QCHGFT

C, GF

15–30

2

120/240

—

—

—

22,000

—

—

—

—

V4-T1-29

1

1 1 1 1

QCGFEP

C, GFEP

15–40

1

120

—

—

10,000

—

—

—

—

—

V4-T1-29

QCGFEP

C, GFEP

15–50

2

120/240

—

—

—

10,000

—

—

—

—

V4-T1-29

QCHGFEP

C, GFEP

15–30

1

120

—

—

22,000

—

—

—

—

—

V4-T1-29

QCHGFEP

C, GFEP

15–30

2

120/240

—

—

—

22,000

—

—

—

—

V4-T1-29

1

Notes 1 QUICKLAG circuit breakers are suitable for application in relative humidity 0–95% noncondensing. 2 Two-pole DC interrupting ratings based on two poles connected in series. Not UL listed. 3 62.5 Vac interrupting rating is 3800 AIC 10–50A and 2500 AIC 55–100A continuous.

1

Circuit Breaker Type Codes: P Plug-In; B Bolt-On; C Cable-In/Cable-Out; GF Ground Fault, 5 mA; GFEP Ground Fault, 30 mA. For Types GHBS, GBHS and BABRP solenoid-operated, remote-controlled circuit breakers, see Pages V4-T1-31 to V4-T1-36.

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V4-T1-4

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

1.1

Contents

QUICKLAG Type HQP Single-Pole

Description

Page

Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-2 QUICKLAG Plug-On Types HQP, QPHW, QHPX, QHPW V4-T1-6 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-7 QUICKLAG Plug-On Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QPGFT, QPHGFT, QPGFEP, QPHGFEP V4-T1-8 Bolt-On Types BAB, QBHW, HBAX, HBAW . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-11 Bolt-On Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter Types QBAF, QBCAF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-14 Bolt-On Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QBGFT, QBHGFT, QBGFEP, QBHGFEP. . . . . . V4-T1-17 Cable-In/Cable-Out Types QC, QCD, QCHW, QHCX, QHCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-20 Cable-In/Cable-Out, 1/2-Inch Wide, Types QCR, QCF, QCRH, QCFH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-24 Cable-In/Cable-Out Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QCGFT, QCHGFT, QCGFEP, QCHGFEP V4-T1-28 Solenoid-Operated, Remote-Controlled Latching Types BABRP, BABRSP, BRRP and CLRP . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-31 Solenoid Operator—Remote Controlled Latching for Type GHBS, GBHS and GHQRSP Breakers. . . . . . . . V4-T1-34 International Rated Types HQP, BA, QC, GFMB, GFXBC V4-T1-37 Special Application Breakers, Types HQP, BA, QC . . . . V4-T1-40

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

QUICKLAG Plug-On Types HQP, QPHW, QHPX, QHPW

1

Product Description

1

●

●

All products 15–100A are HACR rated Switching duty rated for 120 Vac fluorescent light applications

Standards and Certifications ● ●

Built and listed to UL 489 All products UL and CSA® listed

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-5

1.1 1 1 1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

Product Selection

QUICKLAG Type HQP Single-Pole

QUICKLAG Type: HQP 10,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C

1

Single-Pole

Two-Pole

Two-Pole

120/240 Vac

120/240 Vac

240 Vac

Three-Pole 240 Vac

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

10

HQP1010

HQP2010

—

HQP3010H 3

1

15

HQP1015 12

HQP2015

HQP2015H

HQP3015H

20

HQP1020 12

HQP2020

HQP2020H

HQP3020H

1

25

HQP1025

HQP2025

HQP2025H

HQP3025H

30

HQP1030

HQP2030

HQP2030H

HQP3030H

1

35

HQP1035

HQP2035

HQP2035H

HQP3035H

40

HQP1040

HQP2040

HQP2040H

HQP3040H

1

45

HQP1045

HQP2045

HQP2045H

HQP3045H

50

HQP1050

HQP2050

HQP2050H

HQP3050H

1

55

HQP1055

HQP2055

HQP2055H

HQP3055H

60

HQP1060

HQP2060

HQP2060H

HQP3060H

1

70

HQP1070

HQP2070

HQP2070H

HQP3070H

80

—

HQP2080

HQP2080H

HQP3080H

1

90

—

HQP2090

HQP2090H

HQP3090H

100

HQP1100

HQP2100

HQP2100H

HQP3100H

1

110

—

HQP2110

—

—

125

—

HQP2125

—

—

1

150

—

HQP2150

—

—

Three-Pole

1

QUICKLAG Type: HQP Non-Automatic Switches

1

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C

1 1

Single-Pole

Two-Pole

Two-Pole

120/240 Vac

120/240 Vac

240 Vac

240 Vac

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

50

HQP1050N

—

HQP2050N

HQP3050N

60

HQP1060N

—

HQP2060N

HQP3060N

100

HQP1100N

—

HQP2100N

HQP3100N

1 QUICKLAG Type: QPHW 22,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

1

Single-Pole

Two-Pole

Two-Pole

120/240 Vac

120/240 Vac

240 Vac

Three-Pole 240 Vac

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number QPHW3015H

1

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C

1

15

QPHW1015 1

QPHW2015

QPHW2015H

20

QPHW1020 1

QPHW2020

QPHW2020H

QPHW3020H

25

QPHW1025

QPHW2025

QPHW2025H

QPHW3025H

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

30

QPHW1030

QPHW2030

QPHW2030H

QPHW3030H

35

QPHW1035

QPHW2035

QPHW2035H

QPHW3035H

40

QPHW1040

QPHW2040

QPHW2040H

QPHW3040H

45

QPHW1045

QPHW2045

QPHW2045H

QPHW3045H

50

QPHW1050

QPHW2050

QPHW2050H

QPHW3050H

55

QPHW1055

QPHW2055

QPHW2055H

QPHW3055H

60

QPHW1060

QPHW2060

QPHW2060H

QPHW3060H

70

QPHW1070

QPHW2070

QPHW2070H

QPHW3070H

80

—

QPHW2080

QPHW2080H

QPHW3080H

90

—

QPHW2090

QPHW2090H

QPHW3090H

100

—

QPHW2100

QPHW2100H

QPHW3100H

110

—

QPHW2110

—

—

125

—

QPHW2125

—

—

Notes 1 Switching duty rated for 120 Vac fluorescent light applications. 2 For special low-magnetic breaker, order HQP1015L1 or HQP1020L1. 3 Not UL listed.

1 V4-T1-6

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

1.1

QUICKLAG Type: QHPX 42,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers Single-Pole

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C

Two-Pole

Two-Pole

1

Three-Pole

120/240 Vac

120/240 Vac

240 Vac

240 Vac

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

15

QHPX1015

1

QHPX2015

—

QHPX3015H

20

QHPX1020 1

QHPX2020

—

QHPX3020H

25

QHPX1025

QHPX2025

—

QHPX3025H

30

QHPX1030

QHPX2030

—

QHPX3030H

35

QHPX1035

QHPX2035

—

QHPX3035H

40

QHPX1040

QHPX2040

—

QHPX3040H

45

QHPX1045

QHPX2045

—

QHPX3045H

50

QHPX1050

QHPX2050

—

QHPX3050H

55

QHPX1055

QHPX2055

—

QHPX3055H

60

QHPX1060

QHPX2060

—

QHPX3060H

70

QHPX1070

QHPX2070

—

QHPX3070H

80

—

QHPX2080

—

QHPX3080H

90

—

QHPX2090

—

QHPX3090H

100

—

QHPX2100

—

QHPX3100H

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

QUICKLAG Type: QHPW 65,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers Single-Pole

Two-Pole

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

120/240 Vac

120/240 Vac

240 Vac

240 Vac

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

QHPW2015

—

QHPW3015H

—

QHPW3020H

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C

Catalog Number

15

QHPW1015 1

20

QHPW1020 1

QHPW2020

25

QHPW1025

QHPW2025

—

—

30

QHPW1030

QHPW2030

—

—

1 1 1 1 1 1

Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

1

Shipping Data Number of Poles

Carton Quantity

Approximate Weight Lbs (kg)

Dimensions

1

24

9.00 (4.1)

12.50 x 7.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 190.5 x 127.0)

2

12

9.00 (4.1)

12.50 x 7.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 190.5 x 127.0)

3

8

9.00 (4.1)

12.50 x 7.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 190.5 x 127.0)

1 1 1 1

Note 1 Switching duty rated for 120 Vac fluorescent light applications.

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-7

1.1 1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

Contents

QUICKLAG Type QPGFT Single-Pole Ground Fault Circuit Breaker

Description

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Page

Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-2 QUICKLAG Plug-On Types HQP, QPHW, QHPX, QHPW V4-T1-5 QUICKLAG Plug-On Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QPGFT, QPHGFT, QPGFEP, QPHGFEP V4-T1-9 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-10 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-10 Bolt-On Types BAB, QBHW, HBAX, HBAW . . . . . . . . V4-T1-11 Bolt-On Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter Types QBAF, QBCAF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-14 Bolt-On Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QBGFT, QBHGFT, QBGFEP, QBHGFEP . . . . . V4-T1-17 Cable-In/Cable-Out Types QC, QCD, QCHW, QHCX, QHCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-20 Cable-In/Cable-Out, 1/2-Inch Wide, Types QCR, QCF, QCRH, QCFH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-24 Cable-In/Cable-Out Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QCGFT, QCHGFT, QCGFEP, QCHGFEP V4-T1-28 Solenoid-Operated, Remote-Controlled Latching Types BABRP, BABRSP, BRRP and CLRP. . . . . . . . . V4-T1-31 Solenoid Operator—Remote Controlled Latching for Type GHBS, GBHS and GHQRSP Breakers . . . . . . . V4-T1-34 International Rated Types HQP, BA, QC, GFMB, GFXBC V4-T1-37 Special Application Breakers, Types HQP, BA, QC . . . V4-T1-40

QUICKLAG Plug-On Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QPGFT, QPHGFT, QPGFEP, QPHGFEP Product Description

Standards and Certifications ●

QUICKLAG Ground Fault Circuit Breakers, Class A GFCI ● 5 mA trip sensitivity QUICKLAG Ground Fault Equipment Protectors ● 30 mA trip sensitivity

1

Built and listed to UL 489

QUICKLAG Ground Fault Circuit Breakers, Class A GFCI ● Built and tested to UL 943 QUICKLAG Ground Fault Equipment Protectors ● Built and listed to UL 1053

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V4-T1-8

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

1.1

Product Selection

QUICKLAG Type QPGFT Single-Pole

1 1

Ground Fault Circuit Breakers—5 mA Sensitivity QUICKLAG Type: QPGFT 10,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers Single-Pole

Two-Pole

120 Vac

120/240 Vac

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

15

QPGFT1015

QPGFT2015

20

QPGFT1020

QPGFT2020

25

QPGFT1025

QPGFT2025

30

QPGFT1030

QPGFT2030

40

QPGFT1040

QPGFT2040

50

—

QPGFT2050

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

QUICKLAG Type: QPHGFT 22,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers Single-Pole

Two-Pole

120 Vac

120/240 Vac

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

15

QPHGF1015

QPHGF2015

20

QPHGF1020

QPHGF2020

25

QPHGF1025

QPHGF2025

30

QPHGF1030

QPHGF2030

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C

1 1 1 1 1 1

Ground Fault Equipment Breakers—30 mA Sensitivity QUICKLAG Type: QPGFEP 10,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C

Single-Pole

Two-Pole

120 Vac

120/240 Vac

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

15

QPGFEP1015

QPGFEP2015

20

QPGFEP1020

QPGFEP2020

25

QPGFEP1025

QPGFEP2025

30

QPGFEP1030

QPGFEP2030

40

QPGFEP1040

QPGFEP2040

50

—

QPGFEP2050

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

QUICKLAG Type: QPHGFEP 22,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C

Single-Pole

Two-Pole

120 Vac

120/240 Vac

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

15

QPHGFEP1015

QPHGFEP2015

20

QPHGFEP1020

QPHGFEP2020

25

QPHGFEP1025

QPHGFEP2025

30

QPHGFEP1030

QPHGFEP2030

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-9

1.1 1 1 1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

Special Application Ground Fault Circuit Protectors—5 mA Sensitivity QUICKLAG Type: QPGFT 10,000A Interrupting Capacity with Bell Alarm (W1) or Auxiliary Switch (W2) Single-Pole

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C

Two-Pole

120 Vac

120/240 Vac

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

1

15

QPGFT1015W1

QPGFT2015W1

20

QPGFT1020W1

QPGFT2020W1

1

25

QPGFT1025W1

QPGFT2025W1

30

QPGFT1030W1

QPGFT2030W1

1

40

—

QPGFT2040W1

50

—

QPGFT2050W1

1

15

QPGFT1015W2

—

20

QPGFT1020W2

—

1

25

QPGFT1025W2

—

30

QPGFT1030W2

—

1 1 1 1

Special Application Ground Fault Circuit Protectors—30 mA Sensitivity QUICKLAG Type: QPGFEP 10,000A Interrupting Capacity with Bell Alarm (W1) or Auxiliary Switch (W2) Single-Pole

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C

Two-Pole

120 Vac

120/240 Vac

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

1

15

QPGFEP1015W1

QPGFEP2015W1

20

QPGFEP1020W1

QPGFEP2020W1

1

25

QPGFEP1025W1

QPGFEP2025W1

30

QPGFEP1030W1

QPGFEP2030W1

1

40

—

QPGFEP2040W1

1 1

50

—

QPGFEP2050W1

15

QPGFEP1015W2

—

20

QPGFEP1020W2

—

25

QPGFEP1025W2

—

30

QPGFEP1030W2

—

1 1

Wiring Diagram

1

Bell Alarm and Auxiliary Contact Schematic Blue

1

Ground Fault Breaker

1 1 1 1

Blue Wire NC

Red

Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

1

Shipping Data

1 1

Red Wire

Single-throw double-pole contacts are UL and CSA listed for 5A at 250 Vac. Bell Alarm (W1)—contacts change state when breaker trips. Auxiliary Switch (W2)—contacts change state when breaker is opened (or tripped) or closed. 14-inch (355.6 mm) long 18 AWG pigtail wire leads provided.

1 1

Black Wire

NO

Number of Poles

Carton Quantity

Approximate Weight Lbs (kg)

1

24

11.00 (5.0)

12.50 x 6.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 165.1 x 127.0)

2

5

5.00 (2.3)

15.50 x 6.00 x 4.50 (393.7 x 152.4 x 114.3)

Dimensions

Note Shipped individually or in carton quantities.

V4-T1-10

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

1.1

Contents

QUICKLAG Type BAB Single-Pole

Description

Page

Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-2 QUICKLAG Plug-On Types HQP, QPHW, QHPX, QHPW V4-T1-5 QUICKLAG Plug-On Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QPGFT, QPHGFT, QPGFEP, QPHGFEP V4-T1-8 Bolt-On Types BAB, QBHW, HBAX, HBAW V4-T1-12 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-13 Bolt-On Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter Types QBAF, QBCAF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-14 Bolt-On Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QBGFT, QBHGFT, QBGFEP, QBHGFEP. . . . . . V4-T1-17 Cable-In/Cable-Out Types QC, QCD, QCHW, QHCX, QHCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-20 Cable-In/Cable-Out, 1/2-Inch Wide, Types QCR, QCF, QCRH, QCFH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-24 Cable-In/Cable-Out Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QCGFT, QCHGFT, QCGFEP, QCHGFEP V4-T1-28 Solenoid-Operated, Remote-Controlled Latching Types BABRP, BABRSP, BRRP and CLRP . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-31 Solenoid Operator—Remote Controlled Latching for Type GHBS, GBHS and GHQRSP Breakers. . . . . . . . V4-T1-34 International Rated Types HQP, BA, QC, GFMB, GFXBC V4-T1-37 Special Application Breakers, Types HQP, BA, QC . . . . V4-T1-40

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Bolt-On Types BAB, QBHW, HBAX, HBAW

1

Product Description

1

●

●

All products 15–100A are HACR rated Switching duty rated for 120 Vac fluorescent light applications

Standards and Certifications ● ●

Built and listed to UL 489 All products UL and CSA listed

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-11

1.1 1 1 1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

Product Selection

QUICKLAG Type BAB Single-Pole

QUICKLAG Type: BA 10,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers Single-Pole

Two-Pole

Two-Pole

120/240 Vac

120/240 Vac

240 Vac

240 Vac

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

10

BAB1010

BAB2010

BAB2010H 3

BAB3010H 3

15

BAB1015 12

BAB2015

BAB2015H

BAB3015H

20

BAB1020 12

BAB2020

BAB2020H

BAB3020H

1

25

BAB1025

BAB2025

BAB2025H

BAB3025H

30

BAB1030

BAB2030

BAB2030H

BAB3030H

1

35

BAB1035

BAB2035

BAB2035H

BAB3035H

40

BAB1040

BAB2040

BAB2040H

BAB3040H

45

BAB1045

BAB2045

BAB2045H

BAB3045H

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C

1 1

1 1 1 1 1 1

Three-Pole

50

BAB1050

BAB2050

BAB2050H

BAB3050H

55

BAB1055

BAB2055

BAB2055H

BAB3055H

60

BAB1060

BAB2060

BAB2060H

BAB3060H

70

BAB1070

BAB2070

BAB2070H

BAB3070H

80

—

BAB2080

BAB2080H

BAB3080H

90

—

BAB2090

BAB2090H

BAB3090H

100

BAB1100

BAB2100

BAB2100H

BAB3100H

110

—

BAB2110

—

—

125

—

BAB2125

—

—

Three-Pole

QUICKLAG Type: BA Non-Automatic Switches

1

Single-Pole

Two-Pole

Two-Pole

120/240 Vac

120/240 Vac

240 Vac

240 Vac

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number BAB3050N

1

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C

1

50

BAB1050N

—

BAB2050N

60

BAB1060N

—

BAB2060N

BAB3060N

100

BAB1100N

—

BAB2100N

BAB3100N

1 1

QUICKLAG Type: QBHW 22,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

1

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C

1

Single-Pole

Two-Pole

Two-Pole

120/240 Vac

120/240 Vac

240 Vac

Three-Pole 240 Vac

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

15

QBHW1015 1

QBHW2015

QBHW2015H

QBHW3015H

1

20

QBHW1020 1

QBHW2020

QBHW2020H

QBHW3020H

25

QBHW1025

QBHW2025

QBHW2025H

QBHW3025H

1

30

QBHW1030

QBHW2030

QBHW2030H

QBHW3030H

35

QBHW1035

QBHW2035

QBHW2035H

QBHW3035H

1

40

QBHW1040

QBHW2040

QBHW2040H

QBHW3040H

45

QBHW1045

QBHW2045

QBHW2045H

QBHW3045H

1

50

QBHW1050

QBHW2050

QBHW2050H

QBHW3050H

55

QBHW1055

QBHW2055

QBHW2055H

QBHW3055H

1

60

QBHW1060

QBHW2060

QBHW2060H

QBHW3060H

70

QBHW1070

QBHW2070

QBHW2070H

QBHW3070H

80

—

QBHW2080

QBHW2080H

QBHW3080H

1 1 1

90

—

QBHW2090

QBHW2090H

QBHW3090H

100

—

QBHW2100

QBHW2100H

QBHW3100H

110

—

QBHW2110

—

—

125

—

QBHW2125

—

—

Notes 1 Switching duty rated for 120 Vac fluorescent light applications. 2 For special low-magnetic breaker, order BAB1015L1 or BAB1020L1. 3 Not UL listed.

1 1 V4-T1-12

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

1.1

QUICKLAG Type: HBAX 42,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers Single-Pole

Two-Pole

120/240 Vac

120/240 Vac

240 Vac

240 Vac

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

15

HBAX1015

1

HBAX2015

—

HBAX3015H

20

HBAX1020 1

HBAX2020

—

HBAX3020H

25

HBAX1025

HBAX2025

—

HBAX3025H

30

HBAX1030

HBAX2030

—

HBAX3030H

35

HBAX1035

HBAX2035

—

HBAX3035H

40

HBAX1040

HBAX2040

—

HBAX3040H

45

HBAX1045

HBAX2045

—

HBAX3045H

50

HBAX1050

HBAX2050

—

HBAX3050H

55

HBAX1055

HBAX2055

—

HBAX3055H

60

HBAX1060

HBAX2060

—

HBAX3060H

70

HBAX1070

HBAX2070

—

HBAX3070H

80

—

HBAX2080

—

HBAX3080H

80

—

HBAX2080

—

HBAX3080H

90

—

HBAX2090

—

HBAX3090H

100

—

HBAX2100

—

HBAX3100H

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C

Two-Pole

1

Three-Pole

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

QUICKLAG Type: HBAW 65,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers Single-Pole

Two-Pole

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

120/240 Vac

120/240 Vac

240 Vac

240 Vac

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

HBAW1015 1

HBAW2015

—

HBAW3015H

HBAW1020 1

HBAW2020

—

HBAW3020H

25

HBAW1025

HBAW2025

—

—

30

HBAW1030

HBAW2030

—

—

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 15 20

1 1 1 1 1 1

Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

1

Shipping Data Number of Poles

Carton Quantity

Approximate Weight Lbs (kg)

Dimensions

1

24

9.00 (4.1)

12.50 x 7.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 190.5 x 127.0)

2

12

9.00 (4.1)

12.50 x 7.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 190.5 x 127.0)

3

8

9.00 (4.1)

12.50 x 7.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 190.5 x 127.0)

1 1 1 1

Note 1 Switching duty rated for 120 Vac fluorescent light applications.

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-13

1.1 1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

Bolt-On Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter QUICKLAG Types QBAF, QBCAF

Contents Description

1

Page

Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-2 QUICKLAG Plug-On Types HQP, QPHW, QHPX, QHPW V4-T1-5 QUICKLAG Plug-On Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QPGFT, QPHGFT, QPGFEP, QPHGFEP V4-T1-8 Bolt-On Types BAB, QBHW, HBAX, HBAW . . . . . . . . V4-T1-11 Bolt-On Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter Types QBAF, QBCAF V4-T1-15 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-16 Bolt-On Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QBGFT, QBHGFT, QBGFEP, QBHGFEP . . . . . V4-T1-17 Cable-In/Cable-Out Types QC, QCD, QCHW, QHCX, QHCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-20 Cable-In/Cable-Out, 1/2-Inch Wide, Types QCR, QCF, QCRH, QCFH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-24 Cable-In/Cable-Out Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QCGFT, QCHGFT, QCGFEP, QCHGFEP V4-T1-28 Solenoid-Operated, Remote-Controlled Latching Types BABRP, BABRSP, BRRP and CLRP. . . . . . . . . V4-T1-31 Solenoid Operator—Remote Controlled Latching for Type GHBS, GBHS and GHQRSP Breakers . . . . . . . V4-T1-34 International Rated Types HQP, BA, QC, GFMB, GFXBC V4-T1-37 Special Application Breakers, Types HQP, BA, QC . . . V4-T1-40

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Bolt-On Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter Types QBAF, QBCAF

1

Product Description ●

All products HACR rated

1

Features, Benefits and Functions ●

1

● ●

1

●

10 and 22 kAIC rating at 120V and 120/240V Single-pole AFCI HID ratings for HID (High Intensity Discharge) lighting All models are HACR rated

Standards and Certifications ● ●

Built and listed to UL 489 UL File E7819 for QBAF

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V4-T1-14

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

1.1

Product Selection

1

QBCAF and QBAF Type AFCIs Effective immediately, Eaton AFCIs are available for use in Sumter panels with a 22 kAIC rating. This higher rated breaker will allow us to win jobs where AFCIs are specified at higher than 10 kAIC. This breaker provides standard thermal-

QBHCAF

magnetic protection of branch circuits. This product will have the same form, fit and function of the current bolt-on AFCI (QBCAF and QBAF Type). Product scope is below. These breakers are in Bid Manager™ for Pow-RLine 1a, Pow-R-Line 1a-LX,

1

Pow-R-Line 3a and Pow-RLine 4a panelboards. For series rated combinations, continue to use the less expensive 10 kAIC QBCAF and QBAF offerings.

1 1 1

Breakers can also be ordered from Vista.

1 1

1-Inch (25.4 mm) Wide Bolt-On Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter Poles

kAIC Rating

Ampere Rating

Configuration

Catalog Number

15

Combination AFCI

QBCAF1015

20

Combination AFCI

QBCAF1020

15

Combination AFCI

QBHCAF1015

20

Combination AFCI

QBHCAF1020

15

Branch Feeder AFCI

QBAF1015

20

Branch Feeder AFCI

QBAF1020

15

Branch Feeder AFCI

QBHAF1015

20

Branch Feeder AFCI

QBHAF1020

1 1

Type QBCAF Combination AFCI Single-pole

10 kAIC

22 kAIC

1 1 1

Type QBAF Branch Feeder AFCI Single-pole

10 kAIC

22 kAIC

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-15

1.1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

1

Wiring Diagrams

1

Single-Pole 120V Load Application Sourced by 120/240 Vac

1 1

120/240 Vac Source N A B Line B

1 1 1

Single-Pole Neutral 120V Duplex Receptacle

Neutral

1

Equipment Ground

1 1 1 1

Single-Pole Shared Neutral with Multi-Duplex Receptacle Application 120/240 Vac Source N A B

1

Line B

1

Two-Pole

1 1

Neutral Neutral

1

Two 120V Duplex Receptacles

Line A

1

Equipment Ground

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V4-T1-16

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

1.1

Contents

QUICKLAG Type QBGFT Single-Pole Ground Fault Circuit Breaker

Description

Page

QUICKLAG Plug-On Types HQP, QPHW, QHPX, QHPW V4-T1-5 QUICKLAG Plug-On Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QPGFT, QPHGFT, QPGFEP, QPHGFEP V4-T1-8 Bolt-On Types BAB, QBHW, HBAX, HBAW . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-11 Bolt-On Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter Types QBAF, QBCAF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-14 Bolt-On Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QBGFT, QBHGFT, QBGFEP, QBHGFEP V4-T1-18 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-19 Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-19 Cable-In/Cable-Out Types QC, QCD, QCHW, QHCX, QHCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-20 Cable-In/Cable-Out, 1/2-Inch Wide, Types QCR, QCF, QCRH, QCFH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-24 Cable-In/Cable-Out Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QCGFT, QCHGFT, QCGFEP, QCHGFEP V4-T1-28 Solenoid-Operated, Remote-Controlled Latching Types BABRP, BABRSP, BRRP and CLRP . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-31 Solenoid Operator—Remote Controlled Latching for Type GHBS, GBHS and GHQRSP Breakers. . . . . . . . V4-T1-34 International Rated Types HQP, BA, QC, GFMB, GFXBC V4-T1-37 Special Application Breakers, Types HQP, BA, QC . . . . V4-T1-40

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Bolt-On Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QBGFT, QBHGFT, QBGFEP, QBHGFEP Product Description

Built and tested to UL 489

1

QUICKLAG Ground Fault Circuit Breakers, Class A GFCI ● Built and tested to UL 943

1

QUICKLAG Ground Fault Equipment Protectors ● Built and tested to UL 1053

1

●

QUICKLAG Ground Fault Circuit Breakers, Class A GFCI ● 5 mA trip sensitivity QUICKLAG Ground Fault Equipment Protectors ● 30 mA trip sensitivity

1

Standards and Certifications

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-17

1.1 1 1 1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

Product Selection

QUICKLAG Type QBGFT Single-Pole

Ground Fault Circuit Breakers—5 mA Sensitivity QUICKLAG Type: QBGFT 10,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C

1

Single-Pole

Two-Pole

120 Vac

120/240 Vac

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

15

QBGFT1015

QBGFT2015

20

QBGFT1020

QBGFT2020

25

QBGFT1025

QBGFT2025

1

30

QBGFT1030

QBGFT2030

40

QBGFT1040

QBGFT2040

1

50

—

QBGFT2050

1 1

1

QUICKLAG Type: QBHGFT 22,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

1

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C

1 1 1 1 1

Single-Pole

Two-Pole

120 Vac

120/240 Vac

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

15

QBHGF1015

QBHGF2015

20

QBHGF1020

QBHGF2020

25

QBHGF1025

QBHGF2025

30

QBHGF1030

QBHGF2030

Ground Fault Equipment Breakers—30 mA Sensitivity QUICKLAG Type: QBGFEP 10,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

1

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C

1

Single-Pole

Two-Pole

120 Vac

120/240 Vac

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

1

15

QBGFEP1015

QBGFEP2015

20

QBGFEP1020

QBGFEP2020

1

25

QBGFEP1025

QBGFEP2025

30

QBGFEP1030

QBGFEP2030

40

QBGFEP1040

QBGFEP2040

50

—

QBGFEP2050

1 1 1

QUICKLAG Type: QBHGFEP 22,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

1

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C

1

Single-Pole

Two-Pole

120 Vac

120/240 Vac

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

1

15

QBHGFEP1015

QBHGFEP2015

20

QBHGFEP1020

QBHGFEP2020

1

25

QBHGFEP1025

QBHGFEP2025

30

QBHGFEP1030

QBHGFEP2030

1 1 1 1 V4-T1-18

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

1.1

Special Application Ground Fault Circuit Protectors—5 mA Sensitivity QUICKLAG Type: QBGFT 10,000A Interrupting Capacity with Bell Alarm (W1) or Auxiliary Switch (W2) Single-Pole

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C

1

Two-Pole

120 Vac

120/240 Vac

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

15

QBGFT1015W1

QBGFT2015W1

20

QBGFT1020W1

QBGFT2020W1

25

QBGFT1025W1

QBGFT2025W1

30

QBGFT1030W1

QBGFT2030W1

40

—

QBGFT2040W1

50

—

QBGFT2050W1

15

QBGFT1015W2

—

20

QBGFT1020W2

—

25

QBGFT1025W2

—

30

QBGFT1030W2

—

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Special Application Ground Fault Circuit Protectors—30 mA Sensitivity QUICKLAG Type: QBGFEP 10,000A Interrupting Capacity with Bell Alarm (W1) or Auxiliary Switch (W2) Single-Pole

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C

1

Two-Pole

120 Vac

120/240 Vac

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

15

QBGFEP1015W1

QBGFEP2015W1

20

QBGFEP1020W1

QBGFEP2020W1

25

QBGFEP1025W1

QBGFEP2025W1

30

QBGFEP1030W1

QBGFEP2030W1

40

—

QBGFEP2040W1

50

—

QBGFEP2050W1

15

QBGFEP1015W2

—

20

QBGFEP1020W2

—

25

QBGFEP1025W2

—

30

QBGFEP1030W2

—

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Wiring Diagram

1

Bell Alarm and Auxiliary Contact Schematic

1

Blue Ground Fault Breaker

Red

1

Blue Wire NC

Black Wire

1

NO Red Wire

1

Single-throw double-pole contacts are UL and CSA listed for 5A at 250 Vac. Bell Alarm (W1)—contacts change state when breaker trips. Auxiliary Switch (W2)—contacts change state when breaker is opened (or tripped) or closed. 14-inch (355.6 mm) long 18 AWG pigtail wire leads provided.

1 1

Dimensions

1

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

1

Shipping Data Number of Poles

Approximate Weight Lbs (kg)

Dimensions

1

11.00 (5.0)

12.50 x 6.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 165.1 x 127.0)

2

5.00 (2.3)

15.50 x 6.00 x 4.50 (393.7 x 152.4 x 114.3)

1 1

Note Shipped individually or in carton quantities.

1 1 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-19

1.1 1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

Contents

QUICKLAG Type QC Single-Pole

Description

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Cable-In/Cable-Out Types QC, QCD, QCHW, QHCX, QHCW

1

Product Description

1 1

Page

Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-2 QUICKLAG Plug-On Types HQP, QPHW, QHPX, QHPW V4-T1-5 QUICKLAG Plug-On Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QPGFT, QPHGFT, QPGFEP, QPHGFEP V4-T1-8 Bolt-On Types BAB, QBHW, HBAX, HBAW . . . . . . . . V4-T1-11 Bolt-On Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter Types QBAF, QBCAF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-14 Bolt-On Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QBGFT, QBHGFT, QBGFEP, QBHGFEP . . . . . V4-T1-17 Cable-In/Cable-Out Types QC, QCD, QCHW, QHCX, QHCW V4-T1-21 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-23 Cable-In/Cable-Out, 1/2-Inch Wide, Types QCR, QCF, QCRH, QCFH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-24 Cable-In/Cable-Out Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QCGFT, QCHGFT, QCGFEP, QCHGFEP V4-T1-28 Solenoid-Operated, Remote-Controlled Latching Types BABRP, BABRSP, BRRP and CLRP. . . . . . . . . V4-T1-31 Solenoid Operator—Remote Controlled Latching for Type GHBS, GBHS and GHQRSP Breakers . . . . . . . V4-T1-34 International Rated Types HQP, BA, QC, GFMB, GFXBC V4-T1-37 Special Application Breakers, Types HQP, BA, QC . . . V4-T1-40

●

●

All products 10–100A are HACR rated Switching duty rated for 120 Vac fluorescent light applications only

Standards and Certifications ● ●

Built and listed to UL 489 All products UL and CSA listed

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V4-T1-20

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

1.1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

Product Selection

QUICKLAG Type QC Single-Pole

1 1

QUICKLAG Type: QC 10,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C

Single-Pole

Two-Pole

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Four-Pole

120/240 Vac

120/240 Vac

240 Vac

240 Vac

240 Vac

1

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

5

QC1005 1

QC2005 1

—

—

—

10

QC1010

QC2010

QC2010H 1

QC3010H 1

—

15

QC1015 2

QC2015

QC2015H

QC3015H

QC4015H

20

QC1020 2

QC2020

QC2020H

QC3020H

QC4020H

25

QC1025

QC2025

QC2025H

QC3025H

QC4025H

30

QC1030

QC2030

QC2030H

QC3030H

QC4030H

35

QC1035

QC2035

QC2035H

QC3035H

QC4035H

40

QC1040

QC2040

QC2040H

QC3040H

QC4040H

45

QC1045

QC2045

QC2045H

QC3045H

QC4045H

50

QC1050

QC2050

QC2050H

QC3050H

QC4050H

55

QC1055

QC2055

QC2055H

QC3055H

QC4055H

60

QC1060

QC2060

QC2060H

QC3060H

QC4060H

70

QC1070

QC2070

QC2070H

QC3070H

QC4070H

70

—

QC2080

QC2080H

QC3080H

QC4080H

90

—

QC2090

QC2090H

QC3090H

QC4090H

100

QC1100

QC2100

QC2100H

QC3100H

QC4100H

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

QUICKLAG Type: QC Non-Automatic Switches

1

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C

Single-Pole

Two-Pole

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Four-Pole

120/240 Vac

120/240 Vac

240 Vac

240 Vac

240 Vac

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

50

QC1050N

—

QC2050N

QC3050N

—

60

QC1060N

—

QC2060N

QC3060N

—

100

QC1100N

—

QC2100N

QC3100N

—

1 1 1

Notes 1 Not UL listed. 2 Switching duty rated for 120 Vac fluorescent light applications only.

1 1

For special low-magnetic breaker, order QC1015L1 or QC1020L1.Non-automatic switches, see Page V4-T1-42.

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-21

1.1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

QUICKLAG Type: QCHW 22,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

1

Single-Pole

Two-Pole

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

1

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C

120/240 Vac

120/240 Vac

240 Vac

240 Vac

Four-Pole 240 Vac

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

1

15

QCHW1015 1

QCHW2015

QCHW2015H

QCHW3015H

QCHW4015H

1

20

QCHW1020 1

QCHW2020

QCHW2020H

QCHW3020H

QCHW4020H

25

QCHW1025

QCHW2025

QCHW2025H

QCHW3025H

QCHW4025H

1

30

QCHW1030

QCHW2030

QCHW2030H

QCHW3030H

QCHW4030H

35

QCHW1035

QCHW2035

QCHW2035H

QCHW3035H

QCHW4035H

1

40

QCHW1040

QCHW2040

QCHW2040H

QCHW3040H

QCHW4040H

45

QCHW1045

QCHW2045

QCHW2045H

QCHW3045H

QCHW4045H

1 1 1 1 1

50

QCHW1050

QCHW2050

QCHW2050H

QCHW3050H

QCHW4050H

55

QCHW1055

QCHW2055

QCHW2055H

QCHW3055H

QCHW4055H

60

QCHW1060

QCHW2060

QCHW2060H

QCHW3060H

QCHW4060H

70

QCHW1070

QCHW2070

QCHW2070H

QCHW3070H

QCHW4070H

70

—

QCHW2080

QCHW2080H

QCHW3080H

QCHW4080H

90

—

QCHW2090

QCHW2090H

QCHW3090H

QCHW4090H

100

—

QCHW2100

QCHW2100H

QCHW3100H

QCHW4100H

1

QUICKLAG Type: QHCX 42,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

1

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C

Single-Pole

Two-Pole

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

120/240 Vac

120/240 Vac

240 Vac

240 Vac

240 Vac

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

15

QHCX1015 1

QHCX2015

—

QHCX3015H

—

1

20

QHCX1020

1

QHCX2020

—

QHCX3020H

—

25

QHCX1025

QHCX2025

—

QHCX3025H

—

1

30

QHCX1030

QHCX2030

—

QHCX3030H

—

1

35

QHCX1035

QHCX2035

—

QHCX3035H

—

40

QHCX1040

QHCX2040

—

QHCX3040H

—

1

45

QHCX1045

QHCX2045

—

QHCX3045H

—

50

QHCX1050

QHCX2050

—

QHCX3050H

—

1

55

QHCX1055

QHCX2055

—

QHCX3055H

—

60

QHCX1060

QHCX2060

—

QHCX3060H

—

1

70

QHCX1070

QHCX2070

—

QHCX3070H

—

1

70

—

QHCX2080

—

QHCX3080H

—

90

—

QHCX2090

—

QHCX3090H

—

100

—

QHCX2100

—

QHCX3100H

—

1

1 1

Four-Pole

QUICKLAG Type: QHCW 65,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C

Single-Pole

Two-Pole

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

120/240 Vac

120/240 Vac

240 Vac

240 Vac

240 Vac

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

15

QHCW1015 1

QHCW2015

—

QHCW3015H

—

1

20

QHCW1020 1

QHCW2020

—

QHCW3020H

—

1

25

QHCW1025

QHCW2025

—

—

—

30

QHCW1030

QHCW2030

—

—

—

1 1

1

Notes 1 Switching duty rated for 120 Vac fluorescent light applications only.

1

Non-automatic switches, see Page V4-T1-42.

1 V4-T1-22

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Four-Pole

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

1.1

QUICKLAG Type QCD Miniature Circuit Breakers ● Flexible power feed QCD breakers are used primarily in HVAC and connection: industrial applications. wire size, position ● ● Single-, two- and Same breaker size for three-pole options entire rating range ● ● Modular construction Field mountable accessories: ● DIN mounted finger shroud proof, quick (symmetrical rail 35 x connect terminals 7.5 DIN/EN 50 022) ● Other accessories: ● QCD same profile as jumper unit Type QCR

QUICKLAG Type QCD Miniature Circuit Breaker

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

QUICKLAG Type QCD 10,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C

Single-Pole

Two-Pole

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

120/240 Vac

120/240 Vac

240 Vac

240 Vac

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

10

QCD1010

QCD2010

—

—

15

QCD1015

QCD2015

QCD2015H

QCD3015H

20

QCD1020

QCD2020

QCD2020H

QCD3020H

25

QCD1025

QCD2025

QCD2025H

QCD3025H

30

QCD1030

QCD2030

QCD2030H

QCD3030H

35

QCD1035

QCD2035

QCD2035H

QCD3035H

40

QCD1040

QCD2040

QCD2040H

QCD3040H

45

QCD1045

QCD2045

QCD2045H

QCD3045H

50

QCD1050

QCD2050

QCD2050H

QCD3050H

55

QCD1055

QCD2055

QCD2055H

QCD3055H

60

QCD1060

QCD2060

QCD2060H

QCD3060H

70

—

QCD2070

QCD2070H

QCD3070H

80

—

QCD2080

QCD2080H

QCD3080H

90

—

QCD2090

QCD2090H

QCD3090H

100

—

QCD2090

QCD2090H

QCD3100H

—

QCD2100

QCD2100H

—

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

QUICKLAG Type QCD Non-Automatic Switches Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C

Single-Pole

Two-Pole

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

120/240 Vac

120/240 Vac

240 Vac

240 Vac

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

60

—

—

QCD2060NA

—

100

—

—

—

—

1 1 1 1

Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

1

Shipping Data Number of Poles

Carton Quantity

1

Approximate Weight Lbs (kg)

Dimensions

1

24

9.00 (4.1)

12.50 x 7.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 190.5 x 127.0)

2

12

9.00 (4.1)

12.50 x 7.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 190.5 x 127.0)

3

8

9.00 (4.1)

12.50 x 7.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 190.5 x 127.0)

1 1 1 1

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-23

1.1 1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

Contents

Cable-In/Cable-Out, 1/2-Inch Wide, Types QCR, QCF, QCRH, QCFH

Description

1 1 1 1 1

Single-Pole

Two-Pole

QCR (Rear-Mounted Breakers)

Single-Pole

Two-Pole

QCF (Front-Mounted Breakers)

1 1 1 1 1 1

Page

Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-2 QUICKLAG Plug-On Types HQP, QPHW, QHPX, QHPW V4-T1-5 QUICKLAG Plug-On Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QPGFT, QPHGFT, QPGFEP, QPHGFEP V4-T1-8 Bolt-On Types BAB, QBHW, HBAX, HBAW . . . . . . . . V4-T1-11 Bolt-On Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter Types QBAF, QBCAF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-14 Bolt-On Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QBGFT, QBHGFT, QBGFEP, QBHGFEP . . . . . V4-T1-17 Cable-In/Cable-Out Types QC, QCD, QCHW, QHCX, QHCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-20 Cable-In/Cable-Out, 1/2-Inch Wide, Types QCR, QCF, QCRH, QCFH V4-T1-25 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QCR and QCF Options and Accessories . . . . . . . V4-T1-27 Cable-In/Cable-Out Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QCGFT, QCHGFT, QCGFEP, QCHGFEP V4-T1-28 Solenoid-Operated, Remote-Controlled Latching Types BABRP, BABRSP, BRRP and CLRP. . . . . . . . . V4-T1-31 Solenoid Operator—Remote Controlled Latching for Type GHBS, GBHS and GHQRSP Breakers . . . . . . . V4-T1-34 International Rated Types HQP, BA, QC, GFMB, GFXBC V4-T1-37 Special Application Breakers, Types HQP, BA, QC . . . V4-T1-40

1 1

Cable-In/Cable-Out, 1/2-Inch Wide, Types QCR, QCF, QCRH, QCFH

1

Product Description

Application Description

Eaton Type QCR circuit breakers have as a standard feature provisions for 35 mm DIN rail rear mounting with a spring-loaded release. Optional clips for individual mounting are available as a separate accessory.

QCR and QCF circuit breakers are only 1/2-inch (12.7 mm) wide per pole and are excellent for general purpose industrial applications where space savings is required.

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Type QCF have two threaded steel inserts to facilitate front mounting with #6–32 steel screws. The clamp type terminals are accessible from the rear of the breaker so that cables can be accessed without removal of the breaker from the front cover.

Features, Benefits and Functions ●

● ●

●

●

1/2-inch (12.7 mm) wide per pole Cable-in/cable-out Black cases with black handles Three position handle: ON, Tripped (center), OFF Thermal-magnetic protection

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V4-T1-24

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Standards and Certifications ● ● ● ●

●

Built and listed to UL 489 UL File No. E7819 CSA File No. LR48907 Type QCR and QCF circuit breakers are UL listed circuit breakers that are suitable for use as branch circuit protectors All ratings 15–60A are HACR rated

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

1.1

Product Selection

Cable-In/Cable-Out, 1/2-Inch Wide

1 1

QCR Breaker Catalog Numbers 1234 Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C

Three-Pole

1

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

1

Single-Pole

Two-Pole

Two-Pole

120/240 Vac

120/240 Vac

240 Vac 5

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

QCR Breaker 10 kAIC Interrupting Ratings 10

15

20

25

30

QCR1010

QCR2010

—

—

QCR1010T

QCR2010T

—

—

—

QCR2010P

—

—

QCR1015 6

QCR2015

QCR2015H

QCR3015H

QCR1015T 6

QCR2015T

QCR2015HT

QCR3015HT

—

QCR2015P

—

—

QCR1020 6

QCR2020

QCR2020H

QCR3020H

QCR1020T 6

QCR2020T

QCR2020HT

QCR3020HT

—

QCR2020P

—

—

QCR1025

QCR2025

QCR2025H

QCR3025H

QCR1025T

QCR2025T

QCR2025HT

QCR3025HT

—

QCR2025P

—

—

QCR1030

QCR2030

QCR2030H

QCR3030H

QCR1030T

QCR2030T

QCR2030HT

QCR3030HT

—

QCR2030P

—

—

QCR1035

QCR2035

—

—

—

QCR2035P

—

—

QCR1040

QCR2040

—

—

—

QCR2040P

—

—

QCR1045

QCR2045

—

—

—

QCR2045P

—

—

QCR1050

QCR2050

—

—

—

QCR2050P

—

—

55

QCR1055

QCR2055

—

—

—

QCR2055P

—

—

60 7

QCR1060

QCR2060

—

—

—

QCR2060P

—

—

—

—

QCRH2015T

—

—

QCRH2020

—

—

QCRH2020T

—

—

35

40

45

50

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

QCR Breaker 22 kAIC Interrupting Ratings 15

QCRH1015 6 QCRH1015T

20

6

QCRH1020 6 QCRH1020T

6

QCRH2015

1 1 1

Notes 1 Standard breaker terminals are box type lugs. 2 Breakers with T Catalog Number Suffix are suitable for line and load side ring terminal connection (#10–32 plus/minus terminal screw provided). 3 Breakers with P Catalog Number Suffix are suitable for terminating two 10 AWG Quick-Connect Type Terminals per phase on breaker load side. 4 Breakers with Shunt Trip (extra pole required on breaker right-hand side) are available on single-, two- and three-pole. Contact the Customer Support Center at 1-800-356-1243. 5 Breakers with H Catalog Suffix have 240 Vac construction. 6 All 15 and 20A single-pole breakers are SWD (Switching Duty) rated for fluorescent lighting applications. 7 60/75°C Cu/Al wire on all ratings except 60A, which requires Cu only conductor.

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-25

1.1 1

Cable-In/Cable-Out, 1/2-Inch Wide

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

QCF Breaker Catalog Numbers 123 Single-Pole

Two-Pole

Two-Pole

120/240 Vac

120/240 Vac

240 Vac 4

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

1

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C

1

QCF Breaker 10 kAIC Interrupting Ratings 10

1 1

15

1

20

Three-Pole

QCF1010

QCF2010

—

—

QCF1010T

QCF2010T

—

—

QCF1015 5

QCF2015

QCF2015H

QCF3015H

QCF1015T 5

QCF2015T

QCF2015HT

QCF3015HT

QCF1020 5

QCF2020

QCF2020H

QCF3020H

QCF1020T 5

QCF2020T

QCF2020HT

QCF3020HT

QCF1025

QCF2025

QCF2025H

QCF3025H

QCF1025T

QCF2025T

QCF2025HT

QCF3025HT

QCF2030

QCF2030H

QCF3030H

1

25

1

30

QCF1030

1

QCF1030T

QCF2030T

QCF2030HT

QCF3030HT

35

QCF1035

QCF2035

—

—

1

40

QCF1040

QCF2040

—

—

1

45

QCF1045

QCF2045

—

—

50

QCF1050

QCF2050

—

—

1

55

QCF1055

QCF2055

—

—

60 6

QCF1060

QCF2060

—

—

1

QCF Breaker 22 kAIC Interrupting Ratings 15

1

20

1

QCFH1015 5

QCFH2015

—

—

QCFH1015T 5

QCFH2015T

—

—

QCFH1020 5

QCFH2020

—

—

QCFH2020T

—

—

QCFH1020T

1

5

Notes 1 Standard breaker terminals are box type lugs. 2 Breakers with T Catalog Number Suffix are suitable for line and load side ring terminal connection (#10–32 plus/minus terminal screw provided). 3 Breakers with Shunt Trip Attachment (extra pole required on breaker right-hand side) are available. Contact the Customer Support Center. 4 Breakers with H Catalog Suffix have 240 Vac construction. 5 All 15 and 20A single-pole breakers are SWD (Switching Duty) rated for fluorescent lighting applications. 6 60/75°C Cu/Al wire on all ratings except 60A, which requires Cu only conductor.

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V4-T1-26

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

1.1

QCR and QCF Options and Accessories QCR and QCF Standard Box Terminals Factory-installed line and load side breaker terminal to accommodate14 AWG to 4 AWG wire. Standard Box Terminals

1

QCR and QCF Ring or Spade Lug Terminals (10 to 30A Ratings Only) Factory-installed line and load side terminals each equipped with a #10–32 screw suitable for terminating one 10 AWG wire with insulated ring or spade type terminal as shown. Catalog Suffix “T”

QCR Quick-Connect Terminals Factory-installed two-prong quick-connect terminal on breaker load side suitable for terminating two 10 AWG wire with insulated slip-on terminals as shown. Line side terminal is the standard type.

Available QCR and QCF Breaker Accessories

1

Catalog Number

1

Steel mounting clip mounts QCR breaker if individual mounting is required. Quantity two required for single- and twopole and four required for three-pole breakers.

QCRMTGFT

1

Removable padlock device for single-pole QCR or QCF breaker.

QCRFPL1P

Removable padlock device for multi-pole QCR or QCF breaker.

QCRFPLMP

Padlock bracket assembly for QCR or QCF single- or multi-pole breakers (OFF only).

QCRFLOFF

Padlock bracket for QCR, lock-off only.

QCRPLOFF

Description

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Catalog Suffix “P”

1 1 1 1

Technical Data and Specifications ●

●

●

●

Single-, two- and three-pole 10 kAIC at 120/240 Vac, 10–60A 22 kAIC at 120/240 Vac, 15–20A 10 kAIC at 240 Vac, 10–30A

●

●

●

3 kAIC at 62.5 Vdc (single-pole) 3 kAIC at 130 Vdc (two poles in series) Normal operating environment: ● 0–40°C ● 5–95% humidity (noncondensing)

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-27

1.1 1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

Contents

QUICKLAG Type QCGFT Single-Pole Ground Fault Circuit Breaker

Description

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Page

Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-2 QUICKLAG Plug-On Types HQP, QPHW, QHPX, QHPW V4-T1-5 QUICKLAG Plug-On Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QPGFT, QPHGFT, QPGFEP, QPHGFEP V4-T1-8 Bolt-On Types BAB, QBHW, HBAX, HBAW . . . . . . . . V4-T1-11 Bolt-On Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter Types QBAF, QBCAF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-14 Bolt-On Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QBGFT, QBHGFT, QBGFEP, QBHGFEP . . . . . V4-T1-17 Cable-In/Cable-Out Types QC, QCD, QCHW, QHCX, QHCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-20 Cable-In/Cable-Out, 1/2-Inch Wide, Types QCR, QCF, QCRH, QCFH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-24 Cable-In/Cable-Out Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QCGFT, QCHGFT, QCGFEP, QCHGFEP V4-T1-29 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-30 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-30 Solenoid-Operated, Remote-Controlled Latching Types BABRP, BABRSP, BRRP and CLRP. . . . . . . . . V4-T1-31 Solenoid Operator—Remote Controlled Latching for Type GHBS, GBHS and GHQRSP Breakers . . . . . . . V4-T1-34 International Rated Types HQP, BA, QC, GFMB, GFXBC V4-T1-37 Special Application Breakers, Types HQP, BA, QC . . . V4-T1-40

Cable-In/Cable-Out Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QCGFT, QCHGFT, QCGFEP, QCHGFEP Product Description

Standards and Certifications

QUICKLAG Ground Fault Circuit Breakers, Class A GFCI ● 5 mA trip sensitivity

QUICKLAG Ground Fault Circuit Breakers, Class A GFCI ● Built and tested to UL 943

QUICKLAG Ground Fault Equipment Protectors ● 30 mA trip sensitivity

QUICKLAG Ground Fault Equipment Protectors ● Built and tested to UL 1053

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V4-T1-28

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

1.1

Product Selection QUICKLAG Type QCGFT Single-Pole Ground Fault Circuit Breaker

1 Breaker Catalog Numbers Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C

Single-Pole

Two-Pole

120 Vac

120/240 Vac

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

1 1 1

Ground Fault Circuit Breakers—5 mA Sensitivity QUICKLAG Type: QCGFT 10,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers 15

QCGFT1015

QCGFT2015

20

QCGFT1020

QCGFT2020

25

QCGFT1025

QCGFT2025

30

QCGFT1030

QCGFT2030

40

QCGFT1040

QCGFT2040

50

—

QCGFT2050

1 1 1 1

QUICKLAG Type: QCHGFT 22,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers 15

QCHGFT1015

QCHGFT2015

20

QCHGFT1020

QCHGFT2020

25

QCHGFT1025

QCHGFT2025

30

QCHGFT1030

QCHGFT2030

1 1

Ground Fault Equipment Protectors—30 mA Sensitivity QUICKLAG Type: QCGFEP 10,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

1

15

QCGFEP1015

QCGFEP2015

20

QCGFEP1020

QCGFEP2020

1

25

QCGFEP1025

QCGFEP2025

30

QCGFEP1030

QCGFEP2030

40

QCGFEP1040

QCGFEP2040

50

—

QCGFEP2050

1 1 1

QUICKLAG Type: QCHGFEP 22,000A Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic Breakers 15

QCHGFEP1015

QCHGFEP2015

20

QCHGFEP1020

QCHGFEP2020

25

QCHGFEP1025

QCHGFEP2025

30

QCHGFEP1030

QCHGFEP2030

1 1 1

Special Application Ground Fault Circuit Protector—5 mA Sensitivity QUICKLAG Type: QCGFT 10,000A Interrupting Capacity with Bell Alarm (W1) or Auxiliary Switch (W2) 15

QCGFT1015W1

QCGFT2015W1

20

QCGFT1020W1

QCGFT2020W1

25

QCGFT1025W1

QCGFT2025W1

30

QCGFT1030W1

QCGFT2030W1

40

—

QCGFT2040W1

50

—

QCGFT2050W1

15

QCGFT1015W2

—

20

QCGFT1020W2

—

25

QCGFT1025W2

—

30

QCGFT1030W2

—

1 1 1 1 1 1

Special Application Ground Fault Equipment Protectors—30 mA Sensitivity QUICKLAG Type: QCGFEP 10,000A Interrupting Capacity with Bell Alarm (W1) or Auxiliary Switch (W2) 15

QCGFEP1015W1

QCGFEP2015W1

20

QCGFEP1020W1

QCGFEP2020W1

25

QCGFEP1025W1

QCGFEP2025W1

30

QCGFEP1030W1

QCGFEP2030W1

40

—

QCGFEP2040W1

50

—

QCGFEP2050W1

15

QCGFEP1015W2

—

20

QCGFEP1020W2

—

25

QCGFEP1025W2

—

30

QCGFEP1030W2

—

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

1 1 1 1 1 1 V4-T1-29

1.1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

1

Wiring Diagram

1

Bell Alarm and Auxiliary Contact Schematic

1

Blue Ground Fault Breaker

1 1 1 1 1

Blue Wire NC

Red

Black Wire

NO Red Wire

Single-throw double-pole contacts are UL and CSA listed for 5A at 250 Vac. Bell Alarm (W1)—contacts change state when breaker trips. Auxiliary Switch (W2)—contacts change state when breaker is opened (or tripped) or closed. 14-inch (355.6 mm) long 18 AWG pigtail wire leads provided.

Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

1

Shipping Data

1

Number of Poles

Carton Quantity

Approximate Weight Lbs (kg)

Dimensions

1

1

20

11.00 (5.0)

12.50 x 6.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 165.1 x 127.0)

2

5

5.00 (2.3)

15.50 x 6.00 x 4.50 (393.7 x 152.4 x 114.3)

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V4-T1-30

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

1.1

Contents

BABRP and BABRSP Breakers— Single- and Two-Pole

Description

Page

Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-2 QUICKLAG Plug-On Types HQP, QPHW, QHPX, QHPW V4-T1-5 QUICKLAG Plug-On Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QPGFT, QPHGFT, QPGFEP, QPHGFEP V4-T1-8 Bolt-On Types BAB, QBHW, HBAX, HBAW . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-11 Bolt-On Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter Types QBAF, QBCAF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-14 Bolt-On Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QBGFT, QBHGFT, QBGFEP, QBHGFEP. . . . . . V4-T1-17 Cable-In/Cable-Out Types QC, QCD, QCHW, QHCX, QHCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-20 Cable-In/Cable-Out, 1/2-Inch Wide, Types QCR, QCF, QCRH, QCFH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-24 Cable-In/Cable-Out Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QCGFT, QCHGFT, QCGFEP, QCHGFEP V4-T1-28 Solenoid-Operated, Remote-Controlled Latching Types BABRP, BABRSP, BRRP and CLRP V4-T1-32 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-33 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-33 Solenoid Operator—Remote Controlled Latching for Type GHBS, GBHS and GHQRSP Breakers. . . . . . . . V4-T1-34 International Rated Types HQP, BA, QC, GFMB, GFXBC V4-T1-37 Special Application Breakers, Types HQP, BA, QC . . . . V4-T1-40

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Solenoid-Operated, Remote-Controlled Latching Types BABRP, BABRSP, BRRP and CLRP Product Description

Application Description

Features, Benefits and Functions

The BABRP and BABRSP are bolt-on branch circuit breakers designed for use in panelboards. The BRRP is a plug-on branch circuit breaker designed for use in loadcenters not manufactured with breakers with a 1-inch wide format and are listed on the “Compatibility list for Classified Applications”— Pub. 26271. In addition to providing conventional branch circuit protection, they include a unique solenoid-operated mechanism that provides for efficient breaker pulse-on and pulse-off operation when used with a suitable controller like Eaton’s Pow-R-Command™ lighting control system. These breakers can also be controlled by pushbutton or a PLC unit.

Eaton’s BABRP, BABRSP, BRRP and CLRP breakers are remotely operated molded case circuit breakers ideally suited for lighting control applications or energy management applications.

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Bolt-on line-side terminal (BABRP, BABRSP— Type BA) Plug-on line-side terminal (BRRP—Type BR, CLRP— Type CL) Cable connected load-side terminal Four-position control terminal Bi-metal assembly for thermal overload protection Fast-acting short-circuit protection Arc-chute assembly for fast-acting arc extinction Three-position handle: OFF, TRIP (Center), ON

1 ●

● ●

●

● ●

●

Handle permits manual switching when control power is lost Mechanical trip indicator 15 and 20A breakers SWD (switching duty) rated HID ratings for HID (high intensity discharge) lighting All models HACR rated Status feedback of control circuit (BABRSP) Series rated (BABRP, BABRSP only) ● BRRP series rated same as BR breakers ● BABRP, BABRSP same as BA breakers

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-31

1.1 1 1 1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

Product Selection

QUICKLAG Type QCGFT Single-Pole Ground Fault Circuit Breaker

BABRP UL 489 and CSA 22.2 Interrupting Ratings

BRRP UL 489 and CSA 22.2 Interrupting Ratings Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)

1

Catalog Number Ampere Vac (50/60 Hz) 120/240 277/480 Number of Poles Rating 1 120

Number Ampere of Poles Rating

1

1

1

Vac (50/60 Hz) 120

120/240

Catalog Number

15

10,000 —

—

BABRP1015

15

10,000

—

BRRP115

20

10,000 —

—

BABRP1020

20

10,000

—

BRRP120

25

10,000 —

—

BABRP1025

25

10,000

—

BRRP125

30

10,000 —

—

BABRP1030

30

10,000

—

BRRP130

15

—

10,000

—

BABRP2015

15

—

10,000

BRRP215

1

20

—

10,000

—

BABRP2020

20

—

10,000

BRRP220

25

—

10,000

—

BABRP2025

25

—

10,000

BRRP225

1

30

—

10,000

—

BABRP2030

30

—

10,000

BRRP230

1 1

2

1

BABRP and BABRSP Wire Harness

1

Catalog Number

Description

1

This 60-inch (1524.0 mm) wire pigtail provides SLBKRPTL1 a connection from a single BABRP’s control plug to a customer’s pushbutton, relay or PLC. Each box contains 12 pigtails. Wires are 22 AWG, 600V. Order in multiples of 12.

1

2

CLRP UL 489 and CSA 22.2 Interrupting Ratings Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) Number Ampere of Poles Rating 1

1 BABRSP UL 489 and CSA 22.2 Interrupting Ratings

1 1

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) Vac (50/60 Hz)

Number Ampere of Poles Rating 1 120

1

1

Catalog 120/240 277/480 Number

15

10,000 —

—

BABRSP1015

1

20

10,000 —

—

BABRSP1020

1

25

10,000 —

—

BABRSP1025

30

10,000 —

—

BABRSP1030

15

—

10,000

—

BABRSP2015

20

—

10,000

—

BABRSP2020

25

—

10,000

—

BABRSP2025

30

—

10,000

—

BABRSP2030

2

1 1

2

120/240

Catalog Number

15

10,000

—

CLRP115

20

10,000

—

CLRP120

25

10,000

—

CLRP125

30

10,000

—

CLRP130

15

—

10,000

CLRP215

20

—

10,000

CLRP220

25

—

10,000

CLRP225

30

—

10,000

CLRP230

Note 1 Continuous current rating at 40°C.

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V4-T1-32

Vac (50/60 Hz) 120

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

1.1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

Technical Data and Specifications

1 1

Control Circuit for the BABRP and BABRSP BABRP

BABRSP

Remote Contact

Remote Contact Line

Load Breaker Contact RM a

1

BKR a

Red

Black

Off Remote Coil Status

Blue

Yellow

RM b

On Coil

Off Remote Coil Status

1 1

Blue

RM a

On Coil

1

Line

Breaker Contact RM b

1

Yellow

Load

Black

Operation ● Tripping system—the BABRP, BABRSP, BRRP and CLRP circuit breakers have a permanent trip unit that contains a factory preset thermal (overload) trip element in each pole ● Operating mechanism— the BABRP, BABRSP, BRRP and CLRP circuit breakers have an over-center toggle mechanism that provides quick-make, quick-break operation. The operating mechanism is trip free. An internal cross-bar provides a common tripping of all multi-pole circuit breakers

Red

Solenoid Operating Data ● Power requirements: 24 Vac/dc (20.4V minimum– 30V maximum) ● Controlled signal: +AC/DC 8 ms minimum with zero cross, 300 ms maximum ● AC: 1.3 cycles minimum, 18 cycles or 300 ms maximum ● DC: 8 ms minimum, 300 ms maximum ● Maximum duty cycle of 6 OPEN/CLOSE cycles per minute ● Current draw: open 1A, close 3/4A ● Blue wire: power input (see power requirements) ● Black wire: remote opening ● Red wire: remote closing ● Yellow wire: feedback status from power input, maximum 0.50A draw (BABRSP only)

Wiring Diagrams

1 1 1

Operating/Application Data ● Ambient temperature: 0 to 40°C ● Nominal pulse magnitude: 24 Vac/dc ● Frequency: 50/60 Hz ● Maximum breaker cycling: 6 operations per minute ● Tolerance: +10% to –15% of nominal voltage ● Humidity: 0 to 95% noncondensing

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-33

1.1 1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

Contents

GHBS and GHQRSP

Description

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Page

Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-2 QUICKLAG Plug-On Types HQP, QPHW, QHPX, QHPW V4-T1-5 QUICKLAG Plug-On Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QPGFT, QPHGFT, QPGFEP, QPHGFEP V4-T1-8 Bolt-On Types BAB, QBHW, HBAX, HBAW . . . . . . . . V4-T1-11 Bolt-On Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter Types QBAF, QBCAF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-14 Bolt-On Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QBGFT, QBHGFT, QBGFEP, QBHGFEP . . . . . V4-T1-17 Cable-In/Cable-Out Types QC, QCD, QCHW, QHCX, QHCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-20 Cable-In/Cable-Out, 1/2-Inch Wide, Types QCR, QCF, QCRH, QCFH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-24 Cable-In/Cable-Out Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QCGFT, QCHGFT, QCGFEP, QCHGFEP V4-T1-28 Solenoid-Operated, Remote-Controlled Latching Types BABRP, BABRSP, BRRP and CLRP. . . . . . . . . V4-T1-31 Solenoid Operator—Remote Controlled Latching for Type GHBS, GBHS and GHQRSP Breakers V4-T1-35 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-36 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-36 International Rated Types HQP, BA, QC, GFMB, GFXBC V4-T1-37 Special Application Breakers, Types HQP, BA, QC . . . V4-T1-40

Solenoid Operator—Remote-Controlled Latching for Type GHBS, GBHS and GHQRSP Breakers Product Description Eaton’s GHBS, GBHS and GHQRSP circuit breakers are bolt-on branch circuit breakers designed for use in 277/480 Vac panelboards. In addition to providing conventional branch circuit protection, they include a unique solenoid-operated mechanism that provides for efficient breaker pulse-on and pulse-off operation when used with a suitable controller like Eaton’s Pow-R-Command lighting control system.

Features, Benefits and Functions ● ●

●

●

●

●

●

1

Bolt-on line-side terminal Cable-connected load-side terminal Status switch—remote status and breaker status available from internal auxiliary switches Bi-metal assembly for thermal overload protection Fast-acting short-circuit protection Arc-runner and arc-chute assembly for fast-acting arc extinction Three-position breaker handle: OFF, TRIP (Center), ON

●

●

●

●

● ●

Visual indication of the remotely operated contact’s position (open, closed or trip) Remote override handle permits manual switching when control power is lost 15 and 20A breakers SWD (switching duty) rated. 15 and 20A breakers HID rated for HID (High intensity discharge) lighting All models HACR rated Series rated with various Eaton main circuit breakers

1 1 1 1 1 1 V4-T1-34

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

1.1

Product Selection

GHBS—Single-Pole

1 1

GHBS UL 489 Interrupting Ratings

1

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) Number of Poles

Ampere Rating 1

Vac (50/60 Hz) 120

240

277/480

Catalog Number

1

15

65,000

—

14,000

GHBS1015D

20

65,000

—

14,000

GHBS1020D

30

65,000

—

14,000

GHBS1030D

15

—

65,000

14,000

GHBS2015D

20

—

65,000

14,000

GHBS2020D

30

—

65,000

14,000

GHBS2030D

2

1 1 1 1 1

GBHS CSA 22.2 Interrupting Ratings (Not UL Listed)

1

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) Number of Poles 1

2

Ampere Rating 1

1

Vac (50/60 Hz) 347/600

Catalog Number

15

10,000

GBHS1015D

20

10,000

GBHS1020D

15

10,000

GBHS2015D

20

10,000

GBHS2020D

1 1 1 1

GHQRSP UL 489 and CSA 22.2 Interrupting Ratings Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) Number of Poles

Ampere Rating 1

Vac (50/60 Hz) 120

120/240

277

480Y/277

Catalog Number 2

1

15

65,000

65,000

14,000

14,000

GHQRSP1015

20

65,000

65,000

14,000

14,000

GHQRSP1020

30

65,000

65,000

14,000

14,000

GHQRSP1030

15

65,000

65,000

14,000

14,000

GHQRSP2015

20

65,000

65,000

14,000

14,000

GHQRSP2020

30

65,000

65,000

14,000

14,000

GHQRSP2030

2

1 1 1 1 1 1

Notes 1 Continuous current rating at 40°C. 2 All UL listed circuit breakers are HID (high intensity discharge) rated.

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-35

1.1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

1

Technical Data and Specifications

1

1

Solenoid Operating Data ● Power requirements: 24 Vac/dc (20.4V minimum– 30V maximum) ● Controlled signal: +AC/ DC 8 ms minimum with zero cross, 300 ms maximum ● AC: 1.3 cycles minimum, 18 cycles or 300 ms maximum ● DC: 8 ms minimum, 300 ms maximum ● Maximum duty cycle of 6 OPEN/CLOSE cycles per minute ● Current draw: open 1A, close 3/4A ● Blue wire: power input (see power requirements) ● Black wire: remote opening

1

Terminal Type

1

Circuit Breaker Type

Circuit Breaker Amperes

Screw Head Type

Terminal Type

Range

1

GHQRSP

15–20

Slotted

Clamp

#14–#4 AWG

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

● ●

Wiring Diagrams Red wire: remote closing Yellow wire: feedback status from power input, maximum 0.50A draw

Operation Mechanism manually operated by external handle allowing ON, OFF and RESET operation. Handle assumes a center TRIP position after performing protective response. Operating/Application Data ● Ambient temperature: 0–40°C ● Frequency: 48–62 Hz ● Humidity: 0–95% noncondensing

Typical Single-Pole Circuit Breaker Schematic Diagram for GHBS and GBHS Breakers Circuit Breaker

Solenoid

Common AMP Inc. Conductor Plug 1

a

Solenoid

Auxiliary

/ Cycle Maximum 28 Vac Pulse Source 1 2

28 Vac Circuit Breaker Open/Closed Status

Typical Single-Pole Circuit Breaker Schematic Diagram for GHQRSP Breakers GHQRSP Remote Breaker Contact Contact Load

Line

1

Status

Blue

1

Black

Yellow

1

Red

1

On Coil

Off Coil

Power Input

1 1

Dimensions

1

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

1

Dimensions per Pole

1 1

Circuit Breaker Type

Width

Height 2

Length 3

GHQRSP

1.00 (25.4)

4.63 (117.6)

2.81 (71.4)

Notes 1 Purchase separate AMP Inc. conductor plug #640426-3. 2 Excluding line terminal. 3 Excluding handle.

1 1 1 1 1 1 V4-T1-36

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

1.1

Contents

International Rated

Description

Page

Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-2 QUICKLAG Plug-On Types HQP, QPHW, QHPX, QHPW V4-T1-5 QUICKLAG Plug-On Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QPGFT, QPHGFT, QPGFEP, QPHGFEP V4-T1-8 Bolt-On Types BAB, QBHW, HBAX, HBAW . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-11 Bolt-On Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter Types QBAF, QBCAF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-14 Bolt-On Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QBGFT, QBHGFT, QBGFEP, QBHGFEP. . . . . . V4-T1-17 Cable-In/Cable-Out Types QC, QCD, QCHW, QHCX, QHCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-20 Cable-In/Cable-Out, 1/2-Inch Wide, Types QCR, QCF, QCRH, QCFH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-24 Cable-In/Cable-Out Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QCGFT, QCHGFT, QCGFEP, QCHGFEP V4-T1-28 Solenoid-Operated, Remote-Controlled Latching Types BABRP, BABRSP, BRRP and CLRP . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-31 Solenoid Operator—Remote Controlled Latching for Type GHBS, GBHS and GHQRSP Breakers. . . . . . . . V4-T1-34 International Rated Types HQP, BA, QC, GFMB, GFXBC V4-T1-38 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-39 Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-39 Special Application Breakers, Types HQP, BA, QC . . . . V4-T1-40

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

International Rated Types HQP, BA, QC, GFMB, GFXBC

1

Product Description

Standards and Certifications

1

QUICKLAG International Circuit Breakers ● Bolt-on Type BA

QUICKLAG International Circuit Breakers ● Built and test certified to BS3871, Pt. 1 ● 50/60 Hz, 40°C

1

QUICKLAG International Ground Fault Circuit Breakers ● Plug-on Type GFMB ● Cable-in/cable-out Type GFXBC

1 1

QUICKLAG International Ground Fault Circuit Breakers ● Built and test certified to BS3871, Pt. 1; BS3871, Section 31-C; BS4293 ● 50/60 Hz, 40°C; 30 mA sensitivity

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-37

1.1 1 1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

Product Selection BAB

Breaker Catalog Numbers Single-Pole

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

240/415 Vac

240/415 Vac

240/415 Vac

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

1

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C

1

3000A Interrupting Capacity (M3) Bolt-On Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers

1

10

BAB1010E

BAB2010E

15

BAB1015E

BAB2015E

BAB3015E

1

16

—

—

—

20

BAB1020E

BAB2020E

BAB3020E

1

25

BAB1025E

BAB2025E

BAB3025E

30

BAB1030E

BAB2030E

BAB3030E

1

32

—

—

—

1

40

BAB1040E

BAB2040E

BAB3040E

50

BAB1050E

BAB2050E

BAB3050E

1

60

BAB1060E

BAB2060E

BAB3060E

70

BAB1070E

BAB2070E

BAB3070E

1

90

—

BAB2090E

BAB3090E

1

100

—

BAB2100E

BAB3100E

6000A Interrupting Capacity (M6) Bolt-On Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers

BAB3010E

1

15

BAB1015HE

BAB2015HE

BAB3015HE

20

BAB1020HE

BAB2020HE

BAB3020HE

1

25

BAB1025HE

BAB2025HE

BAB3025HE

30

BAB1030HE

BAB2030HE

BAB3030HE

1

40

BAB1040HE

BAB2040HE

BAB3040HE

1

50

BAB1050HE

BAB2050HE

BAB3050HE

60

BAB1060HE

BAB2060HE

BAB3060HE

1

70

BAB1070HE

BAB2070HE

BAB3070HE

90

—

BAB2090HE

BAB3090HE

1

100

—

BAB2100HE

BAB3100HE

1

Breaker Catalog Numbers—Ground Fault Single-Pole 30 mA Sensitivity

1

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C

1

240/415 Vac Catalog Number

3000A Interrupting Capacity (M3) Plug-On Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers

1

10

GFMB110B2

1

15

GFMB115B2

16

GFMB116B2

1

20

GFMB120B2

25

GFMB125B2

1

30

GFMB130B2

32

GFMB132B2

1

40

GFMB140B2

1

Note For other 240/415V applications, please contact the Customer Support Center at 1-800-356-1243.

1 1 1 V4-T1-38

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

1.1

Technical Data and Specifications

1

Interrupting Ratings Ratings

Suffix E

1

Suffix HE

1

International Circuit Breakers NEMA® 120/240 Vac

10,000 AIC

10,000 AIC

BS3871 220/380, 240/415 Vac

3000 AIC

6000 AIC

1 1

International Ground Fault Circuit Breakers BS3871 220/380, 240/415 Vac

1

3000 AIC

1 1

Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

1

Shipping Data Miniature Circuit Breaker QUICKLAG Type B

Number of Poles

Standard Carton Quantity

Approximate Carton Weight Lbs (kg)

1

Approximate Standard Carton

1

1

24

9.00 (4.1)

12.50 x 7.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 190.5 x 127.0)

2

12

9.00 (4.1)

12.50 x 7.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 190.5 x 127.0)

3

8

9.00 (4.1)

12.50 x 7.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 190.5 x 127.0)

1

20

11.00 (5.0)

12.50 x 6.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 165.1 x 127.0)

1

QUICKLAG Ground Fault Type P—All

1

Types B and C—All

1

20

11.00 (5.0)

12.50 x 7.00 x 5.50 (317.5 x 177.8 x 139.7)

Types P and B—All

2

5

5.00 (2.3)

12.50 x 6.00 x 4.50 (317.5 x 152.4 x 114.3)

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-39

1.1 1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

Contents

QUICKLAG Type P Switching Neutral

Description Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QUICKLAG Plug-On Types HQP, QPHW, QHPX, QHPW QUICKLAG Plug-On Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QPGFT, QPHGFT, QPGFEP, QPHGFEP Bolt-On Types BAB, QBHW, HBAX, HBAW . . . . . . . . Bolt-On Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter Types QBAF, QBCAF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bolt-On Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QBGFT, QBHGFT, QBGFEP, QBHGFEP . . . . . Cable-In/Cable-Out Types QC, QCD, QCHW, QHCX, QHCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable-In/Cable-Out, 1/2-Inch Wide, Types QCR, QCF, QCRH, QCFH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable-In/Cable-Out Ground Fault and Equipment Protectors, Types QCGFT, QCHGFT, QCGFEP, QCHGFEP Solenoid-Operated, Remote-Controlled Latching Types BABRP, BABRSP, BRRP and CLRP . . . . . . . . . Solenoid Operator—Remote Controlled Latching for Type GHBS, GBHS and GHQRSP Breakers . . . . . . . International Rated Types HQP, BA, QC, GFMB, GFXBC Special Application Breakers, Types HQP, BA, QC Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Factory Modifications and Installed Terminals . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Special Application Breakers, Types HQP, BA, QC

1

Product Description

1

Breakers ● Plug-on Type HQP: 10–30A, single- and two-pole, 10 kAIC ● Bolt-on Type BA: 10–30A, single- and two-pole, 10 kAIC ● Cable-in Type QC: 10–30A, single- and two-pole, 10 kAIC

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

QUICKLAG HID (High Intensity Discharge) Breakers ● Plug-on Type HQP: 15–60A, single- and two-pole, 10 kAIC ● Bolt-on Type BA: 15–60A, single- and two-pole, 10 kAIC ● Cable-in Type QC: 15–60A, single- and two-pole, 10 kAIC Breakers designed specifically for use with high intensity discharge (HID) lighting applications. (UL listed as standard lighting breakers.)

Molded Case Switches—Nonautomatic QUICKLAG Molded Case Switch ● Plug-on Type HQP: 50, 60,100A, single-, two- and three-pole ● Bolt-on Type BA: 50, 60,100A, single-, two- and three-pole ● Cable-in Type QC: 50, 60,100A, single-, two- and three-pole

1 1 1 1 1 V4-T1-40

V4-T1-8 V4-T1-11 V4-T1-14 V4-T1-17 V4-T1-20 V4-T1-24 V4-T1-28 V4-T1-31 V4-T1-34 V4-T1-37 V4-T1-41 V4-T1-43 V4-T1-46 V4-T1-47 V4-T1-48

Standards and Certifications ●

Switching neutral QUICKLAG breakers available in singleand two-pole configurations, plus neutral pole for applications in accordance with NEC® 514.5, 240.22 and 380.2. A single-pole device takes two pole spaces, and a two-pole device takes three pole spaces.

Page V4-T1-2 V4-T1-5

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

All products UL and CSA listed

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

1.1

Product Selection QUICKLAG Type P Switching Neutral

1 1

Breaker Catalog Numbers Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C

Single-Pole

Two-Pole

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

120/240 Vac

120/240 Vac

240 Vac

240 Vac

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

1 1

QUICKLAG Type: HQP Switching Neutral Thermal-Magnetic Breakers 10

HQP2010B

HQP3010B

—

—

15

HQP2015B

HQP3015B

—

—

20

HQP2020B

HQP3020B

—

—

25

HQP2025B

HQP3025B

—

—

30

HQP2030B

HQP3030B

—

—

1 1

1 1

QUICKLAG Type: BA Switching Neutral Thermal-Magnetic Breakers 10

BAB2010C

BAB3010C

—

—

15

BAB2015C

BAB3015C

—

—

20

BAB2020C

BAB3020C

—

—

25

BAB2025C

BAB3025C

—

—

30

BAB2030C

BAB3030C

—

—

1 1 1

QUICKLAG Type: QC Switching Neutral Thermal-Magnetic Breakers 10

QC2010B

QC3010B

—

—

15

QC2015B

QC3015B

—

—

20

QC2020B

QC3020B

—

—

25

QC2025B

QC3025B

—

—

30

QC2030B

QC3030B

—

—

1 1 1

QUICKLAG Type: HQP HID (High Intensity Discharge) Thermal-Magnetic Breakers 15

HQP1015D

HQP2015D

—

—

20

HQP1020D

HQP2020D

—

—

25

HQP1025D

HQP2025D

—

—

30

HQP1030D

HQP2030D

—

—

35

HQP1035D

HQP2035D

—

—

40

HQP1040D

HQP2040D

—

—

50

HQP1050D

HQP2050D

—

—

60

HQP1060D

HQP2060D

—

—

1 1 1 1 1

QUICKLAG Type: BA HID (High Intensity Discharge) Thermal-Magnetic Breakers 15

BAB1015D

BAB2015D

—

—

20

BAB1020D

BAB2020D

—

—

25

BAB1025D

BAB2025D

—

—

30

BAB1030D

BAB2030D

—

—

35

BAB1035D

BAB2035D

—

—

40

BAB1040D

BAB2040D

—

—

50

BAB1050D

BAB2050D

—

—

60

BAB1060D

BAB2060D

—

—

1 1 1 1 1 1

QUICKLAG Type: QC HID (High Intensity Discharge) Thermal-Magnetic Breakers 15

QC1015D

QC2015D

—

—

20

QC1020D

QC2020D

—

—

25

QC1025D

QC2025D

—

—

30

QC1030D

QC2030D

—

—

35

QC1035D

QC2035D

—

—

40

QC1040D

QC2040D

—

—

50

QC1050D

QC2050D

—

—

60

QC1060D

QC2060D

—

—

1 1 1 1 1

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-41

1.1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

1

Breaker Catalog Numbers, continued Single-Pole

Two-Pole

Two-Pole

1

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C

120/240 Vac

120/240 Vac

240 Vac

240 Vac

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

1

QUICKLAG Type: HQP Non-Automatic Switches

1

50

HQP1050N

—

HQP2050N

HQP3050N

60

HQP1060N

—

HQP2060N

HQP3060N

1

100

HQP1100N

—

HQP2100N

HQP3100N

1

50

BAB1050N

—

BAB2050N

BAB3050N

60

BAB1060N

—

BAB2060N

BAB3060N

1

100

BAB1100N

—

BAB2100N

BAB3100N

1

50

QC1050N

—

QC2050N

QC3050N

1

60

QC1060N

—

QC2060N

QC3060N

100

QC1100N

—

QC2100N

QC3100N

1

QUICKLAG Type: QCD Non-Automatic Switches

1

60

—

—

QCD2060NA

—

100

—

—

—

—

Three-Pole

QUICKLAG Type: BA Non-Automatic Switches

QUICKLAG Type: QC Non-Automatic Switches

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V4-T1-42

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

1.1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

Accessories 1

1 1

Handle Locks: Non-Padlockable 2 QL1NPL

Description

Order in Multiples of

Catalog Number

QUICKLAG Type P, B, C—single-pole

10

QL1NPL

1 1 1 1

QL23NPL

QUICKLAG Type P, B, C—two- and three-pole

10

1

QL23NPL

1 1 1 1 1

Handle Locks: Padlockable 2 QL1PL

Description

Order in Multiples of

Catalog Number

QUICKLAG Type P, B, C—single-pole

10

QL1PL

1 1 1 1 1

QL123PL

QUICKLAG Type P, B and ground fault—single-, two- and three-pole

10

1

QL123PL

1 1 1 QC123PL

QUICKLAG Type C —single-, two- and three-pole

10

1

QC123PL

1 1 1 QUICKLAG Type P, B—single-, two- and three-pole (off only)

10

QL123PLOFF

QUICKLAG Type C—single-, two- and three-pole (off only)

10

QC123PLOFF

1 1

Notes 1 See Page V4-T1-27 for QCR and QCF accessories. 2 Can lock in ON or OFF position.

1 1 1

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-43

1.1

Industrial Circuit Breakers

Mounting Hardware

1 1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors

Description

Order in Multiples of

Catalog Number

QCFCLIP

QUICKLAG Type C face mounting clip

24

QCFCLIP

QC1FP

QUICKLAG Type C face mounting plate—single-pole

10

QC1FP

QC2FP

QUICKLAG Type C face mounting plate—two-pole

10

QC2FP

QC3FP

QUICKLAG Type C face mounting plate—three-pole

10

QC3FP

QUICKLAG Type C face mounting plate and lock-off (off only)—two-pole 1

10

QC2FPLOFF

QUICKLAG Type C face mounting plate and lock-off (off only)—three-pole

10

QC3FPLOFF

QCBCLIP

QUICKLAG Type C base mounting clamp

10

QCBCLIP

QC6BP

QUICKLAG Type mounting plate—six poles total

10

QC6BP

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Note 1 Suitable for ground fault breakers.

1 1 V4-T1-44

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

1.1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

Mounting Hardware, continued Description

QCDJ4

Order in Multiples of

Catalog Number

QUICKLAG Type C base mounting plate—six poles total—heavy-duty screw-secured

10

QC6BPS

QUICKLAG Type C (QCD) 2-way jumper unit with cover

10

QCDJ2

QUICKLAG Type C (QCD) 4-way jumper unit with cover

10

QCDJ4

1 1 1 1 1

QCDINADAPT

1

QUICKLAG Type C (QCD) 6-way jumper unit with cover

10

QCDJ6

QUICKLAG Type C (QCD) 2-way jumper unit, no cover

10

QCDJ2T

QUICKLAG Type C (QCD) 4-way jumper unit, no cover

10

QCDJ4T

QUICKLAG Type C (QCD) 6-way jumper unit, no cover

10

QCDJ6T

QUICKLAG Type QCD Finger protection attachment

10

QCDFP

QUICKLAG Type QCD 4-prong Quick Connect

10

QCDQUICK

QUICKLAG Type C DIN rail adapter

6

QCDINADAPT

1 1 1 1 1

QCDRING

QUICKLAG Type QCD ring lug attachment

10

1

QCDRING

1 1 1 1

Dummy Breakers Description

Order in Multiples of

Catalog Number

QUICKLAG Type P

1

HQP1000

QUICKLAG Type B

1

BAB1000

QUICKLAG Type C

1

QC1000

QUICKLAG Type C clear choice breaker

4

QC30SAMPLE

1 1 1 1

QCRSPACER

Miscellaneous Description

Order in Multiples of

Catalog Number

QUICKLAG Type C Spacer

1

QCRSPACER

1 1 1 1 1

QL1HT

Handle Tie Description

Order in Multiples of

Catalog Number

QUICKLAG handle tie—single-pole

100

QL1HT

1 1 1 1 1

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-45

1.1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

1

Factory Modifications and Installed Terminals

1

Factory Modifications 1 Type of Modification

Breaker Type

Catalog Suffix

Shunt trip (requires one extra pole space on right side) 120, 208, 240 Vac Draws 2.6A at 120V, draws 11A at 24 Vdc

QUICKLAG Types P, B and C

S

Shunt trip (requires one extra pole space on right side) 24, 48 Vac/dc Draws 2.6A at 120V, draws 11A at 24 Vdc

QUICKLAG Types P, B and C

S1

Special calibration (50°C) (no UL)

QUICKLAG Types P, B and C

V

Shock testing

QUICKLAG Types P, B and C

L

1

Freeze testing

QUICKLAG Types P, B and C

Y

Moisture-fungus treatment

QUICKLAG Types P, B, C and ground fault

F

1

Marine duty

QUICKLAG Types P, B, C

H08

1

Naval duty

QUICKLAG Types P, B, C

H09

400 Hz calibration

QUICKLAG Types P, B, C

G

Specific DC ratings (breaker marked with a max. Vdc rating)

QUICKLAG Types P, B, C

Q thru Q9 2

1 1 1 1

1 1

Spare Terminal Hardware Screws (Lugs not Included) Terminal Type

Description

Order in Multiples of

Catalog Number

1

QUICKLAG terminal screw

10

QLLDTSA

1

2

QUICKLAG terminal screw

10

QLLDTSB

1

3

QUICKLAG terminal screw

10

QLLDTSC

5

QUICKLAG binding head terminal screw and clamp

10

QLBHTSE

6 and 7

QUICKLAG terminal screw

10

QLLNTSFG

1

1 1

Notes 1 Contact Eaton for factory modifications available for QCR and QCF breakers. 2 Q = 32 Vdc; Q1 = 32–40 Vdc; Q2 = 37.5 Vdc; Q3 = 45 Vdc; Q4 = 48 Vdc; Q5 = 50 Vdc; Q6 = 62.5 Vdc; Q7 = 75 Vdc (2P); Q8 = 80 Vdc (2P); Q9 = 125 Vdc (QCR 2P); Q10 = 62.5 Vdc (QCR 1P).

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V4-T1-46

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

1.1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

Technical Data and Specifications

1

Factory-Installed Breaker Terminals Breaker Type QUICKLAG Type P HQP, QPHW, QHPX, QHPW

Continuous Ampere Rating

Standard Line Terminal

Standard Load Terminal

Terminal Wire Type Type

Terminal Type

Wire Type

Wire Range (AWG)

Line

10–30

Plug-on female clips that mate with the bus stabs

1

Cu/Al

14–4

N/A

3

2

Cu/Al

14–4

N/A

3

3

Cu/Al

8–1/0

N/A

—

Plug-on female clips that mate with the bus stabs

1 (single-pole)

Cu/Al

14–4

N/A

3

1

Cu/Al

—

N/A

3

1

Cu

14–8

N/A

—

Extended tangs that bolt directly to the bus

1 (single- and two-pole)

Cu/Al

14–4

N/A

3

2 (three-pole)

Cu/Al

14–4

N/A

3

3

Cu/Al

8–1/0

N/A

—

1 (single-pole)

Cu/Al

14–4

N/A

N/A

35–50

Wire Range (AWG)

55–125 10–40

QUICKLAG ground fault QPGFT, QPGFEP, QPHGFT, QPHGFEP

10–40 10–30

QUICKLAG Type B BAB, QBHW, HBAX, HBAW

10–40 35–50 55–125

QUICKLAG ground fault QBGFT, QBGFEP, QBHGFEP, QBHGFT

10–40 10–40

Extended tangs that bolt directly to the bus

10–30 QUICKLAG Type C QC, QCHW, QHCX, QHCW

Optional Terminals Load

1

Cu/Al

14–8

N/A

N/A

1

Cu

14–8

N/A

N/A

1 1 1 1

Cu/Al

TBD

5

Cu/Al

14–10

6, 7

6, 7, 8

6

Cu/Al

TBD

2

Cu/Al

14–4

5, 7

5, 6, 7, 8

7

Cu/Al

TBD

3

Cu/Al

8–1/0

5

5, 7, 8

1

Cu/Al

TBD

1

Cu/Al

14–4

N/A

N/A

60

1

Cu

TBD

1

Cu

14–4

N/A

N/A

QUICKLAG ground fault QCGFT, QCGFEP, QCHGFT, QCHGFEP

10–20

6

Cu/Al

TBD

14–8

Cu/Al

14–4

6, 7

5

25–50

6

Cu/Al

TBD

1

Cu/Al

14–4

5, 7

5

10–30

6

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

10–60

9

Cu/Al

14–4

9

Cu/Al

14–4

See Accessories

70–100

10

Cu

4–1/0

10

Cu

4–1/0

See Accessories

1

1

5

10–55

QUICKLAG QCD

1

25–60 70–100

2

3

1 1

10–20

QUICKLAG QCR, QCF

1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

5

1 1

Steel Box Lug

6

Steel Box Lug

7

Steel Box Lug

8

1

Steel Ring Type

9

1

10

1 4-Prong Quick Connect Aluminum Box Lug

Aluminum Box Lug

QCD Terminal Assembly 10–60A

QCD Terminal Assembly 70–100A

1 1

Note 1 Clamp on line side only.

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-47

1.1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Industrial Circuit Breakers

Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Shipping Data Miniature Circuit Breaker

Number of Poles

Standard Carton Quantity

Approximate Carton Weight Lbs (kg)

Approximate Standard Carton

QUICKLAG Types B, P, C–all

1

24

9.00 (4.1)

12.50 x 7.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 190.5 x 127.0)

QUICKLAG Types B, P, C–all

2

12

9.00 (4.1)

12.50 x 7.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 190.5 x 127.0)

QUICKLAG Types B, P, C–all

3

8

9.00 (4.1)

12.50 x 7.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 190.5 x 127.0)

QUICKLAG ground fault Type P–all

1

20

11.00 (5.0)

12.50 x 6.50 x 5.00 (317.5 x 165.1 x 127.0)

Types B and C–all

1

20

11.00 (5.0)

12.50 x 7.00 x 5.50 (317.5 x 177.8 x 139.7)

Types P and B–all

2

5

5.00 (2.3)

12.50 x 6.00 x 4.50 (317.5 x 152.4 x 114.3)

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V4-T1-48

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers

1.2

Contents

FAZ-NA Circuit Breakers

Description

Page

FAZ-NA Circuit Breakers Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V4-T1-50 V4-T1-51 V4-T1-55 V4-T1-57 V4-T1-66

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Optimum and Efficient Protection for Every Application

1 1 1

FAZ-NA Circuit Breakers Product Overview

Features

Optimum product quality, tested reliability and safety stand for best protection of personnel, installations and plant. Eaton’s FAZ-NA DIN rail mountable circuit breaker is designed for use in branch service applications.

●

Powerful Offering for Machine and System Builders The FAZ-NA is available with B, C and D characteristics in accordance with UL® 489, CSA® C22.2 No.5; UL 1077, CSA C22.2 No.235 and IEC 60947-2. These devices are CE marked.

Application Description

●

●

●

●

●

Feeder and branch circuit protection for: ●

● ●

●

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Convenience receptacle circuits (internal/external) Motor control circuits Load circuits leaving the equipment (external) HACR internal/external equipment (heating, air conditioning, refrigeration) PLC I/O points Computers Power supplies Control instrumentation Relays UPS Power conditioners

●

●

Complete range of UL 489 listed DIN rail mounted miniature circuit breakers up to 40A current rating Standard ratings of 10 kAIC up to 277/480 Vac Select amperages available at 14 kAIC up to 277/480 Vac and 10 kAIC up to 125 Vdc per pole Current limiting design provides fast short-circuit interruption that reduces the let-through energy, which can damage the circuit Suitable for branch circuit device protection Thermal-magnetic overcurrent protection ● Three levels of shortcircuit protection, categorized by B, C and D curves Trip-free design—breaker can not be defeated by holding the handle in the ON position Captive screws cannot be lost

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

● ●

SWD (switching duty)— suitable for switching fluorescent lighting loads (In ≤ 20A) Fulfill UL 489, CSA C22.2 No.5 and also IEC 60947-2 Standard For use in applications for which UL 1077 or CSA C22.2 No.235 are also allowed Field-installable shunt trip and auxiliary switch subsequent mounting Separate version for ringtongue connection (Type FAZ-RT), terminal screws can be removed (on both sides) Module width of only 17.7 mm (per pole) Contact Position Indicator (red/green) Easy installation on DIN rail Possibility for sealing the toggle in ON or OFF position

1 Device Printing on Front and Side Installation options

1

These branch circuit breakers are available in two terminal configurations: standard box terminals that accept multiple conductors and ring-tongue terminals, ideally suited to demanding requirements of the semi-conductor industry. All breakers mount on standard 35 mm DIN rail. Bus connectors and feeder terminal facilitate mounting and wiring of multiple miniature circuit breaker arrays in control panel assemblies. These circuit breakers can also be reverse feed.

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-49

1.2 1 1 1

FAZ-NA complies with the latest national and international standards.

1 1 1 1

● ●

UL 489 ● Standard for molded case circuit breakers (MCCB) for feeder and branch circuit protection ● Products meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code® (NEC®)

●

CSA C22.2 No.5 ● Standard for molded case circuit breakers (MCCB) for feeder and branch circuit protection (corresponds closely to UL 489 Standard) ● Products meet the requirements of the Canadian Electrical Code (CEC)

1

1

●

●

1

1

UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers

Standards and Certifications

1

1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors

RoHS compliant VDE compliant ABS compliant

Catalog Number Selection

1

FAZ C 6 / 1 NA SP

1

Breaker Family

1

FAZ = FAZ UL circuit breaker

Single Package Trip Characteristics 1 B = 3–5X In C = 5–10X In D = 10–20X In

1 1 1 1 1 1

Terminal Ampere Rating 2 0.5 = 1 = 1.5 = 2 = 3 = 4 = 5 = 6 = 7 = 8 =

0.5A 1A 1.5A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A

10 = 10A 13 = 13A 15 = 15A 16 = 16A 20 = 20A 25 = 25A 30 = 30A 32 = 32A 35 = 32A 40 = 40A

Number of Poles 1 = Single-pole 2 = Two-pole 3 = Three-pole

Notes 1 I = Rated current for instantaneous trip characteristics. n 2 B curve starts at 1 ampere.

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V4-T1-50

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

NA = UL 489 branch circuit with screw terminals RT = UL 489 branch circuit with ring tongue terminals DC = UL 489 branch circuit at 125 Vdc per pole

SP

= Single package for C and D curve single-pole only Blank = Standard packaging

1.2

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers

1

1.45

FAZ-NA B Curve ● UL approved (UL 489) and CSA Certified (CSA C22.2 No.5-02) as branch circuit breakers ● Interrupting capacity: 10 kA UL/CSA; 15 kA IEC 60947-2 ● Current limiting device ● UL file number E235139

1.13

Product Selection  2.55 I : N

1

 Type B: 3 x I : t > 0.1 s N

1

7200

Specified non-tripping current INT = 1.13 x IN for t > 1 h

3600 1200 600

t = 1–60 s (IN < 32A) t = 1–120 s (IN > 32A)

Specified tripping current IT = 1.45 x IN for t < 1 h

300

 Type B: 5 x I : t < 0.1 s N

1

120 1

60

1

30

1

t [sec]

10 5

1

2 1 1

0.5

1

0.2 3

0.1

1

B

2

0.05 0.02

1

0.01 0.005

1

0.002 0.001

1

0.0005 1

2

3

4

5

6 7 8 9 10

15

20

30

40

50

1

I / IN

Single-Pole

FAZ-NA UL 489 Circuit Breakers—10 kAIC, 14 kAIC B Curve (15–25A) Single-Pole 1 Catalog Amperes Number

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Single-Pole

Single-Pole 1 Two-Pole Catalog Amperes Number

B Curve (3–5X In Current Rating)

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

1

FAZ-B1/1-NA

FAZ-B1/2-NA

1.5

FAZ-B1.5/1-NA FAZ-B1.5/2-NA FAZ-B1.5/3-NA

2

FAZ-B2/1-NA

FAZ-B2/2-NA

FAZ-B2/3-NA

3

FAZ-B3/1-NA

FAZ-B3/2-NA

FAZ-B3/3-NA

4

FAZ-B4/1-NA

FAZ-B4/2-NA

FAZ-B4/3-NA

5

FAZ-B5/1-NA

FAZ-B5/2-NA

FAZ-B5/3-NA

6

FAZ-B6/1-NA

FAZ-B6/2-NA

FAZ-B6/3-NA

7

FAZ-B7/1-NA

FAZ-B7/2-NA

FAZ-B7/3-NA

8

FAZ-B8/1-NA

FAZ-B8/2-NA

FAZ-B8/3-NA

10

FAZ-B10/1-NA FAZ-B10/2-NA FAZ-B10/3-NA FAZ-B13/1-NA FAZ-B13/2-NA FAZ-B13/3-NA

15

FAZ-B15/1-NA FAZ-B15/2-NA FAZ-B15/3-NA

16

FAZ-B16/1-NA FAZ-B16/2-NA FAZ-B16/3-NA

20

FAZ-B20/1-NA FAZ-B20/2-NA FAZ-B20/3-NA

25

FAZ-B25/1-NA FAZ-B25/2-NA FAZ-B25/3-NA

30

FAZ-B30/1-NA FAZ-B30/2-NA FAZ-B30/3-NA

32

FAZ-B32/1-NA FAZ-B32/2-NA FAZ-B32/3-NA

35 2

FAZ-B35/1-NA FAZ-B35/2-NA FAZ-B35/3-NA

2

FAZ-B40/1-NA FAZ-B40/2-NA FAZ-B40/3-NA

40

Catalog Number

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

FAZ-B1/2-RT

1

Catalog Number

1 1

1

FAZ-B1/1-RT

1.5

FAZ-B1.5/1-RT FAZ-B1.5/2-RT FAZ-B1.5/3-RT

2

FAZ-B2/1-RT

FAZ-B2/2-RT

FAZ-B2/3-RT

3

FAZ-B3/1-RT

FAZ-B3/2-RT

FAZ-B3/3-RT

4

FAZ-B4/1-RT

FAZ-B4/2-RT

FAZ-B4/3-RT

5

FAZ-B5/1-RT

FAZ-B5/2-RT

FAZ-B5/3-RT

6

FAZ-B6/1-RT

FAZ-B6/2-RT

FAZ-B6/3-RT

7

FAZ-B7/1-RT

FAZ-B7/2-RT

FAZ-B7/3-RT

8

FAZ-B8/1-RT

FAZ-B8/2-RT

FAZ-B8/3-RT

10

FAZ-B10/1-RT

FAZ-B10/2-RT

FAZ-B10/3-RT

13

FAZ-B13/1-RT

FAZ-B13/2-RT

FAZ-B13/3-RT

15

FAZ-B15/1-RT

FAZ-B15/2-RT

FAZ-B15/3-RT

16

FAZ-B16/1-RT

FAZ-B16/2-RT

FAZ-B16/3-RT

20

FAZ-B20/1-RT

FAZ-B20/2-RT

FAZ-B20/3-RT

25

FAZ-B25/1-RT

FAZ-B25/2-RT

FAZ-B25/3-RT

30

FAZ-B30/1-RT

FAZ-B30/2-RT

FAZ-B30/3-RT

32

FAZ-B32/1-RT

FAZ-B32/2-RT

FAZ-B32/3-RT

35 2

FAZ-B35/1-RT

FAZ-B35/2-RT

FAZ-B35/3-RT

40 2

FAZ-B40/1-RT

FAZ-B40/2-RT

FAZ-B40/3-RT

FAZ-B1/3-RT

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Notes 1 Two-piece order. Quantities of two per box. 2 240 Vac rated only.

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

1

Three-Pole

B Curve with Ring-Tongue Terminals (3–5X In Current Rating)

FAZ-B1/3-NA

13

FAZ-RT UL 489 Circuit Breakers with Ring-Tongue Terminals—10 kAIC, 14 kAIC B Curve (15–25A)

1 V4-T1-51

1.2 1 1

FAZ-NA C Curve ● UL approved (UL 489) and CSA Certified (CSA C22.2 No.5-02) as branch circuit breakers ● Interrupting capacity: 10 kA UL/CSA; 15 kA IEC 60947-2 ● Current limiting device ● UL file number E235139

1.45

UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers

1.13

1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors

7200

Specified non-tripping current INT = 1.13 x IN for t > 1 h

3600 1200

300 120 60 30

1 t [sec]

10

1

5 2 1

1

0.5 0.2

1

2

0.1 1

0.05

1

0.02

0.005 0.002 0.001

1

0.0005 1

1 Single-Pole

FAZ-NA UL 489 Circuit Breakers—10 kAIC, 14 kAIC C Curve (15–25A) Single-Pole 1

1

Catalog Amperes Number

1

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Single-Pole

3

4

5

6 7 8 9 10

15

20

30

40

50

FAZ-C0.5/1-NA-SP FAZ-C0.5/2-NA FAZ-C0.5/3-NA

1

FAZ-C1/1-NA-SP

1.5

FAZ-C1.5/1-NA-SP FAZ-C1.5/2-NA FAZ-C1.5/3-NA

2

FAZ-C2/1-NA-SP

FAZ-C2/2-NA

FAZ-C2/3-NA

3

FAZ-C3/1-NA-SP

FAZ-C3/2-NA

FAZ-C3/3-NA

4

FAZ-C4/1-NA-SP

FAZ-C4/2-NA

FAZ-C4/3-NA

5

FAZ-C5/1-NA-SP

FAZ-C5/2-NA

FAZ-C5/3-NA

6

FAZ-C6/1-NA-SP

FAZ-C6/2-NA

FAZ-C6/3-NA

7

FAZ-C7/1-NA-SP

FAZ-C7/2-NA

FAZ-C7/3-NA

8

FAZ-C8/1-NA-SP

FAZ-C8/2-NA

FAZ-C8/3-NA

10

FAZ-C10/1-NA-SP FAZ-C10/2-NA FAZ-C10/3-NA

13

FAZ-C13/1-NA-SP FAZ-C13/2-NA FAZ-C13/3-NA

15

FAZ-C15/1-NA-SP FAZ-C15/2-NA FAZ-C15/3-NA

1

16

FAZ-C16/1-NA-SP FAZ-C16/2-NA FAZ-C16/3-NA

1

20

FAZ-C20/1-NA-SP FAZ-C20/2-NA FAZ-C20/3-NA

25

FAZ-C25/1-NA-SP FAZ-C25/2-NA FAZ-C25/3-NA

1

30

FAZ-C30/1-NA-SP FAZ-C30/2-NA FAZ-C30/3-NA

32

FAZ-C32/1-NA-SP FAZ-C32/2-NA FAZ-C32/3-NA

1

35 2

FAZ-C35/1-NA-SP FAZ-C35/2-NA FAZ-C35/3-NA

40 2

FAZ-C40/1-NA-SP FAZ-C40/2-NA FAZ-C40/3-NA

1 Two-Pole

1 1 1 Three-Pole

1

1

FAZ-C1/2-NA

FAZ-RT UL 489 Circuit Breakers with Ring-Tongue Terminals—10 kAIC, 14 kAIC C Curve (15–25A) Single-Pole 1 Catalog Amperes Number

C Curve (5–10X In Current Rating) 0.5

1

2

I / IN

1

1

C

0.01

1

1

 Type C: 10 x I : t < 0.1 s N

Specified tripping current IT = 1.45 x IN for t < 1 h

600

1

 Type C: 5 x I : t > 0.1 s N

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

C Curve with Ring-Tongue Terminals (5–10X In Current Rating)

FAZ-C1/3-NA Two-Pole

Three-Pole

1

0.5

FAZ-C0.5/1-RT-SP FAZ-C0.5/2-RT FAZ-C0.5/3-RT

1

FAZ-C1/1-RT-SP

1.5

FAZ-C1.5/1-RT-SP FAZ-C1.5/2-RT FAZ-C1.5/3-RT

2

FAZ-C2/1-RT-SP

FAZ-C2/2-RT

FAZ-C2/3-RT

3

FAZ-C3/1-RT-SP

FAZ-C3/2-RT

FAZ-C3/3-RT

4

FAZ-C4/1-RT-SP

FAZ-C4/2-RT

FAZ-C4/3-RT

5

FAZ-C5/1-RT-SP

FAZ-C5/2-RT

FAZ-C5/3-RT

6

FAZ-C6/1-RT-SP

FAZ-C6/2-RT

FAZ-C6/3-RT

7

FAZ-C7/1-RT-SP

FAZ-C7/2-RT

FAZ-C7/3-RT

8

FAZ-C8/1-RT-SP

FAZ-C8/2-RT

FAZ-C8/3-RT

10

FAZ-C10/1-RT-SP FAZ-C10/2-RT FAZ-C10/3-RT

13

FAZ-C13/1-RT-SP FAZ-C13/2-RT FAZ-C13/3-RT

15

FAZ-C15/1-RT-SP FAZ-C15/2-RT FAZ-C15/3-RT

16

FAZ-C16/1-RT-SP FAZ-C16/2-RT FAZ-C16/3-RT

20

FAZ-C20/1-RT-SP FAZ-C20/2-RT FAZ-C20/3-RT

25

FAZ-C25/1-RT-SP FAZ-C25/2-RT FAZ-C25/3-RT

30

FAZ-C30/1-RT-SP FAZ-C30/2-RT FAZ-C30/3-RT

FAZ-C1/2-RT

FAZ-C1/3-RT

32

FAZ-C32/1-RT-SP FAZ-C32/2-RT FAZ-C32/3-RT

35 2

FAZ-C35/1-RT-SP FAZ-C35/2-RT FAZ-C35/3-RT

40 2

FAZ-C40/1-RT-SP FAZ-C40/2-RT FAZ-C40/3-RT

Notes 1 Option for single packaging on single-pole C and D curves only; add suffix SP when ordering. 2 240 Vac rated only.

1 V4-T1-52

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

1.2

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors

1

1.45

FAZ-NA D Curve ● UL approved (UL 489) and CSA Certified (CSA C22.2 No.5-02) as branch circuit breakers ● Interrupting capacity: 10 kA UL/CSA; 15 kA IEC 60947-2 ● Current limiting device ● UL file number E235139

1.13

UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers

7200

 2.55 I : N

Specified non-tripping current INT = 1.13 x IN for t > 1 h

3600 1200

Specified tripping current IT = 1.45 x IN for t < 1 h

600 300

1

t = 1–60 s (IN < 32A) t = 1–120 s (IN > 32A)

 Type D: 10 x I : t > 0.1 s N

1

 Type D: 20 x I : t < 0.1 s N

1

120 1

60 30

1

t [sec]

10 5

1

2 1

1

1

0.5 0.2

1

3

0.1

2

0.05

D

1

0.02 0.01 0.005

1

0.002 0.001

1

0.0005 1

2

3

4

5

6 7 8 9 10

15

20

30

40

50

1

I / IN

Single-Pole

FAZ-NA UL 489 Circuit Breakers—10 kAIC, 14 kAIC D Curve (13–20A) Single-Pole 1 Catalog Amperes Number

Two-Pole Catalog Number

Single-Pole

Three-Pole

Single-Pole

Catalog Number

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

FAZ-D0.5/1-NA-SP FAZ-D0.5/2-NA FAZ-D0.5/3-NA

1

FAZ-D1/1-NA-SP

1.5

FAZ-D1.5/1-NA-SP FAZ-D1.5/2-NA FAZ-D1.5/3-NA

2

FAZ-D2/1-NA-SP

FAZ-D2/2-NA FAZ-D2/3-NA

3

FAZ-D3/1-NA-SP

FAZ-D3/2-NA FAZ-D3/3-NA

4

FAZ-D4/1-NA-SP

FAZ-D4/2-NA FAZ-D4/3-NA

5

FAZ-D5/1-NA-SP

FAZ-D5/2-NA FAZ-D5/3-NA

6

FAZ-D6/1-NA-SP

FAZ-D6/2-NA FAZ-D6/3-NA

7

FAZ-D7/1-NA-SP

FAZ-D7/2-NA FAZ-D7/3-NA

8

FAZ-D8/1-NA-SP

FAZ-D8/2-NA FAZ-D8/3-NA

10

FAZ-D10/1-NA-SP FAZ-D10/2-NA FAZ-D10/3-NA

13

FAZ-D13/1-NA-SP FAZ-D13/2-NA FAZ-D13/3-NA

15

FAZ-D15/1-NA-SP FAZ-D15/2-NA FAZ-D15/3-NA

16

FAZ-D16/1-NA-SP FAZ-D16/2-NA FAZ-D16/3-NA

20

FAZ-D20/1-NA-SP FAZ-D20/2-NA FAZ-D20/3-NA

25

FAZ-D25/1-NA-SP FAZ-D25/2-NA FAZ-D25/3-NA

30

FAZ-D30/1-NA-SP FAZ-D30/2-NA FAZ-D30/3-NA

32

FAZ-D32/1-NA-SP FAZ-D32/2-NA FAZ-D32/3-NA

35 2

FAZ-D35/1-NA-SP FAZ-D35/2-NA FAZ-D35/3-NA

40 2

FAZ-D40/1-NA-SP FAZ-D40/2-NA FAZ-D40/3-NA

1

Catalog Amperes Number

D Curve (10–20X In Current Rating) 0.5

FAZ-RT UL 489 Circuit Breakers with Ring-Tongue Terminals—10 kAIC, 14 kAIC D Curve (13–20A) Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

D Curve with Ring-Tongue Terminals (10–20X In Current Rating)

FAZ-D1/2-NA FAZ-D1/3-NA Two-Pole

Three-Pole

0.5

FAZ-D0.5/1-RT-SP FAZ-D0.5/2-RT FAZ-D0.5/3-RT

1

FAZ-D1/1-RT-SP

1.5

FAZ-D1.5/1-RT-SP FAZ-D1.5/2-RT FAZ-D1.5/3-RT

2

FAZ-D2/1-RT-SP

FAZ-D2/2-RT

FAZ-D2/3-RT

3

FAZ-D3/1-RT-SP

FAZ-D3/2-RT

FAZ-D3/3-RT

4

FAZ-D4/1-RT-SP

FAZ-D4/2-RT

FAZ-D4/3-RT

5

FAZ-D5/1-RT-SP

FAZ-D5/2-RT

FAZ-D5/3-RT

6

FAZ-D6/1-RT-SP

FAZ-D6/2-RT

FAZ-D6/3-RT

7

FAZ-D7/1-RT-SP

FAZ-D7/2-RT

FAZ-D7/3-RT

8

FAZ-D8/1-RT-SP

FAZ-D8/2-RT

FAZ-D8/3-RT

10

FAZ-D10/1-RT-SP FAZ-D10/2-RT FAZ-D10/3-RT

13

FAZ-D13/1-RT-SP FAZ-D13/2-RT FAZ-D13/3-RT

15

FAZ-D15/1-RT-SP FAZ-D15/2-RT FAZ-D15/3-RT

16

FAZ-D16/1-RT-SP FAZ-D16/2-RT FAZ-D16/3-RT

20

FAZ-D20/1-RT-SP FAZ-D20/2-RT FAZ-D20/3-RT

25

FAZ-D25/1-RT-SP FAZ-D25/2-RT FAZ-D25/3-RT

30

FAZ-D30/1-RT-SP FAZ-D30/2-RT FAZ-D30/3-RT

FAZ-D1/2-RT

FAZ-D1/3-RT

32

FAZ-D32/1-RT-SP FAZ-D32/2-RT FAZ-D32/3-RT

35 2

FAZ-D35/1-RT-SP FAZ-D35/2-RT FAZ-D35/3-RT

40 2

FAZ-D40/1-RT-SP FAZ-C40/2-RT

FAZ-D40/3-RT

Notes 1 Option for single packaging on single-pole C and D curves only; add suffix SP when ordering. 2 240 Vac rated only.

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-53

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

1.2 1

●

●

1

●

1 1

UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers

FAZ-NA-DC C Curve

1 1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors

● ●

●

UL approved (UL 489) and CSA Certified (CSA C22.2 No.5-02) as Branch Circuit Breakers Interrupting capacity: 10 kA at 125 Vdc UL/CSA, 10 kA at 250 Vdc 125 Vdc for one-pole, 250 Vdc for two-pole in series Current limiting device Polarity (+/–) sensitive and not for use on photovoltaic string application UL file number E235139

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Single-Pole

1

FAZ-NA-DC UL 489 Circuit Breakers— 10 kAIC at 125 Vdc Per Pole Single-Pole 1 Catalog Amperes Number

1

Two-Pole Catalog Number

C Curve (5–10X In Current Rating)

1

2

FAZ-C2/1-NA-DC-SP

FAZ-C2/2-NA-DC

3

FAZ-C3/1-NA-DC-SP

FAZ-C3/2-NA-DC

4

FAZ-C4/1-NA-DC-SP

FAZ-C4/2-NA-DC

1

5

FAZ-C5/1-NA-DC-SP

FAZ-C5/2-NA-DC

1

6

FAZ-C6/1-NA-DC-SP

FAZ-C6/2-NA-DC

7

FAZ-C7/1-NA-DC-SP

FAZ-C7/2-NA-DC

1

8

FAZ-C8/1-NA-DC-SP

FAZ-C8/2-NA-DC

10

FAZ-C10/1-NA-DC-SP

FAZ-C10/2-NA-DC

1

13

FAZ-C13/1-NA-DC-SP

FAZ-C13/2-NA-DC

15

FAZ-C15/1-NA-DC-SP

FAZ-C15/2-NA-DC

1

16

FAZ-C16/1-NA-DC-SP

FAZ-C16/2-NA-DC

1

20

FAZ-C20/1-NA-DC-SP

FAZ-C20/2-NA-DC

25

FAZ-C25/1-NA-DC-SP

FAZ-C25/2-NA-DC

1

30

FAZ-C30/1-NA-DC-SP

FAZ-C30/2-NA-DC

32

FAZ-C32/1-NA-DC-SP

FAZ-C32/2-NA-DC

1

35

FAZ-C35/1-NA-DC-SP

FAZ-C35/2-NA-DC

40

FAZ-C40/1-NA-DC-SP

FAZ-C40/2-NA-DC

1

Two-Pole

1

Note 1 Option for single packaging on single-pole C curves only; add suffix SP when ordering.

1 1 V4-T1-54

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers

1.2

Accessories

Contact

1 FAZ-NA UL 489 Breakers

FAZ-NA UL 489 Breakers, continued

Description

Catalog Number

Description

Two-pole contact or auxiliary contact/trip indicating contact

Z-NHK 1

Busbar

Catalog Number

Busbar—single-pole, 6 terminals 2345 Z-SV/UL-16/1P-1TE/6 Busbar—single-pole, 12 terminals 2345 Z-SV/UL-16/1P-1TE/12 Busbar—single-pole, 18 terminals 2345 Z-SV/UL-16/1P-1TE/18 Busbar—two-pole, 6 terminals 2345

Z-SV/UL-16/2P-2TE/12

Busbar—two-pole, 18 terminals 2345

Z-SV/UL-16/2P-2TE/18

Busbar—three-pole, 6 terminals 2345

Z-SV/UL-16/3P-3TE/6

Busbar—two-pole, 12 terminals

Auxiliary Contact

Auxiliary contact

Z-SV/UL-16/2P-2TE/6

2345

Busbar—three-pole, 12 terminals 2345 Z-SV/UL-16/3P-3TE/12

Z-IHK-NA

Busbar—three-pole, 18 terminals 2345 Z-SV/UL-16/3P-3TE/18 Busbar Shroud

Three-pole busbar shroud

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ZV-BS-UL

1 1 Extension Terminal Shunt Trip

Shunt trip 110–415 Vac

FAZ-XAA-NA110-415VAC

Shunt trip 12–110 Vac

FAZ-XAA-NA12-110VAC

Extension terminal— 35 mm2 (10–1/0 AWG)

1

Z-EK/35/UL

1 1 1

Padlock Hasp

Padlock hasp

1

Z-IS/SPE-1TE Bus Connector

Bus connector—conductors up to 50 mm2 (~1/0 AWG)

1

Z-EB/50/UL

1 Lockoff Device

UL lockoff device

FAZPLOFF

Notes 1 Voltage of FAZ-NA circuit breaker is limited to 300V with this auxiliary contact installed. 2 Do not cut commoning link. 3 A maximum of three commoning links may be used in conjunction. Each breaker connected to the commoning link must have the same number of poles for proper use. 4 Not for use with ring-tongue circuit breakers. 5 Bus may be center fed for high current capacity.

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-55

1.2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers

Tripping Signal Switch Z-NHK, Z-IHK-NA ● Design according to IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 62019 ● Field installable ● The specified minimum voltages are per contact—take into account particularly in case of series connection ● Self-cleaning contacts ● Contact material and design particularly suitable for extra low voltage ● Z-NHK: the function of one of the two change-over contacts can be switched from “auxiliary switch” to “tripping signal switch” ● Tripping signal contact transmits message of electric tripping, not mechanical switch-off ● Test key for contact function “electrical tripping” ● Z-IHK-NA: will allow for > 480Y/277 Vac rating

1

Connection Diagram Z-IHK-NA

Z-NHK 4.14/4.12

13

4.11

14 22 1.11 Same Polarity

1.14 1.12

Busbar Connection Example

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V4-T1-56

21

4.12/4.14

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers

1.2

Technical Data and Specifications Trip Curve Chart Eaton FAZ-NA branch circuit breakers are available with “B,” “C” and “D” tripping characteristics. B-curve devices are suitable for applications where low levels of inrush current are expected. C-curve devices are suitable for applications where medium levels of inrush current are expected. Applications include small transformers, lighting, pilot devices, control circuits and coils. C-curve devices provide a medium magnetic trip point.

1 Tripping Characteristics

1

D-curve devices are suitable for applications where high levels of inrush current are expected. The high magnetic trip point prevents nuisance tripping in high inductive applications such as motors, transformers and power supplies.

1 1 1 1

Eaton FAZ-NA devices are current limiting, which means they interrupt fault currents within one half cycle of the fault. Current limiting devices offer superior protection by reducing peak let-through current and energy.

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-57

1.2 1 1

Connection Diagrams

UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers

Miniature Circuit Breakers FAZ-NA Technical Data Description

Single-Pole

Rated voltage FAZ-NA UL/CSA

1 1 1 Two-Pole

Specification

Electrical Design according to

1

1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors

UL 489, CSA C22.2 No.5, IEC 60947-2 10 kAIC at 277/480V from 0.5A to 32A 14 kAIC at select amperages B and C Curves (15–25A), D Curve (13–20A)

UL/CSA

10 kAIC at 240 Vac for 35A and 40A

UL/CSA

10 kAIC at 48 Vdc per pole

IEC 947-2

15 kAIC at 240/415 Vac

Rated voltage FAZ-NA-DC UL/CSA

10 kAIC at 125 Vdc per pole (two poles maximum) 10 kAIC at 250 Vdc with two poles connected in series

1

Rated frequency

1

Characteristic

B, C, D

Endurance

≥ 20,000 operations

1

Line voltage connection

Suitable for reverse feed

1

Frame size

45 mm

Device height

105 mm

Device width

17.7 mm per pole

Terminal protection

Finger and hand touch safe according to BGV A3, OVE-EN 6

1

50/60 Hz

Mechanical

Three-Pole

1 1 1 1 1

Mounting

Quick fastening with two lock-in positions on IEC/EN 60715

Upper and lower terminals

Open mouth/lift terminals

Terminal capacity

One wire: AWG 18–6 Two wires: AWG 18–10

Terminal fastening torque

AWG 18–21: 21 lb-in AWG 10–8: 25 lb-in AWG 6: 36 lb-in

Mounting

Independent of position

Calibration temperature UL 489, CSA C22.2 No.5

1

IEC 60947-2

40°C 30°C

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V4-T1-58

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

1.2

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers

Power Loss at ln Characteristic B

Characteristic C

1

Characteristic D

Single-Pole

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Single-Pole

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Single-Pole

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

In [A]

P [W]

P [W]

P [W]

P [W]

P [W]

P [W]

P [W]

P [W]

P [W]

0.5

—

—

—

1.6

3.2

4.7

1.6

3.2

4.8

1.0

1.1

2.2

3.4

1.1

2.2

3.4

0.8

1.5

2.3

1.5

2.2

4.4

6.6

1.3

2.6

3.9

1.0

2.1

3.1

2.0

1.4

2.8

4.3

1.4

2.8

4.3

1.0

2.1

3.1

3.0

2.1

4.2

6.4

1.2

2.4

3.6

1.2

2.4

3.6

4.0

1.4

2.9

4.3

1.4

2.9

4.3

1.4

2.9

4.3

5.0

1.8

3.7

5.5

1.9

3.7

5.6

1.5

2.9

4.4

6.0

1.7

3.5

5.2

1.2

2.3

3.5

1.2

2.3

3.5

7.0

2.0

4.0

6.0

1.4

2.8

4.3

1.4

2.8

4.3

8.0

2.0

3.9

5.9

1.4

2.8

4.2

1.2

2.4

3.7

10.0

1.8

3.6

5.3

1.8

3.6

5.3

1.5

3.0

4.5

13.0

2.4

4.7

7.1

2.4

4.7

7.1

2.0

4.1

6.1

15.0

1.9

3.8

5.6

1.9

3.8

5.6

1.5

3.1

4.6

16.0

2.1

4.3

6.4

2.1

4.3

6.4

1.7

3.5

5.2

20.0

2.9

5.8

8.7

2.9

5.8

8.7

1.8

3.7

5.5

25.0

3.1

6.2

9.3

3.1

6.2

9.3

2.6

5.1

7.7

30.0

3.0

6.0

9.0

3.0

6.0

9.0

2.7

5.4

8.1

32.0

3.4

6.8

10.2

3.4

6.8

10.2

3.1

6.2

9.3

35.0

4.0

8.1

12.1

3.7

7.4

11.0

3.8

7.6

11.3

40.0

4.0

8.1

12.1

4.0

8.1

12.1

3.9

7.8

11.6

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-59

1.2 1 1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers

Let-Through Energy Characteristic B (1–32A), 277V

Characteristic B (35–40A), 240V

Characteristic C (0.5–32A), 277V

Characteristic C (40A), 240V

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V4-T1-60

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers

Characteristic D (0.5–32A), 277V

1.2

Characteristic D (40A), 240V

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-61

1.2 1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers

Influence of Ambient Temperature T on Load Carrying Capacity Device Market Current Rating In (A) at 40°C

15°C

20°C

25°C

30°C

40°C

50°C

55°C

60°C

1

0.5

0.6

0.5

0.5

0.5

0.5

0.5

0.5

0.5

1.0

1.1

1.1

1.1

1.0

1.0

1.0

0.9

0.9

1

1.5

1.7

1.6

1.6

1.6

1.5

1.4

1.4

1.4

1

2.0

2.2

2.2

2.1

2.1

2.0

1.9

1.9

1.8

3.0

3.3

3.2

3.2

3.1

3.0

2.9

2.9

2.8

1

4.0

4.4

4.3

4.2

4.2

4.0

3.8

3.8

3.7

5.0

5.5

5.4

5.3

5.2

5.0

4.8

4.7

4.6

1

6.0

6.6

6.5

6.4

6.2

6.0

5.8

5.6

5.5

7.0

7.7

7.6

7.4

7.3

7.0

6.7

6.6

6.4

8.0

8.8

8.6

8.5

8.3

8.0

7.7

7.5

7.4

1

10.0

11.0

10.8

10.6

10.4

10.0

9.6

9.4

9.2

13.0

14.3

14.0

13.8

13.5

13.0

12.5

12.5

12.0

1

15.0

16.5

16.2

15.9

15.6

15.0

14.4

14.1

13.8

16.0

17.6

17.3

17.0

16.6

16.0

15.4

15.0

14.7

1

20.0

22.0

21.6

21.2

20.8

20.0

19.2

18.8

18.4

1

25.0

27.5

27.0

26.5

26.0

25.0

24.0

23.3

23.0

30.0

33.0

32.4

31.8

31.2

30.0

28.8

28.2

27.6

32.0

35.2

34.6

33.9

33.3

32.0

30.7

30.1

29.4

40.0

44.0

43.2

42.4

41.6

40.0

38.4

37.6

36.8

1

1

1

In (A) at Higher Ambient Temperature

1

Load Carrying Capacity of Adjoining Miniature Circuit Breakers

1

1.00

1 1 1

Load Factor KT [I/IN]

1

Rated Diversity Factor

1

1

0.90

0.80

0.70 1

1

2

3

4

5

6

Number of Circuit Breakers

1 1

Ambient Temperature T [°C] Maximum Load IL at ambient temperature T: IL (T) = IN KT(T)

1 1 1 1 1 1 V4-T1-62

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

7

8

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers

Z-NHK

1.2

Contact and Auxiliary Contact Description

Z-NHK

Z-IHK-NA

2CO

1NO + 1NC

1 1

Electrical Contact function

Z-IHK-NA

Rated voltage

230V

250V

Frequency

50/60 Hz

50/60 Hz

Rated current

2A

6A

1 1

Rated thermal current Ith

2A

6A

Utilization category AC13 Rated operational current Ie

1

3A/250 Vac

3A/250 Vac

Utilization category AC15 Rated operational current Ie

1

2A/250 Vac

2A/250 Vac

Utilization category DC12 Rated operational current Ie

1

0.5A/110 Vdc

0.5A/110 Vdc 0.25A/220 Vdc

1

Rated insulation voltage UI

250 Vac

250 Vac

Minimum operational voltage per contact Umin

5 Vdc

5 Vdc

1

Minimum operational current Imin

10 mA DC

10 mA AC/DC

Rated peak withstand voltage Uimp (1.2/50μ)

2.5 kV

4 kV

Conditional short-circuit current Ik with backup fuse 6A

1 kA

1 kA

Max. backup fuse, overload and short circuit

6A gL

—

1 1 1

Mechanical Tripping indicator “electrical tripping”

Blue/white

—

Frame size

45 mm

45 mm

Device height

80 mm

80 mm

Device width

8.8 mm (0.5MU)

8.8 mm (0.5MU)

Mounting

Onto switching device

—

1 1 1 1

Degree of protection, built-in

IP40

IP40

Terminal protection

Finger and hand touch safe According to BGV A3, ÖVE-EN 6

Finger and hand touch safe According to BGV A3, ÖVE-EN 6

1

Terminals

Lift terminals

Lift terminals

Terminal capacity

20–14 AWG

0.5–2.5 mm2

1

Terminal screws

M3 (Posidrive Z0)

M3 (Posidrive Z0)

Fastening torque of terminal screws

7 lb-in

Max. 1.2 Nm

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-63

1.2 1 1 1 1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers

Shunt trip release FAZ-XAA-NA ● Remote release for subsequent mounting onto FAZ-NA/RT ● Additional installation of standard auxiliary switch is possible ● Position indicator red–green Connection Diagram 1

Shunt Trip Release FAZ-XAA-NA Description

FAZ-XAA-NA12-110VAC

FAZ-XAA-NA110-415VAC

Can be mounted onto

FAZ-NA / FAZ-NA-DC / FAZ-RT

FAZ-NA / FAZ-NA-DC / FAZ-RT

Operational voltage range

12–110 Vac 12–60 Vdc

110–415 Vac 110–230 Vdc

Frequency

50/60 Hz

50/60 Hz

Electrical

1 1

2

1 1

Mechanical Frame size

45 mm

45 mm

1

Device height

105 mm

105 mm

Device width

17.5 mm

17.5 mm

1

Mounting

Quick fastening with two lock-in positions on EN 50022

1

Terminal protection

Degree of protection, built-in IP40

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Connection Diagrams Three-Pole Busbar

Open mouthed/lift

Open mouthed/lift

Terminal capacity One and two wires

18–10 AWG

18–10 AWG

Busbar Block UL 489 (Pin) Description

UL 489

IEC/EN 60947-2

Rated operational voltage

480/277 Vac 96 Vdc

—

Rated frequency

50/60 Hz

—

Rated voltage

480 Vac

690 Vac

Electrical

1 Two-Pole Busbar

1 1 1

Terminals

Busbar block UL 489 (pin) ● Tested according to UL 489 ● Do not cut ● Extension terminal 35 mm2 Z-EK/35/UL for copper conductors ● Incoming terminal 50 mm2 Z-EB/50/UL ● For covering of not used pins, use busbar tag shrouds ZV-BS-UL

1 1

IP40

Finger and hand touch safe according to BGV A3, ÖVE-EN 6

Single-Pole Busbar

1 1

Overvoltage category

—

III

Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp

—

9.5 kV

Rated current

80A at 40°C

80A at 30°C

Rated conditional short-circuit current AC with 350A gG

—

15 kA

Short-circuit current

10 kA

—

Busbar cross section

—

16 mm2 Cu

Flame class according to UL 94

V0

—

Mechanical

Pollution degree

—

2

1

Comparative tracking index

—

CTI 600

Minimum clearance (internal/external)

—

> 9.5/25.4 mm

1

Minimum creepage distance (internal/external)

—

> 12.7/50.8 mm

Resistance to climatic conditions

—

According to DIN/EN 60068

1 1 V4-T1-64

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

1.2

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers

Application Guidelines

1

Example of UL 489 and UL 1077 Application

1 1

UL 489 Breaker

1 1 1

UL 489 Branch

UL 1077

Internal Receptacle

1

External Receptacle

1 1

Electronics

1

UL 489 Branch

UL 1077 Other Sensitive Devices

External Motor

1

M

1

UL 489 Branch

1

UL 489 Branch

UL 1077

HACR

External Motor

1

M

1 1

Motor Controller

1 1 1

Example of UL 489 and UL 1077 Application

1

UL 489 circuit breakers

1

Used for branch circuit protection, internal/external receptacles, external motors and HACR equipment (heating, air conditioning and refrigeration).

1

UL 1077 supplementary protectors

1

Used for overcurrent protection within appliances or electrical equipment, where branch circuit protection is already provided or not required.

1

Note: UL 489 devices can be used in place of UL 1077; UL 1077 devices cannot be used in place of UL 489.

1 1 1 1 1 1

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-65

1.2 1 1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers

Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Lockout Attachment— Z-IS/SPE-1TE

Miniature Circuit Breakers

1

Single-Pole

Two-Pole

UL Lockoff Device— FAZPLOFF

Three-Pole

1 1 1

4.13 (105.0)

1

4.13 (105.0)

1 1

.70 .70 (17.7) (17.7) 2.09 (53.1)

.70 (17.7) 1.39 (35.3)

.70 (17.7)

1

4.13 (105.0)

Accessories

1

Z-SV/UL-16/6

ZV-BS-UL

Z-SV/UL-18...12

1 1 1 1 1 1

Z-EK/35/UL

Z-SV/UL-16.../18

1 1 1 1 1 1

Z-EK/35/UL

1

Description

UL 489

IEC/EN 60947-2

1

Ue

480 Vac/96 Vdc

240/415 Vac

f

50/60 Hz

50/60 Hz

1

Uimp

—

9.5 kV

Z-EB/50/UL Description

UL 489

IEC/EN 60947-2

Ue

480 Vac/96 Vdc

240/415 Vac

f

50/60 Hz

50/60 Hz

—

9.5 kV

115A at 40°C

160A at 30°C

#1–14 AWG 60/75°C Cu

1.5–50 mm2 Cu

0.56 in

14 mm

80A at 40°C

80A at 30°C

Uimp

1

10–1/0 AWG 60/75°C Cu

2.5–35 mm2 Cu

Ie

1

0.56 in

Ie

14 mm

1 1 V4-T1-66

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 1077 DIN Rail Supplementary Protectors

1.3

Contents

FAZ Circuit Breakers

Description FAZ Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page V4-T1-67 V4-T1-68 V4-T1-68 V4-T1-69 V4-T1-75 V4-T1-78 V4-T1-85

1 1 1 1 1 1

Optimum and Efficient Protection for Every Application

1 1 1 1 1

FAZ Circuit Breakers Product Overview

Features

Optimum product quality, tested reliability and safety stand for best protection of personnel, installations and plant. Eaton’s FAZ DIN rail mountable circuit breaker is designed for use in control panel applications.

●

●

●

Powerful offering for machine and system builders The FAZ is available with B, C, D, K, S, and Z characteristics in accordance with UL 1077, CSA C22.2 No.235 and IEC 60947-2. These devices are CE marked.

Application Description ● ● ● ● ●

Supplementary protection Control circuits Lighting Business equipment Appliances

Complete range of UL 1077 recognized DIN rail mounted miniature circuit breakers up to 63A current rating Standard ratings of 10 kAIC up to 277/480 Vac Current limiting design provides fast short-circuit interruption that reduces the let-through energy, which can damage the circuit

●

Suitable for supplementary protection

●

Thermal-magnetic overcurrent protection ●

Six levels of short-circuit protection, categorized by B, C, D, K, S, and Z curves

1

●

Trip-free design—breaker can not be defeated by holding the handle in the ON position

●

Captive screws cannot be lost

1

●

Fulfill UL 1077, CSA C22.2 No.235 and also IEC 60947-2 Standard

1

●

Field-installable shunt trip and auxiliary switch subsequent mounting

●

Module width of only 17.7 mm (per pole)

●

Contact position indicator (red/green)

●

Easy installation on DIN rail

●

Possibility for sealing the toggle in ON or OFF position

1 1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-67

1.3 1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 1077 DIN Rail Supplementary Protectors

Standards and Certifications FAZ complies with the latest national and international standards.

Discover These Advanced Features

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Captive Posidrive terminal screws with finger and back-ofhand protection (IP20)

Breakers install on standard DIN rail

Available in one-, two-, three-, four-pole, 1+N and 3+N models

Trip-free design; breaker cannot be defeated by holding the handle in the ON position

Color-coded indicator provides breaker status for easy troubleshooting

Breaker information printed on the front of the device for quick identification

1

●

UL 1077, CSA C22.2 No. 235 ● Apply to supplementary protectors intended for use as overcurrent, or overvoltage or undervoltage protection within an appliance or other electrical equipment where branch circuit protection is already provided, or is not required

● ●

●

●

RoHS compliant VDE compliant ● Devices with B, C, and D curves are VDE compliant CCC ● Devices with B, C, and D curves are CCC compliant ABS compliant

1 1 1

Catalog Number Selection

FAZ C 6 / 1 SP

1 1 1

Single Package

Breaker Family FAZ = Supplementary protector

Trip Characteristics 1 B = 3–5X In C = 5–10X In D = 10–20X In K = 8–12X In S = 13–17X In Z = 2–3X In

1 1 1 1 1

SP Ampere Rating 0.5 = 1 = 2 = 3 = 4 = 5 = 6 = 7 = 8 = 10 =

0.5A 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 10A

13 = 13A 15 = 15A 16 = 16A 20 = 20A 25 = 25A 30 = 30A 32 = 32A 40 = 40A 50 = 50A 63 = 63A

Number of Poles 1 = Single-pole 2 = Two-pole 3 = Three-pole

Note 1 I = Rated current for instantaneous trip characteristics. n

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V4-T1-68

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

4 = Single-pole 1N = Single-pole + neutral 3N = Three-pole + neutral

= Single packaging of singlepole curve B, C and D for select amperes only Blank = Standard packaging

1.3

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 1077 DIN Rail Supplementary Protectors

Product Selection 1.45

1

7200

Specified non-tripping current INT = 1.13 x IN for t > 1 h

3600 1200 600

Specified tripping current IT = 1.45 x IN for t < 1 h

300

 2.55 I : N

t = 1–60 s (IN < 32A) t = 1–120 s (IN > 32A)

1

 Type B: 3 x I : t > 0.1 s N

1

 Type B: 5 x I : t < 0.1 s N

120

1

1

60 30

1

10

t [sec]

Suitable for applications where protection against low-level short-circuit faults in control wiring is desired. Instantaneous trip is 3–5X continuous rating of device (In). Applications include PLC wiring, business equipment, lighting, appliances and some motors. Low magnetic trip point.

1.13

1

FAZ B curve (3–5X In current rating) ● Designed for resistive or slightly inductive loads ● Response time of instantaneous trip: 3–5X In current rating ● UL recognized and CSA Certified as supplementary protectors ● For international and domestic use (conform to IEC 60947-2) ● UL file number 177451

5

1

2 1 1

0.5

1

0.2 3

0.1

1

B

2

0.05 0.02

1

0.01 0.005

1

0.002 0.001

1

0.0005 1

2

3

4

5

6 7 8 9 10

15

20

30

40

50

I / IN

Single-Pole

B Curve (3–5X In Current Rating)— Designed for Resistive or Slightly Inductive Loads 1 Single-Pole 2

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Catalog Amperes Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

1

FAZ-B1/1-SP

FAZ-B1/2

FAZ-B1/3

2

FAZ-B2/1-SP

FAZ-B2/2

3

FAZ-B3/1-SP

FAZ-B3/2

4

FAZ-B4/1-SP

FAZ-B4/2

FAZ-B4/3

Four-Pole

1

B Curve (3–5X In Current Rating)— Designed for Resistive or Slightly Inductive Loads, continued 1

1

Three-Pole + Neutral

Catalog Amperes Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

1

FAZ-B2/3

1

FAZ-B1/4

FAZ-B1/1N

FAZ-B1/3N

2

FAZ-B2/4

FAZ-B2/1N

FAZ-B2/3N

1

FAZ-B3/3

3

FAZ-B3/4

FAZ-B3/1N

FAZ-B3/3N

FAZ-B4/4

FAZ-B4/1N

FAZ-B4/3N

Single-Pole + Neutral

5

FAZ-B5/1-SP

FAZ-B5/2

FAZ-B5/3

4

6

FAZ-B6/1-SP

FAZ-B6/2

FAZ-B6/3

5

FAZ-B5/4

FAZ-B5/1N

FAZ-B5/3N

7

FAZ-B7/1-SP

FAZ-B7/2

FAZ-B7/3

6

FAZ-B6/4

FAZ-B6/1N

FAZ-B6/3N

FAZ-B7/4

FAZ-B7/1N

FAZ-B7/3N

8

FAZ-B8/1-SP

FAZ-B8/2

FAZ-B8/3

7

10

FAZ-B10/1-SP

FAZ-B10/2

FAZ-B10/3

8

FAZ-B8/4

FAZ-B8/1N

FAZ-B8/3N

12

FAZ-B12/1-SP

FAZ-B12/2

FAZ-B12/3

10

FAZ-B10/4

FAZ-B10/1N

FAZ-B10/3N

13

FAZ-B13/1-SP

FAZ-B13/2

FAZ-B13/3

12

FAZ-B12/4

FAZ-B12/1N

FAZ-B12/3N

FAZ-B13/4

FAZ-B13/1N

FAZ-B13/3N

Three-Pole + Neutral

15

FAZ-B15/1-SP

FAZ-B15/2

FAZ-B15/3

13

16

FAZ-B16/1-SP

FAZ-B16/2

FAZ-B16/3

15

FAZ-B15/4

FAZ-B15/1N

FAZ-B15/3N

20

FAZ-B20/1-SP

FAZ-B20/2

FAZ-B20/3

16

FAZ-B16/4

FAZ-B16/1N

FAZ-B16/3N

FAZ-B20/4

FAZ-B20/1N

FAZ-B20/3N

25

FAZ-B25/1-SP

FAZ-B25/2

FAZ-B25/3

20

30

FAZ-B30/1-SP

FAZ-B30/2

FAZ-B30/3

25

FAZ-B25/4

FAZ-B25/1N

FAZ-B25/3N

FAZ-B30/4

FAZ-B30/1N

FAZ-B30/3N

32

FAZ-B32/1-SP

FAZ-B32/2

FAZ-B32/3

30

40

FAZ-B40/1-SP

FAZ-B40/2

FAZ-B40/3

32

FAZ-B32/4

FAZ-B32/1N

FAZ-B32/3N

50

FAZ-B50/1-SP

FAZ-B50/2

FAZ-B50/3

40

FAZ-B40/4

FAZ-B40/1N

FAZ-B40/3N

FAZ-B63/3

50

FAZ-B50/4

FAZ-B50/1N

FAZ-B50/3N

63

FAZ-B63/4

FAZ-B63/1N

FAZ-B63/3N

63

FAZ-B63/1-SP

FAZ-B63/2

1

Single-Pole + Neutral

Four-Pole

Notes 1 In North America, these switches are UL recognized and CSA Certified as supplementary protection devices. Per the intent of NEC (National Electrical Code), Article 240, and CEC (Canadian Electrical Code), Part 1 C22.1, supplementary breakers cannot be used as a substitute for the branch circuit protective device. They can be used to provide overcurrent protection within an appliance or other electrical equipment where branch circuit overcurrent protection is already provided, or is not required. 2 Option for single packaging on single-pole B, C and D curves only; add suffix SP when ordering. Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-69

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

1.3 1 1 1 1 1

Suitable for applications where medium levels of inrush current are expected. Instantaneous trip is 5–10X rating of device (In). Applications include small transformers, lighting, pilot devices, control circuits and coils. Medium magnetic trip point.

1.45

FAZ C curve (5–10X In current rating) ● Designed for inductive loads ● Response time of instantaneous trip: 5–10X In current rating ● UL recognized and CSA Certified as supplementary protectors ● For international and domestic use (conform to IEC 60947-2) ● UL file number 177451

1.13

UL 1077 DIN Rail Supplementary Protectors

7200

Specified non-tripping current INT = 1.13 x IN for t > 1 h

3600 1200

300 120 60 30 10 5 2

0.5 0.2

1

2

0.1 1

0.05

1

C

0.02 0.01 0.005

1

0.002 0.001

1

0.0005 1

2

3

4

1

5

6 7 8 9 10

15

20

30

40

50

I / IN

1 Single-Pole

C Curve (5–10X In Current Rating)— Designed Inductive Loads 1 Single-Pole 2

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Catalog Amperes Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

0.5

FAZ-C0.5/1-SP

FAZ-C0.5/2

FAZ-C0.5/3

1

1

FAZ-C1/1-SP

FAZ-C1/2

FAZ-C1/3

1.6

FAZ-C1.6/1-SP

FAZ-C1.6/2

FAZ-C1.6/3

1

2

FAZ-C2/1-SP

FAZ-C2/2

FAZ-C2/3

1 1 Two-Pole

1 1

3

FAZ-C3/1-SP

FAZ-C3/2

FAZ-C3/3

4

FAZ-C4/1-SP

FAZ-C4/2

FAZ-C4/3

5

FAZ-C5/1-SP

FAZ-C5/2

FAZ-C5/3

6 7

1 1

 Type C: 10 x I : t < 0.1 s N

1

1

1

 Type C: 5 x I : t > 0.1 s N

Specified tripping current IT = 1.45 x IN for t < 1 h

600

t [sec]

1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors

8 10 Three-Pole

13

FAZ-C6/1-SP FAZ-C7/1-SP FAZ-C8/1-SP FAZ-C10/1-SP FAZ-C13/1-SP

FAZ-C6/2 FAZ-C7/2 FAZ-C8/2 FAZ-C10/2 FAZ-C13/2

FAZ-C10/3

1

16

FAZ-C16/1-SP

FAZ-C16/2

FAZ-C16/3

20

FAZ-C20/1-SP

FAZ-C20/2

FAZ-C20/3

25

1

30

1

32 40

1

50

FAZ-C25/1-SP FAZ-C30/1-SP FAZ-C32/1-SP FAZ-C40/1-SP FAZ-C50/1-SP

FAZ-C30/2 FAZ-C32/2 FAZ-C40/2 FAZ-C50/2

FAZ-C15/3

FAZ-C25/3 FAZ-C30/3 FAZ-C32/3 FAZ-C40/3 FAZ-C50/3 FAZ-C63/3

Three-Pole + Neutral

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

0.5

FAZ-C0.5/4

FAZ-C0.5/1N

FAZ-C0.5/3N

1

FAZ-C1/4

FAZ-C1/1N

FAZ-C1/3N

1.6

FAZ-C1.6/4

FAZ-C1.6/1N

FAZ-C1.6/3N

2

FAZ-C2/4

FAZ-C2/1N

FAZ-C2/3N

3

FAZ-C3/4

FAZ-C3/1N

FAZ-C3/3N

4

FAZ-C4/4

FAZ-C4/1N

FAZ-C4/3N

5

FAZ-C5/4

FAZ-C5/1N

FAZ-C5/3N

6

FAZ-C6/4

FAZ-C6/1N

FAZ-C6/3N

7

FAZ-C7/4

FAZ-C7/1N

FAZ-C7/3N

8

FAZ-C8/4

FAZ-C8/1N

FAZ-C8/3N

10

FAZ-C10/4

FAZ-C10/1N

FAZ-C10/3N

13

FAZ-C13/4

FAZ-C13/1N

FAZ-C13/3N

15

FAZ-C15/4

FAZ-C15/1N

FAZ-C15/3N

16

FAZ-C16/4

FAZ-C16/1N

FAZ-C16/3N

20

FAZ-C20/4

FAZ-C20/1N

FAZ-C20/3N

25

FAZ-C25/4

FAZ-C25/1N

FAZ-C25/3N

30

FAZ-C30/4

FAZ-C30/1N

FAZ-C30/3N

32

FAZ-C32/4

FAZ-C32/1N

FAZ-C32/3N

40

FAZ-C40/4

FAZ-C40/1N

FAZ-C40/3N

50

FAZ-C50/4

FAZ-C50/1N

FAZ-C50/3N

63

FAZ-C63/4

FAZ-C63/1N

FAZ-C63/3N

1 1

Notes 1 In North America, these switches are UL recognized and CSA Certified as supplementary protection devices. Per the intent of NEC (National Electrical Code), Article 240, and CEC (Canadian Electrical Code), Part 1 C22.1, supplementary breakers cannot be used as a substitute for the branch circuit protective device. They can be used to provide overcurrent protection within an appliance or other electrical equipment where branch circuit overcurrent protection is already provided, or is not required. 2 Option for single packaging on single-pole B, C and D curves only; add suffix SP when ordering. V4-T1-70

FAZ-C63/2

Three-Pole + Neutral

Single-Pole + Neutral

63

1

FAZ-C63/1-SP

FAZ-C25/2

Single-Pole + Neutral

FAZ-C8/3

15

FAZ-C15/2

Catalog Amperes Number

FAZ-C7/3

FAZ-C13/3

C Curve (5–10X In Current Rating)— Designed Inductive Loads, continued 1 Four-Pole

FAZ-C6/3

1

FAZ-C15/1-SP

Four-Pole

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

1.3

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors

Suitable for applications where high levels of inrush current are expected. Instantaneous trip is 10–20X rating of device (In). The high magnetic trip point prevents nuisance tripping in high inductive applications such as motors, transformers and power supplies.

1

1.45

7200

Specified non-tripping current INT = 1.13 x IN for t > 1 h

3600 1200

Specified tripping current IT = 1.45 x IN for t < 1 h

600 300

 2.55 I : N

1

t = 1–60 s (IN < 32A) t = 1–120 s (IN > 32A)

 Type D: 10 x I : t > 0.1 s N

1

 Type D: 20 x I : t < 0.1 s N

120

1

1

60 30

1

10

t [sec]

FAZ D curve (10–20X In current rating) ● Designed for highly inductive loads ● Response time of instantaneous trip: 10–20X In current rating ● UL recognized and CSA Certified as supplementary protectors ● For international and domestic use (conform to IEC 60947-2) ● UL file number 177451

1.13

UL 1077 DIN Rail Supplementary Protectors

5

1

2 1 1

1

0.5 0.2 3

0.1

2

0.05

1

D

1

0.02 0.01 0.005

1

0.002 0.001

1

0.0005 1

2

3

4

5

6 7 8 9 10

15

20

30

40

50

1

I / IN

Single-Pole

D Curve (10–20X In Current Rating)— Designed for Inductive Loads 1 Single-Pole 2 Catalog Amperes Number

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

0.5

FAZ-D0.5/1-SP FAZ-D0.5/2

FAZ-D0.5/3

1

FAZ-D1/1-SP

FAZ-D1/2

FAZ-D1/3

2

FAZ-D2/1-SP

FAZ-D2/2

FAZ-D2/3

3

FAZ-D3/1-SP

FAZ-D3/2

FAZ-D3/3

4

FAZ-D4/1-SP

FAZ-D4/2

FAZ-D4/3

5

FAZ-D5/1-SP

FAZ-D5/2

FAZ-D5/3

6

FAZ-D6/1-SP

FAZ-D6/2

FAZ-D6/3

7

FAZ-D7/1-SP

FAZ-D7/2

FAZ-D7/3

8

FAZ-D8/1-SP

FAZ-D8/2

FAZ-D8/3

10

FAZ-D10/1-SP

FAZ-D10/2

FAZ-D10/3

13

FAZ-D13/1-SP

FAZ-D13/2

FAZ-D13/3

15

FAZ-D15/1-SP

FAZ-D15/2

FAZ-D15/3

16

FAZ-D16/1-SP

FAZ-D16/2

FAZ-D16/3

20

FAZ-D20/1-SP

FAZ-D20/2

FAZ-D20/3

25

FAZ-D25/1-SP

FAZ-D25/2

FAZ-D25/3

30

FAZ-D30/1-SP

FAZ-D30/2

FAZ-D30/3

32

FAZ-D32/1-SP

FAZ-D32/2

FAZ-D32/3

40

FAZ-D40/1-SP

FAZ-D40/2

FAZ-D40/3

50 3

FAZ-D50/1-SP

FAZ-D50/2

FAZ-D50/3

63 3

FAZ-D63/1-SP

FAZ-D63/2

FAZ-D63/3

Four-Pole

D Curve (10–20X In Current Rating)— Designed for Inductive Loads, continued 1 Single-Pole + Neutral

Three-Pole + Neutral

Catalog Amperes Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

0.5

FAZ-D0.5/4

FAZ-D0.5/1N

FAZ-D0.5/3N

1

FAZ-D1/4

FAZ-D1/1N

FAZ-D1/3N

2

FAZ-D2/4

FAZ-D2/1N

FAZ-D2/3N

3

FAZ-D3/4

FAZ-D3/1N

FAZ-D3/3N

4

FAZ-D4/4

FAZ-D4/1N

FAZ-D4/3N

5

FAZ-D5/4

FAZ-D5/1N

FAZ-D5/3N

6

FAZ-D6/4

FAZ-D6/1N

FAZ-D6/3N

7

FAZ-D7/4

FAZ-D7/1N

FAZ-D7/3N

8

FAZ-D8/4

FAZ-D8/1N

FAZ-D8/3N

10

FAZ-D10/4

FAZ-D10/1N

FAZ-D10/3N

13

FAZ-D13/4

FAZ-D13/1N

FAZ-D13/3N

15

FAZ-D15/4

FAZ-D15/1N

FAZ-D15/3N

16

FAZ-D16/4

FAZ-D16/1N

FAZ-D16/3N

20

FAZ-D20/4

FAZ-D20/1N

FAZ-D20/3N

25

FAZ-D25/4

FAZ-D25/1N

FAZ-D25/3N

30

FAZ-D30/4

FAZ-D30/1N

FAZ-D30/3N

32

FAZ-D32/4

FAZ-D32/1N

FAZ-D32/3N

40

FAZ-D40/4

FAZ-D40/1N

FAZ-D40/3N

50 c

FAZ-D50/4

FAZ-D50/1N

FAZ-D50/3N

63 c

FAZ-D63/4

FAZ-D63/1N

FAZ-D63/3N

Four-Pole

Single-Pole + Neutral

Three-Pole + Neutral

Notes 1 In North America, these switches are UL recognized and CSA Certified as supplementary protection devices. Per the intent of NEC (National Electrical Code), Article 240, and CEC (Canadian Electrical Code), Part 1 C22.1, supplementary breakers cannot be used as a substitute for the branch circuit protective device. They can be used to provide overcurrent protection within an appliance or other electrical equipment where branch circuit overcurrent protection is already provided, or is not required. 2 Option for single packaging on single-pole B, C and D curves only; add suffix SP when ordering. 3 IEC 60947-2 only.

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-71

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

1.3 1 1 1 1 1

UL 1077 DIN Rail Supplementary Protectors

1.13 1.45

FAZ K curve (8–12X In current rating) ● Designed for motors, transformers and upstream electronics ● Response time of instantaneous trip: 8–12X In current rating ● UL recognized and CSA Certified as supplementary protectors ● For international and domestic use (conform to IEC 60947-2) ● UL file number 177451

7200 3600

120 60 30

Suitable for applications where medium levels of inrush current are expected. Instantaneous trip is 8–12X rating of device (In). Applications include small transformers, lighting, pilot devices, control circuits and coils. Medium magnetic trip point.

1

Specified non-tripping current Int = 1.05 u In for t > 1 h Specified tripping current It = 1.30 u In for t < 1 h

1200 600 300

10 5 t (sec)

1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors

2 1 0.5

K

0.2 0.1 0.05

1 1

0.02 0.01 0.005

1

0.002 0.001 0.0005

1

1

1 Single-Pole

K Curve (8–12X In Current Rating)— Designed for Inductive Loads 12 Single-Pole 3

1

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Catalog Amperes Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

0.5

FAZ-K0.5/1

FAZ-K0.5/2

FAZ-K0.5/3

1

FAZ-K1/1

FAZ-K1/2

FAZ-K1/3

1.6

FAZ-K1.6/1

FAZ-K1.6/2

FAZ-K1.6/3

2

FAZ-K2/1

FAZ-K2/2

FAZ-K2/3

3

FAZ-K3/1

FAZ-K3/2

FAZ-K3/3

4

FAZ-K4/1

FAZ-K4/2

FAZ-K4/3

1

6

FAZ-K6/1

FAZ-K6/2

FAZ-K6/3

8

FAZ-K8/1

FAZ-K8/2

FAZ-K8/3

1

10

FAZ-K10/1

FAZ-K10/2

FAZ-K10/3

13

FAZ-K13/1

FAZ-K13/2

FAZ-K13/3

16

FAZ-K16/1

FAZ-K16/2

FAZ-K16/3

20

FAZ-K20/1

FAZ-K20/2

FAZ-K20/3

25

FAZ-K25/1

FAZ-K25/2

FAZ-K25/3

32

FAZ-K32/1

FAZ-K32/2

FAZ-K32/3

40

FAZ-K40/1

FAZ-K40/2

FAZ-K40/3

50

FAZ-K50/1

FAZ-K50/2

FAZ-K50/3

63

FAZ-K63/1

FAZ-K63/2

FAZ-K63/3

1 1 1

Two-Pole

1

1 1

3

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20

30 40 50

U-rated Current

1 1

2

Three-Pole

1 1 1

Four-Pole

K Curve (8–12X In Current Rating)— Designed for Inductive Loads, continued 12 Four-Pole 3 Catalog Amperes Number

Single-Pole + Neutral

Three-Pole + Neutral

Single-Pole + Neutral

Three-Pole + Neutral

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

0.5

FAZ-K0.5/4

FAZ-K0.5/1N

FAZ-K0.5/3N

1

FAZ-K1/4

FAZ-K1/1N

FAZ-K1/3N

1.6

FAZ-K1.6/4

FAZ-K1.6/1N

FAZ-K1.6/3N

2

FAZ-K2/4

FAZ-K2/1N

FAZ-K2/3N

3

FAZ-K3/4

FAZ-K3/1N

FAZ-K3/3N

4

FAZ-K4/4

FAZ-K4/1N

FAZ-K4/3N

6

FAZ-K6/4

FAZ-K6/1N

FAZ-K6/3N

8

FAZ-K8/4

FAZ-K8/1N

FAZ-K8/3N

10

FAZ-K10/4

FAZ-K10/1N

FAZ-K10/3N

13

FAZ-K13/4

FAZ-K13/1N

FAZ-K13/3N

16

FAZ-K16/4

FAZ-K16/1N

FAZ-K16/3N

20

FAZ-K20/4

FAZ-K20/1N

FAZ-K20/3N

25

FAZ-K25/4

FAZ-K25/1N

FAZ-K25/3N

32

FAZ-K32/4

FAZ-K32/1N

FAZ-K32/3N

40

FAZ-K40/4

FAZ-K40/1N

FAZ-K40/3N

50

FAZ-K50/4

FAZ-K50/1N

FAZ-K50/3N

63

FAZ-K63/4

FAZ-K63/1N

FAZ-K63/3N

Notes 1 In North America, these switches are UL recognized and CSA Certified as supplementary protection devices. Per the intent of NEC (National Electrical Code), Article 240, and CEC (Canadian Electrical Code), Part 1 C22.1, supplementary breakers cannot be used as a substitute for the branch circuit protective device. They can be used to provide overcurrent protection within an appliance or other electrical equipment where branch circuit overcurrent protection is already provided, or is not required. 2 These breakers are available by special order and may result in additional delivery time. 3 Two-piece box order, quantities of 2.

1 1 1 1 V4-T1-72

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 1077 DIN Rail Supplementary Protectors

7200 3600

Specified non-tripping current Int = 1.05 u In for t > 1 h Specified tripping current It = 1.30 u In for t < 1 h

1200 600 300 120 60 30

1 1 1 1

10 5 t (sec)

Suitable for applications where high levels of inrush current are expected. Instantaneous trip is 13–17X rating of device (In). The high magnetic trip point prevents nuisance tripping in high inductive applications such as motors, transformers and power supplies.

1

1.05 1.30

FAZ S curve (13–17X In current rating) ● Designed for control circuits with high inrush ● Response time of instantaneous trip: 13–17X In current rating ● UL recognized and CSA Certified as supplementary protectors ● For international and domestic use (conform to IEC 60947-2) ● UL file number 177451

1.3

1

2 1 0.5

1

S

0.2 0.1 0.05

1 1

0.02 0.01 0.005

1

0.002 0.001 0.0005 1

2

3

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20

1

30 40 50

1

U-rated Current Single-Pole

Two-Pole

S Curve (13–17X In Current Rating)— Designed for Inductive Loads 12 Single-Pole 3

Two-Pole

Amperes

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

1

FAZ-S1/1

FAZ-S1/2

2

FAZ-S2/1

FAZ-S2/2

3

FAZ-S3/1

FAZ-S3/2

4

FAZ-S4/1

FAZ-S4/2

6

FAZ-S6/1

FAZ-S6/2

10

FAZ-S10/1

FAZ-S10/2

16

FAZ-S16/1

FAZ-S16/2

20

FAZ-S20/1

FAZ-S20/2

25

FAZ-S25/1

FAZ-S25/2

32

FAZ-S32/1

FAZ-S32/2

40

FAZ-S40/1

FAZ-S40/2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Notes 1 In North America, these switches are UL recognized and CSA Certified as supplementary protection devices. Per the intent of NEC (National Electrical Code), Article 240, and CEC (Canadian Electrical Code), Part 1 C22.1, supplementary breakers cannot be used as a substitute for the branch circuit protective device. They can be used to provide overcurrent protection within an appliance or other electrical equipment where branch circuit overcurrent protection is already provided, or is not required. 2 These breakers are available by special order and may result in additional delivery time. 3 Two-piece box order, quantities of 2.

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-73

1.3 1 1 1 1

UL 1077 DIN Rail Supplementary Protectors

FAZ Z curve (2–3X In current rating) ● Designed for protection of electronic devices ● Response time of instantaneous trip: 2–3X In current rating ● UL recognized and CSA Certified as supplementary protectors ● For international and domestic use (conform to IEC 60947-2)

1.05 1.30

1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors

7200 3600 1200 600 300

Suitable for applications where low levels of inrush current are expected. Instantaneous trip is 2–3X rating of device (In). Applications include small transformers, lighting, pilot devices, control circuits and coils. Medium magnetic trip point.

120 60 30 10 5 t (sec)

1 1

2 1 0.5

1

0.02 0.01 0.005

1

0.002 0.001 0.0005

1

1

1

2

3

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20

30 40 50

U-rated Current

Single-Pole

1 1 1 1 1

Z

0.2 0.1 0.05

1

1

Specified non-tripping current Int = 1.05 u In for t > 1 h Specified tripping current It = 1.30 u In for t < 1 h

Z Curve (2–3X In Current Rating)— Designed for Inductive Loads 12 Single-Pole 3

Two-Pole

Amperes

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

0.5

FAZ-Z0.5/1

FAZ-Z0.5/2

1

FAZ-Z1/1

FAZ-Z1/2

1.6 Two-Pole

FAZ-Z1.6/1

FAZ-Z1.6/2

2

FAZ-Z2/1

FAZ-Z2/2

3

FAZ-Z3/1

FAZ-Z3/2

1

4

FAZ-Z4/1

FAZ-Z4/2

6

FAZ-Z6/1

FAZ-Z6/2

1

8 10

1

13 16

1

20

FAZ-Z8/1 FAZ-Z10/1 FAZ-Z13/1 FAZ-Z16/1 FAZ-Z20/1

FAZ-Z10/2 FAZ-Z13/2 FAZ-Z16/2 FAZ-Z20/2

1

32

FAZ-Z32/1

FAZ-Z32/2

1

40

FAZ-Z40/1

FAZ-Z40/2

1

63

1

FAZ-Z50/1 FAZ-Z63/1

Four-Pole

FAZ-Z8/2

25

50

FAZ-Z25/1

Three-Pole

FAZ-Z25/2

FAZ-Z50/2 FAZ-Z63/2

Z Curve (2–3X In Current Rating)— Designed for Inductive Loads, continued 12 Three-Pole

Four-Pole

Amperes

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

0.5

FAZ-Z0.5/3

FAZ-Z0.5/4

1

FAZ-Z1/3

FAZ-Z1/4

1.6

FAZ-Z1.6/3

FAZ-Z1.6/4

2

FAZ-Z2/3

FAZ-Z2/4

3

FAZ-Z3/3

FAZ-Z3/4

4

FAZ-Z4/3

FAZ-Z4/4

6

FAZ-Z6/3

FAZ-Z6/4

8

FAZ-Z8/3

FAZ-Z8/4

10

FAZ-Z10/3

FAZ-Z10/4

13

FAZ-Z13/3

FAZ-Z13/4

16

FAZ-Z16/3

FAZ-Z16/4

20

FAZ-Z20/3

FAZ-Z20/4

25

FAZ-Z25/3

FAZ-Z25/4

32

FAZ-Z32/3

FAZ-Z32/4

40

FAZ-Z40/3

FAZ-Z40/4

50

FAZ-Z50/3

FAZ-Z50/4

63

FAZ-Z63/3

FAZ-Z63/4

Notes 1 In North America, these switches are UL recognized and CSA Certified as supplementary protection devices. Per the intent of NEC (National Electrical Code), Article 240, and CEC (Canadian Electrical Code), Part 1 C22.1, supplementary breakers cannot be used as a substitute for the branch circuit protective device. They can be used to provide overcurrent protection within an appliance or other electrical equipment where branch circuit overcurrent protection is already provided, or is not required. 2 These breakers are available by special order and may result in additional delivery time. 3 Two-piece box order, quantities of 2.

1 1 1 1 V4-T1-74

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

1.3

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 1077 DIN Rail Supplementary Protectors

Accessories

1

FAZ Auxiliary Contacts and Voltage Trips Circuit Diagram

Description

Rated Operational Voltage

Catalog Number

FAZ-XHIN11

1 1

Standard Auxiliary Contacts

14

12

■ ■ ■ ■

1NO/1NC Installs on left side of FAZ or shunt trip Max. one per FAZ (1077) device Switches when FAZ is tripped electrically or manually

230 Vac

■ ■ ■ ■

1 changeover contact Installs on left side of FAZ or shunt trip Max. one per FAZ (1077) device Switches when FAZ is tripped electrically or manually

230 Vac

1 1 1

FAZ-XHINW1

1 1 1

11

1

Auxiliary/Trip Indicating Contact ■ ■ ■ ■

Small selector screw changes mode Two Form C (changeover) contacts Installs on left side of FAZ or shunt trip Auxiliary contacts switch when FAZ is tripped electrically or manually ■ Trip indicating contact switches only when FAZ is tripped electrically

Two-pole auxiliary mode

230 Vac

FAZ-XAM002

1 1 1 1 1 1

Trip indicating mode Undervoltage Trip ■ Prevents FAZ from operating unless

D1

voltage is present ■ Installs on left side of FAZ ■ Includes test button

U D2

115 Vac

FAZ-XUA(115VAC)

230 Vac

FAZ-XUA(230VAC)

400 Vac

FAZ-XUA(400VAC)

1 1 1 1 1

Shunt Trip ■ Allows remote trip of FAZ ■ Installs on left side of FAZ

C1 C2

12–110 Vac 12–60 Vdc

FAZ-XAA-C-12-110VAC

110–415 Vac 110–230 Vdc

FAZ-XAA-C-110415VAC

1 1 1 1 1

Allowable Combinations of Accessories

AUX

AUX TRIP

FAZ

or

AUX

1 FAZ

AUX TRIP

1

FAZ

1

or Circuit Breaker

Shunt Trip

Circuit Breaker

UnderV Trip

Circuit Breaker

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

1 V4-T1-75

1.3

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 1077 DIN Rail Supplementary Protectors

1

Busbar System

1

Description Without Auxiliary Contacts

1

For connecting FAZ supplementary protectors without auxiliary contacts. May be fed from line or load side.

Rated Operational Current

Number of Poles per Device

Number of Terminals

Catalog Number 1

80A

1

57

BB-UL-18/1P-1M/57

2

56

BB-UL-18/2P-2M/56

3

57

BB-UL-18/3P-3M/57

1

57

BB-UL-25/1P-1M/57

2

56

BB-UL-25/2P-2M/56

3

57

BB-UL-25/3P-3M/57

1

37

BB-UL-18/1P-1,5M/37

2

46

BB-UL-18/2P+AS-2,5M/46

3

48

BB-UL-18/3P+AS-3,5M/48

1

37

BB-UL-25/1P-1,5M/37

2

46

BB-UL-25/2P+AS-2,5M/46

3

48

BB-UL-25/3P+AS-3,5M/48

1 1 1 1

FAZ

FAZ

FAZ

100A

1 1 1 1 1

Auxiliary/Trip Indicating Contacts

1

For connecting FAZ supplementary protectors with auxiliary contacts. May be fed from line or load side.

80A

1 1 1 1

FAZ

FAZ

100A

1 1 1 1 1 1

Note 1 Bus may be center fed for high current capacity.

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V4-T1-76

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

1.3

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 1077 DIN Rail Supplementary Protectors

Incoming Terminal

Pin Type Incoming Supply Terminals Description

Catalog Number

■ Accommodates conductors

BB-UL-TEP/35

Incoming Terminal

Description ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

from 6–35 mm2/#10–2 AWG ■ 4–5.5 Nm/35–50 lb-in ■ Two- and three-pole

Fork Connector Incoming Terminal

Pin Type Incoming Supply Terminals— Single-Phase Only Description

Catalog Number

■ Accommodates conductors

BB-UL-TEPA/35

Bus Incoming Supply Terminals

50 mm2 #14–1 AWG 75 Deg wire 115 A/Y, 480V UL 160 A/Y 690V IEC

1

Catalog Number

1

BB-UL-TE/50

1 1 1

Busbar End Cap Description

Poles

Catalog Number

■ Install after cutting busbar ■ Protects end of busbar

2 and 3

BB-EV-EC/3

1

BB-UL-EC/1

from 6–35 mm2/#10–2 AWG ■ 4–5.5 Nm/35–50 lb-in

Busbar Terminal Cover

For covering unused terminals

1 1 1 1

Protective Accessories Description

1

Catalog Number

1

BB-IP/5

1 1 1 1

Lockoff Device

UL lockoff device

1

FAZPLOFF

1 1 1 1 Padlock Hasp

■ Prevents reactivation of the device

1

Z-IS/SPE-1TE

during maintenance ■ Holds one padlock

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-77

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 1077 DIN Rail Supplementary Protectors

1

Technical Data and Specifications

1

Trip Curves Chart Eaton FAZ supplementary protectors are available with six different tripping characteristics, including Type B, C, D, K, S and Z. Definitions for each trip curve are contained on the ordering pages and can be used to determine the optimal characteristic for your application. For example, low-level short-circuit faults in control wiring, such as PLCs, are best protected by devices with Type B trip characteristics (3–5X continuous rating of the device (In).

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

1.30

1.05

1.13

1.45

1

Tripping Characteristics Even though not required by NEC or CEC for supplementary protectors, Eaton’s FAZ devices are current limiting, which means that they interrupt fault currents within one half cycle. Current limiting devices offer superior protection by reducing peak let-through current and energy.

7200 3600

Time-current characteristic acc. to UL 1077  Conventional  2.55 I : N non-tripping current t = 1–60 s (IN < 32A) t = 1–120 s (IN < 32A) Int = 1.13 IN: t > 1 h

1200 600 300

 Conventional tripping

current It = 1.45 IN: t < 1 h

120 60 30

1

 Type B: 5 I : t < 0.1 s N  Type C: 5 I : t > 0.1 s N  Type C: 10 I : t < 0.1 s N Type D: 10 I : t > 0.1 s N

Type D: 20 I : t < 0.1 s N

2 1 0.5

D

0.2 0.1 0.05

1

 Type B: 3 I : t > 0.1 s N

10 5 t (sec)

1.3

Z

B

C

K

S

0.02 0.01 0.005

1

0.002 0.001 0.0005

1 1

1

2

3

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 I/In

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V4-T1-78

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

30 40 50

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 1077 DIN Rail Supplementary Protectors

1.3

FAZ Miniature Circuit Breakers Technical Data Description

B Curve

C Curve

1

D Curve

1

Electrical Approvals

UR (UL 1077), CSA (CSA 22.2 No. 235), CE

1

Standards

IEC/EN 60947-2

Short-circuit trip response

3–5 In

5–10 In

10–20 In

1

1–63A

0.5–63A

0.5–40A

1

277 Vac 48 Vdc

277 Vac 48 Vdc

277 Vac 48 Vdc

1

480Y/277 Vac 96 Vdc

480Y/277 Vac 96 Vdc

480Y/277 Vac 96 Vdc

1

Thermal tripping characteristics Single-pole Multi-pole

1.35 x In @ 40°C 1.45 x In @ 40°C

1.35 x In @ 40°C 1.45 x In @ 40°C

1.35 x In @ 40°C 1.45 x In @ 40°C

Short-circuit ratings (at max. voltage) Single-pole Two-, three-pole Single-pole Two poles in series

10 kA (5 kA for 40–63A device) 10 kA (5 kA for 40–63A device) 10 kA @ 48 Vdc 10 kA @ 96 Vdc

10 kA (5 kA for 40–63A device) 10 kA (5 kA for 40–63A device) 10 kA @ 48 Vdc 10 kA @ 96 Vdc

5 kA 5 kA 10 kA @ 48 Vdc 10 kA @ 96 Vdc

Current range

1–63A

0.5–63A

0.5–63A

Maximum voltage ratings—IEC 68898-1 Single-pole Two-, three-pole

1

230 Vac 230/400 Vac

230 Vac 230/400 Vac

230 Vac 230/400 Vac

1

240 Vac 48 Vdc 240/415 Vac 96 Vdc

240 Vac 48 Vdc 240/415 Vac 96 Vdc

240 Vac 48 Vdc 240/415 Vac 96 Vdc

Thermal tripping characteristics Single-pole Multi-pole

> 1 hour @ 1.05 x In < 1 hour @ 1.3 x In

> 1 hour @ 1.05 x In < 1 hour @ 1.3 x In

> 1 hour @ 1.05 x In < 1 hour @ 1.3 x In

Interrupt ratings (at max. voltage) IEC 60947-2 IEC 60898 Operational switching capacity Max. backup fuse [gL/gG] Rated impulse withstand—Uimp Rated insulation voltage—Ui

15 kA 10 kA 7.5 kA 125A 4000 Vac 440 Vac

15 kA 10 kA 7.5 kA 125A 4000 Vac 440 Vac

15 kA (10 kA for 50 and 63A) 10 kA (50 and 63A not available) 7.5 kA 125A 4000 Vac 440 Vac

3 > 10,000 (1 operation = ON/OFF) 10g–120 ms –40 to +167°F (–40 to +75°C) –40 to +185°F (–40 to +85°C) Nylon

3 > 10,000 (1 operation = ON/OFF) 10g–120 ms –40 to +167°F (–40 to +75°C) –40 to +185°F (–40 to +85°C) Nylon

3 > 10,000 (1 operation = ON/OFF) 10g–120 ms –40 to +167°F (–40 to +75°C) –40 to +185°F (–40 to +85°C) Nylon

Supplementary Protectors—UL/CSA Current range Maximum voltage ratings—UL/CSA Single-pole, single-pole + neutral Two-, three-pole, four-pole and three-pole + neutral Two poles in series

1 1 1 1

Miniature Circuit Breaker—IEC

Maximum voltage ratings—IEC 60947-2 Single-pole Two-, three-pole Two poles in series

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Environmental/General Selectivity class Lifespan (operations) Shock (IEC 68-2-22) Operating temperature range Shipment and short-term storage Housing material

1 1 1

Mechanical Standard front dimension Device height Terminal protection Mounting width per pole

80 mm Finger and back-of-hand proof to IEC 536 17.5 mm

80 mm Finger and back-of-hand proof to IEC 536 17.5 mm

80 mm Finger and back-of-hand proof to IEC 536 17.5 mm

Mounting Degree of protection Terminals top and bottom Supply connection

IEC/EN 60715 top-hat rail IP20 Twin-purpose terminals Line or load side

IEC/EN 60715 top-hat rail IP20 Twin-purpose terminals Line or load side

IEC/EN 60715 top-hat rail IP20 Twin-purpose terminals Line or load side

Terminal capacity [mm2] Torque Imperial torque

1 x 25 (AWG 4–18)/2 x 10 (AWG 8–18) 2.4 Nm 21 lb-in (AWG 18–12), 25 lb-in (AWG 10–8), 36 lb-in (AWG 6–4) 0.8–2 mm As required

1 x 25 (AWG 4–18)/2 x 10 (AWG 8–18) 2.4 Nm 21 lb-in (AWG 18–12), 25 lb-in (AWG 10–8), 36 lb-in (AWG 6–4) 0.8–2 mm As required

1 x 25 (AWG 4–18)/2 x 10 (AWG 8–18) 2.4 Nm 21 lb-in (AWG 18–12), 25 lb-in (AWG 10–8), 36 lb-in (AWG 6–4) 0.8–2 mm As required

Thickness of busbar material Mounting position

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-79

1.3 1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 1077 DIN Rail Supplementary Protectors

FAZ Miniature Circuit Breakers Technical Data, continued Description

K Curve

S Curve

Z Curve

1

Electrical

1

Approvals

UR (UL 1077), CSA (CSA 22.2 No. 235), CE

Standards

IEC/EN 60947-2, E177451, 204453

1

Short-circuit trip response

8–12 In

13–17 In

2–3 In

1

Current range

0.5–63A

0.5–40A

1–63A

277 Vac 48 Vdc

277 Vac 48 Vdc

277 Vac 48 Vdc

480Y/277 Vac 96 Vdc

480Y/277 Vac 96 Vdc

480Y/277 Vac 96 Vdc

Thermal tripping characteristics Single-pole Multi-pole

1.35 x In @ 40°C 1.45 x In @ 40°C

1.35 x In @ 40°C 1.45 x In @ 40°C

1.35 x In @ 40°C 1.45 x In @ 40°C

Short-circuit ratings (at max. voltage) Single-pole Single-pole + neutral Two-, three-, four-pole Two poles in series

5 kA @ 277 Vac 5 kA @ 277 Vac 5 kA @ 480Y/277 Vac —

5 kA @ 277 Vac 5 kA @ 277 Vac 5 kA @ 480Y/277 Vac —

5 kA @ 277 Vac 5 kA @ 277 Vac 5 kA @ 480Y/277 Vac —

0.5–63A

0.5–40A

1–63A

240 Vac

240 Vac

240 Vac

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Supplementary Protectors—UL/CSA

Maximum voltage ratings—UL/CSA Single-pole, single-pole + neutral Two-, three-, four-pole and three-pole + neutral Two poles in series

Miniature Circuit Breaker—IEC Current range Maximum voltage ratings—IEC 60947-2 Single-pole, single-pole + neutral Two-, three-, four-pole, three-pole + neutral

240/415 Vac

240/415 Vac

240/415 Vac

Thermal tripping characteristics Single-pole Multi-pole

> 1 Hour @ 1.05 x In < 1 Hour @ 1.3 x In

> 1 Hour @ 1.05 x In < 1 Hour @ 1.3 x In

> 1 Hour @ 1.05 x In < 1 Hour @ 1.3 x In

Interrupt ratings (at max. voltage) IEC 60947-2 Operational switching capacity Max. backup fuse [gL/gG] Rated impulse withstand—Uimp Rated insulation voltage—Ui

15 kA 7.5 kA 125A 4000 Vac 440 Vac

10 kA 7.5 kA 125A 4000 Vac 440 Vac

10 kA 7.5 kA 125A 4000 Vac 440 Vac

3 > 10,000 (1 operation = ON/OFF) 10g–120 ms –40 to +167°F (–40 to +75°C) –40 to +185°F (–40 to +85°C) Nylon

3 > 10,000 (1 operation = ON/OFF) 10g–120 ms –40 to +167°F (–40 to +75°C) –40 to +185°F (–40 to +85°C) Nylon

3 > 10,000 (1 operation = ON/OFF) 10g–120 ms –40 to +167°F (–40 to +75°C) –40 to +185°F (–40 to +85°C) Nylon

Standard front dimension Device height Terminal protection Mounting width per pole

80 mm Finger and back-of-hand proof to IEC 536 17.7 mm

80 mm Finger and back-of-hand proof to IEC 536 17.7 mm

80 mm Finger and back-of-hand proof to IEC 536 17.7 mm

Mounting Degree of protection Terminals top and bottom Supply connection

IEC/EN 60715 top-hat rail IP20 Twin-purpose terminals Line or load side

IEC/EN 60715 top-hat rail IP20 Twin-purpose terminals Line or load side

IEC/EN 60715 top-hat rail IP20 Twin-purpose terminals Line or load side

Terminal capacity [mm2] Torque Imperial torque

1 x 25 (AWG 4–18) / 2 x 10 (AWG 8–18) 2.4 Nm 21 lb-in (AWG 18–12), 25 lb-in (AWG 10–8), 36 lb-in (AWG 6–4) 0.8–2 mm As required

1 x 25 (AWG 4–18) / 2 x 10 (AWG 8–18) 2.4 Nm 21 lb-in (AWG 18–12), 25 lb-in (AWG 10–8), 36 lb-in (AWG 6–4) 0.8–2 mm As required

1 x 25 (AWG 4–18) / 2 x 10 (AWG 8–18) 2.4 Nm 21 lb-in (AWG 18–12), 25 lb-in (AWG 10–8), 36 lb-in (AWG 6–4) 0.8–2 mm As required

Environmental/General Selectivity class Lifespan (operations) Shock (IEC 68-2-22) Operating temperature range Shipment and short-term storage Housing material Mechanical

Thickness of busbar material Mounting position

1 1 1 V4-T1-80

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

1.3

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 1077 DIN Rail Supplementary Protectors

Let-Through Energy I2t

Let-Through Energy ID

Characteristic B and C

Characteristic B and C

∫i2dt 105 [A2s] 8

63 A 50 A 40 A 32 A 25 A 20 A 16 A 13 A 10 A

6 4

1 1

lD 104 9 [A] 8

63 A 50 A 40 A 32 A 25 A 16 A20 A 13 A 10 A

7 6 5 4

6A 4A 3A

2 1.5

6A 4A

104

3A

3

2A

1

1.5

4

1

103 2

1

1A

1.5

1

0.5 A 1 A

103

0.5 A

1 1

2A

6

1 1

2

8

1

5

6

1

4

1

8

1

3 2 0.5

1

1.5

2

3

4

5 6 7 8 910

15

0.5

1

1.5

2

3

4

5 6 7 8 910

15

1

Icc rms [kA]

Icc rms [kA]

Characteristic D

1

Characteristic D

5

∫i2dt 10 [A2s] 8

40 A 32 A 25 A 20 A 16 A 13 A

6 4

1

lD 104 9 [A] 8

40 A 32 A 25 A 20 A 16 A 13 A 10 A 6A

7 6

1 1

10 A

5

6A

4

1

3

1

2 1.5

2

1

1.5

1

104 8 6 4

1

103

1

2 1.5

1

103

5

6

1

4

1

8

0.5

1

1.5

2

3

4

5 6 7 8 910

15

Icc rms [kA]

2

1 0.5

1

1.5

2

3

4

5 6 7 8 910

15

1

Icc rms [kA]

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-81

1.3 1 1 1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 1077 DIN Rail Supplementary Protectors

Let-Through Energy I2t Characteristic K lD [A]

Characteristic S lD [A]

104 8

1

104

8

6

63 A 50 A 40 A 32 A 25 A 20 A 13 A 16 A

6

1

4

1

3

10 A 6A 4A 3A

4

2

2A

3

1

40 A 32 A 25 A 20 A 16 A 10 A

6A 4A 3A 2A

1.6 A

1

1.5 1A

1

2 1A

3

10

1

1.5

1 103

5

1

0.5 A

1 1

5

0.5

1 1 1 1 1

lD [A]

3

4

5

6

7 8 9 10 0.5

104 8

6

1

3

1

2

Characteristic Z

4

1

1.5

Icc rms [kA]

1 1

1

63 A 50 A 40 A 32 A 25 A 20 A 16 A 10 A 8A 6A

2

4A 3A

1.5 2A 103

1 1 1

5 1.6 A 1A

1

0.5 A

1 0.5

1

1

1.5

2

3

4

5

6

7 8 9 10

Icc rms [kA]

V4-T1-82

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

1

1.5

2

3

4

5

6

7 8 9 10

Icc rms [kA]

1.3

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 1077 DIN Rail Supplementary Protectors

Influence of the Ambient Temperature on the Thermal Tripping Behavior Corrected values of the rated current dependent on the ambient temperature

1

Ambient Temperature T In (A)

–40°C

–30°C

–20°C

–10°C

0°C

10°C

20°C

30°C

35°C

40°C

45°C

50°C

55°C

60°C

65°C

70°C

75°C

0.16

0.20

0.20

0.19

0.19

0.18

0.17

0.17

0.16

0.16

0.15

0.15

0.15

0.14

0.14

0.14

0.14

0.13

0.25

0.32

0.31

0.30

0.29

0.28

0.27

0.26

0.25

0.25

0.24

0.24

0.23

0.23

0.22

0.22

0.21

0.21

0.50

0.64

0.62

0.60

0.58

0.56

0.54

0.52

0.50

0.49

0.48

0.47

0.46

0.45

0.44

0.43

0.42

0.41

0.75

0.96

0.93

0.90

0.87

0.84

0.81

0.78

0.75

0.74

0.73

0.71

0.69

0.68

0.66

0.65

0.64

0.62

1.00

1.30

1.20

1.20

1.20

1.10

1.10

1.00

1.00

0.99

0.97

0.95

0.93

0.90

0.89

0.87

0.85

0.83

1.50

1.90

1.90

1.80

1.70

1.70

1.60

1.60

1.50

1.50

1.50

1.40

1.40

1.40

1.30

1.30

1.30

1.20

1.60

2.00

2.00

1.90

1.90

1.80

1.70

1.70

1.60

1.60

1.50

1.50

1.50

1.40

1.40

1.40

1.40

1.30

2.00

2.60

2.50

2.40

2.30

2.20

2.20

2.10

2.00

2.00

1.90

1.90

1.90

1.80

1.80

1.70

1.70

1.70

2.50

3.20

3.10

3.00

2.90

2.80

2.70

2.60

2.50

2.50

2.40

2.40

2.30

2.30

2.20

2.20

2.10

2.10

3.00

3.80

3.70

3.60

3.50

3.40

3.30

3.10

3.00

3.00

2.90

2.80

2.80

2.70

2.70

2.60

2.50

2.50

3.50

4.50

4.40

4.20

4.10

3.90

3.80

3.70

3.50

3.40

3.40

3.30

3.20

3.20

3.10

3.00

3.00

2.90

4.00

5.10

5.00

4.80

4.70

4.50

4.30

4.20

4.00

3.90

3.90

3.80

3.70

3.60

3.50

3.50

3.40

3.30

5.00

6.40

6.20

6.00

5.80

5.60

5.40

5.20

5.00

4.90

4.80

4.70

4.60

4.50

4.40

4.30

4.20

4.10

6.00

7.70

7.50

7.20

7.00

6.70

6.50

6.30

6.00

5.90

5.80

5.70

5.60

5.40

5.30

5.20

5.10

5.00

7.00

9.00

8.70

8.40

8.20

7.80

7.60

7.40

7.00

6.90

6.80

6.70

6.50

6.30

6.20

6.10

6.00

5.80

8.00

10.20

9.90

9.60

9.30

9.00

8.70

8.40

8.00

7.90

7.70

7.60

7.40

7.20

7.10

6.90

6.80

6.60

10.00

13.00

12.00

12.00

12.00

11.00

11.00

10.00

10.00

9.90

9.70

9.50

9.30

9.00

8.90

8.70

8.50

8.30

12.00

15.00

15.00

14.00

14.00

13.00

13.00

13.00

12.00

12.00

12.00

11.00

11.00

11.00

11.00

10.00

10.00

10.00

13.00

17.00

16.00

16.00

15.00

15.00

14.00

14.00

13.00

13.00

13.00

12.00

12.00

12.00

12.00

11.00

11.00

11.00

15.00

19.00

19.00

18.00

17.00

17.00

16.00

16.00

15.00

15.00

15.00

14.00

14.00

14.00

13.00

13.00

13.00

12.00

16.00

20.00

20.00

19.00

19.00

18.00

17.00

17.00

16.00

16.00

15.00

15.00

15.00

14.00

14.00

14.00

14.00

13.00

20.00

26.00

25.00

24.00

23.00

22.00

22.00

21.00

20.00

20.00

19.00

19.00

19.00

18.00

18.00

17.00

17.00

17.00

25.00

32.00

31.00

30.00

29.00

28.00

27.00

26.00

25.00

25.00

24.00

24.00

23.00

23.00

22.00

22.00

21.00

21.00

32.00

41.00

40.00

38.00

37.00

36.00

35.00

33.00

32.00

32.00

31.00

30.00

30.00

29.00

28.00

28.00

27.00

26.00

35.00

45.00

43.00

41.00

41.00

38.00

38.00

36.00

35.00

35.00

34.00

33.00

32.00

32.00

32.00

30.00

29.00

29.00

40.00

51.00

50.00

48.00

47.00

45.00

43.00

42.00

40.00

39.00

39.00

38.00

37.00

36.00

35.00

35.00

34.00

33.00

50.00

64.00

62.00

60.00

58.00

56.00

54.00

52.00

50.00

49.00

48.00

47.00

46.00

45.00

44.00

43.00

42.00

41.00

63.00

81.00

78.00

76.00

73.00

71.00

68.00

66.00

63.00

62.00

61.00

60.00

58.00

57.00

56.00

55.00

53.00

52.00

IMA(f)IMA (50 Hz) [%]

60

100

200

300

400

91

100

101

106

115

134

141

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

1 1 1

Load Carrying Capacity of Adjoining Miniature Circuit Breakers

1

1.00 Rated Diversity Factor

1

1

Mains Frequency f [Hz] 50

1

1

Influence of the Mains Frequency Influence of the mains frequency on the tripping behavior IMA of the instantaneous release 16 2/3

1

1 1

0.90

1 1

0.80

1

0.70 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

1

8

Number of Circuit Breakers

1 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-83

1.3

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 1077 DIN Rail Supplementary Protectors

1

Accessories Technical Data

1

Description

FAZ-XHIN FAZ-XAM002

FAZ-XAA-C

FAZ-XUA

Contact function

1A + 1B 2 C/O

— —

— —

Rated operational voltage Un

250 Vac

—

1

115 Vac 230 Vac 400 Vac

Voltage range

—

—

1

12–110 Vac 12–60 Vdc

Voltage range

—

—

1

110–415 Vac 110–230 Vdc

Closing threshold [x Un]

—

—

0.8

Tripping threshold [x Un]

—

—

0.5

Rated frequency ƒ

50/60 Hz

50/60 Hz

50/60 Hz

General use (UL/CSA) AC—230/240 Vac DC—110/120 Vdc

2/2A 0.5/0.5A

— —

— —

1 1

1 1 1 1 1 1

Electrical

Pilot duty

A600/Q600

—

—

Conventional free air thermal current Ith

4A

—

—

Rated operational current AC-13 Ie AC-15 Ie DC-13 Ie

3A (250 Vac) 2A (250 Vac) 0.5A (110 Vdc)

— — —

— — — —

Rated insulation voltage Ui

250 Vac

—

Minimum operating voltage per contract Umin

5 Vdc

—

—

Rated impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50μ) Uimp

2.5 kV

—

—

1

Rated conditional short-circuit current with 6A backup fuse ISC

1 kA

—

—

Max. admissible backup fuse

4A gL

—

—

1

Mechanical

1

Standard front dimension

45 mm

45 mm

45 mm

Device height

80 mm

80 mm

80 mm

Mounting width

8.8 mm

17.6 mm

17.8 mm

Mounting

On MCB

IEC/EN 60715 top-hat rail

IEC/EN 60715 top-hat rail

IP40

IP40

IP40

1

1 1

Degree of protection enclosed

1

Terminal protection

Protection against electric shock to IEC 536

Protection against electric shock to IEC 536

Protection against electric shock to IEC 536

1

Terminals

Lift terminals

Twin-purpose terminals

Twin-purpose terminals

Terminal capacity Solid Flexible

0.5–2.5 mm2 0.5–2.5 mm2

1–2.5 mm2 1–2.5 mm2

2 x (1–2.5) mm2 2 x (1–2.5) mm2

Tightening torque of terminal screws

0.8–1.0 Nm (7–9 lb-in)

2.4 Nm (21 lb-in)

0.8 Nm (7 lb-in)

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

V4-T1-84

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 1077 DIN Rail Supplementary Protectors

1.3

Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

1

Miniature Circuit Breakers

1 1

FAZ 0.74 (9.4)

1 1

1.77 (45.0)

3.15 (80.0)

1 1

1.40 (35.4)

0.70 (17.8)

2.09 (53.1)

0.22 (5.5)

2.79 (70.8)

1

1.73 (44.0)

1

2.36 (60.0)

1 1

Auxiliary Contacts FAZ-XHI11 and FAZ-XH1NW1

FAZ-XAM002

1 1

3.15 (80.0)

3.15 (80.0)

1.77 (45.0)

1

1.77 (45.0)

1 1

0.35 (8.8)

0.22 (5.5)

1.73 (44.0)

0.35 (8.8)

2.36 (60.0)

0.22 (5.5)

Shunt Releases

Undervoltage Releases

FAZ-XAA

FAZ-XUA

1.73 (44.0)

1 1

2.36 (60.0)

1 1 1

3.15 (80.0)

1.77 (45.0)

3.15 (80.0)

1

1.77 (45.0)

1 1

0.70 (17.8) 1.03 (26.2)

0.22 (5.5)

1.20 (30.5) 1.73 (44.0)

0.39 (10.0) 2.36 (60.0)

0.70 (17.8)

0.22 (5.5)

1.73 (44.0)

1 1

2.36 (60.0)

1 1 1 1

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-85

1.3 1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 1077 DIN Rail Supplementary Protectors

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

1

Busbar and Accessory Weights and Dimensions

1

Unit Weight (kg)

Length

Width

Height

Catalog Number

0.29

39.72 (1009.0)

0.59 (15.0)

0.59 (15.0)

BB-UL-18/1P-1M/57

0.64

39.02 (991.0)

0.87 (22.0)

1.46 (37.0)

BB-UL-18/2P-2M/56

1

0.83

39.72 (1009.0)

0.87 (22.0)

1.46 (37.0)

BB-UL-18/3P-3M/57

1

0.26

38.78 (985.0)

0.59 (15.0)

0.59 (15.0)

BB-UL-18/1P-1.5M/37

0.63

39.72 (1009.0)

0.87 (22.0)

1.46 (37.0)

BB-UL-18/2P+AS-2.5M/46

1

0.79

38.66 (982.0)

0.87 (22.0)

1.46 (37.0)

BB-UL-18/3P+AS-3.5M/48

0.36

39.72 (1009.0)

0.59 (15.0)

0.59 (15.0)

BB-UL-25/1P-1M/57

1

0.79

39.02 (991.0)

0.87 (22.0)

1.46 (37.0)

BB-UL-25/2P-2M/56

1

1.04

39.72 (1009.0)

0.87 (22.0)

1.46 (37.0)

BB-UL-25/3P-3M/57

1

0.31

38.78 (985.0)

0.59 (15.0)

0.59 (15.0)

BB-UL-25/1P-1.5M/37

1

0.73

39.72 (1009.0)

0.87 (22.0)

1.46 (37.0)

BB-UL-25/2P+AS-2.5M/46

0.97

38.66 (982.0)

0.87 (22.0)

1.46 (37.0)

BB-UL-25/3P+AS-3.5M/48

1

0.03

2.36 (60.0)

0.67 (17.0)

1.14 (29.0)

BB-UL-TEP/35

0.03

1.42 (36.0)

0.67 (17.0)

1.14 (29.0)

BB-UL-TEPA/35

1

0.03

1.57 (40.0)

0.71 (18.0)

1.18 (30.0)

BB-UL-TE/50

1

0.003

3.35 (85.0)

0.47 (12.0)

0.94 (24.0)

BB-IP/5

0.001

0.55 (14.0)

0.20 (5.0)

0.39 (10.0)

BB-EV-EC/3

0.001

0.94 (24.0)

0.87 (22.0)

0.39 (10.0)

BB-UL-EC/1

1 1

L

1

W

1 1

L1

L2

L1

L2

L1

L2

L1

L2

L1

L2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V4-T1-86

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

L1

L2

H

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB

1.4

Contents

UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB

Description UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB 480/277 Vac Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB 208Y/120 Vac. . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page V4-T1-88 V4-T1-89 V4-T1-90 V4-T1-91 V4-T1-93

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB 480/277 Vac Product Overview

Features

Optimum product quality, tested reliability and safety stand for best protection of installations and plant. Eaton’s UL 1053 Residual Current Circuit Breaker (RCCB) is designed for use in residual current applications.

●

Application Description ● ●

● ● ● ●

Motor control circuits HVAC internal/external equipment PLCs HMIs Equipment protection European housing

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

1

Standards and Certifications

Wide range of compact RCCB types serving as fault-current and additional protection according to UL 1053 and IEC/EN 61008 standards, suitable for worldwide use Type A or Type G/A (with delay) protection available Comprehensive range of accessories Real contact position indicator Fault current tripping indicator Transparent designation plate Trip-free design—RCCB can not be defeated by holding the handle in the ON position Captive screws cannot be lost

● ● ● ● ●

UL 1053 IEC/EN 61008 CSA ÖVE CE Marked

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-87

1.4

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB

1

Product Selection

1

UL 1053 RCCB 480Y/277V Type A

1

Two-Pole

Conditionally Surge Current–Proof 250A, Sensitive to Residual Pulsating DC, Type A Two-Pole Amperes

GF Sensitivity (mA)

Catalog Number 1

Designation

1

25

30

167113

FRCmM-25/2/003-A-NA

300

167116

FRCmM-25/2/03-A-NA

1

40

30

167114

FRCmM-40/2/003-A-NA

300

167117

FRCmM-40/2/03-A-NA

30

167115

FRCmM-63/2/003-A-NA

300

167118

FRCmM-63/2/03-A-NA

1

1

63

1 1

Four-Pole

Conditionally Surge Current–Proof 250A, Sensitive to Residual Pulsating DC, Type A Four-Pole

1 1

Amperes

GF Sensitivity (mA)

Catalog Number 1

Designation

25

30

167125

FRCmM-25/4/003-A-NA

300

167104

FRCmM-25/4/03-A-NA

30

167102

FRCmM-40/4/003-A-NA

300

167105

FRCmM-40/4/03-A-NA

30

167103

FRCmM-63/4/003-A-NA

300

167106

FRCmM-63/4/03-A-NA

1

40

1

63

1 1 1 1

UL 1053 RCCB 480Y/277V Type G/A Type G/A has a 10 ms delay. Two-Pole

Surge Current–Proof 3 kA, Sensitive to Residual Pulsating DC, Type G/A (ÖVE E 8601) Two-Pole

1

Amperes

GF Sensitivity (mA)

Catalog Number 1

Designation

1

25

30

167119

FRCmM-25/2/003-G/A-NA

300

167122

FRCmM-25/2/03-G/A-NA

1

40

30

167120

FRCmM-40/2/003-G/A-NA

1

300

167123

FRCmM-40/2/03-G/A-NA

63

30

167121

FRCmM-63/2/003-G/A-NA

300

167124

FRCmM-63/2/03-G/A-NA

1 1

Four-Pole

Surge Current–Proof 3 kA, Sensitive to Residual Pulsating DC, Type G/A (ÖVE E 8601) Four-Pole Amperes

GF Sensitivity (mA)

Catalog Number 1

Designation

1

25

30

167107

FRCmM-25/4/003-G/A-NA

300

167110

FRCmM-25/4/03-G/A-NA

1

40

30

167108

FRCmM-40/4/003-G/A-NA

1

300

167111

FRCmM-40/4/03-G/A-NA

63

30

167109

FRCmM-63/4/003-G/A-NA

300

167112

FRCmM-63/4/03-G/A-NA

1

1

Note 1 Has no thermal element; must be paired with FAZ-NA or FAZ per application.

1 1 V4-T1-88

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

1.4

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB

Accessories

1 UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB 480/277 Vac

Contact

Description

Catalog Number

Two-pole contact or auxiliary contact / trip indicating contact

Z-NHK 1

Padlock Hasp

Description

Catalog Number

Padlock hasp

Z-IS/SPE-1TE

1 1 1 1 1

Lockoff Device

UL lockoff device

1

FAZPLOFF

1 1 1 1 Note 1 Voltage of FAZ-NA circuit breaker is limited to 300V with this auxiliary contact installed.

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-89

1.4

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB

1

Technical Data and Specifications

1

●

1

●

1

●

●

●

1

●

1

●

●

1 1

● ●

1 1 1

● ●

●

1 1

●

1 1

●

1

●

1 1 1 1

Residual current devices Has no thermal protection; must be paired with FAZ-NA or FAZ per application Captive screw terminals Universal tripping signal switch, also suitable for Z-A; can be mounted subsequently Auxiliary switch Z-HK can be mounted subsequently Red-green contact position indicator White-blue tripping indicator Delayed types recommended for use with standard fluorescent tubes with or without electronical ballast (30mA-RCD: 30 units per phase conductor, 100mA-RCD: 90 units per phase conductor) The device functions irrespective of the position of installation Tripping is line voltage-independent. Consequently, the RCD is suitable for “fault current/residual current protection” and “additional protection” within the meaning of the applicable installation rules Reverse-feed permitted The four-pole device can also be used for two-pole connection. For this purpose, use terminals 5-6 and N-N The test key “T” must be pressed every month. The system operator must be informed of this obligation and responsibility in a way that can be proven (self-adhesive RCD-label enclosed) Pressing the test key “T” serves the only purpose of function testing the residual current device (RCD). This test does not make earthing resistance measurement (RE) or proper checking of the earth conductor condition redundant, which must be performed separately Type -A: Protects against special forms of residual pulsating DC that have not been smoothed Type -G/A: Additionally protects against special forms of residual pulsating DC that have not been smoothed

UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB Technical Data, continued Description

Specification

Electrical According to UL 1053 Design according to

UL 1053

Current test marks as printed onto the device Tripping Type G

8 ms delay

Rated voltage Un

480Y/277V, 60 Hz

Pickup current

22, 200 mA

Sensitivity

AC and pulsating DC

Overvoltage tested

530V

Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp

4 kV

Rated short-circuit capacity Inc

5 kA according to CSA

Maximum backup fuse

Overload protection

Short-circuit protection

In = 25–40A

25A gG/gL

63A gG/gL

In = 63A

40A gG/gL

63A gG/gL

Rated breaking capacity Im or Rated fault breaking capacity I'm In = 25–40A

500A

In = 63A

630A

Voltage range of test button Endurance

Two-pole

184–305V~

Four-pole

184–528V~

Electrical

>4000 operating cycles

Mechanical

>20,000 operating cycles

Mechanical Frame size

45.0 mm

Device height

80.0 mm

Device width

35 mm (2TE), 70 mm (4TE)

Device width

Quick fastening with two lock-in positions on DIN rail IEC/EN 60715

Degree of protection, built-in

IP40

UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB Technical Data

Degree of protection in moisture-proof enclosure

IP54

Description

Upper and lower terminals

Lift terminals

Terminal protection

Finger and hand touch safe BGV A3, ÖVE-EN 6

Specification

Electrical According to IEC/EN 61008 Design according to

IEC/EN 61008 Terminal capacity

ÖVE E 8601

1.5–35 mm2 single-wire 2 x 16 mm2 multi-wire

Current test marks as printed onto the device

1

Tripping Type G

10 ms delay

Busbar material thickness

0.8–2 mm

Rated voltage Un

230/400V, 50 Hz

Tripping temperature

–25°C to +60°C

1

Rated tripping current I'n

30, 300 mA

Resistance to climatic conditions

According to IEC 61008

Sensitivity

AC and pulsating DC

Humidity

5–95%

1

Rated insulation voltage Ui

440V

Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp

4 kV

1 1 1 1

Rated short-circuit capacity Inc

10 kA

Maximum backup fuse

Overload protection

Short-circuit protection

In = 25–40A

25A gG/gL

63A gG/gL

In = 63A

40A gG/gL

63A gG/gL

Rated breaking capacity Im bzw. Rated fault breaking capacity I'm In = 25–40A

500A

In = 63A

630A

1

Voltage range of test button

1

Endurance

1

Overvoltage category

V4-T1-90

Two-pole

184–250V~

Four-pole

184–440V~

Electrical

>4000 operating cycles

Mechanical

>20,000 operating cycles

III

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

1.4

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB

Connection Diagram

Impact of Ambient Temperature on the Maximum Permanent Current Allowed (A)

1 N

1 3 5 N

T

16A

25A

40A

1

63A

Tripping Temperature

TwoPole

FourPole

TwoPole

FourPole

TwoPole

FourPole

TwoPole

FourPole

40°C

16

16

25

25

40

40

63

63

T

2 N Two-Pole

45°C

14

14

21

22

37

37

59

59

2 4 6 N

50°C

11

11

18

19

33

34

55

55

Four-Pole

55°C

9

9

14

16

30

31

50

50

60°C

1

—

—

—

26

27

45

45

Notes 1 Do not use. Please make sure that these values are not exceeded and that any upstream overload protection switches off in time.

Correct Connection

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

3+N (230/400V) IEC (277/480V) UL

Three-phase load without N (184–254 Vac Phase-Phase) IEC (184–277 Vac Phase-Phase) UL

Three-phase load without N (400 Vac Phase-Phase) IEC (480 Vac Phase-Phase) UL

1+N (230V) IEC (277V) UL

1 1 1

Dimensions

1

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB 0.22 (5.5)

1.20 (30.5)

1

0.18 (4.5)

1 1 1

3.15 (80.0)

1.77 (45.0)

1 1

2.76 (70.0)

Four-Pole

1

0.41 (10.5)

1.73 (44.0)

1

2.36 (60.0)

1 1 1 1 1 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-91

1.4 1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB

Accessories Technical Data Description

Z-NHK

1

Electrical

1

Rated voltage

230V

Frequency

50/60 Hz

1

Contact function

2CO

Rated current

2A

Rated thermal current Ith

2A 3A/250 Vac

1

Utilization category AC13 Rated operational current Ie Utilization category AC15 Rated operational current Ie

2A/250 Vac

1

Utilization category DC12 Rated operational current Ie

0.5A/110 Vdc

1

Rated insulation voltage UI

250 Vac

Minimum operational voltage per contact Umin

5 Vdc

1

1

Minimum operational current Imin

10 mA DC

Rated peak withstand voltage Uimp (1.2/50μ)

2.5 kV

1

Conditional short-circuit current Ik with backup fuse 6A

1 kA

Maximum backup fuse, overload and short circuit

6A gL

1

Mechanical Tripping indicator “electrical tripping”

Blue/white

1

Frame size

45 mm

1

Device height

80 mm

Device width

8.8 mm (0.5MU)

Mounting

Onto switching device

Degree of protection, built-in

IP40

Terminal protection

Finger and hand touch safe According to BGV A3, ÖVE-EN 6

Terminals

Lift terminals

1

Terminal capacity

20–14 AWG

1

Terminal screws

M3 (Posidrive Z0)

Fastening torque of terminal screws

7 lb-in maximum

1 1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V4-T1-92

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB

1.4

Contents

UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB

Description UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB 480/277 Vac . . . . . . . . . . UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB 208Y/120 Vac Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page V4-T1-87 V4-T1-94 V4-T1-95 V4-T1-96 V4-T1-97

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB 208Y/120 Vac Product Overview

Features

Optimum product quality, tested reliability and safety stand for best protection of installations and plant. Eaton’s UL 1053 Residual Current Circuit Breaker (RCCB) is designed for use in residual current applications.

●

Application Description ● ●

● ● ●

Motor control circuits HVAC internal/external equipment PLCs HMIs Equipment protection

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

1

Standards and Certifications

Wide range of compact RCD type serving as faultcurrent and additional protection according to UL 1053 and IEC/EN 61008 standards, suitable for worldwide use in the 110V range of applications Type A or Type G/A (with delay) protection available Comprehensive range of accessories Real contact position indicator Fault current tripping indicator Transparent designation plate Trip-free design—RCCB can not be defeated by holding the handle in the ON position Captive screws cannot be lost

● ●

UL 1053 IEC/EN 61008

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-93

1.4

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB

1

Product Selection

1

UL 1053 RCCB 208Y/120 Vac Type A

1

Four-Pole

Conditionally Surge Current–Proof 250A, Sensitive to Residual Pulsating DC, Type A Four-Pole

1

Amperes

1

25

GF Sensitivity (mA)

Catalog Number 1

Designation FRCmM-25/4/003-A-NA-110

30

167699

300

167702

FRCmM-25/4/03-A-NA-110

167700

FRCmM-40/4/003-A-NA-110

1

40

30

1

300

167703

FRCmM-40/4/03-A-NA-110

63

30

167701

FRCmM-63/4/003-A-NA-110

300

167704

FRCmM-63/4/03-A-NA-110

1 1 1 1

UL 1053 RCCB 208Y/120 Vac Type G/A Type G/A has a 10 ms delay. Two-Pole

Surge Current–Proof 3 kA, Sensitive to Residual Pulsating DC, Type G/A (ÖVE E 8601) Two-Pole

1

Amperes

1

25

1

40

1

63

1 1 1

Four-Pole

GF Sensitivity (mA)

Catalog Number 1

Designation

30

167693

FRCmM-25/2/003-G/A-NA-110

300

167696

FRCmM-25/2/03-G/A-NA-110

30

167694

FRCmM-40/2/003-G/A-NA-110

300

167697

FRCmM-40/2/03-G/A-NA-110

30

167695

FRCmM-63/2/003-G/A-NA-110

300

167698

FRCmM-63/2/03-G/A-NA-110

Surge Current–Proof 3 kA, Sensitive to Residual Pulsating DC, Type G/A (ÖVE E 8601) Four-Pole

1

Amperes 25

GF Sensitivity (mA)

Catalog Number 1

Designation FRCmM-25/4/003-G/A-NA-110

30

167705

300

167708

FRCmM-25/4/03-G/A-NA-110

1

40

30

167706

FRCmM-40/4/003-G/A-NA-110

300

167709

FRCmM-40/4/03-G/A-NA-110

1

63

30

167707

FRCmM-63/4/003-G/A-NA-110

300

167710

FRCmM-63/4/03-G/A-NA-110

1

1

Note 1 Has no thermal element; must be paired with FAZ-NA or FAZ per application.

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V4-T1-94

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

1.4

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB

Accessories

1 UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB 208Y/120 Vac

Contact

Description

Catalog Number

Two-pole contact or auxiliary contact / trip indicating contact

Z-NHK 1

Padlock Hasp

Description

Catalog Number

Padlock hasp

Z-IS/SPE-1TE

1 1 1 1 1

Lockoff Device

UL lockoff device

1

FAZPLOFF

1 1 1 1 Note 1 Voltage of FAZ-NA circuit breaker is limited to 300V with this auxiliary contact installed.

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-95

1.4

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB

1

Technical Data and Specifications

1

●

1

●

1

●

●

●

1

●

1

●

●

1 1

● ●

1 1 1

● ●

●

1 1

●

1 1

●

1

●

1 1 1 1

Residual current devices Has no thermal protection; must be paired with FAZ-NA or FAZ per application Captive screw terminals Universal tripping signal switch, also suitable for Z-A; can be mounted subsequently Auxiliary switch Z-HK can be mounted subsequently Red-green contact position indicator White-blue tripping indicator Delayed types recommended for use with standard fluorescent tubes with or without electronical ballast (30mA-RCD: 30 units per phase conductor, 100mA-RCD: 90 units per phase conductor) The device functions irrespective of the position of installation Tripping is line voltage-independent. Consequently, the RCD is suitable for “fault current/residual current protection” and “additional protection” within the meaning of the applicable installation rules Reverse-feed permitted The four-pole device can also be used for two-pole connection. For this purpose, use terminals 5-6 and N-N The test key “T” must be pressed every month. The system operator must be informed of this obligation and responsibility in a way that can be proven (self-adhesive RCD-label enclosed) Pressing the test key “T” serves the only purpose of function testing the residual current device (RCD). This test does not make earthing resistance measurement (RE) or proper checking of the earth conductor condition redundant, which must be performed separately Type -A: Protects against special forms of residual pulsating DC that have not been smoothed Type -G/A: Additionally protects against special forms of residual pulsating DC that have not been smoothed

UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB Technical Data Description

Specification

UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB Technical Data, continued Description Electrical According to UL1053 Design according to

IEC/EN 61008

UL 1053

Current test marks as printed onto the device Tripping Type G

8 ms delay

Rated voltage Un

208Y/120V, 60 Hz

Pickup current

22, 200 mA

Sensitivity

AC and pulsating DC

Overvoltage tested

530V

Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp

4 kV

Rated short-circuit capacity Inc

5 kA according to CSA

Maximum backup fuse

Overload protection

Short-circuit protection

In = 25–40A

25A gG/gL

63A gG/gL

In = 63A

40A gG/gL

63A gG/gL

Rated breaking capacity Im or Rated fault breaking capacity I'm In = 25–40A

500A

In = 63A

630A

Voltage range of test button Endurance

Two-pole

100–121V~

Four-pole

100–210V~

Electrical

>4000 operating cycles

Mechanical

>20,000 operating cycles

Mechanical Frame size

45.0 mm

Device height

80.0 mm

Device width

35 mm (2TE), 70 mm (4TE)

Device width

Quick fastening with two lock-in positions on DIN rail IEC/EN 60715

Degree of protection, built-in

IP40

Degree of protection in moisture-proof enclosure

IP54

Upper and lower terminals

Lift terminals

Terminal protection

Finger and hand touch safe BGV A3, ÖVE-EN 6

Terminal capacity

1.5–35 mm2 single-wire

Electrical According to IEC/EN 61008 Design according to

Specification

2 x 16 mm2 multi-wire

ÖVE E 8601 Current test marks as printed onto the device

Busbar material thickness

0.8–2 mm

1

Tripping Type G

10 ms delay

Tripping temperature

–25°C to +60°C

Rated voltage Un

230/400V, 50 Hz

Resistance to climatic conditions

According to IEC 61008

1

Rated tripping current I'n

30, 300 mA

Humidity

5–95%

Sensitivity

AC and pulsating DC

1

Rated insulation voltage Ui

440V

Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp

4 kV

1 1 1 1

Rated short-circuit capacity Inc

10 kA

Maximum backup fuse

Overload protection

Short-circuit protection

In = 25–40A

25A gG/gL

63A gG/gL

In = 63A

40A gG/gL

63A gG/gL

Rated breaking capacity Im bzw. Rated fault breaking capacity I'm In = 25–40A

500A

In = 63A

630A

1

Voltage range of test button

1

Endurance

1

Overvoltage category

V4-T1-96

Two-pole

100–132V~

Four-pole

100–230V~

Electrical

>4000 operating cycles

Mechanical

>20,000 operating cycles

III

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

1.4

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB

Connection Diagram

Impact of Ambient Temperature on the Maximum Permanent Current Allowed (A)

1 N

1 3 5 N

T

16A

25A

40A

1

63A

Tripping Temperature

TwoPole

FourPole

TwoPole

FourPole

TwoPole

FourPole

TwoPole

FourPole

40°C

16

16

25

25

40

40

63

63

T

2 N Two-Pole

45°C

14

14

21

22

37

37

59

59

2 4 6 N

50°C

11

11

18

19

33

34

55

55

Four-Pole

55°C

9

9

14

16

30

31

50

50

60°C

1

—

—

—

26

27

45

45

Notes 1 Do not use. Please make sure that these values are not exceeded and that any upstream overload protection switches off in time.

Correct Connection

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

3+N (230/400V) IEC (277/480V) UL

Three-phase load without N (184–254 Vac Phase-Phase) IEC (184–277 Vac Phase-Phase) UL

Three-phase load without N (400 Vac Phase-Phase) IEC (480 Vac Phase-Phase) UL

1+N (230V) IEC (277V) UL

1 1 1

Dimensions

1

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB 0.22 (5.5)

1.20 (30.5)

1

0.18 (4.5)

1 1 1

3.15 (80.0)

1

1.77 (45.0)

1 2.76 (70.0)

Four-Pole

1

0.41 (10.5)

1.73 (44.0)

1

2.36 (60.0)

1 1 1 1 1 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T1-97

1.4 1

Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB

Accessories Technical Data Description

Z-NHK

Z-IHK-NA

1NO + 1NC

1

Electrical

1

Contact function

2CO

Rated voltage

230V

250V

Frequency

50/60 Hz

50/60 Hz

1

Rated current

2A

6A

Rated thermal current Ith

2A

6A

3A/250 Vac

3A/250 Vac

1

Utilization category AC13 Rated operational current Ie Utilization category AC15 Rated operational current Ie

2A/250 Vac

2A/250 Vac

1

Utilization category DC12 Rated operational current Ie

0.5A/110 Vdc

1

0.5A/110 Vdc 0.25A/220 Vdc

Rated insulation voltage UI

250 Vac

250 Vac

1

Minimum operational voltage per contact Umin

5 Vdc

5 Vdc

Minimum operational current Imin

10 mA DC

10 mA AC/DC

1

Rated peak withstand voltage Uimp (1.2/50μ)

2.5 kV

4 kV

Conditional short-circuit current Ik with backup fuse 6A

1 kA

1 kA

1

Maximum backup fuse, overload and short circuit

6A gL

—

1

Tripping indicator “electrical tripping”

Blue/white

—

Frame size

45 mm

45 mm

1

Device height

80 mm

80 mm

Device width

8.8 mm (0.5MU)

8.8 mm (0.5MU) —

1

1

Mechanical

Mounting

Onto switching device

Degree of protection, built-in

IP40

IP40

Terminal protection

Finger and hand touch safe According to BGV A3, ÖVE-EN 6

Finger and hand touch safe According to BGV A3, ÖVE-EN 6

1

Terminals

Lift terminals

Lift terminals

Terminal capacity

20–14 AWG

0.5–2.5 mm2

1

Terminal screws

M3 (Posidrive Z0)

M3 (Posidrive Z0)

Fastening torque of terminal screws

7 lb-in maximum

1.2 Nm

1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V4-T1-98

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Circuit Breakers

2.1

Introduction Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Eaton Molded Case Circuit Breakers in Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2

2.3

2.4

2.5

2.6

2.7

V4-T2-2 V4-T2-2 V4-T2-3

Series G ®

Globally Accepted Breakers Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination . . . . . . Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Operators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawout Cassette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Series

V4-T2-331

V4-T2-338

Specialty

Specialty Breakers Engine Generator Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct Current Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PVGard™ Solar Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2 Mining Service Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2VAC Mining Vacuum Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Classic Mining Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add-On Ground Fault Protection—Type GFR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V4-T2-341 V4-T2-347 V4-T2-360 V4-T2-372 V4-T2-398 V4-T2-401 V4-T2-415

Handle Mechanisms Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Mechanisms—Series C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Learn Online

V4-T2-418 V4-T2-430

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Drawings Online

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2

2

Metering and Communications

Power Monitoring and Metering with Modbus RTU PM3 Monitoring and Metering Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

2 V4-T2-116 V4-T2-117 V4-T2-118 V4-T2-121 V4-T2-135 V4-T2-153 V4-T2-161 V4-T2-185 V4-T2-211 V4-T2-222 V4-T2-237 V4-T2-256 V4-T2-267 V4-T2-269 V4-T2-270 V4-T2-273 V4-T2-304

Definite Purpose

Optimized solution for HVAC/R and Pumping Applications. Definite Purpose Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 2

V4-T2-4 V4-T2-6 V4-T2-7 V4-T2-9 V4-T2-14 V4-T2-15 V4-T2-29 V4-T2-47 V4-T2-65 V4-T2-74 V4-T2-85 V4-T2-89 V4-T2-92 V4-T2-96 V4-T2-101 V4-T2-104 V4-T2-112 V4-T2-114 V4-T2-115

C®

North American Standards and Special Application Breakers Product Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

2 V4-T2-1

2.1 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Introduction

Series G E-Frame and Series C F-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Contents Description

2

Page

Introduction Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Definite Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PM3 Monitoring and Metering Module . . . . . . . . Specialty Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 2 2

Learn Online

2

V4-T2-4 V4-T2-116 V4-T2-331 V4-T2-338 V4-T2-341

Drawings Online

2 2 2 2 2

Product Overview

Application Description

2

Series G vs. Series C

Eaton molded case circuit breakers cover the widest range of applications in the industry:

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Eaton’s Electrical Sector, under the Eaton brand, offers the widest variety of molded case circuit breakers available today. Designed for electrical and machinery OEMs serving a range of industries and applications, these proven designs incorporate the latest in innovation with the high reliability that has been our hallmark since the advent of the circuit breaker in the 1920s. The Series C family ranges from 15–2500 amperes, and includes thermal-magnetic breakers, electronic trip breakers, molded case switches, motor circuit protectors, and specially designed breakers for engine generator, DC and mining applications. The new Series G line features an average 35% size reduction, common field-installable internal accessories, and advanced trip unit functionality that eliminates the need for rating plugs. These breakers meet the requirements of UL®, CSA®, IEC, CCC and CE, allowing the OEM to standardize on a design that meets the needs of their global customer base.

● ● ●

●

● ● ●

●

Electrical OEMs Machinery OEMs Navy breakers: ● UL 489 Supplement SB ● MIL-C-17588 ● MIL-C-17361 ● ABS/NVR Mining breakers up to 1100 Vac Earth leakage DC breakers 125–750 Vdc Engine generator breakers 15–1200 amperes Current limiting breakers

Feeder Pillars In distribution systems to provide main and branch circuit protection.

Individual Enclosures Completely assembled in enclosures to meet specific customer requirements.

Switchgear In distribution systems to provide main and branch circuit protection up to 2500 amperes (RG-Frame).

Additional Applications Special versions of each Eaton frame are available to provide safe equipment control and protection in mining and other applications. Contact your Eaton agent or distributor for additional information.

Busbar Trunking Tap-Offs In busbar trunking tap-offs to provide circuit protection. Typical Eaton Applications

Typical Applications Machine Tool Control Panels and Motor Control Centers Designed for these equipment requirements, including new world-class accessories.

Panelboard

Panelboards As both main and branch circuit protection devices.

Individual Circuit Breaker Enclosure Busbar Trunking Tap-Off Machine Tool Control Panel

Switchboard

2 V4-T2-2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.1

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Introduction

Eaton Molded Case Circuit Breakers in Assemblies

2

Applications Panelboards Ampere Frame Range

Switchboards

2

Motor Control Centers

1A

2A

1A-LX 2A-LX 3A

3E

4

4B

4D

5P

PRL-C PRL-i

PRL-C/i Freedom

IT.

Enclosed Control

■

■

Bus Plugs

Enclosed Breaker

—

—

Series G EG

15–160 1

—

—

—

—

—

■

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

JG

20–250

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

■

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

LG

100–630 2

■

■

—

—

■

■

■

■

■

—

■

—

■

—

—

—

—

■

NG

400–1600

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

■

■

—

■

■

■

■

■

—

—

■

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

■

—

■

■

■

—

—

—

FD/ED 15–225

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

—

■

■

■

■

■

JD

70–250

■

■

—

—

■

—

■

■

■

■

■

■

—

■

■

■

■

■

KD

70–400

■

■

—

—

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

LD

400–600

—

—

—

—

■

—

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

MDL

300–800

—

—

—

—

—

—

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

ND

400–1200

—

—

—

—

—

—

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

RD

800–2500

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

■

■

-

■

■

■

—

—

—

RG

800–2500

3

■

2 2 2 2

Series C

2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 125 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for EG. 2 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for LG. 3 1200 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for NG.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-3

2.2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

Series G, 15–2500 Amperes for UL, CSA and IEC Applications

Contents Description

2

Page

Series G Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . . . 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module. . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Learn Online

2

V4-T2-5 V4-T2-6 V4-T2-7 V4-T2-9 V4-T2-14 V4-T2-15 V4-T2-29 V4-T2-47 V4-T2-65 V4-T2-74 V4-T2-85 V4-T2-89 V4-T2-92 V4-T2-96 V4-T2-101 V4-T2-104 V4-T2-112 V4-T2-114 V4-T2-115

Drawings Online

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Product Overview Series G, 15–2500 Amperes for UL, CSA and IEC Applications Eaton Series G molded case circuit breakers provide increased performance in considerably less space than standard circuit breakers or comparable fusible devices. The “G” signifies global applications: Series G circuit breakers are marked with UL, CSA, CE, IEC and KEMA KEUR listings. Other advantages include: ● ●

●

●

●

Field-fit accessories Common accessories through 630 amperes Electronic trip units from 20 to 2500 amperes UL-listed and IEC-rated, 30 mA ground fault/earth leakage modules Built-in ground fault protection down to 20 amperes

The EG, JG and LG frames are designed around space-saving footprints. The NG and RG use the proven Eaton Series C ND and RD designs. The Series G family includes five frame sizes in ratings from 15 to 2500 amperes. Series G offers a choice of several interrupting capacities up to 200 kA at 480 volts AC (200 kA at 240 volts AC). Series G molded case circuit breakers are also available in direct current options. Please see Specialty Breakers Section 2.6 for more details. Standard calibration is 40 °C. For applications in high ambient temperature conditions, 50 °C factory calibration is available on thermal-magnetic breakers (not UL).

The Most Logically Designed Contact Assembly The flexibility and outstanding performance characteristics of Eaton circuit breakers are made possible by the best contact designs in circuit breaker history. Our technology creates a highspeed “blow-open” action using the electromechanical forces produced by high-level fault currents. Eaton circuit breakers are operated by a toggle-type mechanism that is mechanically trip-free from the handle so that the contacts cannot be held closed against short circuit currents. Tripping due to overload or short circuits is clearly indicated by the position on the handle. This remarkably fast and dependable contact action is designed to enhance safety.

2 2 2 V4-T2-4

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Thorough In-Plant Testing The quality, dependability and reliability of every Eaton Circuit Breaker is ensured by a thorough program of inplant testing. Two calibration tests are conducted on every pole of every circuit breaker to verify the trip mechanism, operating mechanism, continuity and accuracy.

Current Limiting Characteristics Circuit breakers are current limiting because of their high repulsion contact arrangement and use of state-of-the-art arc extinguishing technology. Eaton offers one of the most complete lines of current limiting breakers in the industry. The industrial breakers are available in current limiting versions with interrupting capacities up to 200 kA at 480 V without fuses in the same physical size as standard and high interrupting capacity breakers.

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

Operating Mechanisms Eaton circuit breakers have a toggle handle operating mechanism, which also serves as a switching position indicator. The indicator shows the positions of: ON, OFF and TRIPPED.

The toggle handle snaps into the TRIPPED position if the breaker is tripped by one of its overcurrent, short circuit, shunt or undervoltage releases. Before the circuit breaker can be reclosed following a trip-out, the toggle handle must be brought beyond the OFF position (RESET). The circuit breaker can then be reclosed.

As an additional switching position indicator for EG- to RG-Frame circuit breakers, there are two windows on the right and on the left of the toggle handle, in which the switching state is indicated by means of the colors red, green and white corresponding to the ON, OFF and TRIPPED positions respectively.

Positions of the Toggle Handle Drive

OFF Reset

ON

Tripped

●

●

Japanese T-Mark standard molded case circuit breakers

2 2 2

Global Third-Party Certification

Molded case circuit breakers from Eaton are designed to conform with the following international standards:

●

2

2

Eaton Series G circuit breakers meet applicable UL 489 and IEC 60947-2 standards.

Australian Standard AS 2184 and AS 3947-2 molded case circuit breakers British Standards Institution Standard EN60947.2 International Electromechanical Commission Recommendations IEC 60947.2 circuit breakers

2

2

Standards and Certifications

●

2

●

●

●

National Electrical Manufacturers Association Standards Publication No. AB1-1993 molded case circuit breakers South African Bureau of Standards, Standard SANS 156, Standard Specification for molded case circuit breakers Swiss Electro-Technical Association Standard SEV 947.2, Safety Regulations for circuit breakers

●

●

Union Technique de l’Electricite Standard NF C 63-120, low voltage switchgear and control gear circuit breaker requirements Verband Deutscher Elektrotechnike (Association of German Electrical Engineers) Standard VDE 0660, low voltage switchgear and control gear, circuit breakers

Certification marks ensure product compliance with the total standard via the third party witnessing of tests by globally recognized independent certification organizations. KEMA is a highly recognized, independent international organization that offers certification and inspection facilities for equipment in many industries. The KEMAKEUR mark is the highest certification an electrical product can receive from KEMA. Our IEC 60947-2 molded case circuit breakers are KEMA tested and certified. These breakers are also listed in accordance with UL 489, as well as CSA C22.2 No. 5-02. KEMA, UL and CSA provide ongoing follow-up testing and inspections to ensure that Eaton molded case circuit breakers continue to meet their exacting standards.

ISO Certification Eaton circuit breakers are manufactured in ISO® certified facilities.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-5

2.2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

Product Selection Overview Electronic Trip Units (Digitrip RMS Trip Units)—Multi-Function Electronic Trip Units for All Applications True rms Sensing Digitrip RMS trip units use Eaton’s microprocessor-based intelligence to provide true rms sensing, permitting increased accuracy and reliable system protection. True rms sensing is not susceptible to nuisance tripping when waveforms containing high harmonic currents are present. Digitrip RMS 310+ Digitrip RMS 310+ electronic trip units are available with Eaton Series G circuit breakers JG, LG, NG and RG, as well as Series C FD, KD, LD and MDL circuit breakers. Digitrip 310+ trip units are equipped with an integrated Ir switch that allows users to modify the continuous current rating of the breaker without having to replace a rating plug. This provides further flexibility for coordination in systems. The trip units may be used in 50 Hz or 60 Hz applications. The Digitrip 310+ offers true rms sensing, is front adjustable and has an optional local display of current and cause of trip. Curve Shaping When selectively coordinated systems are called for, Digitrip RMS 310+ will provide a cost-effective solution for a variety of applications. The standard Digitrip RMS 310+ includes an adjustable short time pickup setting encompassing an I2t ramp function that provides the basic LS curve shaping function. Digitrip 310+ trip units also include selectable long time delay (tLD) and pickup settings (Ir). A rating plug is not required.

2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-6

The optional Digitrip RMS 310+ LSI and LSIG provide additional flat response short time delay adjustments and an instantaneous setting to provide LSI curve shaping capability. Digitrip RMS 310+ LSG and LSIG units are available with ground fault pickup and flat response ground fault delay. Ground fault alarm options are available with trip and no trip functionality as a means to notify users of a ground fault condition with the option to maintain the breaker online. Digitrip RMS 310+ trip units can effectively coordinate with both sophisticated upstream power breakers as well as downstream thermalmagnetic breakers, making Digitrip RMS 310+ trip units the cost-effective reliable choice for selectively coordinated systems. Thermal Memory All Digitrip RMS trip units incorporate a long delay. Thermal memory prevents the system from cumulative overheating due to repeated overcurrent events that may occur in quick succession. Field Testing A field test kit is available for Digitrip RMS 310+ trip units. Arcflash Reduction Maintenance Mode (ARMS) ARMS is an available feature on KD, LG, LD, MDL, NG and RG frames with 310+ electronic trip units. This feature increases worker safety by providing an accelerated instantaneous trip unit to reduce arc flash. Additionally, LG, NG and RG frames with the ARMS feature include a fully adjustable instantaneous setting.

Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 trip units are available with Eaton R-Frame circuit breakers 800 through 2500 amperes. Digitrip 610 and 910 trip units provide unparalleled system protection with the added convenience of a local display. Curve Shaping Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 trip units are available with up to nine curve shaping choices achieved by adjusting up to seven switches on the front of the unit for optimum system coordination. Maximum curve shaping flexibility is provided by dependent long and short delay adjustments that are long delay pickup (Ir) based, depicted on the front of the unit by the blue portion of the time-current curve. Additional coordination capability can be provided by utilizing the short delay and ground fault zone selective interlocking features available on these trip units. System Diagnostics Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 models of trip units provide long delay, short delay, instantaneous, and ground fault cause of trip LEDs on the front of the unit. Their display shows a magnitude of trip information, as well as remote signal contacts, for improved system alarming. System Monitoring Digitrip 610 and 910 trip units have the capability to monitor phase currents, as well as neutral or ground currents. This information is displayed on a large digital display mounted on the unit.

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Digitrip RMS 910 trip units can also provide the user with power and energy monitoring capability. Peak power demand, present power demand, and total energy, as well as forward and reverse energy can be monitored with this unit. Digitrip RMS 910 trip units have the additional capability of monitoring line-to-line voltage, as well as system power factor. Both parameters are displayed in the digital display window and are supported by LEDs to indicate which parameter is being displayed. Harmonics Monitoring Digitrip RMS 910 trip units are capable of displaying values of current harmonics in the digital display window. Percentage of harmonic content can be monitored for each phase, up to the 27th harmonic. Additionally, a total harmonic distortion value can be calculated and displayed. Communications Digitrip RMS 910 units have built-in communications options to allow all protection, monitoring, and control information to be transmitted back to a central location via the Eaton PowerNet™ system. Field Testing Integral field testing capability is provided on all 610 and 910 trip units. No additional test set is needed to perform both trip and no trip field testing.

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

Product Selection Guide

2

Electronic Trip Units

2

Digitrip—RMS 310+, 610 and 910 RMS 310+

RMS 610

2

RMS 910

2

JG

2 RG

2

LG/NG

2

Breaker Type

2

Series G frame(s)

JG-, LG-, NG- and RG-Frames

RG-Frame

RG-Frame

Ampere rating

20–2500 A

800–2500 A

800–2500 A

Interrupting rating at 415 V

35, 70, 100 kA

70, 100 kA

70, 100 kA

2

Yes

Yes

Yes

2

LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG

LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG

Trip Unit Sensing rms sensing Protection and Coordination Protection

Long delay

Short delay

Instantaneous

Ground fault

Ordering options

LS, LSG

LSI, LSIG

Fixed rating plug (In) 1

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Overtemperature trip

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Adjustable lr switch

Yes

Yes

No

No

Long delay setting

VAR/frame

VAR/frame

0.5–1.0 x (ln)

0.5–1.0 x (ln)

Long delay time I2t at 6x

10 seconds 2

10 seconds 2

2–24 seconds

2–24 seconds

Long delay thermal memory

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

High load alarm

1.05 lr

1.05 lr

0.85 x Ir

0.85 x Ir

2 2

Short delay setting

VAR/frame 4

VAR/frame 4

200–600% S1 and S2 x (Ir)

200–600% S1 and S2 x (Ir)

100 ms

No

100, 300, 500 ms

100, 300, 500 ms

Short delay time flat

No

I–300 ms

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

Short delay time ZSI

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Independent adjustable Inst. setting

No

Yes 5

Yes

Yes

Instantaneous setting

No

VAR/frame

200–600% M1 and M2 x (ln)

200–600% M1 and M2 x (ln)

Discriminator

No

No

Yes 6

Yes 6

Instantaneous override

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

VAR/Frame 7

VAR/Frame 7

25–100% x (ln) 7

25–100% x (ln) 7

Ground fault delay I2t at 0.62x

No

No

100, 300, 500 ms

100, 300, 500 ms

Ground fault delay flat

I–300 ms

I–300 ms

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

Ground fault ZSI

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Ground fault thermal memory

No

No

Yes

Yes

2 3 4 5 6 7

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes In = Rating plug rating. Ir = Long delay setting. 1

2 2

Short delay time I2t

Ground fault setting

2

2 2

310+ trip units have selectable settings instead of a rating plug. 310+ trip units have adjustable long delay times of 2–24 seconds, except NG 310+ for 800 A frame, for which it is 2–14 seconds. 310+ details are included by frame in Pages V4-T2-44 (JG), V4-T2-62 (LG), V4-T2-72 (NG), and V4-T2-83 (RG). JG/LG: 2X–14X (In); NG: 2X–8X (In); RG: 2X–9X (In); 2500 ampere RG-Frame 2X–6X% x (In). LG, NG and RG ALSI and ALSIG 310+ trip units include an independently adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting. LS, LSG only. Not to exceed 1200 amperes.

2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-7

2.2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

Digitrip—RMS 310+, 610 and 910, continued RMS 310+

RMS 610

RMS 910

2 JG

2 2 2 2 2 2

RG

LG/NG

LS, LSG

LSI, LSIG

LSI, LSIG, LSIG (A)

LSI (A), LSIG

Cause of trip LEDs

Yes 1 2

Yes 1 2

Yes

Yes

Magnitude of trip information

No

No

Yes

Yes

Remote signal contacts

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

System Diagnostics

2

System Monitoring Digital display

Yes 3

Yes 3

Yes

2

Current

Yes 3

Yes 3

Yes

Yes

Voltage

No

No

No

Yes

Power and energy

No

No

No

Yes

Power quality—harmonics

No

No

No

Yes

Power factor

No

No

No

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

Test set 4

Test set 4

Integral

Integral

2 2 2

System Communications

2

Field Testing

2 2 2

PowerNet

Testing method

Notes 1 Using cause of trip module (catalog number TRIP-LED). 2 RG 310+ trip units include integrated cause of trip LEDs. 3 Using ammeter or remote ammeter/cause of trip display (catalog number DIGIVIEW and DIGIVIEWR06). 4 Test kit available for field testing 310+ trip units (catalog number MTST230V).

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-8

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

Technical Data and Specifications

2

Ratings

2

Frames EG, JG and LG EG

JG

2

LG

2 2 2 Maximum rated current (amperes)

125, 160 1

Breaker type 3

B

B

Number of poles

1

2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 1

S

S

H

H

C

E

2

400, 630 2

250 E

S

H

C

U

X

E

S

H

C

U

X

2, 3, 4 1

2, 3, 4 3, 4

2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 3, 4

3, 4

3, 4

3, 4

3, 4

3, 4

3, 4

3, 4

3, 4

2

200

200

2

Breaker Capacity (kA rms) Vac 50–60 Hz NEMA®, UL, CSA

240 Vac

25

25

35

85

85

100

100

200

65

85

100

200

200

200

65

85

100

200

480 Vac

—

18

25

—

35

—

65

100

25

35

65

100

150

200

35

50

65

100

150

200

600 Vac 4

—

—

18

—

22

—

25

35

18

18

25

35

50

50

18

25

35

50

65

65

10 6

10

10

35 6

35

42 6

42

42

10

22

22

42

50

50

22

22

42

42

50

50

IEC 60947-2 220–240 Vac

125/250 Vdc 5 Icu

25

25

35

85

85

100

100

200

65

85

100

200

200

200

65

85

100

200

200

200

Ics

25

25

35

43

43

50

50

200

65

85

100

200

200

200

65

85

100

200

200

200

380–415 Vac

Icu

—

18

25

—

40

—

70

100

25

40

70

100

150

200

35

50

70

100

150

200

Ics

—

18

25

—

30

—

35

100

25

40

70

100

150

200

35

50

53

100

150

200

Icu

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

12

12

14

16

18

18

12

20

25

30

35

35

Ics

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

6

6

7

12

14

14

6

10

13

15

18

18

Icu

10 6

10

10

35 6

35

42 6

42

42

10

22

22

42

50

50

22

22

42

42

50

50

Ics

10 6

10

10

35 6

35

42 6

42

42

10

22

22

42

50

50

22

22

42

42

50

50

660–690 Vac

125/250 Vdc 5

Ampere range

15–160 A 1

20–250 A

100–630 A 2

Trip Units F = Fixed A = Adjustable T = Thermal M = Magnetic

FT-FM AT-FM

FT-AM AT-AM Electronic (Digitrip RMS 310)

FT-AM AT-AM Electronic (Digitrip RMS 310)

Thermal magnetic

Electronic RMS 7

2 2 2 2 2 2

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Built-in

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Fixed thermal

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Adjustable thermal

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Magnetic

Fixed

LS

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

LSI

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

LSG

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

LSIG

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

ALSI

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

■

■

■

■

■

■

ALSIG

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

■

■

■

■

■

■

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

Utilization category

2

2

Interchangeable

Adjustable

2

Adjustable

Notes 1 125 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the EG. 2 630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA listed rating for the LG. 3 Breaker type C, U and X are current limiting per UL 489. 4 EG breaker rated 600/347 Vac. 5 Two poles in series. 6 125 Vdc only for single-pole breakers. 7 Not suitable for DC application. Four-pole ground fault not available.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-9

2.2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

Frames NG and RG NG

RG

2 2 2 2 1600 1

800

1600, 2000, 2500

1600, 2000, 2500

H

C

2

S

U

H

C2

2, 3, 4

2, 3, 4

2, 3, 4

3

3

3, 4

3, 4

240 Vac

85

100

200

—

200

125

200

480 Vac

50

65

100

—

150

65

100

600 Vac

25

35

65

—

65

50

65

Icu

85

100

200

85

—

135

200

Ics

85

100

100

85

—

100

100

Icu

50

70

100

50

—

70

100

Ics

50

50

50

50

—

50

50

Icu

20 3

25 3

35

20 3

—

25 3

35 3

Ics

10

13

18

10

—

13

18

Icu

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Maximum rated current (amperes)

800, 1200

2

Breaker type

S

2

Number of poles Breaker Capacity (kA rms) AC 50–60 Hz

2

NEMA, UL, CSA

2 2

IEC 60947-2

2

220–240 Vac

380–415 Vac

2

660–690 Vac

2

250 Vdc

2 2

Ics

800, 1200

800, 1200

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Ampere range

400–1200 A

400–1200 A

400–1200 A

1600 A

800 A

800–2500 A

800–2500 A

Trip units

Electronic (Digitrip RMS 310+)

2

Electronic (Digitrip RMS 310+ and 910)

Interchangeable

—

—

—

—

—

■5

■5

Built-in

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

LI

—

—

—

—

—

■6

■6

2

LS

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

LSI

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

2

LIG

—

—

—

—

—

■6

■6

LSG

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

2

LSIG

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

2

ALSI

■

■

■

■

—

■

■

ALSIG

■

■

■

■

—

■

■

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

2

2 2 2 2

Electronic 4

Utilization category

Notes 1 NG 1600 ampere frame is not UL or CSA listed. 2 Not KEMA-KEUR listed. 3 IEC 60947-2 H.5 Annex H is not KEMA-KEUR tested. 4 Not suitable for DC application. Four-pole ground fault not available. 5 RG 310+ are interchangeable with the exception of: FROM not ground fault equipped TO ground fault equipped 6 Available only on Digitrip 910 trip units.

2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-10

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

General Specifications

2

All Series G Frames

2

EG

JG

LG

NG

RG

160 A 1

250 A

400, 630 A 2

800, 1200, 1600 A 3

1600, 2000, 2500 A

Main conducting paths

500 Vac

750 Vac

750 Vac

750 Vac

750 Vac

Auxiliary circuits

500 Vac

690 Vac

690 Vac

690 Vac

690 Vac

Main conducting paths

6 kV

8 kV

8 kV

8 kV

8 kV

Auxiliary circuits

4 kV

4 kV

4 kV

4 kV

4 kV

IEC

415 Vac

690 Vac

690 Vac

690 Vac

690 Vac

NEMA

600Y/347 Vac

600 Vac

600 Vac

600 Vac

600 Vac

Yes 1

Yes

Yes 2

Yes 3

Yes

Maximum rated current In depending on the version Rated insulation voltage U, according to IEC 60947-2

2 2

Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp

2 2

Rated operational voltage Ue

UL and CSA listed

–20 ° to 70 °C

–20 ° to 70 °C

2

2 2

Permissible ambient temperature

–20 ° to 70 °C

–20 ° to 70 °C

–20 ° to 70 °C

Permissible load for various ambient temperatures close to the circuit breaker, related to the rated current of the circuit breaker

4

5

4

5

4

5

—

—

At 40 °C

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

At 50 °C

96%

92%

96%

94%

96%

91%

91%

91%

At 55 °C

93%

87%

94%

90%

93%

86%

85%

85%

At 60 °C

91%

83%

92%

87%

90%

82%

81%

81%

At 70 °C

86%

73%

88%

80%

84%

70%

70%

70%

2 2

2 2

Circuit breakers for plant protection

2 2

Circuit breakers for motor protection At 40 °C

—

100%

100%

—

—

At 50 °C

—

100%

100%

—

—

At 55 °C

—

100%

100%

—

—

At 60 °C

—

100%

100%

—

—

At 70 °C

—

90%

90%

—

—

At 40 °C

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

At 50 °C

100%

100%

100%

91%

91%

At 55 °C

96%

96%

95%

85%

85%

At 60 °C

91%

82%

90%

81%

81%

At 70 °C

86%

88%

84%

—

—

42 kA max.

42 kA max.

42 kA max.

6

6

2

42 kA max.

6

6

2

2 2 2

Circuit breakers for starter combinations and isolating circuit breakers

2 2 2 2

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (DC) Not for circuit breakers for motor protection (Time constant t = 10 rms) Two conducting paths in series For EG to LG up to 250 Vdc NEMA (time constant t = 8 rms) Two conducting paths in series 250 Vdc

42 kA max.

42 kA max.

2

Notes 1 125 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the EG. 2 630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the LG. 3 1200 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the NG. 4 Thermal overload release set to the lower value. 5 Thermal overload release set to the upper value. 6 Not suitable for DC switching.

2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-11

2.2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

All Series G Frames, continued EG

JG

LG

NG

RG

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

2

Main switch characteristics according to IEC 60947-2 in combination with lockable rotary drives

Yes

2

Rated short circuit breaking capacity according to IEC 60947-2 (at AC 50/60 Hz)

For rated short circuit breaking capacity, see Page V4-T2-9.

2

Endurance (operating cycles)

10,000

10,000

8,000

3,000

3,000

Maximum switching frequency

300 1/h

240 1/h

240 1/h

60 1/h

60 1/h

Conductor cross sections and terminal types for main conductors

Box terminals

Box terminals

Box terminals

Flat bar terminals Flat bar terminals

Flat bar terminals

Solid or stranded

2.5 to 95 mm2

50 to 150 mm2

95 to 240 mm2

—

—

—

Finely stranded with end sleeve

2.5 to 50/70 mm2

35 to 120 mm2

70 to 150 mm2

—

—

—

2 2 2

—

—

—

600 A

Optional

Optional

2

Tightening torque for box terminals

5.6 Nm

20 Nm

42 Nm

31 Nm

31 Nm

—

Tightening torque for busbar connection pieces

5.6 Nm

15 Nm

30 Nm

6 Nm

50 Nm

20 Nm

2

Conductor cross sections for auxiliary circuits with terminal connection or terminal strip Solid

0.75 to 2.5 mm2

0.75 to 2.5 mm2

0.75 to 2.5 mm2

Up to 2x4 mm2

Up to 2x4 mm2

Finely stranded with end sleeve

0.75 to 2.5 mm2

0.75 to 2.5 mm2

0.75 to 2.5 mm2

Up to 2x2.5 mm2

Up to 2x2.5 mm2

With brought-out cable ends

—

0.82 (AWG 18) mm2

0.82 (AWG 18) mm2

0.82 (AWG 18) mm2

0.82 (AWG 18) mm2

Tightening torque for fitting screws

—

0.8 to 1.4 Nm

0.8 to 1.4 Nm

0.8 to 1.4 Nm

0.8 to 1.4 Nm

2 2 2 2 2 2

Power loss per circuit breaker at maximum rated current ln (the power losses of the undervoltage releases (“r” releases) must be observed if necessary) at three-phase symmetrical load)

400 A:

600 A:

For plant protection

40 W

45 W

65 W

120 W

87/210 W

220/270/400 W

As isolating circuit breaker

40 W

45 W

65 W

120 W

87/210 W

220/270/400 W

For starter combinations

40 W

45 W

65 W

120 W

—

—

For motor protection

—

45 W

65 W

120 W

—

—

Permissible mounting position 90

90

90

2

90

2

Busbar

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Arc spacing— suitable for reverse-feed applications

Yes (except HMCPE)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Auxiliary Switches Rated thermal current lth

6A

6A

6A

6A

6A

Rated making capacity

20 A

20 A

20 A

20 A

20 A

AC-14

AC-14

AC-14

AC-15

AC-15

Rated operational voltage

230/400/600 V

230/400/600 V

230/400/600 V

600 V

600 V

Rated operational current

6/3/0.25 A

6/3/0.25 A

6/3/0.25 A

6A

6A

DC-13

DC-13

Rated operational voltage

125/250V

125/250V

125/250V

125/250V

125/250V

Rated operational current

0.5/0.25 A

0.5/0.15 A

0.5/0.15 A

0.5/0.15 A

0.5/0.25 A

Backup fuse

6/4/4 A

(4) 6/4/4 A

(4) 6/4/4 A

(4) 6/4/4 A

(4) 6/4/4 A

Miniature circuit breaker

6/4 A

6/4 A

6/4 A

6/4 A

6/4 A

2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-12

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

All Series G Frames, continued EG

JG

LG

NG

2

RG

2

Releases Undervoltage releases (“r” releases)

2

Response voltage: Drop (breaker tripped) Us

35–70%

35–70%

35–70%

35–70%

35–70%

Pickup (breaker may be switched on) Us

85–110%

85–110%

85–110%

85–110%

85–110%

2

50/60 Hz 12 Vac

—

—

—

1.9 VA

2.9 VA

2

50/60 Hz 24 Vac

0.72 VA

3.9 VA

3.9 VA

2.4 VA

3.1 VA

50/60 Hz 48–60 Vac

1.15–1.78 VA

2.5–3.8 VA

2.5–3.8 VA

2.3–4.1 VA

3.4–6.0 VA

50/60 Hz 110–127 Vac

0.96–1.25 VA

1.8–2.4 VA

1.8–2.4 VA

3.4–4.2 VA

3.3–3.8 VA

50/60 Hz 208–240 Vac

1.28–1.68 VA

2.7–3.8 VA

2.7–3.8 VA

4.8–6.5 VA

4.2–7.2 VA

50/60 Hz 380–500 Vac

2.2–3.9 VA

3.4–5.8 VA

3.4–5.8 VA

6.8–12.0 VA

3.8–10.0 VA

50/60 Hz 525–600 Vac

3.4–4.3 VA

3.4–4.3 VA

3.4–4.3 VA

—

—

12 Vdc

—

—

—

2.6W

3.4W

Power consumption in continuous operation at:

24 Vdc

0.70 W

3.1W

3.1W

3.6W

4.3W

48–60 Vdc

1.12–1.76W

2.0–3.1W

2.0–3.1W

3.5–5.5W

4.8–7.2W

110–125 Vdc

0.94–1.21W

1.6–2.2W

1.6–2.2W

2.9–3.6W

3.3–3.8W

220–250 Vdc Maximum opening time

1.45–1.86W

3.1–4W

3.1–4W

4.8–6.3W

6.6–7.5W

50 ms

50 ms

50 ms

62 ms

62 ms

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Shunt Trips Shunt trips (“f” releases)

2

Response voltage: 70–110%

70–110%

50/60 Hz 24 Vac

10–41 VA

50/60 Hz 48–60 Vac

139–210 VA

Pickup (breaker tripped) Us

70–110%

70–110%

70–110%

2

87–405 VA

87–405 VA

710–1105 VA

710–1105 VA

98–475 VA

612 VA

24–50 VA

403–666 VA

2

Power consumption in (short time) at:

2

50/60 Hz 48–127 Vac

—

—

—

—

—

50/60 Hz 110–240 Vac

83–360 VA

66–432 VA

66–432 VA

67–432 VA

396–1896 VA

50/60 Hz 380–440 Vac

—

127–188 VA

127–188 VA

76–110 VA

1596–2156 VA

50/60 Hz 380–600 Vac

418–1080 VA

—

—

—

—

50/60 Hz 480–600 Vac

—

34–60 VA

34–60 VA

19–42 VA

230–384 VA

12–24 Vdc

29–120 W

164–631 W

164–631 W

145–610 W

396 W

48–60 Vdc

475–720 W

830–1580 W

830–1580 W

67–102 W

341–528 W

110–125 Vdc

99–121 W

112–150 W

112–150 W

121–150 W

264–350 W

220–250 Vdc

—

40–58W

40–58 W

46–55 W

374–475 W

Maximum load duration

Interrupts automatically

Interrupts automatically

Interrupts automatically

Interrupts automatically

Interrupts automatically

Maximum opening time

50 ms

50 ms

50 ms

62 ms

62 ms

2 2 2 2 2

Molded Case Switch (with High Magnetic Trip) Unfused kAIC at 480 Vac (415 Vac)

65 (70)

65 (70)

65 (70)

65 (70)

65 (70)

Self-protected, will trip above

1250 for EG125; 1600 for EG160

2500

4000/6300

12,500

20,000

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-13

2.2 2 2

Series G

Dimensions and Weights Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Series G—Frame EG, JG and LG

2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

EG

Single-pole

JG

LG

H

W

D

H

W

D

H

W

D

5.50 (139.7)

1.00 (25.4)

2.99 (76.0)

—

—

—

—

—

—

Two-pole

5.50 (139.7)

2.00 (50.8)

2.99 (76.0)

7.00 (177.8)

4.13 (105.0)

3.57 (87.4)

—

—

—

Three-pole

5.50 (139.7)

3.00 (76.2)

2.99 (76.0)

7.00 (177.8)

4.13 (105.0)

3.57 (87.4)

10.13 (258.0)

5.48 (140.0)

4.09 (104.0)

2

Four-pole

5.50 (139.7)

4.00 (101.6)

2.99 (76.0)

7.00 (177.8)

5.34 (135.6)

3.57 (87.4)

10.13 (258.0)

7.22 (183.0)

4.09 (104.0)

2

Series G—Frame NG and RG

2

NG

2

RG

H

W

D

H

W

D

2

Single-pole

—

—

—

—

—

—

Two-pole

—

—

—

—

—

—

2

Three-pole

16.00 (406.0)

8.25 (210.0)

5.50 (140.0)

16.00 (406.0)

15.50 (394.0)

9.75 (229.0)

Four-pole

16.00 (406.0)

11.13 (280.0)

5.50 (140.0)

16.00 (406.0)

20.00 (508.0)

9.75 (229.0)

2 2

Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg)

2

Series G—Frame EG, JG and LG EG

JG

LG

NG

RG

2

Single-pole

0.85 (0.39)

—

—

—

—

2

Two-pole

1.57 (0.71)

11.3 (5.13)

—

—

—

Three-pole

2.28 (1.04)

5.06 (2.30) T/M 5.31 (2.41) ETU

12.36 (5.61) T/M 13.04 (5.92) ETU

46.8 (21.3)

103.0 (47.0)

Four-pole

2.85 (1.29)

6.76 (3.07) T/M 7.12 (3.23) ETU

16.27 (7.39) T/M 16.92 (7.68) ETU

62.0 (28.3)

118.4 (54.0)

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

V4-T2-14

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes)

2.2

Contents Description EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page V4-T2-16 V4-T2-17 V4-T2-26 V4-T2-27 V4-T2-27 V4-T2-29 V4-T2-47 V4-T2-65 V4-T2-74 V4-T2-85 V4-T2-89 V4-T2-92 V4-T2-96 V4-T2-101 V4-T2-104 V4-T2-112 V4-T2-114 V4-T2-115

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes)

2

Product Description

2

EG breaker is HACR rated.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-15

2.2 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

Catalog Number Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. Series G—EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes)

E G H 3 015 FF G

2 Frame

2 2

E Amperes

2 2 2 2 2

B E S H C K

Performance 600Y/347 480 415 — 18 18 18 25 25 22 35 40 25 65 70 35 100 100 Molded case switch 2

2 2 2

Number of Poles

Standard/Application G = IEC/CE/UL/CSA

240 25 35 85 100 200

1 = One 2 = Two 3 = Three 4 = Four—neutral 0% protected 7 = Four—neutral 100% protected

016 1 015 020 025 030 032 1 035 040 045 050 060 063 1 070 080 090 100 110 125 160 1

Notes 1 Cannot be UL rated. 2 Available only as 125 and 160 A sizes.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-16

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Terminations/Hardware Terminals Mounting Hardware M = Metric end caps Metric E = Imperial end caps Imperial G = Line/load standard Metric B = Bolt-on — Trip Unit FF = Fixed fixed AF = Adjustable thermal fixed magnetic KS = Molded case switch

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

Product Selection

2

Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware) IC Rating at 415/480 Volts EG-Frame

2

EG-Frame—18/18 Single-Pole

Two-Pole

2

Four-Pole 3

Three-Pole

Maximum Continuous Amps at 40 °C 1

Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Catalog Number

Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Catalog Number

Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Catalog Number

Adjustable 2 Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Catalog Number

Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Catalog Number

Adjustable 2 Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Catalog Number

15

EGB1015FFG

EGB2015FFG

EGB3015FFG

—

EGB4015FFG

—

16

EGB1016FFG

EGB2016FFG

EGB3016FFG

—

EGB4016FFG

—

20

EGB1020FFG

EGB2020FFG

EGB3020FFG

—

EGB4020FFG

EGB4020AFG

25

EGB1025FFG

EGB2025FFG

EGB3025FFG

EGB3025AFG

EGB4025FFG

EGB4025AFG

30

EGB1030FFG

EGB2030FFG

EGB3030FFG

—

EGB4030FFG

—

32

EGB1032FFG

EGB2032FFG

EGB3032FFG

EGB3032AFG

EGB4032FFG

EGB4032AFG

35

EGB1035FFG

EGB2035FFG

EGB3035FFG

—

EGB4035FFG

—

40

EGB1040FFG

EGB2040FFG

EGB3040FFG

EGB3040AFG

EGB4040FFG

EGB4040AFG

45

EGB1045FFG

EGB2045FFG

EGB3045FFG

—

EGB4045FFG

—

50

EGB1050FFG

EGB2050FFG

EGB3050FFG

EGB3050AFG

EGB4050FFG

EGB4050AFG

60

EGB1060FFG

EGB2060FFG

EGB3060FFG

—

EGB4060FFG

—

63

EGB1063FFG

EGB2063FFG

EGB3063FFG

EGB3063AFG

EGB4063FFG

EGB4063AFG

70

EGB1070FFG

EGB2070FFG

EGB3070FFG

—

EGB4070FFG

—

80

EGB1080FFG

EGB2080FFG

EGB3080FFG

EGB3080AFG

EGB4080FFG

EGB4080AFG

90

EGB1090FFG

EGB2090FFG

EGB3090FFG

—

EGB4090FFG

—

100

EGB1100FFG

EGB2100FFG

EGB3100FFG

EGB3100AFG

EGB4100FFG

EGB4100AFG

110

EGB1110FFG

EGB2110FFG

EGB3110FFG

—

EGB4110FFG

—

125

EGB1125FFG

EGB2125FFG

EGB3125FFG

EGB3125AFG

EGB4125FFG

EGB4125AFG

160

—

—

EGB3160FFG

EGB3160AFG

EGB4160FFG

EGB4160AFG

2 2 2

Notes 1 16, 32, 63 and 160 A are not UL listed ratings. 2 Adjustable thermal are not UL listed. 3 Change the fourth digit to 7 for 100% neutral protection. Neutral is on the LH side.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-17

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2

EG-Frame—25/25 Single-Pole Unavailable

2

EG-Frame

EG-Frame—25/25 Two-Pole

2

Four-Pole 3

Three-Pole

Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic

Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic

Adjustable 2 Thermal, Fixed Magnetic

Maximum Continuous Amps at 40 °C 1

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

15

EGE2015FFG

EGE3015FFG

—

EGE4015FFG

—

2

16

EGE2016FFG

EGE3016FFG

—

EGE4016FFG

—

20

EGE2020FFG

EGE3020FFG

—

EGE4020FFG

EGE4020AFG

2

25

EGE2025FFG

EGE3025FFG

EGE3025AFG

EGE4025FFG

EGE4025AFG

30

EGE2030FFG

EGE3030FFG

—

EGE4030FFG

—

2

32

EGE2032FFG

EGE3032FFG

EGE3032AFG

EGE4032FFG

EGE4032AFG

2

35

EGE2035FFG

EGE3035FFG

—

EGE4035FFG

—

40

EGE2040FFG

EGE3040FFG

EGE3040AFG

EGE4040FFG

EGE4040AFG

2

45

EGE2045FFG

EGE3045FFG

EGE3050AFG

EGE4045FFG

—

50

EGE2050FFG

EGE3050FFG

—

EGE4050FFG

EGE4050AFG

2

60

EGE2060FFG

EGE3060FFG

—

EGE4060FFG

—

63

EGE2063FFG

EGE3063FFG

EGE3063AFG

EGE4063FFG

EGE4063AFG

2

70

EGE2070FFG

EGE3070FFG

—

EGE4070FFG

—

2

80

EGE2080FFG

EGE3080FFG

EGE3080AFG

EGE4080FFG

EGE4080AFG

90

EGE2090FFG

EGE3090FFG

—

EGE4090FFG

—

2

100

EGE2100FFG

EGE3100FFG

EGE3100AFG

EGE4100FFG

EGE4100AFG

125

EGE2125FFG

EGE3125FFG

EGE3125AFG

EGE4125FFG

EGE4125AFG

2

160

—

EGE3160FFG

EGE3160AFG

EGE4160FFG

EGE4160AFG

2

Notes 1 16, 32, 63 and 160 A are not UL listed ratings. 2 Adjustable thermal are not UL listed. 3 Change the fourth digit to 7 for 100% neutral protection. Neutral is on the LH side.

2 2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-18

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic

Adjustable 2 Thermal, Fixed Magnetic

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

EG-Frame

EG-Frame—40/35 Single-Pole

Two-Pole

2

Four-Pole 3

Three-Pole 2

2

Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic

Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic

Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic

Adjustable Thermal, Fixed Magnetic

Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic

Adjustable Thermal, Fixed Magnetic

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

15

EGS1015FFG

EGS2015FFG

EGS3015FFG

—

EGS4015FFG

—

16

EGS1016FFG

EGS2016FFG

EGS3016FFG

—

EGS4016FFG

—

20

EGS1020FFG

EGS2020FFG

EGS3020FFG

—

EGS4020FFG

EGS4020AFG

25

EGS1025FFG

EGS2025FFG

EGS3025FFG

EGS3025AFG

EGS4025FFG

EGS4025AFG

30

EGS1030FFG

EGS2030FFG

EGS3030FFG

—

EGS4030FFG

—

32

EGS1032FFG

EGS2032FFG

EGS3032FFG

EGS3032AFG

EGS4032FFG

EGS4032AFG

35

EGS1035FFG

EGS2035FFG

EGS3035FFG

—

EGS4035FFG

—

40

EGS1040FFG

EGS2040FFG

EGS3040FFG

EGS3040AFG

EGS4040FFG

EGS4040AFG

45

EGS1045FFG

EGS2045FFG

EGS3045FFG

—

EGS4045FFG

—

50

EGS1050FFG

EGS2050FFG

EGS3050FFG

EGS3050AFG

EGS4050FFG

EGS4050AFG

60

EGS1060FFG

EGS2060FFG

EGS3060FFG

—

EGS4060FFG

—

63

EGS1063FFG

EGS2063FFG

EGS3063FFG

EGS3063AFG

EGS4063FFG

EGS4063AFG

70

EGS1070FFG

EGS2070FFG

EGS3070FFG

—

EGS4070FFG

—

80

EGS1080FFG

EGS2080FFG

EGS3080FFG

EGS3080AFG

EGS4080FFG

EGS4080AFG

90

EGS1090FFG

EGS2090FFG

EGS3090FFG

—

EGS4090FFG

—

100

EGS1100FFG

EGS2100FFG

EGS3100FFG

EGS3100AFG

EGS4100FFG

EGS4100AFG

125

EGS1125FFG

EGS2125FFG

EGS3125FFG

EGS3125AFG

EGS4125FFG

EGS4125AFG

160

—

—

EGS3160FFG

EGS3160AFG

EGS4160FFG

EGS4160AFG

Maximum Continuous Amps at 40 °C 1

2 2 2

Notes 1 16, 32, 63 and 160 A are not UL listed ratings. 2 Adjustable thermal are not UL listed. 3 Change the fourth digit to 7 for 100% neutral protection. Neutral is on the LH side.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-19

2.2 2

EG-Frame

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

EG-Frame—70/65 Single-Pole

2

Two-Pole

Four-Pole 3

Three-Pole

Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic

Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic

Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic

Adjustable 2 Thermal, Fixed Magnetic

Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic

Adjustable 2 Thermal, Fixed Magnetic

2

Maximum Continuous Amps at 40 °C 1

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

15

EGH1015FFG

EGH2015FFG

EGH3015FFG

—

EGH4015FFG

—

2

16

EGH1016FFG

EGH2016FFG

EGH3016FFG

—

EGH4016FFG

—

20

EGH1020FFG

EGH2020FFG

EGH3020FFG

EGH3020AFG

EGH4020FFG

EGH4020AFG

2

25

EGH1025FFG

EGH2025FFG

EGH3025FFG

EGH3025AFG

EGH4025FFG

EGH4025AFG

30

EGH1030FFG

EGH2030FFG

EGH3030FFG

—

EGH4030FFG

—

2

32

EGH1032FFG

EGH2032FFG

EGH3032FFG

EGH3032AFG

EGH4032FFG

EGH4032AFG

2

35

EGH1035FFG

EGH2035FFG

EGH3035FFG

—

EGH4035FFG

—

40

EGH1040FFG

EGH2040FFG

EGH3040FFG

EGH3040AFG

EGH4040FFG

EGH4040AFG

2

45

EGH1045FFG

EGH2045FFG

EGH3045FFG

—

EGH4045FFG

EGH4050AFG

50

EGH1050FFG

EGH2050FFG

EGH3050FFG

EGH3050AFG

EGH4050FFG

—

2

60

EGH1060FFG

EGH2060FFG

EGH3060FFG

—

EGH4060FFG

—

63

EGH1063FFG

EGH2063FFG

EGH3063FFG

EGH3063AFG

EGH4063FFG

EGH4063AFG

2

70

EGH1070FFG

EGH2070FFG

EGH3070FFG

—

EGH4070FFG

—

2

80

EGH1080FFG

EGH2080FFG

EGH3080FFG

EGH3080AFG

EGH4080FFG

EGH4080AFG

90

EGH1090FFG

EGH2090FFG

EGH3090FFG

—

EGH4090FFG

—

100

EGH1100FFG

EGH2100FFG

EGH3100FFG

EGH3100AFG

EGH4100FFG

EGH4100AFG

125

EGH1125FFG

EGH2125FFG

EGH3125FFG

EGH3125AFG

EGH4125FFG

EGH4125AFG

2 2

Notes 1 16, 32, 63A are not UL listed ratings. 2 Adjustable thermal are not UL listed. 3 Change the fourth digit to 7 for 100% neutral protection. Neutral is on the LH side.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-20

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

EG-Frame—100/100 Current Limiting (Single-Pole and Two-Pole Unavailable)

EG-Frame

2 2

EG-Frame—100/100 Four-Pole 0% Protected Neutral 3

Three-Pole Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic

Adjustable 2 Thermal, Fixed Magnetic

Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic

Adjustable 2 Thermal, Fixed Magnetic

2

Maximum Continuous Amps at 40 °C 1

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

15

EGC3015FFG

—

EGC7015FFG

—

16

EGC3016FFG

—

EGC7016FFG

—

2

20

EGC3020FFG

EGC3020AFG

EGC7020FFG

EGC7020AFG

25

EGC3025FFG

EGC3025AFG

EGC7025FFG

EGC7025AFG

30

EGC3030FFG

—

EGC7030FFG

—

32

EGC3032FFG

EGC3032AFG

EGC7032FFG

EGC7032AFG

35

EGC3035FFG

—

EGC7035FFG

—

40

EGC3040FFG

EGC3040AFG

EGC7040FFG

EGC7040AFG

45

EGC3045FFG

—

EGC7045FFG

—

50

EGC3050FFG

EGC3050AFG

EGC7050FFG

EGC7050AFG

60

EGC3060FFG

—

EGC7060FFG

—

63

EGC3063FFG

EGC3063AFG

EGC7063FFG

EGC7063AFG

70

EGC3070FFG

—

EGC7070FFG

—

80

EGC3080FFG

EGC3080AFG

EGC7080FFG

EGC7080AFG

90

EGC3090FFG

—

EGC7090FFG

—

100

EGC3100FFG

EGC3100AFG

EGC7100FFG

EGC7100AFG

125

EGC3125FFG

EGC3125AFG

EGC7125FFG

EGC7125AFG

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Molded Case Switches 4

2

Catalog Number

2

EGK3125KSG EGK7125KSG

2

EGK3160KSG

2

EGK7160KSG Notes 1 16, 32, 63A are not UL listed ratings. 2 Adjustable thermal is not UL listed. 3 Change the fourth digit to 7 for 100% neutral protection. Neutral is on LH side. 4 Molded case switches may open above 1250 A.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-21

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2

EG Bolt-On Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit and Mounting Hardware)

2

EG-Frame

EG-Frame—18 kAIC at 480 Vac Single-Pole

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Maximum Continuous Amps at 40 °C

Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic

Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic

Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic

Catalog Number 1

Catalog Number 2

Catalog Number 3

15

EGB1015FFB

EGB2015FFB

EGB3015FFB

20

EGB1020FFB

EGB2020FFB

EGB3020FFB

25

EGB1025FFB

EGB2025FFB

EGB3025FFB

2

30

EGB1030FFB

EGB2030FFB

EGB3030FFB

2

35

EGB1035FFB

EGB2035FFB

EGB3035FFB

40

EGB1040FFB

EGB2040FFB

EGB3040FFB

2

45

EGB1045FFB

EGB2045FFB

EGB3045FFB

50

EGB1050FFB

EGB2050FFB

EGB3050FFB

2

60

EGB1060FFB

EGB2060FFB

EGB3060FFB

2

70

EGB1070FFB

EGB2070FFB

EGB3070FFB

80

EGB1080FFB

EGB2080FFB

EGB3080FFB

2

90

EGB1090FFB

EGB2090FFB

EGB3090FFB

100

EGB1100FFB

EGB2100FFB

EGB3100FFB

2

110

EGB1110FFB

EGB2110FFB

EGB3110FFB

125

EGB1125FFB

EGB2125FFB

EGB3125FFB

2 2 2

2 2

EG-Frame

EG-Frame—35 kAIC at 480 Vac Single-Pole

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Maximum Continuous Amps at 40 °C

Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic

Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic

Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic

Catalog Number 1

Catalog Number 2

Catalog Number 3

15

EGS1015FFB

EGS2015FFB

EGS3015FFB

2

20

EGS1020FFB

EGS2020FFB

EGS3020FFB

2

25

EGS1025FFB

EGS2025FFB

EGS3025FFB

30

EGS1030FFB

EGS2030FFB

EGS3030FFB

2

35

EGS1035FFB

EGS2035FFB

EGS3035FFB

40

EGS1040FFB

EGS2040FFB

EGS3040FFB

2

45

EGS1045FFB

EGS2045FFB

EGS3045FFB

2

50

EGS1050FFB

EGS2050FFB

EGS3050FFB

60

EGS1060FFB

EGS2060FFB

EGS3060FFB

2

70

EGS1070FFB

EGS2070FFB

EGS3070FFB

80

EGS1080FFB

EGS2080FFB

EGS3080FFB

2

90

EGS1090FFB

EGS2090FFB

EGS3090FFB

100

EGS1100FFB

EGS2100FFB

EGS3100FFB

110

EGS1110FFB

EGS2110FFB

EGS3110FFB

125

EGS1125FFB

EGS2125FFB

EGS3125FFB

2 2

2 2

Notes 1 For bulk pack 24, add suffix BP24 and order quantities of 24. 2 For bulk pack 12, add suffix BP12 and order quantities of 12. 3 For bulk pack 8, add suffix BP8 and order quantities of 8.

2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-22

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

EG-Frame

2.2

EG-Frame—65 kAIC at 480 Vac

2

Single-Pole

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Maximum Continuous Amps at 40 °C

Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic

Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic

Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic

Catalog Number 1

Catalog Number 2

Catalog Number 3

15

EGH1015FFB

EGH2015FFB

EGH3015FFB

20

EGH1020FFB

EGH2020FFB

EGH3020FFB

25

EGH1025FFB

EGH2025FFB

EGH3025FFB

30

EGH1030FFB

EGH2030FFB

EGH3030FFB

35

EGH1035FFB

EGH2035FFB

EGH3035FFB

40

EGH1040FFB

EGH2040FFB

EGH3040FFB

45

EGH1045FFB

EGH2045FFB

EGH3045FFB

50

EGH1050FFB

EGH2050FFB

EGH3050FFB

60

EGH1060FFB

EGH2060FFB

EGH3060FFB

70

EGH1070FFB

EGH2070FFB

EGH3070FFB

80

EGH1080FFB

EGH2080FFB

EGH3080FFB

90

EGH1090FFB

EGH2090FFB

EGH3090FFB

100

EGH1100FFB

EGH2100FFB

EGH3100FFB

110

EGH1110FFB

EGH2110FFB

EGH3110FFB

125

EGH1125FFB

EGH2125FFB

EGH3125FFB

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amps

Terminal, Body Material

Wire Type

Metric Wire Range mm2

AWG Wire Range

(Package of Three Terminals) Catalog Number

Aluminum

Cu/Al

2.5–50

#14–1/0

3TA125EF

60–125

Aluminum

Cu/Al

16–70

#6–3/0

3TA150EF

2 2

Standard Cu/Al Pressure Type Terminals 15–50

2

2

Notes 1 For bulk pack 24, add suffix BP24 and order quantities of 24. 2 For bulk pack 12, add suffix BP12 and order quantities of 12. 3 For bulk pack 8, add suffix BP8 and order quantities of 8.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-23

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2

Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information

2

EG-Frame

2 2 2 2 2 2

3T125EF

3TA125EF

3TA150EF

3TA160EFK

EF2RTWK, Two-Pole–Metric EF3RTWK, Three-Pole–Metric EF4RTWK, Four-Pole–Metric EF2RTDK, Two-Pole–Imperial EF3RTDK, Three-Pole–Imperial EF4RTDK, Four-Pole–Imperial

2 2 2

Line and Load Terminals

2

Maximum Breaker Amps

2 2 2 2 2 2

Terminal Body Material

Wire Type

Metric Wire Range mm2

AWG Wire Range

(Package of Three Terminals) Catalog Number

Standard Cu/Al Pressure Type Terminals 125

Steel

Al

4–6

#12-10

3T125EF 1

125

Steel

Cu

2.5–95

#14-3/0

3T125EF 1

125

Aluminum

Cu/Al

2.5–50

#14-1/0

3TA125EF

160

Aluminum

Cu/Al

16–70

#6-3/0

3TA150EF

160

Aluminum

Cu/Al

35–120

#3-250

3TA160EFK

160

Aluminum

Cu/Al

35–120

#3-250

4TA160EFK 2

EG-Frame circuit breakers and molded case switches have line and load terminals as standard equipment.

2

Insert collar enclosing conductor as shown. Locate nut on top of conductor and tighten securely with screw and washer.

2

Caution: Collar must surround conductor.

2 2 2

Insert collar enclosing conductor and center on extrusion. Tighten securely with screw and washer. Endcap kits are used on the E-Frame breaker line side to connect busbar or similar electrical connections. Includes hardware. Notes 1 Standard line and load terminals. 2 Four-pole kit with four terminals.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-24

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Control Wire Terminal Kit GCWTK

Multiwire Connectors

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

Control Wire Terminal Kit

Terminal End Covers (Gas Barrier) The terminal end cover is available for three-pole circuit breakers only. Two conductor opening sizes are available. Specify quantity (one per circuit breaker) when ordering.

Catalog Number Control wire terminal kit

5652B38G01

Package of 12—priced individually

Interphase Barriers Catalog Number EIPBK

Package of 12—priced individually

The interphase barrier is available for extended insulation between circuit breaker poles. Specify quantity when ordering. Base Mounting Hardware—DIN Rail Mounting Catalog Number DIN rail adapter—single-pole

EF1DIN

DIN rail adapter—two-pole

EGDIN

DIN rail adapter—three- or four-pole

EF34DIN

Metal DIN rail adapter—three-pole

EGGDDIN

Metric base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or molded case switch. (Included with breaker.) If required separately, order S/N 8703C80G08.

2 2 2

Terminal End Covers

For use with steel or stainless steel standard line and load terminals only.

Interphase barriers

2.2

Conductor Opening Diameter Inches (mm)

Catalog Number

2

6.35 (0.25)

EEC3K

10.41 (0.41)

EEC4K

2

Multiwire Connectors Field-installed multiwire connectors for the load side (OFF) end terminals. They are used to distribute the load from the circuit breaker to multiple devices without the use of separate distribution terminal blocks.

2 2 2

Multiwire lug kits include mounting hardware, terminal shield insulators and tin-plated aluminum connectors to replace three mechanical load lugs. UL listed as used on the load side (OFF) end.

2

EG-Frame Multiwire Connectors Ordering Information (Package of 3) 1

2

Maximum Amperes

Wires per Terminal

Wire Size Range AWG Cu

Kit Catalog Number

2

125

3

14–2

3TA125E3K

125

6

14–6

3TA125E6K

2

2

2

Note 1 For four-pole kit, change “3” at beginning of catalog number to “4.”

2

Note: English mounting hardware kit can be supplied separate. Catalog number is BMHE #6–32 x 3 inches for two-, three- and four-pole. Singlepole mounting hardware metric order 8703C80G11. English hardware 8703C80G12. Both sold in quantities of 100.

2 2

Terminal Shields The terminal shield is available for line terminal areas in threeand four-pole circuit breakers. Special terminal shields are also available for use when an electrical (solenoid) operator is mounted on the circuit breaker. The standard style number by pole for each terminal shield is for a package of 10 and is priced per each package. Special terminal shields are packaged individually.

2 2 2

Terminal Shields—IP30 Protection

2

Number of Poles

Catalog Number

2

3

EFTS3K

4

EFTS4K

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-25

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2

Accessories

2

Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker.

2

EG-Frame Accessories

2 2 2 2 2

Reference Page

Description

SinglePole

Two-Pole

Center

Left

Right

Left

Center

Right

Left

Center

Right

Neutral

Three-Pole

Four-Pole

Internal Accessories (Only one internal accessory per pole) Alarm lockout (Make/Break)

V4-T2-109

—

—

■

—

—

■

—

—

■

—

Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break)

V4-T2-109

—

—

■

—

—

■

—

—

■

—

Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B)

V4-T2-109

—

—

■

—

—

■

—

—

■

— —

Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B)

V4-T2-109

—

—

■

—

—

■

—

—

■

2

Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination

V4-T2-109

—

—

■

—

—

■

—

—

■

—

Shunt trip—standard

V4-T2-109

—

—

—

■

—

—

■

—

—

—

2

Undervoltage release mechanism

V4-T2-110

—

—

—

■

—

—

■

—

—

—

2 2

External Accessories End cap kit

V4-T2-25

—

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Control wire terminal kit

V4-T2-25

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Multiwire connectors

V4-T2-25

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

● ●

2

Base mounting hardware

V4-T2-25

●

Terminal shields

V4-T2-25

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Terminal end covers

V4-T2-25

—

—

—

●

●

●

—

—

—

—

Interphase barriers

V4-T2-25

—

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Non-padlockable handle block

V4-T2-107

■

■

—

—

■

—

—

■

—

—

2

Snap-on padlockable handle lock hasp

V4-T2-107

■

■

—

—

■

—

—

■

—

—

Padlockable handle lock hasp

V4-T2-107

—

—

■

❏

—

❏

❏

—

❏

—

2

Walking beam interlock—requires two breakers

V4-T2-107

—

—

—

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Plug-in adapters

V4-T2-107

—

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Electrical operator

V4-T2-107

—

—

—

●

●

●

—

—

—

—

2

Handle mechanisms

V4-T2-418

—

—

—

●

●

●

—

—

—

—

Modifications (Refer to Eaton)

2

Moisture fungus treatment

V4-T2-105

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Freeze-tested circuit breakers

—

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Marine/naval application, UL 489 Supplement SA and SB

—

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Legend ■ Applicable in indicated pole position ❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both ● Accessory available/modification available

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

V4-T2-26

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

Technical Data and Specifications

2

UL 489/IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA) Ratings

2

Volts DC 1

Volts AC (50/60 Hz)

Circuit Breaker Type

Number of Poles

120

Icu

Ics

277

347

Icu

Ics

480

EGB125

1

35

25

25

18

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

10

10

—

—

2, 3, 4

—

25

25

—

—

18

18

18

—

—

—

—

—

10

10

EGE125

2, 3, 4

—

35

35

—

—

25

25

25

18

—

—

—

—

10

10

EGS125

1

100

85

43

35

22

—

—

—

—

—

—

35

35

—

—

2, 3, 4

—

85

43

—

—

40

30

35

22

—

—

—

—

35

35

EGH125

1

200

100

50

65

30

—

—

—

—

—

—

42

42

—

—

2, 3, 4

220–240

690 2

380–415 600Y/ 347

Icu

250 34

125 Ics

Icu

Ics

Icu

Ics

—

100

50

—

—

70

35

65

25

—

—

—

—

42

42

EGC125 5 3, 4

—

200

200

—

—

100

100

100

35

—

—

—

—

42

42

EGB160 2 3, 4

—

25

25

—

—

18

18

18

—

—

—

—

—

10

10

EGE160 2 3, 4

—

35

35

—

—

25

25

25

18

—

—

—

—

10

10

EGS160 2 3, 4

—

85

43

—

—

40

30

35

22

—

—

—

—

35

35

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Dimensions and Weights

2

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2 2

EG-Frame Number of Poles

Width

Height

Depth

1

1.00 (25.4)

5.50 (139.7)

2.99 (75.9)

2

2.00 (50.8)

5.50 (139.7)

2.99 (75.9)

3

3.00 (76.2)

5.50 (139.7)

2.99 (75.9)

4

4.00 (101.6)

5.50 (139.7)

2.99 (75.9)

2 2 2 2

EG-Frame Front Cover Cutout

Front View Three-Pole

2

Side View

2

CL

Breaker

1.85 (47.0)

0.14 (3.6) R 0.90 (22.9)

1.30 Dia. (33.0)

0.47 (11.9) 0.94 (23.9)

3.00 (76.2)

2

5.50 (139.7)

3.03 (77.0)

CL Handle

2 2

2.77 (70.4)

2

Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg)

2

EG-Frame Breaker Type

Number of Poles 1

Breaker Type

Number of Poles 3

2

3

4

EGB125

1.5 (0.68)

2.0 (0.91)

3.0 (1.36)

4.9 (1.82)

4

EGB160

3.0 (1.36)

4.9 (1.82)

EGC125

1.5 (0.68)

2.0 (0.91)

3.0 (1.36)

4.9 (1.82)

EGE160

3.0 (1.36)

4.9 (1.82)

EGE125

1.5 (0.68)

2.0 (0.91)

3.0 (1.36)

4.9 (1.82)

EGS160

3.0 (1.36)

4.9 (1.82)

EGH125

1.5 (0.68)

2.0 (0.91)

3.0 (1.36)

4.9 (1.82)

EGS125

1.5 (0.68)

2.0 (0.91)

3.0 (1.36)

4.9 (1.82)

2 2 2 2

Notes 1 DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. 2 IEC only. 3 Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker. 4 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 42 kA. 5 Current limiting per UL 489.

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2 2 2 V4-T2-27

2.2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

EG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module 10.26 (260.6)

2

4.75 (120.6)

2

0.55 (14.0)

2

1.49 1.00 (37.8) (25.4)

0.50 (12.7)

2

1.50 0.50 (38.1) (12.7)

2 2

4.78 (121.4)

8.59 (218.2)

2

0.90 (22.9) 0.35 (8.9)

2 2

0.09 (2.29)

2 EG-Frame With Current Limiter Module

2 2

0.56 (14.2)

2 2 2

3.01 (76.5)

2.75 (69.9) 0.78 (19.8)

2

2

2.00 (50.8)

0.70 (17.8)

2

2

3-Pole 2.98 (75.7)

1.00 (25.4)

2

1.00 (25.4) 3.00 (76.2)

9.66 (245.4)

4.17 (105.9) 3.61 (91.7)

0.50 1.00 (12.7) (25.4)

1.00 (25.4)

2 2

3.20 (81.3)

2

4.17 (105.9)

2 2 2

2.75 0.09 (69.9) (2.3)

2

0.78 (19.8)

2

0.41 (10.4)

2 V4-T2-28

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

3.98 (101.1)

3.17 (80.5)

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes)

2.2

Contents Description EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page V4-T2-15

2 2

V4-T2-30 V4-T2-31 V4-T2-42 V4-T2-43 V4-T2-45 V4-T2-47 V4-T2-65 V4-T2-74 V4-T2-85 V4-T2-89 V4-T2-92 V4-T2-96

2

V4-T2-101 V4-T2-104 V4-T2-112 V4-T2-114 V4-T2-115

2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes)

2

Product Description

2

JG breaker is HACR rated.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-29

2.2 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

Catalog Number Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. Series G—JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes)

J G S 3 250 FA G C

2 Frame

2 2

Standard/Application G = IEC/CE/UL/CSA

2 2

E S H C U X K

2 2 2

Performance 600 480 415 18 25 25 18 35 40 25 65 70 35 100 100 50 150 150 50 200 200 Molded case switch

Number of Poles

240 65 85 100 200 200 200

2 = Two 3 = Three 4 = Four—Neutral 0% Protected 9 = Four—Neutral 100% Protected

Amperes 050 070 080 090 100 125 150 160 175 200 225 250

2 2 2

Trip JT

Number of Poles 2 = Two 3 = Three 4 = Four—Neutral 0% Protected 9 = Four—Neutral 100% Protected

2 2 2 2 2 2

Trip Unit AA = Adj. adj. FA = Fixed adj. KS = Molded case switch 33 = 310+ electronic LS 32 = 310+ electronic LSI 35 = 310+ electronic LSG 36 = 310+ electronic LSIG NN = Frame only (250 A only; no trip unit)

JT 4 100 FA B20

2

2

Terminations/Hardware Terminals Mounting Hardware M = Metric end caps Metric E = Imperial end caps Imperial G = Line/load standard Metric W = Without terminals

Trip Unit

2 2

Rating Blank = 80% rated C = 100% rated F01 = Freeze tested for –70ºF (–57ºC) F02 = Freeze tested for –22ºF (–30ºC)

J

Amperes T/M ETU 080 050 090 100 100 160 110 250 125 150 160 175 200 225 250

Trip Unit AA = Adj. adj. FA = Fixed adj. KS = Molded case switch 33 = 310+ electronic LS 32 = 310+ electronic LSI 35 = 310+ electronic LSG 36 = 310+ electronic LSIG

Notes 1 Bxx features cannot be combined with other Bxx features. 2 B21 and B22 available with LSG and LSIG trip units.

2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-30

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Features (ETU Only) 12 Blank= No feature B20 = High load alarm B21 = Ground fault alarm, with trip B22 = Ground fault alarm, no trip ZG = Zone selective interlocking

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

Product Selection

2

Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware)—IC Rating at 415/480 Volts

2

JG-Frame

JG-Frame

2

JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—25/25 Four-Pole 0%2

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic

Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic

Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 1

Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic

Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 1

Maximum Continuous Amperes

Magnetic Range

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

70

350–700

JGE2070FAG

JGE3070FAG

—

JGE4070FAG

—

90

450–900

JGE2090FAG

JGE3090FAG

—

JGE4090FAG

—

100

500–1000

JGE2100FAG

JGE3100FAG

JGE3100AAG

JGE4100FAG

JGE4100AAG

125

625–1250

JGE2125FAG

JGE3125FAG

JGE3125AAG

JGE4125FAG

JGE4125AAG

150

750–1550

JGE2150FAG

JGE3150FAG

—

JGE4150FAG

—

160

800–1600

—

—

JGE3160AAG

—

JGE4160AAG

175

875–1750

JGE2175FAG

JGE3175FAG

—

JGE4175FAG

—

200

1000–2000

JGE2200FAG

JGE3200FAG

JGE3200AAG

JGE4200FAG

JGE4200AAG

225

1125–2250

JGE2225FAG

JGE3225FAG

—

JGE4225FAG

—

250

1250–2500

JGE2250FAG

JGE3250FAG

JGE3250AAG

JGE4250FAG

JGE4250AAG

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—40/35, Two-Pole Four-Pole 0%2

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic

Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic

Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 1

Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic

Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 1

Maximum Continuous Amperes

Magnetic Range

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

70

350–700

JGS2070FAG

JGS3070FAG

—

JGS4070FAG

—

90

450–900

JGS2090FAG

JGS3090FAG

—

JGS4090FAG

—

100

500–1000

JGS2100FAG

JGS3100FAG

JGS3100AAG

JGS4100FAG

JGS4100AAG

125

625–1250

JGS2125FAG

JGS3125FAG

JGS3125AAG

JGS4125FAG

JGS4125AAG

150

750–1550

JGS2150FAG

JGS3150FAG

—

JGS4150FAG

—

160

800–1600

—

—

JGS3160AAG

—

JGS4160AAG

175

875–1750

JGS2175FAG

JGS3175FAG

—

JGS4175FAG

—

200

1000–2000

JGS2200FAG

JGS3200FAG

JGS3200AAG

JGS4200FAG

JGS4200AAG

225

1125–2250

JGS2225FAG

JGS3225FAG

—

JGS4225FAG

—

250

1250–2500

JGS2250FAG

JGS3250FAG

JGS3250AAG

JGS4250FAG

JGS4250AAG

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 EC-EN 60947-2 only. Adjustment is 0.8 and 1.0. 2 9 for 0–100% neutral protection. Neutral is on LH side.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-31

2.2 2

JG-Frame

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—70/65

2

Four-Pole 0%2

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic

Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic

Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable 1 Magnetic Fixed Magnetic

Adjustable Thermal, Fixed Magnetic 1

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

Maximum Continuous Amperes

2

70

350–700

JGH2070FAG

JGH3070FAG

—

JGH4070FAG

—

90

450–900

JGH2090FAG

JGH3090FAG

—

JGH4090FAG

—

100

500–1000

JGH2100FAG

JGH3100FAG

JGH3100AAG

JGH4100FAG

JGH4100AAG

125

625–1250

JGH2125FAG

JGH3125FAG

JGH3125AAG

JGH4125FAG

JGH4125AAG

150

750–1550

JGH2150FAG

JGH3150FAG

—

JGH4150FAG

—

2

160

800–1600

—

—

JGH3160AAG

—

JGH4160AAG

2

175

875–1750

JGH2175FAG

JGH3175FAG

—

JGH4175FAG

—

200

1000–2000

JGH2200FAG

JGH3200FAG

JGH3200AAG

JGH4200FAG

JGH4200AAG

225

1125–2250

JGH2225FAG

JGH3225FAG

—

JGH4225FAG

—

250

1250–2500

JGH2250FAG

JGH3250FAG

JGH3250AAG

JGH4250FAG

JGH4250AAG

2 2

2 2

Magnetic Range

Notes 1 EC-EN 60947-2 only. Adjustment is 0.8 and 1.0. 2 9 for 0–100% neutral protection. Neutral is on LH side.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-32

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

Two-Pole not available in IEC/CE/UL/CSA 100/100, 150/150 JG-Frame

2

JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—100/100, Current Limiting

2

Four-Pole 0% 2

Three-Pole Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic

Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 1

Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic

Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 1

2

Maximum Continuous Amperes

Magnetic Range

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

70

350–700

JGC3070FAG

—

JGC4070FAG

—

80

400–800

—

JGC3080AAG

—

JGC4080AAG

2

90

450–900

JGC3090FAG

—

JGC4090FAG

—

100

500–1000

JGC3100FAG

JGC3100AAG

JGC4100FAG

JGC4100AAG

125

625–1250

JGC3125FAG

JGC3125AAG

JGC4125FAG

JGC4125AAG

150

750–1550

JGC3150FAG

—

JGC4150FAG

—

160

800–1600

—

JGC3160AAG

—

JGC4160AAG

175

875–1750

JGC3175FAG

—

JGC4175FAG

—

200

1000–2000

JGC3200FAG

JGC3200AAG

JGC4200FAG

JGC4200AAG

225

1125–2250

JGC3225FAG

—

JGC4225FAG

—

250

1250–2500

JGC3250FAG

JGC3250AAG

JGC4250FAG

JGC4250AAG

2 2 2 2 2 2

JG-Frame

2

JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—150/150, Current Limiting Four-Pole 0% 2

Three-Pole Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic

Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 1

Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic

Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 1

2

Magnetic Range

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

70

350–700

JGU3070FAG

—

JGU4070FAG

—

80

400–800

—

JGU3080AAG

—

JGU4080AAG

2

90

450–900

JGU3090FAG

—

JGU4090FAG

—

100

500–1000

JGU3100FAG

JGU3100AAG

JGU4100FAG

JGU4100AAG

125

625–1250

JGU3125FAG

JGU3125AAG

JGU4125FAG

JGU4125AAG

150

750–1550

JGU3150FAG

—

JGU4150FAG

—

160

800–1600

—

JGU3160AAG

—

JGU4160AAG

175

875–1750

JGU3175FAG

—

JGU4175FAG

—

200

1000–2000

JGU3200FAG

JGU3200AAG

JGU4200FAG

JGU4200AAG

225

1125–2250

JGU3225FAG

—

JGU4225FAG

—

250

1250–2500

JGU3250FAG

JGU3250AAG

JGU4250FAG

JGU4250AAG

Maximum Continuous Amperes

2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 EC-EN 60947-2 only. Adjustment is 0.8 and 1.0. 2 9 for 0–100% neutral protection. Neutral is on LH side.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-33

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2

Two-Pole not available in IEC/CE/UL/CSA 200/200

2

JG-Frame

JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA 200/200, Current Limiting Four-Pole 2

Three-Pole

2

Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic

Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 1

Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic

Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 1

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Maximum Continuous Amperes

Magnetic Range

Catalog Number

2

70

350–700

JGX3070FAG

—

JGX4070FAG

—

80

400–800

—

JGX3080AAG

—

JGX4080AAG

2

90

450–900

JGX3090FAG

—

JGX4090FAG

—

100

500–1000

JGX3100FAG

JGX3100AAG

JGX4100FAG

JGX4100AAG

2

125

625–1250

JGX3125FAG

JGX3125AAG

JGX4125FAG

JGX4125AAG

2

150

750–1550

JGX3150FAG

—

JGX4150FAG

—

160

800–1600

—

JGX3160AAG

—

JGX4160AAG

2

175

875–1750

JGX3175FAG

—

JGX4175FAG

—

200

1000–2000

JGX3200FAG

JGX3200AAG

JGX4200FAG

JGX4200AAG

2

225

1125–2250

JGX3225FAG

—

JGX4225FAG

—

250

1250–2500

JGX3250FAG

JGX3250AAG

JGX4250FAG

JGX4250AAG

2

2 2

Molded Case Switches 3 Catalog Number

2

JGK3250KSG

2

JGK7250KSG Notes 1 EC-EN 60947-2 only. Adjustment is 0.8 and 1.0. 2 9 for 0–100% neutral protection. Neutral is on LH side. 3 Molded case switches will trip above 2500 amperes.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-34

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2.2

Frame—IC Rating at 415/480 Volts Maximum Amperes

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Four-Pole 0%

2

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

JGE2250NN

JGE3250NN

JGE4250NN

2

JGS2250NN

JGS3250NN

JGS4250NN

JGH2250NN

JGH3250NN

JGH4250NN

2

JGC4250NN

2

25/25 250

2

40/35 250

2

70/65 250

100/100 Current Limiting Per UL 489 250

—

JGC3250NN

150/150 Current Limiting Per UL 489 250

—

JGU4250NN

2

JGX3250NN

JGX4250NN

2

JGE3250NNC

—

2

JGS3250NNC

—

JGH3250NNC

—

JGU3250NN

200/200 Current Limiting Per UL 489 250

—

25/25 100% Rated Per UL 489 250

2

—

40/35 100% Rated Per UL 489 250

2

2

—

2

70/65 100% Rated Per UL 489 2 250

—

2 2

Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Ampere Rating

Range

Catalog Number

Range

Catalog Number

70

350–700

JT2070FA

JT3070FA

—

—

JT4070FA

—

80

400–800

—

JT3080FA

JT3080AA 3

64–100

—

JT4080AA 3

2

90

450–900

JT2090FA

JT3090FA

—

—

JT4090FA

—

100

500–1000

JT2100FA

JT3100FA

JT3100AA 3

80–100

JT4100FA

JT4100AA 3

125

625–1250

JT2125FA

JT3125FA

JT3125AA 3

100–125

JT4125FA

JT4125AA 3

150

750–1550

JT2150FA

JT3150FA

—

—

JT4150FA

—

160

800–1600

—

—

JT3160AA 3

128–160

—

JT4160AA 3

175

875–1750

JT2175FA

JT3175FA

—

—

JT4175FA

—

200

1000–2000

JT2200FA

JT3200FA

JT3200AA 3

160–200

JT4200FA

JT4200AA 3

225

1125–2250

JT2225FA

JT3225FA

—

—

JT4225FA

—

250

1250–2500

JT2250FA

JT3250FA

JT3250AA 3

200–250

JT4250FA

JT4250AA 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Standard line and load terminals. 2 Components—100% rated frame. 3 Adjustable thermal trip units are typically used in IEC markets and are not UL or CSA listed.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-35

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2

310+ Electronic Trip Units See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-44.

2

JG 310+ Electronic Trip Units

2

LS

LSI

LSG

LSIG

Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

50

JT305033

JT305032

JT305035

JT305036

JGFCT050

2

100

JT310033

JT310032

JT310035

JT310036

JGFCT100

160

JT316033

JT316032

JT316035

JT316036

JGFCT160

2

250

JT325033

JT325032

JT325035

JT325036

JGFCT250

2

50

JT405033

JT405032

JT405035

JT405036

—

2

100

JT410033

JT410032

JT410035

JT410036

—

160

JT416033

JT416032

JT416035

JT416036

—

2

250

JT425033

JT425032

JT425035

JT425036

—

2 2

Ampere Rating Three-Pole

Four-Pole 23

2

310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories

2

Description

Catalog Number

2

Electronic portable test kit

MTST230V

Trip unit tamper protection wire seal

5108A03H01

2

External neutral sensor (250 A)

JGFCT250

2

External neutral sensor (160 A)

JGFCT160

External neutral sensor (100 A)

JGFCT100

2

External neutral sensor (80 A)

JGFCT050

Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication

TRIP-LED

Breaker-mount ammeter module

DIGIVIEW

Remote-mount ammeter module

DIGIVIEWR06

2 2 2 2

Notes 1 For use on a three-pole breaker used in a four-wire system if ground fault protection for the neutral is required. 2 Neutral protection 4 = 0%, 7 = 100% electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable. 3 Four-pole breakers with LSG and LSIG trip units are only available with 0% neutral protection.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-36

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2.2

Complete Breaker with 310+ Electronic Trip Units See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-44.

2 2

IEC/UL/CSA—25/25 LS

LSI

LSG

LSIG

Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

50

JGE305033G

JGE305032G

JGE305035G

JGE305036G

JGFCT050

100

JGE310033G

JGE310032G

JGE310035G

JGE310036G

JGFCT100

160

JGE316033G

JGE316032G

JGE316035G

JGE316036G

JGFCT160

250

JGE325033G

JGE325032G

JGE325035G

JGE325036G

JGFCT250

2

50

JGE405033G

JGE405032G

JGE405035G

JGE405036G

—

2

100

JGE410033G

JGE410032G

JGE410035G

JGE410036G

—

160

JGE416033G

JGE416032G

JGE416035G

JGE416036G

—

250

JGE425033G

JGE425032G

JGE425035G

JGE425036G

—

Ampere Rating

2 2

Three-Pole

2 2

Four-Pole 2

2 2 2

IEC/UL/CSA—40/35 LS

LSI

LSG

LSIG

Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1

2

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

50

JGS305033G

JGS305032G

JGS305035G

JGS305036G

JGFCT050

100

JGS310033G

JGS310032G

JGS310035G

JGS310036G

JGFCT100

160

JGS316033G

JGS316032G

JGS316035G

JGS316036G

JGFCT160

250

JGS325033G

JGS325032G

JGS325035G

JGS325036G

JGFCT250

2

50

JGS405033G

JGS405032G

JGS405035G

JGS405036G

—

2

100

JGS410033G

JGS410032G

JGS410035G

JGS410036G

—

160

JGS416033G

JGS416032G

JGS416035G

JGS416036G

—

250

JGS425033G

JGS425032G

JGS425035G

JGS425036G

—

Ampere Rating Three-Pole

2 2

Four-Pole 23

2 2 2

IEC/UL/CSA—70/65 LS

LSI

LSG

LSIG

Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1

2

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

50

JGH305033G

JGH305032G

JGH305035G

JGH305036G

JGFCT050

2

100

JGH310033G

JGH310032G

JGH310035G

JGH310036G

JGFCT100

160

JGH316033G

JGH316032G

JGH316035G

JGH316036G

JGFCT160

250

JGH325033G

JGH325032G

JGH325035G

JGH325036G

JGFCT250

2

50

JGH405033G

JGH405032G

JGH405035G

JGH405036G

—

2

100

JGH410033G

JGH410032G

JGH410035G

JGH410036G

—

160

JGH416033G

JGH416032G

JGH416035G

JGH416036G

—

250

JGH425033G

JGH425032G

JGH425035G

JGH425036G

—

Ampere Rating Three-Pole

2

Four-Pole 2

2 2 2

Notes 1 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is required. 2 Neutral protection 4 = 0%, 7 = 100% electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable. 3 Four-pole breakers with LSG and LSIG trip units are only available with 0% neutral protection.

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2 V4-T2-37

2.2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

IEC/UL/CSA—100/100, Current Limiting Per UL 489 LS

LSI

LSG

LSIG

Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

50

JGC305033G

JGC305032G

JGC305035G

JGC305036G

JGFCT050

100

JGC310033G

JGC310032G

JGC310035G

JGC310036G

JGFCT100

2

160

JGC316033G

JGC316032G

JGC316035G

JGC316036G

JGFCT160

2

250

JGC335033G

JGC325032G

JGC325035G

JGC325036G

JGFCT250

Four-Pole 2

2 2 2

Ampere Rating Three-Pole

2

50

JGC405033G

JGC405032G

JGC405035G

JGC405036G

—

100

JGC410033G

JGC410032G

JGC410035G

JGC410036G

—

2

160

JGC416033G

JGC416032G

JGC416035G

JGC416036G

—

250

JGC435033G

JGC425032G

JGC425035G

JGC425036G

—

2 2 2 2

IEC/UL/CSA—150/150, Current Limiting Per UL 489

Ampere Rating

LS

LSI

LSG

LSIG

Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Three-Pole

2

50

JGU305033G

JGU305032G

JGU305035G

JGU305036G

JGFCT050

2

100

JGU310033G

JGU310032G

JGU310035G

JGU310036G

JGFCT100

160

JGU316033G

JGU316032G

JGU316035G

JGU316036G

JGFCT160

2

250

JGU335033G

JGU325032G

JGU325035G

JGU325036G

JGFCT250

2

50

JGU405033G

JGU405032G

JGU405035G

JGU405036G

—

100

JGU410033G

JGU410032G

JGU410035G

JGU410036G

—

160

JGU416033G

JGU416032G

JGU416035G

JGU416036G

—

250

JGU435033G

JGU425032G

JGU425035G

JGU425036G

—

2 2 2

Four-Pole 23

IEC/UL/CSA—200/200, Current Limiting Per UL 489 LS

LSI

LSG

LSIG

Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

50

JGX305033G

JGX305032G

JGX305035G

JGX305036G

JGFCT050

2

100

JGX310033G

JGX310032G

JGX310035G

JGX310036G

JGFCT100

160

JGX316033G

JGX316032G

JGX316035G

JGX316036G

JGFCT160

2

250

JGX325033G

JGX325032G

JGX325035G

JGX325036G

JGFCT250

2 2 2

Ampere Rating Three-Pole

Four-Pole 2

2

50

JGX405033G

JGX405032G

JGX405035G

JGX405036G

—

2

100

JGX410033G

JGX410032G

JGX410035G

JGX410036G

—

160

JGX416033G

JGX416032G

JGX416035G

JGX416036G

—

250

JGX425033G

JGX425032G

JGX425035G

JGX425036G

—

2 2 2

Notes 1 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is required. 2 Neutral protection 4 = 0%, 7 = 100% electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable. 3 Four-pole breakers with LSG and LSIG trip units are only available with 0% neutral protection.

2 V4-T2-38

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

JG 100% Rated Circuit Breaker—Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit

2

Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware)—IC Rating at 415/480 Volts JG-Frame

JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—25/25

JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—70/65

Three-Pole

Three-Pole

Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic

Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic

Maximum Continuous Amperes

Magnetic Range

Catalog Number

Maximum Continuous Amperes

Magnetic Range

Catalog Number

70

350–700

JGE3070FAGC

70

350–700

JGH3070FAGC

90

450–900

JGE3090FAGC

90

450–900

JGH3090FAGC

100

500–1000

JGE3100FAGC

100

500–1000

JGH3100FAGC

125

625–1250

JGE3125FAGC

125

625–1250

JGH3125FAGC

150

750–1550

JGE3150FAGC

150

750–1550

JGH3150FAGC

160

800–1600

—

160

800–1600

—

175

875–1750

JGE3175FAGC

175

875–1750

JGH3175FAGC

200

1000–2000

JGE3200FAGC

200

1000–2000

JGH3200FAGC

225

1125–2250

JGE3225FAGC

225

1125–2250

JGH3225FAGC

250

1250–2500

JGE3250FAGC

250

1250–2500

JGH3250FAGC

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Catalog Number

70

350–700

JGS3070FAGC

90

450–900

JGS3090FAGC

100

500–1000

JGS3100FAGC

125

625–1250

JGS3125FAGC

150

750–1550

JGS3150FAGC

160

800–1600

—

175

875–1750

JGS3175FAGC

200

1000–2000

JGS3200FAGC

225

1125–2250

JGS3225FAGC

250

1250–2500

JGS3250FAGC

2 2

Three-Pole

Magnetic Range

2 2

JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—40/35

Maximum Continuous Amperes

2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-39

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2

JG 100% Rated 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Circuit Breaker See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-44.

2

IEC/UL/CSA—25/25

2 2 2 2

LS

LSI

LSG

LSIG

Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

50

JGE305033GC

JGE305032GC

JGE305035GC

JGE305036GC

JGFCT050

100

JGE310033GC

JGE310032GC

JGE310035GC

JGE310036GC

JGFCT100

160

JGE316033GC

JGE316032GC

JGE316035GC

JGE316036GC

JGFCT160

250

JGE325033GC

JGE325032GC

JGE325035GC

JGE325036GC

JGFCT250

LS

LSI

LSG

LSIG

Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

50

JGS305033GC

JGS305032GC

JGS305035GC

JGS305036GC

JGFCT050

100

JGS310033GC

JGS310032GC

JGS310035GC

JGS310036GC

JGFCT100

160

JGS316033GC

JGS316032GC

JGS316035GC

JGS316036GC

JGFCT160

250

JGS325033GC

JGS325032GC

JGS325035GC

JGS325036GC

JGFCT250

LS

LSI

LSG

LSIG

Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

IEC/UL/CSA—40/35

IEC/UL/CSA—70/65

2

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

50

JGH305033GC

JGH305032GC

JGH305035GC

JGH305036GC

JGFCT050

2

100

JGH310033GC

JGH310032GC

JGH310035GC

JGH310036GC

JGFCT100

160

JGH316033GC

JGH316032GC

JGH316035GC

JGH316036GC

JGFCT160

250

JGH325033GC

JGH325032GC

JGH325035GC

JGH325036GC

JGFCT250

2 2

Note 1 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is required.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-40

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information

2

JG-Frame

2 2 2 2 2 2

T250FJ

TA250FJ

Endcap Kit

Control Wire Terminal Kit

Load and Line Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes

Terminal Body Material

Wire Type

AWG Wire Metric Wire Range/ Number Catalog Range mm2 of Conductors Number

Rear Fed Terminals

Multiwire Connectors

Base Mounting Hardware Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or molded case switch. (Included with breaker.) If required separately, order 66A2546G02.

Standard Pressure Type Terminals 1

250

Stainless steel Cu

25–185

#4–350 (1)

T250FJ

250

Aluminum

10–185

#8–350 (1)

TA250FJ 12

Cu/Al

JG-Frame circuit breakers include aluminum terminals TA250FJ as standard. When optional stainless steel only terminals are required, order by catalog number.

Terminal Shields IP30 Location

Number of Poles

Catalog Number

Line or Load

2, 3

FJTS3K

4

FJTS4K

Catalog Number

Number of Poles

Catalog Number

Number of Poles

Metric

Imperial

3

FJIPBK 3

3

FJ3RTWK

FJ3RTDK

4

FJIPBK4 3

4

FJ4RTWK

FJ4RTDK

Endcap kits are used on J250-Frame breaker to connect busbar or similar electrical connections. Includes hardware. Control Wire Terminal Kit Description

Catalog Number

Package of 14 (priced individually)

FJCWTK

2 2

Multiwire Connectors Field-installed multiwire connectors for the load side (OFF) end terminals are used to distribute the load from the circuit breaker to multiple devices without the use of separate distribution terminal blocks.

JG-Frame Multiwire Connectors Ordering Information (Package of 3)

250

Wire Size Range AWG Cu #4–350 kcmil

Catalog Number TA250JGRF

Maximum Amperes

Wires per Terminal

Wire Size Range AWG Cu

Kit Catalog Number

250

3

14–2

3TA250FJ3

250

6

14–6

3TA250FJ6

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

3TA250JGRF

Rear fed terminals allow the cable to connect to the breaker from the back instead of the top. Terminal shields or interphase barriers are included with each rear fed terminal kit (depending on frame size). When catalog number starts with a 3, it indicates a kit with three terminals in each kit. Catalog number beginning with a TA indicates one terminal.

2

2

For use with aluminum or copper terminals only.

Maximum Amperes

2

2

Multiwire lug kits include terminal shield, mounting hardware, insulators and tin-plated aluminum connectors to replace three mechanical load lugs. UL listed as used on the load side (OFF) end.

Rear Fed Terminals

2

2

Interphase Barriers Endcap Kits

2

Notes 1 Individually packed. 2 Standard line and load. 3 Individually priced.

2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-41

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2

Accessories

2

Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker.

2

JG-Frame Accessories

2

Description

2

Internal Accessories (Only one internal accessory per pole)

2 2

Reference Page

Two- and Three-Pole Left

Four-Pole

Center

Right

Left

Center

Right

Neutral

Alarm lockout (Make/Break)

V4-T2-109

—

—

■

—

—

■

—

Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B)

V4-T2-109

—

—

■

—

—

■

—

Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B)

V4-T2-109

—

—

■

—

—

■

— —

2

Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination

V4-T2-109

—

—

■

—

—

■

Shunt trip—standard

V4-T2-109

■

—

—

■

—

—

—

2

Undervoltage release mechanism

V4-T2-110

■

—

—

■

—

—

—

2

External Accessories End cap kit

V4-T2-41

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Control wire terminal kit

V4-T2-41

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Rear fed terminals

V4-T2-41

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Multiwire connectors

V4-T2-41

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Base mounting hardware

V4-T2-41

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Interphase barriers

V4-T2-41

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Padlockable handle block

V4-T2-107

—

■

—

—

■

—

—

Padlockable handle lock hasp

V4-T2-107

❏

—

❏

❏

—

❏

—

Key interlock kit

V4-T2-107

❏

—

❏

❏

—

❏

—

Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers

V4-T2-107

●

●

●

—

—

—

—

Electrical operator

V4-T2-107

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Plug-in adapters

V4-T2-107

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Handle mechanisms

V4-T2-418

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Earth leakage/ground fault protector

V4-T2-92

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Drawout cassette

V4-T2-115

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Digitrip 310+ test kit

V4-T2-36

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Ammeter/cause of trip display

V4-T2-106

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Cause of trip LED module

V4-T2-106

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Moisture fungus treatment

V4-T2-105

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Freeze-tested circuit breakers

—

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Marine/naval application, UL 489 supplement SA and SB

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

2 2

2 2 2 2

Modifications (Refer to Eaton)

Legend ■ Applicable in indicated pole position ❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both ● Accessory available/modification available Note 1

Contact Eaton.

2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-42

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2.2

Technical Data and Specifications

2

UL 489/IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA) Ratings Volts AC (50/60 Hz)

Volts DC 1

2

250 23

2

Circuit Breaker Type

Number of Poles

JGE250

2, 3, 4

65

65

25

25

25

18

12

6

10

JGS250

2, 3, 4

85

85

40

40

35

18

12

6

22

JGH250

2, 3, 4

100

100

70

70

65

25

14

7

22

JGC250 4

3, 4

200

200

100

100

100

35

16

12

42

JGU250 4

3, 4

200

200

150

150

150

50

18

14

50

JGX250 4

3, 4

200

200

200

200

200

50

18

14

50

220–240 Icu

690 2

380–415 Ics

Icu

Ics

480

600

Icu

Ics

2 2 2 2 2

JG 310+ Specifications Description

Specification

Trip Unit Type

Digitrip RMS 310+

2 2

Breaker Type Frame designation

JG

Frames available

50 A, 100 A, 160 A 250 A

Continuous current range (A)

20–250A

Ground fault pickup (A)

10–250A

Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kAIC)

35, 65, 100, 150, 200

100% rated

Yes

2 2 2 2

Protection Ordering options

LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG

Arcflash reduction maintenance system (or maintenance mode)

No

Interchangeable trip unit

Yes

High load alarm (suffix B20) 5

Yes

Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B21) 5

Yes

Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B22) 5

Yes

Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG)

LSI, LSIG

Cause of trip indication

Yes

Thru-cover accessories

Yes

2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. 2 Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker. 3 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA. 4 Current limiting per UL 489. 5 B2x suffixes cannot be combined with B2x suffixes.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-43

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2

JG 310+ Adjustability Specifications

2

310+ Settings

JG Frame 50 A

100 A

160 A

250 A

A

20

40

63

100

2

B

20

45

80

125

C

25

50

90

150

2

D

30

63

100

160

E

32

70

110

175

2

F

40

80

125

200

2

G

45

90

150

225

H (= In)

50

100

160

250

Position 1

2

2

2

2

Position 2

4

4

4

4

Position 3

7

7

7

7

Position 4

10

10

10

10

2

Position 5

12

12

12

12

2

Position 6

15

15

15

15

Position 7

20

20

20

20

Position 8

24

24

24

24

Position 1

2x

2x

2x

2x

Position 2

3x

3x

3x

3x

Position 3

4x

4x

4x

4x

Position 4

5x

5x

5x

5x

2

Position 5

6x

6x

6x

6x

Position 6

7x

7x

7x

7x

2

Position 7

8x

8x

8x

8x

Position 8

10x

10x

10x

10x

Position 9

14x

14x

14x

14x

tsd (LS, LSG)

Fixed

67 at10x

67 at10x

67 at10x

67 at10x

tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds) (LSI, LSIG)

Position 1

Inst

Inst

Inst

Inst

Position 2

120

120

120

120

Position 3

300

300

300

300

Ig = gound fault pickup (amperes) (LSG, LSIG)

Position 1

10

20

32

50

Position 2

15

30

48

75

Position 3

20

40

64

100

2

Position 4

30

60

96

150

2

Position 5

40

80

128

200

Position 6

50

100

160

250

Position 1

Inst

Inst

Inst

Inst

Position 2

120

120

120

120

Position 3

300

300

300

300

2

2

Ir = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes) (All 310+)

tr = long delay time (seconds) (All 310+)

2

2 2

Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup (All 310+)

2

2 2 2 2 2

2 2 2 2 2

= short delay time I2t (milliseconds)

tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds) (LSG, LSIG)

Ir

Independently Adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting 1

N/A

Maintenance Mode pickup (2.5 x In) (amperes) 2

N/A

Notes 1 Not available for JG. Independently adjustable Ii setting available in LG, NG and RG ALSI and ALSIG trip units. 2 Maintenance Mode not available for JG frames. It is available for KD, LD, MDL, LG, NG, and RG.

2 2 V4-T2-44

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2.2

Dimensions and Weights

2

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2

JG-Frame

2

Number of Poles

Width

Height

Depth

2, 3

4.13 (104.9)

7.00 (177.8)

3.57 (90.7)

4

5.34 (135.6)

7.00 (177.8)

3.57 (90.7)

2 2

JG-Frame

2 Front View Three-Pole

Front Cover Cutout

Side View

2

CL

0.63 (16.0)

Breaker

3.06 (77.7)

2

3.95 (100.3)

0.19 (4.8) R

0.28 (7.1)

0.50 (12.7)

1.25 (31.8)

2.05 (52.1) CL Handle 4.00 (101.6)

2

7.00 (177.8)

2

1.06 (27.0) 4.13 (104.9)

2

3.44 (87.4)

2

Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg)

2

JG-Frame Breaker Type

Number of Poles 2, 3

4

JGC

6.00 (2.70)

8.00 (3.60)

JGE

6.00 (2.70)

8.00 (3.60)

JGH

6.00 (2.70)

8.00 (3.60)

JGS

6.00 (2.70)

8.00 (3.60)

JGU

6.00 (2.70)

8.00 (3.60)

JGX

6.00 (2.70)

8.00 (3.60)

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-45

2.2 2

4-Pole 5.50 (139.7) 3-Pole 4.13 (104.9) 0.69 2.06 1.38 (17.5) (52.3) (35.1)

2 2 2

Series G

JG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module

2

2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

3.92 (99.6)

5.50 (139.7) 1.25 (31.8)

3.57 (90.7)

3.92 (99.6)

5.50 (139.7)

2

0.63 (16.0) 1.88 (47.8)

R 0.19 (4.8)

11.25 (285.8)

6.97 (177.0)

4.93 (125.2)

0.28 (7.1)

7.00 (177.8)

2

2.05 (52.1)

11.25 (285.8) 1.06 (26.9)

0.50 (139.7)

2 2

RESET

2

TEST

3.37 (85.6)

4.25 (108.0)

2 2

3.31 (84.1)

2

3.69 (93.7)

3.57 (90.7)

3.81 (96.8) 4.78 (121.4)

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-46

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.05 (52.1) 4.09 (103.9)

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes)

2.2

Contents Description EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page V4-T2-15 V4-T2-29 V4-T2-48 V4-T2-49 V4-T2-60 V4-T2-61 V4-T2-63 V4-T2-65 V4-T2-74 V4-T2-85 V4-T2-89 V4-T2-92 V4-T2-96 V4-T2-101 V4-T2-104 V4-T2-112 V4-T2-114 V4-T2-115

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes)

2

Product Description

2

LG breaker is HACR rated.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-47

2.2 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

Catalog Number Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. Series G—LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes)

L G S 3 600 FA G C

2 Frame

2

Rating Blank = 80% rated C = 100% rated (for LGE, LGS and LGH only)

L

2

Standard/Application G = IEC/CE/UL/CSA

2 2

E S H C U X K

2 2 2

Performance 600 480 415 18 35 35 25 50 50 35 65 70 50 100 100 65 150 150 65 200 200 Molded case switch

Number of Poles

240 65 85 100 200 200 200

3 = Three 4 = Four—Neutral 0% protected 6 = Four—Neutral 60% protected 7 = Four—Neutral 100% protected 8 = Four—Neutral 0–60% protected 9 = Four—Neutral 0–100 protected

Amperes 250 300 350 400 500 600 630

Trip Unit AA = Adj. adj. FA = Fixed adj. KS = Molded case switch 33 = 310+ electronic LS 32 = 310+ electronic LSI 35 = 310+ electronic LSG 36 = 310+ electronic LSIG 38 = 310+ electronic ALSI 39 = 310+ electronic ALSIG NN = Frame only (630 A only; no trip unit)

2 2 2 2

Trip Unit

LT 3 600 FA B20

2 2

Trip LT

Number of Poles 3 = Three 4 = Four—neutral 0% protected 8 = Four—neutral 0/60% protected 9 = Four—neutral 0/100% protected

2 2 2 2 2

Terminations/Hardware Terminals Mounting Hardware M = Metric end caps Metric E = Imperial end caps Imperial G = Line/load standard Metric W = Without terminals

Amperes 250 300 350 400 500 600 630

Trip Unit AA = Adj. adj., thermal-magnetic FA = Fixed adj., thermal-magnetic KS = Molded case switch 33 = 310+ electronic LS 32 = 310+ electronic LSI 35 = 310+ electronic LSG 36 = 310+ electronic LSIG 38 = 310+ electronic ALSI 39 = 310+ electronic ALSIG

Notes 1 Bxx features cannot be combined with other Bxx features. 2 B21 and B22 available with LSG and LSIG trip units.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-48

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Features (ETU Only) 12 Blank= No feature B20 = High load alarm B21 = Ground fault alarm, with trip B22 = Ground fault alarm, no trip ZG = Zone selective interlocking

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2.2

Product Selection

2

Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware) LG-Frame

Three-Pole 2

LG-Frame

2 Four-Pole (0%) 3

Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic

Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 45

Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic

Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 45

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

250

LGE3250FAG

LGE3250AAG

LGE4250FAG

LGE4250AAG

300

LGE3300FAG

—

LGE4300FAG

—

320

—

LGE3320AAG

—

LGE4320AAG

350

LGE3350FAG

—

LGE4350FAG

—

400

LGE3400FAG

LGE3400AAG

LGE4400FAG

LGE4400AAG

500

LGE3500FAG

LGE3500AAG

LGE4500FAG

LGE4500AAG

600

LGE3600FAG

—

LGE4600FAG

—

630 4

—

LGE3630AAG

—

LGE4630AAG

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA) IC Rating: 50 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 1 Three-Pole 2

LG-Frame

2

LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA) IC Rating: 35 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 1

2 Four-Pole (0%) 3

2

Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic

Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 45

Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic

Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 45

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

250

LGS3250FAG

LGS3250AAG

LGS4250FAG

LGS4250AAG

300

LGS3300FAG

—

LGS4300FAG

—

2

320

—

LGS3320AAG

—

LGS4320AAG

350

LGS3350FAG

—

LGS4350FAG

—

400

LGS3400FAG

LGS3400AAG

LGS4400FAG

LGS4400AAG

500

LGS3500FAG

LGS3500AAG

LGS4500FAG

LGS4500AAG

600

LGS3600FAG

—

LGS4600FAG

—

630 4

—

LGS3630AAG

—

LGS4630AAG

2 2 2 2 2

LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA) IC Rating: 70 kAIC at 415, 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 1 Three-Pole 2

2

Four-Pole (0%) 3

Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic

Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 45

Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic

Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 45

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

250

LGH3250FAG

LGH3250AAG

LGH4250FAG

LGH4250AAG

300

LGH3300FAG

—

LGH4300FAG

—

320

—

LGH3320AAG

—

LGH4320AAG

350

LGH3350FAG

—

LGH4350FAG

—

400

LGH3400FAG

LGH3400AAG

LGH4400FAG

LGH4400AAG

500

LGH3500FAG

LGH3500AAG

LGH4500FAG

LGH4500AAG

LGH3600FAG

—

LGH4600FAG

—

—

LGH3630AAG

—

LGH4630AAG

600 630

4

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Replace suffix “G” with “W” for no line and load terminals. 2 For two-pole applications, use two outer poles. 3 Neutral protection is indicated by the fourth character: 4 = 0%, 7 = 100%, 8 = adjustable 0–60% and 9 = 0–100%. Neutral is on LH side. 4 320/630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the LG. 5 Adjustable thermal units are typically used in IEC markets and are not UL or CSA listed. Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2 2 V4-T2-49

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2

Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware)

2

LG-Frame

LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA), Current Limiting Per UL 489 IC Rating: 100 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 1

2

Three-Pole 2

Four-Pole (0%) 3

Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic

Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 45

Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic

Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 45

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

250

LGC3250FAG

LGC3250AAG

LGC4250FAG

LGC4250AAG

2

300

LGC3300FAG

—

LGC4300FAG

—

320

—

LGC3320AAG

—

LGC4320AAG

2

350

LGC3350FAG

—

LGC4350FAG

—

400

LGC3400FAG

LGC3400AAG

LGC4400FAG

LGC4400AAG

500

LGC3500FAG

LGC3500AAG

LGC4500FAG

LGC4500AAG

600

LGC3600FAG

—

LGC4600FAG

—

—

LGC3630AAG

—

LGC4630AAG

2 2

2 2

630

4

2 2

LG-Frame

LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA), Current Limiting Per UL 489 IC Rating: 150 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 1 Three-Pole 2

2

Four-Pole (0%) 3

Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic

Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 45

Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic

Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 45

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

250

LGU3250FAG

LGU3250AAG

LGU4250FAG

LGU4250AAG

2

300

LGU3300FAG

—

LGU4300FAG

—

320

—

LGU3320AAG

—

LGU4320AAG

2

350

LGU3350FAG

—

LGU4350FAG

—

400

LGU3400FAG

LGU3400AAG

LGU4400FAG

LGU4400AAG

2

500

LGU3500FAG

LGU3500AAG

LGU4500FAG

LGU4500AAG

2

600

LGU3600FAG

—

LGU4600FAG

—

630 4

—

LGU3630AAG

—

LGU4630AAG

2 2

2 2

LG-Frame

LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA), Current Limiting Per UL 489 IC Rating: 200 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 1 Three-Pole 2

2

Four-Pole (0%) 3

Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic

Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 45

Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic

Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 45

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

250

LGX3250FAG

LGX3250AAG

LGX4250FAG

LGX4250AAG

2

300

LGX3300FAG

—

LGX4300FAG

—

320

—

LGX3320AAG

—

LGX4320AAG

2

350

LGX3350FAG

—

LGX4350FAG

—

400

LGX3400FAG

LGX3400AAG

LGX4400FAG

LGX4400AAG

2

500

LGX3500FAG

LGX3500AAG

LGX4500FAG

LGX4500AAG

2

600

LGX3600FAG

—

LGX4600FAG

—

630 4

—

LGX3630AAG

—

LGX4630AAG

2 2

2

Notes 1 Replace suffix “G” with “W” for no line and load terminals. 2 For two-pole applications, use two outer poles. 3 Neutral protection is indicated by the fourth character: 4 = 0%, 7 = 100%, 8 = adjustable 0–60% and 9 = 0–100%. Neutral is on LH side. 4 320/630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the LG. 5 Adjustable thermal units are typically used in IEC markets and are not UL or CSA listed.

2 2 V4-T2-50

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2.2

Molded Case Switches 1 Ampere Rating

Number of Poles

Catalog Number

400

32

LGK3400KSG

4

LGK4400KSG

630 3

32

LGK3630KSG

4

LGK4630KSG

2 2 2 2 2

Frame—IC Rating at 415/480 Volts Maximum Amperes 3

2

Three-Pole 2

Four-Pole 0%

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

LGE3630NN

LGE4630NN

LGE3630NNWC

—

LGS3630NN

LGS4630NN

LGS3630NNWC

—

LGH3630NN

LGH4630NN

LGH3630NNWC

—

2

LGC4630NN

2

2

35/35 630 3

2 2

50/50 630 3

2 2

70/53 630 3

100/100 Current Limiting Per UL 489 630

LGC3630NN

2

150/150 Current Limiting Per UL 489 630

LGU3630NN

LGU4630NN

2

200/200 Current Limiting 630

LGX3630NN

LGX4630NN

2 2

Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Three-Pole

2

Four-Pole (0%)

2

5

Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic

Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 4

Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic

Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 4

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

250

LT3250FA

LT3250AA

LT4250FA

LT4250AA

300

LT3300FA

—

LT4300FA

—

320

—

LT3320AA

—

LT4320AA

350

LT3350FA

—

LT4350FA

—

400

LT3400FA

LT3400AA

LT4400FA

LT4400AA

500

LT3500FA

LT3500AA

LT4500FA

LT4500AA

600

LT3600FA

—

LT4600FA

—

630

—

LT3630AA

—

LT4630AA

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Molded case switches will trip above 6300 amperes. 2 For two-pole applications, use two outer poles. 3 630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the LG. 4 Adjustable thermal, adjustable magnetic trip units are typically used in IEC markets and are not UL or CSA listed. 5 Neutral protection is indicated by the third character: 4 = 0%, 7 = 100%, 8 = adjustable 0–60% and 9 = 0–100%. 6 100% rated frame.

2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-51

2.2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

Digitrip 310+ Electronic Trip Units See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-62.

2

LS

LSI

LSG

LSIG

Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

Ampere Rating

2

Three-Pole

2

250

LT325033

LT325032

LT325035

LT325036

LGFCT250

400

LT340033

LT340032

LT340035

LT340036

LGFCT400

2

600

LT360033

LT360032

LT360035

LT360036

LGFCT600

630 2

LT363033

LT363032

LT363035

LT363036

LGFCT600

2

Four-Pole 34 250

LT425033

LT425032

LT425035

LT425036

—

2

400

LT440033

LT440032

LT440035

LT440036

—

2

600

LT460033

LT460032

LT460035

LT460036

—

630 2

LT463033

LT463032

LT463035

LT463036

—

2 2

310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories

2

Description

Catalog Number

Electronic portable test kit

MTST230V

2

Trip unit tamper protection wire seal

5108A03H01

External neutral sensor (630 A)

LGFCT630

2

External neutral sensor (600 A)

LGFCT600

2

External neutral sensor (400 A)

LGFCT400

External neutral sensor (250 A)

LGFCT250

2

Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication

TRIP-LED

Breaker-mount ammeter module

DIGIVIEW

2

Remote-mount ammeter module

DIGIVIEWR06

2 2

Notes 1 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. 2 630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA listed rating for the LG. 3 Neutral protection: 4= 0%, 6 = 60%, 7 = 100%. Electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable. 4 Four-pole LSG and LSIG trip units are only available with 0% neutral protection.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-52

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2.2

IC Rating at 415/480 V Complete LG Breakers with Electronic Trip Unit (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware) 1 See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-62.

2

IC Rating: 35 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac

2

LS

LSI

LSG

LSIG

Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 2

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

250

LGE325033G

LGE325032G

LGE325035G

LGE325036G

LGFCT250

400

LGE340033G

LGE340032G

LGE340035G

LGE340036G

LGFCT400

600

LGE360033G

LGE360032G

LGE360035G

LGE360036G

LGFCT600

630 4

LGE363033G

LGE363032G

LGE363035G

LGE363036G

LGFCT600

250

LGE425033G

LGE425032G

LGE425035G

LGE425036G

—

400

LGE440033G

LGE440032G

LGE440035G

LGE440036G

—

600

LGE460033G

LGE460032G

LGE460035G

LGE460036G

—

630 4

LGE463033G

LGE463032G

LGE463035G

LGE463036G

—

Ampere Rating

2 2 2

Three-Pole 3

2 2 2

Four-Pole 5

2 2 2

IC Rating: 50 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac LS

LSI

LSG

LSIG

Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 2

2

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

250

LGS325033G

LGS325032G

LGS325035G

LGS325036G

LGFCT250

400

LGS340033G

LGS340032G

LGS340035G

LGS340036G

LGFCT400

600

LGS360033G

LGS360032G

LGS360035G

LGS360036G

LGFCT600

630 4

LGS363033G

LGS363032G

LGS363035G

LGS363036G

LGFCT600

2

250

LGS425033G

LGS425032G

LGS425035G

LGS425036G

—

400

LGS440033G

LGS440032G

LGS440035G

LGS440036G

—

2

600

LGS460033G

LGS460032G

LGS460035G

LGS460036G

—

630 4

LGS463033G

LGS463032G

LGS463035G

LGS463036G

—

Ampere Rating Three-Pole 3

2 2

Four-Pole 56

2 2

IC Rating: 70 kAIC at 415 Vac, 65 kAIC at 480 Vac

2

LS

LSI

LSG

LSIG

Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 2

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

250

LGH325033G

LGH325032G

LGH325035G

LGH325036G

LGFCT250

400

LGH340033G

LGH340032G

LGH340035G

LGH340036G

LGFCT400

600

LGH360033G

LGH360032G

LGH360035G

LGH360036G

LGFCT600

LGH363033G

LGH363032G

LGH363035G

LGH363036G

LGFCT600

2

250

LGH425033G

LGH425032G

LGH425035G

LGH425036G

—

2

400

LGH440033G

LGH440032G

LGH440035G

LGH440036G

—

600

LGH460033G

LGH460032G

LGH460035G

LGH460036G

—

630 4

LGH463033G

LGH463032G

LGH463035G

LGH463036G

—

Ampere Rating

2 2

Three-Pole 3

630 4

Four-Pole

2

56

2 2

Notes 1 Replace suffix “G” with “W” for no line and load terminals. 2 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. 3 For two-pole applications, use two outer poles. 4 630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA listed rating for the LG. 5 Neutral protection: 4= 0%, 6 = 60%, 7 = 100%. Electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable. 6 Four-pole breakers with LSG and LSIG trip units are only available with 0% neutral protection.

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2 2 2 V4-T2-53

2.2 2 2 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

IC Rating at 415/480 V Complete LG Breakers with Electronic Trip Unit (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware) 1 See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-62. IC Rating: 100 kAIC at 415 Vac and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL 489

Ampere Rating

LS

LSI

LSG

LSIG

Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 2

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Three-Pole 3

2

250

LGC325033G

LGC325032G

LGC325035G

LGC325036G

LGFCT250

2

400

LGC340033G

LGC340032G

LGC340035G

LGC340036G

LGFCT400

600

LGC360033G

LGC360032G

LGC360035G

LGC360036G

LGFCT600

630 4

LGC363033G

LGC363032G

LGC363035G

LGC363036G

LGFCT600

2

Four-Pole 56

2

250

LGC425033G

LGC425032G

LGC425035G

LGC425036G

—

400

LGC440033G

LGC440032G

LGC440035G

LGC440036G

—

2

600

LGC460033G

LGC460032G

LGC460035G

LGC460036G

—

630 4

LGC463033G

LGC463032G

LGC463035G

LGC463036G

—

2

IC Rating: 150 kAIC at 415 Vac and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL 489

2 2 2

Ampere Rating

LS

LSI

LSG

LSIG

Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 2

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Three-Pole 3 250

LGU325033G

LGU325032G

LGU325035G

LGU325036G

LGFCT250

2

400

LGU340033G

LGU340032G

LGU340035G

LGU340036G

LGFCT400

600

LGU360033G

LGU360032G

LGU360035G

LGU360036G

LGFCT600

2

630 4

LGU363033G

LGU363032G

LGU363035G

LGU363036G

LGFCT600

250

LGU425033G

LGU425032G

LGU425035G

LGU425036G

—

400

LGU440033G

LGU440032G

LGU440035G

LGU440036G

—

600

LGU460033G

LGU460032G

LGU460035G

LGU460036G

—

630 4

LGU463033G

LGU463032G

LGU463035G

LGU463036G

—

2 2 2 2 2

Four-Pole 5

IC Rating: 200 kAIC at 415 Vac and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL 489

Ampere Rating

LS

LSI

LSG

LSIG

Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 2

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

Three-Pole 3

2

250

LGX325033G

LGX325032G

LGX325035G

LGX325036G

LGFCT250

400

LGX340033G

LGX340032G

LGX340035G

LGX340036G

LGFCT400

2

600

LGX360033G

LGX360032G

LGX360035G

LGX360036G

LGFCT600

630 4

LGX363033G

LGX363032G

LGX363035G

LGX363036G

LGFCT600

2

Four-Pole 5 250

LGX425033G

LGX425032G

LGX425035G

LGX425036G

—

2

400

LGX440033G

LGX440032G

LGX440035G

LGX440036G

—

600

LGX460033G

LGX460032G

LGX460035G

LGX460036G

—

2

630 4

LGX463033G

LGX463032G

LGX463035G

LGX463036G

—

2 2 2

Notes 1 Replace suffix “G” with “W” for no line and load terminals. 2 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. 3 For two-pole applications, use two outer poles. 4 630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA listed rating for the LG. 5 Neutral protection: 4= 0%, 6 = 60%, 7 = 100%. Electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable. 6 Four-pole breakers with LSG and LSIG trip units are only available with 0% neutral protection.

V4-T2-54

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2.2

LG 100% Rated Circuit Breaker—Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit

2

Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware) LG-Frame

LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA) IC Rating: 35 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 1

LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA) IC Rating: 70 kAIC at 415, 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 1

Three-Pole 2

Three-Pole 2

Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic

Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

250

LGE3250FAGC

250

LGH3250FAGC

300

LGE3300FAGC

300

LGH3300FAGC

320

—

320

—

350

LGE3350FAGC

350

LGH3350FAGC

400

LGE3400FAGC

400

LGH3400FAGC

500

LGE3500FAGC

500

LGH3500FAGC

600

LGE3600FAGC

600

LGH3600FAGC

630 4

—

630 4

—

LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA) IC Rating: 50 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 1

250

LGS3250FAGC

300

LGS3300FAGC

320

—

350

LGS3350FAGC

400

LGS3400FAGC

500

LGS3500FAGC

600 630

2

2 2 2

Notes 1 Replace suffix “G” with “W” for no line and load terminals. 2 For two-pole applications, use two outer poles.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

LGS3600FAGC 4

2

2

Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Catalog Number

2

2

Three-Pole 2

Ampere Rating

2

2

—

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-55

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2

LG 100% Rated Electronic Breaker Per UL 489 See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-62.

2

IEC/UL/CSA 35 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac

2

LS

LSI

LSG

LSIG

Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1

2

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

250

LGE325033GC

LGE325032GC

LGE325035GC

LGE325036GC

LGFCT250

400

LGE340033GC

LGE340032GC

LGE340035GC

LGE340036GC

LGFCT400

2

600

LGE360033GC

LGE360032GC

LGE360035GC

LGE360036GC

LGFCT600

630 2

LGE363033GC

LGE363032GC

LGE363035GC

LGE363036GC

LGFCT600

2 2

IEC/UL/CSA 50 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac LS

LSI

LSG

LSIG

Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

250

LGS325033GC

LGS325032GC

LGS325035GC

LGS325036GC

LGFCT250

2

400

LGS340033GC

LGS340032GC

LGS340035GC

LGS340036GC

LGFCT400

600

LGS360033GC

LGS360032GC

LGS360035GC

LGS360036GC

LGFCT600

2

630 2

LGS363033GC

LGS363032GC

LGS363035GC

LGS363036GC

LGFCT600

2 2

2

IEC/UL/CSA 70 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac

2

LS

LSI

LSG

LSIG

Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1

2

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

250

LGH325033GC

LGH325032GC

LGH325035GC

LGH325036GC

LGFCT250

400

LGH340033GC

LGH340032GC

LGH340035GC

LGH340036GC

LGFCT400

2

600

LGH360033GC

LGH360032GC

LGH360035GC

LGH360036GC

LGFCT600

630 2

LGH363033GC

LGH363032GC

LGH363035GC

LGH363036GC

LGFCT600

2 2

Notes 1 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is required. 2 630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA listed rating for the LG.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-56

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2.2

LG Electronic Breaker with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-62. Series G LG circuit breakers are available with the Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System™ integrated into the electronic trip units helping to improve safety by providing a LG with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System

simple and reliable method to reduce fault clearing time. The Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System unit utilizes a separate analog trip circuit that provides faster

2 interruption times than the standard (digital) “instantaneous” protection. Work locations downstream of a circuit breaker with an Arcflash Reduction

Maintenance System unit can have a significantly lower incident energy level, reducing arc flash potential to the system.

Ampere Rating

ALSI

ALSIG

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2 2 2

LG Electronic Breaker with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1

2

IEC/UL/CSA 35 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac

2 2 2

250

LGE325038G

LGE365039G

LGFCT250

400

LGE340038G

LGE340039G

LGFCT400

600

LGE360038G

LGE360039G

LGFCT600

630

LGE363038G

LGE363039G

LGFCT600

2 2

2

IEC/UL/CSA 50 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 250

LGS325038G

LGS365039G

LGFCT250

400

LGS340038G

LGS340039G

LGFCT400

600

LGS360038G

LGS360039G

LGFCT600

630

LGS363038G

LGS363039G

LGFCT600

2 2

IEC/UL/CSA 70 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 250

LGH325038G

LGH365039G

LGFCT250

400

LGH340038G

LGH340039G

LGFCT400

600

LGH360038G

LGH360039G

LGFCT600

630

LGH363038G

LGH363039G

LGFCT600

2 2 2

IEC/UL/CSA 100 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL 489 250

LGC325038G

LGC365039G

LGFCT250

400

LGC340038G

LGC340039G

LGFCT400

600

LGC360038G

LGC360039G

LGFCT600

630

LGC363038G

LGC363039G

LGFCT600

2 2

IEC/UL/CSA 150 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL 489 250

LGU325038G

LGU365039G

LGFCT250

400

LGU340038G

LGU340039G

LGFCT400

600

LGU360038G

LGU360039G

LGFCT600

630

LGU363038G

LGU363039G

LGFCT600

2 2 2

IEC/UL/CSA 200 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL 489 250

LGX325038G

LGX365039G

LGFCT250

400

LGX340038G

LGX340039G

LGFCT400

600

LGX360038G

LGX360039G

LGFCT600

630

LGX363038G

LGX363039G

LGFCT600

2 2 2 2

LG Electronic Trip Units with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System

Ampere Rating

ALSI Catalog Number

ALSIG Catalog Number

Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1 Catalog Number

250

LT325038

LT325039

LGFCT250

400

LT340038

LT340039

LGFCT400

600

LT360038

LT360039

LGFCT600

630

LT363038

LT363039

LGFCT600

2 2 2 2

Note 1 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is required.

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2 V4-T2-57

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2

Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information

2

Line and Load Terminals

2

Maximum Breaker Amperes

2

Terminal Body Material

Wire Type

AWG Wire Range/ Number of Conductors

Number of Terminals Included

Metric Wire Range (mm2)

Catalog Number

400

Aluminum

Cu/Al

500–750 (1)

240–380 (1)

3

3TA631LK 1

400

Aluminum

Cu/Al

500–750 (1)

240–380 (1)

4

4TA631LK 1

400

Copper

Cu

500–750 (1)

240–380 (1)

3

3T631LK 1

400

Copper

Cu

500–750 (1)

240–380 (1)

4

4T631LK 1

630

Aluminum

Cu/Al

2–500 (2)

35–240 (2)

1

TA632L

2

630

Aluminum

Cu/Al

2–500 (2)

35–240 (2)

3

3TA632LK 12

630

Aluminum

Cu/Al

2–500 (2)

35–240 (2)

4

4TA632LK 12

2

630

Copper

Cu

2–500 (2)

35–240 (2)

3

3T632LK 1

630

Copper

Cu

2–500 (2)

35–240 (2)

4

4T632LK 1

2

400

Aluminum

Cu/Al

3–500 (1)

35–240 (1)

1

TA350LK 2

400

Copper

Cu

3–500 (1)

35–240 (1)

1

T350LK

2 2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Base Mounting Hardware Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or molded case switch. (Included with breaker.) If required separately, order 66A4560G03.

Interphase Barrier

Terminal Covers

Rear Fed Terminals Catalog Number

Description Three-pole terminal cover

3

LTS3K

Four-pole terminal cover 3

LTS4K

End Cap Kits (MIO Metric Nuts) Number of Poles

Catalog Number

3

L3RTWK

4

L4RTWK

Control Wire Terminal Kit Description

Terminal Body Type

Catalog Number

2

Three-pole kit

Aluminum

3TA632LKW

Four-pole kit

Aluminum

4TA632LKW

2

Three-pole kit

Copper

3T632LKW

Four-pole kit

Copper

4T632LKW

2

Terminal Spreaders

2

Number of Poles

Catalog Number

2

3

LGTEW3

4

LGTEW4

2

Terminal Extensions

2

Number of Poles

Catalog Number

2

3

LGTES3

4

LGTES4

2

Handle Extension

2

Description

Catalog Number

Handle extension

HEXLG

2

V4-T2-58

Package of 2

Catalog Number

Interphase barrier

IPB3

Maximum Amperes

Wire Size Range AWG Cu

Catalog Number

400

2–500 kcmil

TA350LKRF

400

2–500 kcmil

3TA350LKRF

630

2–500 (2) kcmil

TA632LKRF

630

2–500 (2) kcmil

3TA632LKRF

Rear fed terminals allow the cable to connect to the breaker from the back instead of the top. Terminal shields or interphase barriers are included with each rear fed terminal kit (depending on frame size). When catalog number starts with a 3, it indicates a kit with three terminals in each kit. Catalog number beginning with a TA indicates one terminal. Multiwire Connectors Field-installed multiwire connectors for the load side (OFF) end terminals are used to distribute the load from the circuit breaker to multiple devices without the use of separate distribution terminal blocks. Multiwire lug kits include terminal shield, mounting hardware, insulators and tin-plated aluminum connectors to replace three mechanical load lugs. UL listed as used on the load side (OFF) end. LG-Frame Multiwire Connectors Ordering Information (Package of 3) Maximum Amperes

Wires per Terminal

Wire Size Range AWG Cu

Kit Catalog Number

600

6

14–1/0

3TA600L6K

Notes 1 Includes LTS3K (three-pole) or LTS4K (four-pole) terminal covers. 2 Standard terminal included with complete breaker. 3 Included in TA63IL, T63IL, TA632L kits listed above.

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2.2

Terminals and Terminal Cover for the LG Breaker—Includes LTS3K (Three-Pole) or LTS4K (Four-Pole) Terminal Covers

2

Note: Extended terminal covers add 2.13 inches (54.0 mm) to breaker length.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-59

2.2 2 2 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

Accessories

Base Mounting Hardware Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or molded case switch. (Included with breaker.) If required separately, order 66A4560G03. Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker.

2

LG-Frame Accessories

2

Description

2

Reference Page

Three-Pole Left

Four-Pole Center

Right

Left

Center

Right

Alarm lockout (Make/Break)

V4-T2-109

■

■

2

Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B)

V4-T2-109

■

■

2

Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B)

V4-T2-109

■

■

Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination

V4-T2-109

■

Shunt trip—standard

V4-T2-109

■

■

Undervoltage release mechanism

V4-T2-110

■

■

2

Neu.

Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole)

■

2

External Accessories

2

End cap kit

V4-T2-58

●

●

Handle extension

V4-T2-58

●

●

Terminal cover

V4-T2-58

●

●

Rear fed terminals

V4-T2-58

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Multiwire connectors

V4-T2-58

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Padlockable handle block

V4-T2-107

Padlockable handle lock hasp

V4-T2-107

❏

Key interlock kit

V4-T2-107

❏

Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers

V4-T2-107

●

●

2

Electrical operator

V4-T2-107

●

2

Plug-in adapters

V4-T2-107

Rear connecting studs Handle mechanisms

2

■

■ ❏

❏

❏

❏

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

V4-T2-107

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

V4-T2-418

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Earth leakage/ground fault protector

V4-T2-92

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Drawout cassette

V4-T2-115

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Digitrip 310+ test kit

V4-T2-52

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Ammeter/cause of trip display

V4-T2-106

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Cause of trip LED module

V4-T2-106

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

2

2

❏ ❏

Modifications (Refer to Eaton)

2

Moisture fungus treatment

V4-T2-105

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Freeze-tested circuit breakers

—

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Marine/naval application, UL 489 Supplement SA and SB

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2 2 2

Legend ■ Applicable in indicated pole position ❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both ● Accessory available/modification available Note Contact Eaton.

1

2 2 V4-T2-60

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2.2

Technical Data and Specifications

2

Interrupting Capacity Ratings

2

UL 489/IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings

2

Interrupting Capacity (kA rms Symmetrical Amperes) (kA) Circuit Breaker Type

Volts DC 1

Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Number of Poles

240–240 Icu

380–415 Ics

Icu

480

600

690

Ics

Icu

250 Ics

Icu

Ics

LGE630

3, 4

65

65

35

35

35

18

12

6

22

22

LGS630

3, 4

85

85

50

50

50

25

20

10

22

22

LGH630

3, 4

100

100

70

70

65

35

25

13

42

42

LGC630 4

3, 4

200

200

100

100

100

50

30

15

42

42

LGU630 4

3, 4

200

200

150

150

150

65

35

18

50

50

200

200

200

200

65

35

18

50

50

LGX630

4

3, 4

200

5

2

23

2 2 2 2 2

LG 310+ Specifications Description

Specification

Trip Unit Type

Digitrip RMS 310+

2 2

Breaker Type Frame designation

LG

Frames available

250 A, 400 A, 600 A

Continuous current range (A)

100–600 A

Ground fault pickup (A)

50–600 A

2 2 2

Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kAIC)

35, 65, 100, 150, 200

100% rated

Yes

2

Ordering options

LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG

Arcflash reduction maintenance system (or maintenance mode)

Yes

2

Protection

Interchangeable trip unit

Yes

High load alarm (suffix B20) 5

Yes

Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B21) 5

Yes

Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B22) 5

Yes

Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG)

LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG

Cause of trip indication

Yes

Thru-cover accessories

Yes

2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 DC rating apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. 2 Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuits. 3 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at–kA. 4 Current limiting per UL 489. 5 B2x suffixes cannot be combined with B2x suffixes.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-61

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2

LG 310+ Adjustability Specifications

2

310+ Settings

LG Frame 250 A

400 A

600 A

A

100

160

250

2

B

125

200

300

C

150

225

315

2

D

160

250

350

E

175

300

400

2

F

200

315

450

2

G

225

350

500

H (= In)

250

400

600

Position 1

2

2

2

Position 2

4

4

4

Position 3

7

7

7

Position 4

10

10

10

2

Position 5

12

12

12

2

Position 6

15

15

15

Position 7

20

20

20

Position 8

24

24

24

Position 1

2x

2x

2x

Position 2

3x

3x

3x

Position 3

4x

4x

4x

Position 4

5x

5x

5x

2

Position 5

6x

6x

6x

Position 6

7x

7x

7x

2

Position 7

8x

8x

8x

Position 8

10x

10x

10x

Position 9

12x

12x

12x

tsd (LS, LSG)

Fixed

67 at10x

67 at10x

67 at10x

tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds) 1 (LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG)

Position 1

Inst

Inst

Inst

Position 2

120

120

120

Position 3

300

300

300

Ig = gound fault pickup (amperes) (LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)

Position 1

50

80

120

Position 2

75

120

180

Position 3

100

160

240

2

Position 4

150

240

360

2

Position 5

200

320

480

Position 6

250

400

600

Position 1

Inst

Inst

Inst

Position 2

120

120

120

300

300

2

2

Ir = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes) (All 310+)

tr = long delay time (seconds) (All 310+)

2

2 2

Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup (All 310+)

2

2 2 2 2 2

2 2

= short delay time I2t (milliseconds)

tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds) (LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)

Ir

Position 3

300

Independently Adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting (ALSI, ALSIG)

Yes

2.5x, 4x, 6x, 2.5x, 4x, 6x, 2.5x, 4x, 6x, 7x, 8x, 10x, 7x, 8x, 10x, 7x, 8x, 10x, 12x 12x 12x

2

Maintenance Mode (remote) pickup (2.5 x In) 2 (ALSI, ALSIG)

Fixed

2.5x

2

Notes 1 50 ms for ALSI and ALSIG trip units. 2 Maintenance Mode is enabled remotely using a 24 Vdc circuit.

2

2 2

V4-T2-62

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2.2

Dimensions and Weights

2

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2

LG-Frame Number of Poles

Width

Height

Depth

2, 3

5.48 (139.2)

10.13 (257.3)

4.09 (103.9)

4

7.22 (183.4)

10.13 (257.3)

4.09 (103.9)

2 2 2

LG-Frame Note: TA63IL, T63IL, T632L, TA632L terminals add 1.19 inches (30.2 mm) to line or load side of LG. LTS3K or LTS4K terminal covers add 2.13 inches (54.1 mm) to line or load side of LG. 2.43 (61.7) R 0.25 (6.4)

CL

2 2

4.06 (103.1)

Breaker 3.16 (80.3)

5.58 (141.7)

2.00 (50.8)

2

10.13 (257.3)

2

1.92 (48.8) 2.69 (68.3)

5.38 (136.7)

5.48 (139.2)

2 2

Three-Pole

2

Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg) LG-Frame Breaker Type

Two- and Three-Pole

Four-Pole

LGE, LGS, LGH, LGC, LGU, LGX

16 (7.3)

20 (9.1)

2 2

Notes 1 DC rating apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. 2 Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuits. 3 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at–kA. 4 Three-poles in series. 750 Vdc ratings available (four-pole in series, not UL listed). Contact Eaton. 5 IEC rating is 300 kA at 240 Vac. 6 Current limiting per UL 489.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-63

2.2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

LG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module 4.31 (109.5)

5.16 (131.1) 3.44 (87.4) 1.72 (43.7)

2 2 2 2 2

4.06 (103.1) 3.98 (101.1)

0.86 (21.8)

5.58 (141.7)

5.58 (141.7)

4.73 (120.1)

3.44 (87.4) 1.72 (43.7)

4.73 (120.1)

2 2

8.44 (214.4)

8.44 (214.4)

10.13 (257.3)

2 2 2

15.38 (390.7) 13.69 (347.7)

13.68 (347.5)

15.38 (390.7)

2 2

3-Pole 5.48 (139.2)

2

4-Pole 7.22 (183.4)

2 2

4-Pole 2.75 (69.9) 3-Pole 2.74 (69.6)

3.97 (100.8) 4.30 (109.2) 4.55 (115.6) 5.43 (137.9)

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-64

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

4-Pole 7.22 (183.4) 3-Pole 5.48 (139.2)

4-Pole 2.75 (69.9) 3-Pole 2.74 (69.6)

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

NG-Frame (1200 Ampere)

2.2

Contents Description EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection Guide and Ordering Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page V4-T2-15 V4-T2-29 V4-T2-47

2 2 2

V4-T2-66

2

V4-T2-67 V4-T2-70 V4-T2-71 V4-T2-73 V4-T2-74 V4-T2-85 V4-T2-89 V4-T2-92 V4-T2-96

2

V4-T2-101 V4-T2-104 V4-T2-112 V4-T2-114 V4-T2-115

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes)

2

Product Description

2

●

●

All Eaton NG-Frame circuit breakers are suitable for reverse feed use All NG-Frame circuit breakers are HACR rated

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-65

2.2 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

Catalog Number Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. NG Circuit Breaker with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit

NG H 3 080 39 ZG E C

2

Rating

Frame NG

2 2

Blank = 80% rated C = 100% rated

Performance at 480 Vac S = 50 kAIC H = 65 kAIC C = 100 kAIC U = 150 kAIC 1 K = Molded case switch

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Amperes 080 = 800 120 = 1200 Poles 3 = Three 4 = Four; neutral 2 0% protected 7 = Four; neutral 2 100% protected 9 = Four; neutral 2 0/60/100% adjustable protection

Trip Unit 33 = 32 = 35 = 36 = 38 = 39 = KS =

310+ Electronic LS 310+ Electronic LSI 310+ Electronic LSG 310+ Electronic LSIG 310+ Electronic ALSI with maintenance mode 310+ Electronic ALSIG with maintenance mode Molded case switch

Notes 1 800 A only. 2 Neutral inn left pole on GN; right pole on NG. 3 Breakers do not ship with lugs. Trip units are factory installable only.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-66

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Terminations 3 M = Metric tapped line/load conductors E = Imperial tapped line/load conductors Feature Blank B20 B21 B22 ZG

= = = = =

No feature High load alarm Ground fault alarm, with trip Ground fault alarm, no trip Zone selective interlocking

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

Product Selection Guide and Ordering Information

2

Type NGS Standard Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 50 kA lcu at 480 Vac or 415 Vac See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-72.

2 2

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C 12

Number of Poles

LS

800

3

NGS308033E

NGS308032E

NGS308035E

NGS308036E

NGS308038E

NGS308039E

NGFCT120

4

NGS408033E

NGS408032E

NGS408035E 4

NGS408036E 4

NGS408038E

NGS408039E 4

—

45

NGS708033E

NGS708032E

—

—

NGS708038E

—

—

46

NGS908033E

NGS908032E

—

—

NGS908038E

—

—

3

NGS312033E

NGS312032E

NGS312035E

NGS312036E

NGS312038E

NGS312039E

NGFCT120

1200 6

Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip Electronic Trip Unit with Imperial Tapped Conductors

4

LSI

LSG

LSIG

ALSI

ALSIG

Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 3

NGS412033E

NGS412032E

NGS412035E 4

NGS412036E 4

—

NGS412039E 4

—

5

NGS712033E

NGS712032E

—

—

NGS712038E

—

—

46

NGS912033E

NGS912032E

—

—

NGS912038E

—

—

4

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Type NGS Standard Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 50 kA Icu at 415 Vac See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-72.

2 2

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C 12

Number of Poles

LS

800

3

NGS308033M

NGS308032M

NGS308035M

NGS308036M

NGS308038M

NGS308039M

NGFCT120

4

NGS408033M

NGS408032M

NGS408035M 4

NGS408036M 4

NGS408038M

NGS408039M 4

—

45

NGS708033M

NGS708032M

—

—

NGS708038M

—

—

6

NGS908033M

NGS908032M

—

—

NGS908038M

—

—

NGS312033M

NGS312032M

NGS312035M

NGS312036M

NGS312038M

NGS312039M

NGFCT120

Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip Electronic Trip Unit with Metric Tapped Conductors

4 1200

3 4

LSI

LSG

LSIG

ALSI

ALSIG

Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 3

NGS412033M

NGS412032M

NGS412035M 4

NGS412036M 4

—

NGS412039M 4

—

5

NGS712033M

NGS712032M

—

—

NGS712038M

—

—

46

NGS912033M

NGS912032M

—

—

NGS912038M

—

—

4

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Molded Case Switches 89

2

Ue Maximum 690 Vac Ampere Rating

Three-Pole

Catalog Number

Four-Pole

Catalog Number

2

NGK4080KSE

2

800

MCS with Imperial line and load terminals

NGK3080KSE

MCS with Imperial line and load terminals

1200

MCS with Imperial line and load terminals

NGK3120KSE

MCS with Imperial line and load terminals

NGK4120KSE

1250

MCS with Imperial line and load terminals

NGK3125KSE

MCS with Imperial line and load terminals

NGK43125KSE

Notes 1 For AC use only. 2 NG MCCBs are suitable for 40 °C or 50 °C applications. Order suffix V3 to eliminate standard 40 °C labeling. 3 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. Sold separately. 4 Neutral 0% protected. NG, neutral in right pole; GN, neutral in left pole. 5 Neutral 100% protected (denoted by 7 in digit four); no neutral protection available with LSG or LSIG trip units. 6 Neutral 0%/60%/100% adjustable protection (denoted by 9 in digit four). 7 Non-UL listed NG 1250 with 1250 ampere trip unit is also available. 8 For AC use only. Molded case switch will trip above 14,000 amperes. 9 For two-pole applications, use outer poles of three-pole molded case switch.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-67

2.2 2 2 2 2

2

Series G

Type NGH High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 65 kA lcu at 480 Vac or 415 Vac See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-72. Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C 12

Number of Poles

LS

LSI

LSG

800

3

NGH308033E

NGH308032E

NGH308035E

2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

1200

2

Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip Electronic Trip Unit

LSIG NGH308036E

ALSI

ALSIG

Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 3

NGH308038E

NGH308039E

NGFCT120 — —

4

NGH408033E

NGH408032E

NGH408035E

NGH408038E

NGH408039E 4

45

NGH708033E

NGH708032E

—

—

NGH708038E

—

46

NGH908033E

NGH908032E

—

—

NGH908038E

—

—

3

NGH312033E

NGH312032E

NGH312035E

NGH312036E

NGH312038E

NGH312039E

NGFCT120

4

NGH408036E

4

4

NGH412033E

NGH412032E

NGH412035E 4

NGH412036E 4

—

NGH412039E 4

—

45

NGH712033E

NGH712032E

—

—

NGH712038E

—

—

46

NGH912033E

NGH912032E

—

—

NGH912038E

—

—

ALSI

ALSIG

Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 3

2 2 2 2 2

Type NGC Very High Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 100 kA lcu at 480 Vac or 415 Vac See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-72. Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C 12

Number of Poles

LS

800

3

NGC308033E

NGC308032E

NGC308035E

NGC308036E

NGC308038E

NGC308039E

NGFCT120

4

NGC408033E

NGC408032E

NGC408035E 4

NGC408036E 4

NGC408038E

NGC408039E 4

—

45

NGC708033E

NGC708032E

—

—

NGC708038E

—

—

46

NGC908033E

NGC908032E

—

—

NGC908038E

—

—

3

NGC312033E

NGC312032E

NGC312035E

NGC312036E

NGC312038E

NGC312039E

NGFCT120

4

NGC412033E

NGC412032E

NGC412035E 4

NGC412036E 4

—

NGC412039E 4

—

45

NGC712033E

NGC712032E

—

—

NGC712038E

—

—

46

NGC912033E

NGC912032E

—

—

NGC912038E

—

—

2 2

1200

2 2 2 2 2

Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip Electronic Trip Unit

LSI

LSG

LSIG

Notes 1 For AC use only. 2 NG MCCBs are suitable for 40 °C or 50 °C applications. Order suffix V3 to eliminate standard 40 °C labeling. 3 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. Sold separately. 4 Neutral 0% protected. NG, neutral in right pole; GN, neutral in left pole. 5 Neutral 100% protected (denoted by 7 in digit four); no neutral protection available with LSG or LSIG trip units. 6 Neutral 0%/60%/100% adjustable protection (denoted by 9 in digit four).

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-68

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information

2

Line and Load Terminals N-Frame circuit breakers do not include terminals as standard. When copper or Cu/Al terminals are required, order by catalog number.

2

Line and Load Terminals

2

Maximum Breaker Amperes

Terminal Body Material

Wire Type

AWG Wire (Number of Conductors)

AWG Wire Catalog Number 1

Metric Wire Range mm2

Metric Catalog Number 1

2 2

Standard Cu/Al Pressure Terminals 700

Aluminum

Cu/Al

1–500 (2)

TA700NB1

50–240

TA700NB1M

1000

Aluminum

Cu/Al

3/0–400 (3)

TA1000NB1

95–185

TA1000NB1M

1200

Aluminum

Cu/Al

4/0–500 (4)

TA1200NB1

120–240

TA1200NB1M

1200

Aluminum

Cu/Al

500–750 (3)

TA1201NB1

300–400

TA1201NB1M

2/0–500 (2)

T700NB1

70–240

T700NB1M

2 2 2

Optional Copper and Cu/Al Pressure Type Terminals 700

Copper

Cu

1000

Copper

Cu

3/0–500 (3)

T1000NB1

95–240

T1000NB1M

1200

Copper

Cu

3/0–400 (4)

T1200NB3

95–185

T1200NB3M

2 2 2

Conductor Extension Kit

310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories Description

Catalog Number

Conductor Extension Kit

Electronic portable test kit

MTST230V

Description

Catalog Number

Trip unit tamper protection wire seal

5108A03H01

Three-pole both ends Metric

5104A24G04

External neutral sensor (1200 A) 2

NGFCT120

Three-pole both ends English

5104A24G02

External neutral sensor (800 A) 2

NGFCT120

Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication

TRIP-LED

Breaker-mount ammeter module

DIGIVIEW

Remote-mount ammeter module

DIGIVIEWR06

Base Mounting Hardware Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or molded case switch. Base Mounting Hardware 3 Number of Poles

Description

Catalog Number

Three- and four-pole

Imperial hardware: 0.3125–18 x 1.25 pan-head steel screws and lock washers

BMH5

Three- and four-pole

Metric hardware: M8 pan-head steel screws BMH5M and lock washers

Terminal Shield Terminal Shield

4

Description Three-pole terminal shield

NTS3K

2 2 2

Keeper Nut Not required on NG-Frame. Terminals are threaded.

2

Handle Extension Included with breaker. Additional handle extensions are available.

2 2

Handle Extension Description

Catalog Number

2

Single handle extension

HEX5

2

Interphase Barriers The interphase barriers provide additional electrical clearance between circuit breaker poles for special termination applications. Barriers are high dielectric insulating plates that are installed in the molded slots between the terminals. (Field installation only.)

2 2 2 2

Interphase Barriers Catalog Number

2

Description

Catalog Number

2

Interphase barriers 134

IPB5

2

Notes 1 Single terminals individually packed. 2 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. Sold separately. 3 Metric hardware included with breaker. 4 Included as standard on 100% rated 800/1200 A breakers.

2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-69

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2

Accessories

2

Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker.

2 2 2 2

NG-Frame Accessories Reference Page

Description

Three-Pole Left

Four-Pole Center

Right

Left

Center

Right

Neu.

Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) Alarm lockout (Make/Break)

V4-T2-109

●

■

●

■

2

Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B)

V4-T2-109

●

■

●

■

Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B)

V4-T2-109

●

■

●

■

2

Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination

V4-T2-109

●

■

●

■

2

Shunt trip—standard

V4-T2-109

■

■

Undervoltage release mechanism

V4-T2-110

■

■

2

External Accessories Base mounting hardware

V4-T2-69

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Interphase barriers

V4-T2-69

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Non-padlockable handle block

V4-T2-107

Padlockable handle lock hasp

V4-T2-107

❏

❏

❏

❏

2

Key interlock kit

V4-T2-107

❏

❏

❏

❏

Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers

V4-T2-107

●

●

●

2

Electrical operator

V4-T2-107

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Plug-in adapters

V4-T2-114

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Rear connecting studs

V4-T2-107

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Handle mechanisms

V4-T2-418

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Drawout cassette

V4-T2-115

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Handle extension

V4-T2-69

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Ammeter/cause of trip display

V4-T2-106

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Cause of trip LED module

V4-T2-106

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Digitrip 310+ test kit

V4-T2-106

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Moisture fungus treatment

V4-T2-105

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Freeze-tested circuit breakers

—

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Marine/Naval application, UL 489 Supplement SA and SB

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

2 2 2 2

■

■

Modifications (Refer to Eaton)

Legend ■ Applicable in indicated pole position ❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both ● Accessory available/modification available Note Contact Eaton.

1

2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-70

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2.2

Technical Data and Specifications

2

Interrupting Capacity Ratings

2

UL 489/IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1

2

Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)

2

Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Circuit Breaker Type

220–240

380–415

690

Number of Poles

240 (UL)

Icu

Ics

Icu

Ics

480

600

Icu

Ics

2, 3, 4

65

85

85

50

50

50

25

20

10

NGH

2, 3, 4

100

100

100

70

50

65

35

25

13

NGC

2, 3, 4

200

200

100

100

50

100

65

35

18

NGS

1

2 2 2 2

NG-Frame Digitrip Specifications

2

NG 310+ Specifications Description

Specification

Trip Unit Type

Digitrip RMS 310+

2 2

Breaker Type Frame designation

NG

Frames available

800 A, 1200 A

Continuous current range (A)

320–1200A

Ground fault pickup (A)

160–1200A

Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kAIC)

35, 65, 100, 150

100% rated

Yes

2 2 2 2

Protection Ordering options

LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG

Arcflash reduction maintenance system (or maintenance mode)

Yes

Interchangeable trip unit

No

High load alarm (suffix B20) 2

Yes

Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B21) 2 Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix

B22) 2

Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG)

2 2 2

Yes

2

Yes LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG

Cause of trip indication

Yes

Thru-cover accessories

No

2 2

Notes 1 1600 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 1200 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for NG. 2 B2x suffixes cannot be combined with B2x suffixes.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-71

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2

NG 310+ Adjustability Specifications

2

310+ Settings

RG Frame 800 A

1200 A

A

320

500

2

B

400

600

C

450

630

2

D

500

700

E

600

800

2

F

630

900

2

G

700

1000

H (= In)

800

1200

Position 1

2

2

Position 2

4

4

Position 3

6

7

Position 4

8

10

2

Position 5

10

12

2

Position 6

12

15

Position 7

14

20

Position 8

14

24

Position 1

2x

2x

Position 2

3x

3x

Position 3

4x

4x

Position 4

5x

5x

2

Position 5

6x

6x

Position 6

7x

7x

2

Position 7

8x

8x

Position 8

9x

9x

Position 9

9x

9x

tsd (LS, LSG)

Fixed

67 at10x

67 at10x

tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds) (LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG) 1

Position 1

Inst

Inst

Position 2

120

120

Position 3

300

300

Position 1

160

240

Position 2

240

360

Position 3

320

480

2

Position 4

480

720

2

Position 5

640

960

Position 6

800

1200

Position 1

Inst

Inst

Position 2

120

120

Position 3

300

300

Independently Adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting (ALSI, ALSIG)

Yes

2.5x, 4x, 6x, 7x, 8x, 10x, 18x

2.5x, 4x, 6x, 7x, 8x, 10x, 12x

Maintenance Mode (remote) pickup (2.5 x In) (ALSI, ALSIG) 2

Fixed

2.5x

2.5x

2

2

Ir = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes) (All 310+)

tr = long delay time (seconds) (All 310+)

2

2 2

Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup (All 310+)

2

2 2 2 2 2

2 2 2 2 2

= short delay time I2t (milliseconds)

Ig = gound fault pickup (amperes) (LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)

tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds) (LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)

Ir

Notes 1 50 ms for ALSI and ALSIG trip units. 2 Maintenance Mode is enabled remotely using a 24 Vdc circuit.

2 2 V4-T2-72

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2.2

Dimensions and Weights Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2

NG-Frame

2

Number of Poles

Width

Height

Depth

3

8.25 (209.6)

16.00 (406.4)

5.50 (139.7)

4

11.13 (282.6)

16.00 (406.4)

5.50 (139.7)

2 2 2

NG-Frame Front View Three-Pole

Front Cover Cutout

2

Side View

3.44 (87.4)

2

BREAKER

2

9.25 (235.0)

R .25 (6.4)

2

1.91 (48.5)

16.00 (406.4)

2

3.68 1.50 (93.5) (38.1)

2 2

3.19 (81.0) 6.38 (162.1)

8.25 (209.6)

2

5.50 (139.7)

2

Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg)

2

NG-Frame

2 Complete Breaker

Breaker Type

Three-Pole

Four-Pole

NGS, NGH, NGC

45 (20.4)

58 (26.3)

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-73

2.2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes)

Contents Description

2

EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) Catalog Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . . . 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module. . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes)

2

Product Description ●

2 2 2 2

●

Eaton’s RG-Frame circuit breakers are available as frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug and terminals All R-Frame circuit breakers are suitable for reverse feed use

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-74

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Page V4-T2-15 V4-T2-29 V4-T2-47 V4-T2-65 V4-T2-75 V4-T2-76 V4-T2-81 V4-T2-82 V4-T2-84 V4-T2-85 V4-T2-89 V4-T2-92 V4-T2-96 V4-T2-101 V4-T2-104 V4-T2-112 V4-T2-114 V4-T2-115

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2.2

Catalog Number Selection

2

This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.

2

70 kA at 415 Vac and 65 kA at 480 Vac

2

RG Circuit Breaker With 310+ Electronic Trip Unit

2

RG H 3 250 39 ZG E C

2

Performance at 480 Vac H = 65 kAIC C = 100 kAIC K = Molded case switch

2

Rating

Frame RG

Blank = 80% rated C = 100% rated (except 2500 A) Amperes 160 = 1600 200 = 2000 250 = 2500 Poles 3 = Three 4 = Four

Trip Unit 33 = 32 = 35 = 36 = 38 = 39 = KS =

2

Terminations

310+ Electronic LS 310+ Electronic LSI 310+ Electronic LSG 310+ Electronic LSIG 310+ Electronic LSI w/ Maintenance Mode 310+ Electronic LSIG w/ Maintenance Mode Molded case switch

2

M = Metric tapped line/load conductors E = Imperial tapped line/load conductors W = No terminals

2 2

Feature Blank B20 B21 B22 ZG

= = = = =

2

No feature High load alarm Ground fault alarm, with trip Ground fault alarm, no trip Zone selective interlocking

2 2 2

RG 310+ Electronic Trip Unit

2

RT 3 250 39 ZG Type Trip Unit

Poles 3 = Three

2

Feature

RT Amperes 160 = 1600 200 = 2000 250 = 2500

33 32 35 36 38

Blank B20 B21 B22 ZG

= = = = =

310+ Electronic LS 310+ Electronic LSI 310+ Electronic LSG 310+ Electronic LSIG 310+ Electronic LSI w/ Maintenance Mode 39 = 310+ Electronic LSIG w/ Maintenance Mode

= = = = =

2

No feature High load alarm Ground fault alarm, with trip Ground fault alarm, no trip Zone selective interlocking

2 2 2 2

RG Circuit Breaker with OPTIM 610 and 910 Electronic Trip Unit

2

RGH 3 16 T92 W Type RGH 65K RGC 100K Poles 3 = Three 4 = Four

Amperes 16 = 1600 20 = 2000 25 = 2500

Trip Function Digitrip 610 T61 = LI T62 = LSI T63 = LS T64 = LIG T65 = LSG T66 = LSIG Digitrip 910 T91 = LI T92 = LSI T93 = LS T94 = LIG T95 = LSG T96 = LSIG

R = E =

P = V3 =

W = K =

2

Modification Suffix Ground fault remote RES trip 100% protection (new design 310) RES trip unit 100% prot. neut. 4P RES trip unit Electronic trip without ambient temperature marked on trip unit w/o terms Molded case switch

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-75

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2

Product Selection

2

70 kA at 415 Vac and 65 kA at 480 Vac

2 2

Type RGH with Digitrip 310+ High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Maximum 690 Vac, 70 kA Icu at 415 Vac See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-83. Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 310+ Electronic Trip Unit with Adjustable Rating Plugs—Catalog Number 2

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C 1

Number of Poles

LS

LSI

LSG 3

LSIG 3

ALSI

ALSIG

Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 4

2

1600 1

3

RGH316033E

RGH316032E

RGH316035E

RGH316036E

RGH316038E

RGH316039E

RGFCT160A

2

2000

3

RGH320033E

RGH320032E

RGH320035E

RGH320036E

RGH320038E

RGH320039E

RGFCT200A

2500

3

RGH325033E

RGH325032E

RGH325035E

RGH325036E

RGH325038E

RGH325039E

RGFCT250A

2

2 2

100 kA at Both 415 Vac and 480 Vac

2

Type RGH with Digitrip 310+ High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Maximum 690 Vac, 70 kA Icu at 415 Vac See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-83.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C 1

Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 310+ Electronic Trip Unit with Adjustable Rating Plugs—Catalog Number 2 Number of Poles

LS

LSI

LSG 35

LSIG 35

ALSI

ALSIG 35

6

RGH416033E

RGH416032E

—

—

RGH416038E

—

2000

46

RGH420033E

RGH420032E

—

—

RGH420038E

—

2500

46

RGH425033E

RGH425032E

—

—

RGH425038E

—

1600

1

4

Notes 1 For SCR application, use 2000 ampere frame. 2 Order terminals separately. Mounting hardware not included. 3 Ground fault equipped trip units available with remote indicating panel. Add “R” to catalog number, for example, “RGH316035RW.” 4 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. Sold separately. 5 No neutral protection available on four-pole breakers with LSG or LSIG trip units. 6 Unprotected left pole neutral. Add “P” to catalog number for 100% protected left pole neutral, add “E” for 60% protected, for example, “RGH416033PW,” “RGH416033EW.” RG MCCBs have English threading on line and load conductors. Use suffix “M” for metric threading.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-76

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

100 kA at Both 415 Vac and 480 Vac

2

Type RGC with Digitrip 310+ Very High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Maximum 690 Vac, 100 kA Icu at 415 Vac See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-83.

2 2

Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 310+ Electronic Trip Unit with Adjustable Rating Plugs—Catalog Number 2

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C 1

Number of Poles

LS

LSI

LSG 3

LSIG 3

ALSI

ALSIG

Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 4

1600 1

3

RGC316033E

RGC316032E

RGC316035E

RGC316036E

RGC316038E

RGC316039E

RGFCT160A

2000

3

RGC320033E

RGC320032E

RGC320035E

RGC320036E

RGC320038E

RGC320039E

RGFCT200A

2500

3

RGC325033E

RGC325032E

RGC325035E

RGC325036E

RGC325038E

RGC325039E

RGFCT250A

2 2 2 2

Type RGC with Digitrip 310+ Very High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Maximum 690 Vac, 100 kA Icu at 415 Vac, continued See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-83.

2 2

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C 1

Number of Poles

LS

LSI

LSG 35

LSIG 35

ALSI

ALSIG 35

1600 1

46

RGC416033E

RGC416032E

—

—

RGC416038E

—

2000

46

RGC420033E

RGC420032E

—

—

RGC420038E

—

2500

46

RGC425033E

RGC425032E

—

—

RGC425038E

—

Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 310+ Electronic Trip Unit with Adjustable Rating Plugs—Catalog Number 2

2 2 2 2

Molded Case Switches

2

7

Ampere Rating

Number of Poles

Catalog Number

1600

3

RGK3160KSE

2000

3

RGK3200KSE

1600

4

RGK4160KSE

2000

4

RGK4200KSE

2 2 2 2

Notes 1 For SCR application, use 2000 ampere frame. 2 Order terminals separately. Mounting hardware not included. 3 Ground fault equipped trip units available with remote indicating panel. Add “R” to catalog number, for example, “RGH316035RW.” 4 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. Sold separately. 5 No neutral protection available on four-pole breakers with LSG or LSIG trip units. 6 Unprotected left pole neutral. Add “P” to catalog number for 100% protected left pole neutral, add “E” for 60% protected, for example, “RGH416033PW,” “RGH416033EW.” 7 Molded case switch will trip above 17,500 amperes.

2 2 2

RG MCCBs have English threading on line and load conductors. Use suffix “M” for metric threading.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-77

2.2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

Type RG with Digitrip 610 and 910 Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 Electronic Trip Unit with Rating Plugs Order as Individual Component—Catalog Number 1 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Number of Poles

Long Delay Pickup Long Delay Time Short Time Range Short Time Delay Instantaneous Ground Fault Pickup Ground Fault Delay

Digitrip RMS Interchangeable Rating Plug (Order as Individual Component)

L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S –Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G –Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) LI

LS

LSI

LIG

LSG

LSIG

Fixed Rating Plug

0.5–1.0 x In 2–24 Seconds 2–6 x Ir — 2–6 x M1 and M2 — —

0.5–I.0n 2–24 Seconds 2–6 x Ir 100–500 ms — — —

0.5–1.0 x In 2–24 Seconds 2–6 x Ir 100–500 ms 2–6 x M1 and M2 — —

0.5–1.0 x In 2–24 Seconds 2–6 x Ir — 2–6 x M1 and M2 0.25–1.0 x In 2 100–500 ms

0.5–1.0 x In 2–24 Seconds 2–6 x Ir 100–500 ms — 0.25–1.0 x In 2 100–500 ms

0.5–1.0 x In 2–24 Seconds 2–6 x Ir 100–500 ms 2–6 x M1 and M2 0.25–1.0 x In 2 100–500 ms

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

RGH316T66WP44

800

RP6R16A080

1000

RP6R16A100

1200

RP6R16A120

1250

RP6R16A125

Type RGH with Digitrip 610 High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 70 kA Icu at 415 Vac 1600

3

RGH316T61WP44

RGH316T63WP44

RGH316T62WP44

RGH316T64WP44

RGH316T65WP44

2 2 2

Includes 1600 A rating plug 2000

3

RGH320T61WP49

RGH320T63WP49

RGH320T62WP49

RGH320T64WP49

RGH320T65WP49

RGH320T66WP49

2 2 2 2 2

Includes 2000 A rating plug 2500

3

RGH325T61WP53

RGH325T63WP53

RGH325T62WP53

RGH325T64WP53

RGH325T65WP53

RGH325T66WP53

1600

3

2

RGC316T61WP44

RGC316T63WP44

RGC316T62WP44

RGC316T64WP44

RGC316T65WP44

RGC316T66WP44

Includes 1600 A rating plug 2000

3

RGC320T61WP49

RGC320T63WP49

RGC320T62WP49

RGC320T64WP49

RGC320T65WP49

RGC320T66WP49

2 2 2 2 2 2

RP6R16A160

1000

RP6R20A100

1200

RP6R20A120

1250

RP6R20A125

1600

RP6R20A160

2000

RP6R20A200

1600

RP6R25A160

2000

RP6R25A200

2500

RP6R25A250

800

RP6R16A080

1000

RP6R16A100

1200

RP6R16A120

1250

RP6R16A125

1600

RP6R16A160

1000

RP6R20A100

1200

RP6R20A120

1250

RP6R20A125

1600

RP6R20A160

Type RGC with Digitrip 610 Very High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 100 kA Icu at 415 Vac

2 2

1600

Includes 2000 A rating plug 2500

3

RGC325T61WP53

RGC325T63WP53

RGC325T62WP53

RGC325T64WP53

RGC325T65WP53

Includes 2500 A rating plug Notes 1 Order terminals separately. Mounting hardware not included. 2 Not to exceed 1200 ampere ground fault pickup. RG MCCBs have metric threading on line and load conductors. Use RD MCCBs if imperial threading is required.

2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-78

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

RGC325T66WP53

2000

RP6R20A200

1600

RP6R25A160

2000

RP6R25A200

2500

RP6R25A250

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

Type RG with Digitrip 610 and 910, continued

2

Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 Electronic Trip Unit with Rating Plugs Order as Individual Component—Catalog Number 1 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Number of Poles

Long Delay Pickup Long Delay Time Short Time Range Short Time Delay Instantaneous Ground Fault Pickup Ground Fault Delay

L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S –Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G –Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)

Digitrip RMS Interchangeable Rating Plug (Order as Individual Component)

2

Fixed Rating Plug

2

LS

LSI

LIG

LSG

LSIG

0.5–1.0 x In 2–24 Seconds 2–6 x Ir — 2–6 x M1 and M2 — —

0.5–I.0n 2–24 Seconds 2–6 x Ir 100–500 ms — — —

0.5–1.0 x In 2–24 Seconds 2–6 x Ir 100–500 ms 2–6 x M1 and M2 — —

0.5–1.0 x In 2–24 Seconds 2–6 x Ir — 2–6 x M1 and M2 0.25–1.0 x In 2 100–500 ms

0.5–1.0 x In 2–24 Seconds 2–6 x Ir 100–500 ms — 0.25–1.0 x In 2 100–500 ms

0.5–1.0 x In 2–24 Seconds 2–6 x Ir 100–500 ms 2–6 x M1 and M2 0.25–1.0 x In 2 100–500 ms

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

RGH316T96WP44

800

RP6R16A080

1000

RP6R16A100

1200

RP6R16A120

1250

RP6R16A125

1600

RP6R16A160

1000

RP6R20A100

1200

RP6R20A120

1250

RP6R20A125

1600

RP6R20A160

2000

RP6R20A200

1600

RP6R25A160

2000

RP6R25A200

2500

RP6R25A250

2

800

RP6R16A080

1000

RP6R16A100

2

1200

RP6R16A120

1250

RP6R16A125

1600

RP6R16A160

1000

RP6R20A100

1200

RP6R20A120

1250

RP6R20A125

1600

RP6R20A160

2000

RP6R20A200

1600

RP6R25A160

2000

RP6R25A200

2500

RP6R25A250

2

Type RGH with Digitrip 910 High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 70 kA Icu at 415 Vac 1600

3

RGH316T91WP44

RGH316T93WP44

RGH316T92WP44

RGH316T94WP44

RGH316T95WP44

Includes 1600 A rating plug 2000

3

RGH320T91WP49

RGH320T93WP49

RGH320T92WP49

RGH320T94WP49

RGH320T95WP49

RGH320T96WP49

Includes 2000 A rating plug 2500

3

RGH325T91WP53

RGH325T93WP53

RGH325T92WP53

RGH325T94WP53

RGH325T95WP53

RGH325T96WP53

Includes 2500 A rating plug Type RGC with Digitrip 910 Very High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 100 kA Icu at 415 Vac 1600

3

RGC316T91WP44

RGC316T93WP44

RGC316T92WP44

RGC316T94WP44

RGC316T95WP44

RGC316T96WP44

Includes 1600 A rating plug 2000

3

RGC320T91WP49

RGC320T93WP49

RGC320T92WP49

RGC320T94WP49

RGC320T95WP49

RGC320T96WP49

Includes 2000 A rating plug 2500

3

2

LI

RGC325T91WP53

RGC325T93WP53

RGC325T92WP53

RGC325T94WP53

Includes 2500 A rating plug

RGC325T95WP53

RGC25T96WP53

Notes 1 Order terminals separately. Mounting hardware not included. 2 Not to exceed 1200 ampere ground fault pickup.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

RG MCCBs have metric threading on line and load conductors. Use RD MCCBs if imperial threading is required.

2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-79

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2

Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information

2

Line and Load Terminals R-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/Al terminals as standard and copper only terminals as an option. Specify if factory installation is required. Must have terminals for 100% rated and or freeze testing requirements.

2 2 2 2 2

Base Mounting Hardware Supplied by customer. Handle Extension Included with breaker. Additional handle extensions are available.

Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes

Terminal Body Material

Wire Type

Hardware

AWG/kcmil Wire Range/ Number of Conductors

Metric Wire Range mm2

Catalog Number

Description

Wire Terminals 1600

Aluminum

Cu/Al

Metric

500–1000 (4)

300–500

TA1600RDM 1

1600

Copper

Cu

Metric

1–600 (4)

50–300

T1600RDM 1

2

2000

Aluminum

Cu/Al

Metric

2–600 (6)

35–300

TA2000RDM 2

2

2000

Copper

—

Metric

—

—

B2016RDM 1

2000

Copper

—

Metric

—

—

B2016RDLM 1

2

2500

Copper

—

Metric

—

—

B2500RDM 1

2

Rear Connectors

RG Rear Connector Exploded View

2

Conductor (Viewed from Rear of Circuit Breaker and Cut Away for Clarity)

2

Conductor (Viewed from Front of Circuit Breaker)

Cu Only Terminal Catalog Number T1600RDM 3 (For 1600 A Frame Only)

2 2

OR

2

Al/Cu Terminal Catalog Number TA1600RDM 3 (For 1600 A Frame Only)

2 2 2 2

Rear Connector (Cu) B2016RDM B2016RDLM (For 100% Application) (For 1600 A and 2000 A Frames) B2500RDM for 2500 A

Securing Hardware

TA2000RD Wire Terminal

2

Note: Order one TA2000RDM kit per three poles. Catalog number includes bus connection, terminals and hardware for either line side or load side of three-pole breaker.

2

Breaker Line/Load Conductors

2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-80

Single handle extension

Catalog Number HEX6

Wire Seal The wire seal can be used to secure the cover on the trip unit to prevent adjustments after settings are confirmed. Wire Seal

Securing Hardware

2

2

Handle Extension

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Description

Catalog Number

Wire seal

5108A03H01

Notes 1 Order one per pole—single terminals individually packed. 2 Order one TA2000RD kit per three poles. Catalog number includes bus connection, terminals and hardware for either line side or load side of three-pole breaker. 3 For use with 2500 A Frame. Do not order separately unless for replacement purposes. Included in breaker carton when 2500 A frame is ordered. RG MCCBs have metric threading on line and load conductors. Use RD MCCBs if imperial threading is required.

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

Accessories

2

Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker.

2 2

RG-Frame Accessories Reference Page

Description

Three-Pole Left

2

Four-Pole Center

Right

Left

Center

Right

Neutral

Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) Alarm lockout (Make/Break)

V4-T2-109

■

■

Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B)

V4-T2-109

■

■

Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B)

V4-T2-109

■

■

Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination

V4-T2-109

■

■

Shunt trip—standard

V4-T2-109

●

●

Undervoltage release mechanism

V4-T2-110

●

●

2 2 2 2

External Accessories

●

●

●

2

●

2

Base mounting hardware

V4-T2-80

●

●

●

Padlockable handle lock hasp

V4-T2-107

❏

❏

❏

❏

Key interlock kit

V4-T2-107

❏

❏

❏

❏

Electrical operator

V4-T2-107

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Handle mechanisms

V4-T2-418

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Handle extension

V4-T2-80

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Digitrip 310+ test kit

V4-T2-106

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Moisture fungus treatment

V4-T2-105

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Freeze-tested circuit breakers

—

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Marine/naval application, UL 489 Supplement SA and SB

1

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Modifications (Refer to Eaton)

2 2

2 2

Legend ■ Applicable in indicated pole position ❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both ● Accessory available/modification available

2 2

310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories Description

Catalog Number

Electronic portable test kit

MTST230V

Trip unit tamper protection wire seal

5108A03H01

External neutral sensor (2500 A) 2

RGFCT250A

External neutral sensor (2000 A) 2

RGFCT200A

External neutral sensor (1600 A) 2

RGFCT160A

Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication 3

—

Breaker-mount ammeter module

DIGIVIEW

Remote-mount ammeter module

DIGIVIEWR06

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Contact Eaton. 2 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. Sold separately. 3 Cause-of-trip indication LEDs integrated in RG 310+ trip units.

2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-81

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2

Technical Data and Specifications

2

UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity Ratings

2

Circuit Breaker Type

Number of Poles

Volts AC (50/60 Hz)

2

RGH

3, 4

125

RGC

3, 4

200

2 2 2

1

Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes) 240

IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings

277

480

600

—

65

50

—

100

65

1

Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)

Circuit Breaker Type

Number of Poles

RGH

3, 4

Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 240

415

690

2

Icu

135

70

25

100

50

13

2

Ics RGC Icu

200

100

35

Ics

100

50

18

2

2

3, 4

2 2

RG 310+ Specifications Description

Specification

2

Trip Unit Type

Digitrip RMS 310+

2

Frame designation

RG

2

Frames available

1600 A, 2000 A, 2500 A

Continuous current range (A)

800–2500 A

2

Ground fault pickup (A)

200–1200 A

Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kAIC)

65, 100

2

100% rated

Yes

Breaker Type

2

Protection Ordering options

LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG

2

Arcflash reduction maintenance system (or maintenance mode)

Yes

Interchangeable trip unit

Yes

2

High load alarm (suffix B20) 2

Yes

Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B21) 2

Yes

2

Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B22) 2

Yes

2

Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG)

LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG

Cause of trip indication

Yes

2

Thru-cover accessories

No

2

Notes 1 Utilization Category A circuit breakers. 2 B2x suffixes cannot be combined with B2x suffixes.

2

See Page V4-T2-74 for trip unit specifications.

2 2 2 2 V4-T2-82

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2.2

RG 310+ Adjustability Specifications

2

RG Frame 310+ Settings Ir = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes) (All 310+)

tr = long delay time (seconds) (All 310+)

Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup (All 310+)

1600 A

2000 A

2500 A

A

800

1000

1600

B

900

1200

1700

C

1000

1400

1800

D

1100

1600

2000

E

1200

1700

2100

F

1400

1800

2200

G

1500

1900

2400

H (= In)

1600

2000

2500

Position 1

2

2

2

Position 2

4

4

4

Position 3

7

7

7

Position 4

10

10

10

Position 5

12

12

12

Position 6

15

15

15

Position 7

20

20

20

Position 8

24

24

24

Position 1

2x

2x

2x

Position 2

3x

3x

2x

Position 3

4x

4x

2x

Position 4

5x

5x

3x

Position 5

6x

6x

4x

Position 6

7x

7x

5x

Position 7

8x

8x

6x

Position 8

8x

8x

6x

Position 9

9x

9x

6x

tsd = short delay time I2t (milliseconds) (LS, LSG)

Fixed

67 at10x

67 at10x

67 at10x

tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds) (LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG) 1

Position 1

Inst

Inst

Inst

Position 2

120

120

120

Position 3

300

300

300

Position 1

200

200

200

Position 2

400

400

400

Position 3

600

600

600

Position 4

800

800

800

Position 5

1000

1000

1000

Ig = ground fault pickup (amperes) (LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)

tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds) (LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)

2

Ir

Position 6

1200

1200

1200

Position 1

Inst

Inst

Inst

Position 2

120

120

120

Position 3

300

300

300

Independently Adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting (ALSI, ALSIG)

Yes

2.5x, 4x, 6x, 7x, 8x, 11x

2.5x, 4x, 6x, 7x, 8x, 9x

2.5x, 4x, 6x, 7x

Maintenance Mode (remote) pickup (2.5 x In) (ALSI, ALSIG) 2

Fixed

2.5x

2.5x

2.5x

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 50 ms for ALSI and ALSIG trip units. 2 Maintenance Mode is enabled remotely using a 24 Vdc circuit.

2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-83

2.2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

Dimensions and Weights Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) RG-Frame

2

Number of Poles

Width

Height

Depth

2

3

15.50 (393.7)

16.00 (406.4)

9.75 (247.7)

4

20.00 (508.0)

16.00 (406.4)

9.75 (247.7)

2 2 2 2 2 2

Front View 3-Pole

Front Cover Cutout

Side View

CL Breaker

14.50 (368.3)

2.25 (57.2)

7.25 (184.2)

0.16 R (4.1)

8.25 (209.6)

7.75 (196.9)

5.10 (129.5) CL Handle

9.70 (246.4)

.44 R (11.2)

16.00 (406.4)

Tee Connectors May Be Rotated 90

15.00 (381.0)

2 2 2

4 Holes 0.44 Dia. (11.2)

6.57 (166.9) 13.13 (333.5)

2

Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg)

2

RG-Frame

2 2

Complete Breaker Breaker Type

Number of Poles Three-Pole

Four-Pole

102 (46.3)

135 (61.2)

102 (46.3)

135 (61.2)

135 (61.2)

182 (82.6)

1600 Amperes

2

RGH, RGC

2

RGH, RGC

2

15.50 (393.7)

2000 Amperes

2500 Amperes RGH, RGC

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-84

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

9.00 (228.6)

6.75 (171.5)

13.00 (330.2)

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

Motor Circuit 480 Vac, Protectors

2.2

Contents Description EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Product Selection Guide and Ordering Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page V4-T2-15 V4-T2-29 V4-T2-47 V4-T2-65 V4-T2-74 V4-T2-86 V4-T2-89 V4-T2-92 V4-T2-96 V4-T2-101 V4-T2-104 V4-T2-112 V4-T2-114 V4-T2-115

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP)

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-85

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2

Product Selection Guide and Ordering Information

2

EG-Frame—480 Vac, 600Y/347 Vac Maximum 1

2 2

Continuous Amperes

MCP Trip Setting 3

MCP Catalog Number HMCPE003A0C

A

0.69 –0.91

9

2

B

1.1–1.3

15

C

1.6–1.7

21

2

D

2.0–2.2

27

E

2.3–2.5

30

F

2.6– 2.8

33

A

1.5–2.0

21

B

2.6–3.1

35

2 2

3

Cam Setting

Motor Full Load Current Amperes 2

7

2

C

3.7–3.9

49

D

4.8–5.2

63

2

E

5.3–5.7

70

F

5.8–6.1

77

A

3.4–4.5

45

2

B

5.7–6.8

75

C

8.0–9.1

105

2

D

10.4–11.4

135

E

11.5–12.6

150

F

12.7–13.0

165

A

3.9–9.1

90

B

11.5–13.7

150

2

C

16.1–18.3

210

D

20.7–22.9

270

2

E

23.0–25.2

300

F

25.3–26.1

330

2

2 2

2 2 2

15

30

HMCPE007C0C

HMCPE015E0C

HMCPE030H1C

Notes 1 UL listed for use with Eaton Motor Starters. 2 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. 3 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-86

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2.2

EG-Frame—480 Vac, 600Y/347 Vac Maximum, continued 1

Continuous Amperes 50

70

100

100

Cam Setting

Motor Full Load Current Amperes 2

2

MCP Trip Setting 3

MCP Catalog Number

2

HMCPE050K2C

2

A

11.5–15.2

150

B

19.2–22.9

250

C

26.9–30.6

350

D

34.6–38.3

450

E

38.4–42.1

500

F

42.2–43.5

550

A

16.1–30.6

210

B

26.9–32.2

350

C

37.6–42.9

490

D

48.4–53.7

630

E

53.8–59.1

700

F

59.2–60.9

770

A

23.0–30.6

300

B

38.4–46.0

500

C

53.8–61.4

700

D

69.2–76.8

900

E

76.9–84.5

1000

F

84.6–87.0

1100

A

38.4–46.0

500

B

57.6–65.2

750

C

76.9–84.5

1000

D

4

1250

E

4

1375

F

4

1500

2 2 2

HMCPE070M2C

2 2 2 2

HMCPE100R3C

2 2 2

HMCPE100T3C

2 2 2 2

JG-Frame—600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum Continuous Amperes 250

2

1

MCP Trip Range (Amperes)

MCP Catalog Number

500–1000

HMCPJ250D5L

625–1250

HMCPJ250F5L

750–1500

HMCPJ250G5L

875–1750

HMCPJ250J5L

1000–2000

HMCPJ250K5L

1125–2250

HMCPJ250L5L

1250–2500

HMCPJ250W5L

2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 UL listed for use with Eaton Motor Starters. 2 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. 3 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. 4 Settings above 10 x I are for special applications. Where the ampere rating of the disconnecting means cannot be n less than 115% of the motor full load ampere rating.

2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-87

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2

LG-Frame—600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum 1

2

Continuous Amperes

MCP Trip Range (Amperes)

MCP Catalog Number

2

600

1250–2500

HMCPL600L6G

1500–3000

HMCPL600N6G

2

1750–3500

HMCPL600R6G

2000–4000

HMCPL600X6G

2

2250–4500

HMCPL600Y6G

2500–5000

HMCPL600P6G

3000–6000

HMCPL600M6G

2 2

Notes 1 UL listed for use with Eaton Motor Starters.

2

800 and 1200 ampere, 600 Vac maximum motor circuit protectors are available as Series C HMCP product.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-88

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2.2

Contents

Series G Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB)

Description

Page

EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-In Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V4-T2-15 V4-T2-29 V4-T2-47 V4-T2-65 V4-T2-74 V4-T2-85 V4-T2-90 V4-T2-91 V4-T2-92 V4-T2-96 V4-T2-101 V4-T2-104 V4-T2-112 V4-T2-114 V4-T2-115

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Product Description ●

Eliminates need for separate overload relay

Application Description ●

●

Can be used with contactor to eliminate need for overload relay and still create manual motor control Meets requirement for motor branch protection, including: ● Disconnecting means ● Branch circuit short circuit protection ● Overload protection

Features and Benefits ●

● ● ● ●

●

Phase unbalance protection Phase loss protection Hot trip/cold trip High load alarm Pre-detection trip relay option Class 10, 15, 20, 30 protection

Standards and Certifications ● ● ● ●

IEC 60947-2 UL 489 100% rated UL 508 CSA C22.2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-89

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2

Product Selection

2

JGMP Catalog Numbers 35 kAIC

65 kAIC

Continuous Amperes

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

50

JGMPS050G

JGMPH050G

100

JGMPS100G

JGMPH100G

2

160

JGMPS160G

JGMPH160G

250

JGMPS250G

JGMPH250G

2

2 2

JGMP FLA le Dial Setting

2

Continuous Amperes

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

50

20

20

25

30

32

40

45

50

2

100

40

45

50

63

70

80

90

100

2

160

63

80

90

100

110

125

150

160

250

100

125

150

160

175

200

225

250

D

E

F

G

H

2 2

LGMP Catalog Numbers 50 kAIC

65 kAIC

Continuous Amperes

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

250

LGMPS250G

LGMPH250G

400

LGMPS400G

LGMPH400G

2

600

LGMPS600G

LGMPH600G

630 1

LGMPS630G

LGMPH630G

2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

LGMP FLA le Dial Setting Continuous Amperes

A

B

C

250

100

125

150

160

175

200

225

250

400

160

200

225

250

300

315

350

400

600

250

300

315

350

400

450

500

600

630 1

250

300

315

350

400

500

600

630

Notes 1 630 amperes is not a UL listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL or CSA for LG breaker. For pre-trip alarm option, order Style Number 5721B31G02. For additional breaker solutions, see Page V4-T2-267.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-90

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2.2

Technical Data and Specifications

2

JGMPS and JGMPH Rating and Ampere Range

2

Maximum Rated Current—250 A

2

Breaker Type Breaker Capacity (kA rms) AC 50–60 Hz IEC 60947-2

220–240 Vac

380–415 Vac

660–690 Vac

JGMPS

JGMPH

I cu

85

100

I cs

85

100

I cu

40

70

I cs

40

70

I cu

12

14

I cs

6

7

240 Vac

85

100

480 Vac

35

65

600 Vac

25

35

Number of poles

3

3

Ampere range

50–250

50 –250

NEMA UL 489

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

LGMPS and LGMPH Rating and Ampere Range Maximum Rated Current—630 A

2

1

Breaker Type Breaker Capacity (kA rms) AC 50–60 Hz IEC 60947-2

220–240 Vac

380–415 Vac

660–690 Vac

NEMA UL 489

LGMPS

LGMPH

I cu

85

100

I cs

85

100

I cu

50

70

I cs

50

53

I cu

20

25

I cs

10

13

240 Vac

85

100

480 Vac

50

65

25

35

Number of poles

600 Vac

3

3

Ampere range

250–630 1

250 –630 1

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 630 amperes is not a UL listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL or CSA for LG breaker.

2

For pre-trip alarm option, order Style Number 5721B31G02.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-91

2.2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

Contents

30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Modules

Description

2

EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Clockwise from Left: JG, LG, EG MCCBs Shown with Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module

2

30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module

2

Product Description

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Eaton offers three- and fourpole 30 mA ground fault (earth leakage) protection modules for Series G E-, Jand L-frame molded case circuit breakers (MCCBs). Separate UL listed and IEC rated devices are available for each frame. The modules are bottom mounted and are available for each frame circuits up to: ● ●

●

EG: 125 amperes JG: 150 (UL), 160 (IEC) or 250 amperes LG: 400, 600 (UL) or 630 (IEC) amperes

2

The module is completely self contained, including a current sensor, relay and power supply inside the device. Current pickup settings are selectable from 0.03 to 10 amperes for all devices, except for the UL listed module, for which settings are selectable from 0.03 to 30 amperes. Time delays are also selectable from Instantaneous to 1.0 second for pickup settings of 0.10 amperes and above. The current pickup setting of 0.03 amperes defaults to an Instantaneous time setting regardless of the time dial’s position.

2 2 2 2

2. 100% after trip: alarms when the breaker reaches the set pickup setting value and the breaker trips.

2 2 2 V4-T2-92

V4-T2-101 V4-T2-104 V4-T2-112 V4-T2-114 V4-T2-115

IEC-Rated LG-Frame Earth Leakage Module Faceplate

1. 50% pre-trip: alarms when the earth leakage current reaches 50% of the set pickup setting value.

2

V4-T2-93 V4-T2-94 V4-T2-96

UL-Rated LG-Frame Earth Leakage Module Faceplate

Two alarm contacts are included with each device, which can be wired externally for remote indication. Both of these are also indicated by an LED on the front of the device:

2

Page V4-T2-15 V4-T2-29 V4-T2-47 V4-T2-65 V4-T2-74 V4-T2-85 V4-T2-89

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

Product Selection EG-Frame

JG-Frame

2 EG-Frame Ground Fault Modules, UL-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 120–480 Vac, 50/60 Hz) 1

LG-Frame

LG-Frame Ground Fault Modules, UL-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 120–480 Vac, 50/60 Hz)

Ampere Rating

Number of Poles

Catalog Number

Ampere Rating

Number of Poles

Catalog Number

125

3

ELEBN3125G

400

3

ELLBN3400W

125

4

ELEBN4125G

400

4

ELLBN4400W

600

3

ELLBN3600W

600

4

ELLBN4600W

2 2 2 2

EG-Frame Earth Leakage Modules, IEC-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 230–415 Vac, 50/60 Hz)

LG-Frame Earth Leakage Modules, IEC-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 230–415 Vac, 50/60 Hz)

Ampere Rating

Number of Poles

Catalog Number

Ampere Rating

Number of Poles

Catalog Number

125

3

ELEBE3125G

400

3

ELLBE3400W

125

4

ELEBE4125G

400

4

ELLBE4400W

630

3

ELLBE3630W

630

4

ELLBE4630W

JG-Frame Ground Fault Modules, UL-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 120–480 Vac, 50/60 Hz)

2

2 2 2 2 2 2

Ampere Rating

Number of Poles

Catalog Number

2

150

3

ELJBN3150W

150

4

ELJBN4150W

2

250

3

ELJBN3250W

250

4

ELJBN4250W

2 2

JG-Frame Earth Leakage Modules, IEC-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 230–415 Vac, 50/60 Hz) Ampere Rating

Number of Poles

2 2

Catalog Number

160

3

ELJBE3160W

160

4

ELJBE4160W

250

3

ELJBE3250W

250

4

ELJBE4250W

2 2 2

Note 1 Shunt trip and undervoltage release cannot be used in an EG breaker connected to an earth leakage module.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-93

2.2 2 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Assembled Breaker and Earth Leakage Module Frame

Height

Width

Depth

Three-Pole EG

10.25 (260.3)

3.00 (76.2)

2.98 (75.8)

2

JG

11.25 (285.8)

4.13 (104.9)

3.57 (90.7)

LG

15.38 (390.7)

5.48 (139.2)

4.06 (103.1)

2

Four-Pole EG

10.25 (260.3)

4.00 (101.6)

2.98 (75.8)

JG

11.25 (285.8)

5.50 (139.7)

3.57 (90.7)

LG

15.38 (390.7)

7.23 (183.6)

4.06 (103.1)

2 2 2

EG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module 10.26 (260.6)

2

4.75 (120.6)

0.55 (14.0)

2 2

1.49 1.00 (37.8) (25.4)

0.50 (12.7)

2

3-Pole 2.98 (75.7)

1.00 (25.4)

2

1.50 0.50 (38.1) (12.7)

2 2

8.59 (218.2)

2

4.78 (121.4)

2.00 (50.8)

0.70 (17.8) 0.90 (22.9) 0.35 (8.9)

2 2

0.09 (2.29)

2

3.01 (76.5)

2.75 (69.9) 0.78 (19.8)

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-94

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

3.98 (101.1)

3.17 (80.5)

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

JG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module

2

4-Pole 5.50 (139.7) 3-Pole 4.13 (104.9) 0.69 2.06 1.38 (17.5) (52.3) (35.1)

3.92 (99.6)

2 5.50 (139.7) 1.25 (31.8)

3.57 (90.7)

3.92 (99.6)

5.50 (139.7)

1.88 (47.8)

2

6.97 (177.0)

2

4.93 (125.2)

0.28 (7.1)

11.25 (285.8)

2

0.63 (16.0)

R 0.19 (4.8)

7.00 (177.8)

2

2.05 (52.1)

2

11.25 (285.8)

2

1.06 (26.9)

0.50 (139.7)

2 TEST

2

3.37 (85.6)

4.25 (108.0)

RESET

2 2 2.05 (52.1) 4.09 (103.9)

3.57 3.69 (90.7) (93.7) 3.81 (96.8) 4.78 (121.4)

3.31 (84.1)

2 2 2

LG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module

8.44 (214.4)

3.44 (87.4) 1.72 (43.7)

4.06 (103.1) 3.98 (101.1)

2 2

0.86 (21.8)

5.58 (141.7)

5.58 (141.7)

4.73 (120.1)

2

4.31 (109.5)

5.16 (131.1) 3.44 (87.4) 1.72 (43.7)

2 2

4.73 (120.1)

2 2

8.44 (214.4)

10.13 (257.3)

2 2

15.38 (390.7) 13.69 (347.7)

3-Pole 5.48 (139.2) 4-Pole 7.22 (183.4)

4-Pole 2.75 (69.9) 3-Pole 2.74 (69.6)

2

13.68 (347.5)

15.38 (390.7)

2 3.97 (100.8) 4.30 (109.2) 4.55 (115.6) 5.43 (137.9)

4-Pole 7.22 (183.4) 3-Pole 5.48 (139.2)

2

4-Pole 2.75 (69.9) 3-Pole 2.74 (69.6)

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2 2 2 V4-T2-95

2.2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

Contents

Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Modules

Description

2

Page

EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

V4-T2-15 V4-T2-29 V4-T2-47 V4-T2-65 V4-T2-74 V4-T2-85 V4-T2-89 V4-T2-92 V4-T2-97 V4-T2-98 V4-T2-101 V4-T2-104 V4-T2-112 V4-T2-114 V4-T2-115

2 2

Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module

2

Product Overview

Product Description

Features and Benefits

Standards and Certifications

Power demand continues to grow in new and existing facilities. To meet increased demand, larger utility supplies, spot networks and large facility transformers are installed. The increased capacity of the electrical source results in increased fault currents in excess of 100 kA short-circuit protection. Eaton manufactures non-fused current limiting modules with interrupting capacities up to 200 kA at 600 Vac or 70 kA at 690 Vac. Unlike fused current limiters with a one-time use, a current limiter module provides an automatic reset of the module after a shortcircuit event. Resetting the molded-case circuit breaker is the only action required to restore critical power to the system; there is no time wasted with sourcing the correct replacement fuses or module to bring system back online.

The current limiting breaker modules use a unique contact design to enhance the system protection similar to that of the circuit breaker. When high short-circuit current is flowing through the contacts of these modules, the design results in very high interrupting capacities and improved current limiting characteristics.

Superior system protection:

●

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

●

●

●

Application Description High-performance breakers are most commonly applied when very high fault levels are available and with applications where the current limiting capability is used upstream of the final load to limit current. Typical loads include lighting, power distribution, and motor control applications.

●

●

●

Auto reset improves system uptime and eliminates the need for finding replacement parts No fuses to replace, reducing the overall cost of ownership and the waste created by fuses Overloads, by using inverse time current tripping characteristics of the molded-case circuit breaker Low-level short circuits, by using instantaneous and/or short-time delay tripping characteristics of the molded-case circuit breaker High-level short circuits, by using ultra-high-speed, blow-apart contacts of the current limiting module in series with the circuit breaker contacts Let-through currents, by improved opening speed of the contacts, the resultant rapid rise of arc voltage introduces impedance into the system

2 2 2 V4-T2-96

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

● ●

IEC 60947-2 UL 489 CSA C22.2

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

Product Selection

2 2

Series G High Performance Family Offering Type

Product

EGC 3P thermal-magnetic Breaker only

Amperes

480 Vac (UL)

600 Vac (UL)

15–125

100

35 1 1

415 Vac (IEC) Ics

Icu

Ics

100

100

—

—

With limiter

15–100

150

100

150

150

—

—

JG 3P thermal-magnetic Breaker only

70–250

200

50

200

200

18

14

JG 3P electronic

With limiter

70–225

200

200

200

150

70

18

Breaker only

20–250

200

50

200

200

18

14

With limiter

100–250

200

200

200

150

70

18

LG 3P thermal-magnetic Breaker only

250–600

200

65

200

200

35

18

LG3P electronic

100–600

200

65

200

200

35

18

Breaker only

2

690 Vac (IEC)

Icu

2 2 2 2 2 2

EG-Frame

EG IC Rating—150 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac

2

UL Listed (NEMA/IEC Rated) Base Molded Case Circuit Breaker

Breaker with Line Side Mounted Current Limiter

Breaker with Load Side Mounted Current Limiter

Line and Load Terminations Included 2

Interphase Barrier Included for Limiter

EGC3015FFG

EGC3015FFGQ01

EGC3015FFGQ02

T125EF

EIPBSK

EGC3016FFG

EGC3016FFGQ01

EGC3016FFGQ02

T125EF

EIPBSK

EGC3020FFG

EGC3020FFGQ01

EGC3020FFGQ02

T125EF

EIPBSK

EGC3025FFG

EGC3025FFGQ01

EGC3025FFGQ02

T125EF

EIPBSK

EGC3030FFG

EGC3030FFGQ01

EGC3030FFGQ02

T125EF

EIPBSK

EGC3032FFG

EGC3032FFGQ01

EGC3032FFGQ02

T125EF

EIPBSK

EGC3035FFG

EGC3035FFGQ01

EGC3035FFGQ02

T125EF

EIPBSK

EGC3040FFG

EGC3040FFGQ01

EGC3040FFGQ02

T125EF

EIPBSK

EGC3045FFG

EGC3045FFGQ01

EGC3045FFGQ02

T125EF

EIPBSK

EGC3050FFG

EGC3050FFGQ01

EGC3050FFGQ02

T125EF

EIPBSK

EGC3060FFG

EGC3060FFGQ01

EGC3060FFGQ02

T125EF

EIPBSK

EGC3063FFG

EGC3063FFGQ01

EGC3063FFGQ02

T125EF

EIPBSK

EGC3070FFG

EGC3070FFGQ01

EGC3070FFGQ02

T125EF

EIPBSK

EGC3080FFG

EGC3080FFGQ01

EGC3080FFGQ02

T125EF

EIPBSK

EGC3090FFG

EGC3090FFGQ01

EGC3090FFGQ02

T125EF

EIPBSK

EGC3100FFG

EGC3100FFGQ01

EGC3100FFGQ02

T125EF

EIPBSK

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 600Y/347V. 2 Two interphase barriers included on line end mounted limiter; (2) line end of limiter. Four interphase barriers included on load end mounted limiter; (2) line end of breaker (2) load end of limiter.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-97

2.2 2 2 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

Dimensions and Weights Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Assembled Breaker and Current Limiting Module Frame

Height

Width

Depth

Weight in lbs (kg)

EG

9.66 (245.7)

3.00 (76.2)

2.98 (75.8)

2.91 (1.32)

HMCP

9.66 (245.7)

3.00 (76.2)

2.98 (75.8)

4.18 (1.90)

EG-Frame With Current Limiter Module

2 2

0.56 (14.2)

2 2 2 2 2

1.00 (25.4) 3.00 (76.2)

9.66 (245.4)

4.17 (105.9) 3.61 (91.7)

0.50 1.00 (12.7) (25.4)

1.00 (25.4)

2

3.20 (81.3)

2

4.17 (105.9)

2 2 2

2.75 0.09 (69.9) (2.3)

2 0.78 (19.8)

2 2

0.41 (10.4)

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-98

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

JG Frame

JG IC Rating—200 kAIC at 600 Vac and 70 kAIC at 690 Vac Ampere Rating

Magnetic Range

UL Listed, IEC Rated Breaker With Line Side Mounted Current Limiter 1

UL Listed, IEC Rated Breaker With Load Side Mounted Current Limiter 2

IEC Rated Breaker With Line Side Mounted Current Limiter 1

IEC Rated Breaker With Load Side Mounted Current Limiter 2

Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic

Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic —

2 2 2

70

350–700

JGH3070FAGQ01

JGH3070FAGQ02

—

90

450–900

JGH3090FAGQ01

JGH3090FAGQ02

—

—

100

500–1000

JGH3100FAGQ01

JGH3100FAGQ02

JGH3100AAGQ01

JGH3100AAGQ02

125

625–1250

JGH3125FAGQ01

JGH3125FAGQ02

JGH3125AAGQ01

JGH3125AAGQ02

150

750–1550

JGH3150FAGQ01

JGH3150FAGQ02

—

—

160

800–1600

—

—

JGH3160AAGQ01

JGH3160AAGQ02

175

875–1750

JGH3175FAGQ01

JGH3175FAGQ02

—

—

200

1000–2000

JGH3200FAGQ01

JGH3200FAGQ02

JGH3200AAGQ01

JGH3200AAGQ02

225

1125–2250

JGH3225FAGQ01

JGH3225FAGQ02

—

—

2

JGH325033GQ02

—

—

2

JGH325032GQ02

—

—

2

JGH325035GQ02

—

—

JGH325036GQ02

—

—

2 2 2 2

Electronic Trip LS 250

—

250

—

250

—

250

—

JGH325033GQ01 Electronic Trip LSI JGH325032GQ01

2

Electronic Trip LSG JGH325035GQ01

2

Electronic Trip LSIG JGH325036GQ01

2

Series G HMCP Ampere Rating

Motor Circuit Protector with Line Side Mounted Current Limiter

Breaker with Load Side Mounted Current Limiter

250

HMCPJ250D5LQ01

HMCPJ250D5LQ02

250

HMCPJ250F5LQ01

HMCPJ250F5LQ02

250

HMCPJ250G5LQ01

HMCPJ250G5LQ02

250

HMCPJ250J5LQ01

HMCPJ250J5LQ02

250

HMCPJ250K5LQ01

HMCPJ250K5LQ02

250

HMCPJ250L5LQ01

HMCPJ250L5LQ02

2 2 2 2 2 2

Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes

Terminal Body Material

Wire Type

Metric Wire Range mm2

AWG Wire Range/ Number of Conductors

Catalog Number

Cu/Al

10–185

#8–350 (1)

TA250FJ 3

2 2

Standard Pressure Type Terminals 250

Aluminum

2

Notes 1 Two interphase barriers provided, mounted on line end of limiter, catalog number FJIPBK. 2 Four interphase barriers provided, (2) line end of breaker, (2) load end of limiter. 3 Line and load terminals included with products listed above.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-99

2.2 2 2 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

Dimensions and Weights Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Assembled Breaker and Current Limiting Module Frame

Height

Width

Depth

Weight in lbs (kg)

JG + limiter

13.06 (331.7)

4.13 (104.9)

3.44 (87.4)

9.87 (4.48)

HMCP

13.06 (331.7)

4.13 (104.9)

3.44 (87.4)

9.87 (4.48)

JG-Frame With Current Limiter Module

2 2 2

4.13 (104.9)

4.12 (104.6)

2 2 2 2

13.06 (331.7)

2 2 4.41 (112.0)

2 2

3.34 (84.8)

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-100

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

3.44 (87.4)

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2.2

Contents

High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination

Description

Page

EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-In Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V4-T2-15 V4-T2-29 V4-T2-47 V4-T2-65 V4-T2-74 V4-T2-85 V4-T2-89 V4-T2-92 V4-T2-96 V4-T2-102 V4-T2-103 V4-T2-103 V4-T2-104 V4-T2-112 V4-T2-114 V4-T2-115

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination

2

Product Description

2

Eaton’s Electrical Sector introduces new high-magnetic withstand molded case circuit breakers, specifically designed for critical operations and selective coordination requirements. The highmagnetic withstand LHH and NHH frames continue the legacy of circuit breaker innovation for which Eaton is recognized throughout the world. The LHH and NHH breakers are equipped with 125 to 400 ampere trip units with high-magnetic capability. This design enables the breakers to withstand up to 90 times rated current before opening under shortcircuit conditions. The LHH and NHH circuit breakers incorporate a higher level of instantaneous pickup, thus allowing for higher current levels of selective coordination. Standard molded case circuit breakers typically are furnished with a magnetic pickup or electronic instantaneous adjustment or instantaneous override set at 10 times (10x) the continuous trip rating.

Features, Benefits and Functions Eaton’s new LHH and NHH molded case circuit breakers are furnished with a higher level of magnetic pickup or electronic instantaneous settings as indicated in table on Page V4-T2-103. These higher levels of magnetic pickup and electronic instantaneous values in turn allow the system designer to obtain selective coordination at fault current levels up to these higher ratings. Greater values of selective coordination are available based on manufacturer tested combinations using the LHH and NHH as line-side breakers and standard breakers as load-side devices. Refer to IA01200002E to determine the maximum fault values that selective coordination achieves. When the line-side and load-side molded case circuit breaker trip ratings are chosen to coordinate in the overload range, they also can be selectively coordinated in the fault range up to the values listed in the table on Page V4-T2-103 or IA01200002E. For overcurrents protected by circuit breakers on the load-side of the LHH or NHH, only the effected load-side

circuit breaker will open, while the line-side LHH and/ or NHH circuit breakers remain closed, thus providing continuity of power to the other critical loads supplied by the LHH or NHH circuit breakers. Benefits of Using the LHH and NHH Molded Case Circuit Breakers Customer expectations and codes are driving product development to protect customers’ critical operations. NEC® 2005 and 2008 requires circuits with elevators, emergency systems, legally required standby systems, health care essential systems and critical operation power systems to be selectively coordinated. Simply stated, only the closest protective device directly protecting the circuit having an overcurrent (overload or fault) condition should open.

All other overcurrent protective devices within these systems shall remain closed. Similarly, backup power system designs of a critical nature that are not code mandated may also require overcurrent protective devices to be selectively coordinated as much as practicable to provide a higher level of uptime.

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

V4-T2-101

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

Product Selection

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Proven Technology and Performance The LHH is based on the Series G L-Frame circuit breaker, sharing the same small footprint and field-fit accessories as the L-Frame breaker. The NHH is based on the Series G N-Frame circuit breaker and shares the same footprint and accessories as the N-Frame breaker. NHH accessories must be factory installed. The LHH incorporates a thermal-magnetic trip unit with fixed thermal and fixed magnetic settings. The NHH has an OPTIM™ electronic trip unit with LSI adjustment capabilities. The instantaneous setting is adjustable from 1000–4000 A or may be turned off to default to the frame override of 14,000 A. A hand-held OPTIMizer must be used with the NHH to adjust short-time delay and instantaneous, however, the long delay pickup is fixed and cannot be adjusted.

LHH

LHH and NHH Catalog Numbers Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit

LSI Electronic Trip Unit

Ampere Rating

LHH Frame

NHH Frame

125

LHH3125FFG

—

150

LHH3150FFG

NHH3150T52X15

175

LHH3175FFG

NHH3175T52X15

200

LHH3200FFG

NHH3200T52X15

225

LHH3225FFG

NHH3225T52X15

250

LHH3250FFG

NHH3250T52X15

300

LHH3300FFG

NHH3300T52X15

350

LHH3350FFG

NHH3350T52X15

400

LHH3400FFG

—

The LHH and NHH breakers are available in Eaton’s panelboards and switchboards.

Standards and Certifications ● ●

UL CSA

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-102

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

Technical Data and Specifications ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

●

2.2

Dimensions

Three-pole 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 125–400 ampere LHH 150–350 ampere NHH Trip units: LHH—thermal-magnetic NHH—LSI electronic trip unit No rating plugs required Factory-sealed breakers LHH uses same internal and external accessories as standard Series G L-Frame circuit breaker NHH uses same internal and external accessories as standard Series G N-Frame circuit breaker

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2

Dimensions

2

Description

Height

Width 5.48 (139.2)

4.09 (103.9)

12.36 (5.6)

16.00 (406.4)

8.25 (209.5)

5.50 (139.7)

46.80 (21.2)

R 0.25 (6.4)

CL

4.06 (103.1)

Breaker 3.16 (80.3)

5.58 (141.7)

400

350

2 2

10.13 (257.3)

2

1.92 (48.8) 2.69 (68.3)

5.48 (139.2)

5.38 (136.7)

2

Three-Pole

2

N-Frame

NEMA UL 489 240 Vac

100

100

480 Vac

65

65

600 Vac

35

35

250 Vac

42

—

220 Vac

100

100

415 Vac

70

70

690 Vac

25

25

125/250 Vdc

22

—

Number of poles

3

3

Ampere range

125–400 A

150–350 A

Front Cover Cutout 3.44 (87.4) CL R 0.25 Breaker (6.4) 1.91 (48.5) 1.50 (38.1)

IEC 60947-2

6.38 (162.1)

3.68 (93.5) 3.19 (81.0)

2 2

2.43 (61.7)

Breaker Type

Max. rated current (amperes)

2

10.13 (257.3)

NHH

Short-Circuit Current Ratings (kA rms) AC 50–60 Hz NHH

2

LHH

2.00 (50.8)

LHH

Weight in Lbs (kg)

L-Frame

LHH and NHH Electrical Characteristics

Description

Depth

Front View Three-Pole

Side View

2 2 2

9.25 (235.0) 16.00 (406.4)

2 2

8.25 (209.6)

5.50 (139.7)

2 2 2

Continuous Current Ratings Continuous Current Rating (Ir)

Magnetic Trip Point

Continuous Current Multiplier

Instantaneous Trip Point

Continuous Current Multiplier

Short Delay Pickup

125 A

2500 A

20x

—

—

—

150 A

2500 A

16x

14,000 A

93x

225–1200 A

175 A

4000 A

22x

14,000 A

80x

260–1400 A

200 A

4000 A

20x

14,000 A

70x

300–1600 A

225 A

6000 A

26x

14,000 A

62x

338–1800 A

250 A

6000 A

24x

14,000 A

56x

375–2000 A

300 A

6000 A

20x

14,000 A

47x

450–2400 A

350 A

6000 A

17x

14,000 A

40x

525–2800 A

400 A

6000 A

15x

—

—

—

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-103

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

Contents

2

Description

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Page V4-T2-15 V4-T2-29 V4-T2-47 V4-T2-65 V4-T2-74 V4-T2-85 V4-T2-89 V4-T2-92 V4-T2-96

EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features and Accessories Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories and Test Kit . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V4-T2-101 V4-T2-106 V4-T2-107 V4-T2-109 V4-T2-112 V4-T2-114 V4-T2-115

Special Features and Accessories Eaton’s molded case circuit breakers are designed to provide circuit protection for low voltage distribution systems. They are described by NEMA as, “... a device for closing and interrupting a circuit between separable contacts under both normal and abnormal conditions,” and furthermore as, “... a breaker assembled as an integral unit in a supporting and enclosing housing of insulating material.” The National Electrical Code (NEC) describes them as, “A device designed to open and close a circuit by nonautomatic means, and to open the circuit automatically on a predetermined overload of current, without injury to itself when properly applied within its rating.” So designed, Eaton circuit breakers protect conductors against overloads and conductors and connected apparatus, such as motors and motor starters, against short circuits.

In low voltage distribution systems, there are many varied applications of molded case circuit breakers. Eaton offers the most comprehensive family of molded case circuit breakers in the industry. This section of circuit breakers includes: ●

●

● ● ● ●

Thermal-magnetic trip breakers Electronic rms trip breakers Molded case switches Motor circuit protectors Current limiting breakers Special application breakers

Modified Breakers Eaton breakers can be ordered with internal accessories installed. These modified breakers will be subject to an addition charge.

Special Calibration Special non-UL listed calibrations are available for certain ambient temperatures other than 40 °C and for frequencies other than 50/60 Hz or DC. Reduced interrupting ratings will apply for 400 Hz applications. ●

Add suffix H01 to breaker catalog number for 400 Hz rating

50 ºC Calibration Note: Breakers equipped with electronic trip units can operate reliably in ambient temperatures of 50 °C. Add suffix “V3” to NG MCCBs to remove standard 40 °C labeling.

Add suffix “V” to catalog number for complete thermal magnetic breaker when ordering listed ampere ratings for breakers to be used in 50 ºC ambients. 50 ºC ambient MCCBs are not UL listed. Contact Eaton for availability.

2 2 2 2 V4-T2-104

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Calibrations and Treatment Frame Description

EG JG LG NG RG

Special calibration

■

■

■

■

■

Moisturefungus treatment

■

■

■

■

■

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2.2

Standards and Certifications Moisture-Fungus Treatment All Eaton circuit breaker cases are molded from glasspolyester, which does not support the growth of fungus. Any parts that are susceptible to the growth of fungus will require special treatment. Order by description. ●

Add suffix J01 to breaker catalog number

Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers The circuit breakers may be ordered with freeze testing. This option uses special lubrication and mechanical operation is verified at –40 °C. ●

Add suffix F01 to catalog number –57 °F, F02 –30 °F

Marine Applications E- to R-Framed circuit breakers can be supplied to meet the following marine specifications: ●

U.S. Coast Guard CFR 46; ABS—American Bureau of Shipping; IEEE 45; DNV; and Lloyds

These specifications generally require molded case circuit breakers to be supplied with 50 °C ambient, and plug-in adapter kits. When plug-in adapter kits are used, no terminals need be supplied (switchboard applications). Circuit breakers can also be supplied to meet UL 489 Supplement SA (Marine use) and UL 489 Supplement SB (Naval Use).

UL 489 Supplement SA applies to vessels over 65 feet (19.8m) in length.

Molded case circuit breakers are designed to conform with the following standards:

Requirements include 40 °C ambient calibration, special labeling, and no use of aluminum conductors or terminals. (No 50 °C.)

●

●

Add suffix H08

●

Or you can choose to add 50ºC ambient but then there is no “UL” mark. ●

Add suffix VH08

UL 489 Supplement SB requires partial 50 °C ambient calibration, vibration testing, special nameplating and no use of aluminum conductors or terminals. Eaton chooses to always fully calibrate to 50 °C ambient. (“Naval” labeled per UL but no “UL” mark due to 50 °C label.) ●

●

●

●

Add suffix VH09 ●

Certified Test Reports Eaton breakers can be ordered with certified test reports at the time of order entry. Test report documents the thermal and magnetic or electronic tripping characteristics of the individual breaker. Breaker and test report must be ordered together. Add suffix 12 to breaker catalog number and enter separate line item on order for certified test report.

●

●

●

●

●

Underwriters Laboratories Inc., Standard UL 489, molded case circuit breakers and circuit breaker enclosures National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Standards Publication No. AB1-1993, molded case circuit breakers Australian Standard AS 2184, molded case circuit breakers British Standards Institution Standard BS 4752: Part 1, switchgear and control gear Part 1: circuit breakers Canadian Standards Association (CSA) Standard C22.2 No. 5, service entrance and branch circuit breakers International Electrotechnical Commission Recommendations IEC 60947-2, circuit breakers Japanese T-Mark Standard molded case circuit breakers South African Bureau of Standards, Standard SABS 156, Standard Specification for molded case circuit breakers Swiss Electro-Technical Association Standard SEV 157-1, safety regulations for circuit breakers Union Technique de l’Electricite Standard NF C 63-120, low voltage switchgear and control gear circuit breaker requirements Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker (Association of German Electrical Engineers) Standard VDE 0660, low voltage switchgear and control gear, circuit breakers

Conformance with these standards satisfies most local and international codes, assuming user acceptability and simplified application. Molded case circuit breakers equal or exceed Federal Specification Classification W-C-375b requirements for the particular class associated with the circuit breaker frame being considered. Open breakers do not have service entrance ratings. Service entrance rating is part of the enclosure.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-105

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2

Internal Accessories

2

Alarm Lockout The alarm switches operate when the circuit breaker is tripped by a short circuit or overcurrent, but also when it is tripped by a shunt trip or undervoltage release.

2 2 2 2 2 2

Auxiliary Switches Auxiliary switches are used for signaling and control purposes. The various functions of the auxiliary switches (changeover) are shown on Page V4-T2-108.

2

Digitrip 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories Shunt Trips The shunt trip is used for remote tripping. The coil of the shunt trip is rated only for short-time operation. It is not permissible with the circuit breaker open to apply a continuous opening command to the shunt trip in order to prevent the breaker from closing. This means that interlocking circuits with continuous commands may not be set up with shunt trips. Undervoltage Releases The circuit breaker cannot be closed until the undervoltage release is energized. If the release is not energized, the circuit breaker can only perform an idle switching operation.

2 2 2 2

Frequent idle switching actions should be avoided as they shorten the endurance of the circuit breaker.

2 2 2

Cause of Trip Display/Remote Mount Cause of Trip Display The Cause of Trip Display can be field-installed on any Digitrip RMS 310+ trip unit. The device provides breaker information through an LCD screen, such as cause of trip, phrase current, ground current and low loads. The display is ideal for troubleshooting common trips such as ground fault, long delay, and instantaneous/short delay. The DIGIVIEW version will provide a local display at the breaker without additional wiring by connecting directly onto the trip unit. The DIGIVIEWR06 version has a 6 foot cable that allows users to mount the display on the outside of an enclosure door and connect to the trip unit that is contained inside the enclosure. The DIGIVIEWR06 is NEMA 3R rated. Cause of Trip Display/ Remote Mount Cause of Trip Display

2

Catalog Number

2

DIGIVIEW DIGIVIEWR06

2

Cause of Trip LED Module The Cause of Trip LED Module can be field-installed on any Digitrip RMS 310+ trip unit. The device provides a cause of trip indication via LED. The Cause of Trip LED Module connects directly onto the trip unit. When the breaker trips, the module indicates the cause of trip (long delay, short delay, instantaneous and ground) via LED indication. The module is reset after the breaker is reset.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Cause of Trip LED Module Catalog Number

2

TRIP-LED

2 2 V4-T2-106

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Electronic Portable Test Kit The electronic portable test kit provides a means to complete field tests using secondary injection on all 310+ trip units. The same test kit is also capable of secondary injection testing on Magnum and Series NRX low voltage power circuit breakers' 520 and 1150 trip units. Electronic Portable Test Kit Catalog Number MTST230V

Wire Seal The wire seal can be used to secure the cover of the trip unit to prevent adjustments after settings are confirmed. Wire Seal Catalog Number 5108A03H01

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

External Accessories and Test Kit

2

External Accessories Description

Fit Type

Non-padlockable handle block

Field

Padlockable handle block

Field

Padlockable handle block off-only

Field

Padlockable handle lock hasp

Field

Padlockable handle lock hasp off-only

2

Frame

2

EG

JG

LG

NG

RG

EFHB

—

—

LKD4

—

EFPHB

—

—

—

—

EFPHBOFF

FJPHBOFF

LBHPOFF

—

—

EFPLK

FJPHL

LPHL

PLK5

HLK6

Field

EFPHLOFF

FJPHLOFF

LPHLOFF

PLK55OFF

HLK6OFF

2

Kirk key interlock kit 12

Field

—

KYKJG

KYKLG

KYK4

KYK6

Castell key interlock kit 23

Field

—

CTKJG

CTKLG

CTK4

CTK6

2

Slide bar interlock 4

Field

EFSBI

FJSBI

LGSBI

SBK5

—

Walking beam interlock 4

Three-pole

EG3WBI

JG3WBI

LG3WBI

WBL5

WBL6

Four-pole

EG4WBI

JG4WBI

LG4WBI

WBL5

—

120 Vac

MOPEG240C

MOPJG120C

MOPLG120C

EOP5T07

EOP6T08K

240 Vac

MOPEG240C

MOPJG240C

MOPLG240C

EOP5T11

EOP6T11K

24 Vdc

MOPEG48D

MOPJG24D

MOPLG24D

EOP5T21

—

48 Vdc

MOPEG48D

—

—

EOP5T22

EOP6T21K

125 Vdc

MOPEG120C

MOPJG120C

MOPLG120C

EOP5T26

—

220 Vdc

—

MOPJG240C

MOPLG240C

—

—

Electrical operator 5

Plug-in adapters Rear connecting studs 6

Wohner busbar adapter

250 Vdc

—

MOPJG240C

MOPLG240C

—

—

Three-pole

PAD3E

PAD3J

PAD3L

PAD53

—

Four-pole

PAD4E

PAD4J

PAD4L

—

—

Field

EFRCSDL

FJRCSDL

LRCS3WK (3P)

—

—

EFRCSDS

FJRCSDS

LRCS4WK (4P)

—

—

EFRCSWL

FJRCSWL

—

—

—

EFRCSWS

FJRCSWS

—

—

—

Field top

EG-BUS-T

JG-BUS-TB

LG-BUS-TB

—

—

Field bottom

EG-BUS-B

JG-BUS-TB

LG-BUS-TB

—

—

2 2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Series G MCCB Frames EG, JG, and LG to mount to the SASY 60 mm Wohner Classic System ● ● UL file # E197132 No line side wiring required ● ● Compact design Up to 630 A MCCB ● ● UL508 tested and certified Reverse feed possible using Wohner system with Eaton breakers

2 2 2

Wohner Busbar Adapter

2

Wohner Busbar Adapters Breaker Frame

Busbar Adapter

Connection Point

EG

EG-BUS-T

Top

EG

EG-BUS-B

Bottom

JG

JG-BUS-TB

Top or bottom

LG

LG-BUS-TB

Top or bottom

2 2 2

Notes 1 Provision only. 2 See Page V4-T2-316 for bolt projection dimensions. 3 Castell bolt mounting hole must be 10 mm. 4 Requires two breakers. 5 Contact Eaton for availability of operators for EG- and NG-Frames before December 2004. 6 D = Imperial threads UL, W = metric threads IEC, L = long studs, S = short studs.

2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-107

2.2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2

Accessory Configurations for EG–RG Circuit Breakers

2

Internal Accessory Configurations

2 2 2 2

¬

2 2 2

¬ ¨

¨

¨

¨

¨

¨

2

¡

¡

¡

¡

2 2 2 2

¨ ≠ ¬ = For N and R-Frame Circuit Breakers Only

2 2 2

Contact Making by the Auxiliary and Alarm Switches as a Function of the Switching Position of the Circuit Breaker

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-108

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2.2

Accessories

2

Field Fit Kit Catalog Numbers

2

Alarm Lockout

2

Frame Description Make/Break 2 Make/2 Break

Description

EG, JG and LG

NG

RG 1

Left

—

A1L5LPK

—

Right

ALM1M1BEPK 2

A1L5RPK

A1L6RPK

Pole Location

Left

—

A2L5LPK

—

Right

ALM2M2BEPK 3

A2L5RPK

A2L6RPK

Pole Location

For Use in Frame

Contact Type

Catalog Number

Make/Break

Right

EG

Silver

ALM1M1BEPK

2 Make/ 2 Break

Right

EG

Silver

ALM2M2BEPK

Make/Break

Right

JG and LG

Silver

ALM1M1BJPK

2 Make/ 2 Break

Right

JG and LG

Silver

ALM2M2BJPK

Make/Break

Right

EG

Gold

ALM1M1BEEPK

2 Make/ 2 Break

Right

EG

Gold

ALM2M2BEEPK

Make/Break

Right

JG and LG

Gold

ALM1M1BEJPK

2 Make/ 2 Break

Right

JG and LG

Gold

ALM2M2BEJPK

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Auxiliary Switch Frame

2

Description

Pole Location

EG, JG and LG

NG

RG 1

1A, 1B

Left

—

A1X5PK

—

Right

AUX1A1BPK

A1X5PK

—

2A, 2B

Left

—

A2X5PK

—

Right

AUX2A2BPK

A2X5PK

A2X6RPK

Left

—

A3X5LPK

—

Right

—

A3X5RPK

—

Left

—

—

—

Right

—

—

A4X6RPK

2

Pole Location

For Use in Frame

Contact Type

Catalog Number

2

3A, 3B 4A, 4B

Description 1A, 1B

Right

EG/JG/LG

Silver

AUX1A1BPK

2A, 2B

Right

EG/JG/LG

Silver

AUX2A2BPK

1A, 1B

Right

EG/JG/LG

Gold

AUX1E1BPK

2A, 2B

Right

EG/JG/LG

Gold

AUX2E2BPK

NG

RG 1

AA115LPK

—

AA115RPK

—

2 2 2

2 2 2

Auxiliary Switch/Alarm Lockout

2

Frame Description

Pole Location

EG, JG and LG

—

Left

— 4

Right

AUXALRMEPK

Description

Pole Location

For Use in Frame

Contact Type

Catalog Number

1A/1B & 1M/1B

Right

EG

Silver

AUXALRMEPK

1A/1B & 1M/1B

Right

JG and LG

Silver

AUXALRMJPK

1A/1B & 1M/1B

Right

EG

Gold

AUXALRMEEPK

1A/1B & 1M/1B

Right

JG and LG

Gold

AUXALRMEJPK

2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 All accessories mount in the RH cavity which will accept one each of shunt trip, UVR, auxiliary switch and alarm switch. 2 Part number for JG and LG is ALM1M1BJPK. 3 Part number for JG and LG is ALM2M2BJPK. 4 Part number for JG and LG is AUXALRMJPK.

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2 2 V4-T2-109

2.2 2

Shunt Trip—Standard

2

ST

2

EG, JG and LG 2

NG

48–60 Vac

Left

SNT4860CPK

SNT5LP05K

—

Right

—

—

SNT6P05K

Left

SNT120CPK

SNT5LP11K

—

Right

—

—

SNT6P11K

Left

SNT480CPK 3

—

—

Right

—

—

—

220–250 Vdc or 380–440 Vac

—

SNT5LP14K

SNT6P14K

480–600 Vac

—

SNT5LP18K

SNT6P18K

Left

SNT012CPK

—

—

Right

—

—

—

24 Vac/dc

2

48–60 Vdc

2

110–125 Vdc

2

250 Vdc

RG 1

Left

SNT024CPK

SNT5LP03K

—

Right

—

—

SNT6P03K

Left

SNT4860CPK

SNT5LP23K

—

Right

—

—

SNT6P23K

Left

SNT125DPK

SNT5LP26K

—

Right

—

—

SNT6P26K

Left

SNT250DPK

—

—

Right

—

—

—

Shunt Trip—Low Energy Frame

Description

Pole Location

EG, JG and LG

NG

RG 2

—

Left

—

LST5LPK

—

Right

—

—

LST6RPK

RG 2

2 2

Pole Location

12 Vdc

2

Frame

Description

380–600 Vac

2

2

Shunt Trip—Standard

110–240 Vac

2

2

Series G

a

2

2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Undervoltage Release Mechanism Frame

Description

Pole Location

EG, JG and LG 1

NG

2

110–127 Vac

Left

UVR120APK

UVH5LP08K

—

Right

—

—

UVH6RP08K

2

208–240 Vac

Left

UVR240APK

UVH5LP11K

—

Right

—

—

UVH6RP11K

2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

24 Vdc 24 Vac 48–60 Vdc 48–60 Vac 120 Vdc 220–250 Vdc 380–500 Vac 525–600 Vac

2

12 Vdc

2

12 Vac

2 2 2

Left

UVR024DPK

UVH5LP21K 4

—

Right

—

—

UVH6RP21K 4 4

Left

UVR024APK

UVH5LP21K

Right

—

—

—

Left

UVR048DPK

UVH5LP23K

—

Right

—

—

UVH6RP23K

UVH6RP21K 4

Left

UVR048APK

UVH5LP05K

—

Right

—

—

UVH6RP05K

Left

UVR125DPK

UVH5LP26K

—

Right

—

—

UVH6RP26K

Left

UVR250DPK

UVH5LP28K

—

Right

—

—

UVH6RP28K

Left

UVR480APK

UVH5LP29K

—

Right

—

—

UVH6RP29K —

Left

UVR600APK

—

Right

—

—

—

Left

—

UVH5LP20K

— UVH6RP20K

Right

—

—

Left

—

UVH5LP02K

—

Right

—

—

UVH6RP02K

Notes 1 LH cavity not available for EG frame with earth leakage module. 2 All accessories mount in the RH cavity which will accept one each of shunt trip, UVR, auxiliary switch and alarm switch. 3 380–600 Vdc, 50/60 Hz. 4 24 Vdc only use UVH5LP03K (NG) UVH6RP03K (RG) for 24 Vac.

V4-T2-110

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2.2

Technical Data and Specifications

2

Note: Gold-plated contacts are well suited for switching low voltages and currents. Lead wires on accessories containing goldplated contacts are marked with a yellow stripe.

2 2 2

Series G Gold Contact Accessory Switch Electrical Ratings Max. Voltage (Ue)

Frequency

Max. Current (ln)

Dielectric Withstand Voltage (Ul)

125 V

50/60 Hz

0.1 A

2200 V

30 V

DC

0.25 A

2200 V

5V

DC

5 mA

2200 V

2 2 2 2 2

Series G Silver Contact Accessory Switch Electrical Ratings Dielectric Withstand Voltage (Ul)

Max. Voltage (Ue)

Frequency

Max. Current (ln)

600 V

50/60 Hz

2A

2200 V

125/250 V

50/60 Hz

5A

2200 V

125 V

DC

1A

2200 V

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-111

2.2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

Contents

Series G Motor Operators

Description

2

EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Operators Features, Benefits and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Motor Operators

2

Product Description

2 2 2 2

Eaton’s motor operator mechanism enables local and remote ON, OFF and reset switching of a circuit breaker. The motor operator is mounted on the circuit breaker cover within the dimensions of the circuit breaker.

The robust motor operators offer various voltages to maximize customer flexibility. Standard load transfer switching can be accomplished through the use of two circuit breakers fitted with motor operators and a mechanical interlock.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-112

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Page V4-T2-15 V4-T2-29 V4-T2-47 V4-T2-65 V4-T2-74 V4-T2-85 V4-T2-89 V4-T2-92 V4-T2-96 V4-T2-101 V4-T2-104 V4-T2-113 V4-T2-113 V4-T2-113 V4-T2-114 V4-T2-115

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

Features, Benefits and Functions The motor operator provides special features for ease of customer use and status indication. ●

●

●

The motor operator allows the circuit breaker to be opened, closed or reset remotely The motor operator contains a motor connected to a cam drive mechanism. The cam drives a slide mechanism to operate the circuit breaker handle Internal limit switches and relays are used to control motor operation to prevent overdriving the circuit breaker handle and motor overload conditions

2.2

Product Selection ●

●

●

●

A key is provided to manually operate the circuit breaker A special pull-out locking mechanism provides a method for padlocking the circuit breaker handle in the OFF position The locking device will accept three padlock shackles with a maximum diameter of 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) each The cover provides visual status of the circuit breaker: ON, OFF or TRIPPED. A PUSH-TO-TRIP button allows the user to manually trip the breaker

Motor Operators Frame

Voltage

Frequency

Inrush Current Catalog Number

Series G E-Frame

100–240 Vac

50/60 Hz

1A

MOPEG240C

100–220 Vdc

DC

1A

MOPEG240C

24/48 Vdc

DC

3A

MOPEG48D

Series C F-Frame

Series G J-Frame

Series G L-Frame

Manual Operating Key

2

208–240 Vac

50/60 Hz

1A

MOPFD240C

110–127 Vac

50/60 Hz

1A

MOPFD120C

220–250 Vdc

DC

1A

MOPFD240C

110–125 Vdc

DC

1A

MOPFD120C

24 Vdc

DC

3A

MOPFD24D

208–240 Vac

50/60 Hz

1A

MOPJG240C

110–127 Vac

50/60 Hz

1A

MOPJG120C

220–250 Vdc

DC

1A

MOPJG240C

110–125 Vdc

DC

1A

MOPJG120C

24 Vdc

DC

3A

MOPJG24D

208–240 Vac

50/60 Hz

2A

MOPLG240C

110–127 Vac

50/60 Hz

2A

MOPLG120C

220–250 Vdc

DC

2A

MOPLG240C

110–125 Vdc

DC

2A

MOPLG120C

24 Vdc

DC

6A

MOPLG24D

Turn the Key (clockwise only)

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Circuit Breaker Status Indication Window

2 2 2

PUSH-TO-TRIP Button

2 2 2

Standards and Certifications

2

The motor operators are UL and CSA listed, and CE marked.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-113

2.2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

Contents

LG Breaker with Plug-In Block

Description

2

EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . . . 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module. . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-In Blocks Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Plug-In Blocks

2

Product Description

2 2 2 2 2 2

Plug-in adapters simplify installation and front removal of circuit breakers. Plug-ins are available for rear connection applications on three- and four-pole circuit breakers. Trip on drawout interlock kits are included. Stabs for EG, JG and LG plugins rotate 90 ° for flexible installation. Use terminal shields for IP30 protection.

Product Selection Plug-In Blocks Breaker Frame

Number of Poles

Catalog Number

EG-, JG- and LG-Frame Plug-In Blocks EG

3

PAD3E

EG

4

PAD4E

JG

3

PAD3J

JG

4

PAD4J

LG

3

PAD3L

LG

4

PAD4L

Trip-On Drawout Interlock Kit 1

2 2 2

EG

3, 4

PIILEG

JG

3, 4

PIILJG

LG

3, 4

PIILLG

Terminal Shields IP30

2

EG

3

EFTS3K

EG

4

EFTS4K

2

JG

3

FJTS3K

JG

4

FJTS4K

2

LG

3

LTS3K

2

LG

4

LTS4K

Position Switch

2

EG

3, 4

PADILE

JG

3, 4

PADILJ

2

LG

3, 4

PADILL

Note 1 Included with plug-in block. Trips the breaker when breaker is removed from plug-in block.

2 2 2 V4-T2-114

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Page V4-T2-15 V4-T2-29 V4-T2-47 V4-T2-65 V4-T2-74 V4-T2-85 V4-T2-89 V4-T2-92 V4-T2-96 V4-T2-101 V4-T2-104 V4-T2-112 V4-T2-115

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G

2.2

Contents

Drawout Cassettes

Description

Page

EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawout Cassette

V4-T2-15 V4-T2-29 V4-T2-47 V4-T2-65 V4-T2-74 V4-T2-85 V4-T2-89 V4-T2-92 V4-T2-96 V4-T2-101 V4-T2-104 V4-T2-112 V4-T2-114

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Drawout Cassette Product Description

Features

The drawout cassette is available for use with JG, LG and NG, three- and four-pole breakers. The cassettes consist of two separate components: the movable mechanism, which attaches to the breaker, and the stationary mechanism, which houses in the cassette. For the JG, LG and NG drawout cassettes, all necessary parts for installation are included in the one catalog number.

Features of the drawout cassettes for the JG, LG and NG include: ●

●

Trip on drawout—breaker will trip if it is in the ON position when withdrawn from the cassette Secondary terminal block— the drawout cassettes include a secondary terminal block for easier access when wiring low voltage accessories, including shunts and undervoltage releases

The drawout mechanism has three primary positions: ●

●

●

2

Product Selection

Connected—the breaker is fully connected to the primary stabs and secondary contacts Disconnected—both the primary stabs and the secondary contacts are disconnected Withdraw—the breaker can be removed from the cassette

JG Drawout Cassette

LG Drawout Cassette

JG, LG and NG Drawout Cassettes

2

Breaker Frame

Number of Poles

Catalog Number

2

JG

3

JG3DOM

2

4

JG4DOM

2

3

LG3DOM

2

4

LG4DOM

3

NG3DOM

4

NG4DOM

LG

NG

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-115

2.3 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Contents

Molded Case Circuit Breaker Product Family

Description

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Learn Online

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Page

Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V4-T2-117 V4-T2-118 V4-T2-121 V4-T2-135 V4-T2-153 V4-T2-161 V4-T2-185 V4-T2-211 V4-T2-222 V4-T2-237 V4-T2-256 V4-T2-267 V4-T2-269 V4-T2-270 V4-T2-273 V4-T2-304

Drawings Online

Product Overview Eaton’s molded case circuit breakers are designed to provide circuit protection for low voltage distribution systems. They are described by NEMA as, “... a device for closing and interrupting a circuit between separable contacts under both normal and abnormal conditions,” and furthermore as, “... a breaker assembled as an integral unit in a supporting and enclosing housing of insulating material.” The National Electrical Code (NEC) describes them as, “A device designed to open and close a circuit by nonautomatic means, and to open the circuit automatically on a predetermined overload of current, without injury to itself when properly applied within its rating.” So designed, Eaton circuit breakers protect conductors against overloads and conductors and connected apparatus, such as motors and motor starters, against short circuits. In low voltage distribution systems, there are many varied applications of molded case circuit breakers.

Eaton offers the most comprehensive family of molded case circuit breakers in the industry. This section of circuit breakers includes: ●

●

● ● ● ●

Thermal-magnetic trip breakers Electronic rms trip breakers Molded case switches Motor circuit protectors Current limiting breakers Special application breakers

Modified Breakers Eaton breakers can be ordered with internal accessories installed. These modified breakers will be subject to an addition charge.

Special Calibration Special non-UL-listed calibrations are available for certain ambient temperatures other than 40 °C and for frequencies other than 50/60 Hz or DC. Reduced interrupting ratings will apply for 400 Hz applications.

50 °C Calibration Add suffix V to catalog Number for complete breaker, listed above, when ordering listed ampere ratings for breakers to be used in 50 °C ambients. (No price adder.) (No UL label.)

Moisture-Fungus Treatment All circuit breaker cases are molded from glass-polyester which does not support the growth of fungus. Any parts which are susceptible to the growth of fungus will require special treatment.

Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers The circuit breakers may be ordered with freeze testing. This option uses special lubrication and mechanical operation is verified at –40 °C.

Marine Applications E- to R-Framed circuit breakers can be supplied to meet the following marine specifications: ●

U.S. Coast Guard CFR 46; ABS—American Bureau of Shipping; IEEE 45; DNV; Lloyds; and ABS/NVR

2 2

These specifications generally require molded case circuit breakers to be supplied with 50 °C ambient, and plug-in adapter kits. When plug-in adapter kits are used, no terminals need be supplied (switchboard applications). Circuit breakers can also be supplied to meet UL 489 Supplement SA (Marine use) and UL 489 Supplement SB (Naval Use). UL 489 Supplement SA applies to vessels over 65 feet (19.8 m) in length. Requirements include 40 °C ambient calibration, special labeling, and no use of aluminum conductors or terminals. (No 50 °C.) ●

Or you can choose to add 50 °C ambient but then there is no “UL” mark. ●

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Suffix VH08

UL 489 Supplement SB requires partial 50 °C ambient calibration, vibration testing, special nameplating and no use of aluminum conductors or terminals. Eaton chooses to always fully calibrate to 50 °C ambient. (“Naval” labeled per UL, and UL now allows 50 °C label here.) ●

V4-T2-116

Suffix H08

Suffix VH09

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Standards and Certifications Certified Test Reports Eaton breakers can be ordered with certified test reports at the time of order entry. Test report documents the thermal and magnetic or electronic tripping characteristics of the individual breaker. Breaker and test report must be ordered together. Add suffix 12 to breaker catalog number and enter separate line item on order for certified test report.

Molded case circuit breakers are designed to conform with the following standards: ●

●

●

●

●

●

Underwriters Laboratories Inc., Standard UL 489, molded case circuit breakers and circuit breaker enclosures National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Standards Publication No. AB1-1993, molded case circuit breakers Australian Standard AS 2184, molded case circuit breakers British Standards Institution Standard BS 4752: Part 1, switchgear and control gear Part 1: circuit breakers Canadian Standards Association (CSA) Standard C22.2 No. 5, service entrance and branch circuit breakers International Electrotechnical Commission Recommendations IEC 60947-2, circuit breakers

●

●

●

●

●

Japanese T-Mark Standard molded case circuit breakers South African Bureau of Standards, Standard SABS 156, Standard Specification for molded case circuit breakers Swiss Electro-Technical Association Standard SEV 157-1, safety regulations for circuit breakers Union Technique de l’Electricite Standard NF C 63-120, low voltage switchgear and control gear circuit breaker requirements Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker (Association of German Electrical Engineers) Standard VDE 0660, low voltage switchgear and control gear, circuit breakers

Conformance with these standards satisfies most local and international codes, assuming user acceptability and simplified application. Molded case circuit breakers equal or exceed Federal Specification Classification W-C-375b requirements for the particular class associated with the circuit breaker frame being considered. Open breakers do not have service entrance ratings. Service entrance rating is part of the enclosure.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-117

2.3 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Quick Reference Industrial Circuit Breakers

G-Frame UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)

Circuit Breaker Type

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

No. of Poles

AC

GHB

15–100

1

2

GHB

15–100

2, 3

2

GHB

15–100

GHB

15–100

2

HGHB

15–30

1

277

125

N.I.T.U.

12c, 13a, 13b

65

—

—

25

—

—

GHBS

15–30

1, 2

480Y/277

—

—

—

65

65

—

14

—

—

2

GBHS

15–20

1, 2

600Y/347

—

N.I.T.U.

—

—

—

—

—

—

10

GDB

15–50

2

480

125/250

N.I.T.U.

—

—

—

—

—

14

2

GDB

15–100

3

480

250

N.I.T.U.

—

—

—

—

—

14

2

GD

15–50

2

480

125/250

N.I.T.U.

13b

—

—

65

—

GD

15–100

3

480

250

N.I.T.U.

13b

—

—

65

2

GHC

15–100

1

120

125

N.I.T.U.

12c, 13a

65

—

—

GHC

15–100

2, 3

240

125/250

N.I.T.U.

13b

—

—

65

2

GHC

15–100

1

277

125

N.I.T.U.

12c, 13a

—

—

—

14

2

GHC

15–100

2, 3

480Y/277

125/250

N.I.T.U.

13b

—

—

—

HGHC

15–30

1

277

125

N.I.T.U.

—

65

—

—

2 2

2 2

Volts

AC (kA)

DC

Type of Trip 1

Federal Specification W-C-375b

120

120/240

240

120

125

N.I.T.U.

11a

65

—

—

—

—

—

240

125/250

N.I.T.U.

11a10b, 11b

—

—

65

—

—

—

1

277

125

N.I.T.U.

12b, 14b

—

—

—

14

—

—

2, 3

480Y/277

125/250

N.I.T.U.

15b

—

—

—

14

14

—

DC (kA) 2

Notes 1 N.I.T.U. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T.U. is interchangeable trip unit. 2 Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 250 Vdc.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-118

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

250

Page Number

14

—

V4-T2-126

—

14

V4-T2-126

14

—

V4-T2-126

—

14

V4-T2-126

14

—

V4-T2-126

—

—

V4-T1-34

—

—

V4-T1-34

—

—

10

V4-T2-124

—

—

10

V4-T2-124

14

—

—

10

V4-T2-123

—

22

—

—

10

V4-T2-123

—

—

—

14

—

V4-T2-131

—

—

—

1

V4-T2-131

—

—

14

—

V4-T2-131

14

14

—

—

14

V4-T2-131

25

—

—

14

—

V4-T2-131

277

480

600

125

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

F-Frame

2

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)

Circuit Breaker Type

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

No. of Poles

AC

DC

EDB

100–225

2, 3

240

EDS

100–225

2, 3

240

ED

15–225

2, 3

240

EDH

100–225

2, 3

240

125

EDC

100–225

2, 3

240

125

EHD

15–100

1

277

125

N.I.T.U.

13a

—

—

—

14

—

—

EHD

15–100

2, 3

480

250

N.I.T.U.

13b

—

—

18

—

14

—

FDB

15–150

2, 3

600

250

N.I.T.U.

18a

—

—

18

—

14

14

—

—

18

—

14

—

—

—

35

—

Volts Type of Trip 1

Federal Specification W-C-375b

AC (kA) 120

120/240

240

277

480

600

125

250

Page Number

125

N.I.T.U.

—

—

—

22

—

—

—

10

—

V4-T2-135

125

N.I.T.U.

—

—

—

42

—

—

—

10

—

V4-T2-135

125

N.I.T.U.

12b

—

—

65

—

—

—

10

—

V4-T2-135

N.I.T.U.

14b

—

—

100

—

—

—

10

—

V4-T2-135

N.I.T.U.

1

—

—

200

—

—

—

10

—

V4-T2-135

10

—

V4-T2-135

—

10

V4-T2-135

—

10

V4-T2-135

14

—

10

V4-T2-135

—

10

—

V4-T2-135

FDB

15–150

4

600

250

N.I.T.U.

3

FD

15–150

1

277

125

N.I.T.U.

13a

DC (kA)

2

FD

15–225

2, 3

600

250

N.I.T.U.

22a

—

—

65

—

35

18

—

10

V4-T2-135

FD

15–225

4

600

250

N.I.T.U.

3

—

—

65

—

35

18

—

10

V4-T2-135

FDE

15–225

3

600

—

N.I.T.U.

—

—

—

65

—

35

18

—

—

V4-T2-135

HFD

15–150

1

277

125

N.I.T.U.

13a

—

—

—

65

—

—

10

—

V4-T2-135

HFD

15–225

2,3

600

250

N.I.T.U.

22a

—

—

100

—

65

25

—

22

V4-T2-135

HFD

15–225

4

600

250

N.I.T.U.

3

—

—

100

—

65

25

—

22

V4-T2-135

—

—

—

100

—

65

25

—

—

V4-T2-135

HFDE

15–225

3

600

—

N.I.T.U.

4

15–225

2, 3

600

250

N.I.T.U.

24a

—

—

200

—

100

35

—

22

V4-T2-135

FDC 4

15–225

4

600

250

N.I.T.U.

3

—

—

200

—

100

35

—

22

V4-T2-135

FDCE 45

15–225

3

600

—

N.I.T.U.

—

—

—

200

—

100

25

—

—

V4-T2-135

FDC

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 N.I.T.U. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T.U. is interchangeable trip unit. 2 Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 250 Vdc. 3 Not defined in W-C-375b. 4 Current limiting. 5 Check with Eaton for availability.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-119

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2

J-Frame

2

Circuit Breaker Type

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

2

JDB

70–250

2, 3

2

JD

70–250

2, 3, 4

HJD

70–250

2, 3, 4

2

JDC 3

70–250

2, 3, 4

2 2

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)

Volts No. of Poles

Federal Specification W-C-375b

DC

Type of Trip 1

600

250

N.I.T.U.

22a

—

600

250

I.T.U.

22a

—

600

250

I.T.U.

22a

—

600

250

I.T.U.

22a

—

Federal Specification W-C-375b

AC (kA) 120

120/240

240

277

480

600

125

250

Page Number

AC

DC (kA) 2

AC (kA) 120

240

277

480

600

125

250

Page Number

—

65

—

35

18

—

10

V4-T2-156

—

65

—

35

18

—

10

V4-T2-155

—

100

—

65

25

—

22

V4-T2-155

—

200

—

100

35

—

22

V4-T2-155

120/240

K-Frame Circuit Breaker Type

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

No. of Poles

AC

DC

Type of Trip 1

2

DK

250–400

2, 3

240

250

N.I.T.U.

14b

—

—

65

—

—

—

—

10

V4-T2-167

KDB

100–400

2, 3

600

250

N.I.T.U.

23a

—

—

65

—

35

25

—

10

V4-T2-167

2

KD

100–400

2, 3, 4

600

250

I.T.U.

23a

—

—

65

—

35

25

—

10

V4-T2-164, V4-T2-165, V4-T2-169, V4-T2-172

2

CKD

100–400

2, 3, 4

600

250

I.T.U.

23a

—

—

65

—

35

25

—

—

V4-T2-166, V4-T2-175, V4-T2-177

2

HKD

100–400

2, 3, 4

600

250

I.T.U.

23a

—

—

100

—

65

35

—

22

V4-T2-164, V4-T2-165, V4-T2-169, V4-T2-172

2

CHKD

100–400

2, 3, 4

600

250

I.T.U.

23a

—

—

100

—

65

35

—

—

V4-T2-166, V4-T2-175, V4-T2-177

KDC 3

100–400

2, 3, 4

600

250

I.T.U.

23a

—

—

200

—

100

65

—

22

V4-T2-164, V4-T2-165, V4-T2-169, V4-T2-172

Federal Specification W-C-375b

AC (kA)

DC

Type of Trip 1

2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)

Volts

DC (kA) 2

L-Frame UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)

Circuit Breaker Type

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

LDB

300–600

2, 3

600

250

N.I.T.U.

23a

—

—

65

—

35

25

—

22

V4-T2-190

LD

300–600

2, 3, 4

600

250

I.T.U.

23a

—

—

65

—

35

25

—

22

V4-T2-188, V4-T2-189, V4-T2-194

Volts No. of Poles

AC

120

DC (kA) 2 120/240

240

277

480

600

125

250

Page Number

CLD

300–600

2, 3, 4

600

250

I.T.U.

23a

—

—

65

—

35

25

—

—

V4-T2-190, V4-T2-200

HLD

300–600

2, 3, 4

600

250

I.T.U.

23a

—

—

100

—

65

35

—

25

V4-T2-188, V4-T2-189, V4-T2-194

2

CHLD

300–600

2, 3, 4

600

250

I.T.U.

23a

—

—

100

—

65

35

—

—

V4-T2-190, V4-T2-200

LDC 3

300–600

2, 3, 4

600

250

I.T.U.

23a

—

—

200

—

100

50

—

30

2

V4-T2-188, V4-T2-189, V4-T2-196

CLDC 3

300–600

2, 3, 4

600

250

I.T.U.

23a

—

—

200

—

100

50

—

30

V4-T2-190, V4-T2-202

Federal Specification W-C-375b

AC (kA) 120

120/240

240

277

480

600

125

250

Page Number

23a

—

—

65

—

50

25

—

22

V4-T2-213, V4-T2-215

2 2

M-Frame

2

Circuit Breaker Type

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

No. of Poles

AC

DC

Type of Trip 1

MDL

300–800

2, 3

600

250

I.T.U.

2 2 2 2 2

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)

Volts

DC (kA) 2

CMDL

300–800

2, 3

600

250

I.T.U.

23a

—

—

65

—

50

25

—

—

V4-T2-215

HMDL

300–800

2, 3

600

250

I.T.U.

23a

—

—

100

—

65

35

—

25

V4-T2-213, V4-T2-215

CHMDL

300–800

2, 3

600

250

I.T.U.

23a

—

—

100

—

65

35

—

—

V4-T2-215

Notes 1 N.I.T.U. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T.U. is interchangeable trip unit. 2 Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 250 Vdc. 3 Current limiting.

V4-T2-120

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Molded Case Circuit Breaker Product Family

2.3

Contents Description Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module. . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page V4-T2-116 V4-T2-117 V4-T2-118 V4-T2-122 V4-T2-122 V4-T2-135 V4-T2-153 V4-T2-161 V4-T2-185 V4-T2-211 V4-T2-222 V4-T2-237 V4-T2-256 V4-T2-267 V4-T2-269 V4-T2-270 V4-T2-273 V4-T2-304

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

G-Frame (15–100 Amperes)

2

Product Description

2

●

●

●

●

All two- and three-pole circuit breakers are of the common trip type. On all three-phase delta (240 V) Grounded B phase applications, refer to Eaton Single-pole circuit breakers, 15 and 20 amperes. Switching duty rated (SWD) for fluorescent lighting applications All G-Frame circuit breakers are suitable for reverse feed use HACR rated

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-121

2.3 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Catalog Number Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. Circuit Breaker/Frame

GD 3 100 K

2 2

Circuit Breaker Type GD HGHB GDB HGHC GHB GHBGFEP GHC GHCGFEP GHQ

2 2 2 2 2 2

Suffix Number of Poles 1 = 1 pole 2 = 2 poles 3 = 3 poles

Trip Amperes 035 040 045 050 060

015 020 024 030

K D C V

070 080 090 100

= Molded case switch = Ring type terminals = Steel collars = 122 °F (50 °C)

J01= Fungus proofed R01= Shock tested F01= Freeze tester HID= High intensity discharge 1

Technical Data and Specifications

UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes) Circuit Breaker Type

Number of Poles

Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 120

240

277

480

480Y/277

125

250 23

GDB

2, 3

—

—

—

14

—

—

10

2

GD

2

—

65

—

14

—

—

10

GD

3

—

65

—

22

—

—

10

2

GHQ

—

65

—

14

—

—

—

—

2

GHB

1

65

—

14

—

—

14

—

GHB

2, 3

—

65

—

—

14

14

—

2

HGHB

1

65

—

25

—

—

14

—

GHC

1

65

—

14

—

—

14

—

GHC

2, 3

—

65

—

—

14

14

—

HGHC

1

65

—

25

—

—

14

—

2

2 2 2

Volts DC

Terminal Types For line and load-side. Terminals are UL listed as suitable for wire type and size given below.

2

Terminal Types

2

Standard

Circuit Breaker Amperes

Terminal Type Material

Screw Head Type

Wire Type

AWG Wire Range

Metric Wire Range (mm2) 4

2

15–20

Clamp (plated steel)

Slotted

Cu/Al

14–10

2.5–4

25–100

Pressure (aluminum body)

Slotted

Cu/Al

10–1/0

4–50

2

Optional—GD Only Pressure (steel body)

Slotted

Cu

14–3

—

2 2 2

15–100

Notes 1 HID suffix only applies to the GHB and GHC single-pole, 15–20 A circuit breakers. 2 Time constant is 8 milliseconds minimum. 3 Two poles of three-pole circuit breaker. 4 Not UL listed sizes.

2 2 2 2 V4-T2-122

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Contents

Typical G-Frame Circuit Breaker

Description Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page V4-T2-116 V4-T2-117 V4-T2-118 V4-T2-121 V4-T2-135 V4-T2-153 V4-T2-161 V4-T2-185 V4-T2-211 V4-T2-222 V4-T2-237 V4-T2-256 V4-T2-267 V4-T2-269 V4-T2-270 V4-T2-273 V4-T2-304

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Type GD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units (15–100 Amperes)

2

Product Description

2

● ●

Standards and Certifications

Cable in, cable out Includes mounting hardware and BMHE

●

UL/CSA

2 2 2

Product Selection

2 Type GD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 480 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Includes Line and Load Terminals

Includes Binding Head Screws and Clamps 10–32 x 0.312

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Three-Pole

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

15

GD2015

GD3015

GD3015D

20

GD2020

GD3020

GD3020D

25

GD2025

GD3025

GD3025D

30

GD2030

GD3030

GD3030D

35

GD2035

GD3035

GD3035D

40

GD2040

GD3040

GD3040D

45

GD2045

GD3045

GD3045D

50

GD2050

GD3050

GD3050D

60

—

GD3060

GD3060D

70

—

GD3070

GD3070D

80

—

GD3080

GD3080D

90

—

GD3090

GD3090D

100

—

GD3100

GD3100D

14 kAIC at 480 Vac Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

22 kAIC at 480 Vac

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-123

2.3 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Type GDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 480 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc 14 kAIC at 480 Vac Includes Line and Load Terminals

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

15

GDB2015

GDB3015

20

GDB2020

GDB3020

25

GDB2025

GDB3025

30

GDB2030

GDB3030

2

35

GDB2035

GDB3035

40

GDB2040

GDB3040

2

45

GDB2045

GDB3045

50

GDB2050

GDB3050

2

60

—

GDB3060

2

70

—

GDB3070

80

—

GDB3080

90

—

GDB3090

100

—

GDB3100

2 2 2

2 2

Type GD Molded Case Switches

2

Type GD Molded Case Switches—Three-Pole

2 2 2 2

480 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Catalog Number (Includes Line and Load Terminals)

60

GD3060K

60

GD3060KC 1

100

GD3100K

100

GD3100KD 2

2

Notes 1 Includes line and load steel terminals. 2 Includes binding head screws and clamps 10–32 x 0.312.

2

Molded case switches may open above 1300 amperes.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-124

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Dimensions

2

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2

GD-Frame, Three-Pole Front View

2

Side View

2 2 2 2 2

4.88 (123.8)

2

Off

2 2 2 3.00 (76.2)

2

2.63 (66.7)

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-125

2.3 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Contents

Typical GHB

Description

2

Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Types GHB and HGHB Bolt-On Panelboard Circuit Breakers (15–100 Amperes)

2

Standards and Certifications

2 2 2

These breakers meet the requirements of Federal Specification W-C-375b as follows: ●

Type GHB, 120 and 240 V: ● Single-pole: Class 11a ● Two-, three-pole: Classes 10b, 11b, 12b, 14b, 15b ● UL/CSA

●

Type GHB, 277 and 480Y/277V: ● Single-pole: Classes 12c, 13a ● Two-, three-pole: Class 13b ● Type HGHB 277V ● Type GHQ 277V

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

V4-T2-126

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Page V4-T2-116 V4-T2-117 V4-T2-118 V4-T2-121 V4-T2-135 V4-T2-153 V4-T2-161 V4-T2-185 V4-T2-211 V4-T2-222 V4-T2-237 V4-T2-256 V4-T2-267 V4-T2-269 V4-T2-270 V4-T2-273 V4-T2-304

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Product Selection

Typical GHB

2 2

Type GHB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 1 277/480 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc Maximum 2

277/480 Vac Maximum, 125/250 Vdc Maximum

2

277/480 Vac Maximum, 125/250 Vdc Maximum 3

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Single-Pole

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

15

GHB1015 45

GHB2015 4

GHB3015 4

20

GHB1020 45

GHB2020 4

GHB3020 4

25

GHB1025

GHB2025

GHB3025

30

GHB1030

GHB2030

GHB3030

35

GHB1035

GHB2035

GHB3035

40

GHB1040

GHB2040

GHB3040

45

GHB1045

GHB2045

GHB3045

50

GHB1050

GHB2050

GHB3050

60

GHB1060

GHB2060

GHB3060

70

GHB1070

GHB2070

GHB3070

80

GHB1080

GHB2080

GHB3080

90

GHB1090

GHB2090

GHB3090

100

GHB1100

GHB2100

GHB3100

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Type HGHB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units

2

277 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Single-Pole

15

HGHB1015 6

20

HGHB1020 6

25

HGHB1025

30

HGHB1030

2

Catalog Number

2 2 2

Notes 1 480Y/277 V, circuit breakers (Type GHB) not suitable for three-phase delta (480 V). 2 15 through 70 ampere circuit breakers only. 3 Use two outside poles. 4 Uses 0.190 (4.83) –32 screw type clamp terminals. 5 Add suffix HID for High Intensity Discharge (HID) applications. 15 and 20 ampere, single-pole are SWD rated. 6 15 and 20 ampere, single-pole are SWD rated.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-127

2.3 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) GDB-Frame, Three-Pole Front View

2

Side View

2 2 2 2

4.00 (101.6)

2 2 2 2

3.00 (76.2) Max.

2

2.63 (66.7)

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-128

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Contents

Single-Phase (requires two poles)

Description Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page V4-T2-116 V4-T2-117 V4-T2-118 V4-T2-121 V4-T2-135 V4-T2-153 V4-T2-161 V4-T2-185 V4-T2-211 V4-T2-222 V4-T2-237 V4-T2-256 V4-T2-267 V4-T2-269 V4-T2-270 V4-T2-273 V4-T2-304

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Type GHBGFEP Bolt-On Panelboard 30 mA Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors (15–100 Amperes)

2

Product Description

2

●

●

Standards and Certifications

15–60 amperes, 277 V, 50/60 Hz Operational voltage 240 V to 305 V

These circuit breakers meet the requirements of UL 489 and UL 1053.

2 2 2 2

Product Selection

2

Type GHBGFEP Bolt-On Panelboard 30 mA Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units

2

Single-Phase (Requires Two Poles) 277 Vac, 30 mA

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

2

Catalog Number

15

GHBGFEP1015

20

GHBGFEP1020

30

GHBGFEP1030

40

GHBGFEP1040

50

GHBGFEP1050

60

GHBGFEP1060

2 2 2 2 2

Technical Data and Specifications

2

Interrupting Capacity Ratings Circuit Breaker Type

Number of Poles

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)

GHBGFEP

1

14,000

2

277 Vac (50/60 Hz)

2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-129

2.3 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) GHB-Frame, Three-Pole Front View

2

Side View

2 2 2 2

4.00 (101.6)

2 2 2 2

3.00 (76.2)

2.63 (66.7)

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-130

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Contents

Typical GHC

Description Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page V4-T2-116 V4-T2-117 V4-T2-118 V4-T2-121 V4-T2-135 V4-T2-153 V4-T2-161 V4-T2-185 V4-T2-211 V4-T2-222 V4-T2-237 V4-T2-256 V4-T2-267 V4-T2-269 V4-T2-270 V4-T2-273 V4-T2-304

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Types GHC and HGHC Circuit Breakers (15–100 Amperes)

2

Product Description

2

● ●

●

● ●

15–100 amperes 120, 240, 277, 480Y/277V, 50/60 Hz, 125, 125/250 Vdc Single-, two- and three-pole Cable in, cable out Does not include mounting hardware

Standards and Certifications These breakers meet the requirements of Federal Specification W-C-37b as follows: ●

2 2

Type GHC, 277 and 480Y/ 277V: ● Single-pole: Classes 12c, 13a ● Two-, three-pole: Class 13b ● UL/CSA

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-131

2.3 2 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Product Selection

Type GHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 277 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc Maximum 1

480Y/277 Vac Maximum, 125/250 Vdc Maximum

480Y/277 Vac Maximum, 125/250 Vdc Maximum 2

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Single-Pole

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

15

GHC1015 34

GHC2015 3

GHC3015 3

20

GHC1020 34

GHC2020 3

GHC3020 3

2

25

GHC1025

GHC2025

GHC3025

30

GHC1030

GHC2030

GHC3030

2

35

GHC1035

GHC2035

GHC3035

2

40

GHC1040

GHC2040

GHC3040

45

GHC1045

GHC2045

GHC3045

2

50

GHC1050

GHC2050

GHC3050

60

GHC1060

GHC2060

GHC3060

2

70

GHC1070

GHC2070

GHC3070

80

GHC1080

GHC2080

GHC3080

90

GHC1090

GHC2090

GHC3090

100

GHC1100

GHC2100

GHC3100

2

2 2 2 2

Type HGHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 277 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc Maximum

2

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Single-Pole

2

15

HGHC1015 5

2

20

HGHC1020 5

25

HGHC1025

2

30

HGHC1030

2 2 2

Catalog Number

Notes 1 15 through 70 ampere circuit breakers only. 2 Use two outside poles. 3 Uses 0.190–32 screw type clamp terminals. 4 Add suffix HID for High Intensity Discharge (HID) applications. 15 and 20 ampere, single-pole are SWD rated. 5 15 and 20 ampere, single-pole are SWD rated.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-132

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Contents

Single-Phase (requires two-pole spaces)

Description Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page V4-T2-116 V4-T2-117 V4-T2-118 V4-T2-121 V4-T2-135 V4-T2-153 V4-T2-161 V4-T2-185 V4-T2-211 V4-T2-222 V4-T2-237 V4-T2-256 V4-T2-267 V4-T2-269 V4-T2-270 V4-T2-273 V4-T2-304

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Type GHCGFEP Cable-In/Cable-Out 30 mA Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors (15–100 Amperes)

2

Product Description

2

●

●

Standards and Certifications

15–60 amperes, 277 V, 50/60 Hz Operational voltage 240–305 V

These circuit breakers meet the requirements of UL 489 and UL 1053.

2 2 2

Product Selection

2

Type GHCGFEP 30 mA Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units

2 2

Single-Phase (Requires Two Poles) 277V, 30 mA

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Catalog Number

2

15

GHCGFEP1015

20

GHCGFEP1020

2

30

GHCGFEP1030

40

GHCGFEP1040

50

GHCGFEP1050

60

GHCGFEP1060

2 2 2

Technical Data and Specifications

2

Interrupting Capacity Ratings

2

Circuit Breaker Type

Number of Poles

GHCGFEP

1

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)

2

277 Vac (50/60 Hz)

2

14,000

2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-133

2.3 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Contents

Special Purpose Circuit Breakers

Description

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Special Purpose GHC Circuit Breakers (15–100 Amperes)

2

Product Description

2 2 2

Page

Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Eaton’s Type GHC circuit breakers have binding head screw-type terminals on line and load side. These circuit breakers with screw-type terminals (0.190–32) will be marked “Special purpose breaker not for general use.” To order this special breaker, use the catalog number from the tables on this page.

Product Selection Type GHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 277 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc Maximum

480Y/277 Vac Maximum, 125/250 Vdc Maximum

480Y/277 Vac Maximum, 125/250 Vdc Maximum 1

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Single-Pole

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

25

GHC1025D

GHC2025D

GHC3025D

30

GHC1030D

GHC2030D

GHC3030D

35

GHC1035D

GHC2035D

GHC3035D

40

GHC1040D

GHC2040D

GHC3040D

2

45

GHC1045D

GHC2045D

GHC3045D

50

GHC1050D

GHC2050D

GHC3050D

2

60

GHC1060D

GHC2060D

GHC3060D

70

GHC1070D

GHC2070D

GHC3070D

2

80

GHC1080D

GHC2080D

GHC3080D

2

90

GHC1090D

GHC2090D

GHC3090D

100

GHC1100D

GHC2100D

GHC3100D

2 2 2

2

V4-T2-116 V4-T2-117 V4-T2-118 V4-T2-121 V4-T2-135 V4-T2-153 V4-T2-161 V4-T2-185 V4-T2-211 V4-T2-222 V4-T2-237 V4-T2-256 V4-T2-267 V4-T2-269 V4-T2-270 V4-T2-273 V4-T2-304

Type GHB and GHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units for HID Lighting Applications

2

277 Vac Maximum

2 2

Type Cable-in

2

Bolt-on

2 2

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Single-Pole

15

GHC1015HID

20

GHC1020HID

15

GHB1015HID

20

GHB1020HID

Note 1 Use two outside poles.

2 V4-T2-134

Catalog Number

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Typical F-Frame Breaker F-Frame Breaker with Electronic Trip Unit

2.3

Contents Description Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module. . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page V4-T2-116 V4-T2-117 V4-T2-118 V4-T2-121 V4-T2-136 V4-T2-138 V4-T2-149 V4-T2-150 V4-T2-152 V4-T2-153 V4-T2-161 V4-T2-185 V4-T2-211 V4-T2-222 V4-T2-237 V4-T2-256 V4-T2-267 V4-T2-269 V4-T2-270 V4-T2-273 V4-T2-304

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

F-Frame (10–225 Amperes)

2

Product Description

2

●

●

●

All Eaton’s F-Frame circuit breakers are HACR rated All circuit breakers 10 through 30 amperes are suitable for HID (high intensity discharge) use All F-Frame circuit breakers are suitable for reverse feed use

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-135

2.3 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Catalog Number Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.

2

FD-Frame Circuit Breakers with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Technology

2

FDC 3 100 L

2

Circuit Breaker Type EHD FDB FD HFD FDC

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Number of Poles 1 = 1 pole 2 = 2 poles 3 = 3 poles 4 = 4 poles

Trip Amperes 010 015 020 025 030 035 040 045 050 060 070 080 090 100 110 125 150 175 (FD, HFD, FDC, two-, three-, four-pole only) 200 (FD, HFD, FDC, two-, three-, four-pole only) 225 (FD, HFD, FDC, two-, three-, four-pole only)

2

Suffix E = 100% protected (four-pole only) neutral pole EH = 50% protected (four-pole only) K = High magnetic molded case switch L = Line and load terminals S = Stainless steel terminals V = 50 °C calibration W = Without terminals Y = Line terminals only Z = Aluminum terminals (≤100 amperes)

EDC 3 200 L

2 2

Circuit Breaker Type EDB EDS ED EDH EDC

2 2 2

Number of Poles 2 = 2 poles 3 = 3 poles

Trip Amperes 100 125 150 175 200 225

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-136

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Suffix L = Line and load terminals W = Without terminals Y = Line terminals only Z = Aluminum terminals (100 amperes)

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.

2

FD-Frame Circuit Breakers with 210+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology

2 2

HFDE 3 225 22 L Performance at 480 Vac FDE = 35 kAIC HFDE = 65 kAIC FDCE = 100 kAIC

Number of Poles 3 = 3 poles

Trip Units 100 150 225

Trip Unit 21 = 210+ LI 22 = 210+ LSI

2

Features W = Without terminals L = Line and load terminals Blank = Load side terminals only

2 2 2 2

FD-Frame Circuit Breakers with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology

HFDE 3 225 32 ZG W Performance at 480 Vac FDE = 35 kAIC HFDE = 65 kAIC FDCE = 100 kAIC

Number of Poles 3 = 3 poles

Trip Units 080 160 225

Trip Unit 32 = 310+ LSI 33 = 310+ LS 35 = 310+ LSG 36 = 310+ LSIG

Trip Unit Features ZG = Zone selective interlocking Blank = No option

2 2

Features W = Without terminals L = Line and load terminals Blank = Load side terminals only

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-137

2.3 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Product Selection

Type ED Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed 240 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc (Includes Terminals on Load End Only)

2

65 kAIC at 240 Vac Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

15

ED2015

ED3015

2

20

ED2020

ED3020

25

ED2025

ED3025

2

30

ED2030

ED3030

35

ED2035

ED3035

2

40

ED2040

ED3040

2

50

ED2050

ED3050

60

ED2060

ED3060

2

100

ED2100

ED3100

125

ED2125

ED3125

2

150

ED2150

ED3150

175

ED2175

ED3175

2

200

ED2200

ED3200

225

ED2225

ED3225

2 2

2 2 2

Type EDH Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed 240 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc (Includes Terminals on Load End Only)

2

100 kAIC at 240 Vac Two-Pole

Three-Pole

2

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

15

—

—

2

20

—

—

25

—

—

2

30

—

—

35

—

—

2

40

—

—

50

—

—

2

60

—

—

2

100

EDH2100

EDH3100

125

EDH2125

EDH3125

2

150

EDH2150

EDH3150

175

EDH2175

EDH3175

2

200

EDH2200

EDH3200

225

EDH2225

EDH3225

2 2 2 2

V4-T2-138

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Type EDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed

2

240 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc (Includes Terminals on Load End Only)

2

200 kAIC at 240 Vac Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

15

—

—

20

—

—

25

—

—

30

—

—

35

—

—

40

—

—

50

—

—

60

—

—

100

EDC2100

EDC3100

125

EDC2125

EDC3125

150

EDC2150

EDC3150

175

EDC2175

EDC3175

200

EDC2200

EDC3200

225

EDC2225

EDC3225

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Type EDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed

2

240 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc (Includes Terminals on Load End Only)

2

22 kAIC at 240 Vac Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

100

EDB2100

EDB3100

110

EDB2110

EDB3110

125

EDB2125

EDB3125

150

EDB2150

EDB3150

175

EDB2175

EDB3175

200

EDB2200

EDB3200

225

EDB2225

EDB3225

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-139

2.3 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Type EDS Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed

2

240 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc (Includes Terminals on Load End Only)

2

42 kAIC at 240 Vac Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

100

EDS2100

EDS3100

110

EDS2110

EDS3110

2

125

EDS2125

EDS3125

150

EDS2150

EDS3150

2

175

EDS2175

EDS3175

2

200

EDS2200

EDS3200

225

EDS2225

EDS3225

2 2

2 2

Type EHD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) 277 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc

2

480 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc

14 kAIC at 277 Vac

14 kAIC at 480 Vac

Single-Pole

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

10 1

EHD1010

EHD2010

EHD3010

2

15

EHD1015 2

EHD2015

EHD3015

20

EHD1020 2

EHD2020

EHD3020

2

25

EHD1025

EHD2025

EHD3025

30

EHD1030

EHD2030

EHD3030

2

35

EHD1035

EHD2035

EHD3035

2

40

EHD1040

EHD2040

EHD3040

45

EHD1045

EHD2045

EHD3045

2

50

EHD1050

EHD2050

EHD3050

60

EHD1060

EHD2060

EHD3060

2

70

EHD1070

EHD2070

EHD3070

80

EHD1080

EHD2080

EHD3080

90

EHD1090

EHD2090

EHD3090

100

EHD1100

EHD2100

EHD3100

2

2 2 2

Notes 1 Not UL listed. 5 kAIC interrupting rating. 2 UL listed for SWD applications, see NEC Article 240.83(d).

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-140

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Type FDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units (Includes Terminals on Load End Only)

2

600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc

2

14 kAIC at 600 Vac Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Four-Pole

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

10 1

FDB2010

FDB3010

FDB4010

15

FDB2015

FDB3015

FDB4015

20

FDB2020

FDB3020

FDB4020

25

FDB2025

FDB3025

FDB4025

30

FDB2030

FDB3030

FDB4030

35

FDB2035

FDB3035

FDB4035

40

FDB2040

FDB3040

FDB4040

45

FDB2045

FDB3045

FDB4045

50

FDB2050

FDB3050

FDB4050

60

FDB2060

FDB3060

FDB4060

70

FDB2070

FDB3070

FDB4070

80

FDB2080

FDB3080

FDB4080

90

FDB2090

FDB3090

FDB4090

100

FDB2100

FDB3100

FDB4100

110

FDB2110

FDB3110

FDB4110

125

FDB2125

FDB3125

FDB4125

150

FDB2150

FDB3150

FDB4150

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Not UL listed. 5 kAIC interrupting rating. 2 UL listed for SWD applications, see NEC Article 240.83(d).

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-141

2.3 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Type FD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units (Includes Terminals on Load End Only)

2

277 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc

600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc

35 kAIC at 277 Vac

35 kAIC at 480 Vac

Single-Pole

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Four-Pole

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

10 1

FD1010

—

—

—

15

FD1015 2

FD2015

FD3015

FD4015

20

FD1020 2

FD2020

FD3020

FD4020

2

25

FD1025

FD2025

FD3025

FD4025

2

30

FD1030

FD2030

FD3030

FD4030

35

FD1035

FD2035

FD3035

FD4035

2

40

FD1040

FD2040

FD3040

FD4040

45

FD1045

FD2045

FD3045

FD4045

2

50

FD1050

FD2050

FD3050

FD4050

60

FD1060

FD2060

FD3060

FD4060

2

70

FD1070

FD2070

FD3070

FD4070

2

80

FD1080

FD2080

FD3080

FD4080

90

FD1090

FD2090

FD3090

FD4090

2

100

FD1100

FD2100

FD3100

FD4100

110

FD1110

FD2110

FD3110

FD4110

2

125

FD1125

FD2125

FD3125

FD4125

2

150

FD1150

FD2150

FD3150

FD4150

175

—

FD2175

FD3175

FD4175

2

200

—

FD2200

FD3200

FD4200

225

—

FD2225

FD3225

FD4225

2

Notes 1 Not UL listed. 5 kAIC interrupting rating. 2 UL listed for SWD applications, see NEC Article 240.83(d).

2 2 2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

V4-T2-142

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Type HFD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) 277 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc

600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc

65 kAIC at 277 Vac

65 kAIC at 480 Vac

Single-Pole

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Four-Pole

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

15

HFD1015 1

HFD2015

HFD3015

HFD4015

20

HFD1020

1

HFD2020

HFD3020

HFD4020

25

HFD1025

HFD2025

HFD3025

HFD4025

30

HFD1030

HFD2030

HFD3030

HFD4030

35

HFD1035

HFD2035

HFD3035

HFD4035

40

HFD1040

HFD2040

HFD3040

HFD4040

45

HFD1045

HFD2045

HFD3045

HFD4045

50

HFD1050

HFD2050

HFD3050

HFD4050

60

HFD1060

HFD2060

HFD3060

HFD4060

70

HFD1070

HFD2070

HFD3070

HFD4070

80

HFD1080

HFD2080

HFD3080

HFD4080

90

HFD1090

HFD2090

HFD3090

HFD4090

100

HFD1100

HFD2100

HFD3100

HFD4100

110

HFD1110

HFD2110

HFD3110

HFD4110

125

HFD1125

HFD2125

HFD3125

HFD4125

150

HFD1150

HFD2150

HFD3150

HFD4150

175

—

HFD2175

HFD3175

HFD4175

200

—

HFD2200

HFD3200

HFD4200

225

—

HFD2225

HFD3225

HFD4225

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Note 1 UL listed for SWD applications, see NEC Article 240.83(d).

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-143

2.3 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Type FDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units (Includes Terminals on Load End Only)

2

600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc 100 kAIC at 480 Vac Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Four-Pole

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

15

FDC2015

FDC3015

FDC4015

20

FDC2020

FDC3020

FDC4020

25

FDC2025

FDC3025

FDC4025

2

30

FDC2030

FDC3030

FDC4030

2

35

FDC2035

FDC3035

FDC4035

40

FDC2040

FDC3040

FDC4040

2

45

FDC2045

FDC3045

FDC4045

50

FDC2050

FDC3050

FDC4050

2

60

FDC2060

FDC3060

FDC4060

70

FDC2070

FDC3070

FDC4070

2

80

FDC2080

FDC3080

FDC4080

2

90

FDC2090

FDC3090

FDC4090

100

FDC2100

FDC3100

FDC4100

2

110

FDC2110

FDC3110

FDC4110

125

FDC2125

FDC3125

FDC4125

2

150

FDC215

FDC3150

FDC4150

2

175

FDC2175

FDC3175

FDC4175

200

FDC2200

FDC3200

FDC4200

225

FDC2225

FDC3225

FDC4225

2 2 2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

V4-T2-144

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Types FDE, HFDE and FDCE 310+ Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-151.

2 2

Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only

Maximum Ampere Rating

Standard LS

Optional LSI

LSG

LSIG

Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I2t Short Delay Ramp

Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay

Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I2t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection

Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Ground Fault Protection

Catalog Number

2

Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG

2

Catalog Number

2

35 kAIC at 480 Vac / 18 kAIC at 600 Vac

2

80

FDE308033

FDE308032

FDE308035

FDE308036

CTF080

160

FDE316033

FDE316032

FDE316035

FDE316036

CTF160

225

FDE322533

FDE322532

FDE322535

FDE322536

CTF225

2 2

65 kAIC at 480 Vac / 25 kAIC at 600 Vac 80

HFDE308033

HFDE308032

HFDE308035

HFDE308036

CTF080

160

HFDE316033

HFDE316032

HFDE316035

HFDE316036

CTF160

225

HFDE322533

HFDE322532

HFDE322535

HFDE322536

CTF225

2 2

100 kAIC at 480 Vac / 25 kAIC at 600 Vac 80

FDCE308033

FDCE308032

FDCE308035

FDCE308036

CTF080

160

FDCE316033

FDCE316032

FDCE316035

FDCE316036

CTF160

225

FDCE322533

FDCE322532

FDCE322535

FDCE322536

CTF225

Types FDE, HFDE, and FDCE 210+ Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Digitrip RMS 210+ Trip Unit Only

Maximum Ampere Rating

100

2

FDE 310+ Electronic Breaker with Zone Selective Interlocking Ampere Rating

LSI w/ZSI

LSIG w/ZSI

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Standard

Optional

LI Adjustable Instantaneous

LSI Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay

35 kAIC at 480 Vac / 18 kAIC at 600 Vac 80

FDE308032ZG

FDE308036ZG

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

160

FDE316032ZG

FDE316036ZG

225

FDE322532ZG

FDE322536ZG

35 kAIC at 480 Vac / 18 kAIC at 600 Vac

2 2 2 2 2 2

65 kAIC at 480 Vac / 25 kAIC at 600 Vac

FDE310021

FDE310022

150

FDE315021

1

225

FDE322521

FDE322522

65 kAIC at 480 Vac / 25 kAIC at 600 Vac

80

HFDE308032ZG

HFDE308036ZG

160

HFDE316032ZG

HFDE316036ZG

225

HFDE322532ZG

HFDE322536ZG

2 2

100 kAIC at 480 Vac / 25 kAIC at 600 Vac

100

HFDE310021

HFDE310022

150

HFDE315021

1

225

HFDE322521

HFDE322522

80

FDCE308032ZG

FDCE308036ZG

160

FDCE316032ZG

FDCE316036ZG

225

FDCE322532ZG

FDCE322536ZG

2 2

100 kAIC at 480 Vac / 25 kAIC at 600 Vac 2

Digitrip 310+ Electronic Trip Units Amperage Settings

2

Circuit Breaker Type

Frame

Ratings

2

210+ Trip Electronic Trip Units Amperage Settings

FDE, HFDE, FDCE

225

100, 110, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 225

Circuit Breaker Type

FDE, HFDE, FDCE

160

60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125, 150, 160

FDE, HFDE, FDCE

80

15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80

Frame

Ratings

FDE, HFDE, FDCE

225

100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225

FDE, HFDE, FDCE

150

70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150

FDE, HFDE, FDCE

100

40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100

100

FDCE310021

FDCE310022

150

FDCE315021

1

225

FDCE322521

FDCE322522

2 2

Notes 1 For 210+ trip unit, 150 A not available with LSI trip unit; entire range is covered by 100 A and 225 A frames. 2 Contact the product line for availability.

2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-145

2.3 2 2 2 2 2

2

Series C

Molded Case Switches Eaton’s molded case switches are used as compact switches in applications requiring high current switching capabilities. Molded case switches are constructed of circuit breaker

components and are of the high instantaneous automatic type. Molded case switches are listed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 489.

Molded Case Switches

2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Complete Circuit Breaker with Load Side Terminals Only Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

480 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc

600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Two-Pole

2

100

EHD2100K

FD2100K

HFD2100K

2

150

—

FD2150K

HFD2150K

225

—

FD2225K

HFD2225K

2

Three-Pole 100

EHD3100K

FD3100K

HFD3100K

2

150

—

FD3150K

HFD3150K

225

—

FD3225K

HFD3225K

HFD4100K

2

Four-Pole

2

100

—

FD4100K

150

—

FD4150K

HFD4150K

225

—

FD4225K

HFD4225K

2 2

Note Molded case switches will open above 1800 amperes.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-146

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information

2

Line and Load Terminals Line and load terminals provide wire connecting capabilities for specific ranges of continuous current ratings and wire types. Except as noted, terminals comply with Underwriters Laboratories Standards UL 486A and UL 486B. Unless otherwise specified, F-Frame circuit breakers are factory equipped with load terminals only.

2

Ordering Information F-Frame circuit breakers and molded case switches have load terminals only as standard equipment. When standard line-end terminals (same as standard load-end terminals) are required, add Suffix L to the circuit breaker catalog number. When nonstandard or optional line and/ or load terminals are required, order by style number. Specify if factory installation is required.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes

Package of Three Terminals

2

Wire Type

AWG Wire Range

Metric Wire Range mm2

Catalog Number

2

Steel

Cu/AI

14–10

2.5–4

3T20FB 2

2

100

Steel

Cu/AI

14–1/0

2.5–50

3T100FB

225

Aluminum

Cu/AI

4–4/0

25–95

3TA225FD

Cu/AI

14–4

2.5–25

3TA50FB 2

Terminal Body Material

Standard Pressure Type Terminals 20 (EHD)

2 2

Optional Pressure Terminals 50

Aluminum

100

Aluminum

Cu/AI

14–1/0

2.5–50

3TA100FD

200

Stainless steel

Cu

4–4/0

25–95

3T150FB

225

Copper

Cu

4–4/0

25–95

3T225FD

225

Aluminum

Cu/AI

6–300 kcmil

16–150

3TA225FDK 3

2 2 2

Notes 1 Use on FDE, HFDE and FDCE electronic trip only. 2 Not for use with ED, EDH, EDC breakers. 3 Includes terminal shield kit. Adds approximately 3 inches (76.2) to breaker height. Available for use on three-pole breaker only.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-147

2.3 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Line and Load Terminals

2 Collar

2

Collar Nut

Screw

2 2 2 2

Clip Conductor

Washer

Conductor

Conductor Screw

Wire Clamp

Extrusion

3T20FB

3T100FB, 3T150FB

3TA225FD

Assemble wire clamp to bottom of conductor as shown.

Insert collar enclosing conductor as shown. Locate nut on top of conductor and tighten securely with screw and washer. Caution: Collar must surround conductor.

Insert collar enclosing conductor and center on extrusion on collar. Install clip with legs on top of conductor and snap end around bottom of collar.

2 2 2

Collar

2

Conductor Collar

2 2 2 2

Washer Conductor Screw

Washer Screw

3TA50FB

3TA100FD

3TA225FDK (Up to 150 mm2)

Assemble collar on top of conductor as shown. Tighten securely with screw and washer.

Collar slides onto conductor and is held in position by a screw and lockwasher.

Assemble collar on top of conductor as shown. Tighten securely with screw and washer. Terminal shield must be used with this collar. Note: For 185 mm2, use 3TA225FDK1.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-148

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Accessories

2

Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker.

2

Allowable Accessory Combinations

2

FD Frame Accessories Description

Reference Page

Single-Pole

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Center

Left

Left

Right

1

Center

Four-Pole Right

Left

Center

Right

Neutral

2

Internal Accessories (Only one internal accessory per pole) ■

Alarm lockout switch (make only)

V4-T2-275

Alarm lockout (Make/Break)

V4-T2-275

■

❏

❏

■

Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break)

V4-T2-275

■

❏

❏

■

Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B)

V4-T2-277

■

■

■

■

■

Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B)

V4-T2-277

■

■

■

■

■

Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination

V4-T2-279

■

❏

❏

■

Shunt trip—standard

V4-T2-281

■

■

■

■

Shunt trip—low energy

V4-T2-285

■

■

■

■

Undervoltage release mechanism

V4-T2-287

■

■

■

■

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

● ●

2

■

V4-T2-308

Keeper nut

V4-T2-308

●

2 2 2 2

External Accessories End cap kit

2

2

Control wire terminal kit

V4-T2-309

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Multiwire connectors

V4-T2-310

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Rear fed terminals

V4-T2-310

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Base mounting hardware

V4-T2-310

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Terminal shields

V4-T2-312

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Terminal end covers

V4-T2-313

●

●

●

2

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

●

●

Interphase barriers

V4-T2-313

Non-padlockable handle block

V4-T2-314

■

■

Snap-on padlockable handle lock hasp

V4-T2-314

■

■

Padlockable handle lock hasp

V4-T2-315

Cylinder lock

V4-T2-315

Key interlock kit

V4-T2-316

Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers

V4-T2-317

●

●

●

Walking beam interlock—requires two breakers

V4-T2-317

●

●

●

Electrical (solenoid and motor) operators

V4-T2-318

Plug-in adapters

V4-T2-319

●

■

■

■ ■

❏

■

❏

❏

❏

❏

❏

❏

2

■

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Rear connecting studs

V4-T2-321

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Panelboard connecting straps

V4-T2-322

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Handle mechanisms

V4-T2-430

●

●

●

LFD current limiter

V4-T2-324

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

2

■ ❏

2

2 2 2 2 2

IQ Energy Sentinel

V4-T2-324

Cause of trip display

V4-T2-325

●

●

Remote mount cause of trip display

V4-T2-325

●

●

Cause of trip LED

V4-T2-325

●

●

2 2

Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Special calibration

—

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Moisture fungus treatment

V4-T2-116

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Freeze-tested circuit breakers

—

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Marine/naval application

—

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Legend ■ Applicable in indicated pole position ❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both ● Accessory available/modification available

2 2 2 2 2

Note Internal accessories are listed with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) for factory installation. They are not listed with UL for field installation.

1

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2 V4-T2-149

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2

Technical Data and Specifications

2

UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)

2

Circuit Breaker Type

Number of Poles

Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 240

277

480

600

125

250 23

2

EDB

2, 3

22

—

—

—

10

—

EDS

2, 3

42

—

—

—

10

—

2

ED

2, 3

65

—

—

—

10

—

EDH

2, 3

100

—

—

—

10

—

2

EDC

2, 3

200

—

—

—

10

—

2

EHD

Volts DC 1

1

—

4

—

—

10

—

2, 3

18

—

14

—

—

10

FDB

2, 3, 4

18

—

14

14

—

10

2

FD

1

—

35

—

—

10

—

2, 3, 4

65

—

35

18

—

10

2

FDE 4

3

65

—

35

18

—

—

HFD

1

—

65

—

—

10

—

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

2, 3, 4

100

—

65

25

—

22

HFDE 4

3

100

—

65

25

—

—

FDC 5

2, 3, 4

200

—

100

35

—

22

FDCE 456

3

200

—

100

25

—

—

IEC 157-1 (P1) Interrupting Capacity Ratings (P1) Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes) Circuit Breaker Type

Volts DC 1

Volts AC (50/60 Hz)

Number of Poles

220, 240

380, 415

440

500

125

250 23

EDB

2, 3

22

—

—

—

10

—

EDS

2, 3

42

—

—

—

10

—

ED

2, 3

65

—

—

—

10

—

EDH

2, 3

100

—

—

—

10

—

EDC

2, 3

200

—

—

—

10

—

2

EHD

2

FDB

2, 3, 4

18

14

14

14

—

10

FD

1

35

—

—

—

10

—

1

—

14

—

—

10

—

2, 3

18

—

14

—

—

10

2

2, 3, 4

65

35

35

18

—

10

HFD

1

65

—

—

—

10

—

2

2, 3, 4

100

65

65

25

—

22

FDC

2, 3, 4

200

100

100

35

—

22

2

210+ and 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories

2

Description

210+

310+

Catalog number

Electronic portable test kit

■

■

MTST230V

Trip unit tamper protection wire seal

■

■

5108A03H01

2

External neutral sensor (80 A) 7

■

CTF080

2

External neutral sensor (160 A) 7

■

CTF160

External neutral sensor (225 A) 7

■

CTF225

2

2

Compact external neutral sensor (80

■

CTFD080

Compact external neutral sensor (160 A) 7

■

CTFD160

2

Compact external neutral sensor (225 A) 7

■

CTFD225

Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication

■

TRIP-LED

Breaker-mount ammeter module

■

DIGIVIEW

Remote-mount ammeter module

■

DIGIVIEWR06

2 2

A) 7

Notes 1 DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. 2 Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker. 3 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA. 4 Electronics available on three-pole only, no DC rating for FDE, HFDE, FDCE. 5 Current limiting. 6 Check with Eaton for availability. 7 Neutral sensor required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired; sold separately.

2 V4-T2-150

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

FDE 210+ and 310+ Specifications Description

FDE 310+ Adjustability Specifications

Digitrip RMS 210+

Digitrip RMS 310+

Frame designation

FD

FD

Frames available

100 A, 150 A, 225 A

80 A, 160 A, 225 A

Continuous current range (A)

40–225 A

15–225 A

Ground fault pickup (A)

N/A

16–225 A

Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kAIC)

35, 65, 100

35, 65, 100

Breaker type

310+ Settings

80 A

160 A

225 A

Ir = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes) Ir (All 310+) A

15

60

100

B

20

70

110

C

30

80

125

Protection Ordering options

LI, LSI

LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG

Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System™ (or Maintenance Mode)

No

No

Interchangeable trip unit

No

No

High load alarm (suffix B20)

No

No

No

No

Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B22)

No

No

Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG)

No

LSI, LSIG

Cause of trip indication

No

Yes

Thru-cover accessories

No

No

Test kit available

Yes

100 A

Ir = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes) (all 210+)

Ii (x In)= Instantaneous pickup (210+ LI version)

“Isd (x Ir) / tsd = SD profile (210+ LSI version)

225 A

A

40

70

100

B

50

80

110

C

60

90

125

D

70

100

150

E

80

110

175

F

90

125

200

G (= In)

100

150

225

Ii

100

150

225

J–2x

200

300

450

K–2.5x

250

375

565

L–3x

300

450

675

M–3.5x

350

525

790

N–4x

400

600

900

O–5x

500

750

1125

P–6x

600

900

1350

Q–8x

800

1200

1800

R–10x

1000

1500

2250

S–12x 1

1200

1800

2400

2400

2400

2400

150

100

160

F

60

125

175

G

70

150

200

160

225

2

2

2

Position 2

4

4

4

Position 3

7

7

7

Position 4

10

10

10

Position 5

12

12

12

Position 6

15

15

15

Position 7

20

20

20

Position 8

24

24

24

Position 1

2x

2x

2x

Position 2

3x

3x

3x

Position 3

4x

4x

4x

Position 4

5x

5x

5x

Position 5

6x

6x

6x

Position 6

7x

7x

7x

Position 7

8x

8x

8x

Position 8

10x

10x

10x

Position 9

12x

12x

12x

tsd (LS, LSG)

Fixed

67 at10x

67 at10x

67 at10x

tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds) (LSI, LSIG)

Position 1

Inst

Inst

Inst

Position 2

120

120

120

Position 3

300

300

300

Position 1

16

32

45

Position 2

24

48

67

Position 3

32

64

90

Position 4

48

96

135

Position 5

64

128

180

Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup (All 310+)

Ir

Fixed instantaneous override (all 210+) 2

150 A

90

50

80

Yes

FD Frame

40

E

H (= In)

FDE 210+ Adjustability Specifications 210+ settings

D

Position 1

tr = long delay time (seconds) (All 310+)

Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B21)

= short delay time I2t (milliseconds)

Ig = gound fault pickup (amperes) (LSG, LSIG)

tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds) (LSG, LSIG)

Position 6

80

160

225

Position 1

Inst

Inst

Inst

Position 2

120

120

120

Position 3

300

300

300

Isd / tsd

100

150

225

J

2x / 150

N/A

2x / 150

K

2x / 300

N/A

2x / 300

L

2x / I2t

N/A

2x / I2t

Independently Adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting

1

M

4x / Inst

N/A

4x / Inst

Maintenance Mode pickup (2.5 x In) (amperes)

2

N

4x / 150

N/A

4x / 150

O

4x / I2t

N/A

4x / I2t

P

6x / Inst

N/A

6x / Inst

Q

6x / 300

N/A

6x / 300

R

10x / 150

N/A

10x / 150

S

10x / 300

N/A

10x / 300

2

FD Frame

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Not available for FD. Independently adjustable I setting available in LG, NG and i RG ALSI and ALSIG trip units. 2 Maintenance Mode not available for FD frames. It is available for KD, LD, MDL, LG, NG and RG.

2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-151

2.3 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Dimensions and Weights Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) FD Frame

2

Number of Poles

Width

Height

Depth

2

1

1.38 (35.1)

6.00 (152.4)

3.38 (86.0)

2

2.75 (70.0)

6.00 (152.4)

3.38 (86.0)

3

4.13 (105.0)

6.00 (152.4)

3.38 (86.0)

4

5.50 (139.7)

6.00 (152.4)

3.38 (86.0)

2 2 2

FD Frame, Three-Pole Side View

Front View

2 2 2 On Off

2 2

6.00 (152.4)

2 2 2 2

3.38 (85.7)

4.13 (104.9)

2 2

Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)

2

FD Frame

2

Breaker Type

1

2

3

4

2

ED, EDB, EDS, EDH, EDC

—

3 (1.4)

4.5 (2.0)

—

2

EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC

2 (0.9)

3 (1.4)

4.5 (2.0)

6 (2.7)

FDE, HFDE, FDCE

—

—

4.5 (2.0)

—

Number of Poles

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-152

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Typical J-Frame Breaker

2.3

Contents Description Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module. . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page V4-T2-116 V4-T2-117 V4-T2-118 V4-T2-121 V4-T2-135 V4-T2-154 V4-T2-155 V4-T2-158 V4-T2-159 V4-T2-160 V4-T2-161 V4-T2-185 V4-T2-211 V4-T2-222 V4-T2-237 V4-T2-256 V4-T2-267 V4-T2-269 V4-T2-270 V4-T2-273 V4-T2-304

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

J-Frame (70–250 Amperes)

2

Product Description

2

●

●

●

All Eaton’s J-Frame circuit breakers are HACR rated J-Frame circuit breakers are available as individual components (frame, trip unit, terminals), or factory assembled complete breakers J-Frame circuit breakers with non-interchangeable trip units are suitable for reverse feed use

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-153

2.3 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Catalog Number Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. Circuit Breaker/Frame

2

JD 3 250 F

2

Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type JDB JD HJD JDC

2 2

Number of Poles 2 = 2 poles 3 = 3 poles 4 = 4 poles

2 2

Circuit Breaker/Frame Ampere Rating 070 090 100 125 150 175 200 225 250

Suffix C = Non-aluminum terminals F = Frame only K = High magnetic molded case switch V = 50 °C calibration W = Without terminals X = Load side terminals only Y = Line side terminals only

2 2

Trip Unit

JT 3 250 T

2 2

Trip Unit Type JT = Thermal-magnetic

2 2 2 2

Number of Poles 2 = 2 poles 3 = 3 poles 4 = 4 poles

Trip Unit Rating/ Plug Ampere Rating 070 090 100 125 150 175 200 225 250

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-154

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Suffix T = Trip unit thermal-magnetic fixed thermal adj. magnetic V = 50 °C calibration (thermal-magnetic trip units only)

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Product Selection

2 2

Types JD, HJD and JDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac

High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac

Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac

Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 1

Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 1

Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 1

For Use with Standard or High or Ultra High Interrupting Frames

See Page V4-T2-157 for Optional Terminals

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

70

JD2070

HJD2070

JDC2070

JT2070T

TA250KB 2

90

JD2090

HJD2090

JDC2090

JT2090T

100

JD2100

HJD2100

JDC2100

JT2100T

125

JD2125

HJD2125

JDC2125

JT2125T

150

JD2150

HJD2150

JDC2150

JT2150T

175

JD2175

HJD2175

JDC2175

JT2175T

200

JD2200

HJD2200

JDC2200

JT2200T

225

JD2225

HJD2225

JDC2225

JT2225T

250

JD2250

HJD2250

JDC2250

JT2250T

70

JD3070

HJD3070

JDC3070

JT3070T

90

JD3090

HJD3090

JDC3090

JT3090T

100

JD3100

HJD3100

JDC3100

JT3100T

125

JD3125

HJD3125

JDC3125

JT3125T

150

JD3150

HJD3150

JDC3150

JT3150T

175

JD3175

HJD3175

JDC3175

JT3175T

200

JD3200

HJD3200

JDC3200

JT3200T

225

JD3225

HJD3225

JDC3225

JT3225T

250

JD3250

HJD3250

JDC3250

JT3250T

125

JD4125

HJD4125

JDC4125

JT3125T

150

JD4150

HJD4150

JDC4150

JT3150T

175

JD4175

HJD4175

JDC4175

JT3175T

200

JD4200

HJD4200

JDC4200

JT3200T

225

JD4225

HJD4225

JDC4225

JT3225T

250

JD4250

HJD4250

JDC4250

JT3250T

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Only 1

Standard Terminals Only

2 2 2 2

Two-Pole

2 2 2 2 2 2

Three-Pole TA250KB 2

2 2 2 2 2 2

Four-Pole 34 TA250KB 2

2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Magnetic trip adjustable 5–10 times continuous ampere rating. 2 Individually packed. 3 Fully rated neutral pole with no protection. 4 Neutral is in right pole.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-155

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2

Types JD, HJD and JDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers— Frame Only

2

Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac

High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac

Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

HJD2250F

JDC2250F

2 2

JD2250F

2

JD3250F

Molded Case Switches

Three-Pole HJD3250F

2 2 2

Four-Pole JD4250F

HJD4250F

JDC4250F

Type JDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with NonInterchangeable Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed Application

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Complete Circuit Breaker Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Without Line and Load Terminals

With Standard Line and Load Terminals Only

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Two-Pole

2

70

JDB2070W

JDB2070

90

JDB2090W

JDB2090

250

100

JDB2100W

JDB2100

125

JDB2125W

JDB2125

2

150

JDB2150W

JDB2150

2

175

JDB2175W

JDB2175

200

JDB2200W

JDB2200

2

225

JDB2225W

JDB2225

250

JDB2250W

JDB2250

2

Three-Pole 70

JDB3070W

JDB3070

2

90

JDB3090W

JDB3090

2

100

JDB3100W

JDB3100

125

JDB3125W

JDB3125

2

150

JDB3150W

JDB3150

175

JDB3175W

JDB3175

2

200

JDB3200W

JDB3200

225

JDB3225W

JDB3225

250

JDB3250W

JDB3250

Suitable for Reverse Feed Use

See PageV4-T2-157 for Optional Terminals

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

JD2250KW

JDB2250KW

TA250KB 1

HJD2250KW

HJDB2250KW

—

250

JD3250KW

JDB3250KW

TA250KB 1

HJD3250KW

HJDB3250KW

—

JD4250KW

JDB4250KW

TA250KB 1

HJD4250KW

HJDB4250KW

—

Four-Pole

Notes 1 Individually packed. Molded case switches may open above 2500 amperes.

2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-156

Standard Terminals Only

Three-Pole

250

2

Complete Circuit Breaker Only Without Line and Load Terminals

Two-Pole

600 Vac Rated, 250 Vdc

2

2

600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc

JDC3250F

2 2

components and are of the high instantaneous automatic type. Molded case switches are listed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 489.

Two-Pole

2 2

Molded Case Switches Eaton’s molded case switches are used as compact switches in applications requiring high current switching capabilities. Molded case switches are constructed of circuit breaker

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information Line and Load Terminals Eaton’s line and load terminals provide wire connecting capabilities for specific ranges of continuous current ratings and wire types. All terminals comply with Underwriters Laboratories Standards UL 486A and UL 486B and CSA Standard C22.2 No. 65, or Electrical Bulletin 1165.

Unless otherwise specified, JFrame circuit breaker line and load terminals are shipped separately for field installation. The bottom of the standard TA250KB terminal contains a recess that is positioned over the J-Frame circuit breaker terminal conductor.

2 Ordering Information J-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI terminals as standard. When optional copper-only terminals are required, order by catalog number. Specify if factory installation is required.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Collar

2

Collar

2 Nut

Slotted Screw

T250KB Terminal

2

Slotted Screw

2

TA250KB Terminal (Standard)

2 Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes

Terminal Body Material

2 Wire Type

AWG Wire Range/ No. Conductors

Metric Wire Range mm2

Catalog Number

Cu/AI

4–350 kcmil

25–185

TA250KB

2

Cu

4–350 kcmil

25–185

T250KB

2

2

Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals 250

Aluminum

Optional Cu Pressure Terminals 250

Stainless Steel

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-157

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2

Accessories

2

Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker.

2 2

JD Frame Accessories

2

Description

Reference Page

Two-, Three-Pole

Alarm lockout (Make/Break)

V4-T2-275

2

Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B)

V4-T2-277

2

Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B)

Left

❏

❏

❏

❏

■

■

■

■

V4-T2-277

■

■

■

■

Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination

V4-T2-279

❏

❏

❏

❏

Shunt trip—standard

V4-T2-282

■

■

■

■

Shunt trip—low energy

V4-T2-285

■

■

■

■

2

Undervoltage release mechanism

V4-T2-289

■

■

■

■

2

End cap kit

V4-T2-308

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Plug nut

V4-T2-309

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Control wire terminal kit

V4-T2-309

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Multiwire connectors

V4-T2-310

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Base mounting hardware

V4-T2-311

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Terminal shields

V4-T2-312

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Interphase barriers

V4-T2-313

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Non-padlockable handle block

V4-T2-314

■

■

2

Padlockable handle block

V4-T2-314

■

■

2

Padlockable handle lock hasp

V4-T2-315

❏

❏

Cylinder lock

V4-T2-315

❏

❏

Key interlock kit

V4-T2-316

❏

Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers

V4-T2-317

●

●

●

2

Electrical (solenoid) operator

V4-T2-319

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Plug-in adapters

V4-T2-319

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Rear connecting studs

V4-T2-321

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Panelboard connecting straps

V4-T2-322

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Handle mechanisms

V4-T2-430

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Handle extension

V4-T2-445

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

IQ Energy Sentinel

V4-T2-324

●

●

●

2

Special calibration

—

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Moisture fungus treatment

V4-T2-116

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Freeze-tested circuit breakers

—

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Marine/naval application

—

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

2

2

2

2 2

2 2 2 2

Center

Four-Pole Right

2

Left

Center

Right

Neutral

Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole)

External Accessories

❏

❏

❏

❏

❏

Modifications (Refer to Eaton)

Legend ■ Applicable in indicated pole position ❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both ● Accessory available/modification available

2 2 V4-T2-158

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Technical Data and Specifications

2

UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings

2

Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)

Circuit Breaker Type

Number of Poles

Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 240

480

600

125

250 12

JDB

2, 3

65

35

18

—

10

JD

2, 3, 4

65

35

18

—

10

HJD

2, 3, 4

100

65

25

—

22

JDC 3

2, 3, 4

200

100

35

—

22

2

Volts DC

2 2 2 2

IEC 157-1 (P1) Interrupting Capacity Ratings

2

Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)

Circuit Breaker Type

Number of Poles

Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 240

380

415

600

125

250 12

JD

2, 3, 4

65

35

35

—

—

10

Volts DC

HJD

2, 3, 4

100

65

65

—

—

22

JDC

2, 3, 4

200

100

100

—

—

22

2 2 2

Notes 1 Two-pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of three-pole circuit breaker. 2 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA. 3 Current limiting.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-159

2.3 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Dimensions and Weights Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) JD Frame Number of Poles

Width

Height

Depth

2, 3

4.13 (105.0)

10.00 (254.0)

4.06 (104.1)

2

4

5.50 (139.7)

10.00 (254.0)

4.06 (104.1)

2

JD-Frame, Three-Pole

2

2

Front View Front View Cutout

2

1.56 (39.7)

0.34 R (8.7 R)

2 2

3.94 (100.0)

2

2

0.72 (18.2) 0.50 (12.7) Diameter 3 Megger Holes if Required

0.19 R (4.8) R

Side View

4.13 (104.8)

0.78 (19.8) 2.92 (74.2)

CL Breaker

2 2

CL Handle

2

0.88 (22.2) 3.33 (84.5)

ON

10.00 (254.0)

OFF

2.75 (69.9)

1.38 (34.9)

3.50 (88.9)

1.75 (44.5)

2

4.06 (103.2)

2 2

Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg)

2

JD Frame

2

Breaker Type

Complete Breaker Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Four-Pole

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Four-Pole

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Four-Pole

2

JDB

11.25 (5.1)

12.50 (5.7)

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

JD

11.25 (5.1)

12.50 (5.7)

13.25 (6.0)

9.00 (4.1)

10.00 (4.5)

10.50 (4.8)

2.00 (0.9)

2.00 (0.9)

2.25 (1.0)

2

HJD

11.25 (5.1)

12.50 (5.7)

13.25 (6.0)

9.00 (4.1)

10.00 (4.5)

10.50 (4.8)

2.00 (0.9)

2.00 (0.9)

2.25 (1.0)

JDC

12.25 (5.6)

13.50 (6.1)

14.25 (6.5)

10.00 (4.5)

11.00 (5.0)

11.50 (5.2)

2.00 (0.9)

2.00 (0.9)

2.25 (1.0)

Frame Only

Trip Unit

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-160

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Typical K-Frame Circuit Breaker

2.3

Contents Description Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module. . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page V4-T2-116 V4-T2-117 V4-T2-118 V4-T2-121 V4-T2-135 V4-T2-153 V4-T2-162 V4-T2-164 V4-T2-180 V4-T2-181 V4-T2-184 V4-T2-185 V4-T2-211 V4-T2-222 V4-T2-237 V4-T2-256 V4-T2-267 V4-T2-269 V4-T2-270 V4-T2-273 V4-T2-304

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

K-Frame (70–400 Amperes)

2

Product Description

2

●

●

●

All Eaton K-Frame circuit breakers are HACR rated K-Frame circuit breakers are available as individual components (frame, trip unit, terminals), or factory assembled complete breakers K-Frame circuit breakers with non-interchangeable trip units are suitable for reverse feed use

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-161

2.3 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Catalog Number Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.

2

K-Frame with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Technology

2

Thermal-Magnetic Breakers and Frames 1

KD 3 400 F

2 2

Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type DK KD KDB HKD KDC

2 2

Number of Poles 2 = Two-pole 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole

2 2 2 2

KT 3 400 F

2

Trip Unit Type KT = Thermal-magnetic

2 2 2 2 2 2

Suffix = Copper terminals = 50% protected neutral pole (four-pole electronic trip unit circuit breaker only) F = Frame only (400 A only) K = High-magnetic molded-case switch V = 50 ° calibration (thermal-magnetic trip units only) W = Without terminals X = Load terminals only Y = Line side terminals only Blank = Standard load and line side terminals C E

Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 1

2

2

Circuit Breaker/ Frame Ampere Rating 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 300 350 400

Number of Poles 2 = Two-pole 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole

Circuit Breaker/ Frame Ampere Rating 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 300 350 400

Notes 1 Frames are the same for thermal-magnetic or 310+ electronic trip units, e.g., KD3400F or HKD3400F. Ampere rating available with electronic trip unit only.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-162

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Suffix T = Trip unit only

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

K-Frame with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology 1

2 2

310+ Circuit Breakers 2

KDB 3 400 F T36 ZG W Performance at 480 Vac KDB = 35 kAIC HKDB = 65 kAIC CKDB = 35 kAIC 100% rated CHKDB = 65 kAIC 100% rated

Number of Poles 3 = Three-pole

Ampere Rating 125 250 400

T33 T32 T35 T36 T38 T39

= = = = = =

Frame Designation F

2

Feature Blank = No feature B20 = High load alarm B21 = Ground fault alarm, with trip B22 = Ground fault alarm, no trip ZG = Zone selective interlocking

2

Terminals W = No terminals L = Line and load

2 2 2

Trip Unit 310+ Electronic LS 310+ Electronic LSI 310+ Electronic LSG 310+ Electronic LSIG 310+ Electronic ALSI with Maintenance Mode 310+ Electronic ALSIG with Maintenance Mode

2 2 2

310+ Electronic Trip Units 3

2

KES 3 400 LSIG ZG Trip Unit Type KES

Number of Poles 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole

Ampere Rating 125 250 400

2

Trip Unit LS = 310+ Electronic LS LSI = 310+ Electronic LSI LSG= 310+ Electronic LSG 2 LSIG= 310+ Electronic LSIG 2 ALSI= 310+ Electronic LSI with Maintenance Mode ALSIG= 310+ Electronic LSIG with Maintenance Mode 2

Feature Blank = No feature B20 = High load alarm B21 = Ground fault alarm, with trip 2 B22 = Ground fault alarm, no trip 2 ZG = Zone selective interlocking

2 2 2 2 2 2

K-Frame with OPTIM Trip Unit Technology

2 2

OPTIM Circuit Breakers

KD 3 125 T5 7 W Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type KD HKD KDC CKD CHKD

Number of Poles 3 = Three-pole

Circuit Breaker/Frame Ampere Rating 125 250 400

Trip Model T5 = Model 550 T10 = Model 1050

2 Trip Type 2 = LSI 6 = LSIG 7 = LSIA

2

Suffix W = Without terminals

2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Cannot combine ‘B2X’ suffixes with ‘B2X’ suffixes. 2 Not available in four-pole configurations. 3 Frames are the same for thermal-magnetic or 310+ electronic trip units, e.g., KD3400F, HKD3400F, etc.

2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-163

2.3 2 2

Types KD, HKD and KDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units

2 2 2

Series C

Product Selection

2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac

High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac

Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac

Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Only 1

Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 1

Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 1

Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 1

For Use with Standard or High or Ultra High Interrupting Frames

See Page V4-T2-179 for Optional Terminals

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Standard Terminals Only

Two-Pole 100

KD2100

HKD2100

KDC2100

KT2100T

TA300K 2

125

KD2125

HKD2125

KDC2125

KT2125T

TA300K 2

150

KD2150

HKD2150

KDC2150

KT2150T

TA300K 2

175

KD2175

HKD2175

KDC2175

KT2175T

TA300K 2

2

200

KD2200

HKD2200

KDC2200

KT2200T

TA300K 2

2

225

KD2225

HKD2225

KDC2225

KT2225T

TA300K 2

250

KD2250

HKD2250

KDC2250

KT2250T

TA350K 2

2

300

KD2300

HKD2300

KDC2300

KT2300T

TA350K 2

350

KD2350

HKD2350

KDC2350

KT2350T

TA350K 2

2

400

KD2400

HKD2400

KDC2400

KT2400T

2TA400K 3

2 2

Three-Pole

2

100

KD3100

HKD3100

KDC3100

KT3100T

TA300K 2

2

125

KD3125

HKD3125

KDC3125

KT3125T

TA300K 2

150

KD3150

HKD3150

KDC3150

KT3150T

TA300K 2

2

175

KD3175

HKD3175

KDC3175

KT3175T

TA300K 2

200

KD3200

HKD3200

KDC3200

KT3200T

TA300K 2

2

225

KD3225

HKD3225

KDC3225

KT3225T

TA300K 2

250

KD3250

HKD3250

KDC3250

KT3250T

TA350K 2

2

300

KD3300

HKD3300

KDC3300

KT3300T

TA350K 2

2

350

KD3350

HKD3350

KDC3350

KT3350T

TA350K 2

400

KD3400

HKD3400

KDC3400

KT3400T

3TA400K 3

2

Four-Pole 100

KD4100

HKD4100

KDC4100

KT3100T

TA300K 2

2

125

KD4125

HKD4125

KDC4125

KT3125T

TA300K 2

2

175

KD4175

HKD4175

KDC4175

KT3175T

TA300K 2

200

KD4200

HKD4200

KDC4200

KT3200T

TA300K 2

2

225

KD4225

HKD4225

KDC4225

KT3225T

TA300K 2

250

KD4250

HKD4250

KDC4250

KT3250T

TA350K 2

2

300

KD4300

HKD4300

KDC4300

KT3300T

TA350K 2

350

KD4350

HKD4350

KDC4350

KT3350T

TA350K 2

400

KD4400

HKD4400

KDC4400

KT3400T

4TA400K 3

2 2 2

Notes 1 Magnetic trip adjustable 5–10 times continuous ampere rating. 2 Individually packed. 3 2TA400K, 3TA400K and 4TA400K terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover.

2 2 2 V4-T2-164

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Types KD, HKD and KDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers—Frame Only

2

Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac

High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac

Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

HKD2400F

KDC2400F

HKD3400F

KDC3400F

2

HKD4400F

KDC4400F

2

2 2 2

Two-Pole KD2400F

2

Three-Pole KD3400F Four-Pole KD4400F

Types KD, HKD and KDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units Order as individual components: breaker frame, trip unit and terminals. See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-182. Types KD, HKD and KDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units—Three-Pole

Max. Cont. Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac

High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac

Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac

Standard

Options

LS

LSI

LSG

LSIG

Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I2t Short Delay Ramp

Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay

Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I2t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection

Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay and Ground Fault Protection

Catalog Number

2 2 Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 23 Terminal Catalog Number Information

125

KD3400F

HKD3400F

KDC3400F

KES3125LS

KES3125LSI

KES3125LSG

KES3125LSIG

LGFCT125

250

KD3400F

HKD3400F

KDC3400F

KES3250LS

KES3250LSI

KES3250LSG

KES3250LSIG

LGFCT250

400

KD3400F

HKD3400F

KDC3400F

KES3400LS

KES3400LSI

KES3400LSG

KES3400LSIG

LGFCT400

See Page V4-T2-179

Max. Cont. Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac

High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac

2 2 2 2

Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only 1 Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac

2

2

Types KD, HKD and KDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units—Four-Pole 45 Circuit Breaker Frame Only

2 2

Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only 1

Circuit Breaker Frame Only

2

Standard

Options

LS

LSI

LSG

LSIG

Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I2t Short Delay Ramp

Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay

Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I2t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection

Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay and Ground Fault Protection

Catalog Number

2 2 Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 23 Terminal Catalog Number Information

125

KD4400F

HKD4400F

KDC4400F

KES4125LS

KES4125LSI

—

—

—

250

KD4400F

HKD4400F

KDC4400F

KES4250LS

KES4250LSI

—

—

—

400

KD4400F

HKD4400F

KDC4400F

KES4400LS

KES4400LSI

—

—

—

See Page V4-T2-179

2 2 2 2

Notes 1 For AC use only. 2 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. 3 Included with LSG and LSIG trip units. 4 Trip unit includes protected neutral pole. Use corresponding three-pole trip unit if protected neutral pole is not required. 5 Fully rated neutral pole protection is standard. For 50% rated protection on neutral pole, add Suffix E to four-pole trip unit catalog number.

2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-165

2.3 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Type KDB with Digitrip 310+ Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit Suitable for Reverse Feed See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-182.

2 2

Factory Assembled Circuit Breaker Consisting of Frame and Trip Unit Less Terminals 1 Standard LS

Optional LSI

Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I2t Short Delay Ramp

Adjustable Short Time Independently Adjustable Pickup with I2t Short Delay and Ground Fault Short Time Pickup and Protection Delay

LSG

LSIG

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Number of Poles

2

125

3

KDB3125FT33W

KDB3125FT32W

KDB3125FT35W

KDB3125FT36W

LGFCT125

250

3

KDB3250FT33W

KDB3250FT32W

KDB3250FT35W

KDB3250FT36W

LGFCT250

2

400

3

KDB3400FT33W

KDB3400FT32W

KDB3400FT35W

KDB3400FT36W

LGFCT400

2 2

2 2

2 2 2

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Terminal Information See Page V4-T2-180

Type HKDB with Digitrip 310+ Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit Suitable for Reverse Feed See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-182. Factory Assembled Circuit Breaker Consisting of Frame and Trip Unit Less Terminals 1

2 2

Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Neutral CT for Ground Fault Protection LSG and LSIG 23

Standard LS

Optional LSI

Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I2t Short Delay Ramp

Adjustable Short Time Independently Adjustable Pickup with I2t Short Delay and Ground Fault Short Time Pickup and Protection Delay

LSG

LSIG

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Number of Poles

125

3

HKDB3125FT33W

HKDB3125FT32W

HKDB3125FT35W

HKDB3125FT36W

LGFCT125

250

3

HKDB3250FT33W

HKDB3250FT32W

HKDB3250FT35W

HKDB3250FT36W

LGFCT250

400

3

HKDB3400FT33W

HKDB3400FT32W

HKDB3400FT35W

HKDB3400FT36W

LGFCT400

Independently Adjustable Neutral CT for Short Time Pickup and LSG and LSIG 23 Ground Fault Protection

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Terminal Information See Page V4-T2-180

2 2 2 2

100% Rated Types CKD and CHKD Electronic Circuit Breakers The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 °C wire is applied at the 75 °C ampacity. All 100% rated circuit breakers have electronic trip units. 100% Rated Types CKD and CHKD Electronic Circuit Breakers—Three-Pole See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-182.

2

Circuit Breaker Frame Only

Standard

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Standard Interrupting Capacity

High Interrupting Capacity

35 kAIC at 480 Vac

65 kAIC at 480 Vac

Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I2t Short Delay Ramp

Options

Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay

Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I2t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection

Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay and Ground Fault Protection

Catalog Number

Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 23 Catalog Number

125

CKD3400F

CHKD3400F

KES3125LS

KES3125LSI

KES3125LSG

KES3125LSIG

LGFCT125

250

CKD3400F

CHKD3400F

KES3250LS

KES3250LSI

KES3250LSG

KES3250LSIG

LGFCT250

400

CKD3400F

CHKD3400F

KES3400LS

KES3400LSI

KES3400LSG

KES3400LSIG

LGFCT400

Notes 1 For AC use only. 2 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. 3 Included with LSG and LSIG trip units.

2 2 2 V4-T2-166

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Terminal Information See Page V4-T2-179

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Types DK and KDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Suitable for reverse feed application.

2 2

Types DK and KDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 240 Vac Rated, 250 Vdc Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

2

600 Vac Rated, 250 Vdc

Complete Circuit Breaker

Complete Circuit Breaker

2

Without Line and Load Terminals

With Line Terminals Only

With Standard Line and Load Terminals Only

Without Line and Load Terminals

With Standard Line and Load Terminals

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

100

—

—

—

KDB2100W

KDB2100

125

—

—

—

KDB2125W

KDB2125

150

—

—

—

KDB2150W

KDB2150

175

—

—

—

KDB2175W

KDB2175

200

—

—

—

KDB2200W

KDB2200

225

—

—

—

KDB2225W

KDB2225

250

DK2250W

DK2250Y

DK2250

KDB2250W

KDB2250

300

DK2300W

DK2300Y

DK2300

KDB2300W

KDB2300

350

DK2350W

DK2350Y

DK2350

KDB2350W

KDB2350

400

DK2400W

DK2400Y

DK2400

KDB2400W

KDB2400

2

100

—

—

—

KDB3100W

KDB3100

2

125

—

—

—

KDB3125W

KDB3125

150

—

—

—

KDB3150W

KDB3150

175

—

—

—

KDB3175W

KDB3175

200

—

—

—

KDB3200W

KDB3200

225

—

—

—

KDB3225W

KDB3225

250

DK3250W

DK3250Y

DK3250

KDB3250W

KDB3250

300

DK3300W

DK3300Y

DK3300

KDB3300W

KDB3300

350

DK3350W

DK3350Y

DK3350

KDB3350W

KDB3350

400

DK3400W

DK3400Y

DK3400

KDB3400W

KDB3400

2 2

Two-Pole

2 2 2 2 2

Three-Pole

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-167

2.3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Three-Pole

2

240 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc

600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc

600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc

Complete Circuit Breaker with Standard Line and Load Terminals

Complete Circuit Breaker with Standard Line and Load Terminals

Complete Circuit Breaker with Standard Line and Load Terminals. Suitable for Reverse Feed Use

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

DK2400K

KD2400K

KDB2400K

—

HKD2400K

HKDB2400K

DK3400K

KD3400K

KDB3400K

—

HKD3400K

HKDB3400K

—

KD4400K

KDB4400K

—

HKD4400K

HKDB4400K

Two-Pole

2

2

components and are of the high instantaneous automatic type. Molded case switches are listed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 489.

Molded Case Switches

400

2

Series C

Molded Case Switches Eaton’s molded case switches are used as compact switches in applications requiring high current switching capabilities. Molded case switches are constructed of circuit breaker

2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

400

Four-Pole 400

Note Molded case switches may open above 4000 amperes.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-168

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals.

2 2

Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug Circuit Breaker Frame Only

Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) ➀ – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)

2

L S I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

2

OPTIM 550 2 LSI

LSIG

LSIA

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

KD3125T57W

70

ORPK125A70

90

ORPK125A90

100

ORPK125A100

110

ORPK125A110

125

ORPK125A125

125

ORPK025A125

150

ORPK025A150

175

ORPK025A175

200

ORPK025A200

225

ORPK025A225

250

ORPK025A250

200

ORPK40A200

225

ORPK40A225

250

ORPK40A250

300

ORPK40A300

350

ORPK40A350

400

ORPK40A400

Fixed Rating Plug

250

400

KD3125T52W

KD3250T52W

KD3400T52W

KD3125T56W

KD3250T56W

KD3400T56W

KD3250T57W

KD3400T57W

2 2

Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac 125

2

Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-169

2.3 2

Series C

Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only

2

Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)

2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

OPTIM 550 2 LSI

LSIG

LSIA

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

HKD3125T57W

70

ORPK125A70

2

90

ORPK125A90

2

100

ORPK125A100

110

ORPK125A110

125

ORPK125A125

125

ORPK025A125

150

ORPK025A150

175

ORPK025A175

200

ORPK025A200

225

ORPK025A225

250

ORPK025A250

200

ORPK40A200

225

ORPK40A225

2

250

ORPK40A250

300

ORPK40A300

2

350

ORPK40A350

400

ORPK40A400

2 2

2

Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 125

250

HKD3125T52W

HKD3250T52W

HKD3125T56W

HKD3250T56W

HKD3250T57W

2 2 2 2

2 2

Fixed Rating Plug

400

HKD3400T52W

HKD3400T56W

HKD3400T57W

Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-170

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only

2

Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

2

– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)

L S I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

2 2

OPTIM 550 2 LSI

LSIG

LSIA

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

70

ORPK125A70

90

ORPK125A90

100

ORPK125A100

110

ORPK125A110

125

ORPK125A125

125

ORPK025A125

150

ORPK025A150

175

ORPK025A175

200

ORPK025A200

225

ORPK025A225

250

ORPK025A250

200

ORPK40A200

225

ORPK40A225

250

ORPK40A250

300

ORPK40A300

350

ORPK40A350

400

ORPK40A400

2

Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 125

250

400

KDC3125T52W

KDC3250T52W

KDC3400T52W

KDC3125T56W

KDC3250T56W

KDC3400T56W

KDC3125T57W

KDC3250T57W

KDC3400T57W

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-171

2.3 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals.

2 2

Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug Circuit Breaker Frame Only

2

L S I G A

2 2 2

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)

OPTIM 1050 2 LSIG

LSIA

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

70

ORPK125A70

2

90

ORPK125A90

2

100

ORPK125A100

110

ORPK125A110

125

ORPK125A125

125

ORPK025A125

150

ORPK025A150

175

ORPK025A175

2

200

ORPK025A200

2

225

ORPK025A225

250

ORPK025A250

200

ORPK40A200

225

ORPK40A22

250

ORPK40A250

300

ORPK40A300

350

ORPK40A350

400

ORPK40A400

2

2

Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac 125

250

KD3125T106W

KD3250T106W

KD3125T107W

KD3250T107W

2

2

400

KD3400T106W

KD3400T107W

2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Factory sealed.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-172

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only

2

Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

2

– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)

L S I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

2 2

OPTIM 1050 2 LSIG

LSIA

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

70

ORPK125A70

90

ORPK125A90

100

ORPK125A100

110

ORPK125A110

125

ORPK125A125

125

ORPK025A125

150

ORPK025A150

175

ORPK025A175

200

ORPK025A200

225

ORPK025A225

250

ORPK025A250

200

ORPK40A200

225

ORPK40A225

250

ORPK40A250

300

ORPK40A300

350

ORPK40A350

400

ORPK40A400

2

Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 125

250

400

HKD3125T106W

HKD3250T106W

HKD3400T106W

HKD3125T107W

HKD3250T107W

HKD3400T107W

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Factory sealed.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-173

2.3 2

Circuit Breaker Frame Only L S I G A

2 2

Series C

Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued

2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)

OPTIM 1050 2 LSIG

LSIA

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

70

ORPK125A70

2

90

ORPK125A90

2

100

ORPK125A100

110

ORPK125A110

125

ORPK125A125

125

ORPK025A125

150

ORPK025A150

175

ORPK025A175

200

ORPK025A200

225

ORPK025A225

250

ORPK025A250

200

ORPK40A200

225

ORPK40A225

2

250

ORPK40A250

300

ORPK40A300

2

350

ORPK40A350

400

ORPK40A400

2

2

Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 125

250

KDC3125T106W

KDC3250T106W

KDC3125T107W

KDC3250T107W

2 2 2 2

2 2

400

KDC3400T106W

KDC3400T107W

Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Factory sealed.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-174

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals.

2 2

100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug Circuit Breaker Frame Only

Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)

2

L S I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

2

OPTIM 550 2 LSI

LSIG

LSIA

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

CKD3125T57W

70

ORPK125A70

90

ORPK125A90

100

ORPK125A100

110

ORPK125A110

125

ORPK125A125

125

ORPK025A125

150

ORPK025A150

175

ORPK025A175

200

ORPK025A200

225

ORPK025A225

Fixed Rating Plug

250

400

CKD3125T52W

CKD3250T52W

CKD3400T52W

CKD3125T56W

CKD3250T56W

CKD3400T56W

CKD3250T57W

CKD3400T57W

2 2

Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac 125

2

250

ORPK025A250

200

ORPK40A200

225

ORPK40A225

250

ORPK40A250

300

ORPK40A300

350

ORPK40A350

400

ORPK40A400

Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number (refer to Page V4-T2-293).

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-175

2.3 2

Series C

100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only

2

L S I G A

2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)

OPTIM 550 2 LSI

LSIG

LSIA

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

CHKD3125T57W

70

ORPK125A70

2

90

ORPK125A90

2

100

ORPK125A100

110

ORPK125A110

125

ORPK125A125

125

ORPK025A125

150

ORPK025A150

175

ORPK025A175

200

ORPK025A200

225

ORPK025A225

250

ORPK025A250

200

ORPK40A200

225

ORPK40A225

2

250

ORPK40A250

300

ORPK40A300

2

350

ORPK40A350

400

ORPK40A400

2 2

2

Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 125

250

CHKD3125T52W

CHKD3250T52W

CHKD3125T56W

CHKD3250T56W

CHKD3250T57W

2 2 2 2

2 2

Fixed Rating Plug

400

CHKD3400T52W

CHKD3400T56W

CHKD3400T57W

Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-176

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals.

2 2

100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug Circuit Breaker Frame Only

Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)

2

L S I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

2

OPTIM 1050 2 LSIG

LSIA

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

250

400

CKD3125T106W

CKD3250T106W

CKD3400T106W

CKD3125T107W

70

ORPK125A70

90

ORPK125A90

100

ORPK125A100

110

ORPK125A110

125

ORPK125A125

CKD3250T107W

125

ORPK025A125

150

ORPK025A150

175

ORPK025A175

200

ORPK025A200

225

ORPK025A225

CKD3400T107W

250

ORPK025A250

200

ORPK40A200

225

ORPK40A225

250

ORPK40A250

300

ORPK40A300

350

ORPK40A350

400

ORPK40A400

2 2

Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac 125

2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Factory sealed.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-177

2.3 2

Circuit Breaker Frame Only L S I G A

2 2

Series C

100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued

2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)

OPTIM 1050 2 LSIG

LSIA

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

70

ORPK125A70

2

90

ORPK125A90

2

100

ORPK125A100

110

ORPK125A110

125

ORPK125A125

125

ORPK025A125

150

ORPK025A150

175

ORPK025A175

200

ORPK025A200

225

ORPK025A225

250

ORPK025A250

200

ORPK40A200

225

ORPK40A225

2

250

ORPK40A250

300

ORPK40A300

2

350

ORPK40A350

400

ORPK40A400

2

2

Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 125

250

CHKD3125T106W

CHKD3250T106W

CHKD3125T107W

CHKD3250T107W

2 2 2 2

2 2

400

CHKD3400T106W

CHKD3400T107W

Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Factory sealed.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-178

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Guide Line and Load Terminals Eaton’s line and load terminals provide wire connecting capabilities for specific ranges of continuous current ratings and wire types. All terminals comply with Underwriters Laboratories Standards

2

UL 486A and UL 486B and CSA Standard C22.2 No. 65, or Electrical Bulletin 1165. Unless otherwise specified, K-Frame circuit breaker line and load terminals are shipped separately for field installation.

Ordering Information K-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI terminals as standard. When optional copper or Cu/ AI terminals are required, order by catalog number. Specify if factory installation is required.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Tab is 1/4 x.032 TA401K

TA400K, T400K

TA350K, T350K

TA300K, T300K

T400KCW, TA400KCW, TA401KCW

TA402K, T402K

2

Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes

Terminal Body Material

Terminal

Wire Type

AWG Wire Range/No. Conductors

Terminals with Control Wire Termination

Metric Wire Range mm2

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

225

Aluminum

Cu/AI

3–350 (1)

35–185

TA300K 1

—

400

Aluminum

Cu/AI

250–500 (1)

120–240

TA350K 1

—

400

Aluminum

Cu/AI

3/0–250 (2)

95–120

2TA400K 23

2TA400KCW 23

400

Aluminum

Cu/AI

3/0–250 (2)

95–120

3TA400K 24

3TA400KCW 24

400

Aluminum

Cu/AI

3/0–250 (2)

95–120

4TA400K 56

4TA400KCW 56

Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals Copper

Cu

3–350 (1)

35–185

T300K1

—

400

Copper

Cu

250–500 (1)

120–240

T350K 1

—

400

400

400

Copper

Aluminum

Aluminum

Cu

Cu/AI

Cu/AI

3/0–250 (2)

2/0–250 (2) or 2/0–500 (1) 500–750 (1)

95–120

2T400K

3

Copper

Cu

500–750 (1)

3T400KCW 24

4T400K 5

4T400KCW 56

70–120

2TA401K 23

2TA401KCW 23

70–240

3TA401K 24

3TA401KCW 24

70–240

4TA401K 56

4TA401KCW 56

300–400

2TA402K 23

—

24

—

4TA402K 56

—

2T402K 23

—

3T402K 24

—

4T402K 56

—

—

2 2 2 2

23

3T400K 4

3TA402K

400

2T400KCW

2 2

Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals

225

2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Individually packed. 2 Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. 3 Two-pole kit. 4 Three-pole kit. 5 Four-pole kit. 6 Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and three interphase barriers.

2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-179

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2

Accessories

2

Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker.

2 2 2

KD Frame Accessories Reference Page

Description Alarm lockout (Make/Break)

V4-T2-276

Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break)

V4-T2-276

2

Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B)

V4-T2-278

Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B)

V4-T2-278

Auxiliary switch (3A, 3B)

V4-T2-278

Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination

V4-T2-279

Shunt trip—standard 2

V4-T2-282

Shunt trip—low energy 2

V4-T2-285

2 2

Three-Pole

Left

Right

Left

■

■

❏ ❏ ■ ■ ■ ❏ ■ ■ ■

● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ●

Center

Four-Pole Right

Left

❏ ❏ ■ ■ ■ ❏ ■ ■ ■ ■

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ❏ ■ ■ ■

● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ●

Center

Right

Neutral

Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole)

2 2

Two-Pole 1

Undervoltage release mechanism 2

V4-T2-290

PowerNet or zone interlock kit (OPTIM 550)

V4-T2-293

■

■

■ ■ ■ ❏ ■

2

External Accessories End cap kit

V4-T2-308

2

Keeper nut

V4-T2-308

Control wire terminal kit

V4-T2-309

2

Terminal adapter

V4-T2-309

Multiwire connectors

V4-T2-310

● ● ● ● ●

2

Rear fed terminals

V4-T2-310

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Base mounting hardware

V4-T2-311

2

Terminal shields

V4-T2-313

Interphase barriers

V4-T2-313

● ● ●

● ● ●

● ● ●

● ● ●

V4-T2-314

● ● ● ■

● ● ●

2

Padlockable handle block

V4-T2-314

● ● ● ■ ■

● ● ●

Non-padlockable handle block

● ● ● ■

2

Padlockable handle lock hasp

V4-T2-315

2

Key Interlock kit

V4-T2-316

❏

V4-T2-317

2

Walking beam interlock—requires two breakers

V4-T2-317

Electrical (solenoid) operator

V4-T2-318

2

Plug-in adapters

V4-T2-319

Rear connecting studs

V4-T2-321

2

Panelboard connecting straps

V4-T2-322

Handle mechanisms

V4-T2-430

2

Handle extension

V4-T2-445

IQ Energy Sentinel

V4-T2-324

2

Solid-state (electronic) portable test kit

V4-T2-324

❏ ❏ ❏ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

❏

Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers

❏ ❏ ❏ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

❏

V4-T2-315

■ ❏ ❏

❏

Cylinder lock

2

Breaker interface module (BIM)

V4-T2-325

Digitrip OPTIMizer

V4-T2-325

2

Auxiliary power module

V4-T2-325

2 2 2 2

❏ ■

● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ●

●

●

● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

OPTIM System Components Three Poles

Legend ■ Applicable in indicated pole position ❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both ● Accessory available/modification available Notes Two-pole breaker supplied in three-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole. 2 Shunt trip and UVR cannot be mounted in right poles on KES or OPTIM trip units. Standard internal accessories cannot be mounted in right pole on any K-Frame OPTIM trip unites. Special OPTIM ground fault and zone interlock accessories are available for field installation in the right pole of K-Frame 550 OPTIM trip units. Factory installed 2a/2b and bell/aux are available for factory installation. K-Frame breakers equipped with OPTIM 1050 trip units include aux-bell alarm in the right pole. 1

2 V4-T2-180

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

KD Frame Accessories, continued Reference Page

Description

2

Two-Pole 1

Three-Pole

Left

Right

Left

Center

Right

Left

Center

Right

Neutral

2 2

Four-Pole

Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Special calibration

—

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Moisture fungus treatment

V4-T2-116

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Freeze-tested circuit breakers

—

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Marine/naval application

—

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Legend ■ Applicable in indicated pole position ❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both

2 2 2

● Accessory available/modification available

2

310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories Description

2

Catalog Number

2

2

Electronic portable test kit

MTST230V

Trip unit tamper protection wire seal

5108A03H01

External neutral sensor, 400 A

LGFCT400 3

External neutral sensor, 250 A

LGFCT250 3

External neutral sensor, 125 A

LGFCT125

3

Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication

TRIP-LED

Breaker-mount ammeter module

DIGIVIEW

Remote-mount ammeter module

DIGIVIEWR06 4

2 2 2 2

Technical Data and Specifications

2

NEMA/UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity Ratings

2

Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes) Circuit Breaker Type

Number of Poles

Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 240

277

480

600

250 56

DK

2, 3

65

—

—

—

10

KDB

2, 3, 4

65

—

35

25

10

2

Volts DC

KD

2, 3, 4

65

—

35

25

10

HKD, HKDB

2, 3, 4

100

—

65

35

22

KDC 7

2, 3, 4

200

—

100

65

22

CKD

3

65

—

35

25

—

CHKD

3

100

—

65

35

—

2 2 2 2 2

IEC 157-1 (P1) Interrupting Capacity Ratings

2

Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes) Circuit Breaker Type

Number of Poles

Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 240

380

415

440

500

600

250 56

DK

2, 3

65

—

—

—

—

—

10

KDB

2, 3, 4

65

40

40

—

—

—

10

KD

2, 3, 4

65

40

40

—

—

—

10

Volts DC

HKD, HKDB

2, 3, 4

100

65

65

—

—

—

22

KDC

2, 3, 4

200

100

100

—

—

—

22

2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Two-pole breaker supplied in three-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole. 2 MTST230V applies to 100–230 Vac. 3 Included with all LD LSG and LSIG trip units and breakers. 4 Includes 6 ft cable for remote mounting; NEMA 3R rated. 5 Two-pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of three-pole circuit breaker. 6 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA. 7 Current limiting.

2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-181

2.3 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

310+ Specifications Trip Unit Type

310+ Adjustability Specifications Digitrip RMS 310+

2

Breaker Type

2

Frame

K

Frames available

125 A, 250 A, 400 A

2

Continuous current range (A)

55–400 A

Ground fault pickup (A)

2 2

K-Frame 310+ Settings

125A

250 A

400 A

A (=Ir)

55

100

160

B (=Ir)

60

125

200

50–400 A

C (=Ir)

70

150

225

Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kAIC)

35, 65, 100

D (=Ir)

80

160

250

100% rated

Yes

E (=Ir)

90

175

300

F (=Ir)

100

200

315

G (=Ir)

110

225

350

Ir = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes) (All 310+)

Protection

2

Ordering options

LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG

Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System

Remote enabled on ALSI, ALSIG

2

Interchangeable trip unit

Yes

High load alarm, trip (suffix B20) 1

Yes

2

Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B21) 1

LSG, LSIG, ALSIG

2

Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B22)

Ir \ In

H (=Ir=In)

125

250

400

2

2

2

2

4

4

4

4

7

7

7

7

LSG, LSIG, ALSIG

10

10

10

10

Zone selective interlock (suffix ZG) 1

LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG

12

12

12

12

Cause of trip indication

Yes (via TRIP-LED or DIGIVIEW)

15

15

15

15

Thru-cover accessories

No

20

20

20

20

24

24

24

24

Position 1

2

2x

2x

Position 2

3

3x

3x

Position 3

4

4x

4x

Position 4

5

5x

5x

2

Position 5

6

6x

6x

Position 6

7

7x

7x

2

Position 7

8

8x

8x

2

Position 8

10

10x

10x

Position 9

12

12x

12x

tsd = short delay time I2t (milliseconds) (LS and LSG)

Fixed

67 @10x

tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds) (LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG)

Position 1

Inst

Position 2

120

2 2

tr = long delay time (seconds) (All 310+)

Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup (amperes) (All 310+)

2 2

2 2 2

Ig (x In) = ground fault pickup (amperes) (LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)

2 2 2 2

tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds) (LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)

2 2 2

Position 3

300

Position 1

25

50

80

Position 2

37.5

75

120

Position 3

50

100

160

Position 4

75

150

240

Position 5

100

200

320

Position 6

125

250

400

Position 1

Inst

Position 2

120

Position 3

300

625

1000

Independently adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting

2

Maintenance Mode pickup (2.5 x In) (amperes) (310+ with Maintenance Mode—ALSI and ALSIG)

Fixed

312

Notes 1 B2x suffixes cannot be combined with B2x suffixes. 2 Not available for KD. Independently adjustable I setting available in LG, NG and RG ALSI and i ALSIG trip units.

2 2 2 V4-T2-182

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Specifications

2

Trip Unit Type

Digitrip OPTIM 550

Digitrip OPTIM 1050

rms sensing

Yes

Yes

2

Frame

K

K

Ampere range

125–400 A

125–400 A

2

Interrupting rating at 480 volts

35, 65, 100 (kA)

35, 65, 100 (kA)

2

Ordering options

LSI, LSI(A), LSIG

LSI(A), LSIG

Fixed rated plug (In)

Yes

Yes

2

Overtemperature trip

Yes

Yes

2 2

Breaker Type

Protection

Long Delay Protection (L) Adjustable rating plug (In)

No

No

Long delay pickup

0.4–1.0 x (In)

0.4–1.0 x (In)

Long delay time I2t

2–24 seconds

2–24 seconds

Long delay time I4t

1–5 seconds

1–5 seconds

2

Long delay thermal memory

Yes

Yes

High load alarm

0.5–1.0 x Ir

0.5–1.0 x Ir

2

Short delay pickup

150–800% x (Ir)

150–800% x (Ir)

2

Short delay time I2t

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

Short delay time flat

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

Short Delay Protection (S)

Short delay time zone selective interlocking

Yes

1

2

Yes

2 2

Instantaneous Protection (I) Instantaneous pickup

200–800% x (In)

200–800% x (In)

Discriminator

Yes

Yes

Instantaneous override

Yes

Yes

2

Ground fault alarm

20–100% x (Is)

20–100% x (Is)

Ground fault pickup

20–100% x (Is)

20–100% x (Is)

2

Ground fault delay I2t

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

Ground fault delay flat

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

Ground Fault Protection (G)

Ground fault zone selective interlocking

Yes

Ground fault thermal memory

Yes

1

2

Yes

2 2

Yes

System Diagnostics Status LEDs

Yes

Yes

Cause of trip LEDs

Yes

Yes

Magnitude of trip information

Yes

2

Yes 1

Remote signal contact—ground alarm

Yes

Local auxiliary and bell alarm contact

Optional

Included

2

Digital display

Yes 2

Yes 2

2

Current

Yes

Yes

Power and energy

No

Yes

Power quality—harmonics

No

Yes

Power factor

No

Yes

2

Yes 3

Yes

2

OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet

OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet

2

Yes

System Monitoring

2

Communications PowerNet Testing Testing method

2

Legend BIM = Breaker Interface Module (A) = GF Alarm Is = Sensor Rating In = Rating Plug Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting

2 2

Notes Zone interlock kit. 2 By OPTIMizer/BIM. 3 Eaton’s PowerNet kit. 1

2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-183

2.3 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Dimensions and Weights Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) KD Frame

2

Number of Poles

Width

Height

Depth

2

2, 3

5.50 (149.7)

10.13 (257.3)

4.10 (104.1)

4

7.22 (183.4)

10.13 (257.3)

4.10 (104.1)

2

KD-Frame, Two- and Three-Pole

2 2

4.31 (109.6)

5.49 (139.4)

Front Cover Cutout

2

0.34 R (8.7 R)

2

3.75 (95.3)

2 2

Side View

Front View

CL Handle 0.83 (21.0)

0.19 R (4.8 R)

2

1.64 (41.7) ON

1.25 (31.8)

10.13 (257.2)

1.31 (33.3)

2

OFF

2.63 (66.7) 2.39 (60.7) 4.78 (121.5)

2 2 2 2 2 2

Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs (kg) KD Frame Complete Breaker

Trip Unit 1

Frame Only

Breaker Type

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

DK

10.0 (4.5)

11.5 (5.2)

—

—

—

—

2

KDB

10.0 (4.5)

11.5 (5.2)

—

—

—

—

KD

10.0 (4.5)

11.5 (5.2)

7.5 (3.4)

8.5 (3.9)

1.5 (0.7)

1.5 (0.7)

2

HKD, HKDB

10.0 (4.5)

11.5 (5.2)

7.5 (3.4)

8.5 (3.9)

1.5 (0.7)

1.5 (0.7)

KDC

10.0 (4.5)

11.5 (5.2)

7.5 (3.4)

8.5 (3.9)

1.5 (0.7)

1.5 (0.7)

2

2 2

Note 1 Weights shown are for thermal-magnetic trip units. Three-pole electronic trip units weigh 2.5 lbs (1.1 kg).

2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-184

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Contents

Typical L-Frame Circuit Breaker

Description Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module. . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page V4-T2-116 V4-T2-117 V4-T2-118 V4-T2-121 V4-T2-135 V4-T2-153 V4-T2-161 V4-T2-186 V4-T2-188 V4-T2-204 V4-T2-206 V4-T2-210 V4-T2-211 V4-T2-222 V4-T2-237 V4-T2-256 V4-T2-267 V4-T2-269 V4-T2-270 V4-T2-273 V4-T2-304

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) Product Description ●

●

●

All Eaton L-Frame circuit breakers are HACR rated L-Frame circuit breakers are available as individual components (frame, trip unit, terminals), or factory assembled complete breakers L-Frame circuit breakers with non-interchangeable trip units are suitable for reverse feed use

2

Standards and Certifications ●

CE marked

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-185

2.3 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Catalog Number Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. LD-Frame with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Technology Thermal-Magnetic Breakers and Frame 1

2

LD 3 600 F

2

Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type LDB LD HLD LDC CLD CHLD CLDC

2 2 2 2 2

Number of Poles 2 = Two-pole 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole

LT 3 400 T

2

Trip Unit Type LT = Thermal-magnetic

2 2 2 2

Suffix C = Copper terminals F = Frame only (600 A only) K = High magnetic molded case switch V = 50 °C (thermal-magnetic trip units only) W = Without terminals X = Load side terminals only Y = Line side terminals only

Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 1

2

2

Circuit Breaker/ Frame Ampere Rating 300 350 400 450 500 600

Number of Poles 2 = Two-pole 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole

Trip Unit Rating/Plug Ampere Rating 300 350 400 450 500 600

Suffix T = Trip unit thermal-magnetic fixed thermal adjustable magnetic V = 50 °C calibration (thermal-magnetic trip units only)

Note 1 Frames are the same for thermal-magnetic or 310+ electronic trip units, e.g., LD3600F, HLD3600F, etc.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-186

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

LD-Frame with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology

2

310+ Circuit Breakers

2

LDB 3 600 F T36 B22ZG W Performance at 480 Vac LDB = 35 kAIC HLDB = 65 kAIC LDCB = 100 kAIC CLDB = 35 kAIC, 100% rated CHLDB = 65 kAIC, 100% rated CLDCB = 100 kAIC, 100% rated

2

Number of Poles 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole

Terminals W = No terminals

Amperes 600

Designation

T33 T32 T35 T36 T38 T39

= = = = = =

Trip Unit 310+ Electronic LS 310+ Electronic LSI 310+ Electronic LSG 1 310+ Electronic LSIG 1 310+ Electronic LSI with Maintenance Mode 310+ Electronic LSIG with Maintenance Mode 1

Blank = B20 = B21 = B22 = ZG =

Features No feature High load alarm Ground fault alarm, with trip 1 Ground fault alarm, no trip 1 Zone selective interlocking

F

2 2 2 2 2 2

310+ Electronic Trip Units 2

2

LES 3 600 LSIG B22ZG

2 Trip Unit Type LES

Number of Poles 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole

Amperes 600

LS = LSI = LSG = LSIG = ALSI = ALSIG =

Trip Unit 310+ Electronic LS 310+ Electronic LSI 310+ Electronic LSG 1 310+ Electronic LSIG 1 310+ Electronic LSI with Maintenance Mode 310+ Electronic LSIG with Maintenance Mode 1

Blank = B20 = B21 = B22 = ZG =

Features No feature High load alarm Ground fault alarm, with trip 1 Ground fault alarm, no trip 1 Zone selective interlocking

2 2

OPTIM Circuit Breakers

2

LD 3 125 T5 7 W Number of Poles 3 = Three-pole

2 2

LD-Frame with OPTIM Electronic Trip Unit Technology

Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type LD HLD LDC CLD CHLD CLDC

2

Circuit Breaker/ Frame Ampere Rating 125 (Available on Model 1050 only) 250 (Available on Model 1050 only) 400 600

2 Trip Type 2 = LSI (550 only) 6 = LSIG 7 = LSIA

2

Suffix W = Without terminals

2 2

Trip Model T5 = Model 550 T10 = Model 1050

2 2

Notes 1 Not available in four-pole configurations. 2 Frames are the same for thermal-magnetic or 310+ electronic trip units, e.g., LD3600F, HLD3600F, etc.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-187

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2

Product Selection

2

Types LD, HLD and LDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac

High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac

Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals

Factory Assembled Factory Assembled Circuit Circuit Consisting of Frame, Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals Trip Unit and Terminals

For Use with Standard or High or Ultra High Interrupting Frames

See Page V4-T2-203 for Optional Terminals

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

300

LD2300

HLD2300

LDC2300

LT2300T

TA602LD 2

2

350

LD2350

HLD2350

LDC2350

LT2350T

TA602LD 2

400

LD2400

HLD2400

LDC2400

LT2400T

TA602LD 2

2

450

LD2450

HLD2450

LDC2450

LT2450T

TA602LD 2

500

LD2500

HLD2500

LDC2500

LT2500T

TA602LD 2

2

600

LD2600

HLD2600

LDC2600

LT2600T

2TA603LDK 3

2

300

LD3300

HLD3300

LDC3300

LT3300T

TA602LD 2

2

350

LD3350

HLD3350

LDC3350

LT3350T

TA602LD 2

400

LD3400

HLD3400

LDC3400

LT3400T

TA602LD 2

2

450

LD3450

HLD3450

LDC3450

LT3450T

TA602LD 2

500

LD3500

HLD3500

LDC3500

LT3500T

TA602LD 2

2

600

LD3600

HLD3600

LDC3600

LT3600T

3TA603LDK 3

2

300

LD4300

HLD4300

LDC4300

LT4300T

TA602LD 2

2

350

LD4350

HLD4350

LDC4350

LT4350T

TA602LD 2

400

LD4400

HLD4400

LDC4400

LT4400T

TA602LD 2

2

450

LD4450

HLD4450

LDC4450

LT4450T

TA602LD 2

500

LD4500

HLD4500

LDC4500

LT4500T

TA602LD 2

600

LD4600

HLD4600

LDC4600

LT4600T

4TA603LDK 3

2 2 2 2 2

2 2 2

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C 1

Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac

Standard Terminals Only

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Four-Pole

4

Types LD, HLD and LDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers—Frame Only Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac

High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac

Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac

2

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

Two-Pole HLD2600F

LDC2600F

2

Three-Pole HLD3600F

LDC3600F

HLD4600F

LDC4600F

2

2 2 2 2

Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Only

LD2600F

LD3600F Four-Pole LD4600F

Notes 1 Magnetic trip range 5–10 times continuous ampere rating. 2 Individually packed. 3 Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. 4 Neutral is in right pole.

2 2 V4-T2-188

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Types LD, HLD and LDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Order as individual components: breaker frame, trip unit and terminals. See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-182.

2

Types LD, HLD and LDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units

2

Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only 1

Circuit Breaker Frame Only

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac

High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac

Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac

Catalog Number

Standard LS

Optional LSI

LSG

LSIG

Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I2t Short Delay Ramp

Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay

Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I2t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection

Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Ground Fault Protection

LES3600LSI

LES3600LSG

LES3600LSIG

Catalog Number

2 2 Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 23 Terminal Catalog Number Information

Three-Pole 600

LD3600F

HLD3600F

LDC3600F

LES3600LS

LGFCT600

See Page V4-T2-180

Four-Pole 4 600

LD4600F

HLD4600F

LDC4600F

LES4600LS

LES4600LSI

—

—

—

See Page V4-T2-180

Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I2t Short Delay Ramp

Adjustable Short Time Independently Adjustable Pickup with I2t Short Delay and Ground Fault Short Time Pickup and Protection Delay

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Number of Poles

600

3

LDB3600FT33W

LDB3600FT32W

LDB3600FT35W

LDB3600FT36W

600

3

HLDB3600FT33W

HLDB3600FT32W

HLDB3600FT35W

HLDB3600FT36W

600

3

LDCB3600FT33W

LDCB3600FT32W

LDCB3600FT35W

LDCB3600FT36W

Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Neutral CT for Ground Fault Protection LSG and LSIG 23 Terminal Catalog Number Information LGFCT600

See Page V4-T2-180

100% Rated Types CLD, CHLD and CLDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 °C wire is applied at the 75 °C ampacity. All 100% rated circuit breakers have electronic trip units. Order as individual components: breaker frame, trip unit and terminals. See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-182. 100% Rated Types CLD, CHLD and CLDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with 310+ Interchangeable Trip Units Circuit Breaker Frame Only

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac

Optional LSI

LSG

LSIG

Ultra High Interrupting High Interrupting Capacity Current Capacity 600 Vac Limiting 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at Rated 100 kAIC 480 Vac at 480 Vac

Adjustable Short Time Pickup with Adjustable Short Independently Time Pickup with Adjustable Short I2t Short Delay 2 Time Pickup and and Ground Fault I t Short Delay Protection Ramp Delay

Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Ground Fault Neutral CT for Protection LSG and LSIG 23 Terminal Catalog Number Information

CHLD3600F

LES3600LS

LES3600LSIG

Catalog Number

Three-Pole 600

CLD3600F

CLDC3600F

LES3600LSI

LES3600LSG

LGFCT600

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only Standard LS

2

2

LSIG

Catalog Number

2

2

Factory Assembled Circuit Breaker Consisting of Frame and Trip Unit Less Terminals 1 LSG

2

2

Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Less Terminals Types LDB, HLDB and LDCB with Digitrip 310+ Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Optional LSI

2

2

Types LDB, HLDB and LDCB Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable 310+ Electronic Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-182.

Standard LS

2

See Page V4-T2-180

2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 For AC use only. 2 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. 3 Included with LSG and LSIG trip units. 4 Neutral is in right pole.

2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-189

2.3 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Type LDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 1

2

600 Vac Rated, 250 Vdc Complete Circuit Breaker Without Line and Load Terminals

With Standard Line and Load Terminals Only

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

300

LDB2300W

LDB2300

2

350

LDB2350W

LDB2350

400

LDB2400W

LDB2400

2

450

LDB2450W

LDB2450

2

500

LDB2500W

LDB2500

600

LDB2600W

LDB2600

2 2 2

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating

Molded Case Switches Eaton’s molded case switches are used as compact switches in applications requiring high current switching capabilities. Molded case switches are constructed of circuit breaker

components and are of the high instantaneous automatic type. Molded case switches are listed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 489.

Two-Pole

Molded Case Switches Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc

Standard Terminals Only

Circuit Breaker Only without Line and Load Terminals

See Page V4-T2-203 for Optional Terminals

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

Three-Pole 300

LDB3300W

LDB3300

600

LD2600WK

2TA603LDK

2

350

LDB3350W

LDB3350

600

LDB2600WK 1

2TA603LDK

400

LDB3400W

LDB3400

600

HLD2600WK

2TA603LDK

2

450

LDB3450W

LDB3450

Three-Pole

2

500

LDB3500W

LDB3500

600

LD3600WK

3TA603LDK

600

LDB3600W

LDB3600

600

LDB3600WK 1

3TA603LDK

2

600

HLD3600WK

3TA603LDK

2

600

LD4600WK

4TA603LDK

2

600

LDB4600WK 1

4TA603LDK

600

HLD4600WK

4TA603LDK

2

Notes 1 Factory sealed—suitable for reverse feed application.

2

Molded case switch will trip above 6000 amperes.

Two-Pole

Four-Pole

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-190

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Rating Plug, Terminals.

2

Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug

2

Circuit Breaker Frame Only

Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

2

L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

2 2

OPTIM 550 2 LSI

LSIG

LSIA

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

LD3125T57W

—

ORPL125A070

—

ORPL125A090

—

ORPL125A100

—

ORPL125A110

—

ORPL125A125

—

ORPL025A125

—

ORPL025A150

—

ORPL025A175

—

ORPL025A200

—

ORPL025A225

—

ORPL025A250

200

ORPL40A200

225

ORPL40A225

250

ORPL40A250

300

ORPL40A300

350

ORPL40A350

400

ORPL40A400

300

ORPL60A300

350

ORPL60A350

400

ORPL60A400

500

ORPL60A500

600

ORPL60A600

Fixed Rating Plug

2 2

Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac 125

250

400

600

LD3125T52W

LD3250T52W

LD3400T52W

LD3600T52W

LD3125T56W

LD3250T56W

LD3400T56W

LD3600T56W

LD3250T57W

LD3400T57W

LD3600T57W

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-191

2.3 2

Circuit Breaker Frame Only

2

Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)

2 2

Series C

Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued

2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

OPTIM 550 2 LSI

LSIG

LSIA

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 70

ORPL125A070

2

90

ORPL125A090

2

100

ORPL125A100

110

ORPL125A110

2

125

250

HLD3125T52W

HLD3250T52W

HLD3125T56W

HLD3250T56W

HLD3125T57W

HLD3250T57W

2 2 2

125

ORPL125A125

125

ORPL025A125

150

ORPL025A150

175

ORPL025A175

200

ORPL025A200

225

ORPL025A225

250

ORPL025A250

200

ORPL40A200

225

ORPL40A225

2

250

ORPL40A250

300

ORPL40A300

2

350

ORPL40A350

2

2

400

600

HLD3400T52W

HLD3600T52W

HLD3400T56W

HLD3600T56W

HLD3400T57W

HLD3600T57W

2 2 2 2

400

ORPL40A400

300

ORPL60A300

350

ORPL60A350

400

ORPL60A400

500

ORPL60A500

600

ORPL60A600

Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-192

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only

2

Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

2

– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)

L S I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

2 2

OPTIM 550 2 LSI

LSIG

LSIA

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

—

ORPL125A070

—

ORPL125A090

—

ORPL125A100

—

ORPL125A110

—

ORPL125A125

—

ORPL025A125

—

ORPL025A150

—

ORPL025A175

—

ORPL025A200

—

ORPL025A225

—

ORPL025A250

200

ORPL40A200

225

ORPL40A225

250

ORPL40A250

300

ORPL40A300

350

ORPL40A350

400

ORPL40A400

300

ORPL60A300

350

ORPL60A350

400

ORPL60A400

500

ORPL60A500

600

ORPL60A600

2

Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 125

250

400

600

LDC3125T52W

LDC3250T52W

LDC3400T52W

LDC3600T52W

LDC3125T56W

LDC3250T56W

LDC3400T56W

LDC3600T56W

LDC3125T57W

LDC3250T57W

LDC3400T57W

LDC3600T57W

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-193

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2

Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Rating Plug, Terminals.

2

Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug Circuit Breaker Frame Only

2

L S I G A

2 2 2

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)

OPTIM 1050 23 LSIG

LSIA

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

70

ORPL125A070

90

ORPL125A090

2

100

ORPL125A100

2

110

ORPL125A110

125

ORPL125A125

125

ORPL025A125

150

ORPL025A150

175

ORPL025A175

200

ORPL025A200

225

ORPL025A225

250

ORPL025A250

200

ORPL40A200

2

225

ORPL40A225

250

ORPL40A250

2

300

ORPL40A300

350

ORPL40A350

400

ORPL40A400

300

ORPL60A300

350

ORPL60A350

2

400

ORPL60A400

500

ORPL60A500

2

600

ORPL60A600

2 2

2

Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac 125

250

LD3125T106W

LD3250T106W

LD3125T107W

LD3250T107W

2 2 2

2 2

2 2

400

600

LD3400T106W

LD3600T106W

LD3400T107W

LD3600T107W

Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. 3 Factory sealed.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-194

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only

2

Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

2

– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)

L S I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

2 2

OPTIM 1050 23 LSIG

LSIA

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

70

ORPL125A070

90

ORPL125A090

100

ORPL125A100

110

ORPL125A110

125

ORPL125A125

125

ORPL025A125

150

ORPL025A150

175

ORPL025A175

200

ORPL025A200

225

ORPL025A225

250

ORPL025A250

200

ORPL40A200

225

ORPL40A225

250

ORPL40A250

300

ORPL40A300

350

ORPL40A350

400

ORPL40A400

300

ORPL60A300

350

ORPL60A350

400

ORPL60A400

500

ORPL60A500

600

ORPL60A600

2

Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 125

250

400

600

HLD3125T106W

HLD3250T106W

HLD3400T106W

HLD3600T106W

HLD3125T107W

HLD3250T107W

HLD3400T107W

HLD3600T107W

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. 3 Factory sealed.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-195

2.3 2

Circuit Breaker Frame Only L S I G A

2 2

Series C

Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued

2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)

OPTIM 1050 23 LSIG

LSIA

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

70

ORPL125A070

2

90

ORPL125A090

2

100

ORPL125A100

110

ORPL125A110

125

ORPL125A125

125

ORPL025A125

150

ORPL025A150

175

ORPL025A175

200

ORPL025A200

225

ORPL025A225

250

ORPL025A250

200

ORPL40A200

225

ORPL40A225

2

250

ORPL40A250

300

ORPL40A300

2

350

ORPL40A350

400

ORPL40A400

300

ORPL60A300

350

ORPL60A350

400

ORPL60A400

500

ORPL60A500

600

ORPL60A600

2

2

Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 125

250

LDC3125T106W

LDC3250T106W

LDC3125T107W

LDC3250T107W

2 2 2 2

2

400

600

LDC3400T106W

LDC3600T106W

LDC3400T107W

LDC3600T107W

2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. 3 Factory sealed.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-196

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Rating Plug, Terminals.

2 2

100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug Circuit Breaker Frame Only

2

Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)

2

L S I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

2 2

OPTIM 550 2 LSI

LSIG

LSIA

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

CLD3125T57W

70

ORPL125A070

90

ORPL125A090

100

ORPL125A100

110

ORPL125A110

125

ORPL125A125

125

ORPL025A125

150

ORPL025A150

175

ORPL025A175

200

ORPL025A200

225

ORPL025A225

250

ORPL025A250

200

ORPL40A200

225

ORPL40A225

250

ORPL40A250

300

ORPL40A300

350

ORPL40A350

400

ORPL40A400

300

ORPL60A300

350

ORPL60A350

400

ORPL60A400

500

ORPL60A500

600

ORPL60A600

Fixed Rating Plug

2

Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac 125

250

400

600

CLD3125T52W

CLD3250T52W

CLD3400T52W

CLD3600T52W

CLD3125T56W

CLD3250T56W

CLD3400T56W

CLD3600T56W

CLD3250T57W

CLD3400T57W

CLD3600T57W

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-197

2.3 2

Series C

100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only

2

L S I G A

2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)

OPTIM 550 2 LSI

LSIG

LSIA

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

CHLD3125T57W

70

ORPL125A070

2

90

ORPL125A090

2

100

ORPL125A100

110

ORPL125A125

125

ORPL125A125

125

ORPL025A125

150

ORPL025A150

175

ORPL025A175

200

ORPL025A200

225

ORPL025A225

250

ORPL025A250

200

ORPL40A200

225

ORPL40A225

2

250

ORPL40A250

350

ORPL40A350

2

400

ORPL40A400

300

ORPL60A300

350

ORPL60A350

400

ORPL60A400

500

ORPL60A500

600

ORPL60A600

2 2

2

Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 125

250

CHLD3125T52W

CHLD3250T52W

CHLD3125T56W

CHLD3250T56W

CHLD3250T57W

2 2 2 2

2

400

600

CHLD3400T52W

CHLD3600T52W

CHLD3400T56W

CHLD3600T56W

CHLD3400T57W

CHLD3600T57W

2 2 2 2

Fixed Rating Plug

Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-198

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only

2

Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

2

– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)

L S I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

2

OPTIM 550 2 LSI

LSIG

LSIA

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

70

ORPL125A070

90

ORPL125A090

100

ORPL125A100

110

ORPL125A110

125

ORPL125A125

125

ORPL025A125

150

ORPL025A150

175

ORPL025A175

200

ORPL025A200

225

ORPL025A225

250

ORPL025A250

200

ORPL40A200

225

ORPL40A225

250

ORPL40A250

300

ORPL40A300

350

ORPL40A350

400

ORPL40A400

300

ORPL60A300

350

ORPL60A350

400

ORPL60A400

500

ORPL60A500

600

ORPL60A600

2

Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 125

250

400

600

CLDC3125T52W

CLDC3250T52W

CLDC3400T52W

CLDC3600T52W

CLDC3125T56W

CLDC3250T56W

CLDC3400T56W

CLDC3600T56W

CLDC3125T57W

CLDC3250T57W

CLDC3400T57W

CLDC3600T57W

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-199

2.3 2

Circuit Breaker Frame Only L S I G A

2 2

Series C

100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug

2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)

OPTIM 1050 23 LSIG

LSIA

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

70

ORPL125A070

2

90

ORPL125A090

2

100

ORPL125A100

110

ORPL125A110

125

ORPL125A125

125

ORPL025A125

150

ORPL025A150

175

ORPL025A175

200

ORPL025A200

225

ORPL025A225

250

ORPL025A250

200

ORPL40A200

225

ORPL40A225

2

250

ORPL40A250

300

ORPL40A300

2

350

ORPL40A350

400

ORPL40A400

300

ORPL60A300

350

ORPL60A350

400

ORPL60A400

500

ORPL60A500

600

ORPL60A600

2

2

Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac 125

250

CLD3125T106W

CLD3250T106W

CLD3125T107W

CLD3250T107W

2 2 2 2

2

400

600

CLD3400T106W

CLD3600T106W

CLD3400T107W

CLD3600T107W

2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. 3 Factory sealed.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-200

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only L S I G A Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

2

Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

2

– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)

2 2

OPTIM 1050 23 LSIG

LSIA

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

70

ORPL125A070

90

ORPL125A090

100

ORPL125A100

110

ORPL125A110

125

ORPL125A125

125

ORPL025A125

150

ORPL025A150

175

ORPL025A175

200

ORPL025A200

225

ORPL025A225

250

ORPL025A250

200

ORPL40A200

225

ORPL40A225

250

ORPL40A250

300

ORPL40A300

350

ORPL40A350

400

ORPL40A400

300

ORPL60A300

350

ORPL60A350

400

ORPL60A400

500

ORPL60A500

600

ORPL60A600

2 2

Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 125

250

400

600

CHLD3125T106W

CHLD3250T106W

CHLD3400T106W

CHLD3600T106W

CHLD3125T107W

CHLD3250T107W

CHLD3400T107W

CHLD3600T107W

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. 3 Factory sealed.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-201

2.3 2

Circuit Breaker Frame Only L S I G A

2 2

Series C

100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued

2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)

OPTIM 1050 23 LSIG

LSIA

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

70

ORPL125A070

2

90

ORPL125A090

2

100

ORPL125A100

110

ORPL125A110

2

2

Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 125

250

CLDC3125T106W

CLDC3250T106W

CLDC3125T107W

CLDC3250T107W

2 2 2

125

ORPL125A125

125

ORPL025A125

150

ORPL025A150

175

ORPL025A175

200

ORPL025A200

225

ORPL025A225

250

ORPL025A250

200

ORPL40A200

225

ORPL40A225

2

250

ORPL40A250

300

ORPL40A300

2

350

ORPL40A350

2

2

400

600

CLDC3400T106W

CLDC3600T106W

CLDC3400T107W

CLDC3600T107W

2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. 3 Factory sealed.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-202

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

400

ORPL40A400

300

ORPL60A300

350

ORPL60A350

400

ORPL60A400

500

ORPL60A500

600

ORPL60A600

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information Line and Load Terminals Eaton’s line and load terminals provide wire connecting capabilities for specific ranges of continuous current ratings and wire types. All terminals comply with Underwriters Laboratories Standards UL 486A and UL 486B and CSA Standard C22.2 No. 65M. Unless otherwise specified,

2

L-Frame circuit breaker line and load terminals are shipped separately for field installation. The wire connecting terminal is secured with two panhead, slotted screws and lockwashers that can be checked for the correct torque loading or retightened from the front of the circuit

breaker before installation of the conductors. (Applies to all styles.) The circuit breaker line/load terminal conductors are positioned in the conducting holes in the wire connecting terminal and are secured with recessed socket screws that are tightened to the correct torque loading from the front of the circuit breaker.

Ordering Information L-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI terminals as standard. When optional copper terminals are required, order by catalog Number. Specify if factory installation is required.

2 2 2 2 2 2

Terminals

2

TA401LD or TA603LD Terminal (Step-Type Terminal Requires Terminal Cover and Warning Label. See Inset.)

Pan-Head Screws and Lockwashers

TA450LD or TA602LD or T602LD Terminal

2

Pan-Head Screws and Lockwashers (Installed before Cable Clamping Screws)

2 2

Terminal Cover

2 2 2 2

Warning Label

2

Retainer

2

Screws

Circuit Breaker Line Terminal Cover

2 2

Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes

Terminal Body Material

Wire Type

Terminals with Control Wire Termination

Terminal

AWG Wire Range/Number of Conductors

Metric Wire Range mm2

Poles

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2 2 2

Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals

2

400

Aluminum

Cu/AI

4/0–600 (1)

120–300

Two-pole kit 1

2TA401LDK

—

400

Aluminum

Cu/AI

4/0–600 (1)

120–300

Three-pole kit 1

3TA401LDK

—

400

Aluminum

Cu/AI

4/0–600 (1)

120–300

Four-pole kit 1

4TA401LDK

—

450

Aluminum

Cu/AI

4–4/0 (2)

25–95

2

TA450LD

—

500

Aluminum

Cu/AI

3/0–350 (2)

95–150

2

TA602LD

TA602LDCW

600

Aluminum

Cu/AI

400–500 (2)

185–240

Two-pole kit 1

2TA603LDK

2TA603LDKCW

600

Aluminum

Cu/AI

400–500 (2)

185–240

Three-pole kit 1

3TA603LDK

3TA603LDKCW

600

Aluminum

Cu/AI

400–500 (2)

185–240

Four-pole kit 1

4TA603LDK

4TA603LDKCW

2

120–250

2

T602LD

T602LDCW

2

2 2 2

Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals 600

Copper

Cu

250–350 (2)

2

Notes 1 Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. 2 Individually packed.

2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-203

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2

Accessories

2

Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker.

2 2

LD Frame Accessories Reference Page

Two-Pole 1, Three-Pole

Four-Pole

Left

Right

Left

Alarm lockout (Make/Break)

V4-T2-276

■

■

■

■

Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break)

V4-T2-276

■

■

■

■

Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B)

V4-T2-278

■

■

■

■

Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B)

V4-T2-278

■

■

■

■

Auxiliary switch (3A, 3B)

V4-T2-278

■

■

■

■

2

Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) and alarm switch combination

V4-T2-280

■

■

■

■

2

Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) and alarm switch combination

V4-T2-280

■

■

■

■

Shunt trip—standard 4

V4-T2-282

■

■

■

■

Shunt trip—low energy 4

V4-T2-285

■

■

■

■

Undervoltage release mechanism 4

V4-T2-291

■

■

■

■

2

Eaton PowerNet communications kit (OPTIM 550)

V4-T2-293

2

End cap kit

V4-T2-308

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Control wire terminal kit

V4-T2-309

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Base mounting hardware

V4-T2-311

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Terminal shields

V4-T2-313

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Interphase barriers

V4-T2-313

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Non-padlockable handle block

V4-T2-314

Padlockable handle lock hasp

V4-T2-315

❏

Key interlock kit

V4-T2-316

❏

2

Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers

V4-T2-317

●

●

●

2

Walking beam interlock—requires two breakers

V4-T2-317

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Electrical (motor) operator

V4-T2-318

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Plug-in adapters

V4-T2-320

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Rear connecting studs

V4-T2-321

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Panelboard connecting straps

V4-T2-322

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Handle mechanisms

V4-T2-430

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Handle extension

V4-T2-445

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Solid-state (electronic) portable test kit

V4-T2-324

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2 2 2 2

2

2

2

2

2 2 2 2 2

Description Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole)

Center

Center

Right

Neutral 2

3

■

External Accessories

■

■ ❏

❏

❏

❏

❏

❏

Legend ■ Applicable in indicated pole position ❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both ● Accessory available/modification available Notes Two-pole breaker supplied in three-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole. 2 Refer to Eaton for appropriate neutral pole accessory combinations. 3 OPTIM model 1050 is factory sealed and does not have the right pole space available for accessories. 4 Shunt trip and UVR cannot be mounted in right poles on LES or OPTIM trip units. Standard non-tripping internal accessories can be mounted in the left or right poles of LES and 550 OPTIM trip units. 1

2 2 2 V4-T2-204

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

LD Frame Accessories, continued Description

Reference Page

Two-Pole 1, Three-Pole Left

Center

Right

2

Four-Pole Left

Center

Right

Neutral

2

OPTIM System Components Three Poles Ground fault alarm unit

V4-T2-324

Potential transformer module

V4-T2-324

Breaker interface module (BIM)

V4-T2-325

Digitrip OPTIMizer

V4-T2-325

Auxiliary power module

V4-T2-325

2 2 2 2

Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Special calibration

—

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Moisture fungus treatment

V4-T2-116

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Freeze-tested circuit breakers

—

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Marine/naval application

—

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2 2 2 2

Legend ■ Applicable in indicated pole position ❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both ● Accessory available/modification available

2 2

310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories Description

Catalog Number

Electronic portable test kit

MTST230V 3

Trip unit tamper protection wire seal

5108A03H01

External neutral sensor

LGFCT600 4

Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication

TRIP-LED

Breaker-mount ammeter module

DIGIVIEW

Remote-mount ammeter module

DIGIVIEWR06

2 2 2 2 2

5

Notes 1 Two-pole breaker supplied in three-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole. 2 Refer to Eaton for appropriate neutral pole accessory combinations. 3 MTST230V applies to 100–230 Vac. 4 Included with all LD LSG and LSIG trip units and breakers. 5 Includes 6 ft cable for remote mounting; NEMA 3R rated.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-205

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2

Technical Data and Specifications

2

UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1

2

Circuit Breaker Type

Number of Poles

Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 240

277

480

600

125

250 23

2

Interrupting Capacity (kA rms Symmetrical Amperes) Volts DC

LDB

2, 3

65

—

35

25

—

22

LD

2, 3, 4

65

—

35

25

—

22

CLD 4

2, 3, 4

65

—

35

25

—

—

2

HLD, HLDB

2, 3, 4

100

—

65

35

—

25

CHLD 4

2, 3, 4

100

—

65

35

—

—

2

LDC, LDCB 5

2, 3, 4

200

—

100

50

—

30

CLDC 45

2, 3, 4

200

—

100

50

—

—

2

2 2 2

IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings

1

Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes) Volts AC (50/60 Hz)

Volts DC

Circuit Breaker Type

Number of Poles

240 Icu

Ics

Icu

Ics

Icu

Ics

Icu

Ics

LDB

2, 3

85

85

45

45

20

10

20

10

2

LD

2, 3, 4

85

85

45

45

20

10

20

10

4

2, 3, 4

85

85

45

45

20

10

—

—

2

HLD, HLDB

2, 3, 4

100

100

70

70

25

13

20

10

2

CHLD 4

2, 3, 4

100

100

70

70

25

13

—

—

LDC, LDCB

2, 3, 4

200

100

100

75

35

18

20

10

CLDC 4

2, 3, 4

200

100

100

75

35

18

—

—

2

2 2 2 2

CLD

415

250 23

690

Notes 1 Utilization Category A circuit breakers. 2 L/R = 8 milliseconds minimum. 3 Two-pole circuit breaker or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker. Incorporating thermal-magnetic trip unit only. 4 100% rated breakers. 5 Current limiting.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-206

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

310+ Specifications Description Trip Unit Type

310+ Adjustability Specifications Digitrip RMS 310+

Breaker Type Frame designation

LD Frame Specification

310+ settings

600 A

Ir = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes) (All 310+)

LD

Frames available

600 A

Continuous current range (A)

250–600 A

Ground fault pickup (A)

120–600 A

Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kAIC)

35, 65, 100

100% rated

Description

Specification

Yes

Protection Ordering options

LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG

250

B

300

C

315

D

350

E

400

F

450

G

500

H (= In)

600

2

2

4

4

2 2

Ir A

2

2 2 2 2

Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System (or Maintenance Mode)

Remote enabled on ALSI, ALSIG

Interchangeable trip unit

Yes

High load alarm (suffix B20) 1

Yes

7

7

Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B21) 1

LSG, LSIG, ALSIG

10

10

Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B22) 1

LSG, LSIG, ALSIG

12

12

Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG)

LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG

15

15

Cause of trip indication

Yes (via TRIP-LED or DIGIVIEW)

20

20

Thru-cover accessories

No

24

24

Position 1

2x

Position 2

3x

Position 3

4x

Position 4

5x

Position 5

6x

Position 6

7x

Position 7

8x

Position 8

8x

Position 9

8x

tsd (LS and LSG)

Fixed

67 @10x

2

tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds) (LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG)

Position 1

Inst

Position 2

120

2

tr = long delay time (seconds) (All 310+)

Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup (All 310+)

= short delay time I2t (milliseconds)

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

2

Position 3

300

Position 1

120

Position 2

180

Position 3

240

Position 4

360

Position 5

480

Position 6

600

tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds) (LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)

Position 1

Inst

Position 2

120

Position 3

300

2

Independently adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting

2

Maintenance Mode pickup (2.5 x In) (amperes) (310+ with Maintenance Mode—ALSI and ALSIG)

Fixed

1500

2

Ig (x In) = ground fault pickup (amperes) (LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)

2 2 2 2

Notes 1 B2x suffixes cannot be combined with B2x suffixes. 2 Not available for LD. Independently adjustable Ii setting available in LG, NG, and RG ALSI and ALSIG trip units.

2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-207

2.3 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Digitrip OPTIM Specifications Trip Unit Type

Digitrip OPTIM 550

Digitrip OPTIM 1050

2

rms sensing

Yes

Yes

2

Frame

L

L

2

Ampere range

200–600 A

200–600 A

Interrupting rating at 480 volts

35, 65, 100 (kA)

35, 65, 100 (kA)

2

Protection LSI, LSI(A), LSIG

LSI(A), LSIG

2

Breaker Type

Ordering options Fixed rated plug (In)

Yes

Yes

2

Overtemperature trip

Yes

Yes

2

Adjustable rating plug (In)

No

No

Long delay pickup

0.4–1.0 x (In)

0.4–1.0 x (In)

2

Long delay time I2t

2–24 seconds

2–24 seconds

2

Long delay time I4t

1–5 seconds

1–5 seconds

Long delay thermal memory

Yes

Yes

High load alarm

0.5–1.0 x Ir

0.5–1.0 x Ir

Long Delay Protection (L)

2

Short Delay Protection (S)

2

Short delay pickup

150–800% x (Ir)

150–800% x (Ir)

Short delay time I2t

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

Short delay time flat

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

Short delay time zone selective interlocking

Yes 1

Yes

200–800% x (In)

200–800% x (In)

2 2 2 2

Instantaneous Protection (I) Instantaneous pickup Discriminator

Yes

Yes

Instantaneous override

Yes

Yes

Ground Fault Protection (G)

2

Ground fault alarm

20–100% x (Is)

20–100% x (Is)

2

Ground fault pickup

20–100% x (Is)

20–100% x (Is)

Ground fault delay I2t

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

2

Ground fault delay flat

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

Ground fault zone selective interlocking

Yes 1

Yes

2

Ground fault thermal memory

Yes

Yes

2

Legend BIM = Breaker Interface Module (A) = GF Alarm Is = Sensor Rating In = Rating Plug Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting

2 2

Note Zone interlock kit.

1

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-208

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Digitrip OPTIM Specifications, continued Trip Unit Type

Digitrip OPTIM 550

Digitrip OPTIM 1050

Status LEDs

Yes

Yes

Cause of trip LEDs

Yes

Yes

Magnitude of trip information

Yes

Yes

Remote signal contact—ground alarm

Yes 1

Yes

Local auxiliary and bell alarm contact

Optional

Included

Digital display

Yes 2

Yes 2

Current

Yes

Yes

2 2

System Diagnostics

2 2 2

System Monitoring

Power and energy

No

Yes

Power quality—harmonics

No

Yes

Power factor

No

Yes

Yes 3

Yes

OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet

OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet

2 2 2 2

Communications PowerNet

2

Testing Testing method

2

Legend BIM = Breaker Interface Module (A) = GF Alarm Is = Sensor Rating In = Rating Plug Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting

2 2

Notes 1 Zone interlock kit. 2 By OPTIMizer/BIM. 3 Eaton’s PowerNet kit.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-209

2.3 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Dimensions and Weights Dimensions in Inches (mm) LD Frame

2

Number of Poles

Width

Height

Depth

2, 3

8.25 (209.6)

10.75 (273.1)

4.06 (103.1)

2

4

11.00 (279.4)

10.75 (273.1)

4.06 (103.1)

2

LD-Frame, Two- and Three-Pole

2

Side View

2

3.81 (96.8)

CL Handle

2

CL Breaker

3.44 (87.3) 1.72 (43.7)

2 2

Front View

Front Cover Cutout

2

3.28 (83.3)

0.25 (6.4) R

2

1.33 (33.7)2.29 (58.2)

10.75 (273.1)

1.50 (38.1)

3.64 (92.5)

2

8.21 (208.6)

0.19 R (4.8) R

7.28 (184.9)

2 2

8.25 (209.6)

2 2

Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs (kg)

2

LD Frame

2

Breaker Type

2

LD, HLD, LDC

18 (8.2)

20 (9.1)

25 (11.3)

14 (6.4)

15 (6.8)

20 (9.1)

3 (1.4)

4 (1.8)

5 (2.3)

LDB

18 (8.2)

20 (9.1)

25 (11.3)

—

—

—

—

—

—

2

Complete Breaker Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Frame Only Four-Pole

Two-Pole

Trip Unit Three-Pole

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-210

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Four-Pole

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Four-Pole

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Contents

Typical M-Frame Circuit Breaker

Description Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module. . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page V4-T2-116 V4-T2-117 V4-T2-118 V4-T2-121 V4-T2-135 V4-T2-153 V4-T2-161 V4-T2-185 V4-T2-212 V4-T2-213 V4-T2-218 V4-T2-219 V4-T2-221 V4-T2-256 V4-T2-222 V4-T2-237 V4-T2-267 V4-T2-269 V4-T2-270 V4-T2-273 V4-T2-304

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) Product Description ●

●

●

All Eaton M-Frame circuit breakers are HACR rated MDL-Frame circuit breakers are available as individual components (frame, trip unit, terminals), or factory assembled complete breakers MDLB, HMDLB-Frame circuit breakers with noninterchangeable trip units are suitable for reverse feed use

2

Standards and Certifications ●

CE marked

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-211

2.3 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Catalog Number Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. MDL Frame with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Technology Thermal-Magnetic Breakers and Frame 1

2

MDL 3 800 F

2

Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type MDL, MDLB HMDL, HMDLB

2 2

Number of Poles 2 = Two-pole 3 = Three-pole

2 2

Trip Unit Type MT

Number of Poles 2 = Two-pole 3 = Three-pole

2 2

2 2

Suffix Frame only (800 A only) High magnetic molded case switch 50 °C (thermal-magnetic trip units only) Without terminals Load side terminals only Line side terminals only

Trip Unit Rating/ Plug Ampere Rating 500 300 1 600 350 1 700 400 800 450

T V

Suffix = Thermal-magnetic = 50 °C (thermal-magnetic trip units only)

MDL Frame with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology 310+ Circuit Breaker

2 2

= = = = = =

MT 3 800 T

2

2

F K V W X Y

Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 1

2

2

Circuit Breaker/ Frame Ampere Rating 500 300 1 600 350 1 700 400 800 450

MDLB 3 800 F T36 B21 W Performance at 480 Vac MDLB = 50 kAIC HMDLB = 65 kAIC CMDLB = 50 kAIC, 100% rated CHMDLB = 65 kAIC, 100% rated

Number of Poles 3 = Three-pole

Terminals W = No terminals

Amperes 800

2 2

Designation F

T33 T32 T35 T36 T38 T39

= = = = = =

Trip Unit 310+ Electronic LS 310+ Electronic LSI 310+ Electronic LSG 310+ Electronic LSIG 310+ Electronic LSI with Maintenance Mode 310+ Electronic LSIG with Maintenance Mode

Blank = B20 = B21 = B22 = ZG =

Features No feature High load alarm Ground fault alarm, with trip Ground fault alarm, no trip Zone selective interlocking

Blank = B20 = B21 = B22 = ZG =

Features No feature High load alarm Ground fault alarm, with trip Ground fault alarm, no trip Zone selective interlocking

2 2

310+ Electronic Trip Unit 1

MES 3 800 ALSIG B21

2 2 2

Trip Unit Type MES

2 2 2 2

Number of Poles 3 = Three-pole

Amperes 800

LS = LSI = LSG = LSIG = ALSI = ALSIG =

Trip Unit 310+ Electronic LS 310+ Electronic LSI 310+ Electronic LSG 310+ Electronic LSIG 310+ Electronic LSI with Maintenance Mode 310+ Electronic LSIG with Maintenance Mode

Note 1 Frames are the same for thermal-magnetic or 310+ electronic trip units, e.g., MDL3800F, HMDL3800F, etc.

V4-T2-212

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Product Selection

2

Types MDL and HMDL Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units—Two-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac

High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac

2

Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Only For Use with Standard or High or Ultra High Interrupting Frames

2 2

Standard Terminals Only 1

2

Frame Only

Magnetic Trip Range is 5–10 Up Through 600 A; 4–8 on 700 and 800 A x Continuous Ampere Rating

See Page V4-T2-217 for Optional Terminals

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

HMDL2300

HMDL2800F

MT2300T

TA700MA1

HMDL2350

MT2350T

TA700MA1

2

MDL2400

HMDL2400

MT2400T

TA700MA1

MDL2450

HMDL2450

MT2450T

TA700MA1

500

MDL2500

HMDL2500

MT2500T

TA700MA1

600

MDL2600

HMDL2600

MT2600T

TA700MA1

700

MDL2700

HMDL2700

MT2700T

TA700MA1

800

MDL2800

HMDL2800

MT2800T

TA800MA2

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals

Frame Only

Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

300

MDL2300

MDL2800F

350

MDL2350

400 450

2 2 2 2 2

Types MDL and HMDL Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units—Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac

High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac

2

Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Only For Use with Standard or High or Ultra High Interrupting Frames

2

Frame Only

Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals

Frame Only

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

MDL3800F

HMDL3300

HMDL3800F

MT3300T

TA700MA1

HMDL3350

MT3400T

TA700MA1

HMDL3400

MT3400T

TA700MA1

MDL3450

HMDL3450

MT3450T

TA700MA1

500

MDL3500

HMDL3500

MT3500T

TA700MA1

600

MDL3600

HMDL3600

MT3600T

TA700MA1

700

MDL3700

HMDL3700

MT3700T

TA700MA1

800

MDL3800

HMDL3800

MT3800T

TA800MA2

Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals Catalog Number

300

MDL3300

350

MDL3350

400

MDL3400

450

2

Standard Terminals Only 1

Magnetic Trip Range is 5–10 Up Through 600 A; 4–8 on 700 and 800 A x Continuous Ampere Rating

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

2

See Page V4-T2-217 for Optional Terminals

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Note 1 Two terminals are required per pole.

2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-213

2.3 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Types MDLB and HMDLB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units—Two-Pole 1 Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac

High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac

Standard Terminals Only 2

Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals

Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals

See Page V4-T2-217 for Optional Terminals

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

300

MDLB2300

HMDLB2300

TA700MA1

2

350

MDLB2350

HMDLB2350

TA700MA1

400

MDLB2400

HMDLB2400

TA700MA1

2

450

MDLB2450

HMDLB2450

TA700MA1

500

MDLB2500

HMDLB2500

TA700MA1

2

600

MDLB2600

HMDLB2600

TA700MA1

2

700

MDLB2700

HMDLB2700

TA700MA1

800

MDLB2800

HMDLB2800

TA800MA2

2 2 2

2 2 2 2

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Types MDLB and HMDLB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units—Three-Pole 1 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac

High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac

Standard Terminals Only 2

Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals

Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals

See Page V4-T2-217 for Optional Terminals

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

300

MDLB3300

HMDLB3300

TA700MA1

2

350

MDLB3350

HMDLB3350

TA700MA1

400

MDLB3400

HMDLB3400

TA700MA1

2

450

MDLB3450

HMDLB3450

TA700MA1

500

MDLB3500

HMDLB3500

TA700MA1

2

600

MDLB3600

HMDLB3600

TA700MA1

700

MDLB3700

HMDLB3700

TA700MA1

2

800

MDLB3800

HMDLB3800

TA800MA2

2

Notes 1 Factory sealed for reverse feed application. 2 Two terminals are required per pole.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

V4-T2-214

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Types MDL and HMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Order as Individual Components: breaker frame, trip unit and terminals. See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-220.

2 2

Types MDL and HMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units—Three-Pole Circuit Breaker Frame Only

2

Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only 1 Standard LS

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac

High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Adjustable Short Rated 65 kAIC at Time Pickup with I2t Short Delay Ramp 480 Vac

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

800

MDL3800F

HMDL3800F

MES3800LS

Optional LSI

LSG

LSIG

Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay

Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I2t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection

Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Ground Fault Protection

2 2 Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 23 Catalog Number

MES3800LSI

MES3800LSG

MES3800LSIG

Types MDLB and HMDLB Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units

LGFCT600

Terminal Information See Page V4-T2-218

LS

LSI

LSG

Adjustable Short Time Pickup Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay with I2t Short Delay Ramp

Adjustable Short Time Pickup Independently Adjustable with I2t Short Delay and Short Time Pickup and Ground Neutral CT for Ground Fault Protection Fault Protection LSG and LSIG 23 Catalog Number

Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac MDLB3800FT33W

MDLB3800FT32W

HMDLB3800FT33W

HMDLB3800FT32W

LGFCT600

2

HMDLB3800FT35W

HMDLB3800FT36W

LGFCT600

2

100% Rated Types CMDL and CHMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units—Three-Pole

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C 800

Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac

High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac

Options LSI

Independently Adjustable Short Adjustable Short 2 Time Pickup with I t Time Pickup and Short Delay Ramp Delay

LSG

LSIG

Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I2t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection

Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Ground Fault Protection

Catalog Number CMDL3800F

CHMDL3800F

MES3800LS

MES3800LSI

MES3800LSG

MES3800LSIG

2 2 2 2

Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only 1 Standard LS

2

MDLB3800FT36W

100% Rated Types CMDL and CHMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 °C wire is applied at the 75 °C ampacity. All 100% rated circuit breakers have electronic trip units. Order as individual components: breaker frame, trip unit and terminals. See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-220.

Circuit Breaker Frame Only

2

MDLB3800FT35W

Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 800

2 2

LSIG

Catalog Number

800

2 2

4

Factory-Assembled Circuit Breaker Consisting of Frame and Trip Unit Less Terminals Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

2

2 2 Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 23 Catalog Number

Terminal Information

LGFCT600

See Page V4-T2-218

2 2 2

Notes 1 For AC use only. 2 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. 3 Included with LSG and LSIG trip units or breakers. 4 Factory sealed, suitable for reverse feed application. CMDLB and CHMDLB are also available.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-215

2.3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

2 2 2 2

Series C

Molded Case Switches Eaton’s molded case switches are used as compact switches in applications requiring high current switching capabilities. Molded case switches are constructed of circuit breaker

components and are of the high instantaneous automatic type. Molded case switches are listed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 489.

Molded Case Switches 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Circuit Breaker Only without Line and Load Terminals Catalog Number

Two-Pole 800

2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

MDL2800WK MDLB2800WK 1 HMDL2800WK

Three-Pole 800

MDL3800WK MDLB3800WK 1 HMDL3800WK

Notes 1 MDLB and HMDLB are suitable for reverse feed applications. Molded case switch may trip above 6000 amperes.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-216

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information

2

Line and Load Terminals M-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI terminals as standard. When optional copper or Cu/ AI terminals are required, order by catalog number. Specify if factory installation is required.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

TA700MA1

TA800MA2

TA801MA

2 2

Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes

Terminal Body Material

Wire Type

AWG Wire Range/No. Conductors

Terminal

Terminals with Control Wire Termination

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

TA700MA1CWT

2 2

Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals 700

Aluminum

Cu/AI

1–500 kcmil (2)

TA700MA1

800 std.

Aluminum

Cu/AI

3/0–400 kcmil (3)

TA800MA2

TA800MA2CWT

800

Aluminum

Cu/AI

500–750 kcmil (2)

TA801MA

TA801MACWT

2 2 2

Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals 600

Copper

Cu

2/0–500 kcmil (2)

T600MA1

—

800

Copper

Cu

3/0–300 kcmil (3)

T800MA1

—

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-217

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2

Accessories

2

Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker.

2 2

MD Frame Accessories Two-Pole 1

Three-Pole

Reference Page

Left

Right

Left

Alarm lockout (Make/Break)

V4-T2-276

■

■

■

■

Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break)

V4-T2-276

■

■

■

■

2

Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B)

V4-T2-278

■

■

■

■

2

Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B)

V4-T2-278

■

■

■

■

Auxiliary switch (3A, 3B)

V4-T2-278

■

■

■

■

Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) and alarm switch combination

V4-T2-280

■

■

■

■

Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) and alarm switch combination

V4-T2-280

■

■

■

■

2

Shunt trip—standard 2

V4-T2-283

■

■

■

■

2

Shunt trip—low energy 2

V4-T2-285

■

■

■

■

Undervoltage release mechanism 2

V4-T2-291

■

■

■

■

Rear fed terminals

V4-T2-310

●

●

●

2

Base mounting hardware

V4-T2-311

●

2

Terminal shields

V4-T2-313

●

Interphase barriers

V4-T2-313

●

Non-padlockable handle block

V4-T2-314

Padlockable handle lock hasp

V4-T2-315

❏

❏

2

Key interlock kit

V4-T2-316

❏

❏

2

Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers

V4-T2-317

●

●

●

●

●

Walking beam interlock—requires two breakers

V4-T2-317

●

●

●

●

●

Electrical (motor) operator

V4-T2-318

●

●

●

●

●

Plug-in adapters

V4-T2-320

●

●

●

●

●

2

Rear connecting studs

V4-T2-321

●

●

●

●

●

2

Panelboard connecting straps

V4-T2-322

●

●

●

●

●

Handle mechanisms

V4-T2-430

●

●

●

●

●

Handle extension

V4-T2-445

●

●

●

●

●

Solid-state (electronic) portable test kit

V4-T2-324

●

●

●

●

●

2 2

2

2

2

2

2

Description

Center

Right

Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole)

External Accessories ●

●

■ ❏ ❏

2

Modifications (Refer to Eaton)

2

Special calibration

—

●

●

●

●

●

Moisture fungus treatment

V4-T2-116

●

●

●

●

●

Freeze-tested circuit breakers

—

●

●

●

●

●

Marine/naval application

—

●

●

●

●

●

2 2 2 2 2

Legend ■ Applicable in indicated pole position ❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both

● Accessory available/modification available Notes Two-pole breaker supplied in three-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole. 2 Shunt trip and UVR cannot be mounted in right poles on MES trip units. 1

2 2 V4-T2-218

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories Description

Catalog Number

Electronic portable test kit

MTST230V 1

Trip unit tamper protection wire seal

5108A03H01

External neutral sensor

LGFCT600 2

Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication

TRIP-LED

Breaker-mount ammeter module

DIGIVIEW

Remote-mount ammeter module

DIGIVIEWR06 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Technical Data and Specifications UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity Ratings 4

2

Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)

Circuit Breaker Type

Number of Poles

240

480

600

250

MDL, MDLB

2, 3

65

50

25

22

CMDL

2, 3

65

50

25

—

2

Volts DC 56

Volts AC (50/60 Hz)

HMDL, HMDLB

2, 3

100

65

35

25

CHMDL

2, 3

100

65

35

—

2 2 2

IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 4

2

Interrupting Capacity rms (kA Symmetrical Amperes) I CU ≠ I CS

Circuit Breaker Type

Number of Poles

Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 240

415

690

MDL, MDLB

2, 3

65/65

50/50

20/10

20/10

CMDL

2, 3

65/65

50/50

20/10

—

HMDL, HMDLB

2, 3

100/100

70/50

25/13

20/10

CHMDL

2, 3

100/100

70/50

25/13

—

Volts DC 56

2

250

2 2 2

Notes 1 MTST230V applies to 100–230 Vac. 2 Included with all LD LSG and LSIG trip units and breakers. 3 Includes 6 ft cable for remote mounting; NEMA 3R rated. 4 Utilization Category A circuit breakers. 5 Two-pole or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker. Thermal-magnetic trip units only, MDL, HMDL breakers with electronic trip unit are not DC rated. 6 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds at 22 kA.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-219

2.3 2 2 2 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

310+ Specifications Description

310+ Adjustability Specifications MDL Frame Specification

Specification

Trip Unit Type

Digitrip RMS 310+

Description 310+ settings

Breaker Type Frame designation

MDL

Frames available

800 A

Continuous current range (A) Ground fault pickup (A)

Ir = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes) (All 310+)

320–800 A 160–800 A

Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kAIC) 100% rated

50, 65 Yes

800 A Ir A

320

B

400

C

450

D

500

E

600

F

630

2

Protection

2

Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System (or Maintenance Mode)

Remote enabled on ALSI, ALSIG

2

Interchangeable trip unit

Yes

High load alarm (suffix B20) 1

Yes

7

7

2

Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B21) 1

LSG, LSIG, ALSIG

10

10

Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B22) 1

LSG, LSIG, ALSIG

12

12

Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG)

LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG

15

15

Cause of trip indication

Yes (via TRIP-LED or DIGIVIEW)

20

20

Thru-cover accessories

No

24

24

Position 1

2x

Position 2

3x

2

Position 3

4x

2

Position 4

5x

Position 5

6x

2

Position 6

7x

Position 7

8x

2

Position 8

8x

2 2

Ordering options

2

LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG tr = long delay time (seconds) (All 310+)

Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup (All 310+)

G

700

H (= In)

800

2

2

4

4

Position 9

8x

2

tsd = short delay time I2t (milliseconds) (LS and LSG)

Fixed

67 @10x

2

tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds) (LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG)

Position 1

Inst

Position 2

120

Position 3

300

Position 1

160

Position 2

240

Position 3

320

Position 4

480

Position 5

640

2 Ig (x In) = ground fault pickup (amperes) (310+ w/ ground fault)

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Position 6

800

tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds) (LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)

Position 1

Inst

Position 2

120

Position 3

300

Independently adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting

2

Maintenance Mode pickup (2.5 x In) (amperes) (310+ with Maintenance Mode—ALSI and ALSIG)

Fixed

2000

Notes 1 B2x suffixes cannot be combined with B2x suffixes. 2 Not available for MDL. Independently adjustable Ii setting available in LG, NG, and RG ALSI and ALSIG trip units.

2 2 2 V4-T2-220

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Dimensions and Weights

2

Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2

MD Frame Number of Poles

Width

Height

Depth

2, 3

8.25 (209.6)

16.00 (406.4)

4.06 (103.1)

2 2

MDL-Frame, Two- and Three-Pole Drilling Plan

Front View

2

Side View

2

3.44 (87.3)

1.72 (43.7)

2 2

R 0.25 (6.4)

CL Breaker

2 R 0.19 (4.8)

CL Handle

1.33 (33.7)

1.50 (38.1)

2

16.00 (406.4)

3.28 (83.3)

2 2

0.97 (24.6)

2

3.64 (92.5) 7.28 (184.9)

2

4.06 (103.2)

8.25 (209.6)

2 2

Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs (kg)

2

MD Frame

2

Trip Unit 1

Complete Breaker

Frame Only

Breaker Type

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Two-Pole

MDL, HMDL (T/M T.U.)

26.5 (12.0)

29.0 (13.2)

24.5 (11.1)

26.0 (11.8)

2.5 (1.1)

3.0 (1.4)

MDL, HMDL (Elec. T.U.)

—

30.0 (13.6)

—

26.0 (11.8)

—

4.0 (1.8)

Three-Pole

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

2 2

Note 1 Thermal-magnetic only.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-221

2.3 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Typical N-Frame Breaker

Contents Description

2

Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) Catalog Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes)

2

Product Description ●

2 2

●

All Eaton N-Frame circuit breakers are suitable for reverse feed use All N-Frame circuit breakers are HACR rated

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-222

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Page V4-T2-116 V4-T2-117 V4-T2-118 V4-T2-121 V4-T2-135 V4-T2-153 V4-T2-161 V4-T2-185 V4-T2-211 V4-T2-223 V4-T2-224 V4-T2-232 V4-T2-233 V4-T2-236 V4-T2-237 V4-T2-256 V4-T2-267 V4-T2-269 V4-T2-270 V4-T2-273 V4-T2-304

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Catalog Number Selection

2

This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.

2 2

Circuit Breaker/Frame

ND 3 12 T3 2 W Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type ND HND NDC NDU CND CHND CNDC

Number of Poles 2 = Two-pole 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole

Circuit Breaker/Frame Ampere Rating 800 = 800 amperes 12 = 1200 amperes

T3 T5 T7 T10

Trip Model = Model 310 = Model 550 = Model 750 = Model 1050

2 Trip Type 2 = LSI 3 = LS 5 = LSG 6 = LSIG 7 = LSIA

E EH K W X Y

= = = = = =

2

Suffix 100% R.P. protected (four-pole) 50% R.P. protected (four-pole) High magnetic molded case switch Without terminals Load only terminals Line only terminals

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-223

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2

Product Selection

2

Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals.

2 2

Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Circuit Breaker Frame Only L S I G A

2 2 2

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)

OPTIM 550 2

Fixed Rating Plug

LSI

LSIG

LSIA

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

ND3800T57W

400

ORPN80A400

450

ORPN80A450

500

ORPN80A500

2

550

ORPN80A550

2

600

ORPN80A600

700

ORPN80A700

800

ORPN80A800

600

ORPN12A600

2

700

ORPN12A700

800

ORPN12A800

2

1000

ORPN12A100

1200

ORPN12A120

400

ORPN80A400

450

ORPN80A450

2

500

ORPN80A500

2

550

ORPN80A550

600

ORPN80A600

700

ORPN80A700

800

ORPN80A800

600

ORPN12A600

700

ORPN12A700

2

800

ORPN12A800

2

1000

ORPN12A100

1200

ORPN12A120

2 2

Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac 800

ND3800T52W

ND3800T56W

2

2

2 2

1200

ND312T52W

ND312T56W

ND312T57W

Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 800

HND3800T52W

HND3800T56W

HND3800T57W

2 2

2 2

1200

HND312T52W

HND312T56W

HND312T57W

Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.

2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-224

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only

Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

L S I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

2 Fixed Rating Plug

2

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

2

400

ORPN80A400

450

ORPN80A450

500

ORPN80A500

550

ORPN80A550

600

ORPN80A600

700

ORPN80A700

800

ORPN80A800

600

ORPN12A600

700

ORPN12A700

800

ORPN12A800

1000

ORPN12A100

1200

ORPN12A120

OPTIM 550 2 LSI

LSIG

LSIA

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

NDC3800T57W

Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 800

1200

NDC3800T52W

NDC312T52W

NDC3800T56W

NDC312T56W

NDC312T57W

2 2

– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)

Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-225

2.3 2

Circuit Breaker Frame Only

Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

L– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 S– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) I– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) A– Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)

2 2

Series C

Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs

2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

OPTIM 1050 23 LSIG

LSIA

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

400

ORPN80A400

2

450

ORPN80A450

2

500

ORPN80A500

550

ORPN80A550

2

600

ORPN80A600

700

ORPN80A700

2

800

ORPN80A800

600

ORPN12A600

2

700

ORPN12A700

2

800

ORPN12A800

1000

ORPN12A100

1200

ORPN12A120

400

ORPN80A400

450

ORPN80A450

500

ORPN80A500

2

550

ORPN80A550

600

ORPN80A600

2

700

ORPN80A700

800

ORPN80A800

600

ORPN12A600

700

ORPN12A700

800

ORPN12A800

1000

ORPN12A100

1200

ORPN12A120

400

ORPN80A400

2

450

ORPN80A450

2

500

ORPN80A500

550

ORPN80A550

2

600

ORPN80A600

700

ORPN80A700

2

800

ORPN80A800

600

ORPN12A600

700

ORPN12A700

2

800

ORPN12A800

1000

ORPN12A100

2

1200

ORPN12A120

2

2 2

Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac 800

1200

ND3800T106W

ND312T106W

ND3800T107W

ND312T107W

Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 800

HND3800T106W

HND3800T107W

2

2

1200

HND312T106W

HND312T107W

2 2 2

Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 800

1200

NDC3800T106W

NDC312T106W

NDC3800T107W

NDC312T107W

2

2 2

Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell (trip) alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. 3 Factory sealed.

V4-T2-226

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals.

2 2

100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Circuit Breaker Frame Only

Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)

2

L S I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

2 Fixed Rating Plug

2

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

2

400

ORPN80A400

450

ORPN80A450

500

ORPN80A500

550

ORPN80A550

600

ORPN80A600

700

ORPN80A700

800

ORPN80A800

600

ORPN12A600

700

ORPN12A700

800

ORPN12A800

1000

ORPN12A100

1200

ORPN12A120

2

400

ORPN80A400

450

ORPN80A450

2

500

ORPN80A500

550

ORPN80A550

600

ORPN80A600

700

ORPN80A700

800

ORPN80A800

600

ORPN12A600

700

ORPN12A700

800

ORPN12A800

1000

ORPN12A100

1200

ORPN12A120

OPTIM 550 2 LSI

LSIG

LSIA

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

CND3800T57W

Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac 800

1200 3

CND3800T52W

CND312T52W

CND3800T56W

CND312T56W

CND312T57W

Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 800

1200 3

CHND3800T52W

CHND312T52W

CHND3800T56W

CHND312T56W

CHND3800T57W

CHND312T57W

2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. 3 Includes conductor extension kit, which increases breaker length 3.75 on each end. Terminal ordered separate.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-227

2.3 2

Series C

100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only

2

L S I G A

2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)

OPTIM 550 2

Fixed Rating Plug

LSI

LSIG

LSIA

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

CNDC3800T57W

400

ORPN80A400

2

450

ORPN80A450

2

500

ORPN80A500

550

ORPN80A550

2

600

ORPN80A600

700

ORPN80A700

2

800

ORPN80A800

600

ORPN12A600

2

700

ORPN12A700

2

800

ORPN12A800

1000

ORPN12A100

1200

ORPN12A120

2 2

2 2 2

Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 800

1200 3

CNDC3800T52W

CNDC312T52W

CNDC3800T56W

CNDC312T56W

CNDC312T57W

Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. 3 Includes conductor extension kit, which increases breaker length 3.75 on each end. Terminal ordered separate.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-228

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Circuit Breaker Frame Only

Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

L S I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

2 Fixed Rating Plug

2

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

2

400

ORPN80A400

450

ORPN80A450

500

ORPN80A500

550

ORPN80A550

600

ORPN80A600

700

ORPN80A700

800

ORPN80A800

600

ORPN12A600

700

ORPN12A700

800

ORPN12A800

1000

ORPN12A100

1200

ORPN12A120

2

400

ORPN80A400

450

ORPN80A450

2

550

ORPN80A550

600

ORPN80A600

700

ORPN80A700

800

ORPN80A800

600

ORPN12A600

700

ORPN12A700

800

ORPN12A800

1000

ORPN12A100

1200

ORPN12A120

OPTIM 1050 23 LSIG

LSIA

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac 800

1200

CND3800T106W

CND312T106W

CND3800T107W

CND312T107W

Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 800

1200

CHND3800T106W

CHND312T106W

CHND3800T107W

CHND312T107W

2 2

– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)

Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 One Form C auxiliary switch one Form C bell (trip) alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. 3 Factory sealed.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-229

2.3 2

Circuit Breaker Frame Only L S I G A

2 2

Series C

100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs, continued

2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)

OPTIM 1050 23 LSIG

LSIA

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

400

ORPN80A400

2

450

ORPN80A450

2

500

ORPN80A500

550

ORPN80A550

2

600

ORPN80A600

700

ORPN80A700

2

800

ORPN80A800

600

ORPN12A600

2

700

ORPN12A700

2

800

ORPN12A800

1000

ORPN12A100

1200

ORPN12A120

2

2 2 2

Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 800

1200

CNDC3800T106W

CNDC3800T107W

CNDC312T106W 4

CNDC312T107W

Type ND Molded Case Switches Type ND High Instantaneous (K) Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Three-Pole

Four-Pole 5

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

800

ND3800WK

ND4800WK

2

1200

2

2

HND3800WK

HND4800WK

ND312WK

ND412WK

HND312WK

HND412WK

2

Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 One Form C auxiliary switch one Form C bell (trip) alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. 3 Factory sealed. 4 Includes conductor extension kit, which increases breaker length 3.75 on each end. Terminal ordered separate. 5 Neutral is in right pole.

2

Molded case switch will trip above 14,000 amperes. For UL listed, series tested molded case switch application data, refer to Eaton.

2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-230

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information

2

Line and Load Terminals—Ordering Information N-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI terminals as standard. When optional copper or Cu/AI terminals are required, order by catalog number. Specify if factory installation is required.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

TA1200NB1

TA1201NB1

T700NB1

2

T1000NB1

2

Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes

Terminal Body Material

Wire Type

AWG Wire Range/ No. Conductors

Metric Wire Range mm2

Catalog Number

2 2

Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals 700

Aluminum

Cu/AI

1–500 kcmil (2)

50–240

TA700NB1

1000

Aluminum

Cu/AI

3/0–400 kcmil (3)

95–185

TA1000NB1 1

2 2

1

1200

Aluminum

Cu/AI

4/0–500 kcmil (4)

120–240

TA1200NB1

1200

Aluminum

Cu/AI

500–750 kcmil (3)

300–400

TA1201NB1 2

2

Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals 700

Copper

Cu

2/0–500 kcmil (2)

70–240

T700NB1

1000

Copper

Cu

3/0–500 kcmil (3)

95–240

T1000NB1

1200

Copper

Cu

3/0–400 kcmil (4)

95–185

T1200NB3

2 2

Notes 1 Terminal rating is AL9CU. 2 Terminal rating is AL7CU.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-231

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2

Accessories

2

Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker.

2 2

ND Frame Accessories

2

Description

Reference Page

Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole)

1

2

Alarm lockout (Make/Break)

V4-T2-276

Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break)

V4-T2-276

2

Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B)

2

Three-Pole Left

Four-Pole Center

Right

Left

Center

Right

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

V4-T2-278

■

■

■

■

Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B)

V4-T2-278

■

■

■

■

Auxiliary switch (3A, 3B)

V4-T2-278

■

■

■

■

2

Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) and alarm switch combination

V4-T2-280

■

■

■

■

Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) and alarm switch combination

V4-T2-280

■

■

■

■

2

Shunt trip—standard

V4-T2-284

■

■

Shunt trip—low energy

V4-T2-285

■

■

2

Undervoltage release mechanism

V4-T2-292

■

Eaton PowerNet communications kit (OPTIM 550)

V4-T2-293

Neutral

■ ■

2

External Accessories

2

Base mounting hardware

V4-T2-311

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Interphase barriers

V4-T2-313

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Terminal shield

V4-T2-313

■

■

■

Non-padlockable handle block

V4-T2-314

2

Padlockable handle lock hasp

V4-T2-315

❏

❏

❏

❏

Key interlock kit

V4-T2-316

❏

❏

❏

❏

2

Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers

V4-T2-317

●

●

●

2

Walking beam interlock—requires two breakers

V4-T2-317

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Electrical (motor) operator

V4-T2-319

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Plug-in adapters

V4-T2-320

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Rear connecting studs

V4-T2-321

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Panelboard connecting straps

V4-T2-322

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Handle mechanisms

V4-T2-430

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Handle extension

V4-T2-445

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Solid-state (electronic) portable test kit

V4-T2-325

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

OPTIM System Components Three Poles

■

■

2

Ground fault alarm unit

V4-T2-324

Potential transformer module

V4-T2-324

2

Breaker interface module (BIM)

V4-T2-325

Digitrip OPTIMizer

V4-T2-325

2

Auxiliary power module

V4-T2-325

2

Special calibration

—

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2

Moisture fungus treatment

V4-T2-116

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Freeze-tested circuit breakers

—

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Marine/naval application

—

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2 2 2 2

Modifications (Refer to Eaton)

Legend ■ Applicable in indicated pole position ❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both ● Accessory available/modification available Note OPTIM 550 and 1050 are factory sealed and do not have the right pole available for accessories.

1

V4-T2-232

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Technical Data and Specifications

2 2

UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1 Circuit Breaker Type

Number of Poles

Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 240

277

480

600

ND

2, 3, 4

65

—

50

25

CND 2

2, 3, 4

65

—

50

25

HND

2, 3, 4

100

—

65

35

CHND 2

2, 3, 4

100

—

65

35

NDC

2, 3, 4

200

—

100

65

2, 3, 4

200

—

100

65

CNDC 2 NDU

3

2

Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)

3

300

4

—

150

75

2 2 2 2 2

5

2

IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1 Circuit Breaker Type

2

Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes) Number of Poles

Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 240

415

690

2

Icu

2, 3, 4

85

50

20

2

Ics

2, 3, 4

85

50

10

2

Icu

2, 3, 4

85

50

20

Ics

2, 3, 4

85

50

10

2

2, 3, 4

100

70

25

2, 3, 4

100

50

13

2

Icu

2, 3, 4

100

70

25

2

Ics

2, 3, 4

100

50

13

2

Icu

2, 3, 4

200

100

35

2

Ics

2, 3, 4

100

50

18

2

Icu

2, 3, 4

200

100

35

Ics

2, 3, 4

100

50

18

2

ND

CND 2

2

HND Icu Ics CHND

2

NDC

CNDC 2

2

Notes 1 Utilization Category A circuit breakers. 2 100% rated breakers. 3 800 amperes maximum rating. 4 Successfully tested at 300 kAIC, although UL recognizes maximum of 200 kAIC at 240 Vac. 5 Successfully tested at 75 kAIC, although UL recognizes maximum of 65 kAIC at 600 Vac.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-233

2.3 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

N-Frame Digitrip Trip Unit Type

Digitrip OPTIM 550

Digitrip OPTIM 1050

2

rms sensing

Yes

Yes

2

Frame

N

N

2

Ampere range

400–1200 A

400–1200 A

Interrupting rating at 480 volts

50, 65, 100 (kA)

50, 65, 100 (kA)

2

Protection LSI, LSIG, LSI(A)

LSI(A), LISG

2

Breaker Type

Ordering options Fixed rated plug (In)

Yes

Yes

2

Overtemperature trip

Yes

Yes

2

Adjustable rating plug (In)

No

No

Long delay pickup

0.4–1.0 x (In)

0.4–1.0 x (In)

2

Long delay time I2t

2–24 seconds

2–24 seconds

Long delay time I4t

1–5 seconds

1–5 seconds

Long delay thermal memory

Yes

Yes

2

High load alarm

No

0.5–1.0 x Ir

2

Short delay pickup

150–800% x (Ir)

150–800% x (Ir)

Short delay time I2t

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

2

Short delay time flat

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

2

Short delay time zone selective interlocking

Yes

Yes

Instantaneous Protection (I) 200–800% x (In)

200–800% x (In)

2

2 2

Long Delay Protection (L)

Short Delay Protection (S)

Instantaneous pickup Discriminator

Yes

Yes

Instantaneous override

Yes

Yes

Ground Fault Protection (G)

2

Ground fault alarm

20–100% x (Is)

20–100% x (Is)

2

Ground fault pickup

20–100% x (Is)

20–100% x (Is)

Ground fault delay I2t

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

2

Ground fault delay flat

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

Ground fault zone selective interlocking

Yes 1

Yes

2

Ground fault thermal memory

Yes

Yes

2

Status LEDs

Yes

Yes

2

Cause of trip LEDs

Yes

Yes

Magnitude of trip information

Yes

Yes

2

Remote signal contact—ground alarm

Yes 1

Yes

Local auxiliary and bell alarm contact

Optional

Included

2 2 2 2

System Diagnostics

Legend BIM = Breaker Interface Module (A) = GF Alarm Is = Sensor Rating In = Rating Plug Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting Note Zone interlock kit.

1

2 2 2 V4-T2-234

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

N-Frame Digitrip, continued Trip Unit Type

Digitrip OPTIM 550

Digitrip OPTIM 1050

Yes 1

Yes 1

2 2

System Monitoring Digital display Current

Yes

Yes

Power and energy

No

Yes

Power quality—harmonics

No

Yes

Power factor

No

Yes

No 2

Yes

OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet

OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet

2 2 2

Communications Eaton PowerNet

2

Testing Testing method

2 2

Legend BIM = Breaker Interface Module (A) = GF Alarm Is = Sensor Rating In = Rating Plug Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting

2 2

Notes 1 By OPTIMizer/BIM. 2 Eaton’s PowerNet kit.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-235

2.3 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Dimensions and Weights Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2 2 2 2 2

ND Frame Number of Poles

Width

Height

Depth

2, 3 4

8.25 (209.6)

16.00 (406.4)

5.50 (139.7)

11.13 (282.6)

16.00 (406.4)

5.50 (139.7)

ND-Frame, Two- and Three-Pole Front View

2 2

3.44 (87.3)

2 2 2 2 2

1.72 (43.6)

1.91 (48.4)

0.25 R (6.4 R) CL Handle

2

CL Handle

16.00 (406.4)

0.19 R (4.8 R)

3.68 (93.2)

OFF/O

3.19 (80.9)

6.38 (161.9) 8.25 (209.6)

2 2 2 2

ON/I

1.50 (38.1)

2 2

Side View

Front Cover Cutout

Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg) ND Frame Complete Breaker Breaker Type

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Four-Pole

ND, HND, NDC, NDU

37 (16.8)

45 (20.4)

58 (26.3)

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-236

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

5.50 (139.7)

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Typical R-Frame Breaker

2.3

Contents Description Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module. . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page V4-T2-116 V4-T2-117 V4-T2-118 V4-T2-121 V4-T2-135 V4-T2-153 V4-T2-161 V4-T2-185 V4-T2-211 V4-T2-222 V4-T2-238 V4-T2-239 V4-T2-251 V4-T2-252 V4-T2-255 V4-T2-256 V4-T2-267 V4-T2-269 V4-T2-270 V4-T2-273 V4-T2-304

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes)

2

Product Description

2

●

●

Eaton R-Frame circuit breakers are available as frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug and terminals All R-Frame circuit breakers are suitable for reverse feed use

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-237

2.3 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Catalog Number Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. Circuit Breaker/Frame

2 2 2 2

RD 3 16 T53 W Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type RD RDC CRD 2 CRDC 2

2 2 2

Number of Poles 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole

Circuit Breaker/Frame Ampere Rating 16 = 1600 amperes 20 = 2000 amperes 25 = 2500 amperes

T53 T65 T86 T96 T106 T107

Trip Type 1 = Digitrip RMS 510 LS = Digitrip RMS 610 LSG = Digitrip RMS 810 LSIG = Digitrip RMS 910 LSIG = Digitrip OPTIM 1050 LSIG = Digitrip OPTIM 1050 LSIA

Notes 1 For complete list of available trip types, refer to Pages V4-T2-239 to V4-T2-248. 2 No four-pole for CRD and CRDC.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-238

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

W P R K

= = = =

Suffix Without terminals 100% protected neutral pole Ground fault remote (310 only) Molded case switch

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Product Selection

2

Digitrip RMS 510 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.

2 2

Digitrip RMS 510 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Circuit Breaker Frame Only Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

L S I G

Digitrip Rating Plug Only

– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)

LI

LS

LSI

LIG

LSG

2 LSIG

Catalog Number

Rated Current (In)

Fixed Rating Plug

800

RP6R16A080

1000

RP6R16A100

1200

RP6R16A120

1600

RP6R16A160

1000

RP6R20A100

1200

RP6R20A120

1600

RP6R20A160

2000

RP6R20A200

1600

RP6R25A160

2000

RP6R25A200

2500

RP6R25A250

800

RP6R16A080

1000

RP6R16A100

1200

RP6R16A120

1600

RP6R16A160

1000

RP6R20A100

1200

RP6R20A120

1600

RP6R20A160

2000

RP6R20A200

1600

RP6R25A160

2000

RP6R25A200

2500

RP6R25A250

Catalog Number

Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 1600

2000

2500

RD316T51W

RD320T51W

RD325T51W

RD316T53W

RD320T53W

RD325T53W

RD316T52W

RD320T52W

RD325T52W

RD316T54W

RD320T54W

RD325T54W

RD316T55W

RD320T55W

RD325T55W

RD316T56W

RD320T56W

RD325T56W

Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 1600

2000

2500

RDC316T51W

RDC320T51W

RDC325T51W

RDC316T53W

RDC320T53W

RDC325T53W

RDC316T52W

RDC320T52W

RDC325T52W

RDC316T54W

RDC320T54W

RDC325T54W

RDC316T55W

RDC320T55W

RDC325T55W

2

RDC316T56W

RDC320T56W

RDC325T56W

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-239

2.3 2 2 2

Series C

100% Rated Digitrip RMS 510 Circuit Breakers The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 °C wire is applied at 75 °C ampacity. Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.

100% Rated Digitrip RMS 510 Circuit Breakers

2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Circuit Breaker Frame Only Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

L S I G

Digitrip Rating Plug Only

– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)

Rated Current (In)

Fixed Rating Plug

800

RP6R16A080

1000

RP6R16A100

1200

RP6R16A120

1600

RP6R16A160

1000

RP6R20A100

1200

RP6R20A120

1600

RP6R20A160

2000

RP6R20A200

800

RP6R16A080

1000

RP6R16A100

1200

RP6R16A120

1600

RP6R16A160

1000

RP6R20A100

2

1200

RP6R20A120

1600

RP6R20A160

2

2000

RP6R20A200

2 2 2

LI

LS

LSI

LIG

LSG

LSIG

Catalog Number

Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 1600

CRD316T51W

CRD316T53W

CRD316T52W

CRD316T54W

CRD316T55W

CRD316T56W

2 2

2000 1

CRD320T51W

CRD320T53W

CRD320T52W

CRD320T54W

CRD320T55W

CRD320T56W

2 2 2

Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 1600

—

CRDC316T53W

CRDC316T52W

CRDC316T54W

CRDC316T55W

CRDC316T56W

2 2

2

Catalog Number

2000 1

CRDC320T51W

CRDC320T53W

CRDC320T52W

CRDC320T54W

CRDC320T55W

Note 1 Includes B2016RDL rear connectors.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-240

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

CRDC320T56W

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Digitrip RMS 610 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.

2 2

Digitrip RMS 610 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Circuit Breaker Frame Only Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

L S I G

2

– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)

LI

LS

2

Digitrip Rating Plug Only

LSI

LIG

LSG

LSIG

Catalog Number

2

Rated Current (In)

Fixed Rating Plug Catalog Number

2

800

RP6R16A080

2

1000

RP6R16A100

1200

RP6R16A120

1600

RP6R16A160

1000

RP6R20A100

1200

RP6R20A120

1600

RP6R20A160

2000

RP6R20A200

1600

RP6R25A160

2000

RP6R25A200

2500

RP6R25A250

2

800

RP6R16A080

2

1000

RP6R16A100

1200

RP6R16A120

1600

RP6R16A160

1000

RP6R20A100

1200

RP6R20A120

1600

RP6R20A160

2000

RP6R20A200

1600

RP6R25A160

2000

RP6R25A200

2500

RP6R25A250

Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 1600

2000

2500

RD316T61W

RD320T61W

RD325T61W

RD316T63W

RD320T63W

RD325T63W

RD316T62W

RD320T62W

RD325T62W

RD316T64W

RD320T64W

RD325T64W

RD316T65W

RD320T65W

RD325T65W

RD316T66W

RD320T66W

RD325T66W

2 2 2 2 2

Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 1600

2000

2500

RDC316T61W

RDC320T61W

RDC325T61W

RDC316T63W

RDC320T63W

RDC325T63W

RDC316T62W

RDC320T62W

RDC325T62W

RDC316T64W

RDC320T64W

RDC325T64W

RDC316T65W

RDC320T65W

RDC325T65W

RDC316T66W

RDC320T66W

RDC325T66W

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-241

2.3 2 2 2

Series C

100% Rated Digitrip RMS 610 Circuit Breakers The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 °C wire is applied at 75 °C ampacity. Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.

100% Rated Digitrip RMS 610 Circuit Breakers

2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Circuit Breaker Frame Only Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

L S I G

Digitrip Rating Plug Only

– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)

Rated Current (In)

Fixed Rating Plug

800

RP6R16A080

1000

RP6R16A100

1200

RP6R16A120

1600

RP6R16A160

1000

RP6R20A100

1200

RP6R20A120

1600

RP6R20A160

2000

RP6R20A200

800

RP6R16A080

1000

RP6R16A100

1200

RP6R16A120

1600

RP6R16A160

1000

RP6R20A100

2

1200

RP6R20A120

1600

RP6R20A160

2

2000

RP6R20A200

2 2 2

LI

LS

LSI

LIG

LSG

LSIG

Catalog Number

Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 1600

CRD316T61W

CRD316T63W

CRD316T62W

CRD316T64W

CRD316T65W

CRD316T66W

2 2

2000 1

CRD320T61W

CRD320T63W

CRD320T62W

CRD320T64W

CRD320T65W

CRD320T66W

2 2 2

Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 1600

CRDC316T61W

CRDC316T63W

CRDC316T62W

CRDC316T64W

CRDC316T65W

CRDC316T66W

2 2

2

Catalog Number

2000 1

CRDC320T61W

CRDC320T63W

CRDC320T62W

CRDC320T64W

CRDC320T65W

Note 1 Includes B2016RDL rear connectors.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-242

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

CRDC320T66W

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Digitrip RMS 810 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.

2 2

Digitrip RMS 810 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Circuit Breaker Frame Only Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

L S I G

Digitrip Rating Plug Only

2

– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)

LI

LS

LSI

LIG

LSG

LSIG

Catalog Number

2000

2500

RD316T81W

RD320T81W

RD325T81W

RD316T83W

RD320T83W

RD325T83W

RD316T82W

RD320T82W

RD325T82W

RD316T84W

RD320T84W

RD325T84W

RD316T85W

RD320T85W

RD325T85W

RD316T86W

RD320T86W

RD325T86W

Fixed Rating Plug Catalog Number

2

800

RP6R16A080

2

1000

RP6R16A100

1200

RP6R16A120

1600

RP6R16A160

1000

RP6R20A100

1200

RP6R20A120

1600

RP6R20A160

2000

RP6R20A200

1600

RP6R25A160

2000

RP6R25A200

2500

RP6R25A250

2

800

RP6R16A080

2

1000

RP6R16A100

1200

RP6R16A120

1600

RP6R16A160

1000

RP6R20A100

1200

RP6R20A120

1600

RP6R20A160

2000

RP6R20A200

1600

RP6R25A160

2000

RP6R25A200

2500

RP6R25A250

Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 1600

2000

2500

RDC316T81W

RDC320T81W

RDC325T81W

RDC316T83W

RDC320T83W

RDC325T83W

RDC316T82W

RDC320T82W

RDC325T82W

RDC316T84W

RDC320T84W

RDC325T84W

RDC316T85W

RDC320T85W

RDC325T85W

RDC316T86W

RDC320T86W

RDC325T86W

2

Rated Current (In)

Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 1600

2

2 2 2 2 2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-243

2.3 2 2 2

2 2 2

Series C

100% Rated Digitrip RMS 810 Circuit Breakers The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 °C wire is applied at 75 °C ampacity. Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.

100% Rated Digitrip RMS 810 Circuit Breakers

2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Circuit Breaker Frame Only Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

L S I G

Digitrip Rating Plug Only

– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)

LI

LS

LSI

LIG

LSG

LSIG

Catalog Number

1600

CRD316T81W

CRD316T83W

CRD316T82W

CRD316T84W

CRD316T85W

CRD316T86W

2000 1

CRD320T81W

CRD320T83W

CRD320T82W

CRD320T84W

CRD320T85W

CRD320T86W

2 2 2

Fixed Rating Plug

800

RP6R16A080

1000

RP6R16A100

1200

RP6R16A120

Catalog Number

Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac

2 2

Rated Current (In)

1600

RP6R16A160

1000

RP6R20A100

1200

RP6R20A120

1600

RP6R20A160

2000

RP6R20A200

800

RP6R16A080

1000

RP6R16A100

1200

RP6R16A120

Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 1600

CRDC316T81W

CRDC316T83W

CRDC316T82W

CRDC316T84W

CRDC316T85W

CRDC316T86W

2

1600

RP6R16A160

1000

RP6R20A100

2

1200

RP6R20A120

1600

RP6R20A160

2

2000

RP6R20A200

2

2

2000 1

CRDC320T81W

CRDC320T83W

CRDC320T82W

CRDC320T84W

CRDC320T85W

Note 1 Includes B2016RDL rear connectors.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-244

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

CRDC320T86W

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Digitrip RMS 910 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.

2 2

Digitrip RMS 910 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Circuit Breaker Frame Only Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

L S I G

Digitrip Rating Plug Only

2

– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)

LI

LS

LSI

LIG

LSG

LSIG

Catalog Number

Fixed Rating Plug

2000

2500

RD316T91W

RD320T91W

RD325T91W

RD316T93W

RD320T93W

RD325T93W

RD316T92W

RD320T92W

RD325T92W

RD316T94W

RD320T94W

RD325T94W

RD316T95W

RD320T95W

RD325T95W

RD316T96W

RD320T96W

RD325T96W

Catalog Number

2

800

RP6R16A080

2

1000

RP6R16A100

1200

RP6R16A120

1600

RP6R16A160

1000

RP6R20A100

1200

RP6R20A120

1600

RP6R20A160

2000

2500

RDC316T91W

RDC320T91W

RDC325T91W

RDC316T93W

RDC320T93W

RDC325T93W

RDC316T92W

RDC320T92W

RDC325T92W

RDC316T94W

RDC320T94W

RDC325T94W

RDC316T95W

RDC320T95W

RDC325T95W

RDC316T96W

RDC320T96W

RDC325T96W

2 2 2 2

2000

RP6R20A200

1600

RP6R25A160

2000

RP6R25A200

2500

RP6R25A250

2

800

RP6R16A080

2

1000

RP6R16A100

1200

RP6R16A120

1600

RP6R16A160

1000

RP6R20A100

1200

RP6R20A120

1600

RP6R20A160

Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 1600

2

Rated Current (In)

Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 1600

2

2000

RP6R20A200

1600

RP6R25A160

2000

RP6R25A200

2500

RP6R25A250

2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-245

2.3 2 2 2

Series C

100% Rated Digitrip RMS 910 Circuit Breakers The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 °C wire is applied at 75 °C ampacity. Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.

100% Rated Digitrip RMS 910 Circuit Breakers

2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Circuit Breaker Frame Only Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

L S I G

Digitrip Rating Plug Only

– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)

Rated Current (In)

Fixed Rating Plug

800

RP6R16A080

1000

RP6R16A100

1200

RP6R16A120

1600

RP6R16A160

1000

RP6R20A100

1200

RP6R20A120

1600

RP6R20A160

2000

RP6R20A200

800

RP6R16A080

1000

RP6R16A100

1000

RP6R16A100

1200

RP6R16A120

1000

RP6R20A100

2

1200

RP6R20A120

1600

RP6R20A160

2

2000

RP6R20A200

2 2 2

LI

LS

LSI

LIG

LSG

LSIG

Catalog Number

Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 1600

CRD316T91W

CRD316T93W

CRD316T92W

CRD316T94W

CRD316T95W

CRD316T96W

2 2

2000 1

CRD320T91W

CRD320T93W

CRD320T92W

CRD320T94W

CRD320T95W

CRD320T96W

2 2 2

Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 1600

CRDC316T91W

CRDC316T93W

CRDC316T92W

CRDC316T94W

CRDC316T95W

CRDC316T96W

2 2

2

Catalog Number

2000 1

CRDC320T91W

CRDC320T93W

CRDC320T92W

CRDC320T94W

CRDC320T95W

Note 1 Includes B2016RDL rear connectors.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-246

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

CRDC320T96W

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.

2 2

Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Circuit Breaker Frame Only

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

L S I G A

Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

2

– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)

LSIA 1050

LSIG 1050

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

Fixed Rating Plug

2

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

800

ORPR16A080

1000

ORPR16A100

1200

ORPR16A120

1600

ORPR16A160

1000

ORPR20A100

1200

ORPR20A120

1600

ORPR20A160

2000

ORPR20A200

1600

ORPR25A160

2000

ORPR25A200

2500

ORPR25A250

2

800

ORPR16A080

1000

ORPR16A100

2

1200

ORPR16A120

1600

ORPR16A160

1000

ORPR20A100

1200

ORPR20A120

1600

ORPR20A160

2000

ORPR20A200

1600

ORPR25A160

2000

ORPR25A200

2500

ORPR25A250

2

Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 1600

2000

2500

RD316T107W

RD320T107W

RD325T107W

RD316T106W

RD320T106W

RD325T106W

Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 1600

2000

2500

RDC316T107W

RDC320T107W

RDC325T107W

RDC316T106W

RDC320T106W

RDC325T106W

2

2 2 2 2 2 2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-247

2.3 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

100% Rated 600 Volts AC Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.

2 2

100% Rated 600 Volts AC Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Circuit Breaker Frame Only

2 2 2

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

L S I G A

Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)

LSIA 1050

LSIG 1050

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

800

ORPR16A080

1000

ORPR16A100

1200

ORPR16A120

1600

ORPR16A160

1000

ORPR20A100

2

1200

ORPR20A120

1600

ORPR20A160

2

2000

ORPR20A200

800

ORPR16A080

2

1000

ORPR16A100

1200

ORPR16A120

2

1600

ORPR16A160

1000

ORPR20A100

2

1200

ORPR20A120

2

1600

ORPR20A160

2000

ORPR20A200

2 2

Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 1600

CRD316T107W

CRD316T106W

2 2

2

2

2000 1

CRD320T107W

Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 1600

2000 1

CRDC316T107W

2 2

Type RD—High Instantaneous (K)

2 2 2 2

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

CRDC316T106W

CRDC320T107W

Molded Case Switches Refer to Eaton for UL listed, series tested Molded Case Switch application data.

2

CRD320T106W

CRDC320T106W

Complete without Terminals Three-Pole

Four-Pole

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

1600

RD316WK

RD416WK

2000

RD320WK

RD420WK

Notes 1 Includes B2016RDL rear connectors. Molded case switch may trip above 17,500 amperes.

2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-248

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information

2

Line and Load Terminals Line and load terminals provide wire connecting capabilities for specific ranges of continuous current ratings and wire types. All terminals comply with Underwriters Laboratories Standards UL 486A and UL 486B and CSA C22.2 No. 65M. Unless otherwise specified, R-Frame circuit breaker line load terminals are shipped separately for field installation.

2

Ordering Information R-Frame circuit breakers have Cu/AI terminals as standard and Cu only terminals as an option. Specify if factory installation is required.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes

Terminal Body Material

Wire Type

Hardware

AWG/kcmil Wire Range/ No. Conductors

Metric Wire Range mm2

Catalog Number

2 2

Wire Terminals

2

1600

Aluminum

Cu/AI

English

500–1000 (4)

300–500

TA1600RD

1600

Copper

Cu

English

1–600 (4)

50–300

T1600RD

2000

Aluminum

Cu/AI

English

2–600 (6)

35–300

TA2000RD 1

2

—

English

—

—

B2016RD

2

Rear Connectors 2000

Copper

2

2000

Copper

—

English

—

—

B2016RDL

2500

Copper

—

English

—

—

B2500RD 3

2 2

Notes 1 Catalog Number includes bus connection, terminals and hardware for either line side or load side of three-pole breaker. 2 For use with 100% rated 1600 A and 2000 A frame. Do not order separately unless for replacement purposes. Included in breaker carton when 100% rated device is ordered. 3 For use with 2500 A frame. Do not order separately unless for replacement purposes. Included in breaker carton when 2500 A breaker is ordered.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-249

2.3 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Mounting Hardware Breaker Line/Load Conductors

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

TA2000RD

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-250

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Accessories

2

Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker.

2

RD Frame Accessories

2

Description

Reference Page

Three-Pole Left

2

Four-Pole Center

Right

Left

Center

Right

Neu.

Alarm lockout (Make/Break)

V4-T2-276

■

■

Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break)

V4-T2-276

■

■

Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B)

V4-T2-276

■

■

Auxiliary switch (4A, 4B)

V4-T2-276

■

■

Shunt trip—standard

V4-T2-284

■

■

Shunt trip—low energy

V4-T2-285

■

■

Undervoltage release mechanism

V4-T2-292

■

■

Accessory terminal block 2

V4-T2-293

■

2 2 2 ■

External Accessories Base mounting hardware

V4-T2-311

Padlockable handle lock hasp

V4-T2-314

Key interlock kit

V4-T2-316

Walking beam interlock

V4-T2-317

Electrical (motor) operator

●

2 2

Internal Accessories 1

2 2 2

●

■

■

■

■

2

V4-T2-319

■

■

■

■

2

Handle mechanisms

V4-T2-430

■

■

■

■

Handle extension 3

V4-T2-445

■

2

■

2

OPTIM System Components Breaker interface module (BIM)

V4-T2-325

●

●

●

Digitrip OPTIMizer

V4-T2-325

●

●

●

Auxiliary power module

V4-T2-325

●

●

●

Special calibration

—

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Moisture fungus treatment

V4-T2-116

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Freeze-tested circuit breakers

—

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Marine/naval application

—

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2 2

Modifications (Refer to Eaton)

Legend ■ Applicable in indicated pole position ● Accessory available/modification available

2 2 2 2 2

Notes All accessories mount in the RH cavity which will accept one each shunt trip, UVR, auxiliary switch and alarm switch. 2 Mounts outside breaker. 3 Included with breaker. 1

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-251

2.3 2 2 2 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Technical Data and Specifications

UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity Ratings

1

Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)

Circuit Breaker Type

Number of Poles

Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 240

277

480

600

RD

3, 4

125

—

65

50 50

CRD 2

3

125

—

65

RDC

3, 4

200

—

100

65

CRDC 2

3

200

—

100

65

2 2 2 2 2

IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings Circuit Breaker Type

1

Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes) Number of Poles

Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 240

415

690

Icu

3, 4

135

70

25

Ics

3, 4

100

50

13

RD

2

RDC Icu

3, 4

200

100

35

2

Ics

3, 4

100

50

18

2 2

Notes 1 Utilization Category A circuit breakers. 2 100% rated breakers. See Page V4-T2-253 for Trip Unit Specifications.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-252

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Specifications

2 2

R-Frame Digitrip Trip Unit Type

Digitrip RMS 510

Digitrip RMS 610

Digitrip RMS 810

Digitrip RMS 910

Digitrip OPTIM 1050

2

rms sensing

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

2

Frame

R

R

R

R

R

Ampere range

800–2500 A

800–2500 A

800–2500 A

800–2500 A

800–2500 A

2

Interrupting rating at 480 volts

65, 100 (kA)

65, 100 (kA)

65, 100 (kA)

65, 100 (kA)

65, 100 (kA)

LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG

LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG

LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG

LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG

LSI(A), LISG

2 2

Breaker Type

2

Protection Ordering options Fixed rated plug (In)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Overtemperature trip

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

2

Adjustable rating plug (In)

No

No

No

No

No

Long delay pickup

0.5–1.0 x (In)

0.5–1.0 x (In)

0.5–1.0 x (In)

0.5 –1.0 x (In)

0.4–1.0 x (In)

2

Long delay time I2t

2–24 seconds

2–24 seconds

2–24 seconds

2–24 seconds

2–24 seconds

Long delay time I4t

No

No

No

No

1–5 Seconds

Long Delay Protection (L)

2 2

Long delay thermal memory

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

High load alarm

No

0.85 x Ir

0.85 x Ir

0.85 x Ir

0.5-1.0 x Ir

Short delay pickup

200–600% S1 and S2 x (Ir)

200–600% S1 and S2 x (Ir)

200–600% S1 and S2 x (Ir)

200–600% S1 and S2 x (Ir)

150-800% x (Ir) 12

2

Short delay time I2t

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

Short delay time flat

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

2

Short delay time zone selective interlocking

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

200–600% M1and M2 x (In)

200–600% M1and M2 x (In)

200–600% M1and M2 x (In)

200–600% M1and M2 x (In)

200–800% x (In) 2

2 2

2

Short Delay Protection (S)

2

Instantaneous Protection (I) Instantaneous pickup Discriminator

Yes 3

Yes 3

Yes 3

Yes 3

Yes

Instantaneous override

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

2 2

Ground Fault Protection (G) Ground fault alarm 4

No

No

No

No

25–100% x (In)

Ground fault pickup 4

25–100% x (Is)

25-100% x (Is)

25–100% x (Is)

25–100% x (Is)

25–100% x (In)

Ground fault delay I2t

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

Ground fault delay flat

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

100 –500 ms

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

Ground fault zone selective interlocking

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Ground fault thermal memory

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

2 2 2

Legend BIM = Breaker Interface Module (A) = GF Alarm Is = Sensor Rating In = Rating Plug Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting x In

2 2 2

Notes 1 Except 2500 ampere frame is 200–600%. 2 Varies by frame. 3 LS/LSG only. 4 Not to exceed 1200 amperes.

2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-253

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2

R-Frame Digitrip, continued

2

Trip Unit Type

2

Digitrip RMS 510

Digitrip RMS 610

Digitrip RMS 810

Digitrip RMS 910

Digitrip OPTIM 1050

Yes

System Diagnostics Status LEDs

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Cause of trip LEDs

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Magnitude of trip information

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

2

Remote signal contacts

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

2

Digital display

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes 1

2

System Monitoring

Current

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

2

Voltage

No

No

No

Yes

No

2

Power and energy

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Power quality—harmonics

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

2

Power factor

No

No

Yes (over Eaton PowerNet only)

Yes

Yes

2

Communications No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

2

Testing Integral

Integral

Integral

Integral

OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet

2

Eaton PowerNet

Testing method

2

Legend BIM = Breaker Interface Module (A) = GF Alarm Is = Sensor Rating In = Rating Plug Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting x In

2

Note 1 By OPTIMizer/BIM.

2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-254

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Dimensions and Weights

2

Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2

RD Frame Number of Poles

Width

Height

Depth

3

15.50 (393.7)

16.00 (406.4)

9.75 (247.7)

4

20.00 (508.0)

16.00 (406.4)

9.75 (247.7)

2 2 2

RD-Frame, Three-Pole, 1600 and 2000 Amperes

2

Front View

7.25 (184.2)

14.50 (368.3)

11.13 (0.4) Dia. (4 Holes) Use 4, 0.38 (Mil) Dia. Bolts for Mounting Breaker

15.50 (393.7)

2

Side View

2

9.00 (228.6)

2

C L Breaker 5.09 (129.4) 9.69 (246.1)

7.75 (196.9)

2

C L Handle 16.00 (406.4)

15.00 (381.0)

2

Push To Trip

6.65 (166.7)

12.91 (327.8)

2

0.16 (4.0) R Typ.

2 2

Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg)

2

RD Frame

2

Complete Breaker Breaker Type

Three-Pole

Four-Pole

102 (46.3)

135 (61.2)

2 2

2

1600 Amperes RD, CRD 1, RDC, CRDC 1 2000 Amperes RD, RDC

102 (46.3)

135 (61.2)

CRD, CRDC

130 (59.0)

175 (79.4)

135 (61.2)

182 (82.6)

2

2500 Amperes RD, RDC

2

2

Note 1 No four-pole for CRD and CRDC.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-255

2.3 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Contents

Motor Circuit Protectors

Description

2

Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Catalog Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP)

2

Product Description

Standards and Certifications

Designated as Eaton’s Types GMCP and HMCP, the instantaneous-only motor circuit protector (MCP) is available in ratings from 3 A to 1200 A for motor starter sizes 0 through 8.

The MCP is designed to comply with the applicable requirements of Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 489, Canadian Standards Association Standard C22.2 No. 5.1, and International Electrotechnical Commission Recommendations IEC 157-1.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

An innovative design of internal components allows higher MCP-starter combination interrupting ratings. The MCP is marked to permit proper electrical application within the assigned equipment ratings.

2 2 2 2

The MCP is a recognized component (UL File E7819) and complies with the applicable requirements of Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 489. It is also designed to comply with the applicable requirements of Canadian Standards Association Standard C22.2 No. 5.1, International Electrotechnical Commission Recommendations IEC 157-1, and nameplates bear the CE marking.

2 2 Note: Interrupting ratings are dependent on starter it is used with.

2 2 V4-T2-256

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Page V4-T2-116 V4-T2-117 V4-T2-118 V4-T2-121 V4-T2-135 V4-T2-153 V4-T2-161 V4-T2-185 V4-T2-211 V4-T2-222 V4-T2-237 V4-T2-257 V4-T2-258 V4-T2-259 V4-T2-267 V4-T2-269 V4-T2-270 V4-T2-273 V4-T2-304

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Catalog Number Selection

2

This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.

2 2

Motor Circuit Protector

HMCP 003 A0 C Motor Circuit Protective Type HMCP = Three-pole HM2P = Two-pole 1 HMCPS = Three-pole

Continuous Ampere Rating 003 007 015 025 030 050

A0 = C0 = E0 = D0 = H1 = G2 = K2 = J2 = M2 = L3 = R3 = T4 = U4 = A5 = C5 = D5 = F5 = G5 = J5 = K5 = L5 = W5 = N5 = R5 = X5 = Y5 = L6 = X6 = Y6 = X7 = Y8 =

070 100 150 250 400

600

800 1200

Magnetic Trip Range/ NEMA Starter Size 9–30/0 21–70/0 45–150/0 40–60/0 90–300/1 80–120/2 50–500/2 115–170/2 210–700/2 160–240/3 300–1000/3 450–1500/4 750–2500/4 350–700/5 450–900/5 500–1000/5 625–1250/5 750–1500/5 875–1750/5 1000–2000/5 1125–2250/5 1250–2500/5 1500–3000/5 1750–3500/5 2000–4000/5 2250–4500/5 1800–6000/6 (electronic) 500–2500/6 (electronic) 1000–4000/6 (electronic) 1600–6400/7 (electronic) 2400–9600/8 (electronic)

2 2

Suffix Non-aluminum terminals Without terminals Load terminals only Line terminals only Stainless steel terminals (150A frame only) No Suffix: Standard terminals on line and load C = W= X = Y = S =

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Motor Circuit Protector

GMCP 003 A0 C Motor Circuit Protective Device GMCP = Three-pole

Continuous Ampere Rating 003 007 015 030 050 060 063

Magnetic Trip Range/NEMA Starter Size A0 = 15–30/0 C0 = 35–70/0 E0 = 75–150/0 H1 = 150–300/1 K2 = 250–500/2 J2 = 300–600/2 M2 = 320–630/2

2 2

Suffix C = Non-aluminum terminals

2 2 2 2

Note 1 On J- and K-Frame HMCPs only.

2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-257

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2

Product Selection

2

G-Frame

2

480 Vac Maximum, 600Y/347 Vac NEMA Starter Size

Continuous Amperes

Cam Setting

Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) 1

MCP Trip Setting

MCP Catalog Number

0

3

A

1.1–1.2

15

GMCP003A0C

B

1.3–1.5

18

C

1.6–1.7

21

2

D

1.8–1.9

24

2

E

2.0–2.2

27

F

2.3–2.5

30

A

2.6–3.1

35

B

3.2–3.6

42

C

3.7–3.9

49

D

4.3–4.7

56

E

4.8–5.2

63

F

5.3–5.7

70

A

5.7–6.8

75

2

B

6.9–7.9

90

C

8.0–9.1

105

2

D

9.2–10.3

120

E

10.4–11.4

135

2

F

11.5–12.6

150

A

11.5–13.7

150

B

13.8–16.0

180

C

16.1–18.3

210

D

18.4–20.6

240

E

20.7–22.9

270

2 2

2

0

7

2 2 2

2

0

1

15

30

2 2

F

23.0–25.2

300

A

19.3–22.9

250

2

B

23.0–26.8

300

C

26.9–30.6

350

2

D

30.7–34.5

400

E

34.6–38.3

450

F

38.4–42.1

500

A

23.1–27.5

300

B

27.7–32.2

360

2

C

32.3–36.7

420

D

36.9–41.4

480

2

E

41.5–46.0

540

F

46.2–50.5

600

A

24.2–32.1

320

2

B

29.1–34.8

380

D

38.8–46.4

500

2

E

43.6–48.9

570

F

48.5–53.7

630

2

2 2

2

2 2 2

2

3

3

50

60

63

GMCP007C0C

GMCP015E0C

GMCP030H1C

GMCP050K2C

GMCP060J2C

GMCP063M2C

Notes 1 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate Cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. All GMCP 3–63A come with line and load steel body terminals for Cu only wire. Refer to Page V4-T2-122 under Optional Terminal Types. UL recognized and CSA approved.

V4-T2-258

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Accessories

2

Modifications for GMCP Internal accessories must be factory installed.

2 2

Internal Accessories 1 Electrical Ratings Type Accessory

Volts

Frequency

Amperes

Contact Arrangement

Shunt trip 2

120

50/60 Hz

1.1

—

S5

Shunt trip 2

240

50/60 Hz

2.1

—

S6

1373D62G19

Auxiliary switch 3

240

50/60 Hz

6.0

1A/1B

A3

1288C74G03

Auxiliary switch 3

240

50/60 Hz

6.0

2A/2B

A6

1288C73G03

Alarm switch

3

Auxiliary switch/alarm switch combination 3

Factory Suffix

Style Number

2

1373D62G18

2

240

50/60 Hz

6.0

Make/Break

B3

1288C75G03

240

50/60 Hz

6.0

1A/1B Make/Break

B13

1288C76G09

Number Units in Package

Style Number

2

Lock dog (non-padlockable)

1

1294C01H01

Mounting hardware

1

624B375G23

DIN rail adapter 4

10

1225C79G02

2 2 2

Modifications for HMCP See Internal Accessories starting on Page V4-T2-273.

2

Handle Mechanisms for Series C Frames

2

Kits Only (Kit Includes Shaft, Mechanism and Handle)—GMCP-Frame Rating Type

S01 Blue Handle

S01 Red Handle

2 2

External Mounted Accessories Description

2

GMCP-Frame

2

Description

NEMA

IP

Catalog Number

S01 blue handle, 12-inch shaft

1/3R/12

54

GMHMVD12B / 68C6039G05

4/4X

65

GMHMVD12BX / 68C6039G07

2

S01 red handle, 12-inch shaft

1/3R/12

54

GMHMVD12R / 68C6039G06

4/4X

65

GMHMVD12RX / 68C6039G08

2

2

2 Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms

2

G Direct 5 Black Handle

2

Yellow Handle

With Shroud

Without Shroud

With Shroud

Without Shroud

Frame

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

GMCP

HRGMC1S

HRGMC10

HRGMC3S

HRGMC30

2

Notes 1 Only one accessory may be installed in GMCP. 2 LH only. 3 RH only. 4 For use with standard 35 mm DIN rail such as, 35 x 7.5 or 15 mm per DIN EN50022. 5 Suitable for use on two- or three-pole G-Frame.

2 2 2

No UVR available on GMCP.

2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-259

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2

F-Frame

2

600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum

NEMA Starter Size

Cont. Amps

Cam Setting

Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) 1

0

3

A

2

B

2

2

MCP Trip Setting

600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum, continued Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) 1

MCP Trip Setting 2

MCP Catalog Number HMCP070M2C

2

MCP Catalog Number

NEMA Starter Size

Cont. Amps

0.69–0.91

9

HMCP003A0C

2

70

A

16.1–21.4

210

0.92–1.0

12

B

21.5 –26.8

280

C

1.1–1.2

15

C

26.9 –32.2

350

D

1.3–1.5

18

D

32.3–37.5

420

2

E

1.6–1.7

21

E

37.6–42.9

490

F

1.8–1.9

24

F

43.0–48.3

560

2

G

2.0–2.2

27

G

48.4–53.7

630

H

2.3–2.5

30

H

53.8–59.1

700

A

1.5–2.0

21

A

23.0–30.6

300

2

B

2.1–2.5

28

B

30.7–38.3

400

C

2.6–3.1

35

C

38.4–46.0

500

2

D

3.2–3.6

42

D

46.1–53.7

600

E

3.7–3.9

49

E

53.8 –61.4

700

2

F

4.3–4.7

56

F

61.5 –69.1

800

2

G

4.8–5.2

63

G

69.2–76.8

900

H

5.3–5.7

70

H

76.9–84.5

1000

A

3.4–4.5

45

A

34.6–46.0

450

B

4.6–5.6

60

B

46.1–57.5

600

C

5.7–6.8

75

C

57.6–69.1

750

D

6.9–7.9

90

D

69.2–80.6

900

2

E

8.0–9.1

105

D

69.2–80.6

900

2

F

9.2–10.3

120

E

80.7–92.2

1050

G

10.4–11.4

135

F

92.3–103.7

1200

H

11.5 –12.6

150

G

103.8–115.2

1350

A

6.9–9.1

90

2

B

9.2–11.4

120

C

11.5–13.7

2

D

2

E

2

2

2

2

0

0

7

15

2

2

4

100

150

H

115.3–126.7

1500

57.0 –75.0

750

150

B

76.0–95.0

1000

13.8–16.0

180

C

96.0–114.0

1250

16.1–18.3

210

D

115.0–130.7

1500

F

18.4–20.6

240

E

3

1750

G

20.7–22.9

270

F

3

2000

H

23.0–25.2

300

G

3

2250

A

11.5–15.2

150

H

3

2500

B

15.3–19.1

200

C

19.2–22.9

250

2

D

23.0–26.8

300

E

26.9–30.6

350

2

F

30.7–4.5

400

G

34.6–38.3

450

H

38.4–42.1

500

2

2

2

30

HMCP015E0C

3

A

2

1

HMCP007C0C

50

HMCP030H1C

Cam Setting

4

150

HMCP050K2C

HMCP150T4C

HMCP150U4C

Notes 1 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate Cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. 2 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. 3 Settings above 130 amperes are for special applications. NEC Article 430.110(a) requires the ampere rating of the disconnecting means to be not less than 115% of the motor full load ampere rating. HMCP 3–100 A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T100FB. HMCP 150A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T150FB.

2 2 2 V4-T2-260

HMCP100R3C

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Special Low Magnetic Protection Application MCP

2

600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum

2

Cont. Amps

Cam Setting

MCP Trip Setting 1

MCP Catalog Number

25

A

40

HMCP025D0C

B

43

D

49

E

52

F

55

G

58

H

60

A

80

B

87

C

93

D

98

E

103

F

109

G

115

H

120

A

115

B

122

C

130

D

139

E

145

F

153

G

160

H

170

50

70

100

A

160

B

174

C

185

D

196

E

207

F

218

G

229

H

240

2 2 2 2 2

HMCP050G2C

2 2 2 2 2

HMCP070J2C

2 2 2 2 2

HMCP100L3C

2 2 2 2

Notes 1 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown.

2

HMCP 25–100 A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T100FB.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-261

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2

MCPs for Application with Motor Starters Equipped with Electronic Overload Relays

2

600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum

2

NEMA Starter Size

Cont. Amps

2

0

3

600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum, continued

Cam Setting

Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) 1

MCP Trip Setting 2

MCP Catalog Number

A

23.0–30.6

300

HMCPS100R3C

B

30.7–38.3

400

15

C

38.4–46.0

500

18

D

46.1–53.7

600

1.6–1.7

21

E

53.8–61.4

700

2

F

1.8–1.9

24

F

61.5–69.1

800

2

G

2.0–2.2

27

G

69.2–76.8

900

H

2.3–2.5

30

H

76.9–84.5

1000

A

1.5–2.0

21

A

34.6–46.0

450

B

2.1–2.5

28

B

46.1–57.5

600

C

2.6–3.1

35

C

57.6–69.1

750

D

3.2–3.6

42

D

69.2–80.6

900

2

E

3.7–3.9

49

E

80.7–92.2

1050

2

F

4.3–4.7

56

F

92.3–103.7

1200

G

4.8–5.2

63

G

103.8–115.2

1350

H

5.3–5.7

70

H

115.3–126.7

1500

A

3.4–4.5

45

A

57.0–75.0

750

2

B

4.6–5.6

60

B

76.0–95.0

1000

C

5.7–6.8

75

C

96.0–114.0

1250

2

D

6.9–7.9

90

D

115.0–130.7

1500

2

E

8.0–9.1

105

E

3

1750

F

9.2–10.3

120

F

3

2000

2

G

10.4–11.4

135

G

3

2250

H

11.5–12.6

150

H

3

2500

A

6.9–9.1

90

B

9.2–11.4

120

C

11.5–13.7

150

2

D

13.8–16.0

180

E

16.1–18.3

210

2

F

18.4–20.6

240

G

20.7–22.9

270

H

23.0–25.2

300

A

11.5–15.2

150

B

15.3–19.1

200

2

C

19.2–22.9

250

D

23.0–26.8

300

2

E

26.9–30.6

350

F

30.7–34.5

400

G

34.6–38.3

450

H

38.4–42.1

500

Cam Setting

Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) 1

MCP Trip Setting

A

2

B

2

2

0

7

2

2

2

0

1

15

30

2

2 2

2

50

2 2

2

MCP Catalog Number

NEMA Starter Size

Cont. Amps

0.69–0.91

9

HMCPS003A0C

3

100

0.92–1.0

12

C

1.1–1.2

D

1.3–1.5

E

HMCPS007C0C

HMCPS015E0C

HMCPS030H1C

4

4

150

150

HMCPS150U4C

Notes 1 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. 2 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. 3 Settings above 130A are for special applications. NEC Article 430.110(a) requires the ampere rating of the disconnecting means to be not less than 115% of the motor full load ampere rating. HMCP 25–100 A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T100FB. HMCPS 3–100 A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T100FB. HMCPS 150A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T150FB.

HMCPS050K2C

2 2 2 V4-T2-262

HMCPS150T4C

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

J-Frame

2

600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum

2

MCP Catalog Number 3

NEMA Starter Size

Cont. Amps

Cam Setting

Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) 1

27.0–30.7

350

HMCP250A5C

5

250

A

67.4–75.3

B

30.8–33.8

400

B

75.4–83.8

980

C

33.9–36.9

440

C

83.9–92.3

1090

D

37.0–40.3

480

D

92.4–100.7

1200

E

40.4–43.8

525

E

100.8–109.2

1310

F

43.9–46.9

570

F

109.3–117.6

1420

G

47.0–50.7

610

G

117.7–126.1

1530

H

47.0–50.7

660

H

126.2–134.6

1640

NEMA Starter Size

Cont. Amps

Cam Setting

Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) 1

4

250

A

5

5

5

5

5

250

250

250

250

250

600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum, continued

MCP Trip Setting

I

47.0–50.7

700

A

34.7–38.8

450

B

38.9–43.4

C

43.5–47.6

D

2

MCP Catalog Number 3

875

HMCP250J5C

I

134.7–142.8

1750

A

77.0–86.6

1000

505

B

86.6–96.1

1125

565

C

96.2–105.7

1250

47.7–52.2

620

D

105.8–115.3

1375

E

52.3–56.5

680

E

115.4–124.9

1500

F

56.6–60.7

735

F

125.0–134.6

1625

G

60.8–64.9

790

G

134.7–144.2

1750

H

65.0–69.2

845

H

144.3–153.8

1875

I

69.3–73.5

900

I

153.9–163.3

2000

A

38.5–43.4

500

A

86.6–97.3

1125

B

43.5–48.0

565

B

97.4–108.4

1265

C

48.1–53.0

625

C

108.5–118.8

1410

D

53.1–57.6

690

D

118.9–129.9

1545

E

57.7–62.3

750

E

130.0–140.7

1690

F

62.4–67.3

810

F

140.8–151.5

1830

G

67.4–71.9

875

G

151.6–162.3

1970

H

72.0–76.9

935

H

162.4–173.0

2110

I

77.0–81.6

1000

I

173.1–183.6

2250

A

48.1–53.8

625

A

96.2–108.0

1250

B

53.9–59.9

700

B

108.1–119.9

1405

C

60.0–66.1

780

C

120.0–132.3

1560

D

66.2–72.3

860

D

132.4–144.2

1720

E

72.4–78.4

940

E

144.3–156.1

1875

HMCP250C5C

HMCP250D5C

HMCP250F5C

5

5

5

250

250

250

F

78.5–83.8

1020

F

156.2–168.0

2030

G

83.9–89.9

1090

G

168.1–179.9

2185

H

90.0–96.1

1170

H

180.0–192.3

2340

I

96.2–102.0

1250

I

192.4–204.0

2500

A

57.7–64.6

750

B

64.7–71.9

840

C

72.0–79.2

935

D

79.3–86.5

1030

E

86.6–93.8

1125

F

93.9–101.1

1220

G

101.2–108.4

1315

H

108.5–115.3

1410

I

115.4–122.4

1500

HMCP250G5C

2

MCP Trip Setting

2 2 2 2 2 2

HMCP250K5C

2 2 2 2 2 2

HMCP250L5C

2 2 2 2 2

HMCP250W5C

2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. 2 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. 3 Three-pole catalog numbers shown. Two-pole catalog numbers begin with HM2P in place of HMCP. All HMCP and HM2P 250A come with line and load steel body terminals, T250KB. (With suffix “C,” without “C” comes with TA250KB.)

2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-263

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2

K-Frame

2

600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum

2 2

2

MCP Catalog Number 3

NEMA Starter Size

Cont. Amps

Cam Setting

27.0–30.7

350

HMCP400A5C

5

400

A

30.8–33.8

400

B

NEMA Starter Size

Cont. Amps

Cam Setting

4

400

A B

2

600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum, continued Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) 1

Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) 1

MCP Trip Setting

MCP Trip Setting 2

MCP Catalog Number 3

77.0–86.5

1000

HMCP400K5C

86.6–96.1

1125

C

33.9–36.9

440

D

37.0–40.3

480

2

E

40.4–43.8

525

E

115.4–124.9

1500

F

43.9–46.9

570

F

125.0–134.6

1625

2

G

47.0–50.7

610

G

134.7–144.2

1750

H

50.8–53.8

660

H

144.3–153.8

1875

2

I

53.9–57.2

700

I

153.9–163.3

2000

A

38.5–43.4

500

A

86.6–97.3

1125

B

43.5–48.0

565

B

97.4–108.4

1265

C

48.1–53.0

626

C

108.5–118.8

1410

D

53.1–57.6

690

D

118.9–129.9

1545

2

E

57.7–62.3

750

E

130.0–140.7

1690

2

F

62.4–67.3

810

F

140.8–151.5

1830

G

67.4–71.9

875

G

151.6–162.3

1970

H

72.0–76.9

935

H

162.4–173.0

2110

I

77.0–81.6

1000

I

173.1–183.6

2250

A

48.1–53.8

625

A

96.2–108.0

1250

B

53.9–59.9

700

B

108.1–119.9

1405

2

C

60.0–66.1

780

C

120.0–132.3

1560

2

D

66.2–72.3

860

D

132.4–144.2

1720

E

72.4–78.4

940

E

144.3–156.1

1875

2

F

78.5–83.8

1020

F

156.2–168.0

2030

G

83.9–89.9

1090

G

168.1–179.9

2185

2

H

90.0–96.1

1170

H

180.0–192.3

2340

I

96.2–102.0

1250

I

192.4–204.0

2500

A

57.7–64.6

750

A

115.4–129.9

1500

2

B

64.7–71.9

840

B

130.0–144.2

1690

C

72.0–79.2

935

C

144.3–158.4

1875

2

D

79.3–86.5

1030

D

158.5–173.0

2060

E

86.6–93.8

1125

E

173.1–187.6

2250

2

F

93.9–101.1

1220

F

187.7–201.9

2440

2

G

101.2–108.4

1315

G

202.0–216.1

2625

H

108.5–115.3

1410

H

216.2–230.7

2810

I

115.4–122.4

1500

I

230.8–244.9

3000

A

67.4–75.3

875

B

75.4–83.8

980

C

83.9–92.3

1090

2

D

92.4–100.7

1200

2

E

100.8–109.2

1310

F

109.3–117.6

1420

2

G

117.7–126.1

1530

H

126.2–134.6

1640

2

I

134.7–142.8

1750

2

2

5

5

400

400

2

2 2

2

2

5

5

5

400

400

400

2

V4-T2-264

HMCP400A5C

HMCP400D5C

HMCP400F5C

HMCP400G5C

HMCP400J5C

5

5

5

400

400

400

C

96.2–105.7

1250

D

105.8–115.3

1375

HMCP400L5C

HMCP400W5C

HMCP400N5C

Notes 1 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. 2 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. 3 Three-pole catalog numbers shown. Two-pole catalog numbers begin with HM2P in place of HMCP. All HMCP and HM2P 400 A come with aluminum body terminals, 3TA400K. Catalog numbers with suffix “C” as shown above come with copper body terminals 3T400K.

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

L-Frame 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum, continued

NEMA Starter Size

Cont. Amps

Cam Setting

Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) 1

5

400

A

5

5

400

400

2

600 Vac Maximum

4

2

2

MCP Catalog Number 3

NEMA Starter Size

Cont. Amps

Cam Setting

Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) 1

134.7–151.5

1750

HMCP400R5C

6

600

A

138.5–184.5

1800

B

151.6–168.4

1970

B

184.6–230.7

2400

C

168.5–185.3

2190

C

230.8–276.8

3000

D

185.4–201.9

2410

D

276.9–323.0

3600

E

202.0–218.8

2625

E

323.1–369.1

4200

F

218.9–235.7

2845

F

369.2–415.3

4800

G

235.8–252.6

3065

G

415.4–461.4

5400

H

252.7–269.2

3285

H

461.5–507.7

6000

A

38.5–46.1

500

B

46.2–61.4

600

MCP Trip Setting

MCP Trip Setting

MCP Catalog Number HMCP600L6W

I

269.3–285.7

3500

A

153.9–173.0

2000

B

173.1–192.3

2250

C

61.5–76.8

800

C

192.4–211.5

2500

D

76.9–96.1

1000

D

211.6–230.7

2750

E

96.2–115.3

1250

E

230.8–249.9

3000

F

115.4–153.7

1500

F

250.0–269.2

3250

G

153.8–192.2

2000

G

269.3–288.4

3500

H

288.5–307.6

3750

I

307.7–326.9

4000

A

173.1–194.5

2250

B

194.6–216.1

2530

C

216.2–237.6

2810

D

237.7–259.5

3090

E

259.6–281.1

F

6

600

HMCP400X5C

H

192.3–230.7

2500

A

76.9–96.1

1000

B

96.2–115.3

1250

C

115.4–153.7

1500

D

153.8–192.2

2000

E

192.3–230.7

2500

F

230.8–269.1

3000

3375

G

269.2–307.6

3500

281.2–302.6

3655

H

307.7–346.1

4000

G

302.7–324.1

3935

H

324.2–346.1

4215

I

346.2–368.1

4500

6

HMCP400Y5C

600

2 2 2 2 2 2

HMCP600X6W

2 2 2 2 2

HMCP600Y6W

2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. 2 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. 3 Three-pole catalog numbers shown. Two-pole catalog numbers begin with HM2P in place of HMCP. 4 Equipped with electronic trip device. All HMCP and HM2P 400 A come with aluminum body terminals, 3TA400K. Catalog numbers with suffix “C” as shown above come with copper body terminals 3T400K. All HMCP 600 A come without terminals. For terminals, see Page V4-T2-217.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-265

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2

N-Frame

2

600 Vac Maximum

2

NEMA Starter Size

Cont. Amps

7

800

1

Cam Setting

Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) 2

MCP Trip Setting

MCP Catalog Number HMCP800X7W

A

123.1–184.5

1600

B

184.6–246.1

2400

C

246.2–307.6

3200

D

307.7–369.1

4000

2

E

369.2–430.7

4800

2

F

430.8–492.2

5600

G

492.3–553.7

6400

A

184.6–276.8

2400

B

276.9–369.1

3600

2

C

369.2–461.4

4800

2

D

461.5–553.7

6000

E

553.8–646.1

7200

F

646.2–738.4

8400

G

738.5–830.7

9600

2 2

2

8

1200

2 2 2 2 2

HMCP12Y8W

Notes 1 Equipped with electronic trip device. 2 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13X the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13X setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-266

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Contents

Motor Protection Circuit Breakers

Description

Page

Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module. . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V4-T2-116 V4-T2-117 V4-T2-118 V4-T2-121 V4-T2-135 V4-T2-153 V4-T2-161 V4-T2-185 V4-T2-211 V4-T2-222 V4-T2-237 V4-T2-256 V4-T2-268 V4-T2-268 V4-T2-269 V4-T2-270 V4-T2-273 V4-T2-304

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Product Description Motor protection circuit breakers (MPCBs) provide UL 489 branch circuit protection, UL 508 and CSA C22.2 No. 14 motor protection, and meet IEC 60947-2 and 50947-4 requirements. Typical branch motor loads are protected by three-component starters, consisting of breaker, contactor and overload relay, or fuse, contactor and overload relay. The MPCB application-specific protection eliminates the need for motor overload relay found in the traditional three-component starter assembly. The branch motor load protection is simplified to an MPCB and contactor, reducing both space requirements and heat generation in customer panels. Protection is provided by application-specific electronic trip units.

The electronic trip unit provides typical motor overload relay functionality and short-circuit protection against potential phase-tophase or phase-to-ground faults. ● ●

●

●

Disconnecting means Branch circuit short-circuit protection Overload protection ● Class 5, 10, 15 and 20 Phase unbalance protection ● FDMP breaker trips when there is a 40% difference between any phase compared to the calculated three-phase average

●

●

Phase loss protection ● Active when the maximum phase current is greater than 50% of FLA setting ● Breaker will trip when minimum phase current is 25% or less than the maximum phase current ● Time delay of 1 or 2 seconds before breaker trips Thermal memory to prevent immediate restart after overload trip to allow motor to cool down

The MPCB is based on the Series C F-Frame. Accessories for standard Series C breakers apply to the MPCB. Unlike Motor Circuit Protectors (MCPs), MPCBs are UL 489 listed with 35 kA and 65 kA interruption ratings.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-267

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2

Product Selection

2

FDMP and HFDMP

2 2 2 2 2

Continuous Amperes

35 kA Without Phase Unbalance, Class 10 Motor Protection Only

35 kA With Phase Unbalance and Adjustable Motor Class Protection

65 kA Without Phase Unbalance, Class 10 Motor Protection Only

65 kA With Phase Unbalance and Adjustable Motor Class Protection

80

FDMP3080L

FDMP3080JL

HFDMP3080L

HFDMP3080JL

100

FDMP3100L

FDMP3100JL

HFDMP3100L

HFDMP3100JL

160

FDMP3160L

FDMP3160JL

HFDMP3160L

HFDMP3160JL

205

FDMP3205L

FDMP3205JL

HFDMP3205L

HFDMP3205JL

FLA le Dial Setting Continuous Amperes

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

2

80

40

50

60

70

80

—

—

—

100

80

—

90

—

100

—

—

—

2

160

100

115

130

145

160

—

—

—

205

160

170

180

195

205

—

—

—

2 2

Technical Data and Specifications

2

Specifications

2 2

Feature

FDMP

HFDMP

Interruption rating at 240 V

65 kA

100 kA

Interruption rating at 480 V

35 kA

65 kA

Interruption rating at 600 V

18 kA

25 kA

Icu/Ics at 240 V

65 kA/33 kA 1

100 kA/50 kA 1

Icu/Ics at 415 V

35 kA/18 kA 1

65 kA/33 kA 1

100% rated

No

No

2

FLA range (A)

40–205

40–205

Motor class protection

5, 10, 15, 20

5, 10, 15, 20

2

Phase unbalance protection (current)—active for phase current >0.5 FLA setting

t40% delta (single-phase): (three-phase avg.) for 5 seconds

t40% delta (single-phase): (three-phase avg.) for 5 seconds

2

Phase loss protection (current)—active for phase current >0.5 FLA setting

Min. phase d0.25 max. phase for 1 second

Min. phase d0.25 max. phase for 1 second

2

Thermal memory protection

Yes

Yes

High load indicator

—

—

2

Pre-detection relays

—

—

Factory installed

Factory installed

Aux. alarm, shunt trip, UVR

Aux. alarm, shunt trip, UVR

2 2

2

Internal accessories

2

Notes 1 IEC ratings available only on FWMP and HFWMP.

2

For additional breaker solutions, see Page V4-T2-89.

2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-268

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Contents

Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment

Description

Page V4-T2-116 V4-T2-117 V4-T2-118 V4-T2-121 V4-T2-135 V4-T2-153 V4-T2-161 V4-T2-185 V4-T2-211 V4-T2-222 V4-T2-237 V4-T2-256 V4-T2-267

Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V4-T2-270 V4-T2-273 V4-T2-304

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) Product Description Eaton’s Type ELC current limiter attachment for the MCP is designed to provide increased interrupting capacity. The combination may be used for the application up to 200,000 A symmetrical at 600 Vac, making the MCP suitable for use in network distribution systems or other applications where unusually high fault currents are available. The current limiter connects to the load end of the MCP and is provided with terminals suitable for copper or aluminum conductors. (See table at right.)

Product Selection Limiters are coordinated with the MCP so that normal fault currents are interrupted automatically by the MCP without any damage to the limiter. Only the rare very high fault is opened by the limiter. Faults that are interrupted by the limiter also magnetically trip the MCP, opening all three poles, preventing singlephase operation. Each of the three poles of the Type ELC limiter is equipped with an indicator that extends when a fault is interrupted by the limiter.

Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment

2

ELC Current Limiter Attachment MCP Rating (Amperes)

Catalog Number

3

ELC3003R

7

ELC3007R

15

ELC3015R

30

ELC3030R

50

ELC3050R

100

ELC3100R

150

ELC3150R

2 2 2 2 2 2

Technical Data and Specifications

2

Type ELC Current Limiter Terminal Wire Sizes 1 Wire Range AWG

Metric (mm2)

2

50

14–2

2.5–35

2

100

1–4/0

50–95

150

1–4/0

50–95

50

14–2 2

2.5–35

100

—

—

150

—

—

Type ELC Current Limiter Maximum Amperes Standard Aluminum Terminals

Non-Standard Terminals (Steel)

Notes 1 Terminal wire connectors are UL listed for standard stranded wire sizes as defined in UL 486A or UL 486B. 2 Optional on special order for copper cable only. All HMCP 800 A and 1200 A come without terminals. For terminals, see Page V4-T2-217.

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-269

2 2 2 2 2 2

2.3 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Contents

Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module

Description

2

Page

Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

V4-T2-116 V4-T2-117 V4-T2-118 V4-T2-121 V4-T2-135 V4-T2-153 V4-T2-161 V4-T2-185 V4-T2-211 V4-T2-222 V4-T2-237 V4-T2-256 V4-T2-267 V4-T2-269 V4-T2-271 V4-T2-272 V4-T2-273 V4-T2-304

2 2 2 2

Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module

2

Product Overview

Product Description

Features and Benefits

Standards and Certifications

Power demand continues to grow in new and existing facilities. To meet increased demand, larger utility supplies, spot networks and large facility transformers are installed. The increased capacity of the electrical source results in increased fault currents in excess of 100 kA short-circuit protection. Eaton manufactures non-fused current limiting modules with interrupting capacities up to 200 kA at 600 Vac. Unlike fused current limiters with a one-time use, a current limiter module provides an automatic reset of the module after a short-circuit event. Resetting the moldedcase circuit breaker is the only action required to restore critical power to the system; there is no time wasted with sourcing the correct replacement fuses or module to bring the system back online.

The current limiting breaker modules use a unique contact design to enhance the system protection similar to that of the circuit breaker. When high short-circuit current is flowing through the contacts of these modules, the design results in very high interrupting capacities and improved current limiting characteristics.

Superior system protection:

●

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

V4-T2-270

●

●

●

Application Description High-performance breakers are most commonly applied when very high fault levels are available and with applications where the current limiting capability is used upstream of the final load to limit current. Typical loads include lighting, power distribution, and motor control applications.

●

●

●

Auto reset improves system uptime and eliminates the need for finding replacement parts No fuses to replace, reducing the overall cost of ownership and the waste created by fuses Overloads, by using inverse time current tripping characteristics of the molded-case circuit breaker Low-level short circuits, by using instantaneous and/or short-time delay tripping characteristics of the molded-case circuit breaker High-level short circuits, by using ultra-high-speed, blow-apart contacts of the current limiting module in series with the circuit breaker contacts Let-through currents, by improved opening speed of the contacts, the resultant rapid rise of arc voltage introduces impedance into the system

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

●

UL 489 CSA C22.2

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Product Selection

2 2

Series C High Performance Ratings Type

Product

Amperes

480 Vac (UL)

600 Vac (UL)

FDC 3P thermal-magnetic

Breaker only

15–225

100

35

With limiter

40–200

200

200

2 2 2

FD Frame

FD IC Rating—200 kAIC at 600 Vac 1 Ampere Rating

Breaker with Line Side Mounted Current Limiter 2

2

Breaker with Load Side Mounted Current Limiter 3

2

Thermal-Magnetic 40

FDC3040Q01

FDC3040Q02

45

FDC3045Q01

FDC3045Q02

50

FDC3050Q01

FDC3050Q02

60

FDC3060Q01

FDC3060Q02

70

FDC3070Q01

FDC3070Q02

80

FDC3080Q01

FDC3080Q02

90

FDC3090Q01

FDC3090Q02

100

FDC3100Q01

FDC3100Q02

110

FDC3110Q01

FDC3110Q02

125

FDC3125Q01

FDC3125Q02

150

FDC3150Q01

FDC3150Q02

175

FDC3175Q01

FDC3175Q02

200

FDC3200Q01

FDC3200Q02

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Limiter Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes

Terminal Body Material

Wire Type

Metric Wire Range mm2

AWG Wire Range/ Number of Conductors

Catalog Number

Cu/Al

10–185

#8–350 (1)

TA250FJ 4

2 2

Standard Pressure Type Terminals 250

Aluminum

2

Breaker Load Terminals (For Line Mounted Limiters Only) Maximum Breaker Amperes

Terminal Body Material

Wire Type

AWG Wire Range

Metric Wire Range mm2

Package of Three Terminals Catalog Number

2 2 2

Standard Pressure Type Terminals 100

Steel

Cu/AI

14–1/0

2.5–50

3T100FB

225

Aluminum

Cu/AI

4–4/0

25–95

3TA225FD

2 2

Notes 1 Line and load terminal included. 2 Two interphase barriers provided, mounted on line end of limiter, catalog number FJ1PBK. 3 Four interphase barriers provided, (2) line end of breaker, (2) load end of limiter. 4 Load side breaker terminations included for units configured with line mounted limiters.

2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-271

2.3 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Dimensions and Weights Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Assembled Breaker and Current Limiting Module Frame

Height

Width

Depth

Weight in lbs (kg)

FD + limiter

12.06 (306.3)

4.13 (104.9)

3.39 (86.1)

8.50 (3.86)

2 2

FD-Frame With Current Limiter Module

2 2

4.13 (104.9)

4.12 (104.6)

2 2 2 2

12.06 (306.3)

2 2 2 3.34 (84.8)

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-272

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

3.96 (100.5) 3.39 (86.1)

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Contents

Series C Internal Accessories

Description

Page

Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module. . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V4-T2-116 V4-T2-117 V4-T2-118 V4-T2-121 V4-T2-135 V4-T2-153 V4-T2-161 V4-T2-185 V4-T2-211 V4-T2-222 V4-T2-237 V4-T2-256 V4-T2-267 V4-T2-269 V4-T2-270 V4-T2-275 V4-T2-294 V4-T2-304

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Internal Accessories

2

Product Overview Alarm Switch For remote indication of automatic trip operation. Does not function with manual switching; however, it will operate when either a shunt trip or undervoltage release is operated. A “make” contact closes and a “break” contact opens when the alarm/lockout switch operates. The switch automatically resets when the circuit breaker is reset. Auxiliary Switch The auxiliary switch provides circuit breaker contact status information by monitoring the position of the molded cross bar that contains the moving contact arms. The auxiliary switch is used for remote indication and interlock system verification, and consists of one or two SPDT switches housed in a plug-in module. Each SPDT switch has one “a” and one “b” contact. When the circuit breaker contacts are open, the “a” contact is open and the “b” contact is closed.

Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination Each catalog number listed in tables on Pages V4-T2-278 and V4-T2-279 includes one auxiliary switch and one alarm switch. In an auxiliary switch ASL switch combination, the auxiliary switch is always mounted on the side of the plug-in module next to the center pole of the circuit breaker. Shunt Trip The shunt trip provides remote controlled tripping of the circuit breaker. The shunt trip consists of an intermittent rated solenoid with a tripping plunger and a cutoff switch assembled to a plug-in module. When required for ground fault protection applications, certain AC rated shunt trips, as noted in the electrical rating table, are suitable for operation at 55 percent of rated voltage.

Select shunt trip catalog number for the voltage within the indicated voltage range. Shunt trip coils are designed to be applied at specific AC or DC voltages within the voltage range shown. Electrical ratings are also shown on applicable circuit breaker accessory nameplates. Low Energy Shunt Trip Low energy shunt trip devices are designed to operate from low energy output signals from dedicated current sensors typically applied in ground fault protection schemes. However, with a proper control voltage source, they may be applied in place of conventional trip devices for special applications. Flux paths surrounding permanent magnets used in the shunt trip assembly hold a charged spring poised in readiness to operate the circuit breaker trip mechanism.

When a 100 microfarad capacitor charged to 28 Vdc is discharged through the shunt trip coil, the resultant flux opposes the permanent magnet flux field, which releases the stored energy in the spring to trip the circuit breaker. As the circuit breaker resets, the shunt trip reset arm is actuated by the circuit breaker handle, resetting the shunt trip. The plug-in module is mounted in retaining slots in the top of the trip unit. Coil is intermittent-rated only. Cutoff provisions required in control circuit.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-273

2.3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Undervoltage Release Mechanism The undervoltage release mechanism monitors a voltage (typically a line voltage) and trips the circuit breaker when the voltage falls to between 70 and 35 percent of the solenoid coil rating. The undervoltage release mechanism consists of a continuous rated solenoid with a plunger and tripping lever mounted in a plug-in module. The tab on the tripping lever resets the undervoltage release mechanism when normal voltage has been restored and the circuit breaker handle is moved to the reset (or OFF) position. With less than pickup voltage applied to the undervoltage release mechanism, the circuit breaker contacts will not touch when a closing operation is attempted.

Accessory Terminal Block (R-Frame) (For fixed-mounted configuration.) Internal accessory wiring leads are normally supplied with pigtail leads (18 AWG) that exit from the right side of the circuit breaker. Where specified, fixed-mounted accessory terminal blocks are available. A maximum of one 24-point terminal block can be installed on the right side of the circuit breaker for the internal accessories.

PowerNet and Zone Interlock Kits (OPTIM 550 only) K-, L- and N-Frames Eaton’s PowerNet Communications Kit can be ordered to add PowerNet communications to an existing OPTIM 550 breaker in the field. An 18-inch (457.2 mm) wiring pigtail is routed to the rear of the breaker: two wires for PowerNet and two wires for 24 Vdc (45 mA load). It is recommended that the power supply be an “isolated high quality” unit.

For convenience in determining the appropriate number of terminal block points required, refer to Page V4-T2-274.

Note: Undervoltage release mechanism accessories are not designed for, and should not be used as, circuit interlocks.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-274

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Product Selection

2

Alarm Switch Alarm Switch

Electrical Ratings

Make

2

G-Frame Alarm Switch (RH Only) 1 Volts

Frequency

2

Amperes

Contact Arrangement

Factory Suffix

Catalog Number 234

6

1 Make/1 Break

B3

1288C75G03

2

B13

1288C76G09

2

2

Alarm Switch

Break

240

50/60 Hz

Alarm Switch Auxiliary Switches Combination 240

50/60 Hz

6

1 Make/1 Break and 1A/1B

2

F-Frame Alarm Switch 1 Factory Installation Kit 5

Factory Mounted

2

Connection Type and Location 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads

Terminal Block Pigtail Leads

Terminal Block

2

Number of Contacts (Make and Break)

Mounting Location (Pole)

Same Side

Rear 6

Opposite Side

Same Side

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

1

Left 7

B01

B02

B03

B04

A1L1LPK

A1L1LTK

Right

B05

B06

B07

B08

A1L1RPK

A1L1RTK

2

2

1 (Make only)

7

B09

B10

—

B11

A2L1LPK

A2L1LTK

Right

B12

B13

—

B14

A2L1RPK

A2L1RTK

Single-pole

B15 8

—

—

—

—

—

Left

2 2 2

F-Frame HMCP Alarm Switch 1 Factory Installation Kit 5

Factory Mounted

2

Connection Type and Location 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads

Terminal Block Pigtail Leads

Terminal Block

2

Number of Contacts (Make and Break)

Mounting Location (Pole)

Same Side

Rear 6

Opposite Side

Same Side

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

1

Left 7

B01

B02

B03

B04

MA1L1LPK

MA1L1LTK

Right

B05

B06

B07

B08

MA1L1RPK

MA1L1RTK

2

B09

B10

—

B11

MA2L1LPK

MA2L1LTK

B12

B13

—

B14

MA2L1RPK

MA2L1RTK

2

Left

7

Right

2

J-Frame and HMCP (J) Alarm Switch Factory Mounted

Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location

Field Installation Kits 9

18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads

Number of Contacts (Make and Break)

Mounting Location (Pole)

1

2

Terminal Block Pigtail Leads

2

Terminal Block

Same Side

Rear 7

Opposite Side

Same Side

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Left j

B01

B02

B03

B04

A1L2LPK

A1L2LTK

Right

B05

B06

B07

B08

A1L2RPK

A1L2RTK 6

Notes 1 F-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed; however, this is not recommended for FDE breakers. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected. 2 Includes 24-inch (609.6 mm) external pigtail leads,18 AWG (16–0.010). 3 A maximum of two internal accessories may be mounted in a three-pole circuit breaker. 4 Suitable for mounting in right pole only of two- or three-pole breaker. 5 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories; for field installation. 6 Standard pigtail lead exit location. 7 Standard mounting location. 8 Factory installation only. Leads exit load end of circuit breaker. 9 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories; for field installation on interchangeable trip unit breakers under E64983. j Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker. Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-275

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

2.3 2 2 2 2 2

Series C

K-Frame and HMCP (K) Alarm Switch

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

B03

B04

A1L3LPK

A1L3LTK

B07

B08

A1L3RPK

A1L3RTK

B10

—

B11

A2L3LPK

A2L3LTK

B13

—

B14

A2L3RPK

A2L3RTK

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

1

Left 3

B01

B02

Right 4

B05

B06

Left 3

B09

Right 4

B12

2

L-, HMCP (L) and (M) Frames and Alarm Switch Factory Mounted

Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location

Field Installation Kits 1

18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads

2

Terminal Block

Pigtail Leads

Terminal Block

Suffix Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

B03

B04

A1L4LPK

A1L4LTK

B07

B08

A1L4RPK

A1L4RTK

B10

—

B11

A2L4LPK

A2L4LTK

B13

—

B14

A2L4RPK

A2L4RTK

Same Side

Rear 2

Opposite Side

Same Side

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Left 3

B01

B02

Right

B05

B06

Left 3

B09

Right

B12

N-Frame and HMCP (N) Alarm Switch

2

Number of Sets of Contacts (1M and 1B)

2

1

2

2 2

Suffix Number

Same Side

2

2

Terminal Block

Opposite Side

1

2

Pigtail Leads

Rear 2

2

2

Terminal Block

Same Side

Mounting Location (Pole)

2

Field Installation Kits 1

18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads

Number of Sets of Contacts (1M and 1B)

2

Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location Mounting Location (Pole)

2 2

Factory Mounted

Number of Sets of Contacts (1M and 1B)

2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Factory Mounted

Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location

Field Installation Kits 5

18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Mounting Location (Pole)

Terminal Block

Catalog Number

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Left

B01

B02

B03

B04

A1L5LPK

A1L5LTK

B05

B06

B07

B08

A1L5RPK

A1L5RTK

Left

B09

B10

—

B11

A2L5LPK

A2L5LTK

B12

B13

—

B14

A2L5RPK

A2L5RTK

3

R-Frame Alarm Switch (RH Only) Factory Mounted

Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location

Field Installation Kits 5

2

18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads

Pigtail Leads Catalog Number 6

2

1

B05

A1L6RPK

2

B12

A2L6RPK

2

Catalog Number

Same Side

Suffix Number 6

2

Suffix Number

Opposite Side

Number of Contacts (Make and Break)

2

Terminal Block

Rear 2

Right 3

Right

2

2

Pigtail Leads

Same Side

Notes 1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories; for field installation on interchangeable trip unit breakers under E64983. 2 Standard mounting location. 3 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker. 4 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole. 5 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983. 6 A maximum of three ASL plug-in modules may be installed in a circuit breaker.

2 2 2 V4-T2-276

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Auxiliary Switch Auxiliary Switch

2

G-Frame Auxiliary Switch (RH Only) Electrical Ratings

a b

Volts

Frequency

Amperes

Contact Arrangement

Factory Suffix

Catalog Number 12

240

50/60 Hz

6

1a/1b

A3

1288C74G03

240

50/60 Hz

6

2a/2b

A6

1288C73G03

2 2 2 2

F-Frame and HMCP (F) Auxiliary Switch Factory Installation Kit 4

Factory Mounted Connection Type and Location 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads

Terminal Block

Pigtail Leads

Terminal Block

Number of Contacts A and B

Mounting Location (Pole)

Same Side Suffix Number

Rear 3 Suffix Number

Opposite Side Suffix Number

Same Side Suffix Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

1

Left 5

A01

A02

A03

A04

A1X1PK

A1X1LTK

A15 7

A16 7

A17 7

—

E1X1PK

—

A05

A06

A07

A08

A1X1PK

A1X1RTK 8

A18 7

A19 7

A20 7

—

—

—

A09

A10

—

A11

A2X1LPK

A2X1LTK

Left 5

A21 7

A22 7

—

—

E2X1LPK

—

Right or Neutral 6

A12

A13

—

A14

A2X1RPK

A2X1RTK 8

Right or Neutral 6

A23 7

A24 7

—

—

E2X1RPK

—

Left 5 Right or Neutral

6

Right or Neutral 6 2

Left

5

Factory Mounted

Right

Terminal Block

Pigtail Leads

Terminal Block

Same Side Suffix Number

2

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

A30

A31

A32

—

—

—

2

A33

A34

A35

—

—

—

Factory Mounted

Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location

Factory Installation Kit j

18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads

1

2

2

Opposite Side Suffix Number

2 2

J-Frame and HMCP (J) Auxiliary Switch

Number of Contacts A and B

2

Rear Suffix Number

Trip Unit Type 210+ 1

2

2

Trip Unit Type 310+ Right

2

Same Side Suffix Number

18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads

1

2

Factory Installation Kit 4

Connection Type and Location Mounting Location (Pole)

2

2

F-Frame with Electronic Trip Unit Auxiliary Switch 9

Number of Contacts A and B

2

Mounting Location (Pole)

Same Side Suffix Number

Rear 3 Suffix Number

Opposite Side Suffix Number

2

Terminal Block

Pigtail Leads

Terminal Block

Same Side Suffix Number

2

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2 2

Left

A01

A02

A03

A04

A1X2PK

A1X2LTK

Right k

A05

A06

A07

A08

A1X2PK

A1X2RTK 4

Left

A09

A10

—

A11

A2X2PK

A2X2LTK

Right k

A12

A13

—

A14

A2X2PK

A2X2RTK 4

Notes 1 Includes 24-inch external pigtail leads, 18 AWG (16–0.010). 2 A maximum of two internal accessories may be mounted in a three-pole circuit breaker. Suitable for mounting in right pole only of two- or three-pole breaker. 3 Standard pigtail lead exit location. 4 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories; for field installation. 5 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). 6 Not for use on F-Frame with electronic trip unit. 7 125 volts (max.), 50/60 Hz switch for use in electronic circuit of 100 micro amperes and 15 Vdc minimum. 8 Not for use on four-pole circuit breakers. 9 Only for use on three-pole F-Frame breakers with electronic trip unit. Installation auxiliary switch for FD electronic breakers on right pole must be performed at breaker factory. j Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation or interchangeable trip unit breakers under E64983. k Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker. Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-277

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

2.3 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

K-Frame and HMCP (K) Auxiliary Switch

2 2 2 2

18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Same Side Suffix Number

2 2 2

2 2 2 2 2

Terminal Block

Pigtail Leads

Terminal Block

Same Side Suffix Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

A01

A02

A03

A04

A1X3PK

A1X3LTK

Right 23

A05

A06

A07

A08

A1X3PK

A1X3RTK 4

Left

A09

A10

—

A11

A2X3PK

A2X3LTK

Right 23

A12

A13

—

A14

A2X3PK

A2X3RTK 4 —

2

3

Right

A21

A22

—

—

1482D28G10 67

Left

A18

—

—

A15

A3X3LPK

A3X3LTK

Right 3

A17

—

—

A16

A3X3RPK

A3X3RTK 4

L-, HMCP (L) and (M) Frames and Auxiliary Switch Factory Mounted

Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location

Factory Installation Kit 1

18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Number of Contacts A and B 1

2

3

Same Side Suffix Number

Mounting Location (Pole)

Terminal Block

Pigtail Leads

Terminal Block

Rear 2 Suffix Number

Opposite Side Suffix Number

Same Side Suffix Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number A1X4LTK

Left

A01

A02

A03

A04

A1X4PK

Right 2

A05

A06

A07

A08

A1X4PK

A1X4RTK 4

Left

A09

A10

—

A11

A2X4PK

A2X4LTK

Right 2

A12

A13

—

A14

A2X4PK

A2X4RTK 4

Left

A18

—

—

A15

A3X4PK

A3X4LTK

Right 2

A17

—

—

A16

A3X4PK

A3X4RTK 4

N-Frame and HMCP (N) Auxiliary Switch

2 2

Opposite Side Suffix Number

Left

2 2

Rear 2 Suffix Number

1

2 2

Factory Installation Kit 1

Mounting Location (Pole)

2 2

Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location Number of Contacts A and B

2 2

Factory Mounted

Factory Mounted

Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location

Factory Installation Kit 1

18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Number of Contacts A and B 1

2

3

Terminal Block

Pigtail Leads

Terminal Block

Mounting Location (Pole)

Same Side Suffix Number

Rear 2 Suffix Number

Opposite Side Suffix Number

Same Side Suffix Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Left

A01

A02

A03

A04

A1X5PK

A1X5LTK

Right 2

A05

A06

A07

A08

A1X5PK

A1X5RTK 4

Left

A09

A10

—

A11

A2X5PK

A2X5LTK

Right 2

A12

A13

—

A14

A2X5PK

A2X5RTK 4

Left

A18

—

—

A15

A3X5LPK

A3X5LTK

Right 2

A17

—

—

A16

A3X5RPK

A3X5RTK 4

R-Frame Auxiliary Switch (RH Only)

2

Factory Mounted

Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location

Field Installation Kits 1

2

Number of Contacts A and B

18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads

Pigtail Leads

Suffix Number 5

Catalog Number 5

2

A12

A2X6RPK

4

A19

A4X6RPK

2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983. 2 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker. 3 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole. 4 Not for use on four-pole circuit breakers. 5 A maximum of two auxiliary switches (any combination of 2a/2b or 4a/4b plug-in modules may be installed in a circuit breaker. 6 This option is not field installable. 7 Available on the OPTIM 550 only. Communications are not available with this option. V4-T2-278

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination

a b

2

F-Frame Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination 1 Factory Mounted

Factory Installation Kit 2

2

Pigtail Leads

Terminal Block

2

Connection Type and Location 18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads

Terminal Block

Same Side

Rear 3

Same Side

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Left 3

C01

C02

C03

AAL1LPK

AAL1LTK

Right

C04

C05

C06

AAL1RPK

AAL1RTK 4

Mounting Location (Pole)

2 2 2

Factory Installation Kit 2

2

Pigtail Leads

Terminal Block

2

F-Frame HMCP Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination Factory Mounted Connection Type and Location 18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads

Terminal Block

3

2

Same Side

Mounting Location (Pole)

Same Side

Rear

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Left 4

C01

C02

C03

MAAL1LPK

MAAL1LTK

Right

C04

C05

C06

MAAL1RPK

MAAL1RPK

2 2 2

J-Frame and HMCP (J) Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination Factory Mounted

Field Mounted Field Installation Kits 5

Connection Type and Location Number of Sets of Contacts (1A and 1B) (1M–1B)

Mounting Location (Pole)

Same Side

Rear 6

Opposite Side

Same Side

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

1

Left

C01

C02

—

C03

AAL2LPK

AAL2LTK

Right 4

C04

C05

—

C06

AAL2RPK

AAL2RTK 4

18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads

Terminal Block Pigtail Leads

Terminal Block

Field Mounted

Mounting Location (Pole)

Same Side

Rear 6

Opposite Side

Same Side

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

1

Left

C01

C02

Right 67

C04

C05

18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads

Right

C07

C08

Terminal Block

2 2 2

Field Installation Kits 5

Connection Type and Location Number of Sets of Contacts (1A and 1B) (1M–1B)

2

2

K-Frame and HMCP (K) Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination Factory Mounted

2

Pigtail Leads

Terminal Block

2

Suffix Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

—

C03

AAL3LPK

AAL3LTK

—

C06

AAL3RPK 8

2

—

—

1482D28G09

AAL3RTK 9j

—

Notes 1 Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination options (Cxx) are not available on FDE 310+ with LSG or LSIG trip units due to exit wire limitations. To obtain both features, order a left mounting alarm switch (B01-B04 or B09-B11), and right mounting auxiliary switch (A30-A32). 2 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation. 3 Standard mounting location. 4 Not for use on four-pole circuit breakers 5 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation of interchangeable trip unit breakers under E64983. 6 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker. 7 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole. 8 Will not install on OPTIM Trip (RH). 9 Available on the OPTIM 550 only. Communications are not available with this option. j This option is not field installable.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-279

2.3 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

L-, HMCP (L) and (M) Frames and Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location

Field Installation Kits 1

18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads

Terminal Block

Pigtail Leads

Terminal Block

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

C03

AA114LPK

AA114LTK

C06

AA114RPK

AA114RTK 3

C12

AA214LPK

AA214LTK

—

C13

AA214RPK

AA214RTK 3

—

—

—

AA314LPK

—

—

—

—

AA314RPK

—

Same Side

Rear 2

Opposite Side

Same Side

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Number of Sets of Contacts

Mounting Location (Pole)

1A, 1B and 1 Make/1 Break

Left

C01

C02

—

Right 2

C04

C05

—

2A, 2B and 1 Make/1 Break

Left

C07

C08

—

Right 2

C10

C11

3A, 3B and 1 Make/1 Break

Left

C14

Right 2

C15

N-Frame and HMCP (N) Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination

2 2

Factory Mounted

Factory Mounted

Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location

Field Installation Kits 1

18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads

Terminal Block

Pigtail Leads

Terminal Block

Suffix Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Number of Sets of Contacts

Mounting Location (Pole)

Same Side

Rear 2

Opposite Side

Same Side

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

2

1A, 1B and 1 Make/1 Break

Left

2

2A, 2B and 1 Make/1 Break

2

2 2 2

C01

C02

—

C03

AA115LPK

AA115LTK

2

C04

C05

—

C06

AA115RPK

AA115RTK 3

Left

C07

C08

—

C12

AA215LPK

AA215LTK

Right 2

C10

C11

—

C13

AA215RPK

AA215RTK 3

Right

Notes 1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983. 2 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker. 3 Not for use on four-pole circuit breaker.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-280

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Shunt Trip

Shunt Trip

2 2

G-Frame Shunt Trip (LH Three-Pole Only) Electrical Ratings

ST

a

Catalog Number

2 2

Volts

Frequency

Amperes

Suffix Number

120

50/60 Hz

1.1

S1

1373D62G01

240

50/60 Hz

2.1

S2

1373D62G02

12

DC

2.8

S3

1373D62G15

24

DC

5.7

S4

1373D62G16

24

60 Hz

—

S7

1373D62G20

2 2 2

F-Frame and HMCP (F) Shunt Trip

2

Factory Installation Kit 1

Factory Mounted Connection Type and Location 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads 2

Terminal Block Pigtail Leads

Terminal Block

Same Side

Rear 3

Opposite Side

Same Side

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

12–24 Vac or Vdc

S01

S02

S03

S04

SNT1LP03K

SNT1LT03K

48–127 Vac or 48–60 Vdc 4

S05

S06

S07

S08

SNT1LP08K

SNT1LT08K

208–380 Vac or 110–127 Vdc

S09

S10

S11

S12

SNT1LP12K

SNT1LT12K

415–600 Vac or 220–250 Vdc

S13

S14

S15

S16

SNT1LP18K

SNT1LT18K

S18

S19

S20

SNT1RP03K

SNT1RT03K 6

Voltage Rating (AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz)

2 2

Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings

Right- or Neutral-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 5 12–24 Vac or Vdc

S17

2

48–127 Vac or 48–60 Vdc 4

S21

S22

S23

S24

SNT1RP08K

SNT1RT08K 6

208–380 Vac or 110–127 Vdc

S25

S26

S27

S28

SNT1RP12K

SNT1RT12K 6

415–600 Vac or 220–250 Vdc

S29

S30

S31

S32

SNT1RP18K

SNT1RT18K 6

2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation. 2 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). 3 Standard pigtail lead exit location. 4 120 Vac marked suitable for ground fault protection devices. 5 Standard mounting location. 6 Not for use on four-pole circuit breakers.

2 2 2

G-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-281

2.3 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

J-Frame and HMCP (J) Shunt Trip Factory Mounted

Field Mounted

2

Connection Type and Location

Field Installation Kits 1

2

Same Side

Rear 2

Opposite Side

Same Side

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

2

18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Voltage Rating (AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz)

Terminal Block

Pigtail Leads

Terminal Block

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 2

2

12–24 Vac or Vdc

S41

S42

S43

S44

SNT2P04K

SNT2T04K

2

48–60 Vac or Vdc

S49

S50

S51

S52

SNT2P06K

SNT2T06K

110–240 Vac or 110–125 Vdc 3

S09

S10

S11

S12

SNT2P11K

SNT2T11K

2

380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc

S13

S14

S15

S16

SNT2P14K

SNT2T14K

480–600 Vac

S17

S18

S19

S20

SNT2P18K

SNT2T18K

2

Right- or Neutral-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 12–24 Vac or Vdc

S45

S46

S47

S48

SNT2P04K

SNT2T04K 4

2

48–60 Vac or Vdc

S53

S54

S55

S56

SNT2P06K

SNT2T06K 4

2

S29

S30

S31

S32

SNT2P11K

SNT2T11K 4

380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc

S33

S34

S35

S36

SNT2P14K

SNT2T14K 4

480–600 Vac

S37

S38

S39

S40

SNT2P18K

SNT2T18K 4

2 2

110–240 Vac or

110–125 Vdc 3

K-Frame and HMCP (K) Shunt Trip

2

Factory Mounted

Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location

Field Installation Kits 1

2

18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads

Terminal Block

Pigtail Leads

Terminal Block

Suffix Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

S43

S44

SNT3P04K

SNT3T04K

S51

S52

SNT3P06K

SNT3T06K

S10

S11

S12

SNT3P11K

SNT3T11K

S13

S14

S15

S16

SNT3P14K

SNT3T14K

S17

S18

S19

S20

SNT3P18K

SNT3T18K

S45

S46

S47

S48

SNT3P04K

SNT3T04K 4

48–60 Vac or Vdc

S53

S54

S55

S56

SNT3P06K

SNT3T06K 4

2

110–240 Vac or 110–125 Vdc 3

S29

S30

S31

S32

SNT3P11K

SNT3T11K 4

2

380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc

S33

S34

S35

S36

SNT3P14K

SNT3T14K 4

480–600 Vac

S37

S38

S39

S40

SNT3P18K

SNT3T18K 4

Same Side

Rear 2

Opposite Side

Same Side

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

12–24 Vac or Vdc

S41

S42

2

48–60 Vac or Vdc

S49

S50

2

110–240 Vac or 110–125 Vdc 3

S09

380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc

2

480–600 Vac

2

12–24 Vac or Vdc

2 2

2 2 2

Voltage Rating (AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz) Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 2

Right- or Neutral-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 56

Notes 1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983. 2 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker. 3 Suitable for use with Class 1 ground fault sensing element. 4 Not for use on four-pole circuit breakers. 5 For use with KT (thermal-magnetic) trip units only. 6 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole.

2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-282

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

L-, HMCP (L) and (M) Frames and Shunt Trip Factory Mounted

2

Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location

Field Installation Kits

18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads

2

1

Terminal Block

Same Side

Rear 2

Opposite Side

Same Side

Pigtail Leads

Terminal Block

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

12–24 Vac or Vdc

S01

S02

S03

S04

SNT4LP03K

SNT4LT03K

48–60 Vac

S05

S06

S07

S08

SNT4LP05K

SNT4LT05K

48–60 Vdc

S85

S86

S87

—

SNT4LP23K

SNT4LT23K

110–240 Vac

S09

S10

S11

S12

SNT4LP11K

SNT4LT11K

110–125 Vdc

S41

S42

S43

S44

SNT4LP26K

SNT4LT26K

380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc

S13

S14

S15

S16

SNT4LP14K

SNT4LT14K

480–600 Vac

S17

S18

S19

S20

SNT4LP18K

SNT4LT18K

12–24 Vac or Vdc

S21

S22

S23

S24

SNT4RP03K

SNT4RT03K

48–60 Vac

S25

S26

S27

S28

SNT4RP05K

SNT4RT05K

48–60 Vdc

S88

S89

S90

—

SNT4RP23K

SNT4RT23K

110–240 Vac

S29

S30

S31

S32

SNT4RP11K

SNT4RT11K

110–125 Vdc

S45

S46

S47

S48

SNT4RP26K

SNT4RT26K

380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc

S33

S34

S35

S36

SNT4RP14K

SNT4RT14K

480–600 Vac

S37

S38

S39

S40

SNT4RP18K

SNT4RT18K

Voltage Rating (AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz)

2 2

Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 2

Right-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 3

Notes 1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation under E64983. 2 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker. 3 For use with LT (thermal-magnetic) three-pole trip units only.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-283

2.3 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

N-Frame and HMCP (N) Shunt Trip Factory Mounted

Field Mounted

2

Connection Type and Location

Field Installation Kits 1

2

Same Side

Rear 2

Opposite Side

Same Side

Pigtail Leads

Terminal Block

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

9–24 Vac or Vdc

S01

S02

S03

S04

SNT5LP03K

SNT5LT03K

48–60 Vac

S05

S06

S07

S08

SNT5LP05K

SNT5LT05K

2 2 2

18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Voltage Rating (AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz)

Terminal Block

Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 2

3

S09

S10

S11

S12

SNT5LP11K

SNT5LT11K

2

110–125 Vdc

S41

S42

S43

S44

SNT5LP26K

SNT5LT26K

380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc

S13

S14

S15

S16

SNT5LP14K

SNT5LT14K

2

480–600 Vac

S17

S18

S19

S20

SNT5LP18K

SNT5LT18K

48–60 Vdc

S21

S22

S23

S24

SNT5LP23K

SNT5LT23K

110–240 Vac

2 2

R-Frame Shunt Trip (RH Only)

2

Factory Mounted

Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location

Field Installation Kits 1

18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads

Pigtail Leads

2

Voltage Rating (AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz)

Suffix Number 4

Catalog Number 4

2

24 Vac or Vdc

S21

SNT6P03K

48–60 Vac

S25

SNT6P05K

2

110–240 Vac

S29

SNT6P11K

2

380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc

S33

SNT6P14K

480–600 Vac

S37

SNT6P18K

2

48–60 Vdc

S88

SNT6P23K

110–125 Vdc

S45

SNT6P26K

2 2 2

Notes 1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983. 2 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker. 3 Supply voltages suitable for use with Class 1 GFP devices. Marking label included with accessory kits. 4 A maximum of two shunt trip plug-in modules may be installed in a circuit breaker.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-284

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Low Energy Shunt Trip Ordering Information

2

Select shunt trip catalog number for the voltage within the indicated voltage range. Shunt trip coils are designed to be applied at specific AC or DC voltages within the voltage range shown. Electrical ratings are also shown on applicable circuit breaker accessory nameplates.

2

Low Energy Shunt Trip

2 2 2 2 2

F-, J-, K-, L-, M-, N- and R-Frames and HMCPs Low Energy Shunt Trip 1 Factory Mounted

Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location

Field Installation Kits 2

18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads UV

Mounting Positions (Pole)

Same Side Rear Suffix Number

3

Suffix Number

2 2

Terminal Block

Opposite Side

Same Side Pigtail Leads

Terminal Block

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2 2

F-Frame 4

LST1LTK

2

4

Left

NO1

NO2

NO3

NO4

LST1LPK

Right 3

NO5

NO6

NO7

NO8

LST1RPK 4

LST1RTK 4

Left

NO1

NO2

NO3

—

LST2LPK

—

Right 3

NO5

NO6

NO7

—

LST2RPK

—

2

NO1

NO2

NO3

—

LST3LPK

—

2

NO5

NO6

NO7

—

LST3RPK

—

2 2

2

J-Frame

K-Frame Left 3 Right

56

L- and M-Frames Left

NO1

NO2

NO3

—

LST4LPK

—

Right

NO5

NO6

NO7

—

LST4RPK

—

2

NO1

NO2

NO3

—

LST5LPK

—

2

NO1

—

—

—

LST6RPK

—

N-Frame Left 3 R-Frame Right

2

Notes 1 Cutoff provisions required in control circuit. 2 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983. 3 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker. 4 For F-Frame HMCP, add an “M” to beginning of catalog number. Field Installation Kit referenced for factory use only, not UL listed for field installation. 5 For use with thermal-magnetic trip units only. 6 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-285

2.3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Undervoltage Release Mechanism Ordering Information Select handle reset undervoltage release mechanism catalog number for the voltage within the indicated voltage range. Undervoltage release mechanism coils are designed to be applied at specific AC or DC voltages within the voltage range shown on applicable circuit breaker accessory nameplates. Undervoltage Release Mechanism

G-Frame Undervoltage Release Mechanism (LH Three-Pole Only) Electrical Ratings Volts (AC Only)

Frequency (Hz)

Amperes

Style Numbers 123

Factory Suffix

120

50/60

0.05

1373D62G03

T1

2

24

50/60

0.22

1373D62G04

T2

48

50/60

0.11

1373D62G05

T3

2

60

50/60

0.10

1373D62G06

T4

110

50

0.049

1373D62G07

T5

2

208

60

0.026

1373D62G08

T6

2

220

50

0.025

1373D62G09

T7

240

50/60

0.024

1373D62G10

T8

2

380

50

0.015

1373D62G11

T9

415

50

0.013

1373D62G12

T10

2

440

50

0.012

1373D62G13

T11

480

60

0.01

1373D62G14

T12

2

UV

2

Notes 1 Includes 24-inch (609.6 mm) external pigtail leads, 18 AWG (16–0.010). 2 A maximum of two internal accessories may be mounted in a three-pole circuit breaker. 3 Suitable for mounting in left pole only of three-pole breaker.

2 2

G-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-286

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

F-Frame Factory Mounted (For F-Frame Breaker and F-Frame HMCP) Undervoltage Release Mechanism

2

Connection Type and Location 18-Inch Pigtail Leads Rear 1

Opposite Side

Same Side

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

12 Vac

U01

U02

U03

U04

24 Vac

U05

U06

U07

U08

48 Vac

U37

U38

U39

U40

60 Vac

U97

U98

U99

U100

110–127 Vac

U13

U14

U15

U16

208–240 Vac

U17

U18

U19

U20

380–480 Vac

U21

U22

U23

U24

525–600 Vac

U25

U26

U27

U28

Voltage Rating (AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz)

2

Terminal Block

Same Side

2 2

Left-Pole Mounting AC Ratings

2 2 2 2 2

Right-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 23 12 Vac

U49

U50

U51

U52

24 Vac

U53

U54

U55

U56

48 Vac

U85

U86

U87

U88

60 Vac

U101

U102

U103

U104

110–127 Vac

U61

U62

U63

U64

208–240 Vac

U65

U66

U67

U68

380–480 Vac

U69

U70

U71

U72

525–600 Vac

U73

U74

U75

U76

12 Vdc

U29

U30

U31

U32

24 Vdc

U33

U34

U35

U36

48 Vdc

U37

U38

U39

U40

60 Vdc

U97

U98

U99

U100

110–127 Vdc

U41

U42

U43

U44

220–250 Vdc

U45

U46

U47

U48

2 2 2 2 2

Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings

2 2 2 2

Right-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 23 12 Vdc

U77

U78

U79

U80

24 Vdc

U81

U82

U83

U84

48 Vdc

U85

U86

U87

U88

60 Vdc

U101

U102

U103

U104

110–127 Vdc

U89

U90

U91

U92

220–250 Vdc

U93

U94

U95

U96

2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Standard pigtail lead exit location. 2 Standard mounting location. 3 Not for use on right pole of four-pole circuit breaker.

2

F-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected.

2

2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-287

2.3 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

F-Frame Field Mounted Undervoltage Release Mechanism F-Frame Breaker

2 2

Voltage Rating (AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz)

2

Left-Pole Mounting AC Ratings

2 2 2 2 2

F-Frame Breaker HMCP

Factory Installation Kits 1 Pigtail Leads

Terminal Block

Pigtail Leads

Terminal Block

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

MUVH1LT02K

12 Vac

UVH1LP02K

UVH1LT02K

MUVH1LP02K

24 Vac

UVH1LP03K

UVH1LT03K

MUVH1LP03K

MUVH1LT03K

48 Vac

UVH1LP22K

UVH1LT22K

MUVH1LP22K

MUVH1LT22K MUVH1LT24K

60 Vac

UVH1LP24K

UVH1LT24K

MUVH1LP24K

110–127 Vac

UVH1LP08K

UVH1LT08K

MUVH1LP08K

MUVH1LT08K

208–240 Vac

UVH1LP11K

UVH1LT11K

MUVH1LP11K

MUVH1LT11K

380–480 Vac

UVH1LP15K

UVH1LT15K

MUVH1LP15K

MUVH1LT15K

525–600 Vac

UVH1LP18K

UVH1LT18K

MUVH1LP18K

MUVH1LT18K

Right-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 23 12 Vac

UVH1RP02K

UVH1RT02K

MUVH1RP02K

MUVH1RT02K

24 Vac

UVH1RP03K

UVH1RT03K

MUVH1RP03K

MUVH1RT03K

2

48 Vac

UVH1RP22K

UVH1RT22K

MUVH1RP22K

MUVH1RT22K

60 Vac

UVH1RP24K

UVH1RT24K

MUVH1RP24K

MUVH1RT24K

2

110–127 Vac

UVH1RP08K

UVH1RT08K

MUVH1RP08K

MUVH1RT08K

2

208–240 Vac

UVH1RP11K

UVH1RT11K

MUVH1RP11K

MUVH1RT11K

380–480 Vac

UVH1RP15K

UVH1RT15K

MUVH1RP15K

MUVH1RT15K

525–600 Vac

UVH1RP18K

UVH1RT18K

MUVH1RP18K

MUVH1RT18K

2

2 2 2 2 2 2

Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 12 Vdc

UVH1LP20K

UVH1LT20K

MUVH1LP20K

MUVH1LT20K

24 Vdc

UVH1LP21K

UVH1LT21K

MUVH1LP21K

MUVH1LT21K

48 Vdc

UVH1LP22K

UVH1LT22K

MUVH1LP22K

MUVH1LT22K

60 Vdc

UVH1LP24K

UVH1LT24K

MUVH1LP24K

MUVH1LT24K

110–127 Vdc

UVH1LP26K

UVH1LT26K

MUVH1LP26K

MUVH1LT26K

220–250 Vdc

UVH1LP28K

UVH1LT28K

MUVH1LP28K

MUVH1LT28K

MUVH1RT20K

Right-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 23 12 Vdc

UVH1RP20K

UVH1RT20K

MUVH1RP20K

24 Vdc

UVH1RP21K

UVH1RT21K

MUVH1RP21K

MUVH1RT21K

2

48 Vdc

UVH1RP22K

UVH1RT22K

MUVH1RP22K

MUVH1RT22K

2

60 Vdc

UVH1RP22K

UVH1RT22K

MUVH1RP22K

MUVH1RT22K

110–127 Vdc

UVH1RP26K

UVH1RT26K

MUVH1RP26K

MUVH1RT26K

220–250 Vdc

UVH1RP28K

UVH1RT28K

MUVH1RP28K

MUVH1RT28K

2 2 2

Notes 1 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation. 2 Standard mounting location. 3 Not for use on right pole of four-pole circuit breaker.

2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-288

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

J-Frame and HMCP (J) Undervoltage Release Mechanism Factory Mounted Connection Type and Location

Field Installation Kits

2

2

Terminal Block 1

18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Voltage Rating (AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz)

2

Field Mounted

Same Side

Rear 2

Opposite Side Same Side

Pigtail Leads

Terminal Block 3

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2 2

Left-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 4 12 Vac

U05

U06

U07

U08

UVH2LP02K

UVH2LT02K

24 Vac

U09

U10

U11

U12

UVH2LP03K

UVH2LT03K

48–60 Vac

U13

U14

U15

U16

UVH2LP05K

UVH2LT05K

110–127 Vac

U17

U18

U19

U20

UVH2LP08K

UVH2LT08K

208–240 Vac

U21

U22

U23

U24

UVH2LP11K

UVH2LT11K

380–480 Vac

U25

U26

U27

U28

UVH2LP15K

UVH2LT15K

U39

U40

UVH2RP02K

UVH2RT02K

2 2 2 2

Right-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 3

2

12 Vac

U37

U38

24 Vac

U41

U42

U43

U44

UVH2RP03K

UVH2RT03K

48–60 Vac

U45

U46

U47

U48

UVH2RP05K

UVH2RT05K

110–127 Vac

U49

U50

U51

U52

UVH2RP08K

UVH2RT08K

208–240 Vac

U53

U54

U55

U56

UVH2RP11K

UVH2RT11K

380–480 Vac

U57

U58

U59

U60

UVH2RP15K

UVH2RT15K

2 2

2 2

Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 4 12 Vdc

T01

T02

T03

T04

UVH2LP20K

UVH2LT20K

24 Vdc

T05

T06

T07

T08

UVH2LP21K

UVH2LT21K

48–60 Vdc

T09

T10

T11

T12

UVH2LP23K

UVH2LT23K

110–127 Vdc

T13

T14

T15

T16

UVH2LP26K

UVH2LT26K

220–250 Vdc

T17

T18

T19

T20

UVH2LP28K

UVH2LT28K

2 2

2 2

Right-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 3 12 Vdc

T21

T22

T23

T24

UVH2RP20K

UVH2RT20K

24 Vdc

T25

T26

T27

T28

UVH2RP21K

UVH2RT21K

48–60 Vdc

T29

T30

T31

T32

UVH2RP23K

UVH2RT23K

110–127 Vdc

T33

T34

T35

T36

UVH2RP26K

UVH2RT26K

220–250 Vdc

T37

T38

T39

T40

UVH2RP28K

UVH2RT28K

2 2 2

Notes 1 For electrical rating data for manual, automatic and electrical reset undervoltage release mechanisms, refer to Eaton. 2 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983. 3 Not for use on right pole of four-pole circuit breakers. 4 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-289

2.3 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

K-Frame and HMCP (K) Undervoltage Release Mechanism Factory Mounted

Field Mounted

2

Connection Type and Location

Field Installation Kits 1

2

18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads

Terminal Block

Same Side

Rear 2

Opposite Side Same Side

Pigtail Leads

Terminal Block

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

Voltage Rating (AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz)

2

Left-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 2 12 Vac

U05

U06

U07

U08

UVH3LP02K

UVH3LT02K

2

24 Vac

U09

U10

U11

U12

UVH3LP03K

UVH3LT03K

48–60 Vac

U13

U14

U15

U16

UVH3LP05K

UVH3LT05K

2

110–127 Vac

U17

U18

U19

U20

UVH3LP08K

UVH3LT08K

2

208–240 Vac

U21

U22

U23

U24

UVH3LP11K

UVH3LT11K

380–480 Vac

U25

U26

U27

U28

UVH3LP15K

UVH3LT15K

UVH3RT02K

2

Right-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 345 12 Vac

U37

U38

U39

U40

UVH3RP02K

2

24 Vac

U41

U42

U43

U44

UVH3RP03K

UVH3RT03K

48–60 Vac

U45

U46

U47

U48

UVH3RP05K

UVH3RT05K

110–127 Vac

U49

U50

U51

U52

UVH3RP08K

UVH3RT08K

2

208–240 Vac

U53

U54

U55

U56

UVH3RP11K

UVH3RT11K

380–480 Vac

U57

U58

U59

U60

UVH3RP15K

UVH3RT15K

2

Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 2 12 Vdc

T01

T02

T03

T04

UVH3LP20K

UVH3LT20K

2

24 Vdc

T05

T06

T07

T08

UVH3LP21K

UVH3LT21K

2

48–60 Vdc

T09

T10

T11

T12

UVH3LP23K

UVH3LT23K

110–127 Vdc

T13

T14

T15

T16

UVH3LP26K

UVH3LT26K

2

220–250 Vdc

T17

T18

T19

T20

UVH3LP28K

UVH3LT28K

2

12 Vdc

T21

T22

T23

T24

UVH3RP20K

UVH3RT20K

24 Vdc

T25

T26

T27

T28

UVH3RP21K

UVH3RT21K

2

48–60 Vdc

T29

T30

T31

T32

UVH3RP23K

UVH3RT23K

2

110–127 Vdc

T33

T34

T35

T36

UVH3RP26K

UVH3RT26K

220–250 Vdc

T37

T38

T39

T40

UVH3RP28K

UVH3RT28K

2

2 2 2

Right-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 345

Notes 1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation under E64983. 2 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker. 3 For use with KT (thermal-magnetic) trip units only. 4 Not for use on right pole of four-pole circuit breaker. 5 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-290

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

L-, HMCP (L) and (M)-Frames and Undervoltage Release Mechanism Factory Mounted Connection Type and Location

Field Installation Kits

2

1

Terminal Block

18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Voltage Rating (AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz)

2

Field Mounted

Same Side

Rear 2

Opposite Side Same Side

Pigtail Leads

Terminal Block

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2 2

Left-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 2 12 Vac

U05

U06

U07

U08

UVH4LP02K

UVH4LT02K

24 Vac

U09

U10

U11

U12

UVH4LP03K

UVH4LT03K

48–60 Vac

U13

U14

U15

U16

UVH4LP05K

UVH4LT05K

110–127 Vac

U17

U18

U19

U20

UVH4LP08K

UVH4LT08K

208–240 Vac

U21

U22

U23

U24

UVH4LP11K

UVH4LT11K

380–480 Vac

U25

U26

U27

U28

UVH4LP15K

UVH4LT15K

2 2 2 2

Right-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 34

2

12 Vac

U37

U38

U39

U40

UVH4RP02K

UVH4RT02K

24 Vac

U41

U42

U43

U44

UVH4RP03K

UVH4RT03K

48–60 Vac

U45

U46

U47

U48

UVH4RP05K

UVH4RT05K

110–127 Vac

U49

U50

U51

U52

UVH4RP08K

UVH4RT08K

208–240 Vac

U53

U54

U55

U56

UVH4RP11K

UVH4RT11K

380–480 Vac

U57

U58

U59

U60

UVH4RP15K

UVH4RT15K

2 2

2 2

Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 2 12 Vdc

T01

T02

T03

T04

UVH4LP20K

UVH4LT20K

24 Vdc

T05

T06

T07

T08

UVH4LP21K

UVH4LT21K

48–60 Vdc

T09

T10

T11

T12

UVH4LP23K

UVH4LT23K

110–127 Vdc

T13

T14

T15

T16

UVH4LP26K

UVH4LT26K

220–250 Vdc

T17

T18

T19

T20

UVH4LP28K

UVH4LT28K

2 2

2 2

Right-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 34 12 Vdc

T21

T22

T23

T24

UVH4RP20K

UVH4RT20K

24 Vdc

T25

T26

T27

T28

UVH4RP21K

UVH4RT21K

48–60 Vdc

T29

T30

T31

T32

UVH4RP23K

UVH4RT23K

110–127 Vdc

T33

T34

T35

T36

UVH4RP26K

UVH4RT26K

220–250 Vdc

T37

T38

T39

T40

UVH4RP28K

UVH4RT28K

2 2 2

Notes 1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983. 2 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker. 3 For use with LT (thermal-magnetic) trip units only. 4 Not for use on right pole of four-pole circuit breaker.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-291

2.3 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

N-Frame and HMCP (N) Undervoltage Release Mechanism

2 2 2 2

Factory Mounted

Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location

Field Installation Kits 1

18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Voltage Rating (AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz)

Terminal Block

Same Side

Rear 2

Opposite Side Same Side

Pigtail Leads

Terminal Block

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Suffix Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Left-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 2 12 Vac

U05

U06

U07

U08

UVH5LP02K

UVH5LT02K

24 Vac

U09

U10

U11

U12

UVH5LP03K

UVH5LT03K

2

48–60 Vac

U13

U14

U15

U16

UVH5LP05K

UVH5LT05K

2

110–127 Vac

U17

U18

U19

U20

UVH5LP08K

UVH5LT08K

208–240 Vac

U21

U22

U23

U24

UVH5LP11K

UVH5LT11K

2

380–480 Vac

U25

U26

U27

U28

UVH5LP29K

UVH5LT29K

2

12 Vdc

T01

T02

T03

T04

UVH5LP20K

UVH5LT20K

24 Vdc

T05

T06

T07

T08

UVH5LP21K

UVH5LT21K

2

48–60 Vdc

T09

T10

T11

T12

UVH5LP23K

UVH5LT23K

2

110–127 Vdc

T13

T14

T15

T16

UVH5LP26K

UVH5LT26K

220–250 Vdc

T17

T18

T19

T20

UVH5LP28K

UVH5LT28K

2 2

Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 2

R-Frame Undervoltage Release Mechanism (RH only) Factory Mounted

2

Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location

Field Installation Kits 3

18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads

Pigtail Leads

2

Voltage Rating (AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz)

Suffix Number 4

Catalog Number 4

2

12 Vac

U37

UVH6RP02K

24 Vac

U41

UVH6RP03K

2

48–60 Vac

U45

UVH6RP05K

110–127 Vac

U49

UVH6RP08K

2

208–240 Vac

U53

UVH6RP11K

2

380–500 Vac

U57

UVH6RP29K

12 Vdc

T21

UVH6RP20K

2

24 Vdc

T25

UVH6RP21K

48–60 Vdc

T29

UVH6RP23K

2

110–125 Vdc

T33

UVH6RP26K

220–250 Vdc

T37

UVH6RP28K

2 2 2

Notes 1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983. 2 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker. 3 Endurance: 500 electrical operations plus 2500 mechanical operations. 4 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). Leads are orange and brown.

2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-292

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Accessory Terminal Block (R-Frame) Accessory Terminal Block (R-Frame)

2

R-Frame Accessory Terminal Block 1 Factory Installed

Field Mounted

2

Suffix Number

Catalog Number

2

Q01

TBRDK

2 2 2

Number of Control Wires for Each Internally Mounted Accessory Number of Contacts per Single Accessory

Required Number of Wires

2

Auxiliary switch

2a/2b 4a/4b

6 12

2

Alarm (Signal)/ Lockout switch

1m/1b 2m/2b

6 12

Shunt trip

N/A

2

2

Low energy shunt

N/A

2

Undervoltage release mechanism

N/A

2

Type of Accessory

2 2 2

PowerNet and Zone Interlock Kits (OPTIM 550 Only) K-, L- and N-Frames PowerNet and Zone Interlock Kits

2

PowerNet Interlock Kit 2 Circuit Breaker

Factory Install Suffix

Catalog Number

2

K-Frame

PN

ICK550K

L-Frame

PN

ICK550L

2

N-Frame

PN

ICK550N

2 2 2

Zone Interlock/Ground Kit 23 Circuit Breaker

Factory Install Suffix

Catalog Number

2

K-Frame

ZG

ZGK550K

L-Frame

ZG

ZGK550L

2

N-Frame

ZG

ZGK550N

2 2

PowerNet and Zone Interlock/Ground Kit 23 Circuit Breaker

Factory Install Suffix

Catalog Number

K-Frame

ZGP

ZGPK550K

L-Frame

ZGP

ZGPK550L

N-Frame

ZGP

ZGPK550N

2 2 2 2

Notes 1 One 24-point accessory terminal block provided with circuit breaker when ordered factory installed or shipped from warehouse as separate item when ordered for field installation. See Digitrip RMS master connection diagram (IL 29C714). 2 Installation of these kits restrict any other attachments from being installed in the RH pole. 3 Includes a ground fault alarm signal that can drive the ground fault alarm unit (catalog number GFAU).

2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-293

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2

Technical Data and Specifications

2

Alarm Switch

2 2

F-Frame Electrical Rating Data 12 Maximum Voltage

Frequency

L- and M-Frames Electrical Rating Data 67

Maximum Current Amperes

Dielectric Withstand Voltage

Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers

Maximum Voltage

Frequency

Maximum Current Amperes

Dielectric Withstand Voltage

600

50/60 Hz

6

2500

600

50/60 Hz

6

2500

125

DC

0.50 3

2500

125

DC

0.50 3

2500

250

DC

0.25 3

2500

2

250

DC

0.25 3

2500

2

125/250

50/60 Hz

63

2000

28

DC

33

2000

28

DC

54

2000

2

2

N-Frame Electrical Rating Data

Single-Pole Circuit Breakers

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

J-Frame Electrical Rating Data Frequency

600

50/60 Hz

125

DC

250

DC

0.25 3

2500

Maximum Current Amperes

Maximum Current Amperes

Dielectric Withstand Voltage

600

50/60 Hz

6

2500

125

DC

0.50 3

2500

250

DC

0.25 3

2500

Dielectric Withstand Voltage

R-Frame Electrical Rating Data 9j

6

2500

Maximum Voltage

0.50 3

2500

K-Frame Electrical Rating Data

67

Maximum Voltage

Frequency

600

50/60 Hz

6

2500

125

DC

0.50 3

2500

250

DC

0.25 3

2500

Maximum Current Amperes

Dielectric Withstand Voltage

Frequency

Maximum Current Amperes

Dielectric Withstand Voltage

600

50/60 Hz

6

2500

125

DC

0.50 3

2500

250

DC

0.25 3

2500

Notes 1 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations. 2 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 2000 mechanical operations. 3 Non-inductive load. 4 Inductive (L/R = 0.026). 5 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 2000 mechanical operations. 6 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). 7 Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. 8 Endurance: 3000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. i Endurance: 500 electrical operations plus 2500 mechanical operations. j Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). Leads are red, black and blue.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-294

Frequency

56

Maximum Voltage

2

Maximum Voltage

8

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Auxiliary Switch

2 L- and M-Frames Electrical Rating Data 2

F-Frame Electrical Rating Data 12 Maximum Voltage

Frequency

Maximum Current Amperes

Dielectric Withstand Voltage

Maximum Voltage

Frequency

Maximum Current Amperes

Dielectric Withstand Voltage

125 3

50/60 Hz

1

2500

600

50/60 Hz

6

2500 4

2500 2500

600

50/60 Hz

6

2500

125

DC

0.50

125

DC

0.50 4

2500

250

DC

0.25 4

250

DC

0.25 4

2500

Maximum Voltage

Frequency

Maximum Current Amperes

Dielectric Withstand Voltage

600

50/60 Hz

6

2 Maximum Voltage

Frequency

Maximum Current Amperes

Dielectric Withstand Voltage

600

50/60 Hz

6

2500

2500

125

DC

0.50 4

2500

4

2500

250

DC

0.25 4

2500

2500

125

DC

0.50

250

DC

0.25 4

K-Frame Electrical Rating Data 25 Maximum Voltage

Frequency

Maximum Current Amperes

Dielectric Withstand Voltage

600

50/60 Hz

6

2500

2 2

Frequency

2

600

50/60 Hz

6

125

DC

0.50 4

2

DC

0.25 4

250

Notes 1 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations. 2 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). 3 For use in electronic circuit of 100 micro amperes and 15 Vdc minimum. 4 Non-inductive load. 5 Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. 6 Endurance: 3000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. 7 Endurance: 500 electrical operations plus 2500 mechanical operations. 8 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). Leads are red, black and blue.

0.25 4

2

Maximum Current Amperes

2500

0.50

DC

2

Maximum Voltage

2500

DC

250

2

R-Frame Electrical Rating Data 78

4

125

2 2

N-Frame Electrical Rating Data 26 J-Frame Electrical Rating Data 12

2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-295

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2

Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination

2

F-Frame Electrical Rating Data 12

2 2

Maximum Voltage

Frequency

Maximum Current Amperes

L- and M-Frames Electrical Rating Data 25 Dielectric Withstand Voltage

Maximum Voltage

Frequency

Maximum Current Amperes

Dielectric Withstand Voltage

600

50/60 Hz

6

2500

600

50/60 Hz

6

2500

125

DC

0.50 3

2200

125

DC

0.50 3

2500

250

DC

0.25 3

2200

250

DC

0.25 3

2500

2 2 2 2 2

J-Frame Electrical Rating Data 24 Maximum Voltage

Maximum Current Amperes

Frequency

600

50/60 Hz

125

DC

250

DC

0.25 3

N-Frame Electrical Rating Data 26 Dielectric Withstand Voltage

Maximum Voltage

6

2500

600

50/60 Hz

6

2500

0.50 3

2500

125

DC

0.50 3

2500

2500

250

DC

0.25 3

2500

2

K-Frame Electrical Rating Data 25

2

Maximum Voltage

Frequency

2

600

50/60 Hz

6

2500

125

DC

0.50 3

2500

250

DC

0.25 3

2500

2

Maximum Current Amperes

Dielectric Withstand Voltage

Maximum Current Amperes

Dielectric Withstand Voltage

Notes 1 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations. 2 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). 3 Non-inductive load. 4 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 2000 mechanical operations. 5 Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. 6 Endurance: 3000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-296

Frequency

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Shunt Trip

2 K-Frame Electrical Rating Data 678

F-Frame Electrical Rating Data 123 50/60 Hz

DC

Supply Voltage

Minimum Operating Voltage

12

6.75

24

50/60 Hz

VA

Supply Voltage

Minimum Operating Voltage

75

12

9

6.75

300

24

48

36

92

60

36

140

110

156

120

2

DC

VA

Supply Voltage

Minimum Operating Voltage

VA

Supply Voltage

Minimum Operating Voltage

100

12

9

VA

45

12

8.4

35

9

400

24

9

200

24

8.4

170

48

36

100

60

36

160

48

—

830

48

—

710

60

—

1280

60

—

1105

480

110

77

55

110 5

156

570

120

77

60

100

110

77

110

66

120 5

60

120

120

77

130

127

156

640

125

77

71

127 5

208

156

180

60

140

125

77

140

—

—

—

208 5

60

420

—

—

—

220

156

200

—

—

—

220 5

60

470

—

—

—

240

156

240

—

—

—

240 5

60

550

—

—

—

380

300

610

127

—

72

380

285

95

220

154

41

415

300

130

220

—

110

400

285

108

250

154

54

440

300

330

250

—

140

415

285

120

—

154

—

480

300

380

—

—

—

440

285

136

—

154

—

525

300

450

—

—

—

480

360

40

—

—

—

550

300

530

—

—

—

525

360

50

—

—

—

600

300

590

—

—

—

J-Frame Electrical Rating Data 124 50/60 Hz

DC

Supply Voltage

Minimum Operating Voltage

VA

Supply Voltage

Minimum Operating Voltage

VA

12

9

31

12

8.4

50

24

9

173

24

8.4

247

48

36

686

48

33.6

1094

60

36

1014

60

33.6

1698

5

60.5

66

110

77

112

120 5

60.5

84

120

77

138

127 5

60.5

102

125

77

150

208 5

60.5

354

—

77

—

220 5

60.5

396

—

—

—

110

5

60.5

432

—

—

—

380

285

180

110

154

40

400

285

200

120

154

58

415

285

240

125

154

—

440

285

610

127

154

—

480

360

34

—

—

—

525

360

42

—

—

—

550

360

50

—

—

—

600

360

60

—

—

—

240

550

360

50

—

—

—

600

360

70

—

—

—

Notes 1 Average unlatching time: 6 milliseconds. 2 Average circuit breaker contact total opening time: 18 milliseconds. 3 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations. 4 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 2000 mechanical operations. 5 Supply voltages suitable for use with Class 1 GFP devices. Marking label included with accessory kits. 6 Approximate unlatching time: 6 milliseconds. 7 Approximate total circuit breaker contact opening time: 8 milliseconds. 8 Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-297

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2

L- and M-Frame Electrical Rating Data 123

N-Frame Electrical Rating Data 125

50/60 Hz

50/60 Hz

2

Supply Voltage

Minimum Operating Voltage

2

12

DC VA

Supply Voltage

Minimum Operating Voltage

9

45

12

24

9

200

2

48

34

2

60

34

110 4 4

DC

VA

Supply Voltage

Minimum Operating Voltage

VA

Supply Voltage

Minimum Operating Voltage

VA

9

35

24

16.8

200

24

16.8

170

24

9

170

48

33.6

830

48

33.6

710

830

48

34

710

60

33.6

1280

60

33.6

1150

1280

60

34

1105

110 4

60

100

110

77

110

60

100

110

77

110

120 4

60

120

120

77

130

60

120

120

77

130

127 4

60

140

125

77

140

2

120

127 4

60

140

125

77

140

208 4

60

420

—

—

—

2

208 4

60

420

—

77

—

220 4

60

470

—

—

—

220 4

60

470

—

—

—

240 4

60

550

—

—

—

240 4

60

550

—

—

—

380

266

95

220

154

41

2

380

266

95

220

154

41

400

266

108

250

—

54

400

266

108

250

—

54

415

266

120

—

—

—

2

415

266

120

—

—

—

440

266

136

—

—

—

440

266

136

—

—

—

480

336

40

—

—

—

2

480

336

40

—

—

—

525

336

50

—

—

—

2

525

336

50

—

—

—

550

336

50

—

—

—

550

336

50

—

—

—

600

336

70

—

—

—

600

336

70

—

—

—

Notes 1 Approximate unlatching time: 6 milliseconds. 2 Approximate total circuit breaker contact opening time: 18 milliseconds. 3 Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. 4 Supply voltages suitable for use with Class 1 GFP devices. Marking label included with accessory kits. 5 Endurance: 3000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.

2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

V4-T2-298

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

R-Frame Electrical Rating Data 123456 Application Ratings

2

Electrical Operating Ratings

Suffix Number

Voltage (V)

Frequency (Hz)

Supply Voltage (V)

Minimum Operating Voltage (V)

Ip (A)

Irms at 0.250s (A)

Irms at 0.033s (A)

VA

One Minute Dielectric Withstand Voltage (V)

2

03/03K

24

50/60

24

16.8

36.1

—

25.5

612

1050

24

DC

24

16.8

36.1

16.5

—

396

1050

2

48–60

50/60

48

34.0

13.1

—

9.2

450

1120

48–60

50/60

60

34.0

17.2

—

12.2

740

1120

05/05K

11/11K 3

14/14K

18/18K

23/23K

26/26K

110–240

50/60

110

60.5

4.2

—

3.0

330

1480

110–240

50/60

120

60.5

4.5

—

3.2

390

1480

110–240

50/60

127

60.5

4.6

—

3.3

430

1480

110–240

50/60

208

60.5

7.9

—

5.6

1170

1480

110–240

50/60

220

60.5

8.5

—

6.0

1370

1480

110–240

50/60

240

60.5

8.7

—

6.1

1470

1480

380–440

50/60

380

266.0

4.5

—

3.2

1220

1880

380–440

50/60

415

266.0

5.0

—

3.6

1500

1880

380–440

50/60

440

266.0

5.3

—

3.7

1640

1880

220–250

DC

220

154.0

—

2.4

—

530

1500

220–250

DC

250

154.0

—

2.7

—

680

1500

480–600

50/60

480

336.0

0.6

—

0.4

200

2200

480–600

50/60

525

336.0

0.7

—

0.5

270

2200

480–600

50/60

550

336.0

0.7

—

0.5

280

2200

480–600

50/60

600

336.0

0.8

—

0.6

360

2200

48–60

DC

48

34.0

—

9.8

—

470

1120

48–60

DC

60

34.0

—

11.6

—

700

1120

110–125

DC

110

77.0

—

3.3

—

370

1250

110–125

DC

120

77.0

—

3.6

—

440

1250

110–125

DC

125

77.0

—

3.8

—

480

1250

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Approximate unlatching time of 6 milliseconds. 2 Average circuit breaker contact total opening time approximately 62 milliseconds, at rated voltage. 3 Endurance: 500 electrical operations and 2500 mechanical operations. 4 Shunt trip can be operated up to a maximum of six times per minute. 5 Maximum operating voltage—110% of maximum voltage range rating. 6 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). Leads are yellow and white.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-299

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2

Undervoltage Release Mechanism

2

F-Frame Electrical Rating Data 1

2

50/60 Hz

DC

Supply Voltage

Dropout Voltage

Pickup Voltage

Pickup Voltage

Maximum

Maximum

VA

Supply Voltage

Dropout Voltage

Minimum

Minimum

Maximum

Maximum

VA

12

4.2

6.3

7.6

1.3

12

4.2

8.4

10.2

2.8

2

12

4.2

6.3

7.6

2.5

12

4.2

8.4

10.2

2.8

24

8.4

16.8

20.4

1.4

24

8.4

16.8

20.4

1.6

2

48

21.0

33.6

40.8

1.2

48

21.0

33.6

40.8

1.3

60

21.0

33.6

40.8

1.9

60

21.0

33.6

40.8

2.0

2

110

44.5

77.0

93.5

1.3

110

44.5

77.0

93.5

1.5

2

120

44.5

77.0

93.5

1.5

120

44.5

77.0

93.5

1.7

127

44.5

77.0

93.5

1.7

125

44.5

77.0

93.5

1.9

2

208

84.0

145.6

176.8

2.2

220

87.5

154.0

187.0

2.6

220

84.0

145.6

176.8

2.4

250

87.5

154.0

187.0

3.4

2

240

84.0

145.6

176.8

2.9

—

—

—

—

—

380

168.0

266.0

323.0

2.9

—

—

—

—

—

2

415

168.0

266.0

323.0

3.5

—

—

—

—

—

2

440

168.0

266.0

323.0

3.9

—

—

—

—

—

480

168.0

266.0

323.0

4.6

—

—

—

—

—

2

525

210.0

367.0

446.0

4.3

—

—

—

—

—

550

210.0

367.0

446.0

4.8

—

—

—

—

—

2

600

210.0

367.0

446.0

5.8

—

—

—

—

—

2

2

J-Frame Electrical Rating Data 23

2

50/60 Hz

DC Pickup Voltage

2

Supply Voltage

Dropout Voltage Minimum

Maximum

Maximum

Dropout Voltage

Pickup Voltage

Minimum

Maximum

Maximum

VA

2

12

4.2

8.4

10.2

1.9

24

8.4

16.8

20.4

3.9

12

4.2

8.4

10.2

1.6

24

8.4

16.8

20.4

2

48

21.0

33.6

40.8

2.5

3.1

48

21.0

33.6

40.8

60

21.0

33.6

40.8

2.0

3.8

60

21.0

33.6

40.8

2

110

44.5

77.0

3.1

93.5

1.8

110

44.5

77.0

93.5

1.6

2

120

44.5

127

44.5

77.0

93.5

2.1

120

44.5

77.0

93.5

1.9

77.0

93.5

2.4

125

44.5

77.0

93.5

2

208

2.2

84.0

145.6

176.8

2.7

220

87.5

154.0

187.0

3.1

220

84.0

145.6

176.8

3.1

250

87.5

154.0

187.0

4.0

2

240

84.0

145.6

176.8

3.8

—

—

—

—

—

2

380

168.0

266.0

323.0

3.4

—

—

—

—

—

415

168.0

266.0

323.0

4.0

—

—

—

—

—

440

168.0

266.0

323.0

4.6

—

—

—

—

—

480

168.0

266.0

323.0

5.4

—

—

—

—

—

2 2 2

VA

Supply Voltage

Notes 1 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations. 2 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 2000 mechanical operations. 3 For electrical rating data for manual, automatic and electrical reset undervoltage release mechanisms, refer to Eaton.

2 2 2 V4-T2-300

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

K-Frame Electrical Rating Data 1 50/60 Hz

2

DC

Supply Voltage

Dropout Voltage

Pickup Voltage

Pickup Voltage

Maximum

Maximum

VA

Supply Voltage

Dropout Voltage

Minimum

Minimum

Maximum

Maximum

VA

12

4.2

8.4

10.2

1.9

12

4.2

8.4

10.2

1.6

24

8.4

16.8

20.4

3.9

24

8.4

16.8

20.4

3.1

48

21.0

33.6

40.8

2.5

48

21.0

33.6

40.8

2.0

60

21.0

33.6

40.8

3.8

60

21.0

33.6

40.8

3.1

110

44.5

77.0

93.5

1.8

110

44.5

77.0

93.5

1.6

120

44.5

77.0

93.5

2.1

120

44.5

77.0

93.5

1.9

127

44.5

77.0

93.5

2.4

125

44.5

77.0

93.5

2.2

208

84.0

145.6

176.8

2.7

220

87.5

154.0

187.0

3.1

220

84.0

145.6

176.8

3.1

250

87.5

154.0

187.0

4.0

240

84.0

145.6

176.8

3.8

—

—

—

—

—

380

168.0

266.0

323.0

3.4

—

—

—

—

—

415

168.0

266.0

323.0

4.0

—

—

—

—

—

440

168.0

266.0

323.0

4.6

—

—

—

—

—

480

168.0

266.0

323.0

5.4

—

—

—

—

—

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

L- and M-Frames Electrical Rating Data 1 50/60 Hz

DC

Supply Voltage

Dropout Voltage

Pickup Voltage

Minimum

Maximum

Maximum

VA

Supply Voltage

12

4.2

8.4

10.2

1.9

24

8.4

16.8

20.4

48

21.0

33.6

40.8

60

21.0

33.6

110

44.5

77.0

120

44.5

77.0

2

Dropout Voltage

Pickup Voltage

Minimum

Maximum

Maximum

VA

12

4.2

8.4

10.2

1.6

3.9

24

8.4

16.8

20.4

3.1

2.5

48

21.0

33.6

40.8

2.0

40.8

3.8

60

21.0

33.6

40.8

3.1

93.5

1.8

110

44.5

77.0

93.5

1.6

93.5

2.1

120

44.5

77.0

93.5

1.9

127

44.5

77.0

93.5

2.4

125

44.5

77.0

93.5

2.2

208

84.0

145.6

176.8

2.7

220

87.5

154.0

187.0

3.1

220

84.0

145.6

176.8

3.1

250

87.5

154.0

187.0

4.0

240

84.0

145.6

176.8

3.8

—

—

—

—

—

380

168.0

266.0

323.0

3.4

—

—

—

—

—

415

168.0

266.0

323.0

4.0

—

—

—

—

—

440

168.0

266.0

323.0

4.6

—

—

—

—

—

480

168.0

266.0

323.0

5.4

—

—

—

—

—

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Note 1 Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-301

2.3 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

N-Frame Electrical Rating Data 1 50/60 Hz

DC Dropout Voltage

Pickup Voltage

Minimum

Maximum

Maximum

VA

Supply Voltage

Dropout Voltage

Pickup Voltage

Minimum

Maximum

Maximum

VA

12

4.2

8.4

10.2

1.9

2

24

8.4

16.8

20.4

3.9

12

4.2

8.4

10.2

1.6

24

8.4

16.8

20.4

48

21.0

33.6

40.8

3.1

2.5

48

21.0

33.6

40.8

2.0

2

60

21.0

33.6

110

44.5

77.0

40.8

3.8

60

21.0

33.6

40.8

3.1

93.5

1.8

110

44.5

77.0

93.5

2

120

44.5

1.6

77.0

93.5

2.1

120

44.5

77.0

93.5

2

127

1.9

44.5

77.0

93.5

2.4

125

44.5

77.0

93.5

2.2

208

84.0

145.6

176.8

2.7

220

87.5

154.0

187.0

3.1

2

220

84.0

145.6

176.8

3.1

220

87.5

154.0

187.0

—

240

84.0

145.6

176.8

3.8

250

—

—

—

4.0

2

380

175.0

266.0

323.0

3.4

—

—

—

—

—

415

175.0

266.0

323.0

4.0

—

—

—

—

—

2

480

175.0

266.0

323.0

4.6

—

—

—

—

—

500

175.0

266.0

323.0

5.4

—

—

—

—

—

2

2 2

Supply Voltage

Note 1 Endurance: 3000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-302

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

R-Frame AC Undervoltage Release Mechanism (Handle Reset) Ratings 12 Application Ratings

Electrical Operating Ratings

Catalog Suffix

Voltage (V)

Supply Voltage (V)

Minimum

02/02K

12

12

4.2

03/03K

24

24

05/05K

48–60

48

08/08K

11/11K

29/29K

110–127

208–240

380–500

Dropout Voltage (V)

2

Approximate Operating Time (ms)

Maximum

Pickup Voltage (V) Max.

VA

Minimum UVR Response 3

Initiation Circuit Breaker Contact Separation 4

Maximum Circuit Breaker Contact Opening

Dielectric Withstand Voltage (V) 5

8.4

10.2

2.3

5

46

77

1024

8.4

16.8

21.0

33.5

20.4

3.1

5

46

77

1048

40.8

3.4

5

46

77

1120

60

21.0

33.5

40.8

6.0

5

46

77

1120

110 120

44.5

77.0

93.5

3.3

5

46

77

1254

44.5

77.0

93.5

3.6

5

46

77

1254

127

44.5

77.0

93.5

3.8

5

46

77

1254

208

84.0

145.6

176.8

4.2

5

46

77

1480

220

84.0

145.6

176.8

6.6

5

46

77

1480

240

84.0

145.6

176.8

7.2

5

46

77

1480

380

168.0

266.0

323.0

3.8

5

46

77

2000

415

168.0

266.0

323.0

8.3

5

46

77

2000

440

168.0

266.0

323.0

8.8

5

46

77

2000

480

168.0

266.0

323.0

9.6

5

46

77

2000

500

168.0

266.0

323.0

10.0

5

46

77

2000

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Application Ratings

Electrical Operating Ratings

Catalog Suffix

Voltage (V)

Supply Voltage (V)

20/20K

12

12

4.2

8.4

10.2

3.4

5

46

77

1024

21/21K

24

24

8.4

16.8

20.4

4.3

5

46

77

1048

23/23K

48–60

48

21.0

33.5

40.8

4.8

5

46

77

1120

60

21.0

33.5

40.8

7.2

5

46

77

1120

110

43.8

77.0

93.5

3.3

5

46

77

1250

120

43.8

77.0

93.5

3.6

5

46

77

1250

125

43.8

77.0

93.5

3.8

5

46

77

1250

220

87.5

154.0

187.0

6.6

5

46

77

1500

250

87.5

154.0

187.0

7.5

5

46

77

1500

26/26K

28/28K

110–127

220–250

Minimum

Maximum

Approximate Operating Time (ms) Pickup Voltage (V) Max.

VA

Minimum UVR Response 3

2 2

R-Frame DC Undervoltage Release Mechanism (Handle Reset) Ratings 12

Dropout Voltage (V)

2

Initiation Circuit Breaker Contact Separation 4

Maximum Circuit Breaker Contact Opening

Dielectric Withstand Voltage (V) 5

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Endurance: 500 electrical operations plus 2500 mechanical operations. 2 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). Leads are orange and brown. 3 UVR will override a momentary voltage dip up to the response time shown. 4 Unlatching occurs 1 millisecond before circuit breaker contacts begin to separate. 5 For 1 minute.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-303

2.3 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Contents

Series C External Accessories

Description

2

Page

Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

V4-T2-116 V4-T2-117 V4-T2-118 V4-T2-121 V4-T2-135 V4-T2-153 V4-T2-161 V4-T2-185 V4-T2-211 V4-T2-222 V4-T2-237 V4-T2-256 V4-T2-267 V4-T2-269 V4-T2-270 V4-T2-273 V4-T2-308 V4-T2-326 V4-T2-327 V4-T2-328

2 2 2

External Accessories

2

Product Overview

2

End Cap Kit The end cap kit slides onto the line or load conductor of the circuit breaker and acts as a threaded adapter for the conductor to accept a ring terminal or other bolt-on connector. The end cap kit is available with English and metric thread sizes. (Field installation only.) Listed per UL File E7819.

J-Frame Plug Nut The plug nut is used in applications where screwconnected ring-type terminals are preferred to connect cables to circuit breaker conductors. The plug nut is press-fit into the opening in the circuit breaker terminal conductor. Screws and washers are supplied by customer.

Keeper Nut The keeper nut slides onto the line or load conductor of the circuit breaker and acts as a threaded adapter for the conductor to accept a ring terminal or other bolt-on connector. The keeper nut is available with English and metric thread sizes. Screws and washers are supplied by customer. (Field installation only.) Listed per UL File E7819.

Terminal Adapter

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

L-, M-, N-Frames

2

Not required. Terminals are threaded.

Control Wire Terminal Kit The control wire terminal kit provides a means to tap off control power from a main disconnect, using the provided male end of a quick disconnect. For use with steel or stainless steel terminals only. Note: Terminal Kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover.

Multiwire Connectors Eaton’s field-installed multiwire connectors for the load side (OFF) end terminals are used to distribute the load from the circuit breaker to multiple devices without the use of separate distribution terminal blocks. Multiwire lug kits include mounting hardware, insulators and tin-plated aluminum connectors to replace three mechanical load lugs. UL listed as used on the load side (OFF) end. Terminal Shields Terminal shields provide protection against accidental contact with live line side terminations. Terminal shields are fabricated from high dielectric insulating material and fasten over the front terminal access openings. Small openings in the shields provide limited access to the terminals for tightening connectors. (Field installation only.)

2 V4-T2-304

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Rear Fed Terminals. Rear fed terminals allow the cable to connect to the breaker from the back instead of the top. Terminal shields or interphase barriers are included with each rear fed terminal kit (depending on frame size). When catalog number starts with a 3, it indicates a kit with three terminals in each kit. Catalog number beginning with a TA indicates one terminal.

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Terminal End Covers The terminal end covers are designed for use in motor control center applications where, because of confined spaces, line side conductors are normally custom fitted. The molded end covers are made of high dielectric glasspolyester and slide over the line ends of the circuit breaker. Close fitting conductor openings are molded into the end covers. The end cover and circuit breaker case fit together to form terminal compartments that isolate discharged ionizing gases during circuit breaker tripping. Terminal end covers are available with two conductor opening diameters, 0.25-inch (6.4 mm) and 0.41inch (10.4 mm), and are listed per UL File E7819. (Field installation only.) Interphase Barriers The interphase barriers provide additional electrical clearance between circuit breaker poles for special termination applications. The barriers are high dielectric insulating plates that are installed in the molded slots between the terminals. (Field installation only.) Two per package. Base Mounting Plate Suitable for mounting six single-pole circuit breakers. DIN Rail Adapter For use with standard 35 mm DIN rail such as, 35 x 7.5 or 35 x 15 mm per DIN EN50022. Adapter mounting screws included are for use with twoand three-pole circuit breakers. Adapters for singlepole circuit breakers clip into the base molding. Key Operated Attachment Lock Dog (Non-Padlockable) Non-Padlockable Handle Block The non-padlockable handle block secures the circuit breaker handle in either the ON or OFF position. (Trip-free operation allows the circuit breaker to trip when the

handle block holds the circuit breaker handle in the ON position.) The device is positioned over the circuit breaker handle and secured by a setscrew to deter accidental operation of the circuit breaker handle. Listed per UL File E7819. (Field installation only.) Padlockable Handle Padlockable Handle Lock The device is positioned in the cover opening to prevent handle movement. Will accommodate one 5/16-inch (8 mm) padlock. Snap-on Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp The snap-on padlockable handle lock allows the handle to be locked in the OFF or ON position. (Trip-free operation allows the circuit breaker to trip when the handle lock holds the circuit breaker handle in the ON position.) This device was designed for use on the single-pole circuit breaker, but may be used on one-, two-, threeand four-pole styles. The handle lock snaps onto the escutcheon area of the handle with an optional retaining screw for added secureness. The handle lock will accommodate one padlock with a 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) shackle. Listed per UL File E7819. (Field installation only.) Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp The padlockable handle lock hasp allows the handle to be locked in the ON or OFF position. (Trip-free operation allows the circuit breaker to trip when the handle lock holds the circuit breaker handle in the ON position.) The hasp mounts on the circuit breaker cover within the trimline. The cover is predrilled on both sides of the operating handle so that the hasp can be mounted on either side of the handle. The hasp will accommodate up to three padlocks with 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) shackles, one per circuit breaker. Listed per UL File E7819. (Field installation only.)

Cylinder Lock The cylinder lock internally blocks the trip bar in the tripped position to prevent the circuit breaker from being switched to ON. The cylinder lock is factory installed in the left pole only of the circuit breaker cover. Other internally mounted accessories cannot be installed in the same pole as the cylinder lock. (Factory installation only.) Key Interlock Kit (Lock Not Included) The key interlock is used to externally lock the circuit breaker handle in the OFF position. When the key interlock is locked, an extended deadbolt blocks movement of the circuit breaker handle. Uniquely coded keys are removable only with the deadbolt extended. Each coded key controls a group of circuit breakers for a given specific customer installation. The key interlock assembly is Underwriters Laboratories listed for field installation under UL File E7819 and consists of a mounting kit and a purchaser supplied deadbolt lock. The mounting kit comprises a mounting plate, which is secured to the circuit breaker cover in either the left- or right-pole position, key interlock mounting screws, and a wire seal. Specific mounting kits are required for individual key interlock types. Sliding Bar Interlock The sliding bar interlock provides mechanical interlocking between two adjacent three-pole circuit breakers. It is installed on the enclosure cover between the circuit breakers. When the sliding bar interlock handle is moved from one side to the other, a bar extends to alternately block movement of the circuit breaker handles and prevents both circuit breakers from being switched to ON at the same time. Sliding bar interlocks are not UL listed. (Field installation only.)

2.3

Walking Beam Interlock The walking beam Interlock provides mechanical interlocking between two adjacent circuit breakers of the same pole configuration. The walking beam interlock mounts on a bracket behind and between the circuit breakers. A plunger on each end of the beam is inserted through an access hole in the back plate and base of each circuit breaker. The walking beam interlock prevents both circuit breakers from being switched ON at the same time. If a walking beam interlock is installed, the wiring troughs in the back of the circuit breaker case are blocked by the plungers and cannot be used for cross wiring. Factory modified circuit breakers are required for this application. UL File E38116. Electrical Operator The electrical (solenoid) operator is a single solenoid mechanism that enables local and remote circuit breaker ON, OFF, and reset switching. The electrical operator is mounted on the circuit breaker cover within the trimline of the circuit breaker. The electrical operator uses a unique bi-stable latch that allows the device to operate using one solenoid. The accessory provides high-speed switching with a maximum operating time of 5 cycles (80 mS), making it suitable for generator synchronizing applications. Means are provided for remote electrical operation and for local manual operation. A special slide includes provisions for padlocking the circuit breaker handle in the OFF position. The slide will accept three padlock shackles with a maximum diameter of 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) each. An interlock electrically disconnects the solenoid when the electrical operator cover is removed. The rating data tables provide electrical rating data for the electrical (solenoid) operator.

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-305

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

2.3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

The electrical (motor) operator allows the circuit’s breaker to be opened, closed or reset remotely. It also has a lock-off capability and provisions for manual operation. The electrical (motor) operator contains a reversible motor connected to a ball screw. The ball screw drives the circuit breaker handle. Limit switches and relays are used to control the motor. Plug-In Adapters Plug-in adapters simplify installation and front removal of circuit breakers. Individual line and load plug-in adapters are available for rear connection applications on two-, three-, and four-pole circuit breakers. Common mounting plates for lineand load-end adapters are available. One plug-in adapter kit is required for line-end and one for load-end. Plug-in adapters are UL approved unless otherwise noted. Rear Connecting Studs Rear connecting studs are available in several sizes to accommodate specific fixedmounted circuit breaker applications. Each rear connecting stud assembly consists of one stud and one tube. To maintain proper clearances between poles, select alternate long and short stud assemblies for circuit breakers with more than one pole. One assembly is required for line-end and one for load-end of each pole. Tubes must be ordered separately. Connecting studs are available only with English thread sizes.

Panelboard Connecting Straps Panelboard connecting straps are used to connect the circuit breaker terminals to the panelboard bus. The panelboard connecting straps are available with various ratings for outside and center poles. (Field installation only.) Panelboard connecting straps are available to meet the needs of most standard panelboard applications. Style numbers for mounting brackets for CDP panelboard installations are also included. Note: Not UL listed. Refer to panelboard manufacturer for compatibility.

Type LFD Current Limiter The LFD current limiter is an accessory that bolts to the load end of a standard FDB or FD thermal-magnetic circuit breaker, providing 200,000 A interrupting capacity at up to 600 Vac. LFD current limiters for thermal-magnetic and electronic circuit breakers are listed with Underwriters Laboratories under File E47239.

IQ Energy Sentinel The IQ Energy Sentinel is a highly accurate, microprocessor-based, breaker-mounted device designed to monitor power and energy readings. It represents an alternative to watt meters, watt-hour meters, and watt demand meters. Key advantages include savings in space, lower installation costs, and remote monitoring capability. The IQ Energy Sentinel mounts on the load side of a Series C F-Frame (150 ampere) circuit breaker. It can be applied on threephase, four-wire systems, or single-phase, three-wire systems with voltage connected through Phases A and C. For more information, see Descriptive Bulletin 8178.

Ground Fault Alarm Unit The ground fault alarm unit is a remotely mounted device with a combination indicating light/test button that will light when the breaker trips or alarms on ground fault. The ground fault alarm unit requires a separate 120 Vac power source to power the light and the internal relay, which has 1NO and 1NC contacts for remote indication. The ground fault alarm unit can be panel mounted for ordering with an optional face mounting bracket. For use on Digitrip 310 only, K- through NFrame.

Note: Not UL listed.

2 2 2 2 V4-T2-306

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Potential Transformer Module The potential transformer module is required for the Digitrip OPTIM 1050 to provide a voltage input to allow the trip unit to monitor power and energy as well as power factor. The potential transformer module is a 6 VA transformer with a primary voltage input of up to 600 volt line to line. Three 0.1 ampere fuses are provided on the primary of the transformer and can be used for isolation purposes during dielectric testing. The device is normally panel mounted and can feed up to 16 OPTIM trip units. Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test Kit The solid-state (electronic) portable test kit provides verification of performance of all ratings of Digitrip 310 electronic trip units installed in circuit breakers while in service under varying load and/or phase imbalance. The test kit operates on 120-volt, 50/60 Hz power; it includes complete instructions and test times for testing long time, short time/instantaneous operation and optional ground fault operation of the circuit breaker.

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Breaker Interface Module (BIM) The Breaker Interface Module (BIM) is a panel mounted user interface device that is mounted on the front of an electrical assembly or at a remote location. The BIM is used to access, configure, test and display information for OPTIM trip units and other devices. The BIM consists of four display windows, eight function buttons, 18 LEDs, and a graphical time/current curve to provide breaker status, operational information, protection status and energy monitoring. A 24 Vdc power supply is required to provide power to the BIM. This is supplied by the switchboard builder to Eaton’s specifications. The BIM is a member of Eaton’s PowerNet family of communicating devices that connects OPTIM trip units, Digitrip RMS 810/910 trip units and energy sentinels as a subnetwork system. The BIM can also be connected to a main network via a PONI module to PowerNet software.

Digitrip OPTIMizer The Digitrip OPTIMizer is a hand-held programmer that is used to access, configure, test and display information from OPTIM trip units. The OPTIMizer plugs into the front of an OPTIM trip unit via an eight-pin telephone jack and is powered by a nine-volt battery or the auxiliary power module. One highlighted feature is the “Copy” and “Download” commands. Setting up multiple OPTIM trips can be finished in minutes and with no errors. An Auxiliary Power Module connection provides a trip test when control power is not present at the breaker. The OPTIMizer is supplied as a standard package to include the programmer, the eightpin connection cord, battery and carrying case. The auxiliary power module is optional. Auxiliary Power Module The auxiliary power module is a power supply requiring 120 Vac input at 50 or 60 Hz that provides a 32 Vdc output. The auxiliary power module provides control power for testing an OPTIM trip unit when other means of control power is not available or for continuous OPTIMizer operation versus temporary with a battery. The auxiliary power module connects into the top of the Digitrip OPTIMizer via a keyed receptacle. The main application for the auxiliary power module would be for the testing of a standalone non-communicating OPTIM breaker that ordinarily would not have control power.

2.3

Cause of Trip Display/Remote Mount Cause of Trip Display The Cause of Trip Display can be field-installed on any Digitrip RMS 310+ trip unit. The device provides breaker information through an LCD screen, such as cause of trip, phrase current, ground current and low loads. The display is ideal for troubleshooting common trips such as ground fault, long delay, and instantaneous/short delay. The DIGIVIEW version will provide a local display at the breaker without additional wiring by connecting directly onto the trip unit. The DIGIVIEWR06 version has a 6 foot cable that allows users to mount the display on the outside of an enclosure door and connect to the trip unit that is contained inside the enclosure.

2

Cause of Trip LED Module The Cause of Trip LED Module can be field-installed on any Digitrip RMS 310+ trip unit. The device provides a cause of trip indication via LED. The Cause of Trip LED Module connects directly onto the trip unit. When the breaker trips, the module indicates the cause of trip (long delay, short delay, instantaneous and ground) via LED indication. The module is reset after the breaker is reset.

2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Note: The OPTIMizer can work off of 32 Vdc control power, although 24 Vdc is the standard on OPTIM breakers.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-307

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2

Product Selection

2

Termination Hardware—End Cap Kit

2

End Cap Kit

End Cap Kit Thread Type

2

Thread Size

Catalog Number

Two-Pole F-Frame (225A)

2

Imperial

10–32

KPEK12

Metric

M–5

KPEKM12

2

Three-Pole F-Frame (225A) Imperial

10–32

KPEK1

2

Metric

M–5

KPEKM1

2

Imperial

10–32

KPEK14

2

Metric

M–5

KPEKM14

2

Imperial

0.312–18

KPEK2

Metric

M–8

KPEKM2

2

Four-Pole J-Frame Imperial

0.312–18

KPEK24

2

Metric

M–8

KPEKM24

2

Imperial

0.312–18

KPEK3

2

Metric

M–8

KPEKM3

2

Imperial

0.312–18

KPEK34

Metric

M–8

KPEKM34

Four-Pole F-Frame (225A)

Three-Pole J-Frame

Three-Pole K-Frame

Four-Pole K-Frame

2

Three-Pole L-Frame Imperial

0.312-18

2

KPEK4

Metric

M-8

KPEKM4

2

Four-Pole L-Frame Imperial

0.312–18

KPEK44

2

Metric

M–8

KPEKM44

Thread Size

Catalog Number Package of 12 (Priced Individually)

2

Termination Hardware—Keeper Nut

2

F-Frame Keeper Nut

F-Frame Keeper Nut

2

Thread Type

2

Imperial

10–32

KPR1A

Metric

M–5

KPR1AM

2

Thread Type

Thread Size

Line/Load End

Catalog Number Package of 3

2

Imperial

0.375–16

Line

KPR3A

Load

KPR3B

2

Metric

Line

KPR3AM

Load

KPR3BM

2 2

K-Frame Keeper Nut

2

K-Frame Keeper Nut

M–8

Note L-, M-, N-Frames not required. Terminals are threaded.

2 V4-T2-308

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Termination Hardware J-Frame Plug Nut

Thread Type

K-Frame Terminal Adapter

2

J-Frame Plug Nut Thread Size

Catalog Number Package of 6

Imperial

0.250–20

PLN2

Metric

M–6

PLN2M

2 2 2 2

K-Frame Terminal Adapter 1 Line/Load End

Catalog Number

2

Line and load

TAD3

2 2 2

F-Frame Ordering Information Terminals must be ordered separately. Priced individually. F-Frame Kit

2

F-Frame Control Wire Terminal Kit 2 Description Package of 12 control wire terminal tangs.

Maximum Amperes

Catalog Number

150

FCWTK

225

FCWTK225

2 2 2 2 2

J- and K-Frame Ordering Information Terminals must be ordered separately. Priced individually. J- and K-Frame Kit

2

J- and K-Frame Control Wire Terminal Kit Description

Catalog Number

Package of 12 control wire terminal tangs.

KCWTK

2 2 2 2

L-Frame Control Wire Terminal Kit

2

AWG Wire Range/Number Conductors

Metric Wire Range mm2

Catalog Number

Al/Cu 3/0–350 kcmil (2)

95–150

TA602LDCW 3

2

Cu 250–350 kcmil (2)

120–250

T602LDCW 3

2

Al/Cu 400–500 kcmil (2)

185–240

2TA603LDKCW 45

2

Al/Cu 400–500 kcmil (2)

185–240

3TA603LDKCW 46

2

Al/Cu 400–500 kcmil (2)

185–240

4TA603LDKCW 47

2 2

Notes 1 K-Frame terminal adapter for use in replacing LB/DA breakers. 2 Not for use with T250KB terminals. 3 Individually packed. 4 Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. 5 Two-pole kit. 6 Three-pole kit. 7 Four-pole kit.

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2 2 2 V4-T2-309

2.3 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Termination Hardware

2

G-Frame Control Wire Terminal

2

Description

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Control wire terminal (kit of 12)

5652B38G01

GCWTK

2 2

Multiwire Connectors

Multiwire Connectors Ordering Information (Package of 3) Maximum Amperes

2

Wires per Terminal

Wire Size Range AWG Cu

Kit Catalog Number 1

3

14–2

3TA100G3K

6

14–6

3TA100G6K

3

14–2

3TA150F3K

6

14–6

3TA150F6K

3

14–2

3TA250J3K

6

14–6

3TA250J6K

3

14–2/0

3TA400K3K

6

14–3

3TA400K6K

G-Frame 2

2

100

2

F-Frame

2

225

2

J-Frame 250

2

K-Frame

2

400

2 2

Rear Fed Terminals

2

Frame

Maximum Amperes

Wire Size Range AWG Cu

Catalog Number 1

FD

150

14–4/0

TA150FDRF

150

14–4/0

3TA150FDRF

225

6–300 kcmil

TA225FDRF

225

6–300 kcmil

3TA225FDRF

400

250–500 kcmil

TA350KRF

400

250–500 kcmil

3TA350KRF

800

3/0 MAX (3)

TA800MDLRF

800

3/0 MAX (3)

3TA800MDLRF

2 2 2

KD

2

MDL

2 2 2 2

Base Mounting Hardware Ordering Information Hardware for surface mounting of circuit breakers is supplied only on request. Hardware consists of mounting screws and lockwashers. Order hardware for circuit breaker pole configurations as required. Mounting Hardware

2

Screw Length in Inches (mm)

2

Catalog Number

G-Frame

2 2

0.138–32 x 2.63 (3.5 x 66.7 mm) Std.

624B375G23

0.138–32 x 3.00 (3.5 x 76.2 mm)

8703C80G05

Notes 1 When catalog number starts with a 3, it indicates a kit with three terminals in each kit. Catalog number beginning with a TA indicates one terminal. 2 GD breakers require special tapping for multiwire lugs, as described in the IL or use with standard aluminum collars.

2 2 2 V4-T2-310

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Imperial Thread Mounting Hardware Number of Poles

Description

Type of Mounting

Catalog Number

0.164-32 x 3.188-inch pan-head steel screws, lockwashers and clamps

Individual

624B375G01

Group 1

624B375G02

F-Frame 1

2 2 2 2

2

0.164-32 x 1.5-inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers

Individual

4218B80G01

3, 4

0.164-32 x 1.5-inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers

Individual

BMH1

2

0.250-20 x 2.75 inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers

Individual

BMH2

2

0.250-20 x 1.5 inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers

Individual

BMH3

2

0.250-20 x 1.5 inch filister-head steel screws and lockwashers and flat washers

Individual

BMH4

2

0.3125-18 x 1.25 inch filister-head steel screws and lockwashers and flat washers

Individual

BMH5

2

0.3125-18 x 1.25 inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers

Individual

BMH5

2

J-Frame 2, 3, 4 K-Frame 2, 3, 4 L-Frame 2, 3, 4 M-Frame 2, 3 N-Frame 2, 3, 4

2

R-Frame Supplied by customer

2 2

Metric Thread Mounting Hardware Number of Poles

Type of Mounting

Description

Catalog Number

F-Frame 1

M4–0.7 x 80 mm pan-head steel screws, lockwashers, and clamps

Individual

4218B80G09

Group 1

4218B80G10

2 2 2

2

M4–0.7 x 38 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers

Individual

4218B80G11

3, 4

M4–0.7 x 38 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers

Individual

BMH1M

2

M6–0.7 x 70 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers

Individual

BMH2M

2

M6–0.7 x 38 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers

Individual

BMH3M

2

—

Individual

BMH4M

2

—

Individual

BMH5M

2

—

Individual

BMH5M

2

J-Frame 2, 3, 4 K-Frame 2, 3, 4 L-Frame 2, 3

2

M-Frame 2, 3 N-Frame 2, 3 R-Frame Supplied by customer

2

Note 1 One set of hardware for two circuit breakers.

2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-311

2.3 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Terminal Shields

2

G-Frame Terminal Shield

2

Number Units in Package

Catalog Number

10

GTSK3

2 2

F-Frame

2 2 2 2 2 2

J-Frame

2 2 2

F-Frame Terminal Shield Standard (Package of 10) (Priced Individually)

Special—For Use When Electrical Operator is Mounted on Circuit Breaker

Number of Poles

Location

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

1

Line

625B229G06

—

2

Line

625B229G07

—

3

Line

625B229G08

4210B95G01

4

Line

625B229G09

4210B95G02

J-Frame Terminal Shield Number of Poles

Location

Catalog Number (Package of 10)

2, 3

Line End

1266C07G01

4

Line End

6631C01G01

2, 3

Load End

6641C16G01

4

Load End

6641C16G02

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-312

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

K-Frame

K-Frame Terminal Shield Number of Poles

Location

Catalog Number (Package of 10)

2, 3

Line

TS33LN

4

Line

TS34LN

3

Load

TS33LD

Interphase Barriers Ordering Information Two per package. Interphase Barrier

L-Frame Terminal Shield

2 2

Interphase Barriers Frame

Catalog Number

F

IPB1

J, K

IPB3

L

IPB4

M

IPB4

N

IPB5

2 2 2 2

Catalog Number (Package of 1)

2

314C420G05

2 2

Base Mounting Plate Base Mounting Plate

M-Frame Terminal Shield

Base Mounting Plate G-Frame GD/GHC

2

Number of Units in Package

Catalog Number

2

1

207B513G01

Catalog Number (Package of 1)

2

208B966G01

2

DIN Rail Adapter DIN Rail Adapter

DIN Rail Adapter G-Frame GD/GHC Number of Poles

Number of Units in Package

Catalog Number

1, 2

10

1225C79G01

3

10

1225C79G02 1

N-Frame Terminal Shield All Metal DIN Rail Adapter G-Frame GD/GHC

Catalog Number (Package of 1) NTS3K

Number of Poles

Number of Units in Package

Catalog Number

3

1

EGGDDIN

Terminal End Covers Ordering Information The terminal end cover is available for three-pole circuit breakers only. Two conductor opening sizes are available. Specify quantity (one per circuit breaker) when ordering. F-Frame Terminal End Covers Conductor Opening Diameter in Inches (mm)

Catalog Number

0.25 (6.35 mm)

TEC1

0.41 (10.41 mm)

TEC2

Key Operated Attachment

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Key Operated Attachment

F-Frame

2

Key Operated Attachment G-Frame GD/GHC

2

Number of Units in Package

Catalog Number

2

10

GKOA

2

Note 1 For use on three-pole breakers only.

2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-313

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2

Lock Dog (Non-Padlockable)

2

Lock Dog (NonPadlockable)

Padlockable Handle Lock

Lock Dog (Non-Padlockable) G-Frame GD/GHC/GHB/GMCP

Padlockable Handle Lock

Padlockable Handle Lock

2

Number of Units in Package

Catalog Number

Frame

Catalog Number

G

GPHBOFF

2

1

1294C01H01

J, K

PHB3

2 2

Handle Tie G-Frame—GHB/GHC

2

Number of Poles

Number of Units in Package

Catalog Number

2

2

10

HTBGD2P

3

10

HTBGD3P

2 2 2

Snap-On Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp Snap-On Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp

Snap-On Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp Frame

Catalog Number

F

PHL1

Non-Padlockable Handle Block Non-Padlockable Handle Block

Non-Padlockable Handle Block

Frame

Catalog Number

2

F

LKD1

2

J, K

LKD3

L, M, N

LKD4

2 2

Padlockable Handle

2

Padlockable Handle

Padlockable G-Frame GD/GHC/GHB

2

Number of Units in Package

Catalog Number 1

2

10

1223C77G03

10

1223C77G05 2

2

10

1223C77G06 2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-314

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Notes 1 Accepts 0.285 Lock Shank. 2 Padlockable in the OFF position only.

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp

2

Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp

2

Catalog Number

Description

2

F-Frame Single-pole breakers

PHL1

Two-, three- and four-pole breakers

PLK1

For left side mounting

PLK1LOFF

For right side mounting

PLK1ROFF

2 2 2

J, K-Frames Two-, three- and four-pole breakers

PLK3

For left side mounting

PLK3LOFF 1

For right side mounting

PLK3ROFF

2 2

1

L-Frame (Side Mounted)

2

Lock ON or OFF

HLK4

Lock OFF only (left-hand mount)

HLK4LOFF 1

2

Lock ON or OFF

HLK4S

Lock OFF only

HLK4SOFF 1

2

L-Frame (Top Mounted)

2

M-Frame Lock ON or OFF

HLK4

Lock OFF only (left-hand mount)

HLK4LOFF 1

2

M-Frame (Vertical Mounting) Lock ON/OFF

HLK4S

Lock OFF only

HLK4SOFF

2 2

N-Frame

2

Side mounted

PLK5

Top mounted (ON/OFF)

PLK5S

Top mounted (OFF only)

PLK5SOFF 1

2

Lock ON/OFF

HLK6

2

Lock OFF only

HLK6OFF 1

R-Frame

2 2

Cylinder Lock Cylinder Lock

2

Cylinder Lock Frame

Catalog Number

2

F, J, K

Order by description

2 2

Note 1 For padlockable handle lock hasp to padlock handle in OFF position only, order either catalog number.

2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-315

2.3 2 2 2 2 2

Series C

Key Interlock Kit Ordering Information Key interlock kits contain the necessary interface and hardware to install a trapped key interlock from one of the listed manufacturers. Key interlocks are not installed or supplied as part of the breaker, and must be obtained separately from the lock manufacturer or through the manufacturer of the equipment on which the breaker will be installed. Select the mounting kit catalog number to match the type of lock used. Key Interlock Kit

photo

2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Key Interlock Kit (Trapped Key Interlock) Lock Manufacturer

Lock Type

Bolt Projection in Withdrawn Position in Inches (mm)

Kit Catalog Number

KYK1

F-Frame

position

2

Superior

B-4003-1

0.38 (9.5)

Kirk®

F

0.38 (9.5)

KYK1

Castell 1

K or QK

0.38 (9.5)

CTK1

J, K-Frames

2

Superior

B-4003-1

0.38 (9.5)

KYK3

2

Kirk

F

0.38 (9.5)

KYK3

Castell 1

K or QK

0.38 (9.5)

CTK3

KYK4

2

L-, M-, N-Frames Superior

B-4003-1

0.38 (9.5)

2

Kirk

F

0.38 (9.5)

KYK4

Castell 1

K or QK

0.38 (9.5)

CTK4

KYK6

2

R-Frame

2

Superior

B-4003-1

1.0 (25.4)

Kirk

F

1.0 (25.4)

KYK6

Castell 1

K or QK

1.0 (25.4)

CTK6

Superior

B-4003-1

0.38 (9.5)

KYKJG

Kirk

F

0.38 (9.5)

KYKJG

2

Castell 1

K or QK

0.38 (9.5)

CTKJG

2

Superior

B-4003-1

0.38 (9.5)

KYKLG

Kirk

F

0.38 (9.5)

KYKLG

Castell 1

K or QK

0.38 (9.5)

CTKLG

2

JG-Frame

2

LG-Frame

2 2

Note 1 When ordering Castell Interlock, it is necessary for customer to specify that the mounting bolt holes must be 10 mm in diameter

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-316

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Sliding Bar Interlock Ordering Information The sliding bar interlock is available for mounting between two adjacent threepole circuit breakers with circuit breakers centerline Sliding Bar Interlock

2 spacing as indicated in table and enclosure front panel thickness of 1/8 or 3/16 inch (3.2 or 4.8 mm). (For field installation only.)

2 2 2

Sliding Bar Interlock Frame

Centerline Spacing in Inches (mm)

Catalog Number

F

4.19 (106.4)

SBK1

J

4.38 (111.3)

SBK2

K

5.75 (146.0)

SBK3

L, M

8.50 (215.9)

SBK4

N

8.50 (215.9)

SBK5

Walking Beam Interlock Ordering Information The walking beam interlock is available for mounting between two adjacent circuit breakers spaced 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) apart and having the same pole configuration. The two circuit breakers must be factory modified to accept the walking beam interlock assembly (suitable for use with either two-, three- or four-pole circuit breakers). Walking Beam Interlock

2.3

2 2 2 2 2 2

With properly modified circuit breakers, the walking beam interlock is suitable for field installation. Order circuit breakers specifying modification for walking beam (20% price adder) and select walking beam interlock from table below. Circuit breakers and walking beam interlock are boxed and shipped separately.

2 2 2 2 2 2

Walking Beam Interlock Frame

Catalog Number

2

F

WBL1

K

WBL3

2

L, M

WBL4A

N

WBL5

R1

WBL6

2 2 2

Note 1 Three-pole only.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-317

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2

Electrical Operator

2

F-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator

2 2

Terminal Block

18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Lead Catalog Number

Voltage

Frequency

Catalog Number

120

AC

EOP1T07

EOP1P07

240

AC

EOP1T11

EOP1P11

2 2

F-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator 1 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Lead Voltage

Frequency

Catalog Number

2

120

50/60 Hz AC

MOPFD120C

24

DC

MOPFD24D

2

125

DC

MOPFD120C

2

208–240

50/60 Hz

MOPFD240C

220–250

DC

MOPFD240C

2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

J-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Terminal Block Operating Voltage

Frequency

Catalog Number

120

50/60 Hz AC

EOP2T07

240

50/60 Hz AC

EOP2T11

K-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Terminal Block Operating Voltage

Frequency

Catalog Number

120

50/60 Hz AC

EOP3MT07

240

50/60 Hz AC

EOP3MT11

K-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Base Mounting Kit Frame

Catalog Number

K

BBMK3

2 2 2

L- and M-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator (310 and OPTIM) Terminal Block

2

Operating Voltage

Frequency

Catalog Number

2

120

50/60 Hz

EOP4MT07

208

50/60 Hz

EOP4MT11

2

240

50/60 Hz

EOP4MT11A

480

50/60 Hz

EOP4MT15

125

DC

EOP4MT26

24

DC

EOP4MT21

2 2 2

Note 1 Motor operators MOP1P07, MOP1P03DC, MOP1P05DC and MOP1P07DC are replaced by MOPFD motor operators listed in table.

V4-T2-318

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

N-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Pigtail Leads

2

Operating Voltage

Frequency

Catalog Number

2

120

50/60 Hz

EOP5T07

208

50/60 Hz

EOP5T09

2

240

50/60 Hz

EOP5T11

480

50/60 Hz

EOP5T15

24

DC

EOP5T21

48

DC

EOP5T22

125

DC

EOP5T26

2 2 2 2

R-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Factory-Installed Terminal Block

2

Operating Voltage

Frequency

Catalog Number

2

120

50/60 Hz

EOP6T08K

240

50/60 Hz

EOP6T11K

2

48

DC

EOP6T21K

2 2

Plug-In Adapters

2

F-Frame Ordering Information (Flat Bar Type) Continuous Current Rating (Amperes)

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Four-Pole

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

100–225

1480D13G01

1480D13G02

1480D13G07 1

Mounting plate

176C511H01

507C047H01

—

2 2 2 2

J-Frame Ordering Information (Flat Bar Type) Continuous Current Rating (Amperes)

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Four-Pole

Terminal End

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

250

Line

1260C86G05

1260C86G06

1231C67G01

Load

1260C86G07

1260C86G08

1231C67G02

One line and one load

506C144G27

506C144G28

—

—

2

PMP23

—

Mounting plate

2 2 2 2 2

K-Frame Ordering Information (Flat Bar Type)—600 Vac Maximum

2

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Four-Pole

Continuous Current Rating (Amperes)

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

400

PAD32

PAD33

—

Mounting plate

2

PMP33

—

2 2

Notes 1 100 ampere maximum. 2 Use three-pole mounting plate for two-pole circuit breaker.

2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-319

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2

L-Frame (Threaded Stud Type) Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Four-Pole

2

Continuous Current Rating (Amperes)

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

600 (threaded stud type)

506C059G03

506C059G04

PAD44

600 (flat bar type)

1288C19G01

1288C19G02

6636C55H01

Mounting plate

504C824H01

504C824H01

—

2 2 2 2 2

M-Frame (Flat Bar Type)—600 Vac Maximum Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Continuous Current Rating (Amperes)

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

800

2614D53G05

2614D53G06

Mounting plate

1290C73H01

1290C73H01

2 2 2 2 2

N-Frame (Flat Bar Type) Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Continuous Current Rating (Amperes)

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

1200

2614D53G03

2614D53G04

Mounting plate

1290C73H01

1290C73H01

2

Plug-In Adapters

2

Frame

Number of Poles

Standard Certification

Catalog Number

2

FD

3

IEC

PAD3F

2

FD

4

IEC

PAD4F

JD

3

IEC

PAD3JD

2

KD

3

IEC

PAD3K

LD

3

IEC

PAD3LD

2

LD

4

IEC

PAD4LD

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-320

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

Rear Connecting Studs

2 L-Frame Ordering Information

F-Frame 1 Stud Ampere Rating

Stud Catalog Number

2

Stud Catalog Number

Tube Catalog Number

2

314C960G07

For 15 to 100 Ampere Circuit Breakers

2

314C960G08

100 A short

451D874G01

32B9446H20

100 A short

451D874G01

32B9446H21

100 A short

451D874G01

32B9446H22

100 A short

451D874G01

32B9446H23

M-Frame Ordering Information 1

100 A long

451D874G02

32B9446H24

100 A long

451D874G02

32B9446H25

Stud Ampere Rating

Stud Catalog Number

100 A long

451D874G02

32B9446H26

225

314C960G01

100 A long

451D874G02

32B9446H27

400

314C960G04

400

314C960G05

400

314C960G06

600

314C960G07

600

314C960G08

600

314C960G09

800

314C960G10

800

314C960G11

800

314C960G12

For 110 to 225 Ampere Circuit Breakers 225A short

374D883G01

374D883H06

225A short

374D883G01

374D883H07

225A short

374D883G01

374D883H08

225A short

374D883G01

374D883H09

225A long

374D883G02

374D883H10

225A long

374D883G02

374D883H11

225A long

374D883G02

374D883H12

225A long

374D883G02

374D883H13

314C960G09

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

N-Frame Ordering Information 1 J-Frame 1 Stud Ampere Rating

Stud Catalog Number

Tube Catalog Number

250A short

5010D23G01

456D983H05

250A short

5010D23G01

456D983H06

250A short

5010D23G01

456D983H07

250A long

5010D23G02

5010D23H05

250A long

5010D23G02

5010D23H06

250A long

5010D23G02

5010D23H07

Stud Ampere Rating

Stud Catalog Number

800

623B222G01

800

623B222G02

800

623B222G03

1200

373B375G04

1200

373B375G03

2 2 2 2 2

Note 1 Not UL listed.

2 2

K-Frame 1 Stud Ampere Rating

Stud Catalog Number

Standard Tube Catalog Number

400 A short

6642C14G02

313C909H17

400 A short

6642C14G04

313C909H18

400 A short

6642C14G06

313C909H19

400 A long

6642C14G03

313C909H20

400 A long

6642C14G05

313C909H21

400 A long

6642C14G07

313C909H22

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-321

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2

Panelboard Connecting Straps

2

F-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps

2

Bus Spacing in Inches (mm)

Continuous Current Rating (Amperes)

2.75 (69.9) 2.75 (69.9)

Pole Connector Type Center

Outside

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

50

673B142G02

673B142G09

100

673B142G02

673B142G10

2.75 (69.9)

150

673B142G04

673B142G03

2

3.50 (88.9)

50

1253C72G01

1253C72G03

2

3.50 (88.9)

100

1253C73G03

1253C73G06

3.50 (88.9)

150

1253C73G01

1253C73G05

2 2

2 2

F-Frame Mounting Bracket

2

Number of Poles

Catalog Number

2

624B600H02

2

3

624B600H01

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

J-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps Bus Spacing in Inches (mm)

Continuous Current Rating (Amperes)

3.50 (88.9)

250

Pole Connector Type Center

Outside

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2600D26G01

2600D26G02

K-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps Bus Spacing in Inches (mm)

Continuous Current Rating (Amperes)

3.50 (88.9)

400

Pole Connector Type Center

Outside

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

4212B78G02

4212B77G01

2

K-Frame Mounting Bracket

2

Number of Poles

Catalog Number

2, 3

208B264H01

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

V4-T2-322

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2.3

L-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps Continuous Current Rating (Amperes) 600

2

Pole Connector Type Center

Outside

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

624B609G01

506C052G01

2 2 2

L-Frame Mounting Bracket Number of Poles

Catalog Number

2, 3

208B297H01

2 2 2 2

M-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps Bus Spacing in Inches (mm)

Continuous Current Rating (Amperes)

3.50 (88.9)

800

Pole Connector Type Connector Type

Catalog Number

Short

314C996G01

Medium

314C996G02

Long

314C996G03

2 2 2 2 2

M-Frame Mounting Bracket Catalog Number

2

315C270H01

2 2

N-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps Bus Spacing in Inches (mm)

Continuous Current Rating (Amperes)

Pole Connector Type Connector Type

Catalog Number

3.50 (88.9)

1200

Short

505C606G04

Medium

505C606G05

Long

505C606G06

2 2 2 2 2

N-Frame Mounting Bracket (Four Required) Catalog Number

2

315C270H01

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-323

2.3 2 2 2 2 2

Type LFD Current Limiter

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Ground Fault Alarm Unit

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

interrupting capacity at up to 600 Vac. LFD current limiters for thermal-magnetic circuit breakers are listed with Underwriters Laboratories under File E47239.

Type LFD Current Limiter Circuit Breaker Rating Amperes

Catalog Number

15–70

LFD3070R

80–160

LFD3150R

Ground Fault Alarm Unit The ground fault alarm unit is a remotely mounted device with a combination indicating light/test button that will light when the breaker trips or alarms on ground fault. The ground fault alarm unit requires a separate 120 Vac power source to power the

2 2

Series C

Type LFD Current Limiter The LFD current limiter is an accessory that bolts to the load end of a standard FDB or FD thermal-magnetic and electronic circuit breaker, providing 200,000 A

2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

light and the internal relay, which has 1NO and 1NC contacts for remote indication. The ground fault alarm unit can be panel mounted for ordering with an optional face mounting bracket. For use on Digitrip 310 only, K- through N-Frame.

GF Alarm Unit Description

Catalog Number

Ground fault alarm unit

GFAU

Face mounting bracket

1264C67G01

Potential Transformer Module The potential transformer module is required for the Digitrip OPTIM 1050 to provide a voltage input to allow the trip unit to monitor power and energy as well as power factor. The potential transformer module is a 6 VA transformer with a primary voltage input of up to 600 volt Potential Transformer Module

Potential Transformer Module Description

Catalog Number

Potential transformer module

DOPTMLN

Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test Kit The solid-state (electronic) 50/60 Hz power; it includes portable test kit provides complete instructions and verification of performance of test times for testing long all ratings of Digitrip 310 time, short time/ electronic trip units installed instantaneous operation in circuit breakers while in and optional ground fault service under varying load operation of the circuit and/or phase imbalance. The breaker. test kit operates on 120-volt, Portable Test Kit Description Solid-state (electronic) portable test kit

IQ Energy Sentinel The IQ Energy Sentinel is a highly accurate, microprocessor-based, breaker-mounted device designed to monitor power and energy readings. It represents an alternative to watt meters, watt-hour meters, and watt demand meters. Key advantages include savings in space, lower installation costs, and remote monitoring capability.

The IQ Energy Sentinel mounts on the load side of a Series C F-Frame (150 ampere) circuit breaker. It can be applied on three-phase, four-wire systems, or singlephase, three-wire systems with voltage connected through Phases A and C. For more information, see Descriptive Bulletin 8178.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-324

line to line. Three 0.1 ampere fuses are provided on the primary of the transformer and can be used for isolation purposes during dielectric testing. The device is normally panel mounted and can feed up to 16 OPTIM trip units.

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Catalog Number STK2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Breaker Interface Module (BIM) The Breaker Interface Module (BIM) is a panel mounted user interface device that is mounted on the front of an electrical assembly or at a remote location. The BIM is used to access, configure, test and display information for OPTIM trip units and other devices. The BIM consists of four display windows, eight function buttons, 18 LEDs, and a graphical time/current curve to provide breaker status, operational information, protection status and energy monitoring. A 24 Breaker Interface Module (BIM)

Vdc power supply is required to provide power to the BIM. This is supplied by the switchboard builder to Eaton’s specifications. The BIM is a member of Eaton’s PowerNet family of communicating devices that connects OPTIM trip units, Digitrip RMS 810/910 trip units and energy sentinels as a subnetwork system. The BIM can also be connected to a main network via a PONI module to PowerNet software.

Auxiliary Power Module

power module connects into the top of the Digitrip OPTIMizer via a keyed receptacle. The main application for the auxiliary power module would be for the testing of a standalone non-communicating OPTIM breaker that ordinarily would not have control power.

Catalog Number

Digitrip OPTIMizer The Digitrip OPTIMizer is a hand-held programmer that is used to access, configure, test and display information from OPTIM trip units. The OPTIMizer plugs into the front of an OPTIM trip unit via an eight-pin telephone jack and is powered by a nine-volt battery or the auxiliary power module. One highlighted feature is the “Copy” and “Download” commands. Setting up multiple OPTIM trips can be finished in minutes and with no errors. An Auxiliary Power Module connection provides a trip test when control power is not present at the breaker. The OPTIMizer is supplied as a standard package to include

the programmer, the eightpin connection cord, battery and carrying case. The auxiliary power module is optional. Note: 24 Vdc Power Supply A 24 Vdc power supply is required for all Digitrip OPTIM trip units that are required to communicate either on the main Eaton PowerNet network or as a subnetwork to a BIM. The breaker’s load is 45 mA of current. Typically one power supply is required per switchboard and can provide control power to a BIM and the OPTIM trip units. The 24 Vdc power supply should be an “isolated high quality” power supply with a “CE” label, and is normally provided by the switchboard manufacturer to Eaton’s recommendations.

Digitrip OPTIMizer

2 2 2 2 2 2

Auxiliary Power Module

2

Catalog Number

2

PRTBAPMDV

2

Breaker Interface Module (BIM)

BIMII

Digitrip OPTIMizer

Auxiliary Power Module The auxiliary power module is a power supply requiring 120 Vac input at 50 or 60 Hz that provides a 32 Vdc output. The auxiliary power module provides control power for testing an OPTIM trip unit when other means of control power is not available or for continuous OPTIMizer operation versus temporary with a battery. The auxiliary

2.3

Cause of Trip Display/Remote Mount Cause of Trip Display The Cause of Trip Display can The DIGIVIEW version will be field-installed on any provide a local display at the Digitrip RMS 310+ trip unit. breaker without additional The device provides breaker wiring by connecting directly information through an LCD onto the trip unit. The screen, such as cause of trip, DIGIVIEWR06 version has a phrase current, ground 6 foot cable that allows users current and low loads. The to mount the display on the display is ideal for outside of an enclosure door troubleshooting common and connect to the trip unit trips such as ground fault, that is contained inside the long delay, and enclosure. instantaneous/short delay.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Cause of Trip Display/Remote Mount Cause of Trip Display

2

Catalog Number

2

DIGIVIEW

2

DIGIVIEWR06

Cause of Trip LED Module The Cause of Trip LED Module can be field-installed on any Digitrip RMS 310+ trip unit. The device provides a cause of trip indication via LED. The Cause of Trip LED Module connects directly onto the trip unit. When the

2 breaker trips, the module indicates the cause of trip (long delay, short delay, instantaneous and ground) via LED indication. The module is reset after the breaker is reset.

2 2 2 2

Catalog Number

Cause of Trip LED Module

2

OPTIMizer—standard package

Catalog Number

2

TRIP-LED

2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-325

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2

Accessories

2

Flex Shaft Accessories (F- through R-Frame)

2

NEMA 12 Safety Door Hardware for Flex Shaft and C371 1

Wire Seal The wire seal can be used to secure the cover on the trip unit to prevent adjustments after settings are confirmed.

Handle Length in Inches (mm)

Catalog Number 2

Wire Seal

4 (101.6)

C361KJ4

6 (152.4)

C361KJ6

Roller Latch 3

C361KR

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Series C Rotary Accessories As an option, an auxiliary switch is offered so that the control panel builder may electrically indicate the status of the breaker. This accessory would be mounted on the mechanism and comes with 24-inch (609.6 mm) pigtail leads.

Description

Catalog Number

Wire seal

5108A03H01

Notes 1 Customer: Consult with box manufacturer for correct door hardware and any adapters required for assembly. 2 The 1/4-inch x 1/2-inch (6.35 x 12.7 mm) standard mill rectangular locking bar is not supplied with these kits. 3 Third roller latch for use with 4- or 6-inch (101.6 or 152.4 mm) handle when 3 point latching is required.

Series C Auxiliary Switch Catalog Number 5108A61G01

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-326

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Technical Data and Specifications

2

Electrical Operator F-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Rating Data 12 Voltage 3

Frequency

Inrush Current Amperes

Maximum Operating Time

Fuse Amperes 4

120

50/60 Hz AC

10

5 cycles (80 ms)

240

50/60 Hz AC

5

5 cycles (80 ms)

Frequency

Inrush Current Amperes

120

AC

2

24

DC

5

48

DC

125

DC

168j

Operating Voltage 3

Inrush Current Amperes

3

120 AC

31

2

208 AC

13

240 AC

12

125 DC

21

24 DC

50

F-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Rating Data 2567 Voltage 3

L- and M-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Rating Data

2 2 2

Frequency

Fuse Amperes

2

50/60 Hz

31

6

208

50/60 Hz

21

—

2

240

50/60 Hz

19

4

3 2

120

480

50/60 Hz

—

—

Voltage 3

Inrush Current Amperes

Fuse Amperes

24

DC

50

—

120

30

6

48

DC

80

—

240

16

4

125

DC

21

—

K-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Rating Data

2 2 2

R-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Rating Data mnop

Operating Voltage 3

Inrush Current Amperes

Fuse Amperes

Operating Voltage q

Frequency

Motor Inrush Current Amperes

120

30

6

120

50/60 Hz

40

4

240

50/60 Hz

27

48

DC

53

24

DC

58

240

16

2

Inrush Current Amperes

Operating Voltage 3

1689

2 2

N-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Rating Data 16kl

J-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Rating Data 1689

2

2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 UL listed under UL File E64983. 2 The electrical operator design is endurance tested for 8000 electrical operations. 3 Tolerance: +10%, –15% of nominal voltage. 4 Use current-limiting type fuse where required. 5 UL listed under UL File E64124. 6 Frequency: 50/60 Hz. 7 Maximum operating time: 3 seconds max. Operator is an intermittent duty device. The safe duty cycle (OFF to ON to OFF) should not exceed one per minute. 8 The electrical operator design has been endurance tested for 6000 electrical operations. 9 Maximum operating time: 5 cycles (80 mS). j Maximum operating time: 12 cycles. k The electrical operator design has been endurance tested for 2,500 electrical operations. l Maximum operating time: 12 cycles max. Operator is an intermittent duty device. The safe duty cycle (OFF to ON to OFF) should not exceed one per minute. m Operator is an intermittent duty service. The safe duty cycle (OFF to ON to OFF) should not exceed one per minute. n Electric Operating time at rated voltage; (a) To turn breaker ON–1/2 second max. (b) To turn breaker OFF–1/2 second max. o Motor operating temperature; Class “A” temperature limits apply. p A minimum 1 kVA power source is recommended for motor operation. q Applied voltage should be no less than 85% or no more than 110% of rated voltage.

2

For OPTIM trip, OPEOPCK kit required.

2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-327

2.3 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2

Rear Connecting Studs

2

F-Frame 1

2

Stud Ampere Rating

2 2 2 2

Stud Catalog Number

Panel Thickness

Tube Length

A

B

C

Tube Catalog Number

Dimensions D

E

F

0.31 (7.9)–18

For 15 to 100 Ampere Circuit Breakers 100 A short

451D874G01

1.00 (25.4)

1.06 (26.9)

—

32B9446H20

—

3.63 (92.1)

100 A short

451D874G01

0.69–0.94 (17.5 to 23.8)

1.38 (34.9)

—

32B9446H21

—

3.63 (92.1)

0.31 (7.9)–18

100 A short

451D874G01

0.38–0.63 (9.5 to 15.9)

1.69 (42.9)

—

32B9446H22

—

3.63 (92.1)

0.31 (7.9)–18

100 A short

451D874G01

0.25–0.31 (6.4 to 7.9)

2.00 (50.8)

—

32B9446H23

—

3.63 (92.1)

0.31 (7.9)–18

100 A long

451D874G02

1.00 (25.4)

—

3.44 (87.3)

32B9446H24

6.13 (155.6)

—

0.31 (7.9)–18

2

100 A long

451D874G02

0.69–0.94 (17.5 to 23.8)

—

3.75 (95.2)

32B9446H25

6.13 (155.6)

—

0.31 (7.9)–18

100 A long

451D874G02

0.38–0.63 (9.5 to 15.9)

—

4.06 (103.1)

32B9446H26

6.13 (155.6)

—

0.31 (7.9)–18

2

100 A long

451D874G02

0.25–0.31 (6.4 to 7.9)

—

4.38 (111.3)

32B9446H27

6.13 (155.6)

—

0.31 (7.9)–18

For 110 to 225 Ampere Circuit Breakers

2

225A short

374D883G01

1.00 (25.4)

1.06 (26.9)

—

374D883H06

—

4.25 (108.0)

0.44 (11.1)–14

225A short

374D883G01

0.69–0.94 (17.5 to 23.8)

1.38 (34.9)

—

374D883H07

—

4.25 (108.0)

0.44 (11.1)–14

225A short

374D883G01

0.38–0.63 (9.5 to 15.9)

1.69 (42.9)

—

374D883H08

—

4.25 (108.0)

0.44 (11.1)–14

225A short

374D883G01

0.25–0.31 (6.4 to 7.9)

2.00 (50.8)

—

374D883H09

—

4.25 (108.0)

0.44 (11.1)–14

2 2 2

225A long

374D883G02

1.00 (25.4)

—

3.44 (87.3)

374D883H10

7.50 (190.5)

—

0.44 (11.1)–14

225A long

374D883G02

0.69–0.94 (17.5 to 23.8)

—

3.75 (95.2)

374D883H11

7.50 (190.5)

—

0.44 (11.1)–14

225A long

374D883G02

0.38–0.63 (9.5 to 15.9)

—

4.06 (103.1)

374D883H12

7.50 (190.5)

—

0.44 (11.1)–14

2

225A long

374D883G02

0.25–0.31 (6.4 to 7.9)

—

4.38 (111.3)

374D883H13

7.50 (190.5)

—

0.44 (11.1)–14

2

F-Frame

2 2 2 2

E B Mounting Panel

2 .75 (19.1)

2 2

“F” Thread

Breaker Mounting Surface

.06 (1.5)

A

C D

Note 1 Not UL listed.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-328

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2

J-Frame Stud Ampere Rating

Stud Catalog Number

Panel Thickness

Tube Length

A

B

C

Tube Catalog Number

250A short

5010D23G01

0.75–1.00 (19.1–25.4)

0.84 (21.4)

—

456D983H05

250A short

5010D23G01

0.50–0.75 (12.7–19.1)

1.09 (27.7)

—

456D983H06

250A short

5010D23G01

0.25–0.50 (6.4–12.7)

1.03 (26.2)

—

456D983H07

250A long

5010D23G02

0.75–1.00 (19.1–25.4)

—

3.88 (98.6)

5010D23H05

250A long

5010D23G02

0.50–0.75 (12.7–19.1)

—

4.13 (104.9)

5010D23H06

250A long

5010D23G02

0.25–0.50 (6.4–12.7)

—

4.38 (111.3)

5010D23H07

1.59 (40.4) 0.59 (15.0) 0.06 (1.5)

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

6.66 (169.2)

2

C

A 0.03 (0.7)

2

0.31 (7.9) – 18 Thread

2 2

Do Not Use More Than 10 Ft Lbs Torque to Tighten Nuts

0.50 (12.7) – 13 Thread

2

Breaker

2

B

Mounting Panel

3.63 (92.2)

2 2

K-Frame 1 Stud Ampere Rating

Stud Catalog Number

Panel Thickness

Tube Length

A

B

400 A short

6642C14G02

0.75–1 (19.1–25.4)

400 A short

6642C14G04

0.50–0.75 (12.7–18.4)

2

C

Standard Tube Catalog Number

Dimensions D

E

F

0.84 (21.3)

—

313C909H17

—

3.66 (93.0)

0.75–16 (19.1–406.4)

1.09 (27.69)

—

313C909H18

—

—

—

400 A short

6642C14G06

0.25–0.5 (6.35–12.7)

1.03 (26.16)

—

313C909H19

—

—

—

400 A long

6642C14G03

0.75–1 (19.1–25.4)

—

3.78 (96.0)

313C909H20

—

—

—

400 A long

6642C14G05

0.50–0.75 (12.7–18.4)

—

4.03 (102.4)

313C909H21

6.58 (167.1)

—

—

400 A long

6642C14G07

0.25 –0.5 (6.35–12.7)

—

4.28 (108.7)

313C909H22

—

—

—

2 2 2 2 2

E B

Mounting Panel

2

2 2

“F” Thread Breaker Mounting Surface

2 0.06 (1.5) 1.67 (42.4)

2 A

C

2

D

2

Note 1 Not UL listed.

2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-329

2.3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C

2

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2

L-Frame

2

Stud Length (A)

Stud Catalog Number

5.47 (138.9)

314C960G07

2

7.97 (202.4)

314C960G08

10.47 (265.9)

314C960G09

2 2

.44 (11.2)

A

2

Insulators Washer

2

Nut

2 2

Circuit Breaker

2

Insulating Panel

Rear Connecting Stud

2 2

M-Frame Stud Ampere Rating

Diameter and Thread

Extension Back of Breaker

Stud Catalog Number

2

225

0.50 (12.7)–13

3.66 (93.0)

314C960G01

400

0.75 (19.1)–16

5.91 (150.1)

314C960G04

2

400

0.75 (19.1)–16

8.41 (213.6)

314C960G05

400

0.75 (19.1)–16

10.91 (277.0)

314C960G06

2

600

1.00 (25.4)–12

5.91 (150.1)

314C960G07

2

600

1.00 (25.4)–12

8.41 (213.6)

314C960G08

600

1.00 (25.4)–12

10.91 (277.0)

314C960G09

2

800

1.13 (28.7)–12

5.91 (150.1)

314C960G10

800

1.13 (28.7)–12

8.41 (213.6)

314C960G11

2

800

1.13 (28.7)–12

10.91 (277.0)

314C960G12

Stud Ampere Rating

Diameter and Thread

Extension Back of Breaker

Stud Catalog Number

800

1.13 (28.7)–12

5.5 (139.7)

623B222G01

2

800

1.13 (28.7)–12

8.0 (203.2)

623B222G02

2

800

1.13 (28.7)–12

10.5 (266.7)

623B222G03

1200

1.25 (31.8)–12

5.5 (139.7)

373B375G04

1200

1.25 (31.8)–12

10.5 (266.7)

373B375G03

2

2 2 2

2

N-Frame

2 2 2 2 V4-T2-330

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Definite Purpose

2.4

Contents

GP, FP, KP, LP and MP Frames

Description

Page

Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Base Mounting Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line and Load Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional Line and Load Terminals . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Learn Online

V4-T2-332 V4-T2-332 V4-T2-334 V4-T2-334 V4-T2-334 V4-T2-334 V4-T2-335 V4-T2-336 V4-T2-334 V4-T2-337

Drawings Online

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Definite Purpose Molded Case Circuit Breaker Family

2 2

Definite Purpose Molded Case Circuit Breakers

2

Optimized solution for HVAC/R and Pumping Applications.

Product Overview GP, FP, KP, LP and MP Frames 15–800 Amperes NEMA 480 Vac Eaton’s Definite Purpose molded case circuit breakers are available in three-pole configurations, and are designed to meet the specific requirements of HVAC/R and pumping applications. As with other members of Eaton’s family of molded case circuit breakers, Definite Purpose breakers provide high quality, reliability, unmatched performance and outstanding value.

Eaton’s Definite Purpose breakers are rated from 15– 800 A and are available in five frame sizes. Each frame size has the same compact outside dimensions as Series C breakers. Additionally, Definite Purpose breakers have been rigorously tested to the UL 489 standard. They are assembled in an ISO certified facility.

Trip Units and Terminals Definite Purpose breakers contain factory-sealed thermal-magnetic trip units. The GP-Frame breaker (15–100 A) includes line and load terminals and breaker mounting hardware. FP (15–225A), KP (200– 400 A), LP (450–600 A) and MP (700–800 A) Frames ship standard without mounting hardware. For line and load terminals, add “L” to the end of the catalog number or “W” for no terminals.

External Accessories Definite Purpose breakers use the same external accessories as Series C breakers: handle mechanisms, motor operators, lock-off devices, busbar extensions and multiple terminal arrangements.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-331

2.4 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Definite Purpose

Product Selection Guide

Electrical Characteristics

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Breaker Type

GPS

FPS

FPH

KPS

KPH

Amperage range

15–100 A

15–225A

15–225A

200–400 A

200–400 A

Performance level Breaker capacity (kA rms) NEMA, UL, CSA

Number of poles

240 Vac

S

S

H

S

H

65

65

100

65

100 65

480 Vac

22

35

65

35

600 Vac

—

18

25

25

35

3

3

3

3

3

Maximum voltage (Vac)

480

600

600

600

600

Thermal-magnetic

■

■

■

■

■

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-332

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Definite Purpose

2.4 2 2

Electrical Characteristics, continued

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Breaker Type

LPS

LPH

MPS

MPH

Amperage range

450–600 A

450–600 A

700–800 A

700–800 A

Performance level

S

H

S

H

Breaker capacity (kA rms)

240 Vac

65

100

65

100

NEMA, UL, CSA

480 Vac

35

65

50

65

600 Vac

25

35

25

35

3

3

3

3

Number of poles Maximum voltage (Vac)

600

600

600

600

Thermal-magnetic

■

■

■

■

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-333

2.4

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Definite Purpose

2

Features

2

Base Mounting Hardware English base mounting hardware is included with GP frame only. For all other frames, order base mounting hardware separately as per the table to the right.

2

Base Mounting Hardware Catalog Number Frame

English

Metric

GP

Included

—

FP

BMH1

BMH1M

KP

BMH3

BMH3M

2

LP

BMH4

BMH4M

MP

BMH5

BMH5M

2

Note: Base mounting hardware, is included with GP-Frame breakers.

2

2 2 2 2 2

A separate catalog number is not required.

Line and Load Terminals Both line and load terminals are included with GP-Frame Definite Purpose breakers. For all other frames, add “L” for line and load terminals to be included or “W” for no terminals.

Line and Load Termination Breaker

Termination Type

Awg Wire Range

Metric Wire Range (mm)

Wire Type

Bolt Size English

Bolt Size Metric

Torque Lb–In

Torque Nm

Catalog Number

GP

Wire

#14–1/0

2.5–50

Cu only

—

—

45

5.1

Included

Optional Line and Load Terminals

Breaker

2

Maximum Amperes

Awg Wire Range

Wire Type

Catalog Number

Catalog Number with Control Wire Termination

100

#14–#10

Cu/Al

3T100FB 1

—

2

100

#8

Cu/Al

3T100FB 1

—

100

#6–#4

Cu/Al

3T100FB 1

—

2

100

#3–4/0

Cu/Al

3T100FB 1

—

200

#3–4/0

Cu only

3T150FB 1

—

2

225

#4–4/0

Cu/Al

3TA225FB 1

—

225

#6–300

Cu/Al

3TA225FDK 1

—

400

250–500 (1)

Cu/Al

TA350K

—

400

3/0–250 (2)

Cu/Al

3TA400K 1

3TA400KCW TA602LDCW

FP

2

KP

2

LP

2

MP

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

500

250–350 (2)

Cu/Al

TA602LD

600

400–500 (2)

Cu/Al

3TA603LDK 1

3TA603LDKCW

800

3/0–400 (3)

Cu/Al

TA800MA2

TA800MA2CWT

800

500–750 (2)

Cu/Al

TA801MA

TA801MACWT

Note 1 Package of three terminals.

Accessories End Cap Accessory Kit End caps for line and load conductor termination are optional with each breaker. End caps secure the conductor with a ring-type connector. The kit includes one end cap, three cap screws, three nuts and three lock washers.

End Cap Accessory Kit

Series C Accessories For internal accessories, see Page V4-T2-273. For external accessories, see Page V4-T2-304.

2 2 V4-T2-334

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Definite Purpose

2.4

Catalog Number Selection

2

This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.

2

FP S 3 150 L Frame Size GP = GP-Frame FP = FP-Frame KP = KP-Frame LP = LP-Frame MP = LP-Frame

GP-Frame 015 = 15A 020 = 20 A 025 = 25 A 030 = 30 A 035 = 35A 040 = 40 A 045 = 45A 050 = 50 A 060 = 60 A 070 = 70 A 080 = 80 A 090 = 80 A 100 = 100 A

FP-Frame 015 = 15A 020 = 20 A 025 = 25 A 030 = 30 A 035 = 35A 040 = 40 A 045 = 45A 050 = 50 A 060 = 60 A 070 = 70 A 080 = 80 A 100 = 100 A 110 = 110 A 125 = 125A 150 = 150 A 175 = 175A 200 = 200 A 225 = 225A

2 2

Options Interrupting Rating S = Standard H = High 1

Number of Poles 3 = Three-pole

Ampere Rating KP-Frame LP-Frame 175 = 175A 450 = 450 A 200 = 200 A 500 = 500 A 250 = 250 A 600 = 600 A 300 = 300 A 400 = 400 A

K = Molded case switch 2 L = Line and load terminals W = Without terminals or mounting hardware 1

2 2 2

MP-Frame 700 = 700 A 800 = 800 A

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Not available on GP-Frame. 2 When choosing a molded case switch, select the highest amperage rating for the frame and the standard interrupting rating.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-335

2.4

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Definite Purpose

2

Product Selection

2

Catalog Numbers When ordering Definite Purpose breakers, use the appropriate catalog numbers given below.

2 2

GP 100

GP-Frame/15–100 A

FP 225

FP-Frame/15–225 A Three-Pole

Three-Pole

2 2

Frame/ Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

Frame/ Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

GP/15–100 A circuit breakers

GPS3015

FP/15–225A circuit breakers

FPS3015

2

GPS3020

FPS3020

GPS3025

FPS3025

2

GPS3030

FPS3030

2

GPS3035

FPS3035

GPS3040

FPS3040

2

GPS3045

FPS3045

GPS3050

FPS3050

2

GPS3060

FPS3060

GPS3070

FPS3070

2

GPS3080

FPS3080

2

GPS3090

FPS3090

GPS3100

FPS3100

GPS3100K

FPS3110

2

GP/100 A molded case switch

Note: All GP frames come standard with line and load terminals

FPS3125

2

and base mounting hardware. Not available without terminals.

FPS3150 FPS3175

2

FPS3200

2

FPH3015

FPS3225

2

FPH3020

2

FPH3030

2

FPH3040

FPH3025

FPH3035

2

FPH3045

2

FPH3060

FPH3050

FPH3070

2

FPH3080

2

FPH3100

FPH3090

2

FPH3110

2

FPH3150

FPH3125

FPH3175

2

FPH3200 FPH3225

2

FP/225A molded case switch

2

Note: At the end of catalog number, add “L” for terminals or “W” for no terminals.

2 V4-T2-336

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

FPS3225K

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Definite Purpose

KP 250

KP-Frame/200–400 A

2.4

Dimensions Three-Pole

Frame/ Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

KP/175–400 A circuit breakers

KPS3175 KPS3200

2

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) All dimensions are provided for guidance and should not be used for construction purposes unless approved. Contact Eaton for detailed outline drawings.

GP, FP, KP, LP and MP Definite Purpose Frames

2

KPS3400 KPH3175 KPH3200 KPH3250 KPH3300 KPH3400 KP/400 A molded case switch

LP 400

Breaker Type GP Width 3.00 (76.2)

FP

KP

LP

MP

4.13 (104.9)

5.49 (139.4)

8.25 (209.6)

8.25 (209.6)

Height 4.88 (124.0)

6.00 (152.4)

10.12 (257.0)

10.75 (273.1)

16.00 (406.4)

Depth 2.63 (66.7)

3.38 (85.9)

4.31 (109.6)

3.81 (96.8)

4.06 (103.1)

KPS3400K

Frame/ Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

LP/450–600 A circuit breakers

LPS3450

2

2 2

LPS3500

2

LPS3600

2

LPH3450 LPH3500

2

LPH3600 LPS3600K

2 2

MP-Frame/700–800 A Three-Pole Frame/ Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

MP/700–800 A circuit breakers

MPS3700

2 2 2

MPS3800 MPH3700

2

MPH3800 MP/800 A molded case switch

2

2 Three-Pole

MP 800

2

2

LP-Frame/450–600 A

LP/600 A molded case switch

2 2

KPS3250 KPS3300

2

MPS3800K

2 2

Note: For KP, LP, MP frames above, add “L” for terminals or W” for no terminals to end of catalog number.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-337

2.5 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Metering and Communications

Contents

PM3 Modules

Description

2

Page

PM3 Monitoring and Metering Module Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and Weights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 2 2

Learn Online

V4-T2-339 V4-T2-339 V4-T2-340

Drawings Online

2 2 2 2 2

Power Monitoring and Metering with Modbus RTU

2

PM3 Monitoring and Metering Module

2

Product Description

Application Description

The PM3 is the perfect solution for main, branch circuit and standalone monitoring/metering applications. With information at your fingertips, you can meter, monitor and communicate phase current and voltage with calculated power and energy.

●

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

The PM3 is versatile, as it connects to the load side of a molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) and communicates easily to a local network or the Internet through Eaton Power Xpert® Gateways (PXGs). Cost of ownership is reduced through ease of installation. The PM3 is your ideal MCCB metering solution.

2 2 2 2 2 2

●

●

Communications via Modbus® and Eaton’s INCOM™ protocol; compatible with Eaton’s PXG for Web page and Ethernet capabilities Works in 240 Vac PM3, 480 Vac and 600 Vac applications ● 480 Vac PM3 has internal power supply to power electronics ● 600 Vac PM3 requires 24 Vdc auxiliary power Seamlessly integrates with thermal-magnetic or electronic trip units

Features and Benefits ●

●

●

●

●

Communicates electrical system data and circuit breaker status Calculates power and energy to an accuracy of 1.0% of reading Configurable with thermalmagnetic or electronic trip units Suitable for reverse-feed applications Easy to install

PM3 Benefits When Combined with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit ● Alarming: high load and ground fault ● Zone selective interlocking ● Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System™ ● Cause-of-trip localized information through Digiview and TRIP-LED ● Modbus/INCOM communications ● HMI connectivity through PXG ● Current and voltage metering to 0.5% of reading ● Power and energy monitoring to 1.0% of reading ● Reduces cost of ownership

2 2 V4-T2-338

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Standards and Certifications ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Meets ANSI C12.1 revenue grade standard with a current and voltage accuracy of 0.5% of reading UL 489, Annex J IEC 61000-4-2—ESD IEC 61000-4-4—EFT IEC 61000-4-5—SURGE IEC 61000-4-6—EMC ANSI C12.1 (1% accuracy) UL/cUL/CE

2.5

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Metering and Communications

Product Selection

2

PM3 Modules Frame

Catalog Number

PM3 Power Monitoring and Communications Module Technical Specifications for Modbus RTU

2

480 V

Description

2

600 V

Specification

Current Inputs

Modbus

2

FD

—

PM3FM

Pickup current

0.3A rms

JG

—

PM3JM

Maximum reported current

FD/JG 250 A rms

KD and LG

—

PM3LM Accuracy

0.5% of reading

2

Line-to-neutral 30–366 Vac

2

INCOM FD

PM3FI480

PM3FI600

Voltage Inputs

JG

PM3JI480

PM3JI600

Range

KD and LG

PM3LI480

Line-to-line 52–635 Vac

PM3LI600 Supported systems

End Cap Kits (Sold Separately) Catalog Number

Description

FD

Metric end cap kit KPEKM1 for F-Frame English end cap kit KPEK1 for F-Frame

Metric end cap kit KPEKM3 for K-Frame English end cap kit KPEK3 for K-Frame

LG

Input impedance

996 kiloohm/phase

2

Burden per phase

0.36 VA/phase max. at 600 V; 0.014 VA at 120V

2

Phase voltage connections

Internal via screw terminal to busbar For wye system, a neutral is required to be connected to the PM3 on the right Phoenix connector.

2

Neutral connection

If neutral is not available, the meter will calculate a virtual neutral based on the phase-to-phase rms voltage. The system voltage must be balanced for this to be accurate.

Metric end cap kit FJ3RTWK for JG-Frame English end cap kit FJ3RTDK for JG-Frame

KD

2

Three-element wye, three-element wye + neutral Two-element delta, four-wire delta systems

Frame

JG

2

KD/LD 630 A rms

Metric end cap kit L3RTWK for LG-Frame

2 2

Frequency Frequency

50/60 Hz

Accuracy

± 0.1 Hz

Resolution

0.1 Hz

2 2

Power and Energy Accuracy

2

1% of reading (ANSI C12.1)

2

Isolation All inputs and outputs are galvanically isolated to 2500 V.

Technical Data and Specifications Metered parameters ● IA, IB, IC ● VAB, VBC, VCA, Van, Vbn, Vcn ● Apparent Energy, Forward Real Energy, Reverse Real Energy, Net Real Energy, Lagging Reactive Energy, Leading Reactive Energy, Net Reactive Energy ● Apparent Power A, B, C; Apparent Power Total; Reactive Power A, B, C; Reactive Power Total; Real Power A, B, C; Real Power Total ● Frequency, Apparent Power Factor, Apparent PFA, Apparent PFB, Apparent PFC

2

Environmental Ratings Operating temperature

–20 °C to +50 °C

Storage temperature

–20 °C to +50 °C

Operating humidity

5 to 95% RH noncondensing

2

Voltage, current

True rms

Sampling rate

13.02K samples per second

2

2

Sensing Method

2

Update Rate Watts, VAR and VA

1.03 sec at 60 Hz

All other parameters

1.07 sec at 60 Hz

2

DC voltage

18–30 Vdc

2

Maximum current

30.0 mA at 24 Vdc

Burden

0.72W

Power Supply (External)

2 2

Standard Communication Format Connection type

Three-wire RS-485 (A, B, Common)

Com port baud rate

9600 or 19,200 bauds

Modbus address range

01–247

Data format

Selectable (8, N, 1 | 8, N, 2 | 8, Even, 1 | 8, Odd, 1)

Protocols

Modbus RTU

Internal termination resistor selectable ON or OFF

Via DIP switch

Default: 19,200 bauds

2

Default: 8, N, 2

2

Default: Enabled

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-339

2 2

2.5 2

Metering and Communications

Dimensions and Weights Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) FD Three-Pole with PM3 Modbus

2

1.38 (35.1)

2 2

2.88 (73.2)

3.63 (92.2)

On Off

3.63 (92.2)

6.00 (152.4) CL Handle

0.69 (17.5)

Line End

7.00 (177.8) CL Handle

O N

O F F

LED

5.50 (139.7)

3.95 (100.3)

11.00 (279.4)

10.50 (266.7)

O N

12.00 (304.8)

1 2 3 4 5 6

123456789101112131415

2.06 (52.3)

3.34 (84.8)

Load End

123456789101112131415

2.06 (52.3)

3.42 (86.9) 3.94 (100.1)

4.13 (104.9)

2

Load End

KD Three-Pole with PM3 Modbus

2

1.72 (43.7)

2 2

0.86 (21.8)

2

LG Three-Pole with PM3 Modbus

Line End

12.14 (308.4)

CL Handle

10.13 (257.3)

Power Monitoring/ Metering Module

Tx

ON O

Rx

Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 3 4 5 6

MODBUS

COM EARTH 24 Vdc (+) 24 Vdc (–)

13.83 (351.3)

Network Address

Power

Bell Alarm COM COM Aux. Alarm V Neutral

2.74 (69.6) 5.48 (139.2)

Power Monitoring/ Metering Module

Tx

ON O

Rx

Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 3 4 5 6

STATUS Network Address

N1

A B

MODBUS

COM EARTH 24 Vdc (+)

Load End

CL Handle

10.13 (257.3)

See breaker for terminal information. See instruction sheet for high voltage tests. For use on Series G, L-Frame or Series C, K-Frame Circuit Breaker, Switch, Motor Circuit Protector.

2

3.98 (101.1)

Power

Bell Alarm COM COM Aux. Alarm V Neutral See breaker for terminal information. See instruction sheet for high voltage tests. For use on Series G, L-Frame or Series C, K-Frame Circuit Breaker, Switch, Motor Circuit Protector.

2.74 (69.6) 5.48 (139.2)

4.06 (103.1) 4.88 (124.0)

13.82 (351.0)

Load End

PM3 Dimensions and Shipping Weights Description

Frame

Weight in lbs (kg)

FD

1.26 (0.57)

JG

1.60 (0.73)

KD/LG

2.25 (1.02)

2

2

5.58 (141.7)

CL Handle

24 Vdc (–)

2

2

Line End

4.31 (109.5) 4.06 (103.1) 3.98 (101.1)

5.58 (141.7)

8.44 (214.4)

12.14 (308.4)

STATUS

N1

A

2

2

0.86 (21.8)

4.73 (120.1)

5.77 (146.6)

CL Handle

Off/O

8.44 (214.4)

B

2

1.72 (43.7)

On/I

2

2

4.31 (109.5) 4.06 (103.1) 3.81 (96.8)

5.77 (146.6)

4.92 (125.0)

3.34 (84.8) 3.42 (86.9) 4.41 (112.0)

4.13 (104.9)

2

2

LED

1 2 3 4 5 6

2

2

CL Handle

PUSH TO TRIP

FACTO O N

9.53 (242.1)

2

2

3.57 (90.7) 3.44 (87.4) 3.34 (84.8)

3.95 (100.3)

3.17 (80.5)

CL Handle S RY EA

4.50 (114.3)

2 2

Line End

1.38 (35.1)

FACTO

2

3.50 (88.9) 3.39 (86.1) 3.19 (81.0)

123456789101112131415

2

0.69 (17.5)

JG Three-Pole with PM3 Modbus

S RY EA

2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Basic unit in inches (mm)

Shipping container dimensions in inches (mm)

V4-T2-340

Dimensions and Weights

FD

4.13 W x 5.00 L x 3.39 H (104.9 x 127.0 x 86.1)

JG

4.13 W x 5.00 L x 3.39 H (104.9 x 127.0 x 86.1)

KD/LG

5.48 W x 3.70 L x 4.06 H (139.2 x 94.0 x 103.2)

FD/JG

8.00 x 5.13 x 5.50 (203.2 x 130.3 x 139.7)

KD/LG

6.25 x 8.25 x 7.00 (158.7 x 209.5 x 177.8)

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

3.98 (101.1) 4.06 (103.1) 5.43 (137.9)

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

2.6

Contents

Engine Generator Circuit Breakers

Description Engine Generator Circuit Breakers Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct Current Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—600 Vdc Per-Pole and 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2 Mining Service Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . E2VAC Mining Vacuum Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . Classic Mining Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add-On Ground Fault Protection—Type GFR . . . . Learn Online

Page

2

V4-T2-342 V4-T2-343

2

V4-T2-345 V4-T2-345 V4-T2-346 V4-T2-346 V4-T2-347 V4-T2-360 V4-T2-372 V4-T2-398 V4-T2-401 V4-T2-415

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Drawings Online

2 2 2 2

Engine Generator Circuit Breakers Product Description

Application Description

Standards and Certifications

Eaton’s engine generator molded case circuit breakers are designed specifically for application on diesel engine powered standby generators where high interrupting circuit breakers are not required. The JG through NG breakers are equipped with a special trip unit, that includes standard thermal (overload) protection and special low magnetic pickup range (FG includes a fixed thermalmagnetic pickup). The standard thermal trip unit provides overload protection for conductors per the National Electrical Code®. The low magnetic pickup range is approximately two to five times the continuous rating and provides closer low-level short-circuit protection when applied on generators that have very low short-circuit capacity. This combination allows the user to customize the breaker to the generator output.

Engine generator circuit breakers are suitable for reverse feed application.

Engine generator molded case circuit breakers are designed to conform with the following standards: ●

●

●

2 2 2

Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 489, Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures File E7819 Canadian Standards Association Standard C22.2 No. 5, Service Entrance and Branch Circuit Breakers International Electrotechnical Commission Recommendations IEC 947-2, Circuit Breakers

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Conformance with these standards satisfies most local and international codes, assuming user acceptability and simplified application.

2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-341

2.6 2 2 2 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

Catalog Number Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers. ●

FG breakers include both line and load side terminals

●

●

JG, KG, LG and NG breakers with W catalog number suffix do not include any terminals JG, KG, LG and NG breakers without W catalog number suffix include both line and load terminals

●

●

Contact Eaton for additional ratings and internal/external accessories Reverse feed

Circuit Breakers FG, JG, KG, LG and NG

FG 3 100 W

2 2

Frame FG

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Number of Poles 3 = Three-pole

Trip Amperes 015 020 025 030 035 040 045 050 060 070 080 090 100 125 150 175 200 225

Suffix W = Without terminals

JG

2

175 200 225 250

2

KG 300 350 400

2 2

LG 450 500 600

2

NG 700 800 900 1000 1200

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-342

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.6

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

Product Selection The following table lists FG through NG engine generator breakers with the maximum generator kVA and kW rating. Engine generator breakers are applied at 115% of the

2

generator full load current rating (FLA). The maximum kW rating is based on threephase generators at 80% power factor.

2 2 2

Thermal-Magnetic Engine Generator Breaker 3

Maximum Generator Rating 60 Hz Magnetic Pickup Range

240 Vac

480 Vac

600 Vac

kVA 1

kW 2

kVA 1

kW 2

kVA 1

kW 2

Catalog Number

Fixed

5

4

11

9

14

11

FG3015 4

Fixed

7

6

14

12

18

14

FG3020 4

Fixed

9

7

18

14

23

18

FG3025 4

Fixed

11

9

22

17

27

22

FG3030 4

Fixed

13

10

25

20

32

25

FG3035 4

Fixed

14

12

29

23

36

29

FG3040 4

Fixed

16

13

32

26

41

32

FG3045 4

Fixed

18

14

36

29

45

36

FG3050 4

Fixed

22

17

43

35

54

43

FG3060 4

Fixed

25

20

51

40

63

51

FG3070 4

Fixed

29

23

58

46

72

58

FG3080 4 4

Fixed

32

26

65

52

81

65

FG3090

Fixed

36

29

72

58

90

72

FG3100 4

Fixed

40

32

79

64

99

79

FG3110 4

Fixed

45

36

90

72

113

90

FG3125 4

Fixed

54

43

108

87

135

108

FG3150 4 4

Fixed

63

51

126

101

158

126

FG3175

Fixed

72

58

144

116

181

144

FG3200 4 4

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Fixed

81

65

162

130

203

162

FG3225

350–700

63

51

126

101

158

126

JG3175W 5

350–700

63

51

126

101

158

126

JG3175 4

350–700

72

58

144

116

181

144

JG3200W 5

350–700

72

58

144

116

181

144

JG3200 4

350–700

81

65

162

130

203

162

JG3225W 5

350–700

81

65

162

130

203

162

JG3225 4

350–700

90

72

181

144

226

181

JG3250W 5

350–700

90

72

181

144

226

181

JG3250 4

500–1000

108

87

217

173

271

217

KG3300W 5

500–1000

108

87

217

173

271

217

KG3300 4

500–1000

126

101

253

202

316

253

KG3350W 5

500–1000

126

101

253

202

316

253

KG3350 4

1000–2000

144

116

289

231

361

289

KG3400 4

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Breaker continuous current is based on 115% of the generator full load ampere rating. 2 Based on three-phase generators at 80% power factor. 3 FG, JG, KG include thermal-magnetic trip units, LG and NG include electronic trip units. 4 Breaker includes line and load terminals. 5 Without terminals.

2 2 2

The following catalog numbers have center tap studs for dual voltage applications: JG3070CT, JG3100CT, JG3125CT, KG3175CT, LG3300CTW.

2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-343

2.6 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

Electronic Engine Generator Breaker 3

Maximum Generator Rating 60 Hz Magnetic Pickup Range

240 Vac kVA 1

kW 2

kVA 1

kW 2

kVA 1

kW 2

Catalog Number

500–2500

162

130

325

260

406

325

LG3450 4

2

500–2500

181

144

361

289

451

361

LG3500 4

2

500–2500

217

173

433

347

542

433

LG3600 4

500–2500

253

202

505

404

632

505

NG3700 4

2

500–2500

289

231

578

462

722

578

NG3800 4

1250–5000

325

260

650

520

812

650

NG3900 4

2

1250–5000

361

289

722

578

903

722

NG31000 4

1250–5000

433

347

867

693

1083

867

NG31200 4

2

2 2 2

480 Vac

600 Vac

Notes 1 Breaker continuous current is based on 115% of the generator full load ampere rating. 2 Based on three-phase generators at 80% power factor. 3 FG, JG, KG include thermal-magnetic trip units, LG and NG include electronic trip units. 4 Breaker includes line and load terminals. The following catalog numbers have center tap studs for dual voltage applications: JG3070CT, JG3100CT, JG3125CT, KG3175CT, LG3300CTW.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-344

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information

Options and Accessories

Enclosures Type 1 General Purpose

Standard Terminals

● ● ●

Surface or flush mounting 15–1200 ampere range 600 Vac, 500 Vdc

Type 1 enclosed breakers are designed for use in commercial buildings, apartment buildings and other areas where a general purpose enclosure is applicable. The breaker is front operable and is capable of being padlocked in either the ON or OFF position. Ratings through 1200 amperes are listed with Underwriters Laboratories as approved for service entrance application. Both surface and flush mounted enclosures are available. Type 3R Rainproof Surface Mounting ●

● ●

Interchangeable hubs (through 400 amperes) 15–1200 ampere range 600 Vac, 500 Vdc

This general purpose outdoor service center employs a circuit breaker inside a weatherproof sheet steel breaker enclosure to serve

as a main disconnect and protective device for feeder circuits. Ratings through 1200 amperes are listed by Underwriters Laboratories as suitable for service entrance application. Type 12 Dustproof Surface Mounting ●

● ●

No knockouts or other openings 15–1200 ampere range 600 Vac, 500 Vdc

The Type 12 enclosure is designed in line with specifications for special industry applications where unusually severe conditions involving oil, coolant, dust and other foreign materials exist in the operating atmosphere. The handle padlocks in the OFF position and the cover is interlocked with the handle mechanism to prevent opening the cover with the circuit breaker in the ON position. Ratings through 1200 amperes are listed by Underwriters Laboratories as suitable for service entrance application.

Breaker Frame Amperes FG 15–225

JG 175–250

KG 300–400

LG 450–600

NG 700–1200

Enclosure Type Class

Catalog Number

Type 1

SFDN225

Type 3R

RFDN225

Type 12

JFDN225

Type 1

SJDN250

Type 3R

RJDN250

Type 12

JJDN250

Type 1

SKDN400

Type 3R

RKDN400

Type 12

JKDN400

Type 1

SLDN600

Type 3R

RLDN600

Type 12

JLDN600

Type 1

SNDN1200

Type 3R

RNDN1200

Type 12

JNDN1200

2

Breaker Frame

Max. Amp Rating

AWG Wire Range

Metric Wire Range mm2

Catalog Number

FG

100

14–1/0

2.5–50

3T100FB 1

FG

150

4–4/0

25–95

3TA225FD 1

JG

250

4–350 kcmil

25–185

TA250KB

KG

350

250–500 kcmil

120–240

TA350K

KG

400

3/0–250 kcmil (2)

95–120

3TA400K 1

LG

600

250–500 kcmil (2)

120–240

3TA603LDK

NG

700

1–500 kcmil (2)

50–300

TA700NB1

NG

1000

3/0–400 kcmil (3)

95–185

TA1000NB1

NG

1200

4/0–500 kcmil (4)

120–300

TA1200NB1

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Neutral Kits, Insulated and Groundable Max. Enclosure Rating (Amperes)

Main Lug Number Size Cu/Al

Ground Lug Size Cu/Al

Catalog Number

2

100

(1) 14–1/0

(1) 14–1/0

INK100

250

(1) 6–350 kcmil

(1) 4–300 kcmil

INK250

2

400

(1) 4–750 kcmil or (2) 1/0–250 kcmil

(1) 4–300 kcmil

INK400

2

600

(2) 250–500 kcmil

(1) 4–300 kcmil

INK600

1200

(3) 1/0 to 750 kcmil or (4) 1/0 to 750 kcmil

(1) 6–250 kcmil

INK1200

2

2

Auxiliary Switch 2 1A-1B Factory Mounted

2 2

Internal Accessories

Breaker Frame

Enclosure Selection Data

2.6

2A-2B

Field Kit Catalog Number

Factory Mounted

Field Kit Catalog Number

FG 3

A06

A1X1PK

A13

A2X1RPK

JG

A06

A1X2PK

A13

A2X2PK

KG

A06

A1X3PK

A13

A2X3PK

LG

A06

A1X4PK

A13

A2X4PK

NG

A06

A1X5PK

A13

A2X5PK

Shunt Trip 2 Breaker Frame

Rating

Factory Mounted

Field Kit Catalog Number

FG 3

12–24 Vdc

S02

SNT1LP03K

JG

12–24 Vdc

S42

SNT2P04K

KG

12–24 Vdc

S42

SNT3P04K

LG

12–24 Vdc

S02

SNT4LP03K

NG

12–24 Vdc

S02

SNT5LP03K

Notes 1 Package of three terminals. 2 Other accessories are available. Same as standard frame breakers. 3 Field installation on the FG Frame is not UL listed.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-345

2.6

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

2

Technical Data and Specifications

2

UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings Volts AC (50/60 Hz)

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)

240

18,000

480

14,000

2

600

10,000

2

IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings

2 2

2 2 2 2 2

Volts AC (50/60 Hz)

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)

220, 240

18,000/ 9,000

380, 415

14,000/ 7,000

660, 690

18,000/ 9,000 14,000/ 7,000 10,000/5,000

Dimensions and Weights Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2

Enclosure Selection Data

2

Breaker Frame Amperes

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Enclosure Type Class

FG 15–225

JG 175–250

KG 300–400

LG 450–600

NG 700–1200

2 2 2

A

B

C

D

E

Approx. Weight Lbs (kg)

Conduit Sizes, Inches

Type 1

23.25 (590.6)

8.41 (213.6)

6.28 (159.5)

18.75 (476.3)

1.20 (30.5)

15 (7)

0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 1, 1.25, 1.50, 2, 2.50 SFDN225

Type 3R

25.66 (651.8)

8.84 (224.7)

9.31 (236.5)

24.28 (616.7)

1.70 (43.2)

19 (9)

0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 1, 1.25, 1.50, 2, 2.50 RFDN225

Type 12

25.66 (651.8)

8.84 (224.7)

9.31 (236.5)

24.28 (616.7)

1.70 (43.2)

18 (8)

—

JFDN225

Type 1

34.70 (881.4)

10.92 (277.4)

7.20 (182.9)

30.00 (762.0)

1.88 (47.8)

31 (14)

0.25, 0.50, 2, 2.50, 3

SJDN250

Type 3R

37.50 (952.5)

11.56 (293.6)

10.22 (259.6)

35.77 (908.6)

1.94 (49.3)

40 (18)

0.25, 0.50, 2, 2.50, 3

RJDN250

Type 12

37.53 (953.3)

11.56 (293.6)

10.22 (259.6)

35.77 (908.6)

1.94 (49.3)

37 (17)

—

JJDN250

Type 1

38.81 (985.8)

11.06 (280.9)

10.94 (277.9)

34.00 (863.6)

2.28 (57.9)

53 (24)

0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 1.50, 2, 2.50, 3, 3.50 SKDN400

Type 3R

41.69 (1058.9)

11.75 (298.5)

14.06 (357.1)

39.90 (1013.5)

1.97 (50.0)

60 (27)

0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 2.50, 3, 3.50

RKDN400

Type 12

41.69 (1058.9)

11.75 (298.5)

14.06 (357.1)

39.90 (1013.5)

1.97 (50.0)

53 (24)

—

JKDN400

Type 1

45.88 (1165.4)

14.31 (363.5)

12.38 (314.5)

46.56 (1182.6)

1.91 (48.5)

81 (37)

0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 3, 3.50, 4

SLDN600

Type 3R

48.31 (1227.1)

14.91 (378.7)

15.50 (393.7)

46.56 (1182.6)

1.92 (48.8)

84 (38)

0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 3, 3.50, 4

RLDN600

Type 12

48.31 (1227.1)

14.91 (378.7)

15.50 (393.7)

46.56 (1182.6)

1.92 (48.8)

81 (37)

—

JLDN600

Type 1

61.22 (1555.0)

21.44 (544.6)

15.41 (391.4)

61.84 (1570.7)

1.97 (50.0)

178 (81)

—

SNDN1200

Type 3R

63.59 (1615.2)

22.00 (558.8)

17.63 (447.8)

61.84 (1570.7)

1.97 (50.0)

175 (79)

—

RNDN1200

Type 12

63.59 (1615.2)

22.00 (558.8)

17.63 (447.8)

61.84 (1570.7)

1.97 (50.0)

170 (77)

—

JNDN1200

Type 1 Surface Mounted

Type 3R Rainproof

E

E B

2

2

E

C

C

2 2

Type 12, 12K Dustproof C

ON A D

2

A

D

D

ON OFF

OFF

A

B

B

2 V4-T2-346

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Catalog Number

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

2.6

Contents

Direct Current Circuit Breakers

Description Engine Generator Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct Current Circuit Breakers Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—600 Vdc Per-Pole and 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2 Mining Service Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . E2VAC Mining Vacuum Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . Classic Mining Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add-On Ground Fault Protection—Type GFR . . . .

Page V4-T2-341 V4-T2-349 V4-T2-350 V4-T2-357 V4-T2-358 V4-T2-359 V4-T2-360 V4-T2-372 V4-T2-398 V4-T2-401 V4-T2-415

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Direct Current Circuit Breakers

2

Product Description DC (direct current) systems and applications are becoming commonplace as alternative energy sources have expanded and the number of DC devices and data centers using DC power has swelled. Eaton offers molded case circuit breakers and switches to meet circuit protection and switching requirements for a host of different DC end user requirements. Applications include UPS battery supply circuits, solar systems and electric vehicle charging, as well as commercial and industrial distribution.

Current ratings are available from 15 to 3000 A, with a full scale of voltage and interrupting ratings to address needs ranging from standard to the highest performance. Optional internal accessories provide remote tripping and indication of breaker status. The DC breaker family is UL 489 listed and exceeds the requirements in UL 489 Supplement SC for UPS applications. Eaton breakers may be applied in both ungrounded and select grounded applications, with poles connected in series to operate at the maximum voltages shown on Page V4-T2-348. To use DC circuit breakers on 600 V grounded systems, three poles in series must be connected on the ungrounded leg.

All DC breakers use the same internal and external accessories as their corresponding Series C and Series G AC frame equivalents, except for the NBDC breaker, which uses the same internal and external accessories as the standard NB frame.

2 2 2 2 2

The HFDDC through HMDLDC and EG to RG DC breakers use the same internal and external accessories as their corresponding Series C and Series G AC Frame equivalents. NBDC uses the same internal and external accessories as standard NB breakers.

2 2 2 2 2

Many of the Eaton AC molded case circuit breakers carry 250 Vdc ratings for ungrounded systems. Refer to Pages V4-T2-9 and V4-T2-118 for these interrupting tables.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-347

2.6 2 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

Quick Reference Direct Current Circuit Breakers UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings Interrupting Capacity (kA) Volts DC 1 Circuit Breaker Type

Maximum Amperes

125

Poles in Series

250 2

Poles in Series

500

600

Poles in Series

750 2

Poles in Series

EGEDC

100

10

1

35

2

35

—

3

—

—

2

EGSDC

100

35

1

42

2

50

—

3

—

—

EGHDC

100

42

1

50

2

65

—

3

—

—

2

HFDDC

225

42

1

50

2

—

42

3

42

4

2

JGEDC

250

35

1

35

2

—

35

3

—

—

JGSDC

250

42

1

42

2

—

50

3

—

—

2

JGHDC

250

50

1

50

2

—

65

3

—

—

HJDDC

250

42

1

50

2

—

42

3

—

—

2

HKDDC

400

42

1

50

2

—

42

3

—

—

LGEDC

600

22

1

22

2

—

35

3

—

—

2

LGSDC

600

22

1

22

2

—

50

3

—

—

2

LGHDC

600

50

1

50

2

—

65

3

—

—

HLDDC

600

42

1

50

2

—

35

3

—

—

2

HLDDC 3

1200

42

1

50

2

—

—

—

—

—

HMDLDC

800

42

1

50

2

—

35

3

—

—

2

NBDC

1200

42

1

50

2

—

50

3

—

—

RGHDC

3000

42

1

50

2

—

65

3

—

—

Ics

Poles in Series

Icu

Ics

Poles in Series

Icu

Ics

Poles in Series

2 2 2

IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings Circuit Breaker Type

Maximum Amperes

125 Volts DC Icu

250 Volts DC

600 Volts DC

EGEDC

100

10

10

1

10

10

2

—

—

—

2

EGSDC

100

35

35

1

35

35

2

—

—

—

EGHDC

100

42

42

1

42

42

2

—

—

—

2

JGEDC

250

22

22

1

22

22

2

—

—

—

2

JGSDC

250

22

22

1

22

22

2

—

—

—

JGHDC

250

42

42

1

42

42

2

—

—

—

2

HJDDC

250

—

—

—

—

—

—

20

10

3

LGEDC

600

22

22

1

22

22

2

—

—

—

2

LGSDC

600

22

22

1

22

22

2

—

—

—

LGHDC

600

42

42

1

42

42

2

—

—

—

2 2 2 2

HLDDC

600

—

—

—

—

—

—

20

10

3

HMDLDC

800

—

—

—

—

—

—

20

10

3

Notes 1 DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. Time constants per UL 489. 2 EGEDC through HMDLDC have been tested up to 300 Vdc to allow for battery charging voltages. 750 Vdc is common in transportation applications. HFDDC, four-pole 750 Vdc is available up to 150 A maximum. 300 Vdc and 750 Vdc are not UL 489 listed voltage ratings. 3 Four-pole frame with two-poles connected in parallel. See Page V4-T2-358 for series connection diagrams. Use NEC rated cable to connect/short poles in series as shown.

2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-348

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

2.6

Catalog Number Selection

2

This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.

2 2

DC Circuit Breaker

HFDDC 3 150 W Frame EGEDC = Series G—E (100 A max.) EGSDC = Series G—E (100 A max.) EGHDC = Series G—E (100 A max.) HFDDC = Series C—F (225 A max.) JGEDC = Series G—J (250 A max.) JGSDC = Series G—J (250 A max.) JGHDC = Series G—J (250 A max.) HJDDC = Series C—J (250 A max.) HKDDC = Series C—K (400 A max.) LGEDC = Series G—L (600 A max.) LGSDC = Series G—L (600 A max.) LGHDC = Series G—L (600 A max.) HLDDC = Series C—L (1200 A max.) HMDLDC = Series C—M (800 A max.) NBDC = NB (1200 A max.) RGHDC = Series G—R (3000 A max.)

Number of Poles 1 = Single-pole 2 = Two-pole 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole

Trip Unit Ampere Rating 015 = 15 A 020 = 20 A 025 = 25 A 030 = 30 A 035 = 35 A 040 = 40 A 045 = 45 A 050 = 50 A 060 = 60 A 070 = 70 A 080 = 80 A 090 = 90 A 100 = 100 A 110 = 110 A 125 = 125 A 150 = 150 A 175 = 175 A 200 = 200 A 225 = 225 A 250 = 250 A 300 = 300 A 350 = 350 A 400 = 400 A 450 = 450 A 500 = 500 A 600 = 600 A 700 = 700 A 800 = 800 A 900 = 900 A 1000 = 1000 A 1200 = 1200 A 1600 = 1600 A 2000 = 2000 A 2500 = 2500 A 3000 = 3000 A

2 Suffix Series C, NB Frames K = Molded case switch L = Line and load terminals, F-Frame MW = 135% magnetic trip unit, without terminals W = Without terminals Series G Frames FFG = Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic trip unit, with terminals FFW = Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic trip unit, without terminals FAG = Fixed thermal, adjustable magnetic trip unit, with terminals FAW = Fixed thermal, adjustable magnetic trip unit, without terminals KSG = Molded case switch, with terminals KSW = Molded case switch, without terminals

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-349

2.6

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

2

Product Selection

2

Type EGEDC DC Circuit Breakers— Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kAIC at 500 Vdc

2

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Complete Circuit Breaker Complete Circuit Breaker with Terminals without Terminals Catalog Number

25 30

Type EGHDC DC Circuit Breakers— Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 65 kAIC at 500 Vdc Complete Circuit Breaker Complete Circuit Breaker with Terminals without Terminals

Catalog Number

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

EGEDC3025FFG

EGEDC3025FFW

25

EGHDC3025FFG

EGHDC3025FFW

EGEDC3030FFG

EGEDC3030FFW

30

EGHDC3030FFG

EGHDC3030FFW

2

35

EGEDC3035FFG

EGEDC3035FFW

35

EGHDC3035FFG

EGHDC3035FFW

40

EGEDC3040FFG

EGEDC3040FFW

40

EGHDC3040FFG

EGHDC3040FFW

2

45

EGEDC3045FFG

EGEDC3045FFW

45

EGHDC3045FFG

EGHDC3045FFW

50

EGEDC3050FFG

EGEDC3050FFW

50

EGHDC3050FFG

EGHDC3050FFW

2

60

EGEDC3060FFG

EGEDC3060FFW

60

EGHDC3060FFG

EGHDC3060FFW

2

70

EGEDC3070FFG

EGEDC3070FFW

70

EGHDC3070FFG

EGHDC3070FFW

80

EGEDC3080FFG

EGEDC3080FFW

80

EGHDC3080FFG

EGHDC3080FFW

2

90

EGEDC3090FFG

EGEDC3090FFW

90

EGHDC3090FFG

EGHDC3090FFW

100

EGEDC3100FFG

EGEDC3100FFW

100

EGHDC3100FFG

EGHDC3100FFW

2 2

2 2

Type EGSDC DC Circuit Breakers— Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 50 kAIC at 500 Vdc Complete Circuit Breaker Complete Circuit Breaker with Terminals without Terminals

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

25

EGSDC3025FFG

EGSDC3025FFW

2

30

EGSDC3030FFG

EGSDC3030FFW

35

EGSDC3035FFG

EGSDC3035FFW

2

40

EGSDC3040FFG

EGSDC3040FFW

2

45

EGSDC3045FFG

EGSDC3045FFW

50

EGSDC3050FFG

EGSDC3050FFW

2

60

EGSDC3060FFG

EGSDC3060FFW

70

EGSDC3070FFG

EGSDC3070FFW

2

80

EGSDC3080FFG

EGSDC3080FFW

90

EGSDC3090FFG

EGSDC3090FFW

100

EGSDC3100FFG

EGSDC3100FFW

2 2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

V4-T2-350

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.6

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

HFDDC

Type HFDDC DC Circuit Breakers— Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 42 kAIC at 600 Vdc Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

2

Complete Circuit Breaker with Line and Load Terminals 1

2

Single-Pole

Two-Pole

Three-Pole

Four-Pole

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

15

HFDDC1015L

HFDDC2015L

HFDDC3015L

HFDDC4015L

20

HFDDC1020L

HFDDC2020L

HFDDC3020L

HFDDC4020L

2

25

HFDDC1025L

HFDDC2025L

HFDDC3025L

HFDDC4025L

30

HFDDC1030L

HFDDC2030L

HFDDC3030L

HFDDC4030L

35

HFDDC1035L

HFDDC2035L

HFDDC3035L

HFDDC4035L

40

HFDDC1040L

HFDDC2040L

HFDDC3040L

HFDDC4040L

45

HFDDC1045L

HFDDC2045L

HFDDC3045L

HFDDC4045L

50

HFDDC1050L

HFDDC2050L

HFDDC3050L

HFDDC4050L

60

HFDDC1060L

HFDDC2060L

HFDDC3060L

HFDDC4060L

70

HFDDC1070L

HFDDC2070L

HFDDC3070L

HFDDC4070L

80

HFDDC1080L

HFDDC2080L

HFDDC3080L

HFDDC4080L

90

HFDDC1090L

HFDDC2090L

HFDDC3090L

HFDDC4090L

100

HFDDC1100L

HFDDC2100L

HFDDC3100L

HFDDC4100L

110

HFDDC1110L

HFDDC2110L

HFDDC3110L

HFDDC4110L

125

HFDDC1125L

HFDDC2125L

HFDDC3125L

HFDDC4125L

150

HFDDC1150L

HFDDC2150L

HFDDC3150L

HFDDC4150L

175

—

HFDDC2175L

HFDDC3175L

—

200

—

HFDDC2200L

HFDDC3200L

—

225

—

HFDDC2225L

HFDDC3225L

—

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Type JGEDC DC Circuit Breakers— Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kAIC at 600 Vdc

2

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Complete Breaker

Circuit Breaker Frame Only 2

Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit

Standard Terminals

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

70

JGEDC3070FAG

JGEDC3250NN

JT3070FA

T250FJ

90

JGEDC3090FAG

JGEDC3250NN

JT3090FA

T250FJ

100

JGEDC3100FAG

JGEDC3250NN

JT3100FA

T250FJ

125

JGEDC3125FAG

JGEDC3250NN

JT3125FA

T250FJ

150

JGEDC3150FAG

JGEDC3250NN

JT3150FA

T250FJ

175

JGEDC3175FAG

JGEDC3250NN

JT3175FA

T250FJ

200

JGEDC3200FAG

JGEDC3250NN

JT3200FA

T250FJ

225

JGEDC3225FAG

JGEDC3250NN

JT3225FA

T250FJ

250

JGEDC3250FAG

JGEDC3250NN

JT3250FA

T250FJ

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 For breaker without terminals, replace “L” with “W” at end of catalog number. 2 For complete breaker, order individual frame, trip unit and terminals for field installation.

2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-351

2.6

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

2

Type JGSDC DC Circuit Breakers— Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 50 kAIC at 600 Vdc

2

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Complete Breaker

Circuit Breaker Frame Only 1

Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit

Standard Terminals

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

70

JGSDC3070FAG

JGSDC3250NN

JT3070FA

T250FJ

90

JGSDC3090FAG

JGSDC3250NN

JT3090FA

T250FJ

2

100

JGSDC3100FAG

JGSDC3250NN

JT3100FA

T250FJ

125

JGSDC3125FAG

JGSDC3250NN

JT3125FA

T250FJ

2

150

JGSDC3150FAG

JGSDC3250NN

JT3150FA

T250FJ

2

175

JGSDC3175FAG

JGSDC3250NN

JT3175FA

T250FJ

200

JGSDC3200FAG

JGSDC3250NN

JT3200FA

T250FJ

225

JGSDC3225FAG

JGSDC3250NN

JT3225FA

T250FJ

250

JGSDC3250FAG

JGSDC3250NN

JT3250FA

T250FJ

2

2 2 2

JGHDC3250NN

Type JGHDC DC Circuit Breakers— Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 65 kAIC at 600 Vdc Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Complete Breaker

Circuit Breaker Frame Only 1

Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit

Standard Terminals

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

70

JGHDC3070FAG

JGHDC3250NN

JT3070FA

T250FJ

90

JGHDC3090FAG

JGHDC3250NN

JT3090FA

T250FJ

2

100

JGHDC3100FAG

JGHDC3250NN

JT3100FA

T250FJ

125

JGHDC3125FAG

JGHDC3250NN

JT3125FA

T250FJ

2

150

JGHDC3150FAG

JGHDC3250NN

JT3150FA

T250FJ

2

175

JGHDC3175FAG

JGHDC3250NN

JT3175FA

T250FJ

200

JGHDC3200FAG

JGHDC3250NN

JT3200FA

T250FJ

225

JGHDC3225FAG

JGHDC3250NN

JT3225FA

T250FJ

250

JGHDC3250FAG

JGHDC3250NN

JT3250FA

T250FJ

2 2

2 2 2

HJDDC3250

2 2 2 2 2 2

Type HJDDC DC Circuit Breakers— Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 42 kAIC at 600 Vdc Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Circuit Breaker Frame Only 1

Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit

Standard Terminals

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

70

HJDDC3250F

JT3070T

TA250KB

90

HJDDC3250F

JT3090T

TA250KB

100

HJDDC3250F

JT3100T

TA250KB

125

HJDDC3250F

JT3125T

TA250KB

150

HJDDC3250F

JT3150T

TA250KB

175

HJDDC3250F

JT3175T

TA250KB

200

HJDDC3250F

JT3200T

TA250KB

2

225

HJDDC3250F

JT3225T

TA250KB

250

HJDDC3250F

JT3250T

TA250KB

2

Note 1 For complete breaker, order individual frame, trip unit and terminals for field installation.

2 2 2 V4-T2-352

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.6

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

HKDDC3400

Type HKDDC DC Circuit Breakers— Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 42 kAIC at 600 Vdc Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit

Standard Terminals

2

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

100

HKDDC3400F

KT3100T

TA300K

125

HKDDC3400F

KT3125T

TA300K

2

150

HKDDC3400F

KT3150T

TA300K

175

HKDDC3400F

KT3175T

TA300K

200

HKDDC3400F

KT3200T

TA300K

225

HKDDC3400F

KT3225T

TA300K

250

HKDDC3400F

KT3250T

TA350K

300

HKDDC3400F

KT3300T

TA350K

350

HKDDC3400F

KT3350T

TA350K

400

LGEDC3630NN

2

Circuit Breaker Frame Only 1

HKDDC3400F

KT3400T

3TA400K

2 2 2 2 2

2

2

Type LGEDC DC Circuit Breakers— Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kAIC at 600 Vdc Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Complete Breaker

Circuit Breaker Frame Only 1

Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit

Standard Terminals

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

250

LGEDC3250FAG

LGEDC3630NN

LT3250FA

TA350LK

300

LGEDC3300FAG

LGEDC3630NN

LT3300FA

TA350LK

350

LGEDC3350FAG

LGEDC3630NN

LT3350FA

TA350LK

400

LGEDC3400FAG

LGEDC3630NN

LT3400FA

TA350LK

500

LGEDC3500FAG

LGEDC3630NN

LT4500FA

3TA632LK 2

600

LGEDC3600FAG

LGEDC3630NN

LT3600FA

3TA632LK 2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Type LGSDC DC Circuit Breakers— Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 50 kAIC at 600 Vdc Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Complete Breaker

Circuit Breaker Frame Only 1

Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit

Standard Terminals

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

250

LGSDC3250FAG

LGSDC3630NN

LT3250FA

TA350LK

300

LGSDC3300FAG

LGSDC3630NN

LT3300FA

TA350LK

350

LGSDC3350FAG

LGSDC3630NN

LT3350FA

TA350LK

400

LGSDC3400FAG

LGSDC3630NN

LT3400FA

TA350LK

500

LGSDC3500FAG

LGSDC3630NN

LT4500FA

3TA632LK 2

600

LGSDC3600FAG

LGSDC3630NN

LT3600FA

3TA632LK 2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 For complete breaker, order individual frame, trip unit and terminals for field installation. 2 Three-pole kit.

2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-353

2.6

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

2

Type LGHDC DC Circuit Breakers— Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 65 kAIC at 600 Vdc

2

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Complete Breaker

Circuit Breaker Frame Only 1

Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit

Standard Terminals

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

250

LGHDC3250FAG

LGHDC3630NN

LT3250FA

TA350LK

300

LGHDC3300FAG

LGHDC3630NN

LT3300FA

TA350LK

2 2 2 2 2 2

HLDDC

2

350

LGHDC3350FAG

LGHDC3630NN

LT3350FA

TA350LK

400

LGHDC3400FAG

LGHDC3630NN

LT3400FA

TA350LK

500

LGHDC3500FAG

LGHDC3630NN

LT4500FA

3TA632LK 2

600

LGHDC3600FAG

LGHDC3630NN

LT3600FA

3TA632LK 2

Type HLDDC DC Circuit Breakers— Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kAIC at 600 Vdc Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Circuit Breaker Frame Only 1

Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit

Standard Terminals

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

300

HLDDC3600F

LT3300T

TA602LD

350

HLDDC3600F

LT3350T

TA602LD

2

400

HLDDC3600F

LT3400T

TA602LD

2

450

HLDDC3600F

LT3450T

TA602LD

500

HLDDC3600F

LT3500T

TA602LD

2

600

HLDDC3600F

LT3600T

3TA603LDK 2

2 2

2

Type HLDDC DC Circuit Breakers— Two-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 50 kAIC at 250 Vdc 34

2

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Complete Breaker

600

HLDDC20600

2

700

HLDDC20700

800

HLDDC20800

2

900

HLDDC20900

1000

HLDDC21000

1200

HLDDC21200

2 2

2

Catalog Number

Notes 1 For complete breaker, order individual frame, trip unit and terminals for field installation. 2 Three-pole kit. 3 Includes breaker frame, trip unit and terminals. 4 Four-pole breaker with two poles wired in parallel.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-354

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.6

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

HMDLDC3800F

Type HMDLDC DC Circuit Breakers— Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kAIC at 600 Vdc

2

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Circuit Breaker Frame Only 1

Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit

Standard Terminals

2

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

300

HMDLDC3800F

MT3300T

TA700MA1

350

HMDLDC3800F

MT3350T

TA700MA1

2

400

HMDLDC3800F

MT3400T

TA700MA1

450

HMDLDC3800F

MT3450T

TA700MA1

500

HMDLDC3800F

MT3500T

TA700MA1

600

HMDLDC3800F

MT3600T

TA700MA1

700

HMDLDC3800F

MT3700T

TA700MA1

800

HMDLDC3800F

MT3800T

TA800MA2

2 2 2 2 2

Type NBDC DC Circuit Breakers— Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 50 kAIC at 600 Vdc

2

Standard Terminals

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Complete Circuit Breaker Factory Assembled without Terminals 2 Catalog Number

Includes Magnetic Trip Unit Calibrated at 135%

Catalog Number

700

NBDC3700MW

Included

TA1000NB1

800

NBDC3800MW

Included

TA1000NB1

900

NBDC3900MW

Included

TA1000NB1

1000

NBDC31000MW

Included

TA1000NB1

1200

NBDC31200MW

Included

TA1200NB1

2 2 2 2 2

RGHDC3300FFWM

2

Type RGHDC DC Circuit Breakers— Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 65 kAIC at 600 Vdc Complete Circuit Breaker Factory Assembled

2

2

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Imperial Mounting Hardware

Metric Mounting Hardware

Standard Rear Connectors

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Includes Magnetic Trip Unit Calibrated at 135%

Catalog Number

1600

RGHDC3160FFWE

RGHDC3160FFWM

Included

B2016RDM

2000

RGHDC3200FFWE

RGHDC3200FFWM

Included

B2016RDM

2500

RGHDC3250FFWE

RGHDC3250FFWM

Included

B2500RDM

3000

RGHDC3300FFWE

RGHDC3300FFWM

Included

B3000RDM

2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Includes frame and trip unit. Order terminals or connectors separately. 2 Six rear connectors included as standard complete circuit breaker.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-355

2.6 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

DC Breaker Terminal Wire Ranges Breaker Frame

Maximum Breaker Ampacity

Terminal Body Material Wire Type

AWG Wire Range/ Number of Conductors

Metric Wire Range mm2

Number of Terminals Included

Standard Terminal Catalog Number

EGEDC, EGSDC, EGHDC

100

Aluminum

Cu/Al

14–1/0

2.5–50

3

3TA125EF

HFDDC

20

Steel

Cu/Al

14–10 (1)

2.5–4 (1)

3

3T20FB

100

Steel

Cu/Al

14–1/0 (1)

2.5–50 (1)

3

3T100FB

225

Aluminum

Cu/Al

4–4/0 (1)

25–95 (1)

3

3TA225FD

JGEDC, JGSDC, JGHDC

250

Stainless steel

Cu

4–350 (1)

25–185 (1)

1

T250FJ

HJDDC

250

Aluminum

Cu/Al

4–350 kcmil (1)

25–185 (1)

1

TA250KB

HKDDC

225

Aluminum

Cu/Al

3–350 kcmil (1)

35–185 (1)

1

TA300K

350

Aluminum

Cu/Al

250–500 kcmil (1)

120–240 (1)

1

TA350K

400

Aluminum

Cu/Al

3/0–250 kcmil (2)

95–120 (1)

3

3TA400K

400

Aluminum

Cu/Al

2–500 (1)

35–240 (1)

1

TA350LK

630

Aluminum

Cu/Al

2–500 kcmil (2)

35–240 (2)

1

TA632L

630

Aluminum

Cu/Al

2–500 kcmil (2)

35–240 (2)

3

3TA632LK

500

Aluminum

Cu/Al

3/0–350 kcmil (2)

95–150 (2)

1

TA602LD

600

Aluminum

Cu/Al

400–500 kcmil (2)

185–240 (2)

3

3TA603LDK

600

Aluminum

Cu/Al

1–500 kcmil (2)

—

1

TA700MA1

800

Aluminum

Cu/Al

3/0–400 kcmil (3)

—

1

TA800MA2

700

Aluminum

Cu/Al

3/0–400 kcmil (3)

95–185 (3)

1

TA1000NB1

800

Aluminum

Cu/Al

3/0–400 kcmil (3)

95–185 (3)

1

TA1000NB1

2

900

Aluminum

Cu/Al

3/0–400 kcmil (3)

95–185 (3)

1

TA1000NB1

1000

Aluminum

Cu/Al

3/0–400 kcmil (3)

95–185 (3)

1

TA1000NB1

2

1200

Aluminum

Cu/Al

4/0–500 kcmil (4)

120–240 (4)

1

TA1200NB1

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

LGEDC, LGSDC, LGHDC

HLDDC

2

HMDLDC

2

NBDC

2 2 2 2 2

Note: RGHDC breakers include six rear connectors as standard.

Molded Case Switches Eaton’s DC molded case switches are used in applications requiring a compact, high-capacity disconnect. They are UL 489 listed and have automatic high instantaneous current protection. These devices do not provide overload protection. Molded Case Switches Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

With Line and Load Terminals

Without Line and Load Terminals

Interrupting Capacity (Volts DC)

Poles in Series

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

600 Vdc Maximum 100

42

3

HFDDC3100KL

HFDDC3100KW

2

150

42

3

HFDDC3150KL

HFDDC3150KW

225

42

3

HFDDC3225KL

HFDDC3225KW

2

250

65

3

JGKDC3250KSG

JGKDC3250KSW

250

42

3

HJDDC3250K

HJDDC3250KW

2

400

35

3

HKDDC3400K

HKDDC3400KW

65

3

LGKDC3400KSG

LGKDC3400KSW

2

600

65

3

LGKDC3630KSG

LGKDC3630KSW

35

3

HLDDC3600K

HLDDC3600WK

2

800

35

3

HMDLDC3800K

HMDLDC3800WK

2

100

65

3

EGK3100KSG

EGK3100KSW

500 Vdc Maximum

2

250 Vdc Maximum 100

50

2

HFDDC2100KL

HFDDC2100KW

2

150

50

2

HFDDC2150KL

HFDDC2150KW

225

50

2

HFDDC2225KL

HFDDC2225KW

2

1200

50

1

HLDDC21200K 1

HLDDC21200WK 1

2

Note 1 Four-pole frame with two-pole connected in parallel.

2 V4-T2-356

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

2.6

Accessories

2

Internal Accessories

2

Field Installation Kits

2

JGEDC, JGSDC, JGHDC

Description

Factory Installation (HFDDC)

2

HFDDC 1

EGEDC, EGSDC, EGHDC

LGEDC, LGSDC, LGHDC

HJDDC

HKDDC

HLDDC

HMDLDC

NBDC

RGHDC

Right-Pole Mounting

2 2

Auxiliary switch 1A-1B

A06

A1X1PK

AUX1A1BPK

AUX1A1BPK

A1X2PK

A1X3PK

A1X4PK

A1X4PK

4980D16G05

—

2A-2B

A13

A2X1RPK

AUX2A2BPK

AUX2A2BPK

A2X2PK

A2X3PK

A2X4PK

A2X4PK

4980D16G06

A2X6RPK

2

B06

A1L1RPK

ALM1M1BEPK ALM1M1BJPK

A1L2RPK

A1L3RPK

A1L4RPK

A1L4RPK

—

A1L6RPK

2

AAL1RPK

AUXALRMEPK AUXALRMJPK

AAL2RPK

AAL3RPK

AA114RPK

AA114RPK

—

A2L6RPK

2

Alarm switch 1 make/1 break

Auxiliary and alarm combo 1A-1B, 1 make/1 break C05

2

Left-Pole Mounting Shunt trip 12 Vdc

S02

SNT1LP03K

SNT012CPK

SNT012CPK

SNT2P04K

SNT3P04K

SNT4LP03K

SNT4LP03K

2606D58G14

—

24 Vdc

S02

SNT1LP03K

SNT024CPK

SNT024CPK

SNT2P04K

SNT3P04K

SNT4LP03K

SNT4LP03K

2606D58G13

SNT6P03K 2

48 Vdc

S06

SNT1LP08K

SNT4860CPK

SNT4860CPK

SNT2P06K

SNT3P06K

SNT4LP23K

SNT4LP23K

2606D58G12

SNT6P23K 2

60 Vdc

S06

SNT1LP08K

SNT4860CPK

SNT4860CPK

SNT2P06K

SNT3P06K

SNT4LP23K

SNT4LP23K

2606D58G11

SNT6P23K 2

125 Vdc

S10

SNT1LP12K

SNT120CPK

SNT120CPK

SNT2P11K

SNT3P11K

SNT4LP26K

SNT4LP26K

2606D58G10

SNT6P23K 2

250 Vdc

S14

SNT1LP18K

—

—

SNT2P14K

SNT3P14K

SNT4LP14K

SNT4LP14K

2606D58G09

SNT6P14K

120 Vac

S06

SNT1LP12K

SNT120CPK

SNT120CPK

SNT2P11K

SNT3P11K

SNT4LP11K

SNT4LP11K

2060D58G05

SNT6P11K 2

12 Vdc

U30

UVH1LP20K

UVR012DPK

UVR012DPK

UVH2LP20K

UVH3LP20K

UVH4LP20K

UVH4LP20K

372D032G06

UVH6RP20K 2

24 Vdc

U34

UVH1LP21K

UVR024DPK

UVR024DPK

UVH2LP21K

UVH3LP21K

UVH4LP21K

UVH4LP21K

372D032G07

UVH6RP21K 2

48 Vdc

U38

UVH1LP22K

UVR048DPK

UVR048DPK

UVH2LP22K

UVH3LP22K

UVH4LP22K

UVH4LP22K

372D032G08

UVH6RP23K 2

125 Vdc

U42

UVH1LP26K

UVR125DPK

UVR125DPK

UVH2LP26K

UVH3LP26K

UVH4LP26K

UVH4LP26K

372D032G09

UVH6RP26K 2

250 Vdc

U46

UVH1LP28K

UVR250DPK

UVR250DPK

UVH2LP28K

UVH3LP28K

UVH4LP28K

UVH4LP28K

372D032G10

UVH6RP28K 2

120 Vac

U14

UVH1LP08K

UVR120APK

UVR120APK

UVH2LP08K

UVH3LP08K

UVH4LP08K

UVH4LP08K

373D632G05

UVH6RP08K 2

Undervoltage release

Notes 1 F-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected. 2 Right-pole mounted. One accessory can be mounted per pole, per breaker. Factory installation of accessories is available. Contact Eaton for assistance with part number configuration.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-357

2.6

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

2

Wiring Diagrams

2

Series Connection Diagrams for DC Application 12

2

250 Vdc Maximum—Two Poles in Series

2 2 2 2

Load

2 2 2 2

Load (A) Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded systems that have one end of load (A) connected to grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection.

Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only.

500 Vdc or 600 Vdc Maximum—Three Poles in Series

2

Load

2 2 2 2 2 2

Load

(A)

Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded systems that have one end of load (A) connected to grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection.

Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only.

2 2

750 Vdc Maximum—Four Poles in Series

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Load Load

(A)

Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded systems that have one end of load (A) connected to grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection.

Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only.

Notes 1 Poles in series connection is customer supplied. Use rated cable per NEC. 2 For grounded systems, all poles in series must be connected on non-grounded terminal, with load connected to grounded terminal.

2 2 V4-T2-358

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

2.6

Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2

DC Breaker Dimensions

2

Frame

Number of Poles

Width

Height

Depth

EGEDC, EGSDC, EGHDC

3

3.00 (76.2)

5.50 (139.7)

2.99 (75.9)

HFDDC

1

1.38 (35.1)

6.00 (152.4)

3.38 (86.0)

2

2.75 (70.0)

6.00 (152.4)

3.38 (86.0)

3

4.13 (105.0)

6.00 (152.4)

3.38 (86.0)

4

5.50 (139.7)

6.00 (152.4)

3.38 (86.0)

JGEDC, JGSDC, JGHDC

3

4.13 (104.9)

7.00 (177.8)

3.57 (90.7)

HJDDC

2, 3

4.13 (105.0)

10.00 (254.0)

4.06 (103.1)

HKDDC

2, 3

5.50 (139.7)

10.13 (257.3)

4.10 (104.1)

LGEDC, LGSDC, LGHDC

3

5.48 (139.2)

10.13 (257.3)

4.09 (103.9)

600 A Max. HLDDC

2, 3

8.25 (209.6)

10.75 (273.1)

4.06 (103.1)

1200 A Max. HLDDC

4

11.00 (279.4)

10.75 (273.1)

4.06 (103.1)

HMDLDC

2, 3

8.25 (209.6)

16.00 (406.4)

4.06 (103.1)

NBDC

3

8.25 (209.6)

16.00 (406.4)

5.50 (139.7)

RGHDC

3

15.50 (393.7)

16.00 (406.4)

9.75 (247.7)

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-359

2.6 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

Contents

PVGard Solar Photovoltaic Circuit Breakers

Description

2 2 2 2 2

600 Vdc Per-Pole

1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series

2 2 2

Page

Engine Generator Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct Current Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—600 Vdc Per-Pole and 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2 Mining Service Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . Classic Mining Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add-On Ground Fault Protection—Type GFR . . . . .

2

V4-T2-341 V4-T2-347

V4-T2-361 V4-T2-361 V4-T2-361 V4-T2-362 V4-T2-364 V4-T2-367 V4-T2-370 V4-T2-371 V4-T2-372 V4-T2-401 V4-T2-415

2 2 2 2

PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—600 Vdc Per-Pole and 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series

2

Product Overview ●

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

●

● ●

●

Two PVGard lineups ● 600 Vdc per-pole breaker and switch. Each pole rated 600 Vdc ● 1000 Vdc poles-in-series breaker and switch. Requires poles in series connection Both options UL 489B listed for solar photovoltaic circuit protection 50 °C calibration Offers both 100% and 80% rated breakers Handle bi-directional current flow

2 2 2 2 2 2

Product Description Photovoltaic (PV) systems convert the energy of the sun into electrical power that is fed directly into the electric grid. Within the balance of system (BOS), direct current (DC) circuit breakers protect the wiring connected from the PV modules to the combiner or the inverter, while also behaving as a disconnect. Eaton is a global leader in circuit protection and brings this expertise to bear in the photovoltaic market. PVGard solar circuit breakers are part of a product family that combines a disconnect with circuit protection in a single, compact, resettable device to protect and isolate DC circuits as needed in photovoltaic systems. PVGard breakers can replace fuses, fuse holders and disconnects in combiner box and inverter applications— saving space, streamlining design, purchasing and receiving, and reducing spare parts requirements.

There are two PVGard lineups to choose from: the industryexclusive, 600 Vdc per-pole breakers and switches designed for residential and light commercial applications and 1000 Vdc poles-in-series breakers and switches for commercial and utility scale applications. PVGard 600 Vdc Per-Pole Lineup Only Eaton can offer this breakthrough breaker that will save significant space, time and cost. As a single-circuitper-pole device, it allows space savings of up to 66% when compared to traditional poles-in-series disconnects, switches and breakers. In addition, it eliminates the need for jumpers for poles-inseries connection—saving on installation time, labor and even inventory.

2 V4-T2-360

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

PVGard 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series Lineup This 1000 Vdc poles-in-series lineup provides reliable and safe disconnect means and overcurrent protection in a single, compact device for commercial and utility scale PV systems. This solution does not require jumpers with the breaker/switch to be a UL 489B listed device, providing reliability and flexibility in design without limitation on implementation of the breaker/switch. If needed, cost-effective Eaton jumpers can be included.

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

Application Description

Features

Photovoltaic (PV) systems convert the energy of the sun into electrical power that is fed directly into the electric grid. PVGard circuit breakers are used to protect the wiring from the modules to the combiner box or inverter from overcurrents, and to provide an isolation mechanism.

PVGard breakers are uniquely designed with these features:

Eaton offers a complete line of UL 489 Listed multi-purpose 600 Vdc poles-in-series breakers and switches, as well as protection for the AC side of the inverter. Refer to Page V4-T2-347 for 600 Vdc breakers and Page V4-T2-6 for AC breaker selection.

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

● ●

●

●

2.6

Standards and Certifications

Meets the higher voltage and lower fault current levels of solar systems Tested to extreme ambient conditions from –40ºC to +90ºC Full complement of accessories for status, signalling, and on/off operation remotely Can handle bi-directional flow of current Can be applied in grounded, ungrounded or bi-polar systems Meets and exceeds the standards of UL 489B for photovoltaic molded case circuit breakers and molded case switches Available both standard (80%-rated) and 100%rated breakers 50ºC calibration Ability to open on signal from DC arc or ground fault detector Wide range of current ratings increases options for matching incoming strings Eliminates fuse stocking costs and matching issues

Designed specifically for high- and low-temperature demands of PV installations, PVGard circuit breakers undergo extreme ambient cycling tests, and carry a robust operating temperature range. Trip units calibrate at 100% and 80% of nameplate current in a 50ºC ambient, ensuring continuous operation in higher temperature environments typical to solar.

●

●

Designed to meet UL 489B for solar photovoltaic circuit protection UL File E350638, Category Control Number DIUR

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Rigorous third-party testing includes limited and standard fault current tests, electrical and mechanical endurance, di-electric voltage withstand and temperature tests. Eaton’s PVGard products are stand-alone devices without requiring jumpers to be UL 489B listed devices.

2 2 2 2 2

PVGard breakers are available with a full complement of accessories to provide string status, enable remote trip, on/off operation, and can be customized to site requirements.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-361

2.6 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

Product Selection Catalog number includes breaker frame and trip unit. Order terminals separately. See Page V4-T2-366. For complete internal and external accessories, see accessory section of each frame. JG PVS Frame

JG PVS Frame, 250 A Maximum, 600 Vdc Per Pole, 1.2 kA 1 Number Poles/ 600 Vdc Circuits

80% Rated

100% Rated

Current Rating Amperes

Trip Unit

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

90

3

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

JGPVS3090W

CJGPVS3090W

100

3

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

JGPVS3100W

CJGPVS3100W

2

125

3

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

JGPVS3125W

CJGPVS3125W

150

3

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

JGPVS3150W

CJGPVS3150W

2

175

3

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

JGPVS3175W

CJGPVS3175W

200

3

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

JGPVS3200W

CJGPVS3200W

225

3

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

JGPVS3225W

CJGPVS3225W

250

3

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

JGPVS3250W

CJGPVS3250W

2

2 2 2

KD PVS Frame

2

KD PVS Frame, 400 A Maximum, 600 Vdc Per Pole, 3 kA 1 Current Rating Amperes

2 2

Number Poles/ 600 Vdc Circuits

Trip Unit

80% Rated

100% Rated

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

100

3

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

KDPVS3100W

CKDPVS3100W

125

3

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

KDPVS3125W

CKDPVS3125W

150

3

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

KDPVS3150W

CKDPVS3150W

175

3

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

KDPVS3175W

CKDPVS3175W

2

200

3

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

KDPVS3200W

CKDPVS3200W

225

3

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

KDPVS3225W

CKDPVS3225W

2

250

3

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

KDPVS3250W

CKDPVS3250W

300

3

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

KDPVS3300W

CKDPVS3300W

2

350

3

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

KDPVS3350W

CKDPVS3350W

400

3

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

KDPVS3400W

CKDPVS3400W

2

Note 1 Terminals not included with frames.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-362

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

2.6 2

Catalog number includes breaker frame and trip unit. Order terminals separately. See Page V4-T2-366.

2 FD PV Frame

KD PV Frame

FD PV Frame, 100 A Maximum, 1000 Vdc, 3 kA 1 80% Rated

100% Rated

Current Rating Amperes

Poles in Series

Trip Unit

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

30

4

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

FDPV4030W

CFDPV4030W

40

4

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

FDPV4040W

CFDPV4040W

50

4

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

FDPV4050W

CFDPV4050W

60

4

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

FDPV4060W

CFDPV4060W

70

4

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

FDPV4070W

CFDPV4070W

80

4

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

FDPV4080W

CFDPV4080W

90

4

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

FDPV4090W

CFDPV4090W

100

4

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

FDPV4100W

CFDPV4100W

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

KD PV Frame, 350 A Maximum, 1000 Vdc, 5 kA 1 80% Rated

100% Rated

Current Rating Amperes

Poles in Series

Trip Unit

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

125

4

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

KDPV4125W

CKDPV4125W

150

4

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

KDPV4150W

CKDPV4150W

175

4

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

KDPV4175W

CKDPV4175W

200

4

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

KDPV4200W

CKDPV4200W

225

4

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

KDPV4225W

CKDPV4225W

250

4

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

KDPV4250W

CKDPV4250W

300

4

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

KDPV4300W

CKDPV4300W

350

4

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

KDPV4350W

CKDPV4350W

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

LG PV Frame

LG PV Frame, 400 A Maximum, 1000 Vdc, 5 kA 1 80% Rated

100% Rated

Current Rating Amperes

Poles in Series

Trip Unit

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

250

4

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

LGPV4250W

CLGPV4250W

300

4

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

LGPV4300W

CLGPV4300W

350

4

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

LGPV4350W

CLGPV4350W

400

4

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

LGPV4400W

CLGPV4400W

2 2 2 2 2

MDL PV Frame

MDL PV Frame, 600 A Maximum, 1000 Vdc, 7.5 kA 1 80% Rated

100% Rated

Current Rating Amperes

Poles in Series

Trip Unit

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

300

3

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

MDLPV3300W

CMDLPV3300W

350

3

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

MDLPV3350W

CMDLPV3350W

400

3

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

MDLPV3400W

CMDLPV3400W

450

3

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

MDLPV3450W

CMDLPV3450W

500

3

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

MDLPV3500W

CMDLPV3500W

600

3

Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic

MDLPV3600W

CMDLPV3600W

Note 1 Terminals not included with frames.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-363

2.6

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

2

Accessories

2

Available Accessories ● Auxiliary switch ● Shunt trip ● Electrical operator ● Alarm lockout ● Undervoltage release ● Terminals ● Lock-off devices

2 2 2 2

Factory Modifications—Freeze Testing to –40ºC 4 ● ● ●

End cap kits Rotary handle mechanisms Flexible shaft handle mechanisms

Optional modifications ● Freeze testing

2

For complete internal and external accessories, see the accessory section of each frame.

2

External Accessories

2

Description

Frame

Catalog Number

2

Imperial Base Mounting Hardware 0.164-32 x 1.5-inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers

FD PV

BMH1

2

0.250-20 x 1.5 inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers

KD PV KD PVS

BMH3

2

—

JG PVS

N/A

—

LG PV

N/A

2

0.3125-18 x 1.25 inch filister-head steel screws and lockwashers and flat washers

MDL PV

BMH5

2

Metric Base Mounting Hardware M4–0.7 x 38 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers

FD PV

BMH1M

2

M6–0.7 x 38 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers

KD PV KD PVS

BMH3M

2

JG PVS

Included 1

LG PV

Included 1

2

M8-1.25 x 35 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers

MDL PV

BMH5M

Interphase Barriers FD PV

IPB1

KD PV KD PVS

IPB3

JG PVS

FJIPBK 2

LG PV

IPB3

MDL PV

IPB4

FD PV

LKD1

KD PV KD PVS

LKD3

JG PVS

N/A

2

F01

KD PV and KD PVS

F01

LG PV

F01

MDL PV

F01

Special calibration—contact Eaton for availability

Molded Case Switches Eaton’s DC molded case switches (MCS) are used in applications requiring a compact, high capacity disconnect. PVGard 1000 Vdc

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 50 °C

2 2

LG PV

N/A

MDL PV

LKD4

Poles in Series

Catalog Number

100

3000

4

FDPV4100KW

200

5000

4

KDPV4200KW

250

5000

4

KDPV4250KW

350

5000

4

KDPV4350KW

400

5000

4

LGPV4400KSW

600

7500

3

MDLPV3600KSW

Notes 1 Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or a molded case switch (included with breaker). If required separately, order 66A2546G02. 2 Individually priced. 3 Locks in ON and OFF position. 4 Add 20% to list price.

FD PV

PLK1

2

KD PV KD PVS

PLK3

2

JG PVS

FJPHL

LG PV

LPHL

2

MDL PV

HLK4

Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp 3

2 2 2 V4-T2-364

MCS are UL 489B listed and have automatic instantaneous current protection. These devices do not provide overload protection.

Interrupting Capacity Vdc

Non-Padlockable Handle Block

2

2

F01

JG PVS

1000 Vdc Maximum

—

2

Modification Code

FD PV

Molded Case Switches

—

2

Frame

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

2.6

Internal Accessories—Right Pole Mounting FD PV 1

JG PVS

KD PV KD PVS

Factory Field Kit Modification Catalog Code Number

Factory Field Kit Modification Catalog Code Number

Factory Modification Code

2 LG PV Field Kit Catalog Number

Factory Modification Code

MDL PV Field Kit Catalog Number

Factory Modification Code

Field Kit Catalog Number

Auxiliary Switch

2 2 2

1A-1B

A06

A1X1PK

A1

AUX1A1BPK

A06

A1X3PK

A1

AUX1A1BPK

A06

A1X4PK

2A-2B

A13

A2X1RPK

A2

AUX2A2BPK

A13

A2X3PK

A2

AUX2A2BPK

A13

A2X4PK

2

B06

A1L1RPK

B1

ALM1M1BJPKL B06

A1L3RPK

B1

ALM1M1BJPK B06

A1L4RPK

2

AAL1RPK

B2w

AUXALRMJPK C05

AAL3RPK

B2

AUXALRMJPK C05

AA114RPK

2

Alarm Switch 1 make/1 break

Auxiliary and Alarm Combo 1A-1B, 1 make/1 break C05

2

Internal Accessories—Left Pole Mounting FD PV 1

JG PVS

KD PV KD PVS

Factory Field Kit Modification Catalog Code Number

Factory Field Kit Modification Catalog Code Number

Factory Modification Code

Field Kit Catalog Number

Factory Modification Code

Field Kit Catalog Number

Factory Modification Code

Field Kit Catalog Number

S02

S4

S42

SNT3P04K

S4

SNT012CPK

S02

SNT4LP03K

LG PV

MDL PV

Shunt Trip 12 Vdc

SNT1LP03K

SNT012CPK

24 Vdc

S02

SNT1LP03K

S6

SNT024CPK

S42

SNT3P04K

S6

SNT024CPK

S02

SNT4LP03K

48 Vdc

S06

SNT1LP08K

S7

SNT4860CPK

S50

SNT3P06K

S7

SNT4860CPK

S86

SNT4LP23K

2 2 2 2 2

60 Vdc

S06

SNT1LP08K

S7

SNT4860CPK

S50

SNT3P06K

S7

SNT4860CPK

S86

SNT4LP23K

125 Vdc

S10

SNT1LP12K

S5

SNT125DPK

S10

SNT3P11K

S2

SNT120CPK

S42

SNT4LP26K

250 Vdc

S14

SNT1LP18K

—

—

S14

SNT3P14K

—

—

S14

SNT4LP14K

120 Vac

S10

SNT1LP12K

S2

SNT120CPK

S10

SNT3P11K

S2

SNT120CPK

S10

SNT4LP11K

2 2

Undervoltage Release 12 Vdc

U30

UVH1LP20K

—

—

T02

UVH3LP20K

U1

UVR012DPK

T02

UVH4LP20K

24 Vdc

U34

UVH1LP21K

U2

UVR024CPK

T02

UVH3LP21K

U2

UVR024DPK

T06

UVH4LP21K

48 Vdc

U38

UVH1LP22K

U4

UVR048DPK

T10

UVH3LP22K

U4

UVR048DPK

T10

UVH4LP22K

60 Vdc

—

—

U4

UVR048DPK

—

—

—

—

—

—

125 Vdc

U42

UVH1LP26K

U6

UVR125DPK

T14

UVH3LP26K

U6

UVR125DPK

T14

UVH4LP26K

250 Vdc

U46

UVH1LP28K

U8

UVR250DPK

T18

UVH3LP28K

U8

UVR250DPK

T18

UVH4LP28K

120 Vac

U14

UVH1LP08K

U5

UVR120APK

U18

UVH3LP08K

U5

UVR120APK

U18

UVH4LP08K

Notes 1 Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories for the FD PV be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected.

2

2 2 2 2 2 2

One accessory can be mounted per pole, per breaker.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-365

2.6 2 2 2

Specialty Breakers

PVGard Solar Circuit Breaker Terminal Offering

Breaker Frame FD PV

2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

JG PVS

Maximum Breaker Ampacity

Terminal Body Material

Wire Type

AWG Wire Range/ Number of Conductors

Metric Wire Range mm2

Number of Terminals Included

Standard Terminal Catalog Number

50

Steel

Cu/Al

14–4 (1)

2.5–25 (1)

3

3TA50FB

100

Aluminum

Cu/Al

6–300 kcmil (1)

16–150 (1)

3

3TA225FDK

100

Copper

Cu

4–4/0 (1)

25–95 (1)

3

3T225FD

Comments

Includes 3P terminal cover

250

Aluminum

Cu/Al

#8–350 kcmil (1)

—

—

TA250FJ

250

Aluminum

Cu/Al

(2) 2/0–(2) 4/0

—

1

3TA251FJK1

250

Aluminum

Cu/Al

(2) 2/0–(2) 4/0

—

2

3TA251FJK2

250

Copper

Cu

#4–350 kcmil (1)

—

—

T250FJ

225

Aluminum

Cu/Al

3–350 kcmil (1)

35–185 (1)

1

TA300K

250

Aluminum

Cu/Al

250–500 kcmil (1)

120–240 (1)

1

TA350K

250

Aluminum

Cu/Al

3/0–250 kcmil (2)

95–120 (1)

4

4TA400K

2

250

Aluminum

Cu/Al

2/0–250 kcmil (2) or 2/0–500 kcmil (1)

70–240 (2)

4

4TA401K

300

Aluminum

Cu/Al

3/0–250 kcmil (2)

95–120 (2)

4

4TA401K

Contains interphase barriers

2

350

Aluminum

Cu/Al

3/0–250 kcmil (2)

95–120 (2)

4

4TA401K

Contains interphase barriers

2

225

Copper

Cu

3–350 kcmil (1)

35–185 (1)

1

T300K

250

Copper

Cu

250–500 kcmil (1)

120–240 (1)

1

T350K

2

250

Copper

Cu

3/0–250 kcmil (2)

95–120 (1)

4

4T400K

Contains interphase barriers

300

Copper

Cu

3/0–250 kcmil (2)

95–120 (2)

4

4TA401K

Contains interphase barriers

350

Copper

Cu

3/0–250 kcmil (2)

95–120 (2)

4

4TA401K

Contains interphase barriers

400

Aluminum

Cu/Al

2–500 kcmil (2)

35–240 (2)

4

4TA632LK

Includes 4P terminal cover

250

Copper

Cu

2–500 kcmil (1)

35–240 (1)

1

T350LK

400

Copper

Cu

2–500 kcmil (2)

35–240 (2)

4

4T632LK

300

Aluminum

Cu/Al

1–500 kcmil (2)

—

1

TA700MA1

600

Aluminum

Cu/Al

3/0–400 kcmil (3)

—

1

TA800MA2

2 2 2

2 2 2

KD PV KD PVS

LG PV

MDL PV

2 2 2 2 2

Endcap Kits Breaker Frame

Number of Poles

Thread Type

Thread Size

FD PV

4

Imperial

10–32

KPEK14

4

Metric

M–5

KPEKM14

JG PVS

3

Imperial

—

FJ3RTDK

3

Metric

—

FJ3RTWK

4

Imperial

0.312–18

KPEK34

4

Metric

M–8

KPEKM34

KD PVS

3

Imperial

—

KPEK3

3

Metric

—

KPEKM3

2

LG PV

4

Imperial

—

N/A

4

Metric

M-10

L4RTWK

2

MDL PV

3

Imperial

—

—

3

Metric

—

—

2 2

2 2

KD PV

Catalog Number

Notes 1 Three terminals with terminal shield as a kit. 2 Three terminals with two interphase barriers as a kit.

2 2 2 2 V4-T2-366

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Contains interphase barriers

Includes 4P terminal cover

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

2.6

Technical Data and Specifications ●

●

●

● ●

●

Thermal-magnetic circuit breakers Designed to meet UL 489B for solar photovoltaic circuit protection 100% rated of the continuous current rating 50 °C calibrated Can be applied in grounded, ungrounded or bi-polar systems Ability to open on signal from DC arc or ground fault detector

●

2

Two PVGard lineups ● UL File EE350638, Category Control Number DIUR ● 600 Vdc per-pole breaker and switch – Each pole rated 600 Vdc ● 1000 Vdc poles-in-series breaker and switch – Requires poles in series connection

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Quick Reference PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers 600 Vdc Per-Pole

2

PVGard 600 Vdc Current Ratings by Frame UL 489B Interrupting Capacity (kA) 600 Vdc Per-Pole

2

Circuit Breaker Type

Minimum Amperes

2

JG PVS KD PVS

Maximum Amperes

kA Rating

90

250

1.2

100

400

3

2 2

Quick Reference PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series

2 2

PVGard 1000 Vdc Current Ratings by Frame UL 489B Interrupting Capacity (kA) 1000 Vdc Circuit Breaker Type

Minimum Amperes

Maximum Amperes

kA Rating

Poles in Series

2

FD PV

30

100

3

4

KD PV

125

350

5

4

2

LG PV

250

400

5

4

MDL PV

300

600

7.5

3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-367

2.6 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

PVGard 600 Vdc Per-Pole Solar PV Circuit Breakers (100% and 80% Rated Frames) JG PVS

KD PVS

2

Number of 600 Vdc circuits

3

3

2

Maximum voltage rating

600 Vdc

600 Vdc

Ampere range

90–250 A

100–400 A

Interrupting capacity at 600 Vdc

1.2 kA

3 kA

Time constant

1 ms

1 ms

Trip unit type

Thermal-magnetic

Thermal-magnetic

8 kV 4 kV

8 kV 4 kV

10,000 400 240 per hour

6000 400 240 per hour

UL 489B

UL 489B

Design ambient temperature Maximum current at 60 °C, as % of rated current Maximum current at 70 °C, as % of rated current

50 °C 93% 85%

50 °C 93% 85%

Operating temperature range Storage temperature range Suitable for freeze temperatures to –40 °C Relative humidity

–20 °C to +50 °C –20 °C to +70 °C Option 0 to 95% noncondensing

–20 °C to +50 °C –20 °C to +70 °C Option 0 to 95% noncondensing

Yes

Yes

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Rated impulse withstand voltage Main conducting paths Auxiliary circuits Endurance Mechanical operations Electrical operations Maximum switching frequency Third-party certification Environment

Suitable for reverse-feed applications Mounting—permissible mounting position

90

º

2

90

º

2 2 2 2

Connection diagrams Terminations Al/Cu wire

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

TA250FJ: (1) #8–350 kcmil

TA300K: (1) #3–350 kcmil

3TA251FJK1: (2) 2/0–(2) 4/0 2

TA350K: (1) 250–500 kcmil

3TA251FJK2: (2) 2/0–(2) 4/0 3

TA403K: (2) 1/0–400 kcmil 3TA402K: (1) 500–-750 kcmil 4

Cu wire

T250FJ: (1) #4–350 kcmil

T300K: (1) #3–350 kcmil

7.00 (177.8) 4.13 (104.9) 3.57 (90.7)

10.13 (257.3) 5.50 (139.7) 4.10 (104.1)

6.6

11.42

Dimensions in inches (mm) Height Width Depth Weight in lbs

Notes 1 Three terminals with terminal shield as a kit. 2 Three terminals with two interphase barriers as a kit. 3 Not UL 489B recognized size for maximum of 400 A breaker.

2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-368

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.6

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

PVGard 1000 Vdc Solar PV Circuit Breakers (100% and 80% Rated Frames) FD PV

KD PV

Number of poles

4

Maximum voltage rating

1000 Vdc

Maximum current rating Interrupting capacity at 1000 Vdc

2

LG PV

MDL PV

4

4

3

1000 Vdc

1000 Vdc

1000 Vdc

100 A

350 A

400 A

600 A

3 kA

5 kA

5 kA

7.5 kA

Time constant

1 ms

1 ms

1 ms

1 ms

Ampere range

15–100 A

125–350 A

250–400 A

300–600 A

Trip unit type

Thermal-magnetic

Thermal-magnetic

Thermal-magnetic

Thermal-magnetic

8 kV 4 kV

8 kV 4 kV

8 kV 4 kV

8 kV 4 kV

10,000 1000 300 per hour

10,000 400 240 per hour

8000 400 240 per hour

8000 400 240 per hour

UL 489B

UL 489B

UL 489B

UL 489B

Design ambient temperature Maximum current at 60 °C, as % of rated current Maximum current at 70 °C, as % of rated current

50 °C 91% 88%

50 °C 91% 88%

50 °C 93% 88%

50 °C 93% 88%

Operating temperature range Storage temperature range Suitable for freeze temperatures to –40 °C Relative humidity

–20 °C to +50 °C –20 °C to +70 °C Option 0 to 95% noncondensing

–20 °C to +50 °C –20 °C to +70 °C Option 0 to 95% noncondensing

–20 °C to +50 °C –20 °C to +70 °C Option 0 to 95% noncondensing

–20 °C to +50 °C –20 °C to +70 °C Option 0 to 95% noncondensing

2

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

2

2 2 2 2 2

Rated impulse withstand voltage Main conducting paths Auxiliary circuits

2

Endurance Mechanical operations Electrical operations Maximum switching frequency Third-party certification

2 2 2

Environment

Suitable for reverse-feed applications

2

Mounting—permissible mounting position

2

º 90

90

º

º

2

90

90

º

2 2 1

Connection diagrams

2

2

2 2 2 2

Load Load

(A)

2

Terminations Al/Cu wire

#6–300 kcmil

(2) 3/0–250 kcmil

(2) #2–500 kcmil

(3) 3/0–400 kcmil

Cu wire

#4–4/0

(2) 3/0–250 kcmil

(2) #2–500 kcmil

(3) 3/0–300 kcmil

6.00 (152.4) 5.50 (139.7) 3.38 (85.9)

10.13 (257.3) 7.22 (183.4) 4.09 (103.9)

10.13 (257.3) 7.22 (183.4) 4.09 (103.9)

16.00 (406.4) 8.25 (209.5) 4.06 (103.1)

6

20

20

29

2 2

Dimensions in inches (mm) Height Width Depth Weight in lbs

2 2

Notes 1 Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded systems that have one end of load (A) connected to grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection. 2 Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only.

2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-369

2.6 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—600 Vdc Per-Pole

2 2

Frame

Number of Circuits in a Frame Width

Height

Depth

JG PVS

3

4.13 (104.9)

7.00 (177.8)

3.44 (87.4)

2

KD PVS

3

5.49 (139.4)

10.13 (257.2)

4.31 (109.6)

2

PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series

2

Frame

Number of Poles

Width

Height

Depth

FD PV

4

5.50 (139.7)

6.00 (152.4)

3.38 (86.0)

KD PV

4

7.22 (183.4)

10.13 (257.3)

4.09 (103.9)

LG PV

4

7.22 (183.4)

10.13 (257.3)

4.09 (103.9)

MDL PV

3

8.25 (209.6)

16.00 (406.4)

4.06 (103.1)

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

V4-T2-370

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

2.6

Wiring Diagrams

2

Series Connection Diagrams for DC Application 12

2

JF PVS, KD PVS—600 Vdc Per-Pole

2 2 2 2

Load

2

Suitable for grounded or ungrounded systems. Suitable for quantity (3) 600 Vdc circuits.

2

FD PV, KD PV, LG PV—1000 Vdc Maximum—Four Poles-in-Series

2 2 2 2 2

Load Load

(A)

Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded systems that have one end of load (A) connected to grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection.

2

Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only.

2 2

MDL PV—1000 Vdc Maximum—Three Poles in Series

2

Load

2 2 2 Load

2

(A)

Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded systems that have one end of load (A) connected to grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection.

Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only.

2 2

Notes 1 Poles in series connection is customer supplied. Use rated cable per NEC. 2 For grounded systems, all poles in series must be connected on non-grounded terminal, with load connected to grounded terminal.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-371

2.6 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

Contents

E2 Mining Service Breakers

Description

2

Page

Engine Generator Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct Current Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—600 Vdc Per-Pole and 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2 Mining Service Breakers Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2VAC Mining Vacuum Circuit Breaker. . . . . . . . . Classic Mining Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add-On Ground Fault Protection—Type GFR . . . .

2 2 2 2 2 2

V4-T2-341 V4-T2-347 V4-T2-360 V4-T2-374 V4-T2-378 V4-T2-389 V4-T2-392 V4-T2-398 V4-T2-401 V4-T2-415

2 2 2

E2 Mining Service Breakers

2

Product Overview

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

State-of-the-art E2 mining service breakers incorporate the rigid specifications and testing procedures developed by a focus group led by engineers from several large coal companies and Eaton design engineers. Additionally, the performance of these breakers was proven and verified during hundreds of hours of field testing in harsh mine environments. E2

mining breakers are available in 600 Vac, l000Y/ 577 Vac and 1200 Vac. Interchangeable trip units can be used on either 600 or 1000 Vac frames. The E2 mining breaker family is designed especially for trailing cable application per MSHA 30 CFR 75. Field interchangeable electronic rms sensing trip units are available from 150 to 2000 amperes with instantaneous pickup settings conforming to the code of Federal Regulations 30 CFR 75.601-2. Electromechanical trip units are also available with a wide range of magnetic pickup ranges.

2

E2 electronic trip units are the first to provide the mining industry with true rms sensing, made possible by the custom ASIC microprocessor in each electronic trip unit. E2 breakers are designed to be physically and electrically interchangeable with Classic Mining Service Breakers and supersede Series C® Mining Service Breakers. The table to the right outlines direct replacements.

600 Vac Mining Breaker Replacement Chart

1000 Vac Mining Breaker Replacement Chart

Classic

Series C

E2

FBM

FDBM

E2F

HFM

—

E2FM

HFBM

FDM

E2F

—

JDCM

E2JM

HFDM (mag. only)

E2F

HKAM

KDCM

E2KM

JDM

E2J

HLAM

LDCM

E2LM

KDM

E2K

HLCM

LDCM

E2LM

KDM

E2K

HMAM

—

E2MM

LDM

E2L

HMCM

—

E2MM

LAMH

LDM

E2L

HNBM

—

E2NM

LCM

LDM

E2L

HNBMH

—

E2NM

LCMH

LDM

E2L

HNCM

—

E2NM

—

E2M

HLCLM

—

E2NM

—

E2M

HPBM

—

E2RM 1

MCM

—

E2M

MCMH

—

E2M

NBM

—

E2N

NBMH

—

E2N

NCM

—

E2N

NCMH

—

E2N

— KAM KAMH LAM

MAM MAMH

Classic

Series C

E2M

Additional Information on Mining Breakers Source

Description

TD01217001E

E2 Mining Circuit Breaker Dimensional Data

BR01217001E

E2 Mining Circuit Breaker Brochure

TC01217001E

E2 Mining Circuit Breaker Time Current Curves

www.eaton.com/mining

Mining and Metals

Note 1 E2R/E2RM is a new frame physically different than the HPBM. See DS29-170MS.

2 V4-T2-372

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

E2 225/400 A K frame and 400/600 A L frame electronic trip units feature specifically designed instantaneous pickup settings to conform exactly with the code of Federal Regulations 30 CFR 75.601-2. Electromechanical trip units are also available with a wide range of magnetic pickup ranges.

Eaton’s mining service circuit breakers provide short-circuit protection as specified in the code of Federal Regulations 30 CFR 75.601-2.

2.6

The tables below list the conductor size maximum allowable circuit breaker instantaneous setting and the E2 breaker that meets that setting.

2 2 2 2 2 2

Trailing Cable Setting Per 30 CFR 75

Interrupting Capacity Rating

2

250

Conductor Size

Maximum Breaker Instantaneous Setting

Maximum Ampere 75 °C Insulated Conductor

E2/E2M/E2W Instantaneous Only

Setting

—

10

14

50

15

E2K 150 A

A

—

10

12

75

20

E2K 150 A

B C A

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical kA) Vdc 1

Circuit Breaker Type

Vac (50/60 Hz) 240

480

600

1000Y/577

1200

E2F

65

35

18

—

E2J

65

35

18

—

E2K

65

35

25

—

—

10

10

150

30

E2K 150 A

E2LME

100

65

35

—

—

42

8

200

50

E2K 225 A

B

E2L

65

35

25

—

—

22

6

300

65

E2K 225 A

E2M

65

35

25

—

—

22

4

500

85

E2K 225 A / E2L 400 A

C/A

E2N

65

50

25

—

—

—

3

600

100

E2K 225 A / E2L 400 A

D/B

E2R

125

65

50

—

—

—

2

800

115

E2K 225 A / E2L 400 A

E/C

E2FM

65

25

18

10

—

10

1

1000

130

E2K 225 A / E2L 400 A

F/D

E2JM

65

35

18

10

—

22

1/0

1250

150

E2K 225 A / E2L 400 A

G/E

E2KM

65

35

25

14

—

10

2/0

1500

175

E2K 225 A / E2L 400 A

H/F

E2LMZ

100

65

35

10

—

42

3/0

2000

200

E2L 400 A

G

E2LM

—

35

25

18

—

22

4/0

2500

230

E2L 400 A

H

E2MM

—

35

25

18

—

22

250

2500

255

E2L 400 A

H

E2NM 2

—

50

25

25

—

—

300

2500

285

E2L 400 A

H

E2RM

—

65

50

25

—

—

350

2500

310

E2L 400 A

H

E2KW

—

—

—

10

10

—

400

2500

335

E2L 400 A

H

500

2500

380

E2L 400 A

H

E2LW

—

—

—

10

10

—

E2MW

—

—

—

12

12

—

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Auxiliary Switch Electrical Rating Data Maximum Voltage

Frequency

Maximum Current Amperes

600

50/60 Hz

6.0

125

DC

0.5 (non-inductive load)

250

DC

0.25 (non-inductive load)

2 2 2 2

Alarm (Signal/Lockout Switch) Electrical Rating Data Maximum Voltage

Frequency

Maximum Current Amperes

600

50/60 Hz

6.0

125

DC

0.5 (non-inductive load)

250

DC

0.25 (non-inductive load)

2 2 2

Notes 1 Two poles in series. DC rating applies to breakers with thermal-magnetic trip unit. Breakers with electronic trip units are not DC rated. 2 Series rated for application with Eaton’s E2KM and E2LM breakers.

2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-373

2.6 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

Catalog Number Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. E2 Mining Service Breaker with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology

E2K E M 3 400 38 2 B20 W

2 2 2 2

Frame Size E2K E2L E2M E2N E2R

2 2

2

Voltage Blank = 600 Vac max. M = 1000Y/577 Vac max.

2

Frame Size K L M

Electronic Trip E = Electronic trip

Trip Unit T

Voltage M = 600 V and 1000 V interchangeable

2

Current Ampere Rating 100–2000

Number of Poles 3 = Three-pole

2 2

Trip Unit Function = 310+ Electronic Inst only (magnetic only) Blank = 310+ Electronic LSI 38 = 310+ Electronic ALSI with maintenance mode M

K E M 3 400 38 T 2 B20

2

2

B20 2 = High load alarm

Terminal W = No terminals Blank = Standard terminals

E2 Mining Service 310+ Electronic Trip Unit

2 2

Magnetic Rating (If Applicable) Blank = Standard mag. 2 = High mag.

Current Ampere Rating 100–2000

Number of Poles 3 = Three-pole

2 2

Optional Features

Electronic Trip E 1 = Electronic trip

Trip Unit Function = 310+ Electronic Inst only (magnetic only) Blank = 310+ Electronic LSI 38 = 310+ Electronic ALSI with maintenance mode M

Notes 1 All N- and R-Frame breakers equipped with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit. No “E” suffix required. 2 Not available with instantaneous only.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-374

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Magnetic Rating (If Applicable) Blank = Standard mag. 2 = High mag.

Optional Features B20 1 = High load alarm

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

2.6

E2 Mining Service Breaker Frame Only 1

2

E2K M 3 400 F Frame Size E2J E2K E2L E2M

Voltage Blank = 600 Vac max. M = 1000Y/577 Vac max.

Number of Poles 3 = Three-pole

Current Ampere Rating 70–800

2 2

Frame Designation

2

F

2 2

E2 Mining Service Breaker with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 1

E2K M 3 400 M K W Frame Size E2F E2J E2K E2L E2M

Voltage Blank = 600 Vac max. M = 1000Y/577 Vac max. W 2 = 1200 Vac max.

Number of Poles 3 = Three-pole

2

Trip Unit Function M = Magnetic only Blank = Thermal-magnetic

Magnetic Trip Range Suffix See catalog

Terminal W = No terminals Blank = Standard terminals

Mining Service Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit

2 2 2

1

E2K 3 400 T M A Frame Size E2J E2K E2L E2M

Number of Poles 3 = Three-pole

Current Ampere Rating 70–800

2 2

Current Ampere Rating 3–800

E2

2

Trip Unit T

2 Trip Unit Function M = Magnetic only Blank = Thermal-magnetic

2

Magnetic Trip Range Suffix See catalog

2 2

Notes 1 Does not apply to E2LME/LMZ. 2 Only available in K-, L- and M-Frames.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-375

2.6 2 2 2

Specialty Breakers

Undervoltage Release Mechanism Electrical Rating Data Dropout Voltage Breaker Type E2F/E2FM

2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Pickup Voltage

Supply Voltage

Minimum

Maximum

Maximum

VA

110 Vac

44.5

77

93.5

1.3

120 Vac

1.5

127 Vac

1.7

110 Vdc

1.5

120 Vdc

1.7

125 Vdc E2J/E2JM

110 Vac

1.9 44.5

77

93.5

1.8

2

120 Vac

2.1

127 Vac

2.4

2

110 Vdc

1.6

2

120 Vdc

1.9

125 Vdc

2

E2K/E2KM/E2KW

2 2 2

110 Vac

2.2 44.5

77

93.5

120 Vac

2.1

127 Vac

2.4

110 Vdc

1.6

120 Vdc

1.9

125 Vdc E2LME/E2LMZ

2

110 Vac

2.2 44.5

77

93.5

120 Vac

110 Vdc

1.25 43.8

77

93.5

120 Vdc

2

0.96 1.13

127 Vac

2

1.8

0.94 1.12

125 Vdc

1.21

2

E2L/E2LM/E2LW/E2M/ 110 Vac E2MM/E2MW 120 Vac

2

127 Vac

2.4

2

110 Vdc

1.6

120 Vdc

1.9

2

77

93.5

E2N/E2NM

2 2 E2R/E2RM

110 Vac

1.8 2.1

125 Vdc

2

2

44.5

2.2 44.5

77

93.5

1.8

120 Vac

2.1

127 Vac

2.4

110 Vdc

1.6

120 Vdc

1.9

125 Vdc

2.2

110 Vac

44.5

77

93.5

120 Vac

3.3 3.6

2

127 Vac

2

120 Vdc

3.6

125 Vdc

3.8

110 Vdc

2

3.8 43.8

77

93.5

2 2 2 V4-T2-376

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

3.3

2.6

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

Shunt Trip Electrical Rating Data Operating Voltage

2

Operating Voltage

Breaker Type

Supply Voltage

Minimum

VA

Breaker Type

Supply Voltage

Minimum

VA

E2F/E2FM

48 Vac

33.6

92

E2L/E2LM/E2LW/E2M/ E2MM/E2MW

48 Vac

34

830

60 Vac

140

110 Vac

480

110 Vac

120 Vac

570

120 Vac

640

127 Vac

180

48 Vdc

220 Vac

200

60 Vdc

230 Vac

240

110 Vdc

100

120 Vdc

130

160

125 Vdc

140

127 Vac 208 Vac

48 Vdc

146

33.6

60 Vdc 110 Vdc

E2J/E2JM

77

110 Vac

60

100

710

77

60

110

120

127 Vac

140

66

110 Vdc

120 Vac

84

120 Vdc

130

127 Vac

102

125 Vdc

140

125 Vdc 110 Vac

60

120 Vac 127 Vac 110 Vdc

77

112

2 2

110 Vdc

120

120 Vdc

440

140

125 Vdc

480

2

430 77

370

2 2

110

2 2

41 18

60 Vac

2

139 210

60

92

127 Vac

117

24 Vdc

120 18

60 Vdc

2

83

120 Vac

110 Vdc

2

330

127 Vac

140

48 Vdc

2

390

150

130

110 Vac

60.5

2

110

100

125 Vdc

48 Vac

110 Vac 120 Vac

120 Vdc

24 Vac

E2R/E2RM

138

77

2

100

120 Vac

77

2

1105

71 60.5

2

140 34

66

110 Vac

2

120

125 Vdc

120 Vdc

E2LME/E2LMZ

E2N/E2NM

2

1280

120 Vdc

110 Vdc

E2K/E2KM/E2KW

55

60 Vac

2

2 2

475

2

720 82

99

120 Vdc

120

125 Vdc

121

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-377

2.6 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

Product Selection 3 A–150 A E2F/E2FM

2 2

E2F/E2FM

Sealed Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit—Include Line/Load Terminals, Non-Electronic Trip Units 1

2 2

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

600 Vac Maximum 250 Vdc 35 kA at 480 Vac Three-Pole

1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum 250 Vdc 10 kA at 1000 Vac Three-Pole Complete Breaker Catalog Number

Magnetic Trip Range

Trip Unit Only Catalog Number

Complete Breaker Catalog Number

2

Thermal-Magnetic

2

15

—

—

E2F3015

—

20

—

—

E2F3020

E2FM3020

2

25

—

—

E2F3025

E2FM3025

30

—

—

E2F3030

—

2

35

—

—

E2F3035

—

2

40

—

—

E2F3040

E2FM3040

45

—

—

E2F3045

—

2

50

—

—

E2F3050

E2FM3050

60

—

—

E2F3060

E2FM3060

2

70

—

—

E2F3070

E2FM3070

80

—

—

E2F3080

E2FM3080

2

90

—

—

E2F3090

E2FM3090

2

100

—

—

E2F3100

E2FM3100

125

—

—

E2F3125

E2FM3125

2

150

—

—

E2F3150

E2FM3150

2

3

9–30

—

E2F003AM

—

7

21–70

—

E2F007CM

—

15

45–150

—

E2F015EM

—

30

90–300

—

E2F030HM

—

50–150

—

E2F030EM

—

2

50

150–500

—

E2F050KM

E2FM050KM

66–190

—

E2F050YM

E2FM050YM

2

70

210–700

—

E2F070MM

E2FM070MM

100

150–500

—

E2F100KM

E2FM100KM

300–1000

—

E2F100RM

E2FM100RM

150

450–1500

—

E2F150TM

E2FM150TM

750–2500

—

E2F150UM

E2FM150UM

Magnetic Only

2 2

2 2 2

Note 1 For two-pole application, use outer poles.

2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-378

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.6

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

70 A–250 A

2

E2J/E2JM

E2J/E2JM

2 2

Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic Trip Units

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

600 Vac Maximum 250 Vdc 35 kA at 480 Vac Three-Pole 1

1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum 250 Vdc 10 kA at 1000 Vac Three-Pole 2

Magnetic Trip Range

Trip Unit Only Catalog Number

Complete Breaker Catalog Number

Complete Breaker Catalog Number

70

300–650

E2J3070T

E2J3070W

E2JM3070W

90

450–900

E2J3090T

E2J3090W

E2JM3090W

100

500–1000

E2J3100T

E2J3100W

E2JM3100W

125

625–1250

E2J3125T

E2J3125W

E2JM3125W

150

750–1500

E2J3150T

E2J3150W

E2JM3150W

175

875–1750

E2J3175T

E2J3175W

E2JM3175W

200

1000–2000

E2J3200T

E2J3200W

E2JM3200W

225

300–650

E2J3225TA

E2J3225AW

E2JM3225AW

500–1000

E2J3225TD

E2J3225DW

E2JM3225DW

2 2 2 2 2 2

1125–2250

E2J3225T

E2J3225W

E2JM3225W

1250–2500

E2J3250T

E2J3250W

E2JM3250W

2

300–650

E2J3250TMA

E2J3250MAW

E2JM3250MAW

450–900

E2J3250TMC

E2J3250MCW

E2JM250MCW

2

500–1000

E2J3250TMD

E2J3250MDW

E2JM3250MDW

625–1250

E2J3250TMF

E2J3250MFW

E2JM3250MFW

750–1500

E2J3250TMG

E2J3250MGW

E2JM3250MGW

875–1750

E2J3250TMJ

E2J3250MJW

E2JM3250MJW

1000–2000

E2J3250TMK

E2J3250MKW

E2JM3250MKW

1125–2250

E2J3250TML

E2J3250MLW

E2JM3250MLW

1250–2500

E2J3250TM

E2J3250MW

E2JM3250MW

Magnetic Only 250

2 2

Thermal-Magnetic

250

2

2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Frame only: E2J3250F. 2 Frame only: E2JM3250F.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-379

2.6 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

100 A–400 A E2K/E2KM/E2KW

E2K/E2KM

Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic Trip Units

2 2

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

2

Magnetic Trip Range

Trip Unit Only Catalog Number

600 Vac Maximum 250 Vdc 35 kA at 480 Vac Three-Pole 1

1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum 250 Vdc 14 kA at 1000 Vac Three-Pole 2

1200 Vac Maximum

Complete Breaker Catalog Number

Complete Breaker Catalog Number

Complete Breaker Catalog Number

10 kA at 1200 Vac Three-Pole 34

Thermal-Magnetic

2 2 2 2 2

100

500–1000

E2K3100T

E2K3100W

E2KM3100W

E2KW3100W

125

625–1250

E2K3125T

E2K3125W

E2KM3125W

E2KW3125W

150

750–1500

E2K3150T

E2K3150W

E2KM3150W

E2KW3150W

175

875–1750

E2K3175T

E2K3175W

E2KM3175W

E2KW3175W

200

1000–2000

E2K3200T

E2K3200W

E2KM3200W

E2KW3200W

225

300–650

E2K3225TA

E2K3225AW

E2KM3225AW

E2KW3225AW

500–1000

E2K3225TD

E2K3225DW

E2KM3225DW

E2KW3225DW

1125–2250

E2K3225T

E2K3225W

E2KM3225W

E2KW3225W

250

1250–2500

E2K3250T

E2K3250W

E2KM3250W

E2KW3250W

300

1500–3000

E2K3300T

E2K3300W

E2KM3300W

E2KW3300W

2

320

1600–3200

—

—

—

E2KW3320W

350

1750–3500

E2K3350T

E2K3350W

E2KM3350W

E2KW3350W

2

400

2000–4000

E2K3400T

E2K3400W

E2KM3400W

—

300–650

E2K3400TMA

E2K3400MAW

E2KM3250MAW

E2KW3250MAW

500–1000

E2K3400TMD

E2K3400MDW

E2KM3400MDW

E2KW3350MDW

625–1250

E2K3400TMF

E2K3400MFW

E2KM3400MFW

E2KW3350MFW

2

750–1500

E2K3400TMG

E2K3400MGW

E2KM3400MGW

E2KW3350MGW

875–1750

E2K3400TMJ

E2K3400MJW

E2KM3400MJW

E2KW3350MJW

2

1000–2000

E2K3400TMK

E2K3400MKW

E2KM3400MKW

E2KW3350MKW

1125–2250

E2K3400TML

E2K3400MLW

E2KM3400MLW

E2KW3350MLW

2

1250–2500

E2K3400TMW

E2K3400MWW

E2KM3400MWW

E2KW3350MWW

2

1500–3000

E2K3400TMN

E2K3400MNW

E2KM3400MNW

E2KW3350MNW

1600–3200

—

—

—

E2KW3350MVW

1750–3500

E2K3400TMR

E2K3400MRW

E2KM3400MRW

E2KW3350MRW

2000–4000

E2K3400TM

E2K3400MW

E2KM3400MW

—

2

Magnetic Only

2

400

2

2 2

Notes 1 Frame only: E2K3400F. 2 Frame only: E2KM3400F. 3 1200 V breakers are sold as “complete breakers” only. 4 Maximum continuous ampere rating at 50 °C.

2 2

Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.

2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-380

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.6

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

100 A–400 A

2

E2KE/E2KEM

E2KM

2 2

Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Magnetic Trip Range

600 Vac Maximum 250 Vdc 35 kA at 480 Vac Three-Pole 1

1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum 250 Vdc 14 kA at 1000 Vac Three-Pole 2

Trip Unit Only Catalog Number

Complete Breaker Catalog Number

Complete Breaker Catalog Number

2 2 2

310+ Electronic Instantaneous Only

2

150

50–800

KEM3150TM

E2KE3150MW

E2KEM3150MW

225

200–1500

KEM3225TM

E2KE3225MW

E2KEM3225MW

500–2500

KEM3225TM2

E2KE3225M2W

E2KEM3225M2W

400

200–1500

KEM3400TM

E2KE3400MW

E2KEM3400MW

500–2500

KEM3400TM2

E2KE3400M2W

E2KEM3400M2W

100 125

50–800 50–800

KEM3100T KEM3125T

E2KE3100W E2KE3125W

E2KEM3100W E2KEM3125W

150

50–800

KEM3150T

E2KE3150W

E2KEM3150W

200

200–1500

KEM3200T

E2KE3200W

E2KEM3200W

225

200–1500

KEM3225T

E2KE3225W

E2KEM3225

500–2500

KEM3225T2

E2KE32252W

E2KEM32252W

400

200–1500

KEM3400T

E2KE3400W

E2KEM3400W

500–2500

KEM3400T2

E2KE34002W

E2KEM34002W

2 2

2 2

310+ Electronic LSI 3

2 2 2 2

310+ Electronic ALSI with Maintenance Mode 3 100

50–800

KEM310038T

E2KE310038W

E2KEM310038W

125

50–800

KEM312538T

E2KE312538W

E2KEM312538W

150

50–800

KEM315038T

E2KE315038W

E2KEM315038W

200

200–1500

KEM320038T

E2KE320038W

E2KEM320038W

225

200–1500

KEM322538T

E2KE322538W

E2KEM322538

500–2500

KEM322538T2

E2KE3225238W

E2KEM3225238W

400

200–1500

KEM340038T

E2KE340038W

E2KEM340038W

500–2500

KEM340038T2

E2KE3400238W

E2KEM3400238W

2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Frame only: E2K3400F. 2 Frame only: E2KM3400F. 3 For High Load Alarm option (B20): E2KE340038B20W, KEM3400TB20.

2

Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.

2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-381

2.6 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

160 A–400 A E2LME/E2LMZ (Series G)

Circuit Breakers

2 2 2 2

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

600 Vac Maximum 250 Vdc 35 kA at 480 Vac Three-Pole 1

1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum 250 Vdc 14 kA at 1000 Vac Three-Pole 2

Magnetic Trip Range

Trip Unit Only Catalog Number

Complete Breaker Catalog Number

Complete Breaker Catalog Number

3600–4400

LT3400KM

E2LME3400KMW

E2LMZ3400KMW

Magnetic Only 400

Interchangeable Electronic Trip Unit

2

160

320–1920

LT340031M

E2LME340031W

E2LMZ340031W

2

200

400–2400

LT340031M

E2LME340031W

E2LMZ340031W

225

450–2700

LT340031M

E2LME340031W

E2LMZ340031W

2

250

500–3000

LT340031M

E2LME340031W

E2LMZ340031W

300

600–3600

LT340031M

E2LME340031W

E2LMZ340031W

2

315

630–3780

LT340031M

E2LME340031W

E2LMZ340031W

2

350

700–4200

LT340031M

E2LME340031W

E2LMZ340031W

400

800–4800

LT340031M

E2LME340031W

E2LMZ340031W

2 2

Notes 1 Frame only: E2LME3400NN. 2 Frame only: E2LMZ3400NN. Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-382

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.6

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

300 A–600 A

2

E2L/E2LM/E2LW

2 2

Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic Trip Units

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

600 Vac Maximum 250 Vdc 35 kA at 480 Vac Three-Pole 1

1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum 250 Vdc 18 kA at 1000 Vac Three-Pole 2

1200 Vac Maximum 10 kA at 1200 Vac Three-Pole 3

2 2

Magnetic Trip Range

Trip Unit Only Catalog Number

Complete Breaker Catalog Number

Complete Breaker Catalog Number

Complete Breaker Catalog Number

300

1500–3000

E2L3300T

E2L3300W

E2LM3300W

E2LW3300W

320

2250–4500

E2L3450T

E2L3450W

E2LM3450W

E2LW3320W

350

1600–3200

—

—

—

E2LW3350W

400

1750–3500

E2L3350T

E2L3350W

E2LM3350W

E2LW3400W

450

2000–4000

E2L3400T

E2L3400W

E2LM3400W

E2LW3450W

500

2500–5000

E2L3500T

E2L3500W

E2LM3500W

—

600

3000–6000

E2L3600T

E2L3600W

E2LM3600W

—

—

—

—

2 2

Thermal-Magnetic

4

1125–2250

E2L3600TL

1600–3200

—

—

—

E2LW3450MVW

1125–2250

—

—

—

E2LW3450MLW

1500–3000

—

—

—

E2LW3450MNW

1750–3500

—

—

—

E2LW3450MRW

2000–4000

—

—

—

E2LW3450MXW

2250–4500

—

—

—

E2LW3450MYW

1125–2250

E2L3600TML

E2L3600MLW

E2LM3600MLW

—

1500–3000

E2L3600TMN

E2L3600MNW

E2LM3600MNW

—

1750–3500

E2L3600TMR

E2L3600MRW

E2LM3600MRW

—

2 2 2 2

Magnetic Only 450

600

2000–4000

E2L3600TMX

E2L3600MXW

E2LM3600MXW

—

2250–4500

E2L3600TMY

E2L3600MYW

E2LM3600MYW

—

2500–5000

E2L3600TMP

E2L3600MPW

E2LM3600MPW

—

3000–6000

E2L3600TM

E2L3600MW

E2LM3600MW

—

2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Frame only: E2L3600F. 2 Frame only: E2LM3600F. 3 Maximum continuous ampere rating at 50 °C. 4 600 A thermal 1125–2250 T.A.

2

Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.

2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-383

2.6 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

300 A–600 A E2LE/E2LEM

E2LM

Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units

2 2

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

2

Magnetic Trip Range

Trip Unit Only Catalog Number

600 Vac Maximum 250 Vdc 35 kA at 480 Vac Three-Pole 1

1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum 250 Vdc 18 kA at 1000 Vac Three-Pole 2

Complete Breaker Catalog Number

Complete Breaker Catalog Number

310+ Electronic Instantaneous Only

2

400

500–2500

LEM3400TM

E2LE3400MW

E2LEM3400MW

1000–4000

LEM3400TM2

E2LE3400M2W

E2LEM3400M2W

500–2500

LEM3600TM

E2LE3600MW

E2LEM3600MW

2500–5000

LEM3600TM2

E2LE3600M2W

E2LEM3600M2W

2

600

2

310+ Electronic LSI 3

2

300

500–2500

LEM3300T

E2LE3300W

E2LEM3300W

350

500–2500

LEM3350T

E2LE3350W

E2LEM3350W E2LEM3400W

2

400

2

600

2

310+ Electronic ALSI with Maintenance Mode 3

2

300

500–2500

LEM3400T

E2LE3400W

1000–4000

LEM3400T2

E2LE34002W

E2LEM34002W

500–2500

LEM3600T

E2LE3600W

E2LEM3600W

2500–5000

LEM3600T2

E2LE36002W

E2LEM36002W

LEM330038T

E2LE330038W

E2LEM330038W

500–2500

350

500–2500

LEM335038T

E2LE335038W

E2LEM335038W

2

400

500–2500

LEM340038T

E2LE340038W

E2LEM340038W

2

1000–4000

LEM340038T2

E2LE3400238W

E2LEM3400238W

600

500–2500

LEM360038T

E2LE360038W

E2LEM360038W

2500–5000

LEM360038T2

E2LE3600238W

E2LEM3600238W

2

Notes 1 Frame only: E2L3600F. 2 Frame only: E2LM3600F. 3 For High Load Alarm option (B20): E2LE360038B20W, LEM3600TB20.

2 2

Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-384

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.6

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

300 A— 800 A

2

E2M/E2MM/E2MW

E2M/E2MM/E2MW

2 2

Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic Trip Units

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

600 Vac Maximum 250 Vdc 35 kA at 480 Vac Three-Pole 1

1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum 250 Vdc 18 kA at 1000 Vac Three-Pole 2

1200 Vac Maximum 12 kA at 1200 Vac Three-Pole 34

Magnetic Trip Range

Trip Unit Only Catalog Number

Complete Breaker Catalog Number

Complete Breaker Catalog Number

Complete Breaker Catalog Number

400

1000–2000

—

—

—

E2MW3400W

500

1250–2500

—

—

—

E2MW3500W

600

1500–3000

E2M3600TN

E2M3600W

E2MM3600W

E2MW3600W

630

1600–3200

—

—

—

E2MW3630W

800

2000–4000

E2M3800TX

E2M3800W

E2MM3800W

E2MW3800W

1500–3000

E2M3800TMN

E2M3800MNW

E2MM3800MNW

E2MW3800MNW

1600–3200

—

—

—

E2MW3800MVW

2000–4000

E2M3800TMX

E2M3800MXW

E2MM3800MXW

E2MW3800MXW

2500–5000

E2M3800TMP

E2M3800MPW

E2MM3800MPW

—

3000–6000

E2M3800TMW

E2M3800MWW

E2MM3800MWW

—

Thermal-Magnetic

2 2 2 2 2

Magnetic Only 800

2

2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Frame only: E2M3800F. 2 Frame only: E2MM3800F. 3 1200 V breakers are sold as “complete breakers” only. 4 Maximum continuous ampere rating at 50 °C.

2 2

Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-385

2.6 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

800 A E2ME/E2MEM

E2MN

Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units

2 2

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

2

Magnetic Trip Range

Trip Unit Only Catalog Number

600 Vac Maximum 250 Vdc 35 kA at 480 Vac Three-Pole 1

1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum 250 Vdc 18 kA at 1000 Vac Three-Pole 2

Complete Breaker Catalog Number

Complete Breaker Catalog Number

310+ Electronic Instantaneous Only

2

800

2

500–2500

MEM3800TM

E2ME3800MW

E2MEM3800MW

1000–4000

MEM3800TM2

E2ME3800M2W

E2MEM3800M2W

500–2500

MEM3800T

E2ME3800W

E2MEM3800W

1000–4000

MEM3800T2

E2ME38002W

E2MEM38002W

310+ Electronic LSI 3 800

2

310+ Electronic ALSI with Maintenance Mode

2

800

2

3

500–2500

MEM380038T

E2ME380038W

E2MEM380038W

1000–4000

MEM380038T2

E2ME3800382W

E2MEM3800382W

Notes 1 Frame only: E2M3800F. 2 Frame only: E2MM3800F. 3 For High Load Alarm option (B20): E2ME380038B20W, MEM3800TB20.

2 2

Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-386

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.6

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

400 A–1200 A

2

E2N/E2NM

E2NM

2 2

Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

Magnetic Trip Range

600 Vac Maximum 250 Vdc 35 kA at 480 Vac Three-Pole

1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum 250 Vdc 18 kA at 1000 Vac Three-Pole

Trip Unit Only Catalog Number

Complete Breaker Catalog Number

Complete Breaker Catalog Number

500–2500

—

E2N3800MW

E2NM3800MW

1200

1250–5000

—

E2N312MW

E2NM312MW

500–2500

—

E2N3400W

E2NM3400W

2 2

310+ Electronic LSI 1 400

2 2

310+ Electronic Instantaneous Only 800

2

2

500

500–2500

—

E2N3500W

E2N3M500W

600

500–2500

—

E2N3600W

E2NM3600W

700

500–2500

—

E2N3700W

E2NM3700W

800

500–2500

—

E2N3800W

E2NM3800W

900

1250–5000

—

E2N3900W

E2NM3900W

1000

1250–5000

—

E2N310W

E2NM310W

1200

1250–5000

—

E2N312W

E2NM312W

2 2

2 2 2

310+ Electronic ALSI with Maintenance Mode 1 400

500–2500

—

E2N340038W

E2NM340038W

500

500–2500

—

E2N350038W

E2NM350038W

600

500–2500

—

E2N360038W

E2NM360038W

700

500–2500

—

E2N370038W

E2NM370038W

800

500–2500

—

E2N380038W

E2NM380038W

900

1250–5000

—

E2N390038W

E2NM390038W

1000

1250–5000

—

E2N31038W

E2NM31038W

1200

1250–5000

—

E2N31238W

E2NM31238W

2 2 2 2

Notes 1 For High Load Alarm option (B20): E2N380038B20W.

2

Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-387

2.6 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

1600 A–2000 A E2R/E2RM

E2RM

Circuit Breakers with Electronic Trip Units

2 2

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

2

600 Vac Maximum 250 Vdc 35 kA at 480 Vac Three-Pole

1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum 250 Vdc 18 kA at 1000 Vac Three-Pole

Magnetic Trip Range

Trip Unit Only Catalog Number

Complete Breaker Catalog Number

Complete Breaker Catalog Number

1600

2–8 x In

—

E2R316W

E2RM316W

2000

2–8 x In

—

E2R320W

E2RM320W

310+ Electronic LSI 1

2 2

310+ Electronic ALSI with Maintenance Mode 1

2

1600

2–8 x In

—

E2R31638W

E2RM31638W

2000

2–8 x In

—

E2R32038W

E2RM32038W

2

Notes 1 For High Load Alarm option (B20): E2R1638B20W.

2

Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-388

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

2.6

Accessories

2

Line and Load Terminals Breaker Type

Maximum Breaker Amperes

Wire Type

AWG Wire Range (No. Conductors)

Catalog Number

E2F/E2FM

100

Cu/AI

#14–1/0 (1)

3T100FB (package of three)

150

Cu

#4–4/0 (1)

3T150FB (package of three)

250

Cu

#4–350 (1)

T250KB

E2J/E2JM E2K/E2KM/E2KW

225

Cu

#3–350 (1)

T300K

350

Cu

250–500 (1)

T350K

2/0–250 (2)

3T400K (three-pole kit)

400

Cu

E2LME/E2LMZ

400

Cu/AI

500–750 (1)

3TA631LK

E2L/E2LM/E2LW

400

Cu/AI

4/0–600 (1)

3TA401LDK (three-pole kit)

600

Cu

250–350 (2)

T602LD

E2M/E2MM/E2MW

600

Cu

(2) 2/0–500 kcmil

T600MA1

600

Cu/AI

(2) 1–500 kcmil

TA700MA1

800 std.

Cu/AI

(3) 3/0–400 kcmil

TA800MA2

800

Cu/AI

(2) 500–750 kcmil

TA801MA

800

Cu

(3) 3/0–300 kcmil

T800MA1

700

Cu

2/0–500 (2)

T700NB1

1000

Cu

3/0–500 (3)

T1000NB1

1200

Cu

3/0–400 (4)

T1200NB3

E2N/E2NM

1600

Cu/AI

500–1000 (4)

TA1600RD

2000

Cu/AI

2–600 (6)

TA2000RD

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

End Cap Terminals—For Use with Ring Type Terminals Catalog Number

Metric Catalog Number

2

Breaker Type

Maximum Breaker Amperes

E2F/E2FM

150

KPEK1

KPEMK1

—

E2J/E2JM

250

KPEK2

KPEMK2

—

E2K/E2KM/E2KW

400

KPEK3

KPEMK3

—

E2LME/E2LMZ

400

—

L3RTWK

—

E2L/E2LM/E2LW

600

KPEK4

KPEMK4

—

Imperial

2 2 2 2

External Accessories

2

Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp Breaker Type

2

Catalog Number

E2F/E2FM

PLK1

E2J/E2JM

PLK3

E2K/E2KM/E2KW

PLK3

E2LME/E2LMZ

LPHL

E2L/E2LM/E2LW

HLK4

E2M/E2MM/E2MW

HLK4

E2N/E2NM

PLK5

E2R/E2RM

HLK6

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-389

2.6

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

2

Internal Accessories

2

Undervoltage Release 1

2 2 2 2

Breaker Type

UVR Type

Voltage Rating

Mounting Location

Catalog Number

Factory Modification Code

E2F/E2FM

Handle reset

208–240 Vac

Left pole

UVH1LP11K (thermal/magnetic only) 2

U18

Handle reset

110–127 Vdc

Left pole

UVH1LP26K (thermal/magnetic only) 2

U42

Handle reset

110–127 Vac

Left pole

UVH2LP08K 2

U18

Handle reset

208–240 Vac

Left pole

UVH2LP11K 2

U22

Handle reset

110–125 Vdc

Left pole

UVH2LP26K 2

T14

E2J/E2JM

E2K/E2KM/E2KW

23

120 volt handle reset with LED

120 Vac

Left pole

UVM3LP08K

120 volt handle reset with LED

120 Vac

Left pole

UVM3LP08KT 24

U68

Handle reset

110–127 Vac

Left pole

UVH3LP08K 2

U18

Handle reset

208–240 Vac

Left pole

UVH3LP11K 2

U22

Handle reset

110–125 Vdc

Left pole

UVH3LP26K 2

T14

Handle reset

110–127 Vac

Left pole

UVR120APK

U5

Handle reset

110–125 Vdc

Left pole

UVR125DPK

U6

120 volt handle reset with LED

120 Vac

Left pole

UVM4LP08K 23

U66

120 volt handle reset with LED

120 Vac

Left pole

UVM4LP08KT 24

U68

Handle reset

110–127 Vac

Left pole

UVH4LP08K 2

U18

Handle reset

208–240 Vac

Left pole

UVH4LP11K 2

U22

Handle reset

110–125 Vdc

Left pole

UVH4LP26K 2

T14

120 volt handle reset with LED

120 Vac

Left pole

UVM5LP08K 3

U66

2

120 volt handle reset with LED

120 Vac

Left pole

UVM5LT08K 4

U68

Handle reset

110–127 Vac

Left pole

UVH5LP08K 2

U18

2

Handle reset

208–240 Vac

Left pole

UVH5LP11K 2

U22

2

T14

2 2 2 2 2

E2LME/E2LMZ

E2L/E2LM/E2LW/E2M/E2MM/ E2MW

2 2

E2N/E2NM

U66

Handle reset

110–125 Vdc

Left pole

UVH5LP26K

120 volt handle reset with LED

120 Vac

Right pole

UVM6RP08K 35

U58

2

Handle reset

110–127 Vac

Right pole

UVH6RP08K 5

U49

Handle reset

208–240 Vac

Right pole

UVH6RP11K 5

U53

2

Handle reset

110–125 Vdc

Right pole

UVH6RP26K 5

T33

2

2 2 2

E2R/E2RM

Notes 1 Contact Eaton for internal accessory voltage ratings not listed. 2 LH (RH also available). 3 Pigtail leads. 4 Terminal blocks. 5 RH only.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-390

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

Shunt Trip 1

2.6

Alarm (Signal/Lockout Switch)

Breaker Type

Voltage Rating

E2F/E2FM

48–127 Vac or 48–60 Vdc

E2J/E2JM

Mounting Location

Factory Modification Code

Catalog Number 2

Left pole

SNT1LP08K

S06

208–230 Vac or 110–127 Vdc

Left pole

SNT1LP12K 2

S10

110–240 Vac or 110–125 Vdc

Left pole

SNT2P11K 3

S10

2

Breaker Type

Number of Sets of Contacts (Make and Break)

Mounting Location

Catalog Number

E2F/E2FM

1

Right

A1L1LPK/A1L1RPK B06

2

Right

A2L1LPK/A2L1RPK B13

1

Right

A1L2LPK/A1L2RPK B06

E2J/E2JM E2K/E2KM/E2KW

Factory Modification Code

1

Right

A1L3LPK/A1L3RPK B06

2

Right

A2L3LPK/A2L3RPK B13

E2K/E2KM/E2KW

110–240 Vac or 110–125 Vdc

Left pole

SNT3P11K 3

S10

1

Right

ALM1M1BJPK

B1

E2LME/E2LMZ

24 Vac/Vdc

Left pole

SNT024CPK

S6

2

Right

ALM2M2BJPK

B3

48–60 Vac/Vdc

Left pole

E2L/E2LM/E2LW/E2M/ E2MM/E2MW

E2N/E2NM E2R/E2RM

E2LME/E2LMZ

2 2 2 2

SNT4860CPK

S7

A1L4LPK/A1L4RPK B06

SNT120CPK

S2

E2L/E2LM/E2LW/E2M/ 1 E2MM/E2MW 2

Right

110–240 Vac/Vdc Left pole

Right

A2L4LPK/A2L4RPK B13

48–60 Vac

Left pole

SNT4LP05K 2

S06

E2N/E2NM

1

Right

A1L5LPK/A1L5RPK B06

48–60 Vdc

Left pole

SNT4LP23K 2

S86

2

Right

A2L5LPK/A2L5RPK B13

110–240 Vac

Left pole

SNT4LP11K 2

S10

1

Right

A1L6RPK

B05

110–125 Vdc

Left pole

SNT4LP26K 2

S42

2

Right

A2L6RPK

B12

110–240 Vac

Left pole

SNT5LP11K 2

S10

110–125 Vdc

Left pole

SNT5LP26K 2

S42

110–240 Vac

Right pole

SNT6P11K 4

S29

110–125 Vdc

Right pole

SNT6P26K 4

S45

E2R/E2RM

2

Notes 1 Contact Eaton for internal accessory voltage ratings not listed. 2 LH (RH also available). 3 LH or RH. 4 RH only.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Auxiliary Switch Breaker Type

Number of Sets of Contacts Mounting (1A and 1B) Location

Catalog Number

Factory Modification Code

E2F/E2FM

1

Right

A1X1PK

A06

2

Right

A2X1RPK

A13

1

Right

A1X2PK

A06

2

Right

A2X2PK

A13

1

Right

A1X3PK

A06

2

Right

A2X3PK

A13

1

Right

AUX1A1BPK

A1

E2J/E2JM E2K/E2KM/E2KW

E2LME/E2LMZ

2

Right

AUX2A2BPK

A2

E2L/E2LM/E2LW/E2M/ 1 E2MM/E2MW 2

Right

A1X4PK

A06

Right

A2X4PK

A13

E2N/E2NM

1

Right

A1X5PK

A06

2

Right

A2X5PK

A13

2

Right

A2X6RPK

A12

4

Right

A4X6RPK

A19

E2R/E2RM

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-391

2.6 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.

2

3 A–150 A

70 A–250 A

2

E2F/E2FM Sealed Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit— Include Line/Load Terminals Non-Electronic Trip Units

E2J/E2JM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic Trip Units

2

A

C

A

C

2 2

On Off

2

B

2

B ON/

2 2 2 2

Front View

Side View

Description

Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2

A

4.13 (104.9)

2

B

6.00 (152.4)

C

3.38 (85.9)

D

3.50 (88.9)

2

OFF/

D

D Front View

2

Description

Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2

A

4.13 (104.9)

B

10.00 (254.0)

C

4.06 (103.1)

D

4.31 (109.5)

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-392

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Side View

2.6

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2

Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.

100 A–400 A

100 A–400 A

2

E2K/E2KM/E2KW

E2KE/E2KEM

Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic Trip Units

Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units

2

C

A

2

C

A

2 2 2 2

B

B

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

2 2 2 2 2 2

D Front View Description

2

D

Side View

Front View

Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Description

A

5.49 (139.4)

A

5.49 (139.4)

B

10.13 (257.3)

B

10.13 (257.3)

C

4.06 (103.1)

C

4.06 (103.1)

D

4.31 (109.5)

D

4.31 (109.5)

Side View

2

Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-393

2.6 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.

160 A–400 A

300 A–600 A

E2LME/E2LMZ

E2L/E2LM/E2LW Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units

Circuit Breakers

2

C

A

C

A

2 2 2 On/I

2

On/I

On/I

On/I

B

2

Off/O

2

B

Off/O

Off/O

Trip Unit May Be Either Thermal/Magnetic or Electronic

2

Off/O

Trip Unit May Be Either Thermal/Magnetic or Electronic

2 D

2 2

Front View

D

Side View

Front View

Description

Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Description

2

A

5.48 (139.2)

A

8.25 (209.6)

2

B

10.13 (257.3)

B

10.75 (273.1)

C

4.00 (101.6)

C

4.06 (103.1)

D

4.22 (107.1)

D

4.38 (111.3)

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

V4-T2-394

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Side View

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

2.6

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2

Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.

2

300 A–600 A

300 A–800 A

E2LE/E2LEM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units

E2M/E2MM/E2MW Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic Trip Units

C

A

2 2

C

A

2

2 2 On/I

2

On/I

B Off/O

2

Off/O

On/I

Trip Unit May Be Either Thermal/Magnetic or Electronic

2

On/I

2

B Off/O

2

Off/O

2

D Front View

Side View

2 Description

Dimensions in Inches (mm)

A

8.25 (209.6)

B

10.75 (273.1)

C

4.06 (103.1)

D

4.38 (111.3)

2 2 2

D Front View

Description

Dimensions in Inches (mm)

A

8.25 (209.6)

B

16.00 (406.4)

C

4.06 (103.1)

D

4.38 (111.3)

Side View

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-395

2.6 2 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.

800 A

400 A–1200 A

E2ME/E2MEM

E2N/E2NM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units

Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units C

A

2

C

A

2 2 2

B

2 2

On/I

On/I

ON/I

B

2 2

Off/O

Off/O

OFF/O

2 2 2 2

D Front View

2

D Front View

2

Side View

2

Description

Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Description

A

8.25 (209.6)

A

8.25 (209.6)

2

B

16.00 (406.4)

B

16.00 (406.4)

C

4.06 (103.1)

C

5.50 (139.7)

2

D

4.38 (111.3)

D

6.00 (152.4)

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-396

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Side View

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

2.6

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2

Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.

2

1600 A–2000 A

2

E2R/ E2RM Circuit Breakers with Electronic Trip Units

2

C

A

2 2 2 2

B

2 2 2 2

D Front View

Description

2

Side View

2

Dimensions in Inches (mm)

A

15.50 (393.7)

B

16.00 (406.4)

C

9.00 (228.6)

D

10.00 (254.0)

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-397

2.6 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

Contents

E2VAC Mining Vacuum Circuit Breaker

Description

2

Engine Generator Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct Current Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—600 Vdc Per-Pole and 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2 Mining Service Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2VAC Mining Vacuum Circuit Breaker Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Classic Mining Breakers Add-On Ground Fault Protection—Type GFR . . . .

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

E2VAC Mining Vacuum Circuit Breaker

2

Product Overview

Application Description

The Eaton E2VAC mining vacuum circuit breaker is a vacuum-based solution with advanced communications, designed to improve safety, reliability and productivity.

Combining robust circuit protection and safety features with state-of-the-art monitoring capability, the E2VAC breaker is ideal for underground power center applications.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Available in 480, 600 and 1000 Vac styles, the E2VAC provides protection for up to 500 A in motor circuits and trailing cables. By using vacuum contactors to make and break line/load connections, the dangers of an external arc flash are eliminated while reliably switching normal load and high stress fault currents. The E2VAC can be installed as a fixed breaker, but it is also available with remote racking capability that allows personnel to remove the breaker from service: ●

●

While standing at a safe distance from the breaker Completely disconnecting the breaker from live voltage without having to depower the entire power center for maintenance

Eaton’s EDR-5000 distribution relay is fully integrated into the E2VAC breaker and provides advanced monitoring capability for real power, reactive power, power factor and frequency in addition to the standard voltage, current and phase angle measurements. V4-T2-398

Features and Benefits ●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Industry-leading vacuum interrupter (VI) technology used to eliminate the risk of external arc flash; includes VI malfunction detection Blown fuse detection with audible and visible indication Phase loss and open CT detection Dust-tight receptacle supplies power from the front of the breaker EDR-5000 distribution relay provides voltage, current and phase angle monitoring capability Instantaneous protection for short circuit and ground faults; phase imbalance and undervoltage protection Advanced user interface with LEDs and LCD screen for fault indication and keypad for programming Vacuum sealed contacts improve the equipment life, especially in harsh environments

Key Differentiators Remote racking capability greatly increases service accessibility and safety by keeping the operator at a great distance from the arc flash ● Maintenance Mode enables lower instantaneous pickups to minimize the risk of arc flash energy release during breaker service ● Advanced monitoring capability for kW, kVAR, power factor and frequency ● Reports sequence of up to 300 events and stores fault data for up to 20 faults ● Reduced footprint allows users to maximize space in the power center ●

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Page V4-T2-341 V4-T2-347 V4-T2-360 V4-T2-372 V4-T2-399 V4-T2-399 V4-T2-400 V4-T2-415

2.6

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

Catalog Number Selection

2

E2VAC Mining Vacuum Circuit Breaker

2 E2VAC R 480V 3 400

Frame Blank = Fixed R = Remote racking

Voltage 480V = 480 Vac max. 600V = 600 Vac max. 1000V = 1000Y/577 Vac max.

Number of Poles 3 = Three-pole

2 2

Current Rating 300 = 300 A 400 = 400 A 600 = 600 A

2 2 2

Product Selection

E2VAC

2 2

E2VAC Mining Circuit Breakers with EDR-5000 Relay Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 °C

480 Vac Maximum

600 Vac Maximum

1000 Vac Maximum

Trip Range

100 kA, Three-Pole Catalog Number

100 kA, Three-Pole Catalog Number

100k A, Three-Pole Catalog Number

50–320

E2VAC480V3300

E2VAC600V3300

E2VAC1000V3300

2

Fixed Standard Breaker 300 400

265–405

E2VAC480V3400

E2VAC600V3400

E2VAC1000V3400

600

408–600

E2VAC480V3600

E2VAC600V3600

E2VAC1000V3600

2 2

Standard Breaker with Remote Racking 300

50–320

E2VACR480V3300

E2VACR600V3300

E2VACR1000V3300

400

265–405

E2VACR480V3400

E2VACR600V3400

E2VACR1000V3400

600

408–600

E2VACR480V3600

E2VACR600V3600

E2VACR1000V3600

2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-399

2.6 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Fixed Standard E2VAC Breaker 34.11 (866.4)

20.00 (508.0)

2

28.00 (711.2)

2 2 2 2

24.00 (609.6)

2 2 2 2 2

1.06 (26.9)

15.00 (381.0)

2

2

1.06 (26.9)

0.50 (12.7)

2 2

Side View

Front View

21.50 (546.1)

22.50 (571.5)

2

0.50 (12.7)

2 2

20.12 (511.0)

2

Recommended Cutout

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-400

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

2.6

Contents Description

Page

Engine Generator Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct Current Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—600 Vdc Per-Pole and 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2 Mining Service Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2VAC Mining Vacuum Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . Classic Mining Breakers Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add-On Ground Fault Protection—Type GFR . . . .

V4-T2-341 V4-T2-347 V4-T2-360 V4-T2-372 V4-T2-398 V4-T2-403 V4-T2-408 V4-T2-410 V4-T2-415

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Classic Mining Breakers

2

Product Overview Classic mining service circuit breakers continue to be manufactured and are primarily applied to achieve an exact physical and electronic replacement of previously Cutler-Hammer

installed Westinghouse equipment. To upgrade to the current offering of E2 mining circuit breakers, consult the cross reference information on Page V4-T2-410.

2 2 2 2

AC Interrupting Capacity, Symmetrical Amperes

2

Breaker Type HLAM 2

All Other 1000 Volt Breakers 2

2

—

—

—

30,000

—

—

—

2

22,000

22,000

—

—

—

—

—

10,000

12,000

14,000

60 Hz AC Volts

KAM

LAM, MAM, NBM

HKAM

240

25,000

42,000

480

22,000

600 1000 1

2 2 2

Special DC Interrupting Capacity Interrupting Capacity (Amperes) at 300–330 Vdc

2

Two Poles in Series 4

Single-Pole Breaker Type

Maximum Ampere Rating

0.0–0.15 mH Inductance 3

0.15–0.5 mH Inductance

0.5–0.9 mH Inductance

2.4 mH Inductance

KAM

225

15,000

10,000

15,000

5000

LAM

400/600

15,000

10,000

15,000

5000

MAM

800

15,000

10,000

15,000

5000

NBM

1200

15,000

10,000

15,000

5000

2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Based on circuit power factor of 50% or greater. 2 HLAM must be rear stud connected. If front connected, interrupting capacity rating is 10,000 amperes. 3 Resistive circuit. 4 Two poles in electrical series in ungrounded leg of circuit.

2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-401

2.6

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

2

Classic Circuit Breakers For Mining Service

2

Undervoltage Release Data Undervoltage releases are calibrated to pick up at 72 to 85% of rated voltage dropout between 35 to 70% of rated voltage.

2 2

Volts

KAM, HKAM 1

480/60

0.021

10,000

10.1

240/60

0.019

—

4.6

0.021

—

2.5

2

120/60

2 2

Line Amperes

0.13

—

15.6

480/60

0.033

12,000 3

15.9

240/60

0.028

6,000

6.7

120/60

0.029

—

3.5

120/60 2

0.13

—

15.6

120/60 LAM, HLAM, MAM, HMAM, NBM, HNBM 1

2

2

Series Resistors 1

2 2 2 2

Shunt Trip Coil Data Breaker Type KAM, HKAM, LAM, HLAM, MAM, HMAM, NBM, HNBM

2 2 2

Total VA

Breaker Type

Volts

Amperes

VA

480/60

0.085

40.8

240/60

1.7

408

120/60

0.88

105.6

48 DC

8.0

384

Notes 1 Supplied for external customer mounting. 2 New design electrical reset UVR. 3 16,000 for Type MAM and HMAM.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-402

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2.6

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

Product Selection For reference only. Replace these frames with E2 Series. See Cross-Reference information beginning on Page V4-T2-410.

2

Classic Mining Service Circuit Breakers

2 Accessories (Included in Frame)

Magnetic Trip Range, Amperes 3

2

M

None

200–400

M

UVR 4

200–400

2

M

Standard shunt trip 3

200–400

225

TM

UVR 4

300–700

2

225

TM

UVR 4

500–1000

2609D60G67

3

180

M

None

200–400

1291C26G08

3

180

M

UVR 4

200–400

2609D60G69

3

180

M

Standard shunt trip 3

200–400

5685D48G75

3

225

TM

None

300–700

5685D48G74

3

225

TM

None

500–1000

Breaker Type

Frame Style Numbers 12

Poles

Amperes

KAM

2609D60G64

2

180

1291C26G07

2

180

2609D60G66

2

180

1291C26G01

2

1291C26G02

LAM

Trip Type

4

2 2 2 2 2 2

300–700

1291C26G03

3

225

TM

UVR

1291C26G04

3

225

TM

UVR 4

500–1000

2609D60G01

3

225

TM

Standard shunt trip 3

300–700

2609D60G02

3

225

TM

Standard shunt trip 3

500–1000

2609D60G40

3

225

M

None

300–700

2609D60G41

3

225

M

None

500–700

1291C26G05

3

225

M

UVR 4

300–700

4

500–1000 500–1000

1291C26G06

3

225

M

UVR

1291C32G01

2

400

TM

UVR 4

2609D60G61

2

400

M

Shunt trip (48 Vdc)

750–1500

1291C32G03

3

400

TM

UVR 4

500–1000

5685D48G73

3

400

TM

None

800–1600

1291C32G02

3

400

TM

UVR 4

800–1600

2609D60G03

3

400

TM

Standard shunt trip 3

800–1600

2609D60G44

3

400

M

None

800–1600

1291C32G04

3

400

M

UVR 4

800–1600

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Terminals not included in style number. 2 All breakers listed are complete with accessories indicated. 3 Rated 120 volts/60 Hz: undervoltage release is handle reset type. 4 UVR is auto-reset type, 120 Vac.

2 2

M = magnetic only; TM = thermal-magnetic.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-403

2.6

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

2

For reference only. Replace these frames with E2 Series. See Cross-Reference information beginning on Page V4-T2-410.

2

Classic Mining Service Circuit Breakers, continued

2

Breaker Type

Frame Style Numbers 12

Poles

Amperes

Trip Type

Accessories (Included in Frame)

Magnetic Trip Range, Amperes 3

2609D60G17

2

600

TM

UVR 3

750–1500

2

2609D60G18

2

800

TM

UVR 3

1000–2000

2

2609D60G63

3

400

TM

UVR 3

2000–4000

5685D48G72

3

600

TM

None

1500–3000

MAM

3

1500–3000

2

2609D60G19

3

600

TM

UVR

2609D60G04

3

600

TM

Standard shunt trip 3

1500–3000

2

2609D60G05

3

800

TM

Standard shunt trip 3

2000–4000

5685D48G71

3

800

TM

None

2000–4000

2

2609D60G20

3

800

TM

UVR 3

2000–4000

2

2609D60G46

3

800

M

None

1500–3000

2609D60G47

3

800

M

UVR 3

1500–3000

2609D60G48

3

800

M

None

2000–4000

2

3

2000–4000

2609D60G49

3

800

M

UVR

1229C37G13

2

1000

TM

UVR 4

1500–3000

1229C37G14

2

1200

TM

UVR 4

2000–4000

2

1227C36G10

3

1000

TM

None

2500–5000

2

1229C37G15

3

1000

TM

UVR 4

2500–5000

1227C36G13

3

1000

TM

Standard shunt trip 3

2500–5000

2

1227C36G14

3

1200

TM

Standard shunt trip 3

2500–5000

1227C36G09

3

1200

TM

None

2500–5000

2

NBM

2 2 2 2 2

2500–5000

1229C37G16

3

1200

TM

UVR

1227C36G19

3

1200

M

None

2500–5000

1229C37G17

3

1200

M

UVR 4

2500–5000

Notes 1 Terminals not included in style number. 2 All breakers listed are complete with accessories indicated. 3 Rated 120 volts/60 Hz: undervoltage release is handle reset type. 4 UVR is auto-reset type, 120 Vac. M = magnetic only; TM = thermal-magnetic.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-404

4

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

2.6

1000 Volt Classic Mining Service Circuit Breakers

HKAM

Breaker Type

Frame Style Numbers

Poles

Amperes

Trip Type

Accessories (Included in Frame)

Magnetic Trip Range, Amperes 1

HKAM

2609D60G70

3

180

M

None

200–400

2

1291C26G16

3

180

M

UVR

5685D48G87

3

225

TM

None

300–700

1291C26G12

3

225

TM

UVR 2

300–700

5685D48G86

3

225

TM

None

500–1000

1291C26G13

3

225

TM

UVR 2

500–1000

1291C26G14

3

225

M

UVR 2

300–700

1291C26G15

3

225

M

UVR 2

500–1000

5685D48G85

3

400

TM

None

800–1600

1291C32G07

3

400

TM

UVR 2

800–1600

2

800–1600

2 2 2

200–400

2 2 2 2

HLAM

HLAM

1291C32G09

3

400

M

UVR

2 2 2 2

HMAM

HMAM

5685D48G84

3

600

TM

None

1500–3000

2609D60G28

3

600

TM

UVR 3

1500–3000

5685D48G83

3

800

TM

None

2000–4000

2609D60G29

3

800

TM

UVR 3

2000–4000

2609D60G57

3

800

M

UVR 3

1500–3000

2609D60G58

3

800

M

UVR 3

2000–4000

2 2 2 2 2 2

HNAM

HNBM

1227C36G12

3

1000

TM

None

2500–5000

1229C37G19

3

1000

TM

UVR 2

2500–5000

1227C36G11

3

1200

TM

None

2500–5000

2

2500–5000 2500–5000

1229C37G20

3

1200

TM

UVR

1229C37G18

3

1200

M

UVR 2

2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 The magnetic trip range does not change when rating plug is changed. 2 120 volt, 60 Hz electrical reset type. 3 Rated 120 volts, 60 Hz; undervoltage release is handle reset type.

2 2

M = magnetic only; TM = thermal-magnetic.

2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-405

2.6 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

Classic Mining Service Breaker Frames Only Breaker Type

Frame Size, Amperes

Number of Poles

Style Numbers

Breaker Type

Frame Size, Amperes

Number of Poles

Style Numbers

KAM 1

225

2

2602D86G11

MAM 2

800

2

2600D43G11

225

3

2602D86G12

800

3

2600D43G12

KAMH 1

225

2

2602D86G13

MAMH 2

800

2

2600D43G13

225

3

2602D86G14

800

3

2600D43G14

HKAM 1

225

3

1264C99G05

HMAM 2

800

3

1264C99G03

LAM 2

400

2

2602D99G05

NBM 2

1200

2

2610D64G07

400

3

2602D99G06

1200

3

2610D64G08

1200

2

2610D64G09

1200

3

2610D64G10

1200

3

2610D64G13

LAMH

2

400

2

2602D99G07

400

3

2602D99G08

HLAM 2

400

3

1264C99G02

LAM3600F

600

3

2603D48G07

LAMH3600F

600

3

2603D48G08

HLAM3600F

600

3

2603D48G09

NBMH

2

HNBM 2

2 2

Trip Units for Classic Mining Circuit Breakers Thermal-Magnetic

Magnetic Only

2

Breaker Type

Conductor Size

Magnetic Trip Range, Amperes

Maximum Continuous Amperes

Three-Pole 3 Style Numbers

Three-Pole Style Numbers

2

HKAM

#6

150–400

180

—

2609D99G22

#4–#3

300–700

225

5685D48G40

2611D75G01

#4–#1

500–1000

225

5685D48G34

2611D75G02

#4–#1

750–1500

400

5685D48G97

2609D99G21

#2–#2/0

800–1600

400

5685D48G28

2611D75G03

#2–2/0

750–1500

600

2609D99G20

—

2/0–500 kcmil

1500–3000

600

2609D99G19

—

#2–#2/0

750–1500

600

—

—

2/0–500 kcmil

1500–3000

600

5685D48G22

2611D75G04 4

#1–3/0

1000–2000

800

—

—

3/0–500 kcmil

2000–4000

800

5685D48G16

2611D75G05

2/0–500 kcmil

1500–3000

1000

—

—

2 2

HLAM

2

HLAM600

2

HMAM

2 2

HNBM

2 2 2 2

4/0–500 kcmil

2500–5000

1000

5685D48G10

—

3/0–500 kcmil

2000–4000

1200

—

—

4/0–500 kcmil

2500–5000

1200

5685D48G04

2611D75G07

Notes 1 Frame modified for left-hand mounting of UVR attachment. 2 Frame modified for right-hand mounting of UVR attachment. 3 Three-pole trip units only are suitable for replacement in 1000 volt mining service circuit breakers. 4 800 amperes.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-406

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

2.6

Terminals For Classic Mining Service Breakers Terminals are UL listed for wire type and range listed below. When used with aluminum conductors, use joint compound.

2

Breaker Type

Terminal Type

Maximum Amperes

Package of 3 Line Terminals Style Number

Wire Range, Type

FBM, HFBM

Style pressure type terminals

100

624B100G02

#14–1/0 Al/Cu

50

624B100G10

#14–#4 Al/Cu

100

624B100G17

# 4–4/0 Al/Cu

Optional Al/Cu pressure terminals

2 2 2 2 2

Terminals For Mining Service Breakers Breaker Type

Terminal Type

Maximum Amperes

Terminal Catalog Number

Wire Range, Type Number of Cables

KAM, HKAM

Standard pressure terminals (copper only)

225

T225LA

(1) #6–350 kcmil

Optional Al/Cu pressure terminals

225

TA225LA1

(1) #6–350 kcmil Cu, or (1) #4–350 kcmil Al

LAM

Standard copper pressure terminals

225

T225LA

(1) #6–350 kcmil Cu

400

T401LA

(1) #4–250 kcmil Cu plus (1) 3/0–600 kcmil Cu

225

TA225LA1

(1) #6–350 kcmil Cu, or (1) #4–350 kcmil Al

400

TA400LA1

(1) #4–250 kcmil Al/Cu, plus (1) 3/0–600 kcmil Al/Cu

400

TA401LA

(1) 600–750 kcmil Al

600

T600LA

(2) 250–500 kcmil Cu

Optional Al/Cu pressure terminals

LAM-600, LAMH-600, HLAM-600

Standard copper pressure terminals Optional Al/Cu pressure terminals

600

TA600LA

(2) 250–500 kcmil Al/Cu

MAM, HMAM, MAMH

Standard copper pressure terminals

350

T350MA

(1) #1–600 kcmil Cu

600

T600MA1

(2) 2/0–500 kcmil Cu

Optional Al/Cu pressure terminals

NBM, HNBM, NBMH

Standard copper pressure terminals

Optional Al/Cu pressure terminals

800

T800MA1

(3) 3/0–300 kcmil Cu

600

TA700MA1

(2) #1–500 kcmil Al/Cu

800

TA800MA2

(3) 3/0–400 kcmil Al/Cu

800

TA801MA

(2) 500–750 kcmil Al/Cu

1000

T1000NB1

(3) 3/0–500 kcmil Cu

1200

T1200NB1

(4) 3/0–400 kcmil Cu

1000

TA1000NB1

(3) 3/0–400 kcmil Al/Cu

1200

TA1200NB1

(4) 4/0–500 kcmil Al/Cu

1200

TA1201NB1

(3) 500–750 kcmil Al/Cu

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-407

2.6

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

2

Accessories

2

Classic Mining Circuit Breakers

2

Rear Connected Studs 1 For complete stud assembly, order a stud and tube based on thickness of customer’s mounting panel. A short stud must be assembled adjacent to a long stud to maintain

Rear Connected Studs For Insulated Panels Only: Two Per Pole clearances required by Underwriters Laboratories.2 Two studs required per pole. For List Prices, see Eaton’s Price and Availability Digest.

Extension Back of Breaker In Inches (mm)

Stud Style Numbers

0.50 (12.7)–13

3.22 (81.8)

1241 345

0.50 (12.7)–13

6.28 (159.5)

1241 346

225 34

0.50 (12.7)–13

4.97 (126.2)

1241 392

400 3

0.75 (19.1)–16

5.47 (138.9)

05B7383G22

7.97 (202.4)

05B7383G23

2

KAM, HKAM Breakers

0.75 (19.1)–16

0.75 (19.1)–1.00 (25.4) Short

656D565G01

0.84 (21.3)

456D983H05

0.75 (19.1)–16

10.47 (265.9)

05B7383G24

2

Long

656D565G02

3.78 (96.0)

456D983H08

1.00 (25.4)–12

5.91 (150.1)

314C960G16

456D983H06

1.00 (25.4)–12

8.41 (213.6)

314C960G17

456D983H09

1.00 (25.4)–12

10.91 (277.1)

314C960G18

2 2 2 2

2 2

Mounting Panel Thickness In Inches (mm)

Stud Length

0.50 (12.7)–0.75 (19.1) Short Long 0.25 (6.4)–0.50 (12.7)

2 2

Tube Style Numbers

656D565G01 656D565G02

Length In Inches (mm)

1.09 (27.7) 4.03 (102.4)

Style Numbers

Short

656D565G01

1.34 (34.0)

456D983H07

Long

656D565G02

4.28 (108.7)

456D983H10

Stud Ampere Number

LAM, HLAM Breakers 225 3

600

MAM, HMAM, MAMH Breakers 225

0.50 (12.7)–13

3.66 (93.0)

314C960G01

400

0.75 (19.1)–16

5.91 (150.1)

314C960G04

0.75 (19.1)–16

8.41 (213.6)

314C960G05

0.75 (19.1)–16

10.91 (277.1)

314C960G06

1.00 (25.4)–12

5.91 (150.1)

314C960G07

1.00 (25.4)–12

8.41 (213.6)

314C960G08

1.00 (25.4)–12

10.91 (277.1)

314C960G09

1.13 (28.7)–12

4.91 (124.7)

314C960G10

1.13 (28.7)–12

8.41 (213.6)

314C960G11

1.13 (28.7)–12

10.91 (277.1)

314C960G12

600

2 2

Diameter, In Inches (mm) and Thread

800

2 2

NBM, HNBM, NBMH Breakers 1.13 (28.7)–12

5.50 (139.7)

623B222G01

2

1.13 (28.7)–12

8.00 (203.2)

623B222G02

1.13 (28.7)–12

10.50 (266.7)

623B222G03

1.25 (31.8)–12

5.50 (139.7)

373B375G04

1.25 (31.8)–12

10.50 (266.7)

373B375G03

800

2

1200

2 2

Line and Load Terminal Shields 5

2 2

Breaker Type

Description

Style Numbers

KAM

Line terminals

1261C93G01

Load terminals

1262C46G01

Line terminals

1261C95G01

Load terminals

1262C48G01

Line terminals

1261C97G01

Load terminals

1261C97G02

LAM-400

2 2

MAM

2

Notes 1 Not UL Iisted. 2 400 ampere LA studs of the same length have sufficient clearance; however, customer connections may make it necessary to use a short stud adjacent to a long stud. 3 150, 300 and 400 ampere frames only. 4 This is a special stud that includes six contact nuts for use where bus contact nuts must be used. 5 For breakers used with terminals and cable connections. Sold in packages of 10.

2 2 2 2 V4-T2-408

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

Standard Handle Reset Undervoltage Release For Classic breakers field when voltage drops below mountable on special frames 35 to 70% of coil rating. Picks listed on Page V4-T2-410, or up and seals in at 72 to 85% replacement on breakers of coil rating. For line voltages originally equipped with this up to 250 Vdc or 600 Vac. type UVR. Externally mounted resistors are supplied for certain ratings. For undervoltage protection. Standard leads extend 18.00 A solenoid device mounts inches (457.2 mm) outside of within breaker case. Coil breaker. Longer leads may must be energized before be specified. closing breaker. Trips breaker

Shunt Trips For tripping breaker from a remote point. A solenoid device mounts within breaker case. Breaker trips when coil is energized. A cutoff switch breaks the circuit to the momentary rated coil when breaker opens. Available for

Breaker Type

KAM, HKAM

Volts

Style Numbers

120 Vac

4995D12G11

LAM, HLAM

Breaker Type

MAM, HMAM, MAMH

NBM, HNBM, NBMH

Volts (50–60 Hz)

Style Numbers

480 Vac

2605D15G16

240 Vac

2605D15G17

120 Vac

2605D15G19

480 Vac

2606D56G16

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

120 Vac 1

1228C76G03

240 Vac

2606D56G17

240 Vac

4995D12G13

120 Vac

2606D56G19

480 Vac

4995D12G14

48 Vdc

2606D56G07

125 Vdc

4995D12G09

480 Vac

2606D57G16

240 Vac

2606D57G17

120 Vac

2606D57G19

480 Vac

2606D58G16

240 Vac

2606D58G17

120 Vac

2606D58G19

2 2

120 Vac 120 Vac

5672D69G11 1

MAM, HMAM, MAMH

—

240 Vac

5672D69G13

NBM, HNBM, NBMH

480 Vac

5672D69G14

120 Vac

4995D11G11

120 Vac 1

1229C35G03

Left-Hand Mounting

240 Vac

4995D11G13

KAM, HKAM

480 Vac

4995D11G14

120 Vac

4995D10G01

120 Vac 1 240 Vac 480 Vac

4995D10G04

480 Vac

2605D15G02

240 Vac

2605D15G03

120 Vac

2605D15G05

480 Vac

2606D56G02

1228C76G03

240 Vac

2606D56G03

4995D10G03

120 Vac

2606D56G05

480 Vac

2606D57G02

240 Vac

2606D57G03

120 Vac

2606D57G05

480 Vac

2606D58G02

240 Vac

2606D58G03

120 Vac

2606D58G05

Left-Hand Mounting KAM, HKAM

control voltages up to 250 Vdc or 600 Vac. Voltage and frequency must be specified. Standard leads extend 18.00 inches (457.2 mm) outside of breaker. Longer leads may be specified.

Right-Hand Mounting

Right-Hand Mounting LAM, HLAM

2.6

LAM, HLAM

MAM, HMAM, MAMH

NBM, HNBM, NBMH

2 2 2 2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Electrical reset UVR. 2 Auto reset type.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-409

2.6

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

2

Reference Information

2

E2 Cross-Reference Series C Mining

Superseded by E2 Mining

Series C Mining

Superseded by E2 Mining

1491D72G31

E2J3070T

FDBM3040

E2F3040

2

1491D72G32

E2J3090T

FDBM3045

E2F3045

1491D72G33

E2J3100T

FDBM3050

E2F3050

2

1491D72G37

E2J3200T

FDBM3050U62

E2F3050U62

6622C87G27

E2K3225AWU66

FDBM3050WU62

E2F3050WU62

2

6622C87G28

E2K3225DWU66

FDBM3060

E2F3060

2

6622C87G32

E2K3400GWU66

FDBM3070

E2F3070

E2KM3100

E2KEM3100W

FDBM3070WU62

E2F3070WU62

2

E2KM3100U66

E2KEM3100WU66

FDBM3080

E2F3080

E2KM3125

E2KEM3125W

FDBM3090

E2F3090

2

E2KM3125U66

E2KEM3125WU66

FDBM3100

E2F3100

E2KM3150

E2KEM3150W

FDBM3100LM04U62

E2F3100M04U62

2

E2KM3150MU66

E2KEM3150WU66

FDBM3125

E2F3125

2

E2KM3150TM

E2KEM3150MW

FDBM3150

E2F3150

E2KM3150U66

E2KEM3150MWU66

FDBM3150L

E2F3150L

2

E2KM3200

E2KEM3200W

FDM3015

E2F3015

E2KM3200U66

E2KEM3200WU66

FDM3015L

E2F3015L

2

E2KM3225

E2KEM3225W

FDM3015LU62

E2F3015LU62

E2KM3225F

E2KM3400F

FDM3020

E2F3020

2

E2KM3225FUV

E2KM3400F

FDM3020LU62

E2F3020LU62

2

E2KM3225MU66

E2KEM3225MWU66

FDM3025

E2F3025

E2KM3225TM

E2KEM3225TM

FDM3025L

E2F3025L

2

E2KM3225U66

E2KEM3225WU66

FDM3025LS22

E2F3025LS22

E2LM3300U66

E2LEM3300WU66

FDM3025LU62

E2F3025LU62

2

E2LM3350U66

E2LEM3350WU66

FDM3030

E2F3030

2

E2LM34002U66

E2LEM34002WU66

FDM3030LS22

E2F3030LS22

E2LM3400F

E2LM3600F

FDM3040

E2F3040

2

2

E2LM3400FUV

E2LM3600F

FDM3040L

E2F3040L

E2LM3400M2U66

E2LEM3400M2WU66

FDM3040LU62

E2F3040LU62

2

E2LM3400MU66

E2LEM3400MWU66

FDM3050

E2F3050

E2LM3400U66

E2LEM3400WU66

FDM3050LU62

E2F3050LU62

2

FDBM3015

E2F3015

FDM3050U62

E2F3050U62

2

FDBM3015WU62

E2F3015WU62

FDM3060

E2F3060

FDBM3020

E2F3020

FDM3060LU62

E2F3060LU62

2

FDBM3025

E2F3025

FDM3070

E2F3070

FDBM3025U62

E2F3025U62

FDM3070A02U62

E2F3070A02U62

2

FDBM3030

E2F3030

FDM3080

E2F3080

FDBM3030U62

E2F3030WU62

FDM3090

E2F3090

2

FDBM3030WU62

E2F3030WU62

FDM3100

E2F3100

FDBM3035

E2F3035

FDM3100LS22

E2F3100LS22

2 2 2 2 2

V4-T2-410

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

2.6

E2 Cross-Reference, continued Superseded by E2 Mining

Series C Mining

Superseded by E2 Mining

FDM3100LU62

E2FLU62

JDCM3150W

E2JM3150W

FDM3125

E2F3125

JDCM3175W

E2JM3175W

FDM3125LU62

E2F3125LU62

JDCM3200W

E2JM3200W

FDM3150

E2F3150

JDCM3225A5W

E2JM3225AW

HFDM003AM

E2F003AM

JDCM3225D5W

E2JM3225DW

HFDM003AMLU62

E2F003AMLU62

JDCM3225W

E2JM3225W

HFDM007CM

E2F007CM

JDCM3250A5MW

E2JM3250MAW

HFDM007CMU62

E2F007CMU62

JDCM3250A5MWU18

E2JM3250MAWU18

HFDM015EM

E2F015EM

JDCM3250A5W

E2JM3250AW

HFDM015EMA02

E2F015EMA02

JDCM3250C5MW

E2JM3250MCW

HFDM015EMLU62

E2F015EMLU62

JDCM3250D5MW

E2JM3250MDW

HFDM015EMU62

E2F015EMU62

JDCM3250D5MWA06

E2JM3250MDWA06

HFDM030HM

E2F030HM

JDCM3250D5W

E2JM3250DW

HFDM030HMLU62

E2F030HMLU62

JDCM3250D5WS10

E2JM3250DWS10

HFDM030HMU62

E2F030HMU62

JDCM3250F

E2JM3250F

HFDM050KM

E2F050KM

JDCM3250F5MD01

E2JM3250MFD01

HFDM050KML

E2F050KML

JDCM3250F5MW

E2JM3250MFW

HFDM050KMLU62

E2F050KMLU62

JDCM3250G5MW

E2JM3250MGW

HFDM050KMU62

E2F050KMU62

JDCM3250G5WA02D01

E2JM3250MGA02D01

HFDM070MM

E2F070MM

JDCM3250J5MW

E2JM3250MJW

HFDM070MMU62

E2F070MMU62

JDCM3250J5MWA02

E2JM3250MJA02

HFDM1001M

E2F1001M

JDCM3250J5WA02D01

E2JM3250MJA02D01

HFDM1001MS22

E2F1001MS22

JDCM3250J5WD01

E2JM3250MJD01

HFDM100LM

E2F100LM

JDCM3250K5MW

E2JM3250MKW

HFDM100LMA02

E2F100LMA02

JDCM3250L5MW

E2JM3250MLW

HFDM100LMU62

E2F100LMU62

JDCM3250MW

E2JM3250MW

HFDM 100RM

E2F100RM

JDCM3250W

E2JM3250W

HFDM100RML

E2F100RML

JDCMAA2D1

E2JM3250MM02D01

HFDM100RMS22

E2F100RMS22

JDCMDD1S30

E2JM3250MDS30D01

HFDM100RMU62

E2F100RMU62

JDCMFD01

E2JM3250MFD01

HFDM150TM

E2F150TM

JDCMGA02D1

E2JM3250MGA02D01

HFDM150TML

E2F150TML

JDCMJA2D1

E2JM3250MJA02D01

HFDM150TMU62

E2F150TMU62

JDCMJD01

E2JM3250MJD01

HFDM150UM

E2F150UM

JDM2250F

E2JM3250F

JCDA2D1S30

E2JM250MDA2D1S30

JDM3070W

E2J3070W

JCMA2D1S30

E2JM250MFA2D1S30

JDM3090W

E2J3090W

JDCM3070W

E2JM3070W

JDM3100W

E2J3100W

JDCM3090W

E2JM3090W

JDM3125W

E2J3125W

JDCM3100W

E2JM3100W

JDM3150W

E2J3150W

JDCM3125W

E2JM3125W

JDM3150WU18

E2J3150WU18

Series C Mining

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-411

2.6 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

E2 Cross-Reference, continued Series C Mining

Superseded by E2 Mining

Series C Mining

2

JDM3175W

E2J3175W

JM3250TL5M_1125-2250

E2J3250TML

2

JDM3200W

E2J3200W

JM3250TM

E2J3250TM

JDM3200WA06

E2J3200WA06

KDCM3100W

E2KM3100W

2

JDM3225A5W

E2J3225AW

KDCM3125W

E2KM3125W

JDM3225D5W

E2J3225DW

KDCM3150W

E2KM3150W

2

JDM3225W

E2J3225W

KDCM3175W

E2KM3175W

JDM3250A5MW

E2J3250MAW

KDCM3200W

E2KM3200W

JDM3250A5W

E2J3250AW

KDCM3225A5MW

E2KM3200MAW

2

JDM3250C5MW

E2J3250CW

KDCM3225D5MW

E2KM3200MDW

JDM3250D5MW

E2J3250MDW

KDCM3225W

E2KM3225W

2

JDM3250D5W

E2J3250DW

KDCM3250W

E2KM3250W

JDM3250F

E2J3250F

KDCM3250WU18

E2KM3250WU18

2

JDM3250F5MW

E2J3250MFW

KDCM3300W

E2KM3300W

2

JDM3250G5MW

E2J3250MGW

KDCM3350W

E2KM3350W

JDM3250J5MW

E2J3250MJW

KDCM3400D5MA02D09H04

E2KM3400MDA02D09H04

2

Superseded by E2 Mining

2

JDM3250K5MW

E2J3250MKW

KDCM3400D5MW

E2KM3400MDW

JDM3250L5MW

E2J3250MLW

KDCM3400D5MWA02D07

E2KM3400MDA02D07

2

JDM3250MW

E2J3250MW

KDCM3400D5W

E2KM3400DW

JDM3250W

E2J3250W

KDCM3400D5WD09

E2KM3400DD09

2

JDM3250WS10

E2J3250WS10

KDCM3400F

E2KM3400F

2

JM2225T1125-2250

E2J3225T

KDCM3400F5MW

E2KM3400MFW

JM3070T

E2J3070T

KDCM3400FD09G04

E2KM3400MFD09G04

2

JM3090T

E2J3090T

KDCM3400G5MW

E2KM3400MGD09G05

JM3100T

E2J3100T

KDCM3400G5MWD09H04

E2KM3400MGD09H04

2

JM3125T

E2J3125T

KDCM3400G5W

E2KM3400MGW

JM3150T

E2J3150T

KDCM3400G5WD07

E2KM3400MGD07

2

JM3175T

E2J3175T

KDCM3400J5MA02D09

E2KM3400MJA02D09

2

JM3200T

E2J3200T

KDCM3400J5MA2D9G4S30

E2KM3400MJA2D9G4S30

JM3225T

E2J3225T

KDCM3400J5MD09

E2KM3400MJD09

2

JM3225TA5

E2J3225TA

KDCM3400J5MD09H04S30

E2KM3400MJD09H04S30

JM3225TD5

E2J3225TD

KDCM3400J5MW

E2KM3400MJW

2

JM3250T

E2J3250T

KDCM3400J5MWA02D07

E2KM3400MJA02D07

2

JM3250TA5

E2J3250TA

KDCM3400J5MWA06

E2KM3400MJWA06

JM3250TA5M_350-700

E2J3250TMA

KDCM3400J5MWD07S30

E2KM3400MJD07S30

2

JM3250TC5M

E2J3250TMC

KDCM3400J5WD07

E2KM3400MJD07

JM3250TD5_500-1000

E2J3250TMD

KDCM3400K5MW

E2KM3400MKW

2

JM3250TF5M_625-1250

E2J3250TMF

KDCM3400K5MWS10

E2KM3400MKWS10

JM3250TG5M_750-1500

E2J3250TMG

KDCM3400K5MWU18

E2KM3400MKWU18

JM3250TJ5M_875-1750

E2J3250TMJ

KDCM3400L5MW

E2KM3400MLW

JM3250TK5M_1000-2000

E2J3250TMK

KDCM3400L5MWD09H04

E2KM3400MLD09H04

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

V4-T2-412

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

2.6

E2 Cross-Reference, continued Series C Mining

Superseded by E2 Mining

Series C Mining

KDCM3400L5MWS10

E2KM3400MLWS10

KDM3300WS10

E2K3300WS10

KDCM3400L5WD07

E2KM3400MLD07

KDM3350W

E2K3350W

KDCM3400MW

E2KM3400MW

KDM3400D5MW

E2K3400MDW

KDCM3400N5MW

E2KM3400MNW

KDM3400D5W

E2K3400DW

KDCM3400N5MWA06

E2KM3400MNWA06

KDM3400D5WU18

E2K3400DWU18

KDCM3400N5WA02D07

E2KM3400MNA02D07

KDM3400F

E2K3400F

KDCM3400R5MW

E2KM3400MRW

KDM3400F5MW

E2K3400MFW

KDCM3400W

E2KM3400W

KDM3400FK37A06D09D18

E2KE3400A06D09D18

KDCM3400W5MW

E2KM3400MWW

KDM3400G5A06D09U18

E2K3400GA06D09U18

KDCMDMD07

E2KM3400MDD07

KDM3400G5A13D09U18

E2K3400GA13D09U18

KDCMNA2D7

E2KM3400MNA02D07

KDM3400G5MW

E2K3400MGW

KDM2400F

E2K2400F

KDM3400G5W

E2K3400GW

KDM2400G5MS50

E2K2400MGWS50

KDM3400G5WA06

E2K3400GWS10

KDM2400G5MW

E2K2400MGW

KDM3400G5WS10

E2K3400GWS10

KDM2400W5MW

E2K2400MWW

KDM3400G5WU18

E2K3400GWU18

KDM2400W5MWA06D07S10

E2K2400MWA06D07S10

KDM3400J5MW

E2K3400MJW

KDM2400W5MWA06D10S10

E2K2400MWA06D10S10

KDM3400K5MS54

E2K3400MKWS54

KDM2400W5MWD07

E2K2400MWD07

KDM3400K5MW

E2K3400MKW

KDM2400W5MWD07S10

E2K2400MWD07S10

KDM3400L5MW

E2K3400MLW

KDM2400W5MWD10

E2K2400MWD10

KDM3400MW

E2K3400MW

KDM2400W5MWD10S10

E2K2400MWD10S10

KDM3400MWA06U18

E2K3400MWA06U18

KDM2400W5MWS10

E2K2400MWWS10

KDM3400N5MW

E2K3400MNW

KDM3100W

E2K3100W

KDM3400R5MW

E2K3400MRW

KDM3125W

E2K3125W

KDM3400W

E2K3400W

KDM3150W

E2K3150W

KDM3400W5MW

E2K3400MWW

KDM3150WA06

E2K3150WA06

KEM3100T

KEM3100T

KDM3175W

E2K3175W

KEM3125T

KEM3125T

KDM3200W

E2K3200W

KEM3150T

KEM3150T

KDM3225A5W

E2K3225AW

KEM3150TM

KEM3150TM

KDM3225D5A13D09U18

E2K3225DA13D09U18

KEM3200T

KEM3200T

KDM3225D5MW

E2K3400MDW

KEM3225T

KEM3225T

KDM3225D5W

E2K3225DW

KEM3225T2

KEM3225T2

KDM3225F

E2K3400F

KEM3225TM

KEM3225TM

KDM3225W

E2K3225W

KEM3225TM2

KEM3225TM2

KDM3225WK37

E2KE3225W

KM2225TA5

E2K2225TA

KDM3225WK37U18

E2KE3225WU18

KM2225TA5M

E2K2400TMA

KDM3225WK38

E2KE3225MW

KM2225TD5

E2K2225TD

KDM3250W

E2K3250W

KM2225TD5M

E2K2400TMD

KDM3300W

E2K3300W

KM2400TD5

E2K2400TD

KDM3300WA06U18

E2K3300WA06U18

KM2400TD5M

E2K2400TMD

2

Superseded by E2 Mining

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-413

2.6

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

2

E2 Cross-Reference, continued

2

Series C Mining

Superseded by E2 Mining

Series C Mining

Superseded by E2 Mining

KM2400TG5M

E2K2400TMG

LEM3300T

LEM3300T

2

KM2400TN5M

E2K2400TMN

LEM3350T

LEM3350T

2

KM2400TW5M

E2K2400TMW

LEM3400T

LEM3400T

KM3100T

E2K3100T

LEM3400T2

LEM3400T2

2

KM3125T

E2K3125T

LEM3400TM

LEM3400TM

KM3150T

E2K3150T

LEM3400TM2

LEM3400TM2

2

KM3175T

E2K3175T

LEM3600T

LEM3600T

KM3200T

E2K3200T

LEM3600TM

LEM3600TM

2

KM3225T

E2K3225T

LM3600TL6M

E2L3600TML

2

KM3225TA5

E2K3225TA

LM3600TN6M

E2L3600TMN

KM3225TA5M

E2K3400TMA

LM3600TP6M

E2L3600TMP

2

KM3225TD5

E2K3225TD

LM3600TR6M

E2L3600TMR

KM3225TD5M

E2K3400TMD

LM3600TS6M

E2L3600TM

2

KM3250T

E2K3250T

LM3600TX6M

E2L3600TMX

KM3300T

E2K3300T

UVE3LP08K

UVE3LP08K

KM3350T

E2K3350T

UVE4LP08K

UVE4LP08K

2

KM3400T

E2K3400T

KM3400TD5

E2K3400TD

Additional Information on Mining Breakers

2

KM3400TF5M

E2K3400TMF

Source

Description

KM3400TG5M

E2K3400TMG

2

TD01217001E

E2 Mining Circuit Breaker Dimensional Data

KM3400TJ5M

E2K3400TMJ

KM3400TK5M

E2K3400TMK

KM3400TL5M

E2K3400TML

2

KM3400TM

E2K3400TM

KM3400TN5M

E2K3400TMN

2

KM3400TR5M

E2K3400TMR

KM3400TW5M

E2K3400TMW

2

LDCM3600EMA05W

E2LEM3600MA05W

2

LDCM3600F

E2LM3600F

LDM3600F

E2L3600F

2

2

BR01217001E

E2 Mining Circuit Breaker Brochure

TC01217001E

E2 Mining Circuit Breaker Time Current Curves

www.eaton.com/mining

Mining and Metals

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-414

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

2.6

Contents

GFR Relay

Description Engine Generator Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct Current Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—600 Vdc Per-Pole and 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2 Mining Service Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . Classic Mining Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2VAC Mining Vacuum Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . Add-On Ground Fault Protection—Type GFR Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .

Page V4-T2-341 V4-T2-347 V4-T2-360 V4-T2-372 V4-T2-401 V4-T2-398 V4-T2-416 V4-T2-417 V4-T2-417

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Add-On Ground Fault Protection—Type GFR Product Description A Type GFR ground fault protection system, when properly installed on a grounded electrical system, will sense phase-to-ground fault currents. When the level of fault current is in excess of the pre-selected current pickup and time delay settings, the GFR relay will initiate a trip action of a disconnect device, which will open the faulted circuit and clear the fault.

2

Standards and Certifications The GFR devices are UL Class I devices designed to protect electrical equipment against extensive damage from arcing ground faults. A basic Type GFR ground fault protection system consists of a ground fault relay, a ground fault current sensor and a disconnect device equipped with a shunt trip device. This disconnect device can be a molded case circuit breaker, a power circuit breaker, a bolted pressure switch or other fusible disconnect device, suitable for application with UL Class I ground fault sensing and relaying equipment.

Eaton’s GFR ground fault relays, current sensors, test panels and accessory devices are UL listed by Underwriters Laboratories in accordance with their standard for ground fault sensing and relaying equipment, UL 1053, under File E48381.

2 2 2 2 2

Note: Relays are also listed with CSA under their file number 43357.

2 2 2 2 2

Note: Suitable for either surface or semi-flush mounting.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-415

2.6 2

Each installation requires: ●

2

●

2

Specialty Breakers

Product Selection

2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

One relay unit (select trip ampere as required) One current sensor (select configuration required)

GFR Relay

●

●

One circuit breaker or disconnect device with shunt trip, or a shunt trip attachment for mounting in existing breaker Test panel (optional)

GFR Relay

2

Ground Fault Pickup Amperes 1–12

5–60

100–1200

Catalog Number 1

Catalog Number 1

Catalog Number 1

GFR1200EI

2

GFR Relay Types

2

For 120 Volt 50/60 Hz Control Electrical reset with zone interlocking

GFR12EI

GFR60EI

2

Electrical reset without zone interlocking

GFR12E

GFR60E

GFR1200E

2

Mechanical reset with zone interlocking

GFR12MI

GFR60MI

GFR1200MI

Mechanical reset without zone interlocking

GFR12M

GFR60M

GFR1200M

2

For 120 Vdc Control Electrical reset with zone interlocking

—

—

GFR1200EID

2

Electrical reset without zone interlocking

—

—

GFR1200ED

Mechanical reset with zone interlocking

—

—

GFR1200MID

Mechanical reset without zone interlocking

—

—

GFR1200MD

2 2 2

Typical Current Sensor

Current Sensor Window Size in Inches (mm)

2

Catalog Number

Used with Relays Rated 1–12 Amperes

2

5.50 (139.7) I.D.

1283C45G01

2

2.50 (63.5) I.D. 5.50 (139.7) I.D.

1256C13G01

2

7.81 x 11.00 (198.4 x 279.4) Rect. 2

1257C88G04

3.31 x 24.94 (84.1 x 760.5) Rect. 2

1257C92G03

Used with Relays Rated 5–60 Amperes

2

179C768G01

Used with Relays Rated 100–1200 Amperes

2

2.50 (63.5) I.D.

179C768G02

5.50 (139.7) I.D.

1256C13G02

2

8.25 (209.6). I.D.

179C767G02

7.81 x 11.00 (198.4 x 279.4) Rect. 2

1257C88G03

2

9.94 x 16.94 (252.5 x 430.3) Rect. 2

1257C90G02

2

9.94 x 23.94 (252.5 x 608.1) Rect. 2

1257C91G02

15.94 x 19.94 (404.9 x 506.4) Rect. 2

1257C89G02

3.31 x 24.94 (84.1 x 633.5) Rect. 2

1257C92G04

2

6.75 x 29.64 (171.5 x 752.9) Rect.

2

2

Notes 1 Suitable for either surface or semi-flush mounting. 2 One end removable for installation.

2 2 2 2 V4-T2-416

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

1255C39G03

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers

Accessories Options Additional optional equipment can be added to the protection system to meet the requirements of the specifying engineer, including: ● ●

●

Ground fault test panel Ground fault warning indicator relay Ground fault indicating ammeter

GFR relays are available with zone selective interlocking circuitry to interlock several relays within the same system. This allows the relay which detects a ground fault to instantly clear the fault by tripping the disconnect device. The relay simultaneously sends a signal to relay units “upstream” from the fault to time delay or to block their operation completely. Current sensors in various designs provide a range of “window” sizes to accommodate standard bus and cable arrangements. Shunt trip attachments may be ordered for field mounting in Eaton’s molded case circuit breakers, or may be ordered factory installed in the breaker.

Test Panel (120 Vac) Used to test the ground fault system, to give an indication the relay has tripped the breaker, and to reset the relay after tripping. These functions may be separately mounted pilot devices. Note: When a mechanically reset relay is used with a test panel, both the relay and test panel must be reset following either a simulated ground fault test or actual ground fault. Not UL listed.

Test

120 Volt 50/60 Hz

120 Volt 50/60 Hz

Ammeter Kit

2

Sensor

2

●

Catalog Number

1–12 ampere

752B820G01

5–60 ampere

752B820G02

GFRTP

100–1200 ampere

752B820G03

Shunt Trip Attachments Use 120 Vac shunt trips. Faceplate Recommended when these relays are semi-flush mounted, to close the door cutout opening.

600 volt, 50/60 Hz maximum system voltage

●

●

Ground fault detection ranges: ● 1 to 12, 5 to 60 or 100 to 1200 amperes Output contacts: ● 240 volt, 50/60 Hz: 3.0 amperes ● 120 volt, 50/60 Hz: 6.0 amperes ● 28 Vdc: 3.0 amperes ● 125 Vdc: 0.5 amperes Control power requirements: ● 120 volt, 50/60 Hz or 125 Vdc (optional)

Catalog Number

Manual reset

1234C67G01

Self-resetting

1234C67G02

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Face Plate Description

Catalog Number

2

Faceplate

752B410G01

2 2

Ground Fault Warning Indicator Description

2 2

Electrical Ratings GFR Relay

●

Kit Catalog Number

Ground Fault Warning Indicator This is an accessory item for use with GFR relays with interlocking circuitry. At approximately 30–50% of the relay pickup setting, the indicator switches separate 120 Vac control power to a lamp or relay, (not included) to give an indication of a ground fault. The indicator is rated 110/120 Vac 50/60 Hz for a maximum indicator load of 0.5 amperes.

Technical Data and Specifications

Note: Not UL listed.

GFR System Used with

Optional Test Panel Control

Indicating Ammeter The optional indicating ammeter connects to the sensor terminals through a momentary contact pushbutton, and will indicate (in amperes) any ground fault current flowing through the sensor. Kit includes the ammeter and pushbutton.

2.6

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-417

2.7 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms

Contents

Handle Mechanisms

Description

2

Handle Mechanisms—Series G High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . . . Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Mechanisms—Series C High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Handle Mechanisms—Series G

2

Product Overview

2 2 2 2 2

Handle mechanisms are used to operate molded case circuit breakers, molded case switches and motor circuit protectors. They are available in three basic configurations— Flange Mounted, Throughthe-Door and Direct (CloseCoupled)—providing safe, dependable operation and ease of installation.

Through-the-Door High-Performance Rotary ● Universal Rotary ●

Direct (Close-Coupled) ● Universal Direct

Handle mechanisms are used on enclosed circuit breakers, control panels and motor control centers in many different applications. Eaton has a handle mechanism for virtually any need.

Flange Mounted ● Flex Shaft™

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-418

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Page V4-T2-419 V4-T2-424 V4-T2-426 V4-T2-427 V4-T2-432 V4-T2-436 V4-T2-438 V4-T2-440 V4-T2-442 V4-T2-445

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms

2.7

Description

Handle Mechanisms

Page

Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Mechanisms—Series C High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V4-T2-418 V4-T2-420 V4-T2-423 V4-T2-424 V4-T2-426 V4-T2-427 V4-T2-432 V4-T2-436 V4-T2-438 V4-T2-440 V4-T2-442 V4-T2-445

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms Product Description The high-performance rotary handle mechanism uses a simple, yet robust design to make installation and operation easy. The external handle’s key functional components are all metallic, ensuring reliability. The metalon-metal interface between the handle and shaft prevents contaminant buildup that could impede operation, while UV and chemical agent resistant materials protect the handle from heat and fading in direct sunlight, as well as chemicals that may be introduced in harsh environments.

Features In addition to its robust design features, the handle mechanism has stand-off support that allows for easy operation with a gloved hand. With a shallow profile, the handle can easily be used in applications where an internal or double door is required.

●

The high-performance external handle can accept padlocks or multi-hasp locks. The door is interlocked when padlocked and cannot be bypassed.

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

● ●

NEMA Type 1/3R/12 (IP54) and NEMA Type 4/4X (IP65) ratings Black/Blue or Red/Yellow external handle colors Three shaft lengths—6, 12 and 24 inches, which can be cut to size to match enclosure depth Conveniently packaged as kit containing handle, shaft and mechanism Replacement parts are available separately Metallic functional components ensure reliability Metal-on-metal interface between handle and shaft UV and chemical agentresistant materials protect the handle Shallow profile Compatible with both Series C and Series G molded case circuit breakers and molded case switch platforms

●

●

●

●

Same handle can be used on multiple frame sizes, reducing the number of parts needed Red and yellow handles to designate emergency disconnecting means All handle mechanisms can accept padlocks or multihasp locks for added flexibility Fast, easy installation (see video on website for step-by-step instructions)

Standards and Certifications The mechanisms for EG, JG and LG breakers have an internal handle that can be operated independent of door position, and locked-out to meet one of the key NFPA requirements (NFPA® 79) and UL 508A disconnect requirements. ● ●

NEMA 1/3R/12, IP54 NEMA 4/4X, IP65

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-419

2.7

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms

2

Product Selection

2

Handle Mechanisms for Series G Frames

2

Kits Only (Kit Includes Shaft, Mechanism and Handle)—EG-, JG- and LG-Frame

2 2

Description

Rating Type

EG-Frame

JG-Frame

LG-Frame

NEMA

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

IP

1/3R/12

54

EGHMVD06B0 / 68C6040G25

JGHMVD06B0 / 68C6041G13

—

4/4X

65

EGHMVD06BX0 / 68C6040G28

JGHMVD06BX0 / 68C6041G16

—

S01 blue handle, 12-inch shaft

1/3R/12

54

EGHMVD12B0 / 68C6040G26

JGHMVD12B0 / 68C6041G14

—

4/4X

65

EGHMVD12BX0 / 68C6040G29

JGHMVD12BX0 / 68C6041G17

—

S01 blue handle, 24-inch shaft 1

1/3R/12

54

EGHMVD24B0 / 68C6040G27

JGHMVD24B0 / 68C6041G15

—

4/4X

65

EGHMVD24BX0 / 68C6040G30

JGHMVD24BX0 / 68C6041G18

—

S01 red handle, 6-inch shaft

1/3R/12

54

EGHMVD06R0 / 68C6040G31

JGHMVD06R0 / 68C6041G19

—

4/4X

65

EGHMVD06RX0 / 68C6040G34

JGHMVD06RX0 / 68C6041G22

—

2

S01 red handle, 12-inch shaft

1/3R/12

54

EGHMVD12R0 / 68C6040G32

JGHMVD12R0 / 68C6041G20

—

4/4X

65

EGHMVD12RX0 / 68C6040G35

JGHMVD12RX0 / 68C6041G23

—

2

S01 red handle, 24-inch shaft 1

1/3R/12

54

EGHMVD24R0 / 68C6040G33

JGHMVD24R0 / 68C6041G21

—

4/4X

65

EGHMVD24RX0 / 68C6040G36

JGHMVD24RX0 / 68C6041G24

—

S2 blue handle, 6-inch shaft

1/3R/12

54

EGHMVD06B / 68C6040G13

JGHMVD06B / 68C6041G01

LGHMVD06B / 68C6042G01

4/4X

65

EGHMVD06BX / 68C6040G16

JGHMVD06BX / 68C6041G04

LGHMVD06BX / 68C6042G04

S2 blue handle, 12-inch shaft

1/3R/12

54

EGHMVD12B / 68C6040G14

JGHMVD12B / 68C6041G02

LGHMVD12B / 68C6042G02

4/4X

65

EGHMVD12BX / 68C6040G17

JGHMVD12BX / 68C6041G05

LGHMVD12BX / 68C6042G05

S2 blue handle, 24-inch shaft 1

1/3R/12

54

EGHMVD24B / 68C6040G15

JGHMVD24B / 68C6041G03

LGHMVD24B / 68C6042G03

4/4X

65

EGHMVD24BX / 68C6040G18

JGHMVD24BX / 68C6041G06

LGHMVD24BX / 68C6042G06

S2 red handle, 6-inch shaft

1/3R/12

54

EGHMVD06R / 68C6040G19

JGHMVD06R / 68C6041G07

LGHMVD06R / 68C6042G07

4/4X

65

EGHMVD06RX / 68C6040G22

JGHMVD06RX / 68C6041G10

LGHMVD06RX / 68C6042G10

2

S2 red handle, 12-inch shaft

1/3R/12

54

EGHMVD12R / 68C6040G20

JGHMVD12R / 68C6041G08

LGHMVD12R / 68C6042G08

4/4X

65

EGHMVD12RX / 68C6040G23

JGHMVD12RX / 68C6041G11

LGHMVD12RX / 68C6042G11

2

S2 red handle, 24-inch shaft 1

1/3R/12

54

EGHMVD24R / 68C6040G21

JGHMVD24R / 68C6041G09

LGHMVD24R / 68C6042G09

4/4X

65

EGHMVD24RX / 68C6040G24

JGHMVD24RX / 68C6041G12

LGHMVD24RX / 68C6042G12

S01 Blue Handle

2 2 2 2

2

S01 Red Handle

S2 Blue Handle

2 2 2 2

S2 Red Handle

2

S01 blue handle, 6-inch shaft

Notes 1 24-inch handle comes with support bracket. Shaft guide (68C6048G49) is optional and can be used with any high-performance handle listed above for greater alignment tolerance.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-420

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms

2.7

Handle Mechanisms for Series G Frames

2

Kits Only (Kit Includes Shaft, Mechanism and Handle)—NG- and RG-Frame

S3 Blue Handle

Rating Type

NG-Frame

RG-Frame

2

Description

NEMA

IP

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

S3 blue handle, 10-inch shaft

1/3R/12

54

NGHMVD08B / 68C6043G01

—

4/4X

65

NGHMVD08BX / 68C6043G03

—

2 2 2

S3 Red Handle

S3 red handle, 10-inch shaft

1/3R/12

54

NGHMVD08R / 68C6043G02

—

4/4X

65

NGHMVD08RX / 68C6043G04

—

2 2 2

S4 Blue Handle

S4 blue handle, 10-inch shaft

1/3R/12

54

NGHMVD08BT / 68C6043G05

RGHMVD08B / 68C6044G01

4/4X

65

NGHMVD08BTX / 68C6043G07

RGHMVD08BX / 68C6044G03

2 2 2 2

S4 Red Handle

S4 red handle, 10-inch shaft

1/3R/12

54

NGHMVD08RT / 68C6043G06

RGHMVD08R / 68C6044G02

4/4X

65

NGHMVD08RTX / 68C6043G08

RGHMVD08RX / 68C6044G04

2 2 2 2

Note Shaft guide (68C6048G49) is optional and can be used with any high-performance handle listed above for greater alignment tolerance.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-421

2.7

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms

2

Separate Components for Series G Frames

2

Series G Components—Shafts and Mechanisms

2

Shaft Width

Shaft Length

Frame

6-Inch

10-Inch

12-Inch

24-Inch 1

Mechanism Only

EG

8 mm

66A6010G95

—

66A6010G96

66A6010G97

1498D66G17 69D6025G17

2

JG

8 mm

66A6010G95

—

66A6010G96

66A6010G98

2

LG

8 mm

66A6010G95

—

66A6010G96

66A6010G99

69D6051G30

NG

12 mm

—

66A6013H01

—

—

69D9101G30

RG

12 mm

—

66A6013H01

—

—

69D9101G31

2 2

Series G Components—Handles Only

2 2 2

Rating Type

2

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

68C6048G41

68C6048G42

68C6048G01

68C6048G02

—

68C6048G44

68C6048G03

68C6048G04

—

1/3R/12

54

68C6048G41

68C6048G42

68C6048G01

68C6048G02

—

—

2

2

S4 Red/Yellow

68C6048G43

2

2

S4 Blue/Black

54

RG

2

S3 Red/Yellow

65

2

2

S3 Blue/Black

4/4X

NG

2

S2 Red/Yellow

1/3R/12

2

2

S2 Blue/Black

EG

JG

IP

S01 Red/Yellow

NEMA

LG

2

S01 Blue/Black

Frame

2

2

Handles Only

4/4X

65

68C6048G43

68C6048G44

68C6048G03

68C6048G04

—

—

—

—

1/3R/12

54

—

—

68C6048G01

68C6048G02

68C6048G05

68C6048G06

—

—

4/4X

65

—

—

68C6048G03

68C6048G04

68C6048G07

68C6048G08

—

—

1/3R/12

54

—

—

—

—

68C6048G05

68C6048G06

68C6048G09

68C6048G10

4/4X

65

—

—

—

—

68C6048G07

68C6048G08

68C6048G11

68C6048G12

1/3R/12

54

—

—

—

—

—

—

68C6048G09

68C6048G10

4/4X

65

—

—

—

—

—

—

68C6048G11

68C6048G12

Series G Components—Optional Caps As an alternative to blue or red, a black, replaceable cap is available. Catalog Number S01

66A6032H01

Black handle cap

HPHC0DGX

S2

66A6032H02

Black handle cap

HPHC2DGX

S3

66A6032H03

Black handle cap

HPHC3DGX

Series G Replacement Hardware This kit provides replacement parts for Series G high performance handle only. Catalog Number High-performance handle replacement parts kit

66A6029G01

Notes 1 24-inch handle comes with support bracket. Shaft guide (68C6048G49) is optional and can be used with any high-performance handle listed above for greater alignment tolerance.

2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-422

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms

2.7

Dimensions

2

Approximate Dimensions in mm (Inches)

2 High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms

2

Front Operation Handle Type

Direction of Operation

2

Door Drilling

Type S01

2 2 2 2 2 2

Type S2

2 2 2 2 2 2 Type S3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Type S4

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-423

2.7 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms

Contents

Handle Mechanisms

Description

2

Page

Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . Universal Rotary Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Mechanisms—Series C High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 2 2 2 2 2

V4-T2-418 V4-T2-419 V4-T2-425 V4-T2-426 V4-T2-427 V4-T2-432 V4-T2-436 V4-T2-438 V4-T2-440 V4-T2-442 V4-T2-445

2 2 2

Universal Rotary

2

Product Description

2 2 2 2 2 2

Standards and Certifications

Eaton’s Universal Rotary is suitable for use with Type 1 or 12 enclosure types. All rotary handle mechanisms include a handle “lock off” to prevent turning the breaker ON while in the OFF position, and indicate ON/OFF/Tripped/ Reset positions. The Universal Rotary has the added feature of international markings for ON (I) and OFF (O). The Universal Rotary is made of molded material.

The Universal Rotary mechanisms for EG-, JG- and LG-Frame MCCBs can be operated by hand with the door open or “locked off” to prevent operation with the door open.

Universal Rotary is UL listed and meets CSA requirements. Universal Rotary also meets IEC 60947-1 and IEC 60947-2 for international compliance. Rotary UL File Number is E64983.

2 2

Features

2

Features Comparison of Series C Rotary and Universal Rotary Handle Mechanism

2 2 2 2

Rotary

NEMA Enclosure Type Number Handle of Poles 1 3R 12 4/4X 1 Lock-Off 2

Series C rotary

—

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Metal

Black

45 deg.

6, 12, 16, 24

Universal rotary

—

■

—

■

—

■

■

■

Molded plastic

Yellow/Red/Black

90 deg.

6, 12, 24

International Handle Indication: Markings ON/OFF TRIPPED/RESET ON (I) OFF (O)

Notes 1 Type 4/4X application requires special handle. See “Ordering Information.” 2 All rotary handle mechanisms include a handle “Lock Off” to prevent turning the breaker ON while in the OFF position.

2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-424

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Handle Material

Available Handle Colors

Handle Rotation

Shaft Lengths (Inches)

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms

2.7

Product Selection

Universal Rotary

2 Universal Rotary Through-the-Door Handle Mechanisms

2

Handle Color

UL Rating

Shaft Length in Inches (mm)

Complete Catalog Number 1

2

1, 12

6.00 (152.4)

EHMVD06B

2

12.00 (304.8)

EHMVD12B

24.00 (609.6)

EHMVD24B

EG-Frame Black

Red

1, 12

2 2

6.00 (152.4)

EHMVD06R

12.00 (304.8)

EHMVD12R

24.00 (609.6)

EHMVD24R

2

6.00 (152.4)

FJHMVD06B

2

12.00 (304.8)

FJHMVD12B

24.00 (609.6)

FJHMVD24B

JG-Frame Black

Red

1, 12

1, 12

6.00 (152.4)

FJHMVD06R

12.00 (304.8)

FJHMVD12R

24.00 (609.6)

FJHMVD24R

6.00 (152.4)

KLHMVD06B

12.00 (304.8)

KLHMVD12B

24.00 (609.6)

KLHMVD24B

6.00 (152.4)

KLHMVD06R

12.00 (304.8)

KLHMVD12R

24.00 (609.6)

KLHMVD24R

1

6.00 (152.4)

HMVD5B

1

9.00 (228.6)

HMVD6B

2 2 2 2

LG-Frame Black

Red

1, 12

1, 12

2 2 2 2

NG-Frame Black

2

RG-Frame Black

Series G Rotary

2 2

Series G Rotary Ordering Information Shaft Length Inches (mm)

Complete Catalog Number 2

Separate Catalog Number

2

Catalog Number

Standard Handle 3

Breaker Mechanism 4

Shaft 5

IEC IP65 67

IEC IP66 67

2 2

N-Frame (ND and NG) 6.00 (152.4)

HM5R06

6648C22G21

6648C23G08

4217B37G08

WHM5R06

WHM5R06X

12.00 (304.8)

HM5R12

6648C22G21

6648C23G08

4217B37G05

WHM5R12

WHM5R12X

16.00 (406.4)

HM5R16

6648C22G21

6648C23G08

4217B37G06

WHM5R16

WHM5R16X

24.00 (609.6)

HM5R24

6648C22G21

6648C23G08

4217B37G07

WHM5R24

WHM5R24X

Notes 1 Complete catalog number includes handle, mechanism, shaft and mounting hardware. 2 Complete catalog number includes the standard handle, mechanism, shaft and support brace/bracket. 3 Handle is designed suitable for NEMA Types 1, 3R and 12 enclosures. Use style number 6648C22G03 for Type 4/4X handle or add X Suffix to complete catalog number. Handle is cast aluminum. 4 Breaker mechanism includes a shaft support bracket and its parts. Shaft is.50-inch (12.7 mm). 5 Longer shafts,16-inch (406.4 mm) and 24-inch (609.6 mm), include an adjustable support extension. 6 IEC handle mechanism supplied with metric thread mounting hardware. 7 Complete catalog number includes a handle, mechanism and shaft.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-425

2.7 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms

Contents

Handle Mechanisms

Description

2

Page

Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Mechanisms—Series C High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 2 2 2 2

V4-T2-418 V4-T2-419 V4-T2-424 V4-T2-427 V4-T2-432 V4-T2-436 V4-T2-438 V4-T2-440 V4-T2-442 V4-T2-445

2 2 2 2

Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms

2

Product Description

2 2 2 2

Direct (close-coupled) handle mechanisms mount directly to the circuit breaker. They are used in shallow enclosures where the standard variable depth Through-the-door type mechanism is not practical or cannot be used.

2

The Universal Direct handle mechanisms are rated Type 1 and Type 12. The Universal Direct handle mechanism is available as standard with a door interlock to prevent opening the enclosure while the circuit breaker is in the ON position. It is also available without a door interlock.

Application Description

Standards and Certifications

Direct (close-coupled) handle mechanisms are typically used for applications where high volume, standardized enclosures are being fabricated.

The Universal Direct handle mechanism is UL listed, IEC 60947-1 and IEC 60947-2 compliant, and meets CSA requirements.

2 2 2 2

Product Selection

Universal Direct (EG–LG)

Universal Direct Handle Mechanisms Black Handle Color

Red Handle Color

With Interlock

Without Interlock

With Interlock

Without Interlock

Frame

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

EG

EHMCCBI

EHMCCB

EHMCCRI

EHMCCR

2

JG

JHMCCBI

JHMCCB

JHMCCRI

JHMCCR

LG

LHMCCBI

LHMCCB

LHMCCRI

LHMCCR

2

2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-426

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms

2.7

Contents

Handle Mechanisms

Description Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . Flex Shaft Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Mechanisms—Series C High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page

2

V4-T2-418 V4-T2-419 V4-T2-424 V4-T2-426

2

V4-T2-428 V4-T2-429 V4-T2-429 V4-T2-432 V4-T2-436 V4-T2-438 V4-T2-440 V4-T2-442 V4-T2-445

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Flex Shaft Product Description Flange-Mounted Handle Mechanisms Flange-mounted handle mechanisms mount on the flange of an enclosure door. The Flex Shaft is an extra heavy-duty mechanism that includes a flexible shaft in various lengths, 3 feet (0.9m) through 10 feet (3m) for use with various size enclosures. The Flex Shaft handle will accept up to three padlock shackles, each with a maximum diameter of 3/8 inches (9.5 mm). It can be used with Type12 fabricated enclosures. An optional handle is available for Flex Shaft that is suitable for use with Type 4 environments.

2

Standards and Certifications Flex Shaft comes preset from the factory, requiring only minor field adjustments on installation, which takes about 10 minutes—a significant time savings compared to installation of other types of flange handle mechanisms. The Flex Shaft mechanism also takes up less interior enclosure space than competitive designs, and the handle fits standard flange cutouts. Flex Shaft handle can be remotely mounted from breaker, where an operator can use it by “funneling” the cable through conduit.

Flex Shaft is UL listed under File E64983 and meets CSA requirements.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-427

2.7 2 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms

Product Selection Note: Type 4X handle mechanisms are available. Add Suffix X to the complete Catalog Number.

Flex Shaft

Note: When selecting the length of shaft, ensure minimum bending radius of 4 inches (101.6 mm) is maintained to operate properly.

Note: The standard method of shipment includes the mechanism preset at the factory; however, minor field adjustments may be required.

Flex Shaft Flange-Mounted Handle Mechanisms 12 Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m)

2

2 (0.6)

3 (0.9)

4 (1.2)

5 (1.3)

6 (1.8)

Breaker Frame

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

EG

EHMFS02

EHMFS03

EHMFS04

EHMFS05

EHMFS06

2

JG

N/A

JHMFS03

JHMFS04

JHMFS05

JHMFS06

2

LG

N/A

—

LHMFS04

—

—

NG

N/A

N/A

F5S04C

F5S05C

F5S06C

RG

N/A

N/A

F6S04

F6S05

F6S06

2

2 2

Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m) 7 (2.1)

8 (2.4)

9 (2.7)

10 (3.1)

2

Breaker Frame

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2

EG

EHMFS07

EHMFS08

EHMFS09

EHMFS10

JG

JHMFS07

JHMFS08

JHMFS09

JHMFS10

2

LG

LHMFS07

—

—

LHMFS10

2

NG

N/A

N/A

N/A

F5S10C

RG

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

2 2

High-Performance Flex Shaft

High-Performance Flex Shaft Flange Mounted Handle Mechanism 12 Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m) 2 (0.6)

3 (0.9)

4 (1.2)

5 (1.3)

6 (1.8)

Breaker Frame

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

EG

EGFS02HP

EGFS03HP

EGFS04HP

EGFS05HP

EGFS06HP

2

JG

N/A

JGFS03HP

JGFS04HP

JGFS05HP

JGFS06HP

LG

N/A

N/A

LGFS04HP

N/A

N/A

2

NG

N/A

N/A

F5S04HP

F5S05HP

F5S06HP

RG

N/A

N/A

F6S04HP

F6S05HP

F6S06HP

2 2

2

Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m)

2

7 (2.1)

8 (2.4)

9 (2.7)

10 (3.1)

Breaker Frame

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

EG

EGFS07HP

EGFS08HP

EGFS09HP

EGFS10HP

2

JG

JGFS07HP

JGFS08HP

JGFS09HP

JGFS10HP

2

LG

LGFS07HP

N/A

N/A

LGFS10HP

NG

N/A

N/A

N/A

F5S10HP

RG

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

2

2

Notes 1 Three-pole only for EG-; three- and four-pole for JG- and LG-Frame. 2 EG-, JG- and LG-Frame can be left- or right-hand mounted.

2 2 2 2 V4-T2-428

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms

2.7

Accessories

2

Handle Auxiliary Switch—Early Break Design, 1A–1B Contact for Flex Shaft

Type 12 Safety Door Hardware for Flex Shaft (E- through R-Frame) 1

2

Breaker Frame

Catalog Number

Catalog Number 2

2

EG

AUX1EBFSEG

C361KJ4

JG

AUX1EBFSJG

C361KJ6

2

LG

AUX1EBFSLG

C361KR

2

Auxiliary contact changes state prior to parting of breaker contacts to allow for shutdown of equipment. Contacts mounted on breaker mechanism customer supplied wiring.

2 2 2 2

Dimensions

2

Type 12 Safety Door Hardware for Flex Shaft (E- through R-Frame) 1 Catalog Number 2

Handle Length in Inches (mm)

C361KJ4

4.00 (101.6)

C361KJ6

6.00 (152.4)

C361KR

Roller latch 3

2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Customer: Consult with box manufacturer for correct door hardware and any adapters required for assembly. 2 The 1/4-inch x 1/2-inch (6.35 x 12.7 mm) standard mill rectangular locking bar is not supplied with these kits. 3 Third roller latch for use with 4.00- or 6.00-inch (101.6 or 152.4 mm) handle when three-point latching is required.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-429

2.7 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms

Contents

Handle Mechanisms

Description

2

Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Mechanisms—Series C High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Handle Mechanisms—Series C

2

Product Overview

2 2 2 2 2

Handle mechanisms are used to operate molded case circuit breakers, molded case switches and motor circuit protectors. They are available in three basic configurations— Flange Mounted, Throughthe-Door and Direct (CloseCoupled)—providing safe, dependable operation and ease of installation.

Through-the-Door High-Performance Rotary ● Series C Rotary ● Universal Rotary ●

Direct (Close-Coupled) ● Universal Direct ● Euro IEC ● G Direct

Handle mechanisms are used on enclosed circuit breakers, control panels and motor control centers in many different applications. Eaton has a handle mechanism for virtually any need.

Flange Mounted ● Flex Shaft ● C371

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-430

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Page V4-T2-418 V4-T2-419 V4-T2-424 V4-T2-426 V4-T2-427 V4-T2-432 V4-T2-436 V4-T2-438 V4-T2-440 V4-T2-442 V4-T2-445

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms

2.7

Standards and Certifications Through-the-Door Handle Mechanisms Eaton’s through-the-door handle mechanisms mount on the front of an enclosure or cabinet door and externally operate the circuit breaker via a variable depth shaft or a linear operator (Type MC). Each rotary type handle mechanism includes a handle, base operating mechanism and shaft that can be cut to various lengths. Series C Rotary and Universal Rotary handle mechanisms are for use with molded case circuit breakers (G, F, J, K, L, MDL), molded case switches and motor circuit protectors. Type 4/4X handles are similar to standard handles except they include an internal neoprene gasket. Type 4/4X handle style number is 6648C22G03. Due to gasketing effect between the handle and the housing, the handle may not indicate a tripped position.

Universal Rotary F-Frame Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms Direct (close-coupled) handle mechanisms mount directly to the circuit breaker. They are used in shallow enclosures where the standard variable depth Through-the-door type mechanism is not practical or cannot be used. They are typically for applications where high volume, standardized enclosures are being fabricated. The Euro IEC Direct handle mechanism can be used on F- through R-Frames. The G Direct is available with a black or the yellow handle, and with or without a shroud. It is suitable for use with NEMA 1 enclosures. It is for use only with the G-Frame (GD, GC, GHC, GMCP). An escutcheon ring and interlock clip are provided as standard. The standard design includes a lock-off feature.

Flange-Mounted Handle Mechanisms Flange-mounted handle mechanisms mount on the flange of an enclosure door. The Flex Shaft is an extra heavy-duty mechanism that includes a flexible shaft in various lengths, 3 feet (0.9m) through 10 feet (3m) for use with various size enclosures. The Flex Shaft handle will accept up to three padlock shackles, each with a maximum diameter of 3/8-inch (9.5 mm). Can be used with NEMA 1, 3R and 12 fabricated enclosures. An optional handle is available for Flex Shaft that is suitable for use with NEMA 4 and 4X environments. Flex Shaft comes preset from the factory, requiring only minor field adjustments on installation, which takes about 10 minutes—a significant time savings compared to installation of other types of flange handle mechanisms. The Flex Shaft mechanism also takes up less interior enclosure space than competitive designs and the handle fits standard flange cutouts. Flex Shaft handle can be remotely mounted from breaker, where an operator can use it by “funneling” the cable through conduit.

Type C371 is UL Listed under File E62635. Flex Shaft is UL Listed under File E64983 and meets CSA requirements. Series C Rotary and Universal Rotary, are UL Listed and meet CSA requirements. Universal Rotary also meets IEC 60947-1 and IEC 60947-2 for international compliance. Rotary UL File Number is E64983. The Universal Direct handle mechanism is UL 489 Listed, IEC 60947-1 and IEC 60947-2, and meets CSA requirements. The Euro IEC Direct handle mechanism is IEC-240-1. G Direct is UL Listed and meets CSA requirements.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

The Type C371 circuit breaker operating mechanisms are designed for installation in control enclosures where main or branch circuit protective devices are required. All circuit breaker mechanisms are suitable for right-hand mounting.

2 2 2 2

Auxiliary contacts are not available for mounting on operating mechanisms. Where required, have them installed in circuit breaker.

2 2 2

Handle Extension Handle extension is not included with J, K, L, M and N-Frame breakers. It must be purchased separately.

2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-431

2.7 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms

Description

Handle Mechanisms

Page

Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Mechanisms—Series C High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 2 2 2 2 2

V4-T2-418 V4-T2-419 V4-T2-424 V4-T2-426 V4-T2-427 V4-T2-432 V4-T2-433 V4-T2-435 V4-T2-436 V4-T2-438 V4-T2-440 V4-T2-442 V4-T2-445

2 2 2 2

High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms

2

Product Description

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

The high-performance rotary handle mechanism uses a simple, yet robust design to make installation and operation easy. The external handle’s key functional components are all metallic, ensuring reliability. The metalon-metal interface between the handle and shaft prevents contaminant buildup that could impede operation, while UV and chemical agent resistant materials protect the handle from heat and fading in direct sunlight, as well as chemicals that may be introduced in harsh environments.

Features In addition to its robust design features, the handle mechanism has stand-off support that allows for easy operation with a gloved hand. With a shallow profile, the handle can easily be used in applications where an internal or double door is required.

●

The high-performance external handle can accept padlocks or multi-hasp locks. The door is interlocked when padlocked and cannot be bypassed.

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2 2

● ●

2 2

NEMA Type 1/3R/12 (IP54) and NEMA Type 4/4X (IP65) ratings Black/Blue or Red/Yellow external handle colors Three shaft lengths—6, 12 and 24 inches, which can be cut to size to match enclosure depth Conveniently packaged as kit containing handle, shaft and mechanism Replacement parts are available separately Metallic functional components ensure reliability Metal-on-metal interface between handle and shaft UV and chemical agentresistant materials protect the handle Shallow profile Compatible with both Series C and Series G molded case circuit breakers and molded case switch platforms

2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-432

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

●

●

●

●

Same handle can be used on multiple frames sizes reducing the number of parts needed Red and yellow handles to designate emergency disconnecting means All handle mechanisms can accept padlocks or multihasp locks for added flexibility Fast, easy installation (see video on website for step-by-step instructions)

Standards and Certifications The mechanisms for EG, JG and LG breakers have an internal handle that can be operated independent of door position, and locked-out to meet one of the key NFPA requirements (NFPA® 79) and UL 508A disconnect requirements. ● ●

NEMA 1/3R/12, IP54 NEMA 4/4X, IP65

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms

2.7

Product Selection

2

Handle Mechanisms for Series C Frames

2 2

Kits Only (Kit Includes Shaft, Mechanism and Handle)—GC/GD- and GMCP-Frame Rating Type

S01 Blue Handle

S01 Red Handle

GC/GD-Frame

GMCP-Frame

IP

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Description

NEMA

S01 blue handle, 12-inch shaft

1/3R/12

54

GCHMVD12B / 68C6039G01

GMHMVD12B / 68C6039G05

4/4X

65

GCHMVD12BX / 68C6039G03

GMHMVD12BX / 68C6039G07

S01 red handle, 12-inch shaft

1/3R/12

54

GCHMVD12R / 68C6039G02

GMHMVD12R / 68C6039G06

4/4X

65

GCHMVD12RX / 68C6039G04

GMHMVD12RX / 68C6039G08

2 2 2 2 2 2

Separate Components for Series C Frames

2 2

Series C Components—Shaft and Mechanism Shaft Length

Frame

Shaft Width

6-Inch

10-Inch

GC/GD

6 mm

—

GMCP

6 mm

GD FD JD KD LD

12-Inch

Mechanism Only

2

—

66A6013H02

GCHMVD / 2A92095G15

—

—

66A6013H02

GMHMVD / 2A92095G16

2

8 mm

66A6010G95

—

66A6010G96

1498D34G90

8 mm

66A6010G95

—

66A6010G96

1498D34G91

10 mm

66A6012G15

—

66A6012G16

1498D34G92

10 mm

66A6012G15

—

66A6012G16

1498D34G93

10 mm

66A6012G15

—

66A6012G16

1498D34G94

MDL

10 mm

66A6012G15

—

66A6012G16

1498D34G95

ND

12 mm

—

66A6013H01

—

69D9101G30

RD

12 mm

—

66A6013H01

—

69D9101G31

2 2 2 2 2

Note Shaft guide (68C6048G49) is optional and can be used with any high-performance handle listed above for greater alignment tolerance.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-433

2.7 2 2 2

Rating Type Frame GC/GD

GMCP

2

GD

2

FD

JD

2 2

KD

2

LD

2

MDL

2

ND

2 2 2

Handle Mechanisms

Series C Components—Handles Only

2

2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

RD

Handles Only IP

S01 Blue/Black

S01 Red/Yellow

S2 Blue/Black

S2 Red/Yellow

S3 Blue/Black

S3 Red/Yellow

S4 Blue/Black

S4 Red/Yellow

1/3R/12

54

68C6048G41

68C6048G42

—

—

—

—

—

—

4/4X

65

68C6048G43

68C6048G44

—

—

—

—

—

— —

NEMA

1/3R/12

54

68C6048G41

68C6048G42

—

—

—

—

—

4/4X

65

68C6048G43

68C6048G44

—

—

—

—

—

—

1/3R/12

54

68C6048G41

68C6048G42

68C6048G01

68C6048G02

—

—

—

—

4/4X

65

68C6048G43

68C6048G44

68C6048G03

68C6048G04

—

—

—

—

1/3R/12

54

68C6048G41

68C6048G42

68C6048G01

68C6048G02

—

—

—

—

4/4X

65

68C6048G43

68C6048G44

68C6048G03

68C6048G04

—

—

—

—

1/3R/12

54

—

—

68C6048G01

68C6048G02

—

—

—

—

4/4X

65

—

—

68C6048G03

68C6048G04

—

—

—

—

1/3R/12

54

—

—

68C6048G01

68C6048G02

—

—

—

—

4/4X

65

—

—

68C6048G03

68C6048G04

—

—

—

—

1/3R/12

54

—

—

68C6048G01

68C6048G02

68C6048G05

68C6048G06

—

—

4/4X

65

—

—

68C6048G03

68C6048G04

68C6048G07

68C6048G08

—

—

1/3R/12

54

—

—

68C6048G01

68C6048G02

68C6048G05

68C6048G06

—

—

4/4X

65

—

—

68C6048G03

68C6048G04

68C6048G07

68C6048G08

—

—

1/3R/12

54

—

—

—

—

68C6048G05

68C6048G06

68C6048G09

68C6048G10

4/4X

65

—

—

—

—

68C6048G07

68C6048G08

68C6048G11

68C6048G12

1/3R/12

54

—

—

—

—

—

—

68C6048G09

68C6048G10

4/4X

65

—

—

—

—

—

—

68C6048G11

68C6048G12

Note Shaft guide (68C6048G49) is optional and can be used with any high-performance handle listed above for greater alignment tolerance.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-434

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms

2.7

Dimensions

2

Approximate Dimensions in mm (Inches)

2 High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms

2

Front Operation Handle Type

Direction of Operation

2

Door Drilling

Type S01

2 2 2 2 2 2

Type S2

2 2 2 2 2 2 Type S3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Type S4

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-435

2.7 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms

Contents

Handle Mechanisms

Description

2

Page

Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . Universal Rotary Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Mechanisms—Series C High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 2 2 2 2 2

V4-T2-418 V4-T2-419 V4-T2-426 V4-T2-427 V4-T2-432 V4-T2-436 V4-T2-437 V4-T2-438 V4-T2-440 V4-T2-442 V4-T2-445

2 2 2

Series C Rotary

2

Product Description

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Standards and Certifications

Eaton’s through-the-door handle mechanisms mount on the front of an enclosure or a cabinet door and externally operate the circuit breaker via a variable depth shaft or a linear operator (Type MC). Each rotary type handle mechanism includes a handle, a base operating mechanism and a shaft that can be cut to various lengths.

These rotary handles are robust and durable, made entirely of metal parts. It also has a lock-out tag-out level at the tip of the handle for padlocking.

Series C Rotary is UL listed and meets CSA requirements.

NEMA Type 4/4X handles are similar to standard handles except they include an internal neoprene gasket. NEMA Type 4/4X handle style number is 6648C22G03. Due to gasketing effect between the handle and the housing, the handle may not indicate a tripped position.

Series C Rotary handle mechanisms are used with molded case circuit breakers (F, J, K, L, MDL), molded case switches and motor circuit protectors.

2

Features

2

Features Comparison of Series C Rotary and Universal Rotary Handle Mechanism

2

Rotary

NEMA Enclosure Type Number Handle of Poles 1 3R 12 4/4X 1 Lock-Off 2

2

Series C rotary

—

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Metal

Black

45 deg.

6, 12, 16, 24

Universal rotary

—

■

—

■

—

■

■

■

Molded plastic

Yellow/Red/Black

90 deg.

6, 12, 24

2 2

International Handle Indication: Markings ON/OFF TRIPPED/RESET ON (I) OFF (O)

Notes 1 Type 4/4X application requires special handle. See “Ordering Information.” 2 All rotary handle mechanisms include a handle “Lock Off” to prevent turning the breaker ON while in the OFF position.

2 2 2 V4-T2-436

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Handle Material

Available Handle Colors

Handle Rotation

Shaft Lengths (Inches)

2.7

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms

Product Selection

2

Through-the-Door Handle Mechanisms Series C Rotary

2

Series C Rotary Ordering Information

2

Complete Catalog Number 1

Separate Catalog Number Standard Handle 2

Breaker Mechanism 3

Shaft 4

IEC IP65 56

IEC IP66 56

6.00 (152.4)

HM1R06

6648C22G25

6648C23G11

4217B37G08

WHM1R06

WHM1R06X

12.00 (304.8)

HM1R12

6648C22G25

6648C23G11

4217B37G05

WHM1R12

WHM1R12X

16.00 (406.4)

HM1R16

6648C22G25

6648C23G11

4217B37G06

WHM1R16

WHM1R16X

24.00 (609.6)

HM1R24

6648C22G25

6648C23G11

4217B37G07

WHM1R24

WHM1R24X

2

6.00 (152.4)

HM2R06

6648C22G01

6648C23G21

4217B37G08

WHM2R06

WHM2R06X

2

12.00 (304.8)

HM2R12

6648C22G01

6648C23G21

4217B37G05

WHM2R12

WHM2R12X

16.00 (406.4)

HM2R16

6648C22G01

6648C23G21

4217B37G06

WHM2R16

WHM2R16X

24.00 (609.6)

HM2R24

6648C22G01

6648C23G21

4217B37G07

WHM2R24

WHM2R24X

2

6.00 (152.4)

HM3R06

6648C22G01

6648C23G25

4217B37G08

WHM3R06

WHM3R06X

2

12.00 (304.8)

HM3R12

6648C22G01

6648C23G25

4217B37G05

WHM3R12

WHM3R12X

16.00 (406.4)

HM3R16

6648C22G01

6648C23G25

4217B37G06

WHM3R16

WHM3R16X

24.00 (609.6)

HM3R24

6648C22G01

6648C23G25

4217B37G07

WHM3R24

WHM3R24X

6.00 (152.4)

HM4R06

6648C22G11

6648C23G19

4217B37G08

WHM4R06

WHM4R06X

12.00 (304.8)

HM4R12

6648C22G11

6648C23G19

4217B37G05

WHM4R12

WHM4R12X

16.00 (406.4)

HM4R16

6648C22G11

6648C23G19

4217B37G06

WHM4R16

WHM4R16X

24.00 (609.6)

HM4R24

6648C22G11

6648C23G19

4217B37G07

WHM4R24

WHM4R24X

2

6.00 (152.4)

HM7R06

6648C22G21

6648C23G17

4217B37G08

—

—

12.00 (304.8)

HM7R12

6648C22G21

6648C23G17

4217B37G05

—

—

2

16.00 (406.4)

HM7R16

6648C22G21

6648C23G17

4217B37G06

—

—

24.00 (609.6)

HM7R24

6648C22G21

6648C23G17

4217B37G07

—

—

Shaft Length Inches (mm)

Catalog Number

F-Frame

J-Frame

K-Frame

L- and MDL-Frame

MD/MDS

2 2 2

2

2 2 2 2

2 2

N-Frame (ND and NG) 6.00 (152.4)

HM5R06

6648C22G21

6648C23G08

4217B37G08

WHM5R06

WHM5R06X

12.00 (304.8)

HM5R12

6648C22G21

6648C23G08

4217B37G05

WHM5R12

WHM5R12X

16.00 (406.4)

HM5R16

6648C22G21

6648C23G08

4217B37G06

WHM5R16

WHM5R16X

24.00 (609.6)

HM5R24

6648C22G21

6648C23G08

4217B37G07

WHM5R24

WHM5R24X

Notes 1 Complete catalog number includes the standard handle, mechanism, shaft and support brace/bracket. 2 Handle is designed suitable for NEMA Types 1, 3R and 12 enclosures. Use style number 6648C22G03 for Type 4/4X handle or add X Suffix to complete catalog number. Handle is cast aluminum. 3 Breaker mechanism includes a shaft support bracket and its parts. Shaft is.50-inch (12.7 mm). 4 Longer shafts,16-inch (406.4 mm) and 24-inch (609.6 mm), include an adjustable support extension. 5 IEC handle mechanism supplied with metric thread mounting hardware. 6 Complete catalog number includes a handle, mechanism and shaft.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-437

2.7 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms

Contents

Handle Mechanisms

Description

2

Page

Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . Universal Rotary Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Mechanisms—Series C High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 2 2 2 2 2

V4-T2-418 V4-T2-419 V4-T2-425 V4-T2-426 V4-T2-427 V4-T2-432 V4-T2-436 V4-T2-438 V4-T2-439 V4-T2-440 V4-T2-442 V4-T2-445

2 2 2

Universal Rotary

2

Product Description

2 2 2 2 2 2

Standards and Certifications

Eaton’s Universal Rotary is suitable for use with Type 1 or 12 enclosure types. All rotary handle mechanisms include a handle “lock off” to prevent turning the breaker ON while in the OFF position, and indicate ON/OFF/Tripped/ Reset positions. The Universal Rotary has the added feature of international markings for ON (I) and OFF (O). The Universal Rotary is made of molded material.

The Universal Rotary mechanisms for EG-, JG- and LG-Frame MCCBs can be operated by hand with the door open or “locked off” to prevent operation with the door open.

Universal Rotary is UL listed and meets CSA requirements. Universal Rotary also meets IEC 60947-1 and IEC 60947-2 for international compliance. Rotary UL File Number is E64983.

2 2

Features

2

Features Comparison of Series C Rotary and Universal Rotary Handle Mechanism

2 2 2 2

Rotary

NEMA Enclosure Type Number Handle of Poles 1 3R 12 4/4X 1 Lock-Off 2

Series C rotary

—

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Metal

Black

45 deg.

6, 12, 16, 24

Universal rotary

—

■

—

■

—

■

■

■

Molded plastic

Yellow/Red/Black

90 deg.

6, 12, 24

International Handle Indication: Markings ON/OFF TRIPPED/RESET ON (I) OFF (O)

Notes 1 Type 4/4X application requires special handle. See “Ordering Information.” 2 All rotary handle mechanisms include a handle “Lock Off” to prevent turning the breaker ON while in the OFF position.

2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-438

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Handle Material

Available Handle Colors

Handle Rotation

Shaft Lengths (Inches)

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms

2.7

Product Selection

2

Universal Rotary F-Frame

2

Universal Rotary F-Frame

2

Series C Universal Rotary 1 Handle Color

Shaft Length in Inches (mm)

Complete Catalog Number

2

G-Frame Black

Red

2

6.00 (152.4)

GHMVD06B

12.00 (304.8)

GHMVD12B

6.00 (152.4)

GHMVD06R

12.00 (304.8)

GHMVD12R

2 2

2

F-Frame Black

Red

6.00 (152.4)

FHMVD06B

12.00 (304.8)

FHMVD12B

6.00 (152.4)

FHMVD06R

12.00 (304.8)

FHMVD12R

24.00 (609.6)

FHMVD24R

6.00 (152.4)

JHMVD06B

12.00 (304.8)

JHMVD12B

6.00 (152.4)

JHMVD06R

12.00 (304.8)

JHMVD12R

6.00 (152.4)

KHMVD06B

12.00 (304.8)

KHMVD12B

6.00 (152.4)

KHMVD06R

12.00 (304.8)

KHMVD12R

2

6.00 (152.4)

LHMVD06B

2

12.00 (304.8)

LHMVD12B

6.00 (152.4)

LHMVD06R

12.00 (304.8)

LHMVD12R

2 2 2

J-Frame Black

Red

2 2 2

K-Frame Black

Red

2

L-Frame Black

Red

2 2 2

Note 1 Only available as complete handle mechanism. Parts not sold separately.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-439

2.7 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms

Contents

Handle Mechanisms

Description

2

Page

Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Mechanisms—Series C High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 2 2 2 2

V4-T2-418 V4-T2-419 V4-T2-424 V4-T2-427 V4-T2-432 V4-T2-436 V4-T2-440 V4-T2-441 V4-T2-442 V4-T2-445

2 2 2 2

Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms

2

Product Description

2 2 2 2

Direct (close-coupled) handle mechanisms mount directly to the circuit breaker. They are used in shallow enclosures where the standard variable depth Through-the-door type mechanism is not practical or cannot be used.

2

The Universal Direct handle mechanisms are rated Type 1 and Type 12. The Universal Direct handle mechanism is available as standard with a door interlock to prevent opening the enclosure while the circuit breaker is in the ON position. It is also available without a door interlock.

Application Description

Standards and Certifications

Direct (close-coupled) handle mechanisms are typically used for applications where high volume, standardized enclosures are being fabricated.

The Universal Direct handle mechanism is IEC 60947-1 and IEC 60947-2 compliant.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-440

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms

2.7

Product Selection

2

Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms

2 2

Euro IEC Direct Black Handle Frame

Catalog Number

F

HMCC1B

J

HMCC2B

K

HMCC3B

L and M

HMCC4B

N

HMVD5B

R

HMVD6B

2 2 2 2 2 2

G Direct 1 Black Handle

2

Yellow Handle

With Shroud

Without Shroud

With Shroud

Without Shroud

Frame

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

GD/GHC

HRGCC1S

HRGCC10

HRGCC3S

HRGCC30

GMCP

HRGMC1S

HRGMC10

HRGMC3S

HRGMC30

2 2 2

Note 1 Suitable for use on two- or three-pole G-Frame.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-441

2.7 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms

Contents

Handle Mechanisms

Description

2

Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . Flex Shaft Handle Mechanisms—Series C High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Flex Shaft

2

Product Description

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Flange-Mounted Handle Mechanisms Flange-mounted handle mechanisms mount on the flange of an enclosure door. The Flex Shaft is an extra heavy-duty mechanism that includes a flexible shaft in various lengths, 3 feet (0.9m) through 10 feet (3m) for use with various size enclosures. The Flex Shaft handle will accept up to three padlock shackles, each with a maximum diameter of 3/8 inches (9.5 mm). It can be used with Type12 fabricated enclosures. An optional handle is available for Flex Shaft that is suitable for use with Type 4 environments.

Standards and Certifications Flex Shaft comes preset from the factory, requiring only minor field adjustments on installation, which takes about 10 minutes—a significant time savings compared to installation of other types of flange handle mechanisms. The Flex Shaft mechanism also takes up less interior enclosure space than competitive designs, and the handle fits standard flange cutouts. Flex Shaft handle can be remotely mounted from breaker, where an operator can use it by “funneling” the cable through conduit.

Flex Shaft is UL listed under File E64983 and meets CSA requirements.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-442

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Page V4-T2-418 V4-T2-419 V4-T2-424 V4-T2-426 V4-T2-432 V4-T2-436 V4-T2-440 V4-T2-442 V4-T2-443 V4-T2-445

2.7

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms

Product Selection

2

Handle Mechanisms

2

Flex Shaft 12

2

Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m) 3 (0.9)

4 (1.2)

5 (1.5)

6 (1.8)

7 (2.1)

8 (2.4)

9 (2.7)

10 (3.0)

Breaker Frame

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

G1

F0S03C

F0S04C

F0S05C

F0S06C

—

—

—

—

F

F1S03C

F1S04C

F1S05C

F1S06C

F1S07C

F1S08C

F1S09C

F1S10C

F (dual)

F1S03CD

F1S04CD

F1S05CD

F1S06CD

F1S07CD

F1S08CD

F1S09CD

F1S10CD

J

F2S03C

F2S04C

F2S05C

F2S06C

F2S07C

F2S08C

F2S09C

F2S10C

K

F3S03C

F3S04C

F3S05C

F3S06C

F3S07C

F3S08C

F3S09C

F3S10C

L and MDL

—

F4S04C

F4S05C

F4S06C

—

—

—

F4S10C

N

—

F5S04C

F5S05C

F5S06C

—

—

—

F5S10C

R

—

F6S04

F6S05

F6S06

—

—

—

—

MD, MDS (old)

—

F7S04

F7S05

F7S06

—

—

—

F7S10C

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

High Performance Flex Shaft 12 Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m)

2

3 (0.9)

4 (1.2)

5 (1.3)

6 (1.8)

7 (2.1)

8 (2.4)

9 (2.7)

10 (3.1)

Breaker Frame

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

G

F0S03HP

F0S04HP

F0S05HP

F0S06HP

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

F

F1S03HP

F1S04HP

F1S05HP

F1S06HP

F1S07HP

F1S08HP

F1S09HP

F1S10HP

F (dual)

F1S03HPD

F1S04HPD

F1S05HPD

F1S06HPD

F1S07HPD

F1S08HPD

F1S09HPD

F1S10HPD

J

F2S03HP

F2S04HP

F2S05HP

F2S06HP

F2S07HP

F2S08HP

F2S09HP

F2S10HP

K

F3S03HP

F3S04HP

F3S05HP

F3S06HP

F3S07HP

F3S08HP

F3S09HP

F3S10HP

L and MDL

N/A

F4S04HP

F4S05HP

F4S06HP

N/A

N/A

N/A

F4S10HP

N

N/A

F5S04HP

F5S05HP

F5S06HP

N/A

N/A

N/A

F5S10HP

R

N/A

F6S04HP

F6S05HP

F6S06HP

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

2 2 2 2 2

Flange-Mounted Handle Mechanisms

2

Type C371

2 Operating Mechanism w/ 4-Inch Handle

Circuit Breaker or Motor Circuit Protector

Frame Size

Variable Depth Mounting Range Min./Max. 23

Operating Mechanism Only 4

For NEMA 1–12 Enclosure

For NEMA 4/4X Enclosure

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

HMCP and Series C—EHD, FDB, FD, FDC, HFD, ED

150

6.50–16 (165.1–406.4)

C371E

C371E1

C371E2

HMCP and Series C—HJD, JD, JDB, JDC

250

6.50–16.63 (165.1–422.4)

C371F

C371F5

C371F6

HMCP and Series C—DK, HKD, KD, KDB

400

6.50–16.63 (165.1–422.4)

C371F

C371F5

C371F6

Series C—HLD, LD, LDC

600

8.50–22 (215.9–558.8)

C371G

C371G5

C371G6

Series C MD, MDS—(No MDL)

800

8.75–22 (222.3–558.8)

C371K

C371K5

C371K6

Series C—HND, ND, NDC

1200

9.75–22 (247.7–558.8)

C371K

C371K5

C371K6

Notes 1 Suitable for GC/GD MCCB; not suitable for GMCP. 2 For increased maximum allowable depth, see connecting rods on Page V4-T2-444. 3 Dimensions shown are from panel flange surface. 4 Does not include handle.

Type 4/4X handle mechanisms are available. Add Suffix X to complete catalog number. Add Suffix I to complete catalog number for IEC handle. Original narrow handle design (No C Suffix) is available. Remove C from catalog number.

2 2 2 2 2 2

When selecting the length of shaft, ensure minimum bending radius of 4 inches (101.6 mm) (5 inches, 12.7 mm for L-, N- and R-Frames) is maintained to operate properly. The standard method of shipment includes the mechanism preset at the factory; however, minor field adjustments may be required. Dual breakers operator available on F-Frame only. Only the F, J and K can mount LH and RH all other RH only.

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

2

2 2 2 2 V4-T2-443

2.7 2 2 2

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Handle Only Circuit Breaker Frame Size (Amperes)

NEMA Enclosure Type

150

Operating Handle Length

Catalog Number

1/3R/3/12

4.00 (101.6)

C371H1

2

4/4X

4.00 (101.6)

C371H2

1/3R/3/12

6.00 (152.4)

C371H3

2

4/4X

6.00 (152.4)

C371H4

1/3R/3/12

4.00 (101.6)

C371H5

4/4X

4.00 (101.6)

C371H6

1/3R/3/12

6.00 (152.4)

C371H7

4/4X

6.00 (152.4)

C371H8

2

2

250–1200

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Channel Support Kit (Rod Not Supplied) For use to prevent bending of the operating handle mounting surface. This is especially useful when the operating handle is mounted on a channel in a multi-door enclosure. Amperes

Catalog Number

600–1200

C371CS6

Connecting Rods 1

2

Application

Catalog Number

Disconnect switches (30, 60, 100, 200 A sizes)

C371CS1

2

Circuit breakers (150, 250, 400 A sizes)

C371CS1

Circuit breakers (600, 800, 1200 A sizes)

C371CS2

2 2

Note 1 Increase maximum allowable depth by 5 inches (127 mm).

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-444

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms

2.7

Contents

Handle Extension

Description Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . Flex Shaft Handle Mechanisms—Series C High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . Series C Rotary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page

2

V4-T2-418 V4-T2-419 V4-T2-424 V4-T2-426

2

2 2

V4-T2-432 V4-T2-436 V4-T2-440 V4-T2-442 V4-T2-443 V4-T2-445

2 2 2 2 2 2

Handle Extension

2

Product Description

2

●

●

●

Suitable for use on two- or three-pole G-Frame Not included with J, K, L, M and N-Frame breakers; it must be purchased separately Included with R-Frame breakers

2 2 2 2 2

Product Selection Handle Extension

2 Handle Extension 12 Frame

Style Number

J, K

HEX3

L, M

HEX4

N

HEX5

R

HEX6

2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Handle extension is not included with J, K, L, M and N-Frame breakers. It must be purchased separately. 2 Handle extension is included with breaker with R-Frame breakers.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T2-445

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Family

3.1

Power Circuit Breakers Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magnum DS Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magnum MDSL Current Limiting Power Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated Case Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . Magnum IEC Rated Air Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magnum DC (Direct Current) Low Voltage Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series NRX Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Medium Voltage Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2

V4-T3-23 V4-T3-33 V4-T3-35 V4-T3-42

V4-T3-59 V4-T3-61 V4-T3-70 V4-T3-74

V4-T3-78 V4-T3-78 V4-T3-78 V4-T3-78 V4-T3-79 V4-T3-79 V4-T3-79

Expulsion Fuses Product Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5

V4-T3-15

Fuses General Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power vs. Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low vs. Medium vs. High Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expulsion vs. Current Limiting (Definitions per ANSI C47.40-1993). . . Fuse Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Fuse Component Terms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4

V4-T3-6 V4-T3-12

Medium Voltage Power Contactors Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SL MV Power Contactor 7.2 kV/160–400A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SL MV Power Contactor 7.2 kV/800A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SL MV Power Contactor 15 kV/300A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.3

V4-T3-2

V4-T3-81 V4-T3-81 V4-T3-82 V4-T3-83

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Current Limiting Fuses Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

V4-T3-102 V4-T3-104

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-1

3.1 3

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

Contents

Power Circuit Breaker

Description

3

Page

Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers Features, Benefits and Functions . . . . . . . . . . Magnum DS Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magnum MDSL Current Limiting Power Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magnum IEC Rated Air Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . Magnum DC (Direct Current) Low Voltage Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series NRX Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . Medium Voltage Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 3 3 3 3 3

V4-T3-3 V4-T3-6 V4-T3-12 V4-T3-15 V4-T3-23 V4-T3-33 V4-T3-35 V4-T3-42

3 3 3

Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

3

Product Overview

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Magnum Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers for Global Application Magnum® low voltage power circuit breakers enable comprehensive solutions to meet and exceed the unique and wide-ranging requirements of today’s global power distribution systems. This powerful circuit breaker offering is designed for ultimate custom configuration and application flexibility, with the needs of the power distribution equipment user and the electrical equipment manufacturer in mind.

3

Four Product Families Magnum consists of four product families; each provides specific ratings, features and approvals to optimize performance when applied in power distribution equipment and custom enclosures.

Magnum DS Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers for ANSI Rated Switchgear Applications ● ● ●

Up to 635 Vac 200 to 5000A continuous 42 to 200 kA interrupting

Magnum IEC Air Circuit Breakers for IEC Rated Switchboards ● ● ●

Magnum DS Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Family ANSI Rated for Switchgear Applications

Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated Case Circuit Breakers for Switchboard Applications

Magnum IEC Low Voltage Air Circuit Breaker Family

Magnum DC Switches for Direct Current Applications ●

3

● ●

3

●

Up to 635 Vac 200 to 5000A continuous 50 to 150 kA interrupting

Up to 690 Vac 200 to 6300A continuous 40 to 105 kA Icu/Ics

● ●

Up to 1000 Vdc 800 to 3200A continuous 50 to 65 kA withstand rating

3 3 3

Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated Case Circuit Breaker Family UL Rated for Switchboard Applications

3 3 3 V4-T3-2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

Magnum DC Switch Family

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

3.1

Features, Benefits and Functions ●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

200 kA interruption ratings with current limiting performance and low current let-through to reduce damaging energy to downstream equipment at high fault levels Withstand ratings up to 100 kA to maximize system coordination and selectivity Four physical frame sizes (Narrow, Standard, Double Narrow and Double) to promote breaker application in compact modular enclosures and improve enclosure density Continuous current ratings from 800 to 6300A with 100% rating at 104ºF (40ºC) and no derating on most ratings up to 122ºF (50ºC) Fixed breaker mounting configurations with horizontal and optional vertical and front connected terminal connections Drawout breaker mounting configurations with cassette and optional safety shutters Three- and four-pole breaker configurations Through-the-door design for human interface with the breaker compartment door closed DC rated switches for direct current applications

●

●

Two-step stored energy mechanism for manually and electrical operated breakers Digitrip™ RMS Trip Unit family protection with four models each providing increasing levels of protection and feature options for coordination, information and diagnostics: ● Microprocessor-based rms sensing ● Basic to programmable overcurrent protection and alarms ● Local display for information, status and diagnostics ● Ampere, voltage and power metering ● Power quality, harmonics and waveform capture ● Communications with translators to common protocols ● Zone selective interlocking for improved coordination ● Integral Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System™ ● Breaker health monitoring

●

●

●

Field-installable accessories (UL® listed) common across the breaker frames and designed to be easily installed in the field to service or modify the breaker at the point of use Secondary terminal contacts mounted at the top front of the breaker and away from the primary voltage areas for improved safety and access. Fingersafe terminal blocks accommodate ring-tongue or spade type terminals as standard Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System (ARMS) Eaton’s patented ARMS technology provides maintenance staff with improved safety of downstream maintenance locations using a simple and reliable method to reduce fault clearing times and energy during an arc flash event (radiation, sound, pressure, temperature). ARMS uses a separate analog trip circuit, providing faster signal processing and interruption times than the standard (digital) “instantaneous” protection. The ARMS function is activated either directly on the circuit breaker through a local switch or remotely through communications or a digital input

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Through-the-Door Design for Human Interface with the Breaker Compartment Door Closed

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

High Technology MicroprocessorBased Digitrip RMS 1150+ Trip Units are Available With Advanced Features Like Programmable Overcurrent Settings, Power Metering, Power Quality and Communications

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-3

3.1 3 3 3 3 3 3

1

3 2

3

3

3 3 3 3

3

Digitrip RMS Trip Unit (Model 520M Shown) Protected by Clear Cover

4

Contact Status Indicators: ● ●

5

●

Charged—Yellow Discharged—White

7

Push ON (Close) Pushbutton—Green

3

8

Manual Spring Charging Handle for Manually Charging the Stored Energy Springs

9

Mechanical Operations Counter (Optional)

j

Key Off Lock (Optional)

3

3 3 3

5 6 7

8

9 j

k

l

k l

OPEN—Green CLOSED—Red

3

3

4

Spring Status Indicators: ●

3

3

2

Accessory Viewing Windows for:

Push OFF (Open) Pushbutton—Red

3

1

Red Mechanical Trip Flag Pop-out Indicator (Optional)—Interlocked Indicator Requiring Manual Reset is also Available

6

3

3

Shunt Trip Attachment (STA) ● Spring Release Device (SR) ● Undervoltage Release (UVR) Device or Second STA

3

3

Magnum DS Drawout Breaker

●

3

3

Power Circuit Breakers

Breaker Features on Front Cover The controls and indicators are functionally grouped on the breaker faceplate to optimize the human interface, visibility and ease of use. For maximum safety, a modern, through-the-door design permits access to the breaker levering system, trip unit, controls and indicators with the door closed.

3 3

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses

Accessory Viewing Windows Visibly Confirm the Breaker Shunt Trip, Spring Release, and UVR Installation and Their Control Voltage Rating

Drawout Breaker Levering Can be Accomplished With the Compartment Door Closed Without the Need for a Special Levering Tool Through-the-Door Design for Human Interface with the Breaker Compartment Door Closed, for Example, Manually Charging the Stored Energy Springs

Padlockable Levering Device Shutter for Drawout Breakers Color-Coded Position Indicator for Drawout Breakers: CONNECT—Red TEST—Yellow ● DISCONNECT—Green ● ●

V4-T3-4

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

Breaker Internal Features Magnum is designed for ease of access for inspection, modification and maintenance at the point of use. The breaker front cover is easily removed with four captive bolts, revealing the modular internal breaker features. 1

2

Secondary Terminal Points for Internal Breaker Wiring Connections Breaker Accessory Mounting Deck with Three Positions for Mounting: Shunt Trip Attachment (STA) ● Spring Release Device (SR) ● Undervoltage Release (UVR) Device or Second STA

6

7

4

5

Manual Spring Charging Handle for Manually Charging the Stored Energy Springs

3 2

Color-Coded Position Indicator for Drawout Breakers:

8

Secondary Contact Blocks for Connection to External Cell Control Wiring

9

Removable Arc Chute Covers for Easy Access to Breaker Main Contacts

j

Primary Finger Cluster Disconnecting Contacts for Drawout Breaker are Mounted on the Breaker Element (Not in the Breaker Compartment) for Ease of Access for Inspection and Maintenance

Note: Some competitors mount the primary finger clusters inside the cell, requiring shutdown of the switchgear for inspection and maintenance. k

l

3 3

CONNECT—Red ● TEST—Yellow ● DISCONNECT—Green

Digitrip RMS Trip Unit (Model 1150+ Shown) Spring Charging Motor (Optional) for Electrically Charging the Stored Energy Springs

3

1

●

●

3

3

Padlockable Levering Device Shutter for Drawout Breakers

3.1

3 3 3 5

3 3 3

4 7

3

6

3

Magnum Drawout Breaker Front View With Front Cover Removed Showing Easy Access to the Breaker Internal Devices

3

8

3 3 3

Current Sensor Viewing Windows to View and Confirm Breaker Sensor Rating

9

3 3

Rigid Frame Housing (Thermoset Composite Resin) Providing Increased Strength and Durability

3 3 3 3 3 3 j

k

3

l

Magnum Drawout Breaker Rear View Showing Primary Disconnecting Finger Clusters Mounted on the Breaker for Ease of Inspection

3 3 3 3 3

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-5

3.1 3

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

Contents

Magnum DS, MDSX and MDSL Circuit Breakers

Description

3

Page

Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . Magnum DS Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Magnum MDSL Current Limiting Power Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magnum IEC Rated Air Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . Magnum DC (Direct Current) Low Voltage Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series NRX Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . Medium Voltage Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 3 3 3 3 3 3

V4-T3-2

V4-T3-7 V4-T3-10 V4-T3-12 V4-T3-15 V4-T3-23 V4-T3-33 V4-T3-35 V4-T3-42

3 3

Magnum DS Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

3

Product Description

Standards and Certifications

Magnum DS is a true UL 1066 listed low voltage power circuit breaker family, designed for the highest performance requirements of switchgear and specialty enclosure applications.

UL and ANSI Test Certifications Magnum DS meets or exceeds the applicable ANSI, NEMA®, UL and CSA® standards, including:

3 3 3 3

●

3 3 3 3

●

3 3 3 3 3

●

Magnum DS low voltage power circuit breakers have interruption ratings up to 200 kA at 480 Vac, and short-time withstand ratings up to 100 kA at 635 Vac with continuous current ratings up to 5000A to maximize system coordination and selectivity Magnum MDSX current limiting power circuit breakers have 200 kA interruption ratings at 480 Vac with continuous current ratings up to 5000A Magnum MDSL current limiting power circuit breakers have 200 kA interruption ratings at 600 Vac with continuous current ratings up to 2000A

3

●

The Magnum MDSL current limiting power circuit breakers have integral current limiters to provide interruption ratings of 200 kA at 600 Vac.

●

●

●

The Magnum MDSX current limiting power circuit breakers have fast opening contacts to provide interruption ratings up to 200 kA at 480 Vac without fuses.

●

●

3

ANSI C37.13 (Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures) ANSI C37.16 (Preferred Ratings, Related Requirements, and Application Recommendations for Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers and AC Power Circuit Breakers) ANSI C37.17 (Trip Devices for AC and General Purpose DC Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers) ANSI C37.50 (Test Procedures for Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures) UL 1066 (Standard for Low Voltage AC and DC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures) NEMA SG3 (This standard adopts ANSI C37.16 in its entirety)

Comprehensive Enclosure Solutions Magnum DS has proven performance in Eaton manufactured switchgear with the following test certifications: ●

●

●

UL 1558 (Certified Magnum DS Low Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear) UL 1008 Standard for Transfer Switch Equipment UL, CSA 22.2.31 Low Voltage Assemblies

Approvals and Marks ● UL listed: Magnum DS Breaker UL File No. E52096 and Cassette UL File No. E204565 ● ABS (American Bureau of Shipping) Type Listed Certificate Number 04-HS422844A-DUB ● Additional Magnum DS approvals and certificates can be found on www.eaton.com

3 Product Selection

3

Contact Eaton for pricing.

3 V4-T3-6

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

3.1

Catalog Number Selection

3

Magnum DS ANSI Breaker Product Family

3

MD S 4 12 3 V E A 06 MU Breaker Type MD = Magnum DS Frame Type S = Standard or double N = Narrow or double narrow D = MDDX only E = High endurance Interrupting/ Withstand Rating 4 = 42 5 = 50 6 = 65 8 = 85 C = 100 H = 130 (DSH) E = 150 (DSE) X = 200 (DSX/DDX) L = 200 (DSL) Continuous Amperes and Phasing (Facing Front of Breaker) 08 = 800 ABC 12 = 1200 ABC 16 = 1600 ABC 20 = 2000 ABC 25 = 2500 ABC 30 = 3000 ABC 32 = 3200 ABC or ABCABC 3N = 3200 AABBCC 4N = 4000 AABBCC 5N = 5000 AABBCC 40 = 4000 ABCABC 50 = 5000 ABCABC

Mounting Configuration and Load Terminals H = Fixed horizontal V = Fixed vertical L = Drawout (MDN) W = Drawout (MDS) Poles and Neutral (Facing Front of Breaker) 3 = Three 4 = Four (neutral left)

Nameplate Language E = English A = Spanish

Current Limiter Selection A = Non-DSL (no limiter) D = MA250 E = MA300 F = MA400 G = MA600 H = MA800 K = MB1200 L = MB1600 M = MB2000 N = MD2500 P = MD3000 Sensor and Rating Plug Rating NN = None 01 = 100 13 = 1250 02 = 200 16 = 1600 05 = 250 20 = 2000 03 = 300 25 = 2500 04 = 400 30 = 3000 06 = 600 32 = 3200 08 = 800 40 = 4000 10 = 1000 50 = 5000 12 = 1200

3 Trip Unit and Protection, and External Control Voltage When Required NN = Non-automatic (no trip unit) 52 = 520 LSI 5G = 520 LSIG M2 = 520M LSI MT = 520M LSI (24/48 Vdc) MU = 520M LSI (120 Vac) MV = 520M LSI (240 Vac) MQ = 520M LSI (125 Vdc) MG = 520M LSIG MH = 520M LSIG (24/48 Vdc) MM = 520M LSIG (120 Vac) MN = 520 LSIG (240 Vac) MX = 520M LSIG (125 Vdc) ME = 520M LSIA (24/48 Vdc) MC = 520 LSIA (120 Vac) MF = 520M LSIA (240 Vac) MZ = 520M LSIA (125 Vdc) CT = 520MC LSI (24/48 Vdc) CU = 520MC LSI (120 Vac) CV = 520MC LSI (240 Vac) CQ = 520MC LSI (125 Vdc) CH = 520MC LSIG (24/48 Vdc) CM = 520MC LSIG (120 Vac) CN = 520MC LSIG (240 Vac) CX = 520MC LSIG (125 Vdc) CE = 520MC LSIA (24/48 Vdc) CC = 520MC LSIA (120 Vac) CF = 520MC LSIA (240 Vac) CY = 520MC LSIA (125 Vdc) 1A = 1150 LSI (24/48 Vdc) 1C = 1150 LSI (120 Vac) 1E = 1150 LSI (240 Vac) 1Q = 1150 LSI (125 Vdc) 1F = 1150 LSIG (24/48 Vdc) 1G = 1150 LSIG (120 Vac) 1H = 1150 LSIG (240 Vac) 1X = 1150 LSIG (125 Vdc) 1J = 1150 LSIA (24/48 Vdc) 1K = 1150 LSIA (120 Vac) 1M = 1150 LSIA (240 Vac) 1Y = 1150 LSIA (125 Vdc)

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-7

3.1 3

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

Magnum DS ANSI Breaker Product Family, continued

A W C H N E H K L A X

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Shunt Trip (ST) N = None A = 110–127 Vac/Vdc R = 208–240 Vac/Vdc C = 24 Vdc H = 48 Vdc B = 110–127 Vac/Vdc (100% duty) S = 220–250 Vac/Vdc (100% duty) D = 24 Vdc (100% duty) K = 48 Vdc (100% duty) J = 60 Vdc (100% duty) 6 = 60 Vdc Motor Operator M = Manual operated N = 110–125 Vac (5-sec) W = 110–125 Vdc (5-sec) T = 220–250 Vdc (5-sec) P = 208–277 Vac (5-sec) L = 24 Vdc (5-sec) K = 48 Vdc (5-sec) S = 60 Vdc (5-sec) 1 = 110–125 Vac (3-sec) 2 = 220–250 Vac (3-sec) 4 = 24 Vdc (3-sec) 8 = 48 Vdc (3-sec) 5 = 110–125 Vdc (3-sec) 9 = 220–250 Vdc (3-sec)

3

Spring Release Device (SRD) N = None A = 110–127 Vac/Vdc R = 208–240 Vac/Vdc C = 24 Vdc H = 48 Vdc S = 60 Vdc

3 3 3

N A R C H D E F G X J K 1 2 3 4 6 B O I Q 9

Undervoltage Release (UVR) or 2nd Shunt Trip (ST) = None = UVR (110–127 Vac) = UVR (208–240 Vac) = UVR (24 Vdc) = UVR (48 Vdc) = UVR (60 Vdc) = UVR (110–125 Vdc) = UVR (220–250 Vdc) = UVR (32 Vdc) = UVR (380–415 Vac) = UVR (480 Vac) = UVR (600 Vac) = 2nd ST (110–127 Vac/Vdc) = 2nd ST (208–250 Vac/Vdc) = 2nd ST (24 Vdc) = 2nd ST (48 Vdc) = 2nd ST (60 Vdc) = 2nd ST (110–127 Vac/Vdc 100% duty) = 2nd ST (220–250 Vac/Vdc 100% duty) = 2nd ST (24 Vdc 100% duty) = 2nd ST (48 Vdc 100% duty) = 2nd ST (60 Vdc 100% duty)

Auxiliary Switch N = None 2 = 2A/2B 4 = 4A/4B 6 = 6A/6B

E = N = Y = M= L = F = G = H = I = J = K =

Bell Alarms Switch (OTS) with 2a/2b Contacts and/or Mechanical Trip Indicator Mech. Mech. OTS Trip Interlock Switch Indicator for with Two Manual Form C Reset Contacts No — No Yes No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes with 24V reset Yes No Yes with 120V reset Yes No Yes with 240V reset Yes Yes Yes with 24V reset Yes Yes Yes with 120V reset Yes Yes Yes with 240V reset

3

Padlock Provisions for Blocking Close and/or Open ACB Manual Pushbuttons N = None M = Metal (block close and open) P = Plastic (block close and open) C = Metal (block close only) H = Plastic (block close only) S = Metal swbd lock-off (block close, depress open)

N K C R S A Y L H E

= = = = = = = = = =

Operations Counter and/or Keylock Provisions Counter Keylock Provisions No counter No locks No counter Kirk lock No counter Castell lock No counter Ronis lock No counter CES lock Counter No lock Counter Kirk lock Counter Castell lock Counter Ronis lock indicator Counter CES lock

Latch Check Switch/Trip Unit Metering Voltage Connection for Digitrip 1150 Trip Unit Latch Check 1150 Voltage Switch Connection N= Upper terminals None M = None Lower terminals L = Upper terminals LCS wired to SRD Y= LCS Wired to SRD Lower terminals C= LCS Wired External Upper terminals LCS Wired External Lower terminals D= Breaker Shipping Options and Instructions A = Fixed breaker alone with door kit F = Fixed breaker alone without door kit A = Drawout breaker alone without door frame kit C = Drawout breaker in cassette (un-wired) P = Drawout breaker in cassette (shutters) S = Drawout breaker in cassette (shutters) W = Drawout breaker in cassette (pre-wired and shutters) Double frame drawout breakers ship without cassette drawout. ACBs ship in narrow and universal cassettes only.

3 3 3 3

Frame Use X = All breakers

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V4-T3-8

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

3.1

Cassette Magnum DS ANSI Breaker Product Family

3

M E 32 3 C A DN N NNN W C

3 3

Cassette Shipping C = Cassette only B = Breaker shipped in cassette

Cassette Family M = Standard or double frame L = Narrow or double narrow frame Interrupt Type N = Cassettes (up to 100 kA) L = MDSL cassettes (200 kA) X = MDSX cassettes (200 kA) Continuous Amperes 16 = Up to 1600A 20 = Up to 2000A 32 = 2500 to 3200A 40 = 4000 to 1600A 50 = 5000 to 2000A Poles 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole

Cassette Frame and Rear Terminals P = Basic cassette (without vertical bus stabs) C = Basic cassette with stabs (with vertical bus stab kit) H = Narrow frame cassette (with horizontal terminal pads) U = Universal cassette (with universal terminal pads)

3

Cassette Wiring N = Un-wired W = Cassette wired

3 3

Future Use NNN = All cassettes

3

Shutters N = No shutters S = Shutters installed

3 3

Arc Hood A = Arc hood installed

3

Door Frame and Gasket Kit DN = Door frame and gasket kit included XN = Door frame and gasket kit not included

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-9

3.1

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

3

Technical Data and Specifications

3

Magnum DS Switchgear Class UL 1066 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

3

rms Symmetrical Current Ratings kA 50/60 Hz 1 Interruption Rating at 635 Vac

Short-Time Withstand Rating

Fixed Internal Instantaneous Trip

Available Current Sensor and Rating Plugs for Digitrip RMS Trip Unit (Establishes Breaker In Rating)

42

42

42

—

200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800

50

50

50

—

65

65

65

—

100

65

20

18 x In

42

42

42

42

—

Standard

50

50

50

50

—

Standard

65

65

65

65

—

3

MDS-808

Standard

85

85

85

85

—

MDS-C08

Standard

100

100

100

85

85

3

MDS-H08

Standard

130

130

130

85

85

MDS-L08 2

Standard

200

200

200

—

—

3

MDS-X08 3

Standard

200

200

65

30

30

MDN-412

Narrow

42

42

42

42

—

MDN-512

Narrow

50

50

50

50

— —

Frame Amperes

Breaker Type Catalog Position 1–6

800

MDN-408

Narrow

42

3

MDN-508

Narrow

50

MDN-608

Narrow

65

3

MDN-C08

Narrow

100

MDS-408

Standard

3

MDS-508 MDS-608

3

1200

3

Frame Type

Interruption Rating at 254 Vac

Interruption Rating at 508 Vac

MDN-612

Narrow

65

65

65

65

3

MDN-C12

Narrow

100

100

65

25

18 x In

MDS-X12

Standard

200

200

65

30

30

3

MDS-512

Standard

50

50

50

50

—

MDS-612

Standard

65

65

65

65

—

3

MDS-812

Standard

85

85

85

85

—

3

MDS-C12

Standard

100

100

100

85

—

MDS-H12

Standard

130

130

130

85

85

3

1600

MDN-416

Narrow

42

42

42

42

—

MDN-516

Narrow

50

50

50

50

— —

3

MDN-616

Narrow

65

65

65

65

MDN-C16

Narrow

100

100

65

30

18 x In

3

MDS-516

Standard

50

50

50

50

—

MDS-616

Standard

65

65

65

65

—

3

MDS-816

Standard

85

85

85

85

—

MDS-C16

Standard

100

100

100

85

85

3

MDS-H16

Standard

130

130

130

85

85

MDS-L16 2

Standard

200

200

200

—

—

3

MDS-X16 3

Standard

200

200

65

30

30

MDN-620

Narrow

65

65

65

65

—

3

MDN-C20

Narrow

100

100

65

35

18 x In

MDS-620

Standard

65

65

65

65

—

3

MDS-820

Standard

85

85

85

85

—

MDS-C20

Standard

100

100

100

85

85

3

MDS-H20

Standard

130

130

130

85

85

MDS-L20 2

Standard

200

200

200

—

—

3

MDS-X20 3

Standard

200

200

65

30

30

3 3 3

2000

200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200

200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1600

200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1600, 2000

Notes 1 Interrupting ratings shown based on breaker equipped with integral Digitrip RMS trip unit. Interruption ratings for non-automatic breakers are equal to the published short-time withstand rating. These interruption ratings are based on the standard duty cycle consisting of an open operation, a 15-second interval and a close-open operation, in succession, with delayed tripping in case of short-delay devices. The standard duty cycle for short-time ratings consists of maintaining the rated current for two periods of 1/2 seconds each, with a 15-second interval of zero current between the two periods. 2 Magnum MDSL current limiting power circuit breaker with integral current limiters. Current Limiter selected determines short-time and fixed instantaneous trip rating. Maximum voltage rating is 600 Vac. 3 Magnum MDSX current limiting power circuit breaker with fast opening contacts.

3 3 V4-T3-10

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

3.1 3

Magnum DS Switchgear Class UL 1066 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers, continued

3

rms Symmetrical Current Ratings kA 50/60 Hz 1 Frame Amperes

Breaker Type Catalog Position 1–6

2500

3200

4000

5000

Frame Type

Interruption Rating at 254 Vac

Interruption Rating at 508 Vac

Interruption Rating at 635 Vac

Short-Time Withstand Rating

Fixed Internal Instantaneous Trip

MDS-625

Standard

65

65

65

65

—

MDS-825

Standard

85

85

85

85

—

MDS-C25

Standard

100

100

100

100 2

85

MDS-H25

Standard

130

130

130

85

85

MDS-632

Standard

65

65

65

65

—

MDS-832

Standard

85

85

85

85

—

MDS-C32

Standard

100

100

100

85

85

MDS-H32

Standard

130

130

130

85

85

MDS-X32 3

Double

200

200

4

50

50

MDN-640

Double narrow

65

65

65

65

—

MDN-840

Double narrow

85

85

65

85

—

MDN-C40

Double narrow

100

100

65

100

—

MDS-840

Double

85

85

85

85

—

MDS-C40

Double

100

100

100

100

—

MDS-H40

Double

130

130

130

130

—

MDS-X40 3

Double

200

200

5

50

50

MDD-X40

Double

200

200

100

100

—

MDS-850

Double

85

85

85

85

—

MDS-C50

Double

100

100

100

100

—

MDS-H50

Double

130

130

130

130

—

MDS-X50 35

Double

200

200

4

50

50

MDD-X50

Double

200

200

100

100

—

Available Current Sensor and Rating Plugs for Digitrip RMS Trip Unit (Establishes Breaker In Rating) 200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2500

200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000, 3200

3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2000, 2500, 3200, 4000

3 3 3 3

2500, 3200, 4000, 5000

3 3

Notes 1 Interruption ratings shown based on breaker equipped with integral Digitrip RMS trip unit. Interruption ratings for non-automatic breakers are equal to the published short-time withstand rating. These interruption ratings are based on the standard duty cycle consisting of an open operation, a 15-second interval and a close-open operation, in succession, with delayed tripping in case of short-delay devices. The standard duty cycle for short-time ratings consists of maintaining the rated current for two periods of 1/2 seconds each, with a 15-second interval of zero current between the two periods. 2 Short-time withstand for MDSC at 2500A for 600 Vac is 85 kA. 3 Magnum MDSX current limiting power circuit breaker with fast opening contacts. 4 Product to be tested. Contact Eaton for product rating. 5 Breaker applied in a tested fan-cooled enclosure.

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-11

3.1 3

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

Contents

Magnum MDSL Current Limiting Power Circuit Breaker

Description

3

Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . Magnum DS Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magnum MDSL Current Limiting Power Circuit Breaker Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Trip Curve Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magnum IEC Rated Air Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . Magnum DC (Direct Current) Low Voltage Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series NRX Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . Medium Voltage Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Magnum MDSL Current Limiting Power Circuit Breaker

3

Product Description

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

The following curves illustrate the ratings, melting timecurrent characteristics and current limiting, or let-through characteristics, of limiters for Magnum low voltage power circuit breakers. The let-through current for a given limiter application is readily determined by extending a vertical line from the applicable maximum available symmetrical fault amperes at the bottom margin to the characteristic line for the particular limiter, and from this intersection extending a horizontal line to the left margin and reading the peak current. The withstand rating of any circuit elements protected by the limiters should be at least equal to this peak current. It will be noted that the letthrough current increases with the limiter size or ampere rating; in other words, the maximum current limiting effect is obtained with the smallest size. This effect is to be expected, since the resistance decreases as the rating increases. If the vertical line from the bottom margin as described in the previous paragraph does not intersect the limiter characteristic line,

V4-T3-12

the available system fault current is below the “threshold” current of that limiter, and it will offer no current limiting effect. The current limiting principle is illustrated below: la= The Available Peak Fault Current tm=The Melting Time Ip= The Peak Let-Through Current ta= The Arcing Time tc= The Total Interrupting (Clearing)Time Current Limiting

tm

ta tc

A. Maximum protection of “downstream” components. Type MDSL breakers are often used for this purpose even when the maximum available fault currents are within the interruption rating of the corresponding unfused Magnum breakers. B. Protection of the circuit breaker only.

Ia Ip

Limiter Selection The selection of a suitable limiter rating for a given application is generally governed by a choice of the following types of protection:

Case A would tend to use the smallest available limiter; Case B the largest. When downstream protection is required, the selection is usually a compromise, since certain small limiters cannot be coordinated with the breaker to avoid nuisance blowing on overloads or small and moderate short circuits. Minimum, recommended and maximum limiter sizes for Magnum MDSL breakers are given in the table on Page V4-T3-13.

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

Page V4-T3-2 V4-T3-6

V4-T3-13 V4-T3-13 V4-T3-14 V4-T3-15 V4-T3-23 V4-T3-33 V4-T3-35 V4-T3-42

3.1

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

Product Selection

3

Magnum MDSL Sensor/Rating Plug vs. Current Limiter Selection Sensor and Rating Plug In

MDSL Current Limiter Selection Chart 2

200

MA250

MA300

MA400

3

1

MA600 3

MA800

MB1200

MB1600

MB2000

MD2500

MD3000

250

MA400

MA600

MA800 3

MB1200

MB1600

MB2000

MD2500

MD3000

300

MA400

MA600

MA800 3

MB1200

MB1600

MB2000

MD2500

MD3000

400

MA600

600

MA800

MB1200 3

MB1600

MB2000

MD2500

MD3000

MA800

MB1200

MB1600

MB2000 3

MD2500

MD3000

MB1200

MB1600

MB2000

MD2500 3

MD3000

MB2000

MD2500

3

MD3000

MB2000

MD2500 3

MD3000

800 1000

MB1600

1200

3 3 3 3 3 3

1600

MD3000

2000

MD3000 3

3 3

Technical Data and Specifications

3

Magnum MDSL Ratings

3

Frame

Catalog Number

Available Sensor/ Rating Plug (Amperes)

3

800

MDSL08

200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800

1600

MDSL16

200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1600

3

2000

MDSC20

1600, 2000

3

Notes 1 Select the current limiter based on the Magnum breaker frame and current sensor and rating plug as shown. 2 Refer to MDSL current limiter curves for let-through and time characteristics. 3 The recommended ratings shown as shaded provide for reduced current let-through and breaker coordination within the trip unit settings. Selection of current limiters below the recommended ratings shown provides lower current let-through, however, trip unit settings must be considered to avoid nuisance operation.

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-13

3.1 3 3

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

Trip Curve Charts Type Magnum DSL Limiters, Peak Let-Through Current Characteristics

Type Magnum DSL Limiters Average Melting Time-Current Characteristics

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Available Current, rms Symmetrical Amperes x 10

3

Scale x 100 = Current in Amperes Note For Time/Current Curves, see www.eaton.com/electrical

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V4-T3-14

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

3.1

Contents

Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated Case Circuit Breaker

Description

Page

Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . Magnum DS Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magnum MDSL Current Limiting Power Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated Case Circuit Breakers Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Magnum IEC Rated Air Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . Magnum DC (Direct Current) Low Voltage Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series NRX Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . Medium Voltage Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

V4-T3-2

3

V4-T3-6

3

V4-T3-12

3

V4-T3-16 V4-T3-19 V4-T3-23 V4-T3-33 V4-T3-35 V4-T3-42

3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated Case Circuit Breakers Product Description

●

●

●

Magnum SB insulated case circuit breakers have interruption ratings up to 130 kA at 635 Vac with continuous current ratings up to 5000A Magnum SB insulated case circuit breakers have lighter-duty short-time withstand ratings and fixed internal instantaneous trips on most ratings, which is characteristic of UL 489 molded case breakers commonly used in UL 891 switchboards. This provides for greater economy and excellent coordination and selectivity for most commercial applications Fixed internal instantaneous trips will be phased in on all Magnum SB insulated case circuit breakers rated 3200A and below to provide an extra safety factor by reducing the energy let-through to

3

Standards and Certifications

Magnum SB is a low voltage insulated case circuit breaker family designed for the performance and economic requirements of UL 891 switchboards. ●

downstream circuits at the maximum instantaneous trip point and to facilitate feeder circuit breaker protection in UL 891 switchboards with 3-cycle bus bracing Magnum SBSE current limiting power circuit breakers have 150 kA interruption ratings at 480 Vac with continuous current ratings up to 5000A. The short-time withstand rating is 30 kA for standard frame and 50 kA for double frame breakers

UL and ANSI Test Certifications Magnum SB meets or exceeds the applicable ANSI, NEMA, UL and CSA standards, including: ●

●

●

●

●

●

ANSI C37.13 (Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures) ANSI C37.16 (Preferred Ratings, Related Requirements, and Application Recommendations for Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers and AC Power Circuit Breakers) ANSI C37.17 (Trip Devices for AC and General Purpose DC Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers) ANSI C37.50 (Test Procedures for Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures) UL 1066 (Standard for Low Voltage AC and DC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures) NEMA SG3 (This standard adopts ANSI C37.16 in its entirety)

Comprehensive Enclosure Solutions Magnum SB has proven performance in Eaton manufactured switchboards with the following test certifications: ●

●

UL 891 (Certified Pow-R-Line C Low Voltage Switchboards) UL, CSA 22.2.31 Low Voltage Assemblies

Approvals and Marks UL listed: Magnum DS Breaker UL File E52096 and Cassette UL File E204565

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Product Selection Contact Eaton for pricing.

3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Typical Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated Case Circuit Breaker Nameplate

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

3 V4-T3-15

3.1

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

3

Catalog Number Selection

3

Magnum SB Breaker Product Family

SB S 4 12 3 V E A 06 MU

3 3 3

Breaker Type SB = Magnum switchboard Frame Type S = Standard or double N = Narrow or double narrow D = MDDX only E = High endurance

3 3 3

Interrupting/ Withstand Rating 4 = 42 5 = 50 6 = 65 8 = 85 C = 100 H = 130 (DSH) E = 150 (DSE) X = 200 (DSX/DDX) L = 200 (DSL)

3 3 3 3 3

Mounting Configuration and Load Terminals H = Fixed horizontal V = Fixed vertical L = Drawout (MDN) W = Drawout (MDS) Poles and Neutral (Facing Front of Breaker) 3 = Three 4 = Four (neutral left)

Nameplate Language E = English A = Spanish

Current Limiter Selection A = Non-DSL (no limiter) D = MA250 E = MA300 F = MA400 G = MA600 H = MA800 K = MB1200 L = MB1600 M = MB2000 N = MD2500 P = MD3000

Continuous Amperes and Phasing (Facing Front of Breaker) 08 = 800 ABC 12 = 1200 ABC 16 = 1600 ABC 20 = 2000 ABC 25 = 2500 ABC 30 = 3000 ABC 32 = 3200 ABC or ABCABC 3N = 3200 AABBCC 4N = 4000 AABBCC 5N = 5000 AABBCC 40 = 4000 ABCABC 50 = 5000 ABCABC

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V4-T3-16

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

Sensor and Rating Plug Rating NN = None 01 = 100 13 = 1250 02 = 200 16 = 1600 05 = 250 20 = 2000 03 = 300 25 = 2500 04 = 400 30 = 3000 06 = 600 32 = 3200 08 = 800 40 = 4000 10 = 1000 50 = 5000 12 = 1200

Trip Unit and Protection, and External Control Voltage When Required NN = Non-automatic (no trip unit) 52 = 520 LSI 5G = 520 LSIG M2 = 520M LSI MT = 520M LSI (24/48 Vdc) MU = 520M LSI (120 Vac) MV = 520M LSI (240 Vac) MQ = 520M LSI (125 Vdc) MG = 520M LSIG MH = 520M LSIG (24/48 Vdc) MM = 520M LSIG (120 Vac) MN = 520 LSIG (240 Vac) MX = 520M LSIG (125 Vdc) ME = 520M LSIA (24/48 Vdc) MC = 520 LSIA (120 Vac) MF = 520M LSIA (240 Vac) MZ = 520M LSIA (125 Vdc) CT = 520MC LSI (24/48 Vdc) CU = 520MC LSI (120 Vac) CV = 520MC LSI (240 Vac) CQ = 520MC LSI (125 Vdc) CH = 520MC LSIG (24/48 Vdc) CM = 520MC LSIG (120 Vac) CN = 520MC LSIG (240 Vac) CX = 520MC LSIG (125 Vdc) CE = 520MC LSIA (24/48 Vdc) CC = 520MC LSIA (120 Vac) CF = 520MC LSIA (240 Vac) CY = 520MC LSIA (125 Vdc) 1A = 1150 LSI (24/48 Vdc) 1C = 1150 LSI (120 Vac) 1E = 1150 LSI (240 Vac) 1Q = 1150 LSI (125 Vdc) 1F = 1150 LSIG (24/48 Vdc) 1G = 1150 LSIG (120 Vac) 1H = 1150 LSIG (240 Vac) 1X = 1150 LSIG (125 Vdc) 1J = 1150 LSIA (24/48 Vdc) 1K = 1150 LSIA (120 Vac) 1M = 1150 LSIA (240 Vac) 1Y = 1150 LSIA (125 Vdc)

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

3.1

Magnum SB Breaker Product Family, continued

3

A W C H N E H K L A X Shunt Trip (ST) N = None A = 110–127 Vac/Vdc R = 208–240 Vac/Vdc C = 24 Vdc H = 48 Vdc B = 110–127 Vac/Vdc (100% duty) S = 220–250 Vac/Vdc (100% duty) D = 24 Vdc (100% duty) K = 48 Vdc (100% duty) J = 60 Vdc (100% duty) 6 = 60 Vdc Motor Operator M = Manual operated N = 110–125 Vac (5-sec) W = 110–125 Vdc (5-sec) T = 220–250 Vdc (5-sec) P = 208–277 Vac (5-sec) L = 24 Vdc (5-sec) K = 48 Vdc (5-sec) S = 60 Vdc (5-sec) 1 = 110–125 Vac (3-sec) 2 = 220–250 Vac (3-sec) 4 = 24 Vdc (3-sec) 8 = 48 Vdc (3-sec) 5 = 110–125 Vdc (3-sec) 9 = 220–250 Vdc (3-sec) Spring Release Device (SRD) N = None A = 110–127 Vac/Vdc R = 208–240 Vac/Vdc C = 24 Vdc H = 48 Vdc S = 60 Vdc

3 3

N A R C H D E F G X J K 1 2 3 4 6 B O I Q 9

Undervoltage Release (UVR) or 2nd Shunt Trip (ST) = None = UVR (110–127 Vac) = UVR (208–240 Vac) = UVR (24 Vdc) = UVR (48 Vdc) = UVR (60 Vdc) = UVR (110–125 Vdc) = UVR (220–250 Vdc) = UVR (32 Vdc) = UVR (380–415 Vac) = UVR (480 Vac) = UVR (600 Vac) = 2nd ST (110–127 Vac/Vdc) = 2nd ST (208–250 Vac/Vdc) = 2nd ST (24 Vdc) = 2nd ST (48 Vdc) = 2nd ST (60 Vdc) = 2nd ST (110–127 Vac/Vdc 100% duty) = 2nd ST (220–250 Vac/Vdc 100% duty) = 2nd ST (24 Vdc 100% duty) = 2nd ST (48 Vdc 100% duty) = 2nd ST (60 Vdc 100% duty)

3 Auxiliary Switch N = None 2 = 2A/2B 4 = 4A/4B 6 = 6A/6B

E = N = Y = M= L = F = G = H = I = J = K =

Bell Alarms Switch (OTS) with 2a/2b Contacts and/or Mechanical Trip Indicator Mech. Mech. OTS Trip Interlock Switch Indicator for with Two Manual Form C Reset Contacts No — No Yes No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes with 24V reset Yes No Yes with 120V reset Yes No Yes with 240V reset Yes Yes Yes with 24V reset Yes Yes Yes with 120V reset Yes Yes Yes with 240V reset

Padlock Provisions for Blocking Close and/or Open ACB Manual Pushbuttons N = None M = Metal (block close and open) P = Plastic (block close and open) C = Metal (block close only) H = Plastic (block close only) S = Metal swbd lock-off (block close, depress open)

N K C R S A Y L H E

= = = = = = = = = =

3 3 3 3

Operations Counter and/or Keylock Provisions Counter Keylock Provisions No counter No locks No counter Kirk lock No counter Castell lock No counter Ronis lock No counter CES lock Counter No lock Counter Kirk lock Counter Castell lock Counter Ronis lock indicator Counter CES lock

3 3 3 3 3 3

Latch Check Switch/Trip Unit Metering Voltage Connection for Digitrip 1150 Trip Unit Latch Check 1150 Voltage Switch Connection N= None Upper terminals M = None Lower terminals L = LCS wired to SRD Upper terminals Y= LCS Wired to SRD Lower terminals C= LCS Wired External Upper terminals D= LCS Wired External Lower terminals

3 3 3 3

Breaker Shipping Options and Instructions A = Fixed breaker alone with door kit F = Fixed breaker alone without door kit A = Drawout breaker alone without door frame kit C = Drawout breaker in cassette (un-wired) P = Drawout breaker in cassette (shutters) S = Drawout breaker in cassette (shutters) W = Drawout breaker in cassette (pre-wired and shutters) Double frame drawout breakers ship without cassette drawout. ACBs ship in narrow and universal cassettes only. Frame Use X = All breakers

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-17

3.1 3

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

Cassette Magnum SB Breaker Product Family

S E 32 3 C A DN N NNN W C

3 3

Cassette Shipping C = Cassette only B = Breaker shipped in cassette

Cassette Family S = SB standard or double frame T = SB narrow frame only

3 3

Interrupt Type E = SB cassette (150 kAIC) N = Cassettes (up to 100 kA)

3 3

Continuous Amperes 16 = Up to 1600A 20 = Up to 2000A 32 = 2500 to 3200A 40 = 4000 to 1600A 50 = 5000 to 2000A

3 3 3

Poles 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole

3

Cassette Frame and Rear Terminals P = Basic cassette (without vertical bus stabs) C = Basic cassette with stabs (with vertical bus stab kit) H = Narrow frame cassette (with horizontal terminal pads) U = Universal cassette (with universal terminal pads) Arc Hood A = Arc hood installed Door Frame and Gasket Kit DN = Door frame and gasket kit included XN = Door frame and gasket kit not included

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V4-T3-18

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

Cassette Wiring N = Un-wired W = Cassette wired Future Use NNN = All cassettes Shutters N = No shutters S = Shutters installed

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

3.1

Technical Data and Specifications

3

Magnum SB Switchboard Class Insulated Case Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers

3

rms Symmetrical Current Ratings kA 50/60 Hz 1 Frame Amperes 800

1200

1600

2000

Breaker Type Catalog Position 1–6

Short-Time Withstand Rating

Fixed Internal Instantaneous Trip

Available Current Sensor and Rating Plugs for Digitrip RMS Trip Unit (Establishes Breaker In Rating)

35

20

18 x In

200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800

42

20

18 x In

Frame Type

Interruption Rating at 254 Vac

Interruption Rating at 508 Vac

Interruption Rating at 635 Vac

SBN-508

Narrow

50

50

SBN-608

Narrow

65

65

SBN-C08

Narrow

100

100

65

20

18 x In

SBS-608

Standard

65

65

65

20

18 x In

SBS-808

Standard

85

85

85

20

18 x In

SBS-C08

Standard

100

100

85

20

18 x In

SBS-H08

Standard

130

130

130

20

18 x In

SBS-E08 23

Standard

200

150

65

30

30

SBN-512

Narrow

50

50

35

25

18 x In

SBN-612

Narrow

65

65

42

25

18 x In

SBN-C12

Narrow

100

100

65

25

18 x In

SBS-612

Standard

65

65

65

25

18 x In

SBS-812

Standard

85

85

85

25

18 x In

SBS-C12

Standard

100

100

85

25

18 x In

SBS-H12

Standard

130

130

130

25

18 x In

SBS-E12 2

Standard

200

150

65

30

30

SBN-516

Narrow

50

50

35

30

18 x In

SBN-616

Narrow

65

65

42

30

18 x In

SBN-C16

Narrow

100

100

65

30

18 x In

SBS-616

Standard

65

65

65

30

18 x In

SBS-816

Standard

85

85

85

30

18 x In

SBS-C16

Standard

100

100

85

30

18 x In

SBS-H16

Standard

130

130

130

30

18 x In

SBS-E16 2

Standard

200

150

65

30

30

SBN-620

Narrow

65

65

65

35

18 x In

SBN-C20

Narrow

100

100

65

35

18 x In

SBS-620

Standard

65

65

65

35

18 x In

SBS-820

Standard

85

85

85

35

18 x In

SBS-C20

Standard

100

100

85

35

18 x In

SBS-H20

Standard

130

130

130

35

18 x In

SBS-E20 2

Standard

200

150

65

30

30

3 3 3 3 3 3

200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200

3 3 3 200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1600

3 3 3 3

200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1600, 2000

3 3 3 3

Notes 1 Interruption ratings shown based on breaker equipped with integral Digitrip RMS trip unit. Interruption ratings for non-automatic breakers are equal to the published short-time withstand rating. These interruption ratings are based on the standard duty cycle consisting of an open operation, a 15-second interval and a close-open operation, in succession, with delayed tripping in case of short-delay devices. The standard duty cycle for short-time ratings consists of maintaining the rated current for two periods of 1/2 seconds each, with a 15-second interval of zero current between the two periods. 2 Magnum SBSE current limiting power circuit breaker with fast opening contacts. 3 Not released. 4 Product to be tested. Contact Eaton for product rating. 5 Breaker applied in a tested fan-cooled enclosure. Magnum SB is UL 1066 listed.

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-19

3.1

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

3 3 3 3

Magnum SB Switchboard Class Insulated Case Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers, continued rms Symmetrical Current Ratings kA 50/60 Hz 1 Frame Amperes 2500

3 3 3

3000

3 3

Breaker Type Catalog Position 1–6

Frame Type

Interruption Rating at 254 Vac

Interruption Rating at 508 Vac

Interruption Rating at 635 Vac

Short-Time Withstand Rating

Fixed Internal Instantaneous Trip

Available Current Sensor and Rating Plugs for Digitrip RMS Trip Unit (Establishes Breaker In Rating) 200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2500

SBS-625

Standard

65

65

65

45

18 x In

SBS-825

Standard

85

85

85

45

18 x In

SBS-C25

Standard

100

100

85

45

18 x In

SBS-H25

Standard

130

130

130

45

18 x In

SBS-E25 2

Double

200

150

4

50

50

SBS-630

Standard

65

65

65

50

18 x In

SBS-830

Standard

85

85

85

50

18 x In

SBS-C30

Standard

100

100

85

50

18 x In

SBS-H30

Standard

130

130

130

50

18 x In

SBS-E30 2

Double

200

150

4

50

50

SBS-840

Double

85

85

85

72

18 x In

SBS-C40

Double

100

100

100

72

18 x In

SBS-H40

Double

130

130

130

72

18 x In

3

SBN-840

Double Narrow

85

85

65

72/65

18 x In

3

SBN-C40

Double Narrow

100

100

65

72/65

18 x In

4000

3

3

5000

3 3 3 3 3 3

SBS-E40 2

Double

200

150

4

50

50

SBS-850

Double

85

85

85

85

18 x In

SBS-C50

Double

100

100

100

90

18 x In

SBS-H50

Double

130

130

130

90

18 x In

SBS-E50 23

Double

200

150

4

50

50

200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000

2000, 2500, 3000, 4000

2500, 3000, 4000, 5000

Notes 1 Interruption ratings shown based on breaker equipped with integral Digitrip RMS trip unit. Interruption ratings for non-automatic breakers are equal to the published short-time withstand rating. These interruption ratings are based on the standard duty cycle consisting of an open operation, a 15-second interval and a close-open operation, in succession, with delayed tripping in case of short-delay devices. The standard duty cycle for short-time ratings consists of maintaining the rated current for two periods of 1/2 seconds each, with a 15-second interval of zero current between the two periods. 2 Magnum SBSE current limiting power circuit breaker with fast opening contacts. 3 Breaker applied in a tested fan-cooled enclosure. 4 Product to be tested. Contact Eaton for product rating. Magnum SB is UL 1066 listed.

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V4-T3-20

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

3.1

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

Digitrip Trip Units for Magnum DS and SB ANSI/UL Rated Power Circuit Breakers

3 3 3

Trip Unit Type

Digitrip 520

Digitrip 520M

Digitrip 520MC

3

Digitrip 1150+ 1

3

Ampere range

200–5000A

200–5000A

200–5000A

200–5000A

Interruption rating at 480V

42–200 kA

42–200 kA

42–200 kA

42–200 kA

rms sensing

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

3

Ordering options

LI, LSI, LSIG, LSIA

LSI, LSIG

LSI, LSIG

LSI, LSIG, LSIA

3

Fixed rating plug (In)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Overtemperature trip

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Long delay pickup

0.4–1.0 x (In)

0.4–1.0 x (In)

0.4–1.0 x (In)

0.4–1.0 x (In)

Long delay time I2t at 6 x Ir

2–24 sec

2–24 sec

2–24 sec

2–24 sec

Protection and Coordination Protection

Long delay protection (L)

Short delay protection (S)

3 3 3

Long delay time I4t

No

No

No

1–5 sec

IEEE curves

No

No

No

Yes

Long delay thermal memory

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

High load alarm

No

No

No

0.5–1.0 x (Ir)

Short delay pickup

200–1000% x (Ir) and M1

200–1000% x (Ir) and M1

200–1000% x (Ir) and M1

200–1000% x (Ir) and M1

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

Short delay time I2t at 8 x I

r

Short delay time flat

3 3 3

Short delay time ZSI

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Instantaneous protection (I)

Instantaneous pickup

200–1000% x (In) and M1

200–1000% x (In) and M1

200–1000% x (In) and M1

200–1000% x (In) and M1

Making current release

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Off position

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Ground fault protection (G) 2

Ground fault alarm

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Ground fault pickup

25–100% x (In)

25–100% x (In)

25–100% x (In)

24–100% x (In)

Ground fault delay I2t at 0.625 x In

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

3

3 3 3 3

Disable ground fault protection

No

No

No

No

Neutral protection (N)

Model LSI only

Model LSI only

Model LSI only

Model LSI only

3

Cause of trip LEDs

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Magnitude of trip information

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

3

System Diagnostics

Remote signal contacts

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Programmable contacts

No

No

No

Yes

Electronic operations counter

No

No

No

Yes

3 3 3

Notes 1 Over and undervoltage alarm or trip, over and underfrequency alarm or trip, voltage unbalance alarm or trip, reverse power trip and phase rotation alarm are included. 2 1200A maximum ground fault setting per UL/NEC.

3

In = Rating plug and sensor rating. Ir = Long delay pickup setting.

3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-21

3.1 3

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

Digitrip Trip Units for Magnum DS and SB ANSI/UL Rated Power Circuit Breakers, continued

3 3 3 3

Trip Unit Type

Digitrip 520

Digitrip 520M

Digitrip 520MC

Digitrip 1150+ 1

System Monitoring Digital display

No

4-Character LCD

4-Character LCD

24-Character LED

3

Current (%) full scale sensor

No

Yes +/– 2%

Yes +/– 2%

Yes +/– 1%

3

Voltage (%) L to L

No

No

No

Yes +/– 1%

Power and energy (%)

No

No

No

Yes +/– 2%

3

Apparent power kVA and demand

No

No

No

Yes

Reactive power kVAR

No

No

No

Yes

3

Power factor

No

No

No

Yes

3

Crest factor

No

No

No

Yes

System Communications Type

—

—

INCOM/PowerNet/Modbus 2/ INCOM/PowerNet/TripLink/ PROFIBUS 2 Modbus 2/PROFIBUS 2

Power supply in breaker

N/A

Optional

Standard

Standard

Yes

3 3

Additional Features

3

Trip log (three events)

No

No

No

Electronic operations counter

No

No

No

Yes

3

Testing method 3

Test set

Test set

Test set

Integral and test set

Waveform capture

No

No

No

Yes

ARMs (Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System Mode)

No

No

Yes

Yes 4

3 3 3 3 3 3

Breaker health monitor

No

No

No

Yes

Programmable relay functions

No

No

No

Yes 1

Notes 1 Over and undervoltage alarm or trip, over and underfrequency alarm or trip, voltage unbalance alarm or trip, reverse power trip and phase rotation alarm are included. 2 Requires externally mounted MMINT or PMINT module. 3 Test set for secondary injection. 4 Contact Eaton for availability. In = Rating plug and sensor rating. Ir = Long delay pickup setting.

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V4-T3-22

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

Magnum IEC Double Narrow Frame Drawout Air Circuit Breaker, With Cassette

3.1

Contents Description

Page

Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . Magnum DS Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magnum MDSL Current Limiting Power Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magnum IEC Rated Air Circuit Breakers Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Magnum Options and Accessories . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magnum DC (Direct Current) Low Voltage Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series NRX Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . Medium Voltage Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

V4-T3-2

3

V4-T3-6

3

V4-T3-12

3

V4-T3-15

3

V4-T3-24 V4-T3-27 V4-T3-30 V4-T3-32 V4-T3-33 V4-T3-35 V4-T3-42

3 3 3 3 3

Magnum IEC Rated Air Circuit Breakers

3

Product Description

3

Magnum air circuit breakers are designed to enable global power distribution solutions in IEC switchboards and other custom enclosures. ●

●

●

Magnum IEC air circuit breakers have interruption ratings up to 100 kA at 690 Vac with continuous current ratings up to 6300A Magnum IEC air circuit breaker continuous current frames are 100% rated. No thermal de-rating is required when applying the breaker in the low voltage systems enclosure at ambient temperatures of 104ºF (40°C) Magnum IEC breakers carry the KEMA Keur Mark, which requires periodic follow-up testing, witnessed by KEMA, to demonstrate our product performs to its published nameplate ratings. This differentiates Magnum air circuit breakers from the competition, where in general, self-certification testing is performed on products when initially introduced with no binding commitments to perform subsequent follow-up third-party testing

Standards and Certifications IEC Test Certifications Magnum air circuit breakers meet or exceed the applicable IEC standards, including:

●

● ● ●

EN/IEC 60947-2 KEMA third-party witness and follow-up testing

Comprehensive Enclosure Solutions Magnum air circuit breakers have proven performance in IEC switchboards and custom enclosures manufactured by Eaton and Low Voltage Systems Builders (OEMs) to the following standards: ● ● ●

EN/IEC 60947-1 EN/IEC 60439-1 Eaton manufactured IEC Low Voltage Switchboard solutions include: ● Eaton MEM M-Form (UK) Low Voltage Switchboards ● Eaton Holec® Capitole 40 and Capitole 20 (Holland) Low Voltage Switchboards

●

Eaton Tabula Low Voltage Switchboard Systems (global) for Low Voltage Systems Builders Eaton Elatis (Germany) Low Voltage Switchboards Eaton Xenergy and Modan switchboard systems (global) for low voltage systems builders

Approvals and Marks Magnum air circuit breakers carry the following approvals and approval marks: ● ● ●

●

CE KEMA Keur mark ABS (American Bureau of Shipping) Type Listed Certificate Number 04-HS422844B-PDA-DUB CCC (Certificate for China Compulsory Product Certification) to GB14048.2-2001, Certificate Numbers: ● 2005010307139381 ● 2003010307094561 ● 2003010307094558

●

● ● ●

●

American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) Det Norske Veritas (DNV) Lloyds of London South African Bureau of Standards (SABS) For a complete and comprehensive listing of all low voltage power breakers, please visit www.eaton.com

3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Note: The KEMA Keur Mark on the Magnum ACB Label Confirms Third-Party Witness and Followup Testing

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-23

3.1

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

3

Catalog Number Selection

3

Magnum IEC Breaker Product Family 1

MW N 5 12 4 V E A 03 MT 6 M C J 2 Y C N M W X

3 3 3 3 3

Breaker Frame I = Standard or double N = Narrow or double narrow K = Special 1100 Vac ACB

3

Interrupting Icu 4 5 6 8 C Z

= 40 kV = 50 kV = 65 kV = 85 kV = 100 kV = 25 kV (1100 Vac MWK)

Mounting Configuration and Load Terminals H = Fixed horizontal V = Fixed vertical L = Drawout horizontal

Nameplate Language E = English A = Spanish

Poles and Neutral (Facing Front of Breaker) 3 = Three 4 = Four (neutral left) R = Four (reserved for neutral right)

3 3

Continuous Amperes and Phasing (Facing Front of Breaker) 08 = 800 ABC 10 = 1000 ABC 12 = 1250 ABC 16 = 1600 ABC 20 = 2000 ABC 25 = 2500 ABC 32 = 3200 ABC 41 = 4000 ABC (standard drawout only) 4N = 4000 AABBCC 5N = 5000 AABBCC 6N = 6300 AABBCC 40 = 4000 ABCABC 50 = 5000 ABCABC 60 = 6300 ABCABC

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Sensor and Rating Plug Rating NN = None 02 = 200 05 = 250 03 = 300 04 = 400 06 = 600 07 = 630 08 = 800 10 = 1000 12 = 1200 13 = 1250 16 = 1600 20 = 2000 25 = 2500 30 = 3000 32 = 3200 40 = 4000 50 = 5000 63 = 6300

Trip Unit and Protection, (and External Control Voltage When Required) NN = Non-automatic (no trip unit) 22 = 520 LI 52 = 520 LSI 5W = 520i LSIG M2 = 520M LSI MT = 520M LSI (24–48 Vdc) MU = 520M LSI (120 Vac) MV = 520M LSI (240 Vac) MW = 520Mi LSIG MJ = 520Mi LSIG (24–48 Vdc) MK = 520Mi LSIG (120 Vac) ML = 520Mi LSIG (240 Vac) ME = 520M LSIA (24–48 Vdc) MC = 520M LSIA (120 Vac) MF = 520M LSIA (240 Vac) CT = 520MC LSI (24–48 Vdc) CU = 520MC LSI (120 Vac) CV = 520MC LSI (240 Vac) CE = 520MC LSIA (24–48 Vdc) CC = 520MC LSIA (120 Vac) CF = 520MC LSIA (240 Vac) CJ = 520MCi LSIG (24–48 Vdc) CK = 520MCi LSIG (120 Vac) CF = 520MCi LSIG (240 Vac) C1 = 520MC ARMS LSI (24–48 Vdc) C2 = 520MC ARMS LSI (120 Vac) C3 = 520MC ARMS LSI (240 Vac) C4 = 520MC ARMS LSIA (24–48 Vdc) C5 = 520MC ARMS LSIA (120 Vac) C6 = 520MC ARMS LSIA (240 Vac) C7 = 520MC ARMS LSIG (24–48 Vdc) C8 = 520MC ARMS LSIG (120 Vac) C9 = 520MC ARMS LSIG (240 Vac) 1W = 1150i LSI (24–48 Vdc) 1N = 1150i LSI (120 Vac) 1P = 1150i LSI (240 Vac) 1R = 1150i LSIG/A (24–48 Vdc) 1S = 1150i LSIG/A (120 Vac) 1T = 1150i LSIG/A (240 Vac)

Note 1 Exclusionary rules apply. Refer to price list. Confirm all final part numbers with Eaton. Format structure subject to modifications and additions without notice.

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V4-T3-24

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

3.1

Magnum IEC Breaker Product Family, continued 1

3

MW N 5 12 4 V E A 03 MT 6 M C J 2 Y C N M W X Shunt Trip Attachment (STA) N = None A = 110–127 Vac/Vdc R = 208–240 Vac/Vdc C = 24 Vdc H = 48 Vdc B = 110–127 Vac/Vdc (100% duty) S = 220–250 Vac/Vdc (100% duty) D = 24 Vdc (100% duty) K = 48 Vdc (100% duty) J = 60 Vdc (100% duty) 6 = 60 Vdc Motor Operator M = Manual operated N = 110–125 Vac (5-sec) W = 110–125 Vdc (5-sec) T = 220–250 Vdc (5-sec) P = 208–277 Vac (5-sec) L = 24 Vdc (5-sec) K = 48 Vdc (5-sec) S = 60 Vdc (5-sec) 1 = 110–125 Vac (3-sec) 2 = 220–250 Vac (3-sec) 4 = 24 Vdc (3-sec) 8 = 48 Vdc (3-sec) 5 = 110–125 Vdc (3-sec) 9 = 220–250 Vdc (3-sec)

3 3

Future Use X = All ACBs Spring Release Device (SRD) N = None A = 110–127 Vac/Vdc R = 208–240 Vac/Vdc C = 24 Vdc H = 48 Vdc S = 60 Vdc Undervoltage Release (UVR) or 2nd Shunt Trip (ST) N = None A = UVR (110–127 Vac) R = UVR (208–240 Vac) C = UVR (24 Vdc) H = UVR (48 Vdc) D = UVR (60 Vdc) E = UVR (110–125 Vdc) F = UVR (220–250 Vdc) G = UVR (32 Vdc) X = UVR (380–415 Vac) J = UVR (480 Vac) K = UVR (600 Vac) 1 = 2nd ST (110–127 Vac/Vdc) 2 = 2nd ST (208–250 Vac/Vdc) 3 = 2nd ST (24 Vdc) 4 = 2nd ST (48 Vdc) 6 = 2nd ST (60 Vdc) B = 2nd ST (110–127 Vac/Vdc 100% duty) O = 2nd ST (220–250 Vac/Vdc 100% duty) I = 2nd ST (24 Vdc 100% duty) Q = 2nd ST (48 Vdc 100% duty) 9 = 2nd ST (60 Vdc 100% duty)

Auxiliary Switch N = None 2 = 2A/2B 4 = 2A/2B 6 = 2A/2B

E = N = Y = M= L = F = G = H = I = J = K =

Bell Alarms Switch (OTS) with 2a/2b Contacts and/or Mechanical Trip Indicator Mech. Mech. OTS Trip Interlock Switch Indicator for with Two Manual Form C Reset Contacts No — No Yes No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes with 24V reset Yes No Yes with 120V reset Yes No Yes with 240V reset Yes Yes Yes with 24V reset Yes Yes Yes with 120V reset Yes Yes Yes with 240V reset

Padlock Provisions for Blocking Close and/or Open ACB Manual Pushbuttons N = None M = Metal (block close and open) P = Plastic (block close and open) C = Metal (block close only) H = Plastic (block close only)

3

ACB Shipping Instructions A = Fixed ACB with door kit F = Fixed ACB without door kit A = D/O ACB only without door kit C = D/O ACB in cassette (un-wired) P = D/O ACB in cassette (pre-wired) S = D/O ACB in cassette (shutters) W = D/O ACB in cassette (pre-wired and shutters) Double frame D/O ACBs ship without cassette

3 3 3 3 3 3

Latch Checking Switch/Trip Unit Metering Voltage Connection for Digitrip 1150 Trip Unit Latch Check 1150 Voltage Switch Connection N = None Upper terminals M = None Lower terminals L = LCS wired to SRD Upper terminals Y = LCS wired to SRD Lower terminals C = LCS wired external Upper terminals D = LCS wired external Lower terminals

N K C R S A Y L H E

= = = = = = = = = =

3 3 3 3 3

Operations Counter and/or Keylock Provisions Counter Keylock Provisions No counter No locks No counter Kirk lock No counter Castell lock No counter Ronis lock No counter CES lock Counter No lock Counter Kirk lock Counter Castell lock Counter Ronis lock indicator Counter CES lock

3 3 3 3 3 3

Note 1 Exclusionary rules apply. Refer to price list. Confirm all final part numbers with Eaton. Format structure subject to modifications and additions without notice.

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-25

3.1 3

Power Circuit Breakers

Cassette Magnum IEC Breaker Product Family 1

E N 32 4 H K N N S NNN W C

3 3

Cassette Family E = Standard or double frame IEC N = Narrow frame IEC

3

Cassette Shipping C = Cassette only Cassette Wiring N = Un-wired W = Cassette wired

Interrupt Type N = All cassettes

3 3

Continuous Amperes 20 = Up to 2000A 32 = 2500–3000A 41 = 4000A standard frame 40 = 4000A 63 = 5000–6000A

3 3 3

Poles 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole

3

Rear Terminals H = Horizontal stabs (upper and lower terminals)

3 3

Future Use N = All cassettes Shutters N = No shutters S = Shutters installed Future Use N = All cassettes Door Frame and Gasket Kit D = Includes door kit X = Equals door kit not included N = All cassettes

Arc Hood A = Arc hood for 690 Vac K = Arc hood for 1100 Vac

3 3

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses

Note 1 Exclusionary rules apply. Refer to price list. Confirm all final part numbers with Eaton. Format structure subject to modifications and additions without notice.

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V4-T3-26

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

3.1

Technical Data and Specifications

3

Magnum IEC 60947-2 Rated Air Circuit Breakers rms Symmetrical Current Ratings kA 1 Frame Type

Interruption Rating at 240 Vac Icu = Ics

Interruption Rating at 440 Vac Icu = Ics

Interruption Rating at 690 Vac Icu = Ics

Withstand Rating Icw 1-Sec / 3-Sec

Fixed Internal Instantaneous Trip

Available Current Sensor and Rating Plugs for Digitrip RMS Trip Unit (Establishes Breaker In Rating)

Narrow

50

50

50

50/—

—

200, 250, 300, 400, 630, 800

MWN-608

Narrow

65

65

65

65/40

—

MWI-608

Standard

65

65

65

65/—

—

MWI-808

Standard

85

85

85

85/65

—

MWI-C08

Standard

100

100

85

85/65

85

MWN-410

Narrow

40

40

40

40/—

—

MWN-510

Narrow

50

50

50

50/—

—

MWN-610

Narrow

65

65

65

65/40

—

MWI-610

Standard

65

65

65

65/—

—

MWI-810

Standard

85

85

85

85/65

—

MWI-C10

Standard

100

100

85

85/65

85

MWN-412

Narrow

40

40

40

40/—

—

MWN-512

Narrow

50

50

50

50/—

—

MWN-612

Narrow

65

65

65

65/40

—

MWI-612

Standard

65

65

65

65/—

—

MWI-812

Standard

85

85

85

85/65

—

MWI-C12

Standard

100

100

85

85/65

85

Frame Amperes

Breaker Type Catalog Position 1–6

800

MWN-508

1000

1250

1600

2000

2500

3200

4000

5000 6300

MWN-516

Narrow

50

50

50

50/—

—

MWN-616

Narrow

65

65

65

65/40

—

MWI-616

Standard

65

65

65

65/—

—

MWI-816

Standard

85

85

85

85/65

—

MWI-C16

Standard

100

100

85

85/65

85

MWN-520

Narrow

50

50

50

50/30

—

MWN-620

Narrow

65

65

65

65/40

—

MWI-620

Standard

65

65

65

65/50

—

MWI-820

Standard

85

85

85

85/65

—

MWI-C20

Standard

100

100

85

85/65

85

MWI-625

Standard

65

65

65

65/—

—

MWI-825

Standard

85

85

85

85/65

—

MWI-C25

Standard

100

100

85

85/65

85

MWI-H25

Standard

125

125

125

85/65

—

MWI-632

Standard

65

65

65

65/50

—

MWI-832

Standard

85

85

85

85/65

—

MWI-C32

Standard

100

100

85

85/65

85

MWI-H32

Standard

—

—

125

—

—

MWI-641 2

Standard

65

65

65

65/50

—

MWI-841 2

Standard

85

85

85

85/65

—

MWI-C41 2

Standard

105

105

85

85/65

—

MWN-64N

Double narrow

65

65

65

65/—

—

MWN-84N

Double narrow

85

85

65

85/—

—

MWN-C4N

Double narrow

100

100

65

100/—

—

MWI-64N

Double

65

65

65

65/—

—

MWI-84N

Double

85

85

85

85/—

—

MWI-C4N

Double

100

100

100

100/—

—

MWI-85N

Double

85

85

85

85/—

—

MWI-C5N

Double

100

100

100

100/—

—

MWI-86N

Double

85

85

85

85/—

—

MWI-C6N

Double

100

100

100

100/—

—

3 3 3 3 3

200, 250, 300, 400, 630, 800, 1000

3 3 3

200, 250, 300, 400, 630, 800, 1000, 1250

3 3 3

200, 250, 300, 400, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600

3 3 3

200, 250, 300, 400, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000

3 3

200, 250, 300, 400, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500

200, 250, 300, 400, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3200

3 3 3 3 3

2000, 2500, 3200, 4000

3 3 3 3

2500, 3200, 4000, 5000

3

3200, 4000, 5000, 6300

3 3

Notes 1 Interruption ratings shown based on breaker equipped with integral Digitrip RMS Trip Unit. Interruption ratings for non-automatic breakers are equal to the published breaker I cw rating. 2 Magnum IEC standard frame breakers rated for 4000A continuous current are available in drawout configuration only. Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

3 V4-T3-27

3.1 3

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

Digitrip Trip Units for Magnum IEC Rated Air Circuit Breakers

3 3 3 3 3 3

Trip Unit Type

Digitrip 520i

Digitrip 520Mi

Digitrip 520MCi

Digitrip 1150i+ 1

Ampere range

200–6300A

200–6300A

200–6300A

200–6300A

Interruption rating at 690V

40–100 kA

40–100 kA

40–100 kA

40–100 kA

rms sensing

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Ordering options

LI, LSI, LSIG, LSIA

LSI, LSIG

LSI, LSIG

LSI, LSIG, LSIA

Fixed rating plug (In)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Overtemperature trip

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Long delay setting

0.4–1.0 x (In)

0.4–1.0 x (In)

0.4–1.0 x (In)

0.4–1.0 x (In)

Protection and Coordination Protection

3 3 3

Long delay protection (L)

3 3 3

Short delay protection (S)

3 3 3 3

Instantaneous protection (I) Earth fault protection (G)

3 3 3 3

Long delay time I2t at 6 x Ir

2–24 sec

2–24 sec

2–24 sec

2–24 sec

Long delay time I4t

No

No

No

1–5 sec

IEC Type A, B, C curves

No

No

No

Yes

Long delay thermal memory

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

High load alarm

No

No

No

0.7–1.0 x Ir

Short delay pickup

200–1000% x (Ir) and M1

200–1000% x (Ir) and M1

200–1000% x (Ir) and M1

150–1000% x (Ir) and M1

Short delay time I2t at 8 x Ir

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

Short delay time flat

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

Short delay time ZSI

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Instantaneous pickup

200–1000% x (In) and M1

200–1000% x (In) and M1

200–1000% x (In) and M1

200–1000% x (In) and M1

Making current release

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Off position

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Earth fault alarm

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Earth fault pickup

25–100% x (In)

25–100% x (In)

25–100% x (In)

24–100% x (In)

Earth fault delay I2t at 0.625 x In

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

Earth fault delay flat

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

100–500 ms

Earth fault ZSI

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Earth fault memory

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Disable ground fault protection

No

No

No

Yes

Neutral protection (N)

Model LSI only

Model LSI only

Model LSI only

Model LSI only

System Diagnostics

3

Cause of trip LEDs

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Magnitude of trip information

No

No

No

Yes

3

Remote signal contacts

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Programmable contacts

No

No

No

2

3 3 3

Notes 1 Over and undervoltage alarm or trip, over and underfrequency alarm or trip, voltage unbalance alarm or trip, reverse power trip and phase rotation alarm are included. In = Rating plug rating. Ir = LDPU setting. i Trip units are only used on IEC breakers with earth fault.

3 3 3 3 V4-T3-28

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

3.1

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

Digitrip Trip Units for Magnum IEC Rated Air Circuit Breakers, continued

3 3 3

Trip Unit Type

Digitrip 520i

Digitrip 520Mi

Digitrip 520MCi

Digitrip 1150i+ 1

No

4-Character LCD

4-Character LCD

24-Character LED

3

System Monitoring Digital display Current (%) full scale sensor

No

Yes +/– 2%

Yes +/– 2%

Yes +/– 1%

Voltage (%) L to L

No

No

No

Yes +/– 1%

Power and energy (%)

No

No

No

Yes +/– 2%

Apparent power kVA and demand

No

No

No

Yes

Reactive power kVAR

No

No

No

Yes

3 3 3 3 3

Power factor

No

No

No

Yes

Crest factor

No

No

No

Yes

Power quality—harmonics

No

No

No

Yes

% THD

No

No

No

Yes

3

INCOM/PowerNet/TripLink/ Modbus 2/PROFIBUS 2

3 3

3

System Communications 2/

Type

—

—

INCOM/PowerNet/Modbus PROFIBUS 2

Power supply in breaker

N/A

Optional

Standard

Standard

Additional Features

3

Trip log (three events)

No

No

No

Yes

Electronic operations counter

No

No

No

Yes

Testing method 3

Test set

Test set

Test set

Integral and test set

Waveform capture

No

No

No

Yes

ARMs (Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System Mode)

No

No

Yes

Yes 4

Breaker health monitor

No

No

No

Yes

Programmable relay functions

No

No

No

Yes 1

3 3 3 3

Notes 1 Over and undervoltage alarm or trip, over and underfrequency alarm or trip, voltage unbalance alarm or trip, reverse power trip and phase rotation alarm are included. 2 Requires externally mounted MMINT or PMINT module. 3 Test set for secondary injection. 4 Contact Eaton for availability.

3 3

In = Rating plug rating. Ir = LDPU setting. i Trip units are only used on IEC breakers with earth fault.

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-29

3.1

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breaker

3

Magnum Options and Accessories

3

Breaker-Mounted Options and Accessories Magnum breakers are available with a comprehensive array of factory-installed breaker options to enable configuredto-order solutions for specified customer requirements. Field option kits are available to provide easy service, modification and customization of the breaker at the point of use.

3 3 3 3 3 3

●

3 3 3

●

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

●

Shunt Trip device (ST). Provides for remote electrically controlled breaker opening when energized by a rated voltage input Spring Charge Motor (MOT). Charges the breaker closing springs automatically, facilitating remote or local closing. The motor assembly includes its own cut-off switch that changes state at the end of the charging cycle. This contact can be wired out for external indication Spring Release device (SR). Provides for remote electrically controlled breaker closing when its coils are energized by a rated voltage input

●

●

●

●

●

3 3 3

Undervoltage Release (UVR). Trips the breaker when an existing voltage signal is lost or falls below an established threshold Auxiliary Switch. Up to 6a/6b auxiliary individual dedicated contacts are available for customer use to indicate if the breaker is in the OPEN or CLOSE position Mechanical Trip Indicator Flag. The red trip indicator flag pops out to provide local visual indication when the Digitrip RMS trip unit acts to trip the breaker on an overcurrent condition. Available in two options: an interlocked version that mechanically locks out the breaker until the indicator is manually reset and a non-interlocked version for indication only. Bell Alarm/Overcurrent Trip Switch (OTS). Provides 2 Form C (changeover) contacts that change state when the Digitrip RMS trip unit acts to trip the breaker on an overcurrent condition. The contacts are available for external indication or customer use and are manually reset by the Mechanical Trip Indicator Padlockable Pushbutton Cover. Permits padlocking hinged cover plates to block access to the PUSH ON and PUSH OFF buttons on the breaker faceplate

●

●

●

Mechanical Operations Counter. Records mechanical operations of the breaker over its installed life Key Off Lock Provisions. Enables mounting of a single cylinder Kirk®, Castell or Ronis key lock to lock the breaker in the OPEN position Latch Check Switch. Provides 1 Form C (changeover contact) that changes state when the breaker is ready to close. Can be wired to the Spring Release Device for fast transfer applications or wired for external ready-to-close indication

Auxiliary Switches Come in Modular 2a/2b Contact Stages Providing up to 6a/6b Dedicated Contacts

Arc Chutes are Easily Removable for Inspection and Access to Breaker Contacts

Heel-Toe Contact Design Provides Demonstrated Long Life and Includes Wear Indicator for Visual Inspection

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V4-T3-30

Shunt Trip, Spring Release and Undervoltage Release Device Installed on Accessory Deck

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

Mechanical Trip Indicator With Bell Alarm (OTS) Switches Mounted

3.1

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breaker

Magnum Breaker Control Device Application Guide—Vdc Breaker Control Device Nominal Voltage

24 Vdc

32 Vdc

48 Vdc

60 Vdc

125 Vdc

250 Vdc

3

Shunt Trip (ST)—Trip Circuit

3

Operational voltage range

70–110%

17–26 Vdc

—

34–53 Vdc

42–66 Vdc

77–138 Vdc

154–275 Vdc

Power consumption (inrush)

Required for 35 ms 1

250W

—

250W

250W

450W

450W

Opening time

Seconds

35 ms

—

35 ms

35 ms

35 ms

35 ms

3 3

Spring Release (SR)—Close Circuit

3

Operational voltage range

70–110%

17–26 Vdc

—

34–53 Vdc

42–66 Vdc

77–138 Vdc

154–275 Vdc

Power consumption (inrush)

Required for 200 ms

250W

—

250W

250W

450W

450W

Closing time

Seconds

40 ms

—

40 ms

40 ms

40 ms

40 ms

3 3

Spring Charge Motor (MOT) Operational voltage range

85–110% voltage

20–26 Vdc

—

41–53 Vdc

51–66 Vdc

94–138 Vdc

187–225 Vdc

Amperes (running)

Running

12.0A

—

5.0A

4.0A

2.0A

1.0A

Amperes (inrush)

% of running

300%

—

500%

500%

600%

600%

3 3

Power consumption

—

300W

—

250W

250W

250W

250W

Charging time

Seconds

5 sec

—

5 sec

5 sec

5 sec

5 sec

Operational voltage range

85–110% voltage

20–26 Vdc

27–35 Vdc

41–53 Vdc

51–66 Vdc

94–138 Vdc

187–275 Vdc

Dropout voltage range

30–60% voltage

7–14 Vdc

10–19 Vdc

14–29 Vdc

18–36 Vdc

33–75 Vdc

66–150 Vdc

3

Undervoltage Release (UVR)

3 3

Power consumption (inrush)

Required for 200 ms

250W

275W

275W

275W

450W

450W

Power consumption (continuous)

Required for 400 ms

18W

15W

18W

18W

10W

10W

Opening time

Seconds

70 ms

70 ms

70 ms

70 ms

70 ms

70 ms

3

Inductive load

0.5A

—

0.5A

—

0.5A

0.25A

3

Auxiliary Switches Minimum load contact rating

3

Magnum Breaker Control Device Application Guide—Vac Breaker Control Device Nominal Voltage

120 Vac

240 Vac

415 Vac

480 Vac

600 Vac

3 3

Shunt Trip (ST)—Trip Circuit Operational voltage range

70 –110%

77–140 Vac

146–264 Vac

—

—

—

Power consumption (inrush)

Required for 35 ms

450 VA

450 VA

—

—

—

Opening time

Seconds

35 ms

35 ms

—

—

—

Operational voltage range

70–110%

77–140 Vac

146–264 Vac

—

—

—

Power consumption (inrush)

Required for 200 ms

450 VA

450 VA

—

—

—

Closing time

Seconds

40 ms

40 ms

—

—

—

3

Operational voltage range

85–110% voltage

93–140 Vdc

177–305 Vdc

—

—

—

3

Amperes (running)

Running

2.0A

1.0A

—

—

—

Amperes (inrush)

% of running

600%

600%

—

—

—

Power consumption

—

250 VA

250 VA

—

—

—

Charging time

Seconds

5 sec

5 sec

—

—

—

85–110% voltage

94–140 Vac

177–264 Vac

323–457 Vac

408–528 Vac

510–660 Vac

Dropout voltage range

30–60% voltage

33–76 Vac

62–144 Vac

114–249 Vac

144–288 Vac

180–360 Vac

Power consumption (inrush)

Required for 200 ms

450 VA

400 VA

480 VA

400 VA

400 VA

Power consumption (continuous)

Required for 400 ms

10 VA

10 VA

10 VA

10 VA

10 VA

Opening time

Seconds

70 ms

70 ms

70 ms

70 ms

70 ms

Inductive load

10A

10A

—

—

—

3 3

Spring Release (SR)—close circuit

3

Spring Charge Motor (MOT)

3 3

Undervoltage Release (UVR) Operational voltage range

3 3 3

Auxiliary Switches Minimum load contact rating

3

3

Note 1 100% duty shunt trips require power consumption (inrush) for 200 ms.

3 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-31

3.1

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breaker

3

Wiring Diagrams

3

Typical Magnum Breaker Control Circuit

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Legend: LS Limit Switch for Closing Spring MOT Motor for Spring Charging ST Shunt Trip 1 SR Spring Release UVR Undervoltage Release OTS Overcurrent Trip Switch Description of Operation: 1 — Motor is energized through LS contact. 2 — Motor runs and charges closing spring. 3 — When closing spring is fully charged, LS contacts change state. 4 — Close contacts energize SR coil. 5 — When breaker closes, “b” opens. 6 — LS contacts change state and motor recharges closing springs.

3 3 3 3

Notes * Contacts shown for breaker open (not fully charged), not tripped. – – – – Dotted line denotes Magnum Breaker. 1 Not needed with 100% duty rated shunt.

Control Power

Close

Open

B12

B15

G

Open

B26

B10

Lever in Door Switch (Drawout Only)

SR

L.S.

R

B24

A1

A2

A3

a. b.

ST

a.

UVR

OTS 1* OTS 2*

MOT

B13

B14

B27

3

B11

B25

MDSEOBKR

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V4-T3-32

A7

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

A8

A4

A5

A6

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

3.1

Contents

Magnum DC (Direct Current) Low Voltage Switches

Description

Page

Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . Magnum DS Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magnum MDSL Current Limiting Power Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated Case Circuit Breakers Magnum IEC Rated Air Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . Magnum DC (Direct Current) Low Voltage Switches Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Series NRX Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . Medium Voltage Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

V4-T3-2

3

V4-T3-6

3

V4-T3-12

3

V4-T3-23

V4-T3-34 V4-T3-35 V4-T3-42

3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Magnum DC (Direct Current) Low Voltage Switches Product Description

Features and Benefits

Eaton Magnum DC switches are a comprehensive offering of third-party and globally certified DC switches that are designed to provide excellent safety with a high level of performance that meets the demands of a global market.

The new DC switch in the industry-proven Magnum platform provides DC technology in a common power breaker platform. ●

Applications The new line of Magnum DC switches covers a wide range industry applications. ●

●

●

Utility companies incorporating DC facility power and control for emergency or redundant power Backup UPS power systems requiring means to disconnect the battery for isolation and maintenance SCR and drive isolation switches for maintenance and emergency disconnect

●

●

●

The DC switch provides disconnect and switching to meet demanding industry standards: ● UL1066—300 Vdc, 50 kA withstand and interruption, up to 3200A continuous current ● UL 489—600 Vdc, 50 kA withstand and interruption, up to 3200A continuous current ● IEC 60947-2—1000 Vdc, 25 kA interruption and 65 kA withstand, up to 3200A Common accessories with the Magnum AC line of power circuit breakers reduces inventory and integration time Fixed and drawout versions address important design criteria, balancing cost, size and serviceability Internationally approved factory-installed and fieldinstallable accessories identical to the Magnum air circuit breaker offering

3

Standards and Certifications UL and ANSI Test Certifications Magnum DC switches meet or exceed the applicable ANSI, NEMA, UL and CSA standards, including: ●

●

●

●

●

ANSI C37.14 (Low Voltage DC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures) ANSI C37.16 (Preferred Ratings, Related Requirements, and Application Recommendations for Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers and AC and DC Power Circuit Breakers) ANSI C37.17 (Trip Devices for AC and General Purpose DC Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers) UL 1066 (Standard for Low Voltage AC and DC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures) UL 489 Molded Case Switches

IEC Test Certification Magnum Air Circuit Breakers meet or exceed the applicable IEC standards ●

Approvals and Marks UL listed: Magnum DS Breaker UL File No. E52096 and Cassette UL File No. E204565 ● ABS (American Bureau of Shipping) Type Approval ● CE ● CCC (Certificate for China Compulsory Product Certification) to GB14048.2-2001 ● Det Norske Veritas (DNV) ● Lloyds of London ● South African Bureau of Standards (SABS) ● For a complete and comprehensive listing of all low voltage power breakers, please visit www.eaton.com ●

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Product Selection Contact Eaton for pricing.

3 3

EN/IEC 60947-2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

3

3 3 3 V4-T3-33

3.1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Magnum ANSI DC Switches—Switchgear Class UL 1066 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers 1

Frame Amperes

Breaker Type (First Six Digits)

Frame Type

Poles in Series

Interruption Rating at 300 Vdc

Interruption Rating at 600 Vdc

Interruption Rating at 1000 Vdc

Withstand Rating

Fixed Internal Instantaneous Trip

Available Current Sensor and Rating Plugs for Digitrip RMS Trip Unit (Establishes Breaker in Rating)

1600

DAS-516

Standard

2

50

—

—

50

—

None

2000

DAS-520

Standard

2

50

—

—

50

—

None

3200

DAS-532

Standard

2

50

—

—

50

—

None

Magnum ANSI DC Switches—UL 489 Switchboard

Frame Amperes

Breaker Type (First Six Digits)

Frame Type

Poles in Series

Interruption Rating at 300 Vdc

Interruption Rating at 600 Vdc

Interruption Rating at 1000 Vdc

Withstand Rating

Fixed Internal Instantaneous Trip

Available Current Sensor and Rating Plugs for Digitrip RMS Trip Unit (Establishes Breaker in Rating)

3200

DBS-532 2

Standard

3

—

50

—

50

—

None

Fixed Internal Instantaneous Trip

Available Current Sensor and Rating Plugs for Digitrip RMS Trip Unit (Establishes Breaker in Rating)

Magnum IEC DC Switchgear Class IEC 60947-2 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers 1

Frame Amperes

Breaker Type (First Six Digits)

Frame Type

Poles in Series

Interruption Rating at 300 Vdc

Interruption Rating at 600 Vdc

800

DEM-208

Narrow

3

—

—

25

65

—

None

DEK-208

Standard

3

—

—

25

65

—

None

1000

1250

3

1600

3

2000

3 3

Power Circuit Breakers

Technical Data and Specifications

3

3

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses

Interruption Rating at 1000 Vdc

Withstand Rating

DEM-210

Narrow

3

—

—

25

65

—

None

DEK-210

Standard

3

—

—

25

65

—

None

DEM-212

Narrow

3

—

—

25

65

—

None

DEK-212

Standard

3

—

—

25

65

—

None

DEM-216

Narrow

3

—

—

25

65

—

None

DEK-216

Standard

3

—

—

25

65

—

None

DEM-220

Narrow

3

—

—

25

65

—

None

DEK-220

Standard

3

—

—

25

65

—

None

2500

DEK-225

Standard

3

—

—

25

65

—

None

3200

DEK-232

Standard

3

—

—

25

65

—

None

Notes 1 All DC products are non-automatic breakers. 2 DBS is rated at UL 489 standards for 600 Vdc.

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V4-T3-34

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

3.1

Contents

Series NRX Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

Description

NRX Front Connect

Page

Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . Magnum DS Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magnum MDSL Current Limiting Power Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magnum IEC Rated Air Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . Magnum DC (Direct Current) Low Voltage Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series NRX Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Medium Voltage Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V4-T3-2

3

V4-T3-6

3

V4-T3-12

3

V4-T3-15 V4-T3-23 V4-T3-33 V4-T3-36 V4-T3-36 V4-T3-37 V4-T3-39 V4-T3-42

Product Description

The breaker ratings are: ● 800A for UL 1066 ● 800A, 1200A for UL 489 ● 630–1600A IEC 60947-2 from a voltage range of 220–725 Vac

The dimensions and design of Series NRX allows up to eight UL 1066 or UL 489 breakers in a 24-inch (600 mm) wide structure. The one frame size, regardless of ampere rating, reduces drawing conversion, structure integration time and parts inventory for several board, gear and machinery applications.

The Series NRX circuit breaker provides all the capabilities of a power circuit breaker in the compact size of a molded case breaker. It offers you the same protection and performance —along with increased flexibility—at half the size of a typical power circuit breaker.

●

Series NRX utilizes several innovative technologies:

Application Description The Series NRX is a compact globally certified low voltage power (air) circuit breaker. It is rated for 800A (UL 1066), 800A and 1200A (UL 489) and 630–1600A (IEC 60947-2) with an interrupting capacity of 65 kA with short time withstand at 42 kA at the 440/480 Vac level.

●

Features, Benefits and Functions

●

●

Rogowski coil—does not saturate like iron core sensors, and one sensor accommodates 200–1600 ampere range. You never have to change a sensor and CTs are not required Tension clamp secondary terminals—10A continuous rating at 600V meets UL/ CSA/RoHS and UL-94 V0. Mounted directly to fixed breaker or drawout cassette, they reduce wiring throughout enclosure and provide clean, organized wiring schemes

3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Series NRX Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers Series NRX is a low voltage power circuit breaker suitable for UL 1558, UL 891, and IEC switchgear and switchboards. The compact size and weight of three-pole drawout with cassette Series NRX, see Page V4-T3-41, allows for a 24.00 (609.6 mm) switchgear enclosure.

3

●

● ●

●

Breaker-mounted communication modules —communication modules for INCOM™, Modbus® and PROFIBUS mount directly to the cassette, reducing the space and room required in gear for communication capability “Direct Drive” mechanism— symmetrically loaded forces of the two-staged stored energy mechanism improves robustness, reliability, and achieves improved breaker life ratings Fold-up cassette—with this simple design, all items in a cassette are replaceable without removing the cassette from the cell “Arc chute” design Breaker-mounted racking or levering-in device— Racking device is mounted on the breaker, decreasing the width of the cassette, because the cassette is not burdened with the cost or parts of the lev-in Plug-N-Play accessories— No special tools needed. Accessory comes with plug and wires ready to install

●

Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System (ARMS)—Eaton’s patented ARMS technology provides maintenance staff with improved safety of downstream maintenance locations using a simple and reliable method to reduce fault clearing times and energy during an arc flash event (radiation, sound, pressure, temperature). ARMS uses a separate analog trip circuit, providing faster signal processing and interruption times than the standard (digital) “instantaneous” protection. The ARMS function is activated either directly on the circuit breaker through a local switch or remotely through communications or a digital input

The use of these technologies allows Series NRX to offer a life of 20,000 mechanical operations and 10,000 electrical operations with a high degree of reliability.

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-35

3.1 3

3 3 3

●

●

● ● ● ●

3 3 3 3

Power Circuit Breakers

Standards and Certifications

3 3

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses

●

●

UL 1066 (low voltage AC power circuit breakers used in enclosures) UL 489 (molded case circuit breakers, molded case switches and circuit breaker enclosures) EN 45011 CEI EN 60947 BS EN 60439-1 Form 4b IEC 60439-1 (low voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies) IEC 60947-1 (low voltage switchgear and controlgear —Part 1 general rules) IEC 60947-2 (low voltage switchgear and controlgear —Part 2 circuit breakers)

●

●

●

●

IEC 60947-3 (switches, disconnectors, switchdisconnectors and fuse-combination units) CSA 22.2 (molded case circuit breakers, molded case switches and circuit breaker enclosures) ANSI C37.51 (metalenclosed low voltage AC power circuit breaker switchgear assemblies— conformance test procedures) ANSI C37.20.1 (metalenclosed low voltage power circuit breaker switchgear)

3

●

●

●

●

ANSI C37.60 (requirements for overhead, pad-mounted dry-type and submersible automatic reclosers and fault interrupters for AC systems) ANSI C37.50 (low voltage AC power circuit breakers used in enclosures—test procedures) ANSI C37.17 (for trip devices for AC and general purpose DC low voltage power circuit breakers) ANSI C37.16 (low voltage power circuit breakers and AC power circuit protectors—preferred ratings, related requirements, and application recommendations)

3 3 3

Reference Information

3

List of Instruction Leaflets and Manuals

3

Description

Publication Number

3

Instruction Book for Fixed and Drawout Breaker/Cassette

MN01301001E

IL Drawout Circuit Breaker and Cassette Rejection Interlocks

IL01301006E

IL Auxiliary Switch in Right Accessory Tray

IL01301007E

IL UVR/ST/OTS in Left Accessory Tray

IL01301008E

IL Motor Operator

IL01301010E

IL Spring Release Device and Latch Check Switch (Numbers 5 and 6 are Combining into one Document)

IL01301010E

3

IL Door Escutcheon and Gasket Kit

IL01301012E

IL Drawout Cassette IP 20 Shutters

IL01301013E

3

IL Fixed Breaker Arc Hood Kit

IL01301014E

IL Fixed Breaker Front/Rear/Cable Connectors

IL01301015E

3

IL Drawout Cassette Front/Rear/Cable Connectors

IL01301016E

IL Racking Device Levering Device

IL01301018E

3

IL Mechanical Pop-Out Indicator and Interlocked Indicator

IL01301019E

IL Breaker and Cassette Phase Barriers

IL01301021E

3

IL Cassette Rails

IL01301025E

3

IL Mounting Feet

IL01301030E

IL Surface Mount

IL01301036E

3 3

3 3 3 3 3

IL Terminal Blocks

IL01301037E

IL Modbus Communication Adapter Module

IL01301034E

IL INCOM Communication Adapter Module

IL01301033E

IL Digitrip 520 and 520M Manual

IL70C1619H01

IL IP55 Cover

IL01301038E

PROFIBUS Communication Module

IL01301035E

IL Kirk Key Lock

IL01301039E

IL Ronis Key Lock

IL01301040E

IL Pushbutton Covers

IL01301041E

V4-T3-36

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

●

● ● ●

●

ANSI C37.13 (IEEE® standard for low voltage AC power circuit breakers used in enclosures) CCC—China KEMA (&CB) UL 891 (deadfront switchboard) UL 1558 (metal-enclosed low voltage power circuit breaker switchgear)

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

3.1

Catalog Number Selection

3

Series NRX Type NF-Frame Circuit Breaker (Exclusionary Rules Apply)

3

N S S6 08 3 W 52 8 A B A N 4 X N D X Breaker Frame Size N = Type NF, 630–1600A, (70 mm pole spacing) Standard, Mechanism, Device S = UL 1066, stored energy, power breaker X = UL 489, stored energy, insulated case breaker E = IEC 60947-2, stored energy, air breaker Fault Current Rating S4 = 42 kA at 480 Vac UL or 415 Vac IEC S5 = 50 kA at 480 Vac UL or 415 Vac IEC S6 = 65 kA at 480 Vac UL or 415 Vac IEC Frame Rating (Amperes) 07 = 630 (IEC only) 08 = 800 10 = 1000 (IEC only) 12 = 1200 (UL only) 13 = 1250 (IEC only) 16 = 1600 (On NF: IEC only) Poles, Phasing 3 = Three-pole, ABC 4 = Four-pole, NABC

W B R F

Mounting Configuration = Drawout = Fixed mount rear connected with side mounting brackets = Fixed mount rear connected without side mounting brackets = Front connected, fixed mount, for bus or cable connections with side mounting brackets

Rating Plug (Amperes) 1 = 200 2 = 250 3 = 300 4 = 400 5 = 500 6 = 600 7 = 630 8 = 800 A = 1000 B = 1200 C = 1250 D = 1600

Motor Operator M = Manually operated B = 110–125 Vac W = 110–125 Vdc T = 208–250 Vac P = 220–250 Vdc L = 24 Vdc H = 48 Vdc S = 60 Vdc Shunt Trip N = No shunt trip A = 110–127 Vac/Vdc R = 208–240 Vac/Vdc L = 24 Vdc H = 48 Vdc S = 60 Vdc

N E A B C R S T L P Q H J K 1 2 3

3 3

Spring Release, Latch Check Switch = No spring release, no LCS = No spring release, LCS wired external = 110–127 Vac/Vdc, no LCS = 110–127 Vac/Vdc, spring release LCS = 110–127 Vac/Vdc, LCS wired external = 208–240 Vac/Vdc, no LCS = 208–240 Vac/Vdc, spring release LCS = 208–240 Vac/Vdc, LCS wired external = 24 Vdc, no LCS = 24 Vdc, spring release LCS = 24 Vdc, LCS wired external = 48 Vdc, no LCS = 48 Vdc, spring release LCS = 48 Vdc, LCS wired external = 60 Vdc, no LCS = 60 Vdc, spring release LCS = 60 Vdc, LCS wired external

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Trip Unit, Power Supply SW = Switch—no MCR—42 kA 1B = 150 LSI, with ZSI , 24 Vdc for IEC and UL 1066 (non-auto) 12 = 1150i LSI, no ZSI, 24 Vdc 22 = 520 LI, no ZSI 13 = 1150i LSI, with ZSI, 24 Vdc 52 = 520 LSI, no ZSI 1E = 1150 LSIA, no ZSI, 24 Vdc 53 = 520 LSI, with ZSI 1F = 1150 LSIA, with ZSI, 24 Vdc 5G = 520 LSIG, no ZSI 1L = 1150 LSIG, no ZSI, 24 Vdc 5H = 520 LSIG, with ZSI 1M = 1150 LSIG, with ZSI, 24 Vdc M2 = 520M LSI, no ZSI, 24 Vdc 14 = 1150 LSIGA, no ZSI, 24 Vdc M3 = 520M LSI, with ZSI, 24 Vdc 15 = 1150 LSIGA, with ZSI, 24 Vdc MA = 520M LSIA, no ZSI, 24 Vdc 1C = 1150 LSI, no ZSI, 24 Vdc, with ARMS MB = 520M LSIA, with ZSI, 24 Vdc 1D = 1150 LSI, with ZSI, 24 Vdc, with ARMS MG = 520M LSIG, no ZSI, 24 Vdc 16 = 1150i LSI, no ZSI, 24 Vdc, with ARMS MH = 520M LSIG, with ZSI, 24 Vdc 17 = 1150i LSI, with ZSI, 24 Vdc, with ARMS R2 = 520M LSI, no ZSI, 24 Vdc, with ARMS 1J = 1150 LSIA, no ZSI, 24 Vdc, with ARMS R3 = 520M LSI, with ZSI, 24 Vdc, with ARMS 1K = 1150 LSIA, with ZSI, 24 Vdc, with ARMS RA = 520M LSIA, no ZSI, 24 Vdc, with ARMS 1R = 1150 LSIG, with ZSI, 24 Vdc, with ARMS RB = 520M LSIA, with ZSI, 24 Vdc, with ARMS 1S = 1150 LSIG, with ZSI, 24 Vdc, with ARMS RG = 520M LSIG, no ZSI, 24 Vdc, with ARMS 18 = 1150i LSIGA, no ZSI, 24 Vdc, with ARMS RH = 520M LSIG, with ZSI, 24 Vdc, with ARMS 19 = 1150i LSIGA, with ZSI, 24 Vdc, with ARMS 1A = 1150 LSI, with ZSI, 24 Vdc

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-37

3.1 3

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

Series NRX Type NF-Frame Circuit Breaker (Exclusionary Rules Apply), continued

N S S6 08 3 W 52 8 A B A N 4 X N D X

3 3 3 3 3 3

UVR, Second Shunt Trip N = None A = 110–125 Vac/Vdc UVR R = 220–250 Vac/Vdc UVR L = 24 Vdc UVR H = 48 Vdc UVR S = 60 Vdc UVR G = 32 Vdc UVR 1 = 110–127 Vac/Vdc second shunt trip 2 = 208–240 Vac/Vdc second shunt trip 4 = 24 Vdc second shunt trip 8 = 48 Vdc second shunt trip 9 = 60 Vdc second shunt trip

3

Future Use X = All product Trip Indicator and Bell Alarm N None X Trip indicator Z Trip indicator M Interlock trip indicator Y Interlock trip indicator 1 None 2 Trip indicator 3 Trip indicator 4 Interlock trip indicator 5 Interlock trip indicator

Auxiliary, Switches, Label Language E = No auxiliary switches, no label (parent) 2 = 2 Form C, English 4 = 4 Form C, English

3 3 3

OTS None None 2 Form C None 2 Form C None None 2 Form C None 2 Form C

Secondary Terminal Blocks Per breaker options Per breaker options Per breaker options Per breaker options Per breaker options Full complement Full complement Full complement Full complement Full complement

Padlock Provisions N A B C

No No Yes (plastic/plastic) Yes (plastic/plastic)

Key Lock Provisions None — — —

Operations Counter No Provided No Provided

3 3 3

Drawout Breaker Shipping, Fixed Breaker Terminals (Door Frame Kit ships as standard unless noted otherwise) D = Drawout (or parent) breaker shipping alone, without door frame kit C = Drawout breaker in cassette, no shutters, no terminals 1 = Drawout breaker in cassette, no shutters, short vertical/horizontal 2 = Drawout breaker in cassette, no shutters, long vertical/horizontal 4 = Drawout breaker in cassette, with shutters, short vertical/horizontal 5 = Drawout breaker in cassette, with shutters, long vertical/horizontal 9 = Drawout breaker in cassette, no shutters, no terminals F = Fixed terminal adapters for rear connect, with mounting feet, short vertical/horizontal adapter kit H = Fixed terminal adapters for rear connect, with mounting feet, long vertical/horizontal adapter kit J = Front connected, fixed mount, no terminals K = Rear connect, fixed mount, no terminals

3 3

Series NRX Type NF-Frame Cassette

3

NX 12 3 F A B N S N N N C

3 3 3

Cassette Family and Breaker Frame NS = UL 1066 N-Frame NX = UL 489 N-Frame NE = IEC N-Frame

3

Continuous Ampere Range 08 = 800 (UL 1066) 12 = 800–1200 (UL 489) 16 = 630–1600 (IEC)

3 3

Poles and Phasing (Facing Front of Breaker) 3 = Three-pole ABC 4 = Four-pole NABC

3 3 3 3

F G H N

Load Terminal Connections = With flat tapped pads only = With vertical/horizontal bus adapter kit (short style) = With front-connected kit = No cassette stabs (interunit only)

Cassette Shipping C = Cassette only B = Breaker shipped in cassette Future N = None Arc Hood A = Arc hood installed (default) Door Frame Gasket and Rejection Kits B = Door kit included (default), with rejection kit D = Door kit included, no rejection kit R = Not included, with rejection kit N = Not included, with rejection kit TOC Switches (Truck Operated Cell) N = Not included (default)

3 3 3 V4-T3-38

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

Future N = None

N B F C

Secondary Contact Terminals Installed = None = Breaker defined, when breaker ships in cassette = Full complement = Common options when cassette ships alone

Shutters N = Not included (default) S = Included

3.1

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

Technical Data and Specifications

3

Mounting and Load Connection Configurations Breaker Type

Breaker Mechanism

Standard Bus Connection Provisions

Rear-Connected Horizontal/Vertical Adapter Kit With and Without Cover (Kits Shipped Unassembled)

Drawout Breaker

Stored energy

Finger clusters

—

3

Front-Connected Horizontal/Vertical Adapter Kit With and Without Cover (Kits Shipped Separately)

Cable-Connected Cable Terminals With Cover

3

—

—

3 3

Cassette

—

Rear-connected pre-drilled bus pads

—

3

—

3 3

Fixed

Stored energy

3

Rear-connected pre-drilled bus pads

3 TA700NB1M

3

NRV Front Connect—Cable Terminals Specifications Maximum Breaker Terminal Body Amperes Material

Wire Type

AWG Wire Range/ No. Conductors

Metric Wire Range mm2

Catalog Number

With Control Wire Provided

3 3

Standard Cu/Al Pressure Terminals TA1000NB1M

700

Aluminum

Cu/Al

1–500 kcmil (2)

50–240

TA700NB1M

TA700NB1MCWT

1000

Aluminum

Cu/Al

3/0–400 kcmil (3)

95–185

TA1000NB1M

TA1000NB1MCWT

1200

Aluminum

Cu/Al

4/0–500 kcmil (4)

120–240

TA1200NB1M

TA1200NB1MCWT

3 3 3

TA1200NB1M

3 3

NRX Front Connect— Bus Conductor Extension

3 3

UL 1066 Ratings

UL 489 Ratings

3

Description

Rating

Description

Rating

Rating

Continuous current rating (amperes)

800

Continuous current rating (amperes)

800

1200

3 3

Short-Circuit Rating (kA)

Short-Circuit Rating (kA)

254 Vac

85

240 Vac

85

85

508 Vac

65

480 Vac

65

65

635 Vac

35

600 Vac

42

42

Short-time withstand (kA) 1

42

Short-time withstand (kA)

42

42

3 3

IEC 60947-2 Ratings Description

Rating

Rating

Rating

Continuous current rating (amperes)

630 and 800

1000 and 1250

1600

3

Short-circuit rating (kA)

Icu

Ics

Icu

Ics

Icu

Ics

240/254 Vac

85

50

85

50

85

50

415/435 Vac

65

50

65

50

65

50

690/725 Vac

42

42

42

42

42

42

Short-time withstand = Icw (kA)

42

42

42

42

42

42

Note 1 35 kAIC short-time withstand at 635V level only. All other voltages 42 kAIC short-time withstand.

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

3 3 3 3

V4-T3-39

3.1

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

3

Accessory Ratings

3

Shunt Trip Control Voltages

Frequency

Operational Voltage Range 70–110%

Inrush/Continuous Power Consumption (VA)

Opening Time (ms)

24

DC

17–26

500/5

25

3

48

DC

34–53

530/5

25

3

110–127

50–60 Hz

77–140

540/5

25

110–125

DC

77–138

540/5

25

208–240

50–60 Hz

146–264

500/5

25

220–250

DC

154–275

515/5

25

Control Voltages

Frequency

Operational Voltage Range 85–110%

Dropout Volts 35–60%

Inrush/Continuous Power Consumption (VA)

24

DC

20–26

8–14

500/5

50

32

DC

27–35

11–19

620/5

50

48

DC

41–53

17–29

850/5

50

3

110–127

50–60 Hz

94–140

44–94

890/5

50

3

110–125

DC

94–138

44–94

890/5

50

208–240

50–60 Hz

177–264

84–125

910/5

50

3

220–250

DC

187–275

88–132

910/5

50

380–415

AC

323–457

145–228

960/5

50

3

480

AC

408–528

168–288

800/8

50

600

AC

510–660

210–360

800/12

50

Control Voltages

Frequency

Operational Voltage Range 70–110%

Inrush Power Consumption (VA)

Closing Time (ms)

24

DC

17–26

500

25

48

DC

34–53

530

25

3

110–127

50–60 Hz

77–140

540

25

110–125

DC

77–138

540

25

3

208–240

50–60 Hz

146–264

500

25

220–250

DC

154–275

515

25

Control Voltages

Frequency

Contact Rating (Amperes)

250

50–60 Hz

10

125

DC

0.5

250

DC

0.25

3

3 3 3 3 3

3 3 3 3

UVR

Spring Release

3 3 3 3 3

OCT/OTS

3

Auxiliary Switch

3

Control Voltages

Frequency

3

250

50–60 Hz

10

125

DC

0.5

250

DC

0.25

V4-T3-40

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

3

Contact Rating (Amperes)

3

Opening Time (ms)

3.1

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

Breaker Position/Continuity Breaker Position

Continuity Between Red and Black Lead Pairs

Continuity Between Blue and Black Lead Pairs

Open

NO

45 and 43

NO

46 and 47

NO

51 and 49

Closed

NO

52 and 53

44 and 43

NO

48 and 47

NO

50 and 49

NO

54 and 53

NO

3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Motor Operator Control Voltages

Frequency

Operational Voltage Range 85–110%

Running Current (A)

Typical Inrush Current

Power Consumption (VA)

Maximum Charging Time (Sec)

24

DC

20–26

5

500%

150

3

48

DC

41–53

3

500%

150

3

110–127

50–60 Hz

94–140

2

300%

280

3

110–125

DC

94–138

1

500%

150

3

208–240

50–60 Hz

177–264

1

1000%

280

4

220–250

DC

187–275

1

1000%

280

4

3 3 3 3 3 3

Control Voltages and Currents Control Voltages

24 Vdc

48 Vdc

110–125 Vdc

110–127 Vac

220–250 Vdc

208–240 Vac

Close current (inrush)

21

11

5

5

2

2

Shunt trip current (ST)—(inrush/continuous)

21 / .2

11 / .1

5 / .04

5 / .04

2 / .02

2 / .02

Charge motor current—(inrush/continuous)

TBD

TBD

5/1

6/2

10 / 1

10 / 1

3 3

Current

3 3

Operating Voltage Rating Close

17–26

34–53

77–138

77–140

154–275

146–264

Trip

17–26

34–53

77–138

77–140

154–275

146–264

Charge

20–26

41–53

94–138

94–140

187–275

177–264

3 3 3

Dimensions

3

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3

Series NRX Three-Pole Drawout with Cassette Height

Width

Depth

Lbs (kg)

14.18 (360.2)

10.02 (254.5)

10.68 (271.3)

85.00 (38.59)

3 3 3

Fixed Circuit Breaker and Drawout with Cassette Breaker Type

Height

Width

Depth

Lbs (kg)

Three-pole

13.18 (334.8)

8.25 (209.6)

7.15 (181.6)

33.58 (15.23)

Four-pole

13.18 (334.8)

11.00 (279.4)

7.15 (181.6)

44.40 (20.14)

3 3

3

Fixed

Drawout with Cassette Three-pole

14.18 (360.2)

10.02 (254.5)

10.69 (271.5)

85.20 (38.65)

Four-pole

14.18 (360.2)

12.69 (322.3)

10.69 (271.5)

104.00 (47.17)

3 3

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-41

3.1 3

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

Type VCP-W/VCP-T Medium Voltage Vacuum Circuit Breaker

Description

3

Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . Magnum DS Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magnum MDSL Current Limiting Power Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magnum IEC Rated Air Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . Magnum DC (Direct Current) Low Voltage Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series NRX Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . Medium Voltage Circuit Breakers Features, Benefits and Functions . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Medium Voltage Circuit Breakers

3

Product Description

3

Breakers and structures for switchgear assemblies:

3

ANSI ● VCP-W medium voltage circuit breakers ● 5/15 kV VCP-W (K>1, K=1, narrow design, extra-capability and generator circuit breakers available) ● 27 kV and 38 kV (extracapability circuit breakers available) ● Ground and test devices ● Dummy elements

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Contents

●

VCP-T medium voltage circuit breakers ● 5/15 kV VCP-T (capacitor switching and magnetic actuated circuit breakers available) ● Ground and test devices ● Dummy elements

Application Description IEC ● T-VAC medium voltage circuit breakers ● 5/15 kV VCP-T (capacitor switching circuit breakers available) ● Ground and test devices ● Dummy elements ●

VCP-W IEC medium voltage circuit breakers ● 3.6/7.2/12/17.5 kV ● 24 kV

OEM Structures ● Metal-clad, compartmented design ● Barebones ● Power modules ● Mini modules ● Breaker compartment kits

Eaton's medium voltage circuit breakers offer the latest in vacuum technology, providing superior control and protection of medium voltage power equipment in utility, industrial, commercial, mining and marine installations. Built in a state-of-the-art ISO® 9002 certified facility, they meet and exceed all ANSI and IEC requirements. Available in drawout configurations, Eaton’s vacuum circuit breakers are a result of our ongoing commitment to research and development, which have resulted in significant breakthrough technologies. Each breaker is provided with its unique Quality Assurance Certificate that documents all tests and inspections performed.

3 3 3 3 3 3 V4-T3-42

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

Page V4-T3-2 V4-T3-6 V4-T3-12 V4-T3-15 V4-T3-23 V4-T3-33 V4-T3-35 V4-T3-43 V4-T3-43 V4-T3-44 V4-T3-44

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

3.1

Features, Benefits and Functions VCP-W Standard Features ● Eaton’s maintenance-free vacuum interrupters with visual contact erosion indicator ● Non-sliding/non-rolling V-Flex™ current transfer system ● Glass polyester insulation ● Cycloaliphatic epoxy insulation (optional with Type VCPW-SE breakers) for 27 kV and 38 kV breakers ● Front-accessible operating mechanism ● Electrically operated trip-free, spring stored energy mechanism ● Interlocks that prevent moving a closed circuit breaker into or out of the connected position ● Closing springs automatically discharge before moving the circuit breaker into or out of the enclosure ● Provisions for manual charging of closing springs ● Manual close and trip pushbuttons ● Operations counter ● Closing spring charged/ discharged indicator ● Circuit breaker Open/ Closed indicator ● Auxiliary switch with 2A/3B for DC and 1A/3B for AC spare contacts ● Spring charging motor, close coil, trip coil, latch check switch and anti-pump relay

3 VCP-T Standard Features ● Small without compromise—significantly smaller and lighter than comparable breakers ● Grounded steel barrier between mechanism and primary conductors ● Spring loaded, silver-plated primary disconnects (drawout breaker) ● Silver-plated primary connections (fixed circuit breaker) ● Manual charging of closing springs (includes shunt trip) ● Integral spring charging handle ● Auxiliary switch (5a and 5b contacts) ● Mechanical operations counter ● 24, 48, 125 and 250 Vdc, 120 and 240 Vac control ● Shunt trip ● ON and OFF pushbuttons ● Integral lifting hooks ● Through- or behind-door operation ● Identified/dedicated secondaries ● Secondary umbilical cord (drawout circuit breaker) ● Secondary disconnect block (fixed circuit breaker) ● Two-step stored energy mechanism ● O–0.3s–CO–15s–CO ● Anti-pump ● Trip free ● Latch check switch ● Visible contact erosion indicator ● Visible contact wipe indicator ● Disconnect, Test and Connect (drawout circuit breaker) ● Integral levering mechanism (drawout circuit breaker) ● Field-installable accessories

Standards and Certifications ●

●

●

●

●

3

Designed, tested and certified in accordance with ANSI and IEC standards Applicable ANSI standards C37.04-1979 or 1999, C37.09-1979 or 1999, C37.06-2000 and C37.013 Internal arc resistance tested to IEC 298, Appendix AA, 25 kA for 1 second Drawout circuit breaker fully qualified to IEC 56 by testing inside the IEC 298 switchgear cubicle IEEE C37.013 and amendment C37.013a-2007

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-43

3.1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

Product Selection Please contact your Eaton sales representative for additional product information and to review your specific application and required product configuration.

Technical Data and Specifications ANSI Standards ANSI Standard Ratings—VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breaker Types Rated on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis— Standard Circuit Breakers 1 Circuit Breaker Type Description

50 VCP-WND250

50 VCP-W250

50 VCP-W350

50 VCP-W500 (63 kA)

75 VCP-W500

150 VCP-W1500 150 VCP-W500 150 VCP-W750 150 VCP-W1000 (63 kA)

Identification Nominal voltage class kV

4.16

4.16

4.16

4.16

7.2

13.8

13.8

13.8

13.8

Nominal three-phase MVA class

250

250

350

—

500

500

750

1000

—

4.76

4.76

4.76

4.76

8.25

15

15

15

15

Voltage range factor K 2 1.24

1.24

1.19

1.00

1.25

1.30

1.30

1.30

1.00

Power frequency (1 min.) 19 kV rms

19

19

19

36

36

36

36

36

Impulse kV peak

60

60

60

60

95

95

95

95

95

1200

1200

1200

1200

1200

1200

1200

1200

1200

2000

2000

2000

2000

2000

2000

2000

2000

3000

3000

3000

3000

3000

3000

3000

3000

29

41

63

33

18

28

37

63

Rated Values Voltage Maximum voltage E kV rms

Insulation Level Withstand test voltage

Current Continuous current at 60 Hz amperes

Short-circuit current (at rated max. kV) I kA rms

29

Interrupting time cycles

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

3

Permissible tripping delay Y seconds

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

3

Maximum voltage divided by K E/K kV rms 2

3.85

3.85

4.0

4.76

6.6

11.5

11.5

11.5

15.0

36

36

49

63

41

23

36

48

63

Closing and latching capability kA peak

97

97

132

170

111

62

97

130

170

Closing and latching momentary capability

58

58

78

101

66

37

58

77

101

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Current Values Maximum symmetrical interrupting capability Short-time current K x 1 kA rms 2

Weight Lbs (kg) 1200A

345 (157)

350 (159)

460 (209)

525 (238)

375 (170)

350 (159)

350 (159)

460 (209)

525 (238)

2000A

345 (157)

410 (186)

490 (223)

530 (241)

410 (186)

410 (186)

410 (186)

490 (223)

530 (241)

3000A

345 (157)

525 (238)

525 (238)

550 (250)

525 (238)

525 (238)

525 (238)

525 (238)

550 (250)

Notes 1 Applicable ANSI Standards C37.04-1999, C37.06-2000 (including both K >1 and K =1 ratings), and C37.09-1999. 2 See Consulting Application Guide for further information.

3 3 3 V4-T3-44

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

3.1

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

ANSI Standard Ratings—VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breaker Types Rated on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis— Extra Capability Breakers 1

3

Circuit Breaker Type 50 VCP-W25C

50 VCP-W40C

50 VCP-W50C

50 VCP-W63C

75 VCP-W50C

150 VCP-W25C

150 VCP-W40C

150 VCP-W50C

150 VCP-W63C

3

Nominal voltage class kV

4.16

4.16

4.16

4.16

7.2

13.8

13.8

13.8

13.8

3

Nominal three-phase MVA class

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Description Identification

3 3

Rated Values Voltage Maximum voltage E kV rms

3

5.95

5.95

5.95

5.95

10.3

17.5

17.5

17.5

15.0

Voltage range factor K 2 1.00

1.00

1.00

1.00

1.00

1.00

1.00

1.00

1.00

Power frequency (1 min.) kV rms 24

24

24

24

42

42

42

42

42

Impulse kV peak

75

75

75

75

95

95

95

95

95

3

1200

1200

1200

1200

1200

1200

1200

1200

1200

3

3

Insulation Level Withstand test voltage

Current Continuous current at 60 Hz amperes

Short-circuit current (at rated max. kV) I kA rms

3

2000

2000

2000

2000

2000

2000

2000

2000

2000

3000

3000

3000

3000

3000

3000

3000

3000

3000

3

25

40

50

63

50

25

40

50

63

3

Interrupting time cycles

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

Permissible tripping delay Y seconds

3

23

23

23

23

23

23

23

23

23

Maximum voltage divided by K E/K kV rms 2

3

5.95

5.95

5.95

5.95

10.3

17.5

17.5

17.5

15.0

3

Current Values Maximum symmetrical interrupting capability Short-time current K x 1 kA rms 2

3 25

40

50

63

50

25

40

50

63

Closing and latching capability kA peak

3

97

139

139

175

139

97

139

139

175

Closing and latching momentary capability

3

58

83

83

104

83

58

83

83

104

3 3

Weight Lbs (kg) 1200A

350 (159)

460 (209)

525 (238)

350 (159)

460 (209)

350 (159)

350 (159)

460 (209)

525 (238)

2000A

410 (186)

490 (223)

530 (241)

410 (186)

490 (223)

410 (186)

410 (186)

490 (223)

530 (241)

3000A

525 (238)

525 (238)

550 (250)

525 (238)

525 (238)

525 (238)

525 (238)

525 (238)

550 (250)

Notes 1 Applicable ANSI Standards C37.04-1999, C37.06-2000 (including both K >1 and K =1 ratings), and C37.09-1999. 2 See Consulting Application Guide for further information. 3 Tested for 3 seconds.

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-45

3.1

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

3

ANSI Standard Ratings—VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breaker Types Rated on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis— Generator Breakers (to ANSI C37.013) 1

3

Description

Circuit Breaker Type 50 VCP-WG50

50 VCP-WG63

50 VCP-WG75

150 VCP-WG50

150 VCP-WG63

150 VCP-WG75

3

Identification Nominal voltage class kV

4.16

4.16

4.16

13.8

13.8

13.8

3

Nominal three-phase MVA class

—

—

—

—

—

—

3 3 3 3 3

Rated Values Voltage Maximum voltage E kV rms

4.76

4.76

4.76

15.0

15.0

15.0

Voltage range factor K 2

1.00

1.00

1.00

1.00

1.00

1.00

Power frequency (1 min.) kV rms

19

19

19

36

36

36

Impulse kV peak

60

60

60

95

95

95

1200

1200

1200

1200

1200

1200

2000

2000

2000

2000

2000

2000 3000

Insulation Level Withstand test voltage

Current Continuous current at 60 Hz amperes

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Short-circuit current (at rated max. kV) kA rms Interrupting time cycles 1200A

3000

3000

3000

3000

3000

4000

4000

4000

4000

4000

4000

50

63

75

50

63

75

3

3

3

3

3

3

2000A

3

3

3

3

3

3

3000A

3

3

3

3

3

3

4000A

5

5

5

5

5

5 1 and 3

Permissible tripping delay Y seconds 1200A

1 and 3

1 and 3

1 and 3

1 and 3

1 and 3

2000A

1 and 3

1 and 3

1 and 3

1 and 3

1 and 3

1 and 3

3000A

1 and 3

1 and 3

1 and 3

1 and 3

1 and 3

1 and 3

1

1

1

1

1

1

Maximum voltage divided by K E/K kV rms 2

4000A

4.76

4.76

4.76

15.0

15.0

15.0

Current Values Maximum symmetrical interrupting capability Short-time current K x 1 kA rms 2

50

63

75

50

63

75

Closing and latching capability kA peak

137

173

206

137

173

206

Closing and latching momentary capability

82

103

123

82

103

123

Weight Lbs (kg) 1200A

525 (238)

525 (238)

926 (419)

525 (238)

525 (238)

926 (419)

2000A

530 (241)

530 (241)

936 (424)

530 (241)

530 (241)

936 (424)

3000A

550 (250)

550 (250)

946 (429)

550 (250)

550 (250)

946 (429)

4000A

956 (433)

956 (433)

956 (433)

956 (433)

956 (433)

956 (433)

Notes 1 Applicable ANSI Standards C37.04-1999, C37.06-2000 (including both K >1 and K =1 ratings), C37.09-1999 and C37.013 (including C37.013a-2007). 2 See Consulting Application Guide for further information.

3 3 3 3 3 3 V4-T3-46

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

3.1

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

Available Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breakers Rated on Symmetrical Current Basis Per ANSI Standards (Rated K=1)

3

Drawout Circuit Breaker Type Identification

50 VCP-W25

50 VCP-W40

50 VCP-W50

50 VCP-W63

75 VCP-W40

75 VCP-W50

150 VCP-W25 150 VCP-W40 150 VCP-W50 150 VCP-W63

Maximum voltage (V) kV rms

4.76

4.76

4.76

4.76

8.25

8.25

15

15

15

Power frequency Hz 1

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

Insulation Level Power frequency withstand voltage (1 min.) kV rms

19

19

19

19

36

36

36

36

Rated Values

Lightning impulse withstand voltage (1.2 x 50 μs) kV peak Continuous current A rms 2

3

15

3

60

60

3

36

36

3 3

60

60

60

60

95

95

95

95

95

95

1200

1200

1200

1200

1200

1200

1200 j

1200

1200

1200 j

2000

2000

2000

2000

2000

2000

2000

2000

2000

2000 j

3000

3000

3000

3000

3000

3000

3000

3000

3000

3000 j

3 3 3

Short-Circuit Ratings (Reference C37.04-1999 and C37.06-2009 except as noted j) Symmetrical interrupting current (I) kA rms sym 3

25

40

50

63

40

50

25

40

50

63

DC component (% DC) 4

50

50

44

55

50

44

50

50

44

55

Asymmetrical interrupting current (It) kA rms asym total 5

31

49

59

80

49

59

31

49

59

80

3

Closing and latching current (2.6 x I) kA peak

65

104

130

164

104

130

65

104

130

164

Short-time withstand current rms 6

3

25

40

50

63

40

50

25

40

50

63

3

Transient Recovery Voltage parameters are based on TD-4 Peak voltage (E2) = (uc) (kV peak)

3 3 3

3 8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2

14

14

28 j, 25.7

25.7

25.7

28 j

3 3

Time to peak (T2 = t3 x 1.137) (μsec)

50

50

50

50

59

59

75

75

75

75

TRV rise time (t3) (μsec)

44

44

44

44

52

52

66

66

66

66

0.19

0.19

0.19

0.27

0.27

0.42, 0.39

0.39

0.39

0.42

3 3

RRRV = uc/t3 (kV/μsec) 7 0.19 Interrupting time ms

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

Cycles (60 Hz)

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

O–0.3s– CO–3m–CO

O–0.3s– CO–3m–CO

O–0.3s– CO–3m–CO

O–0.3s– CO–3m–CO

O–0.3s– CO–3m–CO

O–0.3s– CO–3m–CO

O–0.3s– CO–3m–CO

O–0.3s– CO–3m–CO

O–0.3s– CO–3m–CO

O–0.3s– CO–3m–CO

10,000

10,000

10,000

10,000

10,000

10,000

10,000

10,000

10,000

10,000

Operating duty (duty cycle) Mechanical endurance no-load operations 89

Notes 1 All circuit breakers are tested at 60 Hz, however, they can also be applied at 50 Hz with no de-rating. 2 4000A fan cooled rating is available for 3000A circuit breakers. 3 Because the voltage range factor K=1, the short-time withstand current and the maximum symmetrical interrupting current are equal to the rated symmetrical interrupting current. 4 Based on the standard DC time constant of 45 ms (corresponding to X/R of 17 for 60 Hz) and the minimum contact parting time as determined from the minimum opening time plus the assumed minimum relay time of 1/2 cycle (8.33 ms for 60 Hz). 5 The asymmetrical interrupting current, I total, is given by (I ) = I x Sqrt (1 + 2 x %DC x %DC) kA rms asym total. t 6 Duration of short-time current and maximum permissible tripping delay are both 2 seconds for all circuit breakers listed in this table, as required in C37.04-1999, C37.06-2000 and C37.06-2009. 7 RRRV can also be calculated as = 1.137 x E /T . 2 2 8 Each operation consists of one closing plus one opening. 9 All 40 and 50 kA circuit breakers exceed required 5000 no-load operations; all 63 kA circuit breakers exceed the required 2000 no-load ANSI operations. j These circuit breakers were tested to the preferred TRV ratings specified in C37.06-2000.

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-47

3.1

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

3

Available Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breakers Rated on Symmetrical Current Basis Per ANSI Standards (Rated K=1), continued

3

Identification

50 VCP-W25

50 VCP-W40

50 VCP-W50

50 VCP-W63

75 VCP-W40

75 VCP-W50

150 VCP-W25 150 VCP-W40 150 VCP-W50 150 VCP-W63

Capacitance Current Switching Capability (Reference C37.04a-2003, C37.06-2009 and C37.09a2005) Cable-charging current Class

C2

C2

C2

C2

C2

C2

C2

C2

C2

C2

3–10

3–10

3–10

7.5–25

7.5–25

7.5–25

7.5–25

7.5–25

7.5–25

7.5–25

C2

C2

C2

C2

C2

C2

C2, C2, C1

C2, C2, C1

C2, C2, C1

C2

3 3 3 3 3 3

Drawout Circuit Breaker Type

A rms Isolated shunt capacitor bank current Class A rms 1200A

75–630

75–630

75–630

75–630

75–630

75–630

75–630

75–630

75–630

75–630

2000A

75–1000

75–1000

75–1000

75–1000

75–1000

75–1000

75–1000

75–1000

75–1000

75–1000

3000A

75–1600

75–1600

75–1600

75–1600

75–1600

75–1600

75–1600

75–1600

75–1600

75–1600

3

Back-to-Back Capacitor Switching Capacitor bank current Class

C2

C2

C2

C2

C2

C2

C2, C2, C1

C2, C2, C1

C2, C2, C1

C2

3

A rms 1200A

75–630

75–630

75–630

75–630

75–630

75–630

75–630

75–630

75–630

75–630

3

2000A

75–1000

75–1000

75–1000

75–1000

75–1000

75–1000

75–1000

75–1000

75–1000

75–1000

3000A

75–1600

75–1600

75–1600

75–1600

75–1600

75–1600

75–1600

75–1600

75–1600

75–1600

Inrush current kA peak

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

Inrush frequency kHz 1200A

3

3 3 3

0.8

0.8

0.8

0.8

0.8

0.8

0.8

0.8

0.8

0.8

2000A

0.5

0.5

0.5

0.5

0.5

0.5

0.5

0.5

0.5

0.5

3000A

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3

3

Out-of-Phase Switching Voltage = 1.44 x V (kV rms)

3

Current = 0.25 x I (kA rms)

7

7

7

7

12

12

22

22

22

22

6.3

10

12.5

15.8

10

12.5

6.3

10

12.5

15.8

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V4-T3-48

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

3.1

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

VCP-W Vacuum Breaker Types Rated on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis 1

3

Circuit Breaker Type 270 VCP-W750

270 VCP-W1000 270 VCP-W1250 270 VCP-W1600 270 VCP-W2000 270 VCP-W25C

270 VCP-W32C

270 VCP-W40C

Identification Nominal voltage class kV

27

27

27

27

27

27

27

27

Nominal three-phase MVA class

750

1000

1250

1600

2000

—

—

—

27 2

27 2

27 2

27 2

27 2

27

27

27

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

3 3

Rated Values Voltage Maximum voltage E kV rms Voltage range factor K

3

3

3 3

Insulation Level Withstand test voltage

3

Power frequency (1 min.) kV rms

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

Impulse kV peak

125

125

125

125

125

125

125

125

3

600

600

600

1200

1200

1200

1200

1200

1200

1200

1200

2000

2000

1600

1600

1600

3

2000

2000

2000

—

—

—

—

—

16

22

25

25

40

25 7

31.5 8

40 9

Interrupting time ms (cycles)

83 (5) 6

83 (5) 6

83 (5) 6

83 (5) 6

83 (5) 6

50 (3)

50 (3)

50 (3)

Maximum permissible tripping delay Y seconds

2

2

2

2

2

2.5

1.6

1.0

51

51

51

51

51

50

50

50

105

105

105

105

105

50

50

50

3

60

68

85

106

85

100

112

3

31.5

31.5

31.5

31.5

31.5

31.5

31.5

31.5

460 (209)

460 (209)

460 (209)

545 (247)

545 (247)

545 (247)

545 (247)

545 (247)

Current Continuous current at 60 Hz amperes

Short-circuit current (at rated maximum kV) 45

Transient recovery voltage E2 kV peak T2 μs

Current Values Closing and latching capability 43 (2.6 K times rated short-circuit current) kA peak Capacitor switching cable charging amperes Weight Lbs (kg) 600A

3 3 3 3

3

1200A

480 (218)

480 (218)

480 (218)

560 (254)

600 (272)

560 (254)

560 (254)

560 (254)

2000A

500 (227)

500 (227)

500 (227)

—

—

—

—

—

3 3 3

Notes 1 CESI tested to applicable ANSI standards C37.04, C37.09 and C37.06. Consult Eaton for CESI copies of test reports on file. Operating duty cycle CO-15 seconds-CO. Operating time values: Opening 33–55 ms, closing 50–60 ms and reclosing 18 cycles (300 ms). 2 Tested at 28.5 kV. 3 K = 1.0, therefore E = E/K and I = KI. 4 Also maximum interruption rating and short-time current rating. 5 Duration of short-time current = 3 seconds, except as noted in footnotes 7, 8 and 9. 6 Optional interrupting time of 50 ms (3 cycles) is available. 7 Duration of short-time current = 2.5 seconds. 8 Duration of short-time current = 1.6 seconds. 9 Duration of short-time current = 1 second.

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-49

3.1

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

3

Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breaker Ratings

3

Type VCP-W Ratings on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis 12

3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Circuit Breaker Type 380 VCP-W 6 and 380 VCP-WR 16

Identification

Voltage Nominal voltage class kV rms

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

380 VCP-W 21 and 380 VCP-WR 21

380 VCP-W 40 and 380 VCP-WR 40

34.5

34.5

34.5

34.5

34.5

Maximum voltage V kV rms

38

38

38

38

38

Voltage range factor K 3

1

1

1

1.65 8

1

38

38

38

23 8

38

V/K

3

kV rms

Insulation Level Withstand Test Power frequency (1 minute) kV rms

80

80

80

80

80

Lightning impulse 1.2 x 50 4 kV peak

170

170

170

170

170

Current Continuous current at 60 Hz 5 A rms

600

600

600

1200

1200

1200

1200

1200

2000

2000

3 3

380 VCP-W 32 and 380 VCP-WR 32

Rated Values

3 3

380 VCP-W 25 and 380 VCP-WR 25

Short-Circuit Current Sym. interrupting at V (Isc) kA rms

1600

1600

1600

3000FC

3000FC

2000

2000

2000

2500

2500

—

—

3000FC

—

—

—

—

2500

—

—

16

25

31.5

21

40

% DC component (Idc)

47

47

47

47

47

Asym. factor S (ref.)

1.2

1.2

1.2

1.2

1.2

Asym. interrupting (It) kA rms total

19.2

30.0

37.8

39.5

48.0

Maximum asym. interrupting at V/K (Kxlsc)

3

kA rms

Maximum asym. interrupting at V/K (SxKxlsc) 3 kA rms total

8

16

25

31.5

35

19.3

30.0

37.8

42.0

48.0

40

107

Closing and latching capability kA peak

43

68

85

95

Momentary current withstand capability kA rms total

26

40

50

56

63

Short-time current kA rms

16

25

31.5

35

40

Duration of short-time current s

3

3

3

Operating duty (duty cycle)

9j

9j

9j

Rated reclosing factor (R) %

100

100

100 (2500 only 0%)

Interrupting time rms

3 (2500 only 9k)

9j

3 (2500 only 9k)

9k

100 (2500 only 0%)

100

6

83

83

83

83

83

5

5

5

5

5

Maximum permissible tripping delay sec.

2

2

2

2

2

Transient recovery voltage (RRRV) kV/μs

0.6

0.6

0.6

0.6

0.6

Mechanical endurance 7

2000

2000

2000

2000

2000

Cycle

Notes 1 KEMA tested to applicable ANSI standards C37.04-1979, C37.09-1979 and C37.06-1979 (operating duty sequence CO–15s–CO). Typical operating time values: operating 45 ms, closing 75 ms and reclosing 300 ms (18 cycles). 2 The standard breaker is not rated for capacitor switching. If you require capacitor switching, please refer to the “C” breakers. 3 K = 1.0, therefore E = E/K and I = KI. Refer to the Consulting Application Guide for more information. 4 The ANSI C37.06 standard requires 150 kV BIL. If higher BIL levels are required, please refer to the “C” breakers. 5 For forced air cooled fixed breaker applications, consult Eaton. 6 If you require 50 ms (3 cycle) interrupting time, please refer to the “C” breakers. 7 No-load operations. 8 At 23 kV rms (rated maximum voltage/K). Rated maximum symmetrical interrupting capability = 35 kA rms (K x 1). 9 CO–15s–CO. j Rated and tested also for rapid reclosing capability O–0.3s–CO. k Not rated for rapid reclosing.

3 3 V4-T3-50

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

3.1

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

Type VCP-WC Vacuum Circuit Breaker Ratings

3

Type VCP-WC Ratings on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis 12

3

Drawout Circuit Breaker Type Identification

380 VCP-W 16C and 380 VCP-WR 16C

380 VCP-W 25C and 380 VCP-WR 25C

380 VCP-W 32C and 380 VCP-WR 32C

380 VCP-W 21C and 380 VCP-WR 21C

380 VCP-W 40C and 380 VCP-WR 40C

34.5

34.5

34.5

34.5

34.5

38

38

38

38

3 3

Rated Values Voltage Nominal voltage class kV rms Maximum voltage V kV rms

3

38

1

1

1

1.65

38

38

38

23 8

38

3

80

80

80

80

80

3

170

170

170

170

170

3

600

600

600

1200

1200

1200

1200

1200

2000

2000

3

1600

1600

1600

3000FC

3000FC

2000

2000

2000

2500

2500

—

—

3000FC

—

—

—

—

2500

—

—

3

16

25

33.1

21

40

% DC component (Idc)

75

65

57

52

63

3

Asym. factor S (ref.)

1.46

1.36

1.3

1.24

1.34

Asym. interrupting (It) kA rms total

23.3

34.0

42.5

26.1

53.5

16

25

33.1

35 8

40

23.3

34.0

42.5

43.4

53.5

Voltage range factor

K3

V/K 3 kV rms Insulation Level Withstand Test Power frequency (1 minute) kV rms Lightning impulse 1.2 x 50 μs 4 kV peak Current Continuous current at 60 Hz 5 A rms

Short-Circuit Current Sym. interrupting at V (Isc) kA rms

Maximum sym. interrupting at V/K (Kxlsc) 3 kA rms Maximum asym. interrupting at V/K (SxKxlsc)

3

kA rms total

8

1

Closing and latching capability kA peak

50

75

91

102

107

Momentary current withstand capability kA rms total

30

44

54

60

65

Short-time current kA rms

16

25

31.5

35

40

Duration of short-time current s

3.09

3.09

3.09

3.21

3.04

Operating duty (duty cycle)

9j

9j

9j

Rapid reclosing factor (R) %

100

100

100 (2500A N/A)

Interrupting time 6 rms

(2500A k)

9j

(2500A k)

100 (2500A N/A)

3

3 3 3 3 3

9k

—

3 3

50

50

50

50

50

3

3

3

3

3

Maximum permissible tripping delay sec.

2

2

2

2

2

Transient recovery voltage (RRRV) kV/μs

0.7

0.7

0.7

0.7

—

1.3

1.3

0.7

1.3

—

—

—

0.7

1.3

—

—

—

1.3

0.7

—

—

—

1.3

—

—

—

—

0.7

—

—

Cycles

3

3 3 3 3

Notes 1 KEMA tested to applicable ANSI standards C37.04-1979, C37.09-1979 and C37.06-1979 (operating duty sequence CO–15s–CO). Typical operating time values: operating 45 ms, closing 75 ms and reclosing 300 ms (18 cycles). 2 The standard breaker is not rated for capacitor switching. If you require capacitor switching, please refer to the “C” breakers. 3 K = 1.0, therefore E = E/K and I = KI. Refer to the Consulting Application Guide for more information. 4 The ANSI C37.06 standard requires 150 kV BIL. If higher BIL levels are required, please refer to the “C” breakers. 5 For forced air cooled fixed breaker applications, consult Eaton. 6 If you require 50 ms (3 cycle) interrupting time, please refer to the “C” breakers. 7 No-load operations. 8 At 23 kV rms (rated maximum voltage/K). Rated maximum symmetrical interrupting capability = 35 kA rms (K x 1). 9 CO–15s–CO. j Rated and tested also for rapid reclosing capability O–0.3s–CO. k Not rated for rapid reclosing.

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-51

3 3 3 3 3 3

3.1

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

3

Type VCP-WC Vacuum Circuit Breaker Ratings

3

Type VCP-WC Ratings on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis, continued12

3 3 3

Drawout Circuit Breaker Type Identification

3

Definite Purpose Overhead line current A rms Isolated shunt capacitor bank current A rms

Definite Purpose—Back-to-Back Capacitor Switching Cable charging current A rms Capacitor bank current A rms

3 3

Inrush current kA peak

3 3

Inrush frequency kHz

3 3

380 VCP-W 25C and 380 VCP-WR 25C

380 VCP-W 32C and 380 VCP-WR 32C

380 VCP-W 21C and 380 VCP-WR 21C

380 VCP-W 40C and 380 VCP-WR 40C

Capacitor Switching Ratings

3 3

380 VCP-W 16C and 380 VCP-WR 16C

Mechanical endurance (no-load operations) 7

5

5

5 (2500A N/A)

5 (2500A N/A)

—

250

250

250

250

—

250 and 1000 (2000A)

250 and 1000 (2000A)

250 and 1000 (2000A and 3000FC) (2500 N/A)

250 and 1000 (2000A and 3000FC) (2500 N/A)

—

56

56

53

53

53

250

250

250

250

—

250 and 1000 (200A)

250 and 1000 (200A)

250 and 1000 (2000A and 3000FC) (2500 N/A)

250 and 1000 (2000A and 3000FC) (2500 N/A)

—

20

20

20

20

—

20 and 20 (2000A)

20 and 20 (2000A)

20 and 20 (2000A and 3000FC) (2500 N/A)

20 and 20 (2000A and 3000FC) (2500 N/A)

—

4.4

4.4

4.4

4.4

—

5 and 5 (2000A)

5 and 5 (2000A)

5 and 5 (2000A and 3000FC) (2500 N/A)

5 and 5 (2000A and 3000FC) (2500 N/A)

—

15,000

15,000

15,000

15,000

15,000

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V4-T3-52

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

3.1

IEC Standards

3

IEC Standards 1—VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breaker Types Rated on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis Identification

Insulation Level Circuit Breaker Type 36 VCP-WND25

36 VCP-WND32

72 VCP-WND25

72 VCP-WND32

36 VCP-W25

36 VCP-W32

36 VCP-W40

72 VCP-W25

72 VCP-W32

72 VCP-W40

120 VCP-W25

120 VCP-W32

120 VCP-W40

175 VCP-W25

175 VCP-W32

175 VCP-W40

175 VCP-W50

3

Rated Values

Voltage

Power Frequency

Impulse Withstand

Normal Current

Short-Circuit Breaking Current and 3-Second Short-Time Current

Short-Circuit Making Current

Cable Charging Breaking Current

kV rms

kV rms Peak

kV Peak

Amperes

kA rms

kV Peak

Amperes

3 Weight Lbs (kg)

3 3

3.6

10

40

630

25

65

10

350 (159)

3.6

10

40

1250

25

65

10

350 (159)

3.6

10

40

630

31.5

82

10

350 (159)

3.6

10

40

1250

31.5

82

10

350 (159)

7.2

20

60

630

25

65

10

350 (159)

7.2

20

60

1250

25

65

10

350 (159)

7.2

20

60

630

31.5

82

10

350 (159)

7.2

20

60

1250

31.5

82

10

350 (159)

3.6

10

40

630

25

65

10

414 (188)

3.6

10

40

1250

25

65

10

430 (195)

3.6

10

40

2000

25

65

10

496 (225)

3.6

10

40

1250

31.5

82

10

414 (188)

3.6

10

40

2000

31.5

82

10

496 (225)

3.6

10

40

1250

40

104

10

496 (225)

3.6

10

40

2000

40

104

10

550 (250)

7.2

20

60

630

25

65

10

414 (188)

7.2

20

60

1250

25

65

10

414 (188)

7.2

20

60

2000

25

65

10

496 (225)

7.2

20

60

1250

31.5

82

10

414 (188)

7.2

20

60

2000

31.5

82

10

430 (195)

7.2

20

60

1250

40

104

10

430 (195)

7.2

20

60

2000

40

104

10

496 (225)

12.0

28

75

630

25

65

25

430 (195)

12.0

28

75

1250

25

65

25

496 (225)

12.0

28

75

2000

25

65

25

496 (225)

12.0

28

75

1250

31.5

82

25

430 (195)

12.0

28

75

2000

31.5

82

25

496 (225)

12.0

28

75

1250

40

104

25

496 (225)

12.0

28

75

2000

40

104

25

550 (250)

17.5

38

95

630

25

65

—

430 (195)

17.5

38

95

1250

25

65

—

496 (225)

17.5

38

95

2000

25

65

—

496 (225)

17.5

38

95

1250

31.5

82

—

430 (195)

17.5

38

95

2000

31.5

82

—

496 (225)

17.5

38

95

1250

40

104

—

496 (225)

17.5

38

95

2000

40

104

—

550 (250)

17.5

38

95

1250

50

130

—

1013 (460)

17.5

38

95

2000

50

130

—

1079 (490)

17.5

38

95

3150

50

130

—

1156 (525)

Note 1 IEC Standards 60056 and 60694 apply.

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-53

3.1

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

ANSI Standard Ratings—VCP-T and VCP-TR Vacuum Circuit Breakers (to ANSI C37.04 and C37.09) Identification

Rated Values

Circuit Breaker Type

Voltage Class

Power Frequency

Impulse Withstand

Continuous Current

Short-Circuit 3 Breaking Current

Short-Circuit Making Current

Mechanical Endurance C–0

kV rms

kV rms

kV Peak

Amperes

kA rms

kA Peak

Operations

4.76

19

60

600

16

42

20,000

4.76

19

60

800

16

42

20,000

4.76

19

60

1200

16

42

10,000

Insulation Level

50 VCP-T16 and 50 VCP-TR16

50 VCP-T20 and 50 VCP-TR20

50 VCP-T25 and 50 VCP-TR25

3 3

75 VCP-T16 and 75 VCP-TR16

3 3 3 3 3

75 VCP-T20 and 75 VCP-TR20

75 VCP-T25 and 75 VCP-TR25

3 3

150 VCP-T16 and 150 VCP-TR16

3 3 3 3 3

150 VCP-T20 and 150 VCP-TR20

150 VCP-T25 and 150 VCP-TR25

3 3 3

4.76

19

60

1600 2

16

42

10,000

4.6

19

60

600

16

52

10,000

4.6

19

60

800

16

52

10,000

4.6

19

60

1200

16

52

10,000

2

4.6

19

60

1600

16

52

10,000

4.76

19

60

600

25

65

10,000

4.76

19

60

800

25

65

10,000

4.76

19

60

1200

25

65

10,000

4.76

19

60

1600 2

25

65

10,000

8.25

20

60 1

600

16

42

20,000

8.25

20

60 1

800

16

42

20,000

8.25

20

60 1

1200

16

42

10,000

1

1600

2

8.25

20

60

16

42

10,000

8.25

20

60 1

600

20

52

10,000

8.25

20

60 1

800

20

52

10,000

8.25

20

60 1

1200

20

52

10,000

8.25

20

60 1

1600 2

20

52

10,000

8.25

20

60 1

600

25

65

10,000

8.25

20

60 1

800

25

65

10,000

8.25

20

60 1

1200

25

65

10,000

8.25

20

60

1

15

36

95

1600

2

600

25

65

10,000

16

42

10,000

15

36

95

800

16

42

10,000

15

36

95

1200

16

42

10,000

15

36

95

1600 2

16

42

10,000

15

36

95

600

20

52

10,000

15

36

95

800

20

52

10,000

15

36

95

1200

20

52

10,000

15

36

95

1600 2

20

52

10,000

15

36

95

600

25

65

10,000

15

36

95

800

25

65

10,000

15

36

95

1200

25

65

10,000

15

36

95

1600 2

25

65

10,000

Notes 1 Use 15 kV breaker and cassette when 95 kV impulse withstand required. 2 1600A VCP-T breaker available. 3 Also 2 second short-time current rating.

3 3 3 V4-T3-54

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

3.1

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

3 ANSI Standard Ratings—VCP-TL/VCP-TRL Vacuum Circuit Breakers (to ANSI C37.04 and C37.09) Identification Circuit Breaker Type 1 50 VCP-TL16 and 50 VCP-TRL16

Rated Maximum Voltage

Insulation Level Power Frequency

Impulse Withstand

Continuous Current

Short-Circuit Breaking Current 2

Short-Circuit Making Current

Mechanical Endurance 3 C–O

Approx. Weight Fix/Drawout

kV rms

kV rms

kV Peak

Amperes

kA rms

kA Peak

Operations

Lbs

4.76

19

60

600

16

42

100,000

153/232

1200

16

42

100,000

155/234

50 VCP-TL25 and 50 VCP-TRL25 75 VCP-TL16 and 75 VCP-TRL16 75 VCP-TL20 and 75 VCP-TRL20 75 VCP-TL25 and 75 VCP-TRL25 150 VCP-TL16 and 150 VCP-TRL16 150 VCP-TL20 and 150 VCP-TRL20 150 VCP-TL25 and 150 VCP-TRL25

4.76

4.76

8.25

8.25

8.25

15

15

15

19

19

20

20

20

36

36

36

60

60

75 5

75 5

75 5

95

95

95

4

16

42

100,000

157/NA

600

20

52

100,000

159/237

1200

20

52

100,000

161/239

1600 4

20

52

100,000

163/NA

1600 50 VCP-TL20 and 50 VCP-TRL20

3

Rated Values

600

25

65

100,000

166/243

1200

25

65

100,000

168/245

1600 4

25

65

100,000

170/NA

600

16

42

100,000

155/232

1200

16

42

100,000

157/234

1600 4

16

42

100,000

159/NA

600

20

52

100,000

161/239

1200

20

52

100,000

161/241

1600 4

20

52

100,000

163/NA

600

25

65

100,000

166/245

1200

25

65

100,000

168/247

1600 4

25

65

100,000

170/NA

600

16

42

100,000

155/234

1200

16

42

100,000

157/237

1600 4

16

42

100,000

159/NA

600

20

52

100,000

161/239

1200

20

52

100,000

163/241

1600 4

20

52

100,000

166/NA

600

25

65

100,000

168/245

25

65

100,000

170/247

25

65

100,000

172/NA

1200 1600

4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Notes 1 Independent shunt trips are available for use with traditional protective relaying schemes. 2 Also 2-second short-time current rating. 3 Operating mechanism up to 100,000 operations, vacuum interrupter 30,000. 4 1600A available as fixed VCP-TRL/VCP-TRLC circuit breaker only. 5 Use 15 kV breaker and cassette when impulse withstand >75 kV is required.

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-55

3.1

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

IEC Standard Ratings—T-VAC and T-VACR Vacuum Circuit Breakers (to IEC 62271-100) Identification

Rated Values

Circuit Breaker Type

Voltage Class

Power Frequency Withstand Voltage

Lightning Impulse (Uw) Withstand Voltage

Normal Current (In)

Short-Circuit 3 Breaking Current

Short-Circuit Making Current

Mechanical Endurance C–0

kV rms

kV rms

kV Peak

Amperes

kA rms

kA Peak

Operations

72 T-VAC16 and 72 T-VACR16

7.2

20

60

630

16

40

20,000

7.2

20

60

800

16

40

20,000

7.2

20

60

1250

16

40

10,000

7.2

20

60

1600 2

16

40

10,000

7.2

20

60

630

20

50

10,000

7.2

20

60

800

20

50

10,000

7.2

20

60

1250

20

50

10,000

Insulation Level

72 T-VAC20 and 72 T-VACR20

72 T-VAC25 and 72 T-VACR25

3 3

120 T-VAC16 and 120 T-VACR16

3 3 3 3 3

120 T-VAC20 and 120 T-VACR20

120 T-VAC25 and 120 T-VAC25

3 3

175 T-VAC16 and 175 T-VACR16

3 3 3 3 3

175 T-VAC20 and 175 T-VACR20

175 T-VAC25 and 175 T-VACR25

3 3 3

2

7.2

20

60

1600

20

50

10,000

7.2

20

60

630

25

63

10,000

7.2

20

60

800

25

63

10,000

7.2

20

60

1250

25

63

10,000

7.2

20

60

1600 2

25

63

10,000

12

28

75 1

630

16

40

20,000

12

28

75 1

800

16

40

20,000

12

28

75 1

1250

16

40

10,000

12

28

75

1

16

40

10,000

12

28

75 1

630

20

50

10,000

12

28

75 1

800

20

50

10,000

12

28

75 1

1250

20

50

10,000

12

28

75 1

1600 2

20

50

10,000

12

28

75 1

630

25

63

10,000

12

28

75 1

800

25

63

10,000

12

28

75 1

1250

25

63

10,000

12

28

75

1

25

63

10,000

17.5

38

95

630

16

40

10,000

17.5

38

95

800

16

40

10,000

17.5

38

95

1250

16

40

10,000

17.5

38

95

1600 2

16

40

10,000

17.5

38

95

630

20

50

10,000

17.5

38

95

800

20

50

10,000

17.5

38

95

1250

20

50

10,000

1600

1600

2

2

2

17.5

38

95

1600

20

50

10,000

17.5

38

95

630

25

63

10,000

17.5

38

95

800

25

63

10,000

17.5

38

95

1250

25

63

10,000

17.5

38

95

1600 2

25

63

10,000

Notes 1 Use 17.5 kV breaker and cassette when 95 kV impulse withstand required. 2 1600A T-VAC breaker available. 3 Also 3-second short-time current rating.

3 3 3 V4-T3-56

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

3.1

Dimensions

3

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3 3 3 3 3 3 Type VCP-W Circuit Breaker Shown from Rear

3

Mini Module

Type VCP-W Circuit Breaker with Deadfront Panel Removed

3

5/15 kV VCPW-ND and VCP-W Power Modules

3

Power Module, 5/15 kV VCPW-ND 26.00 (660.4) Wide, VCP-W 36.00 (914.4) Wide

3

16.62 (422.1)

3

Auxiliary Drawer in Withdrawn Position

Shutter Auxiliary Drawer in Connected Position

3 3

Main Bus Window

3

Shutter

3 3

28.50 (723.9) 53.56 (1360.4) 76.94 (1954.3)

8.06 (204.7)

18.00 (457.2)

1

3

95.00 (2413.0)

Breaker in Operating or Connected Position C.T. Barrier

3 3

Breaker in Withdraw Position

3

Top of Rail Rolling Service

5.38 (136.7)

3

Shutter

3 Removable Breaker Extension Rails 27.75 (704.9)

3

Breaker in Test or Disconnected Position

3 3

50.00 (1270.0) 66.00 (1676.4)

3

Note 1 VCPW-ND dimensions of breaker travel 15.00 (381.0).

3 3 3 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-57

3.1 3

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Power Circuit Breakers

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3

5/15 kV VCPW-ND and VCP-W Mini Modules

3

5 kV VCPW-ND Mini Module 25.88 (657.4) Wide 3.62 (91.9)

3 30.38 (771.7)

3 3 3 3

Upper C.T. Mounting Plate

Breaker Lifting Yoke Opening

C.T. Barrier

Breaker in Withdrawn Position

Contact Fingers

3 3 3

Breaker Front Cover in Test Position

Top of Rail Rolling Surface

5/15 kV VCP-W Mini Module

3

5/15 kV VCP-W Mini-Module 35.88 (911.4) Wide Breaker Front Cover in Operating Position

3 3

3.05 (77.5)

C.T. Barrier

Breaker Lifting Yoke Opening

600V Class Current Transformer

Breaker in Withdrawn Position 9.94 (252.5) Breaker Travel Breaker Front Cover in Test Position

Top of Rail Rolling Surface

3

5.38 (136.7)

3

Removable Breaker Extension Rails

3 3

Shutter

29.81 (757.2)

3

3

Lower C.T. Mounting Plate

44.25 (1123.9)

3

3

Breaker Front Cover in Operating Position

34.00 (863.6)

3

3

40.62 (1031.7)

1

Removable Breaker Extension Rails

3

3

600V Class Current Transformer

5.38 (136.7)

3

3

Breaker Travel 6.94 (176.2)

3

3

4.41 (112.0)

34.00 (863.6) Note 1 Current transformers not supplied.

V4-T3-58

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

44.25 (1123.9)

1

40.62 (1031.7)

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Medium Voltage Power Contactors

3.2

Contents Description Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SL MV Power Contactor 7.2 kV/160–400A . . . . . . SL MV Power Contactor 7.2 kV/800A . . . . . . . . . . SL MV Power Contactor 15 kV/300A . . . . . . . . . .

Page V4-T3-60 V4-T3-61 V4-T3-70 V4-T3-74

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Product Overview Voltage Class

Altitude

Eaton SL Medium Voltage Vacuum Contactors are designed to operate at voltages from 2200V to 15,000V, depending on contactor type. Typical system voltages are 2400V, 3300V, 4160V and 6600V for 7.2 kV contactors and 10,000V, 11,000V, 13,200V and 13,800V for 15 kV contactors.

7.2 kV/160–400A SL Contactors are capable of operating in virtually any altitude range. Three versions are offered in Standard, High and Low altitude configurations. No de-rating is necessary for proper operation. Altitude designations are listed in the table below. Altitude Altitude Low

Standard

High

7.2 kV/160–400A Feet

–11,500 –3300 to to –3300 +6600

+6600 to +13,100

Meters

–3500 to –1000

+2000 to +4000

–1000 to +2000

3

Control Voltage and Dropout Time

3

Control coil voltage and dropout time for all SL contactors are field selectable. Standard voltages available are 120/60V, 110/50V, 240/60V, 220/50V and 125 Vdc. Coil will pick up at 80% of rated coil voltage and dropout not sooner than 60% of rated coil voltage. Opening time is field selectable within the range of 30–330 ms for all 7.2 kV 160– 400A contactors. Opening time is field selectable within the range of 50–330 ms for all 7.2 kV 800A and 15 kV 300A contactors.

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

7.2 kV/800A and 15 kV/300A Feet

N/A

–3300 to +11,800

+11,800 to +16,000

Meters

N/A

–1000 to +3600

+3600 to +4900

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-59

3.2 3 3

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Medium Voltage Power Contactors

Catalog Number Selection Power Contactors

SL N 01 2 S 5 A - 22 0

3 3

SL Contactor Series

Mechanical Latch

3

Design

3

N = NEMA C = IEC

3

Type 01 = 7.2 kV (160–400A) Contactor 03 = 15 kV (300A) Contactor 04 = 7.2 kV (800A) Contactor

3 3 3

Ampere Rating

3

1 = 160A 2 = 7.2 kV/200A 3 = 7.2 kV/360A, 15 kV/300A 4 = 400A 8 = 800A

3 3 3

Altitude

3 3 3

7.2 kV/160–400A (Coil Voltage) 0 = None 1 = 24 Vdc 2 = 32 Vdc 3 = 48 Vdc 4 = 110/50,120/60 or 125 Vdc 5 = 220/50, 240/60

7.2 kV/800A 15 kV/300A

S = Standard –3281 to +6562 ft (–1000 to +2000m) L = Low –11,483 to –3281 ft (–3500 to –1000m) H = High +6562 to +13,123 ft (+2000 to +4000m)

S = Standard –3281 to +11,811 ft (–1000 to +3600m) H = High +11,811 to +16,076 ft (+3600 to +4900m)

22 = 2NO, 2NC 28 = 2NO, 8NC 37 = 3NO, 7NC 46 = 4NO, 6NC 55 = 5NO, 5NC 64 = 6NO, 4NC 73 = 7NO, 3NC 82 = 8NO, 2NC

A = 120/60 B = 240/60 S = 125 Vdc U = 110/50 W = 220/50 Coil Dropout Time 5 = 30 ms 7.2 kV (160–400A) 6 = 50 ms 7 = 130 ms 8 = 250 ms 9 = 330 ms

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V4-T3-60

0 = None 1 = 24 Vdc 3 = 48 Vdc 4 = 110 (50/60) 5 = 220 (50/60) 6 = 96–125 Vdc

Auxiliary Contacts 7.2 kV/160–400A

Coil Voltage

7.2 kV/160–400A

7.2 kV/800A 15 kV/300A (Coil Voltage)

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

7.2 kV/800A 15 kV/300A 22 = 2NO, 2NC

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Medium Voltage Power Contactors

3.2

Contents

SL 7.2 kV/160–400A Medium Voltage Contactor

Description

Page

Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SL MV Power Contactor 7.2 kV/160–400A Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SL MV Power Contactor 7.2 kV/800A . . . . . . . . . . SL MV Power Contactor 15 kV/300A . . . . . . . . . .

V4-T3-59 V4-T3-63 V4-T3-63 V4-T3-63 V4-T3-64 V4-T3-67 V4-T3-68 V4-T3-70 V4-T3-74

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

SL MV Power Contactor 7.2 kV/160–400A Product Description ●

●

●

●

●

A single family of contactors for any medium voltage control application. Voltage range of 2200– 7200V Ampere ratings from 160 to 400A with induction motor horsepower ranges from 600 to 5500 hp Three different altitude versions Leading-edge vacuum technology Fully complies with global standards

Application Description

Features, Benefits and Functions ●

Eaton’s SL Medium Voltage Contactor starting applications: ● Squirrel-cage induction motors ● Synchronous motors ● Wound-rotor Fully applicable to: ● Full voltage starting ● Reduced voltage starting The perfect choice for harsh duty applications: ● Mining ● Pulp and paper ● HVAC ● Petrochemical ● Automotive ● Many others

●

●

●

●

●

Long life—300,000 electrical and over 2 million mechanical Mounting flexibility—panel or pedestal mounting provisions are standard. Unit can be mounted in horizontal or vertical position Field-selectable settings for coil voltage, AC/DC, and coil dropout time Field kits available for auxiliary contacts and mechanical latch. Accessories are common for all sizes Special ordering allows unit to be factory pre-set to customer specification, including field kit installation Highest quality available— all contactors manufactured within state-of-the-art “ISO-Certified” facilities. 100% made in America

Easy-to-Install Option Kits (Field Addition) ● Up to six extra auxiliary contacts ● Mechanical latch—many coil voltages

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-61

3.2 3

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Medium Voltage Power Contactors

SL Series Features (7.2 kV/160–400A)

3 3

Panel-Mount Provisions

Panel-Mount Provisions

3

Vacuum Interrupters

3 3 3 3

Panel-Mount Provisions

3

Actuator Assembly

3 3 3

Control Terminal Strip

Contactor Nameplate

Auxiliary Contact Blocks

Auxiliary Contact Blocks

Pedestal-Mount Provisions

Pedestal-Mount Provisions

3 3 3

Coil Control Board (Behind Control Terminal Strip)

3 3

Magnet Coil

Mechanical Latch Provision

Control Settings

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Control Terminal Strip

Coil Control Board

3 3 3 3 3 V4-T3-62

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

DIP Switches

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Medium Voltage Power Contactors

Standards and Certifications

Options and Accessories

Global Acceptability ● NEMA ● ANSI ● IEC

SL Vacuum Contactor Series—Sizes 7.2 kV/160–400A Accessory Kits

Third-Party Verification ● UL ● CSA ● KEMA ● Third-party qualified by UL, CSA, KEMA

Mechanical Latch Kit Field Mount to 7.2 kV/160– 400A SL Vacuum Contactor. Coil voltages available in a wide range of AC and DC selections. Easy to install on new and existing units.

3.2 3

Auxiliary Contact Kit Field Mount auxiliary contact kits for 7.2 kV/160– 400A SL Vacuum Contactor. Contact kits are available in many configurations of NO-NC.

Mechanical Interlock Kit Field Mount mechanical interlock kits for 7.2 kV/160– 400A SL Vacuum Contactor.

3 3 3 3 3

Mechanical Latch Kit

Contact Eaton for pricing.

3 3

Design and Test Standards ● UL 347, File No. E63257 ● CSA File No. LR28548 ● IEC No. 60470 ● ANSI/NEMA ICS 3

Product Selection

3

Auxiliary Contact Kit

Ordering Information— Mechanical Latch Kit

Ordering Information— Auxiliary Contact Kit

Coil Voltage

Catalog Number

Description

Catalog Number

24 Vdc

SLA-ML24

3NO–3NC additional

SLA-AS33

32 Vdc

SLA-ML32

6NO additional

SLA-AS60

48 Vdc

SLA-ML48

6NC additional

SLA-AS06

110/50, 120/60, 125 Vdc selectable

SLA-ML120

5NO–1NC additional

SLA-AS51

4NO–2NC additional

SLA-AS42

220/50, 240/60 selectable

SLA-ML240

2NO–4NC additional

SLA-AS24

1NO–5NC additional

SLA-AS15

Mechanical Interlock Kit

Ordering Information— Mechanical Interlock Kit Description Vertical or horizontal arrangement

Catalog Number SLA-MI

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-63

3.2

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Medium Voltage Power Contactors

3

Technical Data and Specifications

3

The SL 400 Contactor Ratings ● Voltages of 2200–7200V ● Amperages from 160 to 400A ● Interrupting ratings as high as 8500A

3 3 3 3

Control Voltages (Field Adjustable) ● 110, 220 Vac, 50 Hz ● 120, 240 Vac, 60 Hz

●

125 Vdc

Control Voltage Settings (7.2 kV/160–400A)

Dropout Time (Field Adjustable) ● 30 ms ● 50 ms ● 130 ms ● 250 ms ● 330 ms

SW1

SW2

SW3

110 Vac, 50 Hz

Off

Off

Off

120 Vac, 60 Hz

On

Off

Off

220 Vac, 50 Hz

Off

On

Off

240 Vac, 60 Hz

On

On

Off

125 Vdc

Off

Off

On

Dropout Time Settings (7.2 kV/160–400A)

3 3

Setting

Front and Rear View (7.2 kV/160–400A)

3 3

Delay Setting

SW4

SW5

SW6

30 ms

Off

Off

Off

50 ms

On

Off

Off

130 ms

Off

On

Off

250 ms

On

On

Off

330 ms

Off

Off

On

3 Altitude Designations (7.2 kV/160–400A)

3

Altitude

3 3

Front View

Low –11,483 to –3281

–3281 to +6562

+6562 to +13,123

Meters

–3500 to –1000

–1000 to +2000

+2000 to +4000

Rear View

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V4-T3-64

High

Feet

Note Stock units pre-set to 120/60 Vac.

3

Standard

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

3.2

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Medium Voltage Power Contactors

SL Series Fuses

3

Fuse Application Table for SL Contactors—7.2 kV/160A

Fuse Application Table for SL Contactors—7.2 kV/360A

Motor FLA

Voltage

Suggested Eaton Fuse

Rating

Minimum Opening Time

Motor FLA

Voltage

Suggested Eaton Fuse

Rating

Minimum Opening Time

11–18

2400–4800

5BCLS-30

30–1R

30

11–18

2400–4800

5BCLS-30

30–1R

30

18–31

2400–4800

5BCLS-2R

70–2R

30

18–31

2400–4800

5BCLS-2R

70–2R

30

31–46

2400–4800

5BCLS-3R

100–3R

30

31–46

2400–4800

5BCLS-3R

100–3R

30

46–62

2400–4800

5BCLS-4R

130–4R

30

46–62

2400–4800

5BCLS-4R

130–4R

30

62–74

2400–4800

5BCLS-5R

150–5R

30

62–74

2400–4800

5BCLS-5R

150–5R

30

74–93

2400–4800

5BCLS-6R

170–6R

30

74–93

2400–4800

5BCLS-6R

170–6R

30

93–137

2400–4800

5BCLS-9R

200–9R

130

93–137

2400–4800

5BCLS-9R

200–9R

130

137–160

2400–4800

5BCLS-12R

230–12R

130

137–187

2400–4800

5BCLS-12R

230–12R

130

11–34

5500–6600

7BCLS-2R

70–2R

30

187–200

2400–4800

5BCLS-12R

230–12R

130

34–46

5500–6600

7BCLS-3R

100–3R

30

200–360

2400–4800

N/A

—

—

46–56

5500–6600

7BCLS-4R

130–4R

30

11–34

5500–6600

7BCLS-2R

70–2R

30

56–68

5500–6600

7BCLS-5R

150–5R

30

34–46

5500–6600

7BCLS-3R

100–3R

30

68–85

5500–6600

7BCLS-6R

170–6R

30

46–56

5500–6600

7BCLS-4R

130–4R

30

85–137

5500–6600

7BCLS-9R

200–9R

50

56–68

5500–6600

7BCLS-5R

150–5R

30

137–160

5500–6600

7BCLS-12R

230–12R

250

68–85

5500–6600

7BCLS-6R

170–6R

30

Fuse Application Table for SL Contactors—7.2 kV/200A Motor FLA

Voltage

Suggested Eaton Fuse

Rating

Minimum Opening Time

11–18

2400–4800

5BCLS-30

30–1R

30

85–137

5500–6600

7BCLS-9R

200–9R

50

137–200 1

5500–6600

7BCLS-12R

230–12R

250

200–360

5500–6600

N/A

—

—

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

18–31

2400–4800

5BCLS-2R

70–2R

30

31–46

2400–4800

5BCLS-3R

100–3R

30

Motor FLA

Voltage

Suggested Eaton Fuse

Rating

Minimum Opening Time

46–62

2400–4800

5BCLS-4R

130–4R

30

11–18

2400–4800

5BCLS-30

30–1R

30

62–74

2400–4800

5BCLS-5R

150–5R

30

18–31

2400–4800

5BCLS-2R

70–2R

30

2400–4800

5BCLS-6R

170–6R

30

31–46

2400–4800

5BCLS-3R

100–3R

30

93–137

2400–4800

5BCLS-9R

200–9R

130

46–62

2400–4800

5BCLS-4R

130–4R

30

137–200 1

2400–4800

5BCLS-12R

230–12R

130

62–74

2400–4800

5BCLS-5R

150–5R

30

11–34

5500–6600

7BCLS-2R

70–2R

30

74–93

2400–4800

5BCLS-6R

170–6R

30

34–46

5500–6600

7BCLS-3R

100–3R

30

93–137

2400–4800

5BCLS-9R

200–9R

30

46–56

5500–6600

7BCLS-4R

130–4R

30

137–187

2400–4800

5BCLS-12R

230–12R

30

56–68

5500–6600

7BCLS-5R

150–5R

30

187–273

2400–4800

5BCLS-18R

390–18R

50

68–85

5500–6600

7BCLS-6R

170–6R

30

273–400 2

2400–4800

5BCLS-24R

450–24R

130

85–137

5500–6600

7BCLS-9R

200–9R

50

11–34

5500–6600

7BCLS-2R

70–2R

30

137–200 1

5500–6600

7BCLS-12R

230–12R

250

34–46

5500–6600

7BCLS-3R

100–3R

30

46–56

5500–6600

7BCLS-4R

130–4R

30

56–68

5500–6600

7BCLS-5R

150–5R

30

68–85

5500–6600

7BCLS-6R

170–6R

30

85–137

5500–6600

7BCLS-9R

200–9R

30

137–187 1

5500–6600

7BCLS-12R

230–12R

30

273–400 2

5500–6600

7BCLS-24R

450–24R

250

3 3

Fuse Application Table for SL Contactors—7.2 kV/400A

74–93

3

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Notes 1 For FLA >180, maximum acceleration time = 4.5 seconds. 2 For FLA >360, maximum acceleration time = 6 seconds. Fuse selections based on LRC = FLA x 6 with acceleration time of 10 seconds except where otherwise noted.

3 3 3 3

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-65

3.2

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Medium Voltage Power Contactors

3

SL Series Ratings

3

Type SL Vacuum Contactor Ratings (7.2 kV/160–400A)

3

Interrupting Rating Rated Utilization Voltage

NEMA Unfused (E1) kA

Application Table NEMA Fused (E2) kA

Induction Motor Horsepower

Synchronous Motor Horsepower (0.8 PF)

(1.0 PF)

Transformer kVA

Capacitor kVAR

Maximum Insulation Voltage

3

7.2 kV/160A Frame

3

2200–2500

4.5

50

600

600

800

600

480

7200

3000–3600

4.5

50

900

900

1000

800

640

7200

3800–4800

4.5

50

1200

1200

1400

1000

960

7200

6000–6900

4.5

50

1800

1800

2200

1600

1320

7200

3 3 3 3 3 3 3

7.2 kV/200A Frame 2200–2500

4.5

50

800

800

1000

750

600

7200

3000–3600

4.5

50

1100

1100

1250

1000

800

7200

3800–4800

4.5

50

1500

1500

1750

1250

1200

7200

6000–6900

4.5

50

2250

2250

2750

2000

1650

7200

50

1500

1500

1750

1200

1000

7200

7.2 kV/360A Frame 2200–2500

4.5

3000–3600

4.5

50

2000

2000

2500

1600

1475

7200

3800–4800

4.5

50

2500

2500

3000

2000

2150

7200

6000–6900

4.5

50

4000

4000

5000

3200

2950

7200

3

7.2 kV/400A Frame

3

2200–2500

8.5

50

1750

1750

2000

1500

1200

7200

3000–3600

8.5

50

2250

2250

2500

2000

1650

7200

3

3800–4800

8.5

50

3000

3000

3500

2500

2400

7200

6000–6900

8.5

50

4500

4500

5500

4000

3300

7200

3 3

Rating Specifications (7.2 kV/160–400A) Ampere Rating

7.2 kV/160A

7.2 kV/200A

7.2 kV/60A

7.2 kV/400A

3

Maximum Interrupting Current (Three operations—amperes)

4500

4500

4500

8500

3

Rated Current

160

200

360

400

IEC Make-Break Capability—AC4 (Amperes) Make

1600

2000

3600

4000

Break

1280

1600

2880

3200

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

V4-T3-66

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Medium Voltage Power Contactors

3.2

Product Specifications

3

7.2 kV/160–400A ● Short-time current: ● 30 seconds: 2400A ● 1 second: 6000A ● 8.7 ms: 63 kA peak (0.5 cycle) ● Normal service altitude: –3281 to +6562 ft (–1000 to +2000m) ● Mechanical life: 2.5 million ● Electrical life: ● 6 x Rated Make/1x Rated Break: 300,000 operations ● 6 x Rated Make/6 x Rated Break: 300,000 operations ● BIL (impulse withstand): 60 kV (1.2 x 50 microseconds) ● Dielectric strength: 20 kV rms (1 minute)

●

●

●

●

●

●

Closing time: 80 ms (energization to contact touch) Selectable opening times: ● 30 ms (2 cycles) ● 50 ms (3 cycles) ● 130 ms (8 cycles) ● 250 ms (15 cycles) ● 330 ms (20 cycles) Arcing time: 12 ms (0.75 cycle) or less Pickup voltage: 80% rated coil voltage Dropout voltage: 60% rated coil voltage Control voltages: ● AC/Hz: 110/50, 120/60, 220/50, 240/60 ● DC: 125

●

●

Control circuit burden: ● Closing: (200 ms) – 110/120 AC, 125 DC 1 kVA – 220/240 AC 1.8 kVA ● Holding: – 110/120 AC, 125 DC 40 VA – 220/240 AC 50 VA Auxiliary contact rating: ● 600V (maximum) ● 10A continuous current ● Making capacity – AC: 7200 VA – DC: 125 VA ● Breaking capacity – AC: 720 VA – DC: 125 VA

●

●

Latch (when specified) ● Mechanical life: 250,000 operations ● Trip voltage – DC: 24V – DC: 125V – AC: 110/120V ● Minimum trip voltage: 80% rated coil voltage ● Trip burden – 24 Vdc: 400 VA – 48 and 125 Vdc: 400 VA – 110 and 120 Vac: 400 VA – 220 and 240 Vac: 400 VA ● Trip time (2 cycles): 30 ms Weight ● 150–360A: 47 lbs (21.3 kg) ● 400A: 49 lbs (22.2 kg)

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Wiring Diagrams

3

Electrical Connections Diagrams (7.2 kV/160–400A) Connection for Magnetically Held Contactor

5

3

(+)

7 6

3

Connections for Mechanically Latched Contactor

8

3

White Black White

4 3 Control Voltage (On/Off)

3

DC Coil 1

DC Coil 2

M

1

DC Black

M Control Voltage (Open)

(–) Latch Coil

3 3

8 7

White

2

6

Black

5

White

1

4

DC Coil 1

3

DC Coil 2

3

Black

3

3 Control Voltage (Close)

3

2 1

3

Note 1 M contacts are connected in parallel for AC voltages and for 48 Vdc.

3 3 3 3 3 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-67

3.2 3

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Medium Voltage Power Contactors

Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3

Dimensional Drawings 7.2 kV/160–400A

3

Front

3

Rear

4.38 (111.3)

3

14.00 (355.6)

4.38 (111.3)

4.38 (111.3)

4.38 (111.3)

Upper Terminals

3 3

Lower Terminals

6.85 (174.0)

3

16.00 (406.4)

3

15.50 (393.7)

15.06 (382.5)

16.00 (406.4) 8.75 (222.2)

3

7.36 (186.9)

3 3

15.25 (387.4)

3

15.25 (387.4)

3 3

16.25 (412.8)

16.25 (412.8)

Base Plate

Side 0.406 (10.3) DIA (6)

3

0.78 (19.8) Rear Mounting 0.328 (8.3) DIA

3 8.70 (221.0)

3 3

6.85 (174.0)

Front Mounting 0.328 (8.3) DIA

7.70 (195.6)

15.50 (393.7)

3

16.00 (406.4)

3 3

Front 0.83 (21.1)

3

1.77 (45.0) 13.60 (345.4)

7.36 (186.9) 0.313 (8.0) DIA

0.83 (21.1)

0.27 (6.9)

15.25 (387.4) Front

3

8.70 (221.0)

3

4.44 (112.8) 9.09 (230.9)

3 3 3 3 3 V4-T3-68

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

8.70 (221.0)

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Medium Voltage Power Contactors

3.2

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3

Lug Terminal

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Upper Lug Terminal

Lug Terminal Width

Hardware Diameter

De

pt

Contactor Ampere Rating

Width

Depth

Hardware (Bolt Diameter)

7.2 kV/160

0.75 (19.1)

1.31 (33.3)

10

7.2 kV/200

1.00 (25.4)

1.31 (33.3)

10

7.2 kV/360

1.00 (25.4)

1.31 (33.3)

10

7.2 kV/400

1.00 (25.4)

1.31 (33.3)

10

3 3

h

3 3 3

Lower Lug Terminal Contactor Ampere Rating

Width

Depth

Hardware (Bolt Diameter)

3

7.2 kV/160

1.25 (31.8)

1.10 (27.9)

10

7.2 kV/200

1.25 (31.8)

1.10 (27.9)

10

3

7.2 kV/360

1.25 (31.8)

1.10 (27.9)

10

7.2 kV/400

1.25 (31.8)

1.10 (27.9)

10

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-69

3.2 3

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Medium Voltage Power Contactors

Contents

SL 7.2 kV/800A Medium Voltage Contactor

Description

3

Page

Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SL MV Power Contactor 7.2 kV/160–400A . . . . . . SL MV Power Contactor 7.2 kV/800A Options and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SL MV Power Contactor 15 kV/300A . . . . . . . . . .

3 3 3

V4-T3-59 V4-T3-61 V4-T3-71 V4-T3-71 V4-T3-73 V4-T3-74

3 3 3 3 3 3

SL MV Power Contactor 7.2 kV/800A

3

Product Description

3

●

3 3 3

●

A single family of contactors for any medium voltage control application. Voltage range of 2200– 7200V 800A rating with induction motor horsepower ranges from 3000 to 10,000 hp

Application Description Eaton’s SL Medium Voltage Contactors starting applications: ● Squirrel-cage induction motors ● Synchronous motors ● Wound-rotor Fully applicable to: ● Full voltage starting ● Reduced voltage starting

3 3

The perfect choice for harsh duty applications: ● Mining ● Pulp and paper ● HVAC ● Petrochemical ● Automotive ● Many others

3 3 3 3

Features, Benefits and Functions ●

●

●

●

●

Two different altitude versions Leading-edge vacuum technology Long life—200,000 electrical and 250,000 mechanical Special ordering allows unit to be factory pre-set to customer specification, including field kit installation Highest quality available— all contactors manufactured within state-of-the-art “ISO-Certified” facilities. 100% made in America

Factory Installed Option Kit ● Mechanical latch—many coil voltages

3

Standards and Certifications Acceptability ● NEMA ● ANSI ● IEC Third-Party Verification ● UL ● CSA ● KEMA Design and Test Standards ● UL 347, File No. E63257 ● CSA ● ANSI/NEMA ICS 3 ● IEC 60470

Product Selection Contact Eaton for pricing.

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V4-T3-70

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

3.2

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Medium Voltage Power Contactors

Options and Accessories

Technical Data and Specifications

SL Series—Accessory Options 800A

3

The SL Contactor Ratings ● Voltages of 2200–7200V ● 800A (720A enclosed) ● Interrupting rating of 12,500A

3

Control Voltages ● 110, 220 Vac, 50 Hz ● 120, 240 Vac, 60 Hz ● 125 Vdc

3 3

Dropout Time ● 50–330 ms, field selectable

3 3

Front and Rear View 7.2 kV/800A

3 3 3

Mechanical Latch Assembly 800A

3

Mechanical Latch Option— SL Vacuum Contactor Size 800A Factory installed for 800A SL Vacuum Contactor. Coil voltages available in a wide range of AC and DC selections.

3 3 3

Rear View

Front View

3

SL Series Fuses Fuse Application Table for SL Contactors 7.2 kV/SL-800 Motor FLA

Voltage

Suggested Eaton Fuse

Rating

Minimum Opening Time

225–360

2400–4800

5BCLS-24R

450–24R

50

360–449

2400–4800

5BCLS-36R

650–36R

130

450–720

2400–4800

5BCLS-44R

800–44R

250

225–400

5500–6600

7BCLS-24R

450–24R

50

400–449

5500–6600

7BCLS-36R

650–36R

130

450–720

5500–6600

7BCLS-44R

800–44R

250

3 3 3 3 3 3

Note Fuse selections based on LRC = FLA x 6 with acceleration time of 10 seconds.

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-71

3.2

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Medium Voltage Power Contactors

3

SL Series Ratings

3

Type SL Vacuum Contactor Ratings 7.2 kV/SL-800

3 3 3 3 3

Interrupting Rating Rated Utilization Voltage

NEMA Unfused (E1) kA

Application Table NEMA Fused (E2) kA

(0.8 PF)

(1.0 PF)

Transformer kVA

Capacitor kVAR

Maximum Insulation Voltage

2200–2500

12.5 (50 MVA)

50 (200 MVA at 2300V)

3000

3000

3500

2500

2400

7200

3000–3600

12.5 (50 MVA)

50 (285 MVA at 3300V)

4000

4000

5000

3500

3200

7200

3800–5000

12.5 (75 MVA)

50 (400 MVA at 4600V)

5000

5000

6000

4500

4000

7200

6000–7200

12.5 (100 MVA)

50 (570 MVA at 6600V)

8000

8000

10,000

6000

4800

7200

Rating Specifications 7.2 kV/SL-800

3

Ampere Rating

3

Maximum Interrupting Current (Three operations—amperes)

12,500

3

Rated Current

800 (720 enclosed)

IEC Make-Break Capability—AC4 (Amperes) Make

7650

Break

6120

3

Synchronous Motor Horsepower

Induction Motor Horsepower

7.2 kV/800A

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Product Specifications 7.2 kV/800A ● Short-time current ● 30 seconds: 4320A ● 1 second: 10,800A ● 8.7 ms (0.5 cycle) 86 kA peak ● Normal service altitude: –3281 to +6562 ft (–1000 to +2000m) ● Mechanical life: 250,000 ● Electrical life: 200,000 operations ● BIL (impulse withstand): 60 kV (1.2 x 50 microseconds) ● Dielectric strength: 18.2 kV rms (1 minute)

3

●

●

●

●

●

Closing time (energization to contact touch): 80 ms Opening times (de-energization to full open): ● 50 ms (3 cycles) ● 130 ms (8 cycles) ● 200 ms (12 cycles) ● 330 ms (20 cycles) Arcing time: 12 ms (0.75 cycle) or less Pickup voltage: 80% rated coil voltage Dropout voltage: 60% rated coil voltage

●

●

●

Control voltages: ● AC/Hz: 110/50, 120/ 60 Vac, 220/50, 240/60 ● DC: 125 Vdc Control circuit burden: ● Closing (120/240): 2600 VA ● Holding (120/240): 50 VA Auxiliary contact rating: ● 600V (maximum) ● 10A continuous current ● Making capacity – AC: 7200 VA – DC: 200 VA ● Breaking capacity – AC: 720 VA – DC: 200 VA

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V4-T3-72

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

●

●

Latch (when specified): ● Mechanical life: 250,000 operations ● Trip voltage – DC: 24, 48, 96V – AC: 110/120, 220/ 240V 50/60 Hz ● Minimum trip voltage: 80% rated coil voltage ● Trip burden – 24 Vdc: 1200 VA – 48 and 96 Vdc: 400 VA – 110 and 220 Vac: 500 VA ● Trip time (2 cycles): 30 ms Weight: 95 lbs (43.1 kg)

3.2

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Medium Voltage Power Contactors

Dimensions

3

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3

Dimensional Drawings 7.2 kV/800A Side

3

Top 3.64 (92.5)

4.39 (111.5)

4.39 (111.5)

3 3 3 3

Load Connections

10.25 (260.4)

8.29 (210.6) Line Connections

3 3 3

3.64 (92.5)

3 3

16.25 (412.8)

3

16.15 (410.2)

3

Lug Terminal

Front 1.00 (25.4)

3

Line Connections

3 3

Latch Trip Target (when used)

16.86 (428.2) Interlock

Width

9.84 (249.9) Hardware Diameter

De

pt

Contactor Ampere Rating

Width

7.2 kV/800

1.75 (44.5)

3 3 3

Upper Lug Terminal

Lug Terminal

5.04 (128.0)

Detail B Load Lug Terminal Use 10 mm or 3/8 inch Bolt

Detail A Line Lug Terminal Use 10 mm or 3/8 inch Bolt

Depth

Hardware (Bolt Diameter)

3

2.00 (50.8)

10

3

h

Lower Lug Terminal Contactor Ampere Rating

Width

Depth

Hardware (Bolt Diameter)

7.2 kV/800

1.50 (38.1)

1.50 (38.1)

10

16.93 (430.0)

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-73

3.2 3

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Medium Voltage Power Contactors

Contents

SL 15 kV/300A Medium Voltage Contactor

Description

3

Page

Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SL MV Power Contactor 7.2 kV/160–400A . . . . . . SL MV Power Contactor 7.2 kV/800A . . . . . . . . . . SL MV Power Contactor 15 kV/300A Options and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 3 3

V4-T3-59 V4-T3-61 V4-T3-70 V4-T3-75 V4-T3-75 V4-T3-77

3 3 3 3 3 3

SL MV Power Contactor 15 kV/300A

3

Product Description

3

●

3 3

●

3

●

3

●

3

●

3 3

●

3 3 3 3

●

A single family of contactors for any medium voltage control application. Voltage range of 7200– 15,000V 300A rating with induction motor horsepower ranges from 500 to 7500 hp Two different altitude versions Leading-edge vacuum technology Long life—200,000 electrical and 250,000 mechanical operations Special ordering allows unit to be factory pre-set to customer specification, including field kit installation Highest quality available—all contactors manufactured within state-of-the-art “ISOCertified” facilities. 100% made in America

Application Description Eaton’s SL Medium Voltage Contactors starting applications: ● Squirrel-cage induction motors ● Synchronous motors ● Wound-rotor

Features, Benefits and Functions Factory Installed Option Kit ● Mechanical latch—many coil voltages

Fully applicable to: ● Full voltage starting ● Reduced voltage starting The perfect choice for harsh duty applications: ● Mining ● Pulp and paper ● HVAC ● Petrochemical ● Automotive ● Many others

3 3 3 3 3 3 V4-T3-74

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

Standards and Certifications Acceptability ● NEMA ● ANSI ● IEC Third-Party Verification ● UL ● CSA ● KEMA Design and Test Standards ● UL 347, File No. E63257 ● CSA ● ANSI/NEMA ICS 3 ● IEC 60470

Product Selection Contact Eaton for pricing.

3.2

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Medium Voltage Power Contactors

Options and Accessories

Technical Data and Specifications

SL Series—Accessory Options 15 kV/300A

3

The SL Contactor Ratings ● Voltages to 15,000V ● 300A ● Interrupting rating of 5000A

3

Control Voltages ● 110, 220 Vac, 50 Hz ● 120, 240 Vac, 60 Hz ● 125 Vdc

3 3

Dropout Time ● 50–330 ms ● Field selectable

3 3

Front and Rear View 15 kV/300A

3 3 3 3

Mechanical Latch Assembly 15 kV/300A

Mechanical Latch Option— SL Vacuum Contactor Factory installed for 15 kV/ 300A SL Vacuum Contactor. Coil voltages available in a wide range of AC and DC selections.

3 Front View

3

Rear View

SL Series Fuses

3

Fuse Application Table for SL Contactors 15 kV/SL-300A

3

Motor FLA

Voltage

Suggested Eaton Fuse

Rating

Minimum Opening Time

3

50–300 1

10,000–13,800

15BHCLS-400

400

130 ms

3

Notes 1 For FLA >275, contact factory for maximum acceleration time. Fuse selections based on LRC = FLA x 6 with acceleration time of 10 seconds except where otherwise noted.

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-75

3.2

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Medium Voltage Power Contactors

3

SL Series Ratings

3

Type SL Vacuum Contactor Ratings 15 kV/300A

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Interrupting Rating

Application Table Synchronous Motor Horsepower

Rated Utilization Voltage

NEMA Unfused (E1) kA

NEMA Fused (E2) kA

Induction Motor Horsepower

(0.8 PF)

(1.0 PF)

Transformer kVA

Capacitor kVAR

Maximum Insulation Voltage

10,000–11,000

5

50 (950 MVA at 11,000V)

6000

6000

6750

5500

Consult factory

15,000

12,400–13,800

5

50 (1190 MVA at 13,800V)

7500

7500

8500

6800

Consult factory

15,000

Rating Specifications 15 kV/300A Ampere Rating

15 kV/300A

Maximum Interrupting Current (Three operations—amperes)

5000

Rated Current

300

IEC Make-Break Capability—AC4 (Amperes) Make

3000

Break

3000

Product Specifications 15 kV/300A ● Short-time current ● 30 seconds: 1800A ● 1 second: 4500A ● 8.7 ms (0.5 cycle) 25 kA peak ● Normal service altitude: –3281 to +6562 ft (–1000 to +2000m) ● Mechanical life: 250,000 operations ● Electrical life: 200,000 operations ● BIL (impulse withstand): 75 kV (1.2 x 50 microseconds) ● Dielectric strength: 36 kV rms (1 minute)

3

●

●

●

●

●

Closing time (energization to contact touch): 80 ms Selectable opening times (de-energization to full open): ● 50 ms (3 cycles) ● 130 ms (8 cycles) ● 250 ms (12 cycles) ● 330 ms (20 cycles) Arcing time: 12 ms (0.75 cycle) or less Pickup voltage: 80% rated coil voltage Dropout voltage: 60% rated coil voltage

●

●

●

Control voltages: ● AC/Hz: 110/50, 120/ 60 Vac, 220/50, 240/60 ● DC: 125 Vdc Control circuit burden: ● Closing (120/240): 1700/2600 VA ● Holding (120/240): 80 VA Auxiliary contact rating: ● 600V (maximum) ● 10A continuous current ● Making capacity – AC: 7200 VA – DC: 200 VA ● Breaking capacity – AC: 720 VA – DC: 200 VA

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V4-T3-76

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

●

Latch (when specified): Mechanical life: 250,000 operations ● Trip voltage – DC: 24, 48, 96V – AC: 110/120, 220/ 240V, 50/60 Hz ● Minimum trip voltage: 80% rated coil voltage ● Trip burden – 24 Vdc: 1200 VA – 48 and 96 Vdc: 400 VA – 110 and 220 Vac: 500 VA ● Trip time (2 cycles): 30 ms Weight: 95 lbs (43.1 kg) ●

●

3.2

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Medium Voltage Power Contactors

Dimensions

3

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3

Dimensional Drawings 15 kV/300A Front

3

Side 15 kV/300A 16.18 (410.9)

3

4.65 (118.1)

Line Terminals

3 3

21.40 (543.4)

3

Intl'k

17.77 (451.4)

3 12.29 (312.1) 8 7 6 5 LATCH COIL

Load Terminals

4 3 2 2 AUX POWER

3.50 (88.9)

3

18.58 (471.9)

3

5.60 (142.2)

7.95 (202.0) 15.88 (403.4)

3 3

5.60 (142.2)

Front View

3 3

13.25 (336.6)

3

RH Side View

3

Lug Terminal

Top 3.55 (90.1)

4.40 (111.7)

3

4.40 (111.7)

3

ø 0.31 (7.9)

3

ø 0.34 (8.7)

3 3 3

13.00 (330.2) 11.50 (292.1)

Upper Lug Terminal

Lug Terminal

4.60 (116.8)

Hardware Diameter

0.38 (9.5) 15.88 (403.4) 16.63 (422.4)

Width

0.80 (20.3)

De

pt

Contactor Ampere Rating

Width

Depth

Hardware (Bolt Diameter)

15 kV/300

1.25 (31.8)

1.25 (31.8)

10

h

3 3 3

Lower Lug Terminal Contactor Ampere Rating

Width

Depth

Hardware (Bolt Diameter)

15 kV/300

1.50 (38.1)

1.25 (38.1)

10

3 3 3

Top View

3 3 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-77

3.3

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Fuses General

Contents

3

Description

3

Fuses General

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Product Overview

3

Power Fuse

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Power vs. Distribution

Eaton’s roots in the medium voltage power fuse business began over 75 years ago under Westinghouse® Electric. In 1935, Westinghouse introduced the medium voltage boric acid expulsion fuse followed by the medium voltage current limiting fuse. Even today, medium voltage fuses continue to use that core technology. Eaton continues to build on the technology legacy by engineering higher performance, cost-effective power fuse products. Eaton’s medium voltage fuses are manufactured and tested to the requirements of the C37-4X series of standards, which are maintained and updated regularly to maintain currency with industry practices. These standards are: IEEE Std. C37.40 ™ IEEE Standard Service Conditions and Definitions for High Voltage Fuses, Distribution Enclosed SinglePole Air Switches, Fuse Disconnecting Switches, and Accessories (ANSI).

IEEE Std. C37.41 ™ IEEE Standard Design Tests for High-Voltage (>1000V) Fuses, Fuse and Disconnecting Cutouts, Distribution Enclosed SinglePole Air Switches, Fuse Disconnecting Switches, and Fuse Links and Accessories used with These Devices (ANSI). ANSI C37.42 ™ IEEE Standard Specifications for High-Voltage (>1000V) Expulsion-Type DistributionClass Fuses, Fuse and Disconnecting Cutouts, Fuse Disconnecting Switches, and Fuse Links, and Accessories used with These Devices (ANSI). ANSI C37.46 American National Standard for High Voltage Expulsion and Current Limiting Type Power Class Fuses and Fuse Disconnecting Switches.

The following IEEE standards are also applicable to the fuse products covered in this publication: IEEE Std. C37.48 ™ IEEE Guide for the Application, Operation, and Maintenance of High Voltage Fuses, Distribution Enclosed Single-Pole Air Switches, Fuse Disconnecting Switches, and Accessories (ANSI). IEEE Std. C37.48.1 ™ IEEE Guide for the Classification, Application, and Coordination of CurrentLimiting Fuses with Rated Voltages 1–38 kV. A better understanding of some fuse terminology will help you understand and select the correct fuse. The following is a brief overview of those terms.

ANSI C37.47 American National Standard for High Voltage Current Limiting Type Distribution Class Fuses and Fuse Disconnecting Switches.

3 3 V4-T3-78

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

The differentiation is intended to indicate the test conditions and where fuses are normally applied on an electrical system, based on specific requirements for generating sources, substations and distribution lines. Each class has its own unique set of voltage, current and construction requirements (see C37.42, .46 and .47).

Low vs. Medium vs. High Voltage While fuses are defined in the ANSI standards as either low or high voltage, Eaton has elected to name their fuses to correspond with the equipment in which they are installed. Therefore, per ANSI C84, our fuses are named as follows: ●

●

●

Low voltage—1000V and below Medium voltage—greater than 1000 to 69,000V High voltage—greater than 69,000V

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Fuses General

Expulsion vs. Current Limiting (Definitions per ANSI C47.40-1993) An expulsion fuse is a vented fuse in which the expulsion effect of the gases produced by internal arcing, either alone or aided by other mechanisms, results in current interruption.

Backup Fuses A fuse capable of interrupting all currents from the maximum rated interrupting current down to the rated minimum interrupting current.

An expulsion fuse is not current limiting and as a result limits the duration of a fault on the electrical system, not the magnitude.

Backup fuses are always used in a series with another interrupting device capable of interrupting currents below the fuse’s minimum interrupting current.

A current limiting fuse is a fuse that, when its current responsive element is melted by a current within the fuse’s specified current limiting range, abruptly introduces a high resistance to reduce current magnitude and duration, resulting in subsequent current interruption. Refer to Fuse Types Protection Range figure on Page V4-T3-80 for a features comparison.

Fuse Types There are three current limiting fuse types: Backup, General Purpose and Full Range. It is important that the user have an understanding of these definitions to ensure proper application of the fuse (see Fuse Types Protection Range figure on Page V4-T3-80).

General Purpose Fuses A fuse capable of interrupting all currents from the rated interrupting current down to the current that causes melting of the fusible element in no less than one hour. General Purpose fuses are typically used to protect feeders and components such as transformers. Full Range Fuses A fuse capable of interrupting all currents from the rated interrupting current down to the minimum continuous current that causes melting of the fusible element, with the fuse applied at the maximum ambient temperature specified by the manufacturer.

3.3

General Fuse Component Terms Fuse Refill Unit (of an Expulsion Fuse) A fuse refill unit is a replaceable assembly containing the calibrated current-responsive fuse element and certain other items that facilitate current interruption. On its own, the refill unit has no interrupting ability. A refill unit must be mounted in a fuseholder with a spring assembly to form a refillable fuse unit. The refill unit is the section of the fuse that must be replaced after a fuse operation. Fuseholder (of an Expulsion Fuse) A fuseholder is a reusable holder that when equipped with a fuse refill unit forms a fuse unit, capable of interrupting an overload or fault current. A fuseholder is supplied with a spring and shunt assembly, necessary to complete the internal interrupting assembly. The spring and shunt assembly is supplied with the fuseholder but is also available as a replacement part, as it may need replacement after several of heavy operations. Fuse Unit A fuse unit is a replaceable unit or assembly that is able, on its own, to perform current interruption. In the case of a refillable fuse unit, the refill unit must be replaced after a fuse operation. Where a complete fuse unit is supplied from the factory, the complete fuse unit must be replaced after a fuse operation. All currentlimiting fuses are fuse units.

3 Exhaust Control Device When expulsion fuses are used in enclosures, exhaust control devices (filters, condensers or mufflers) are used to control the sound of the fuse operation, and to de-ionize and absorb the fuse exhaust products. These devices are normally supplied separately, because of different characteristics and ratings. They are reusable but may need replacement after several heavy operations.

3

Mounting A mounting provides all the necessary parts to safely mount a fuse in its intended piece of equipment. The base is the metal support to which all other pieces attach. Insulators attach to the base and insulate the live fuse unit from the base and everything beyond the base. Live parts are the parts of the mounting that are energized once electricity is flowing. The live parts provide the means to hold the fuse unit in place, electrical contact, and a place to make line and load connections.

3

Non-Disconnect Mounting A non-disconnect mounting does not provide a means for removing the fuse unit until the circuit is dead and the fuse unit can be removed manually. The fuse unit is held in place by friction through the use of fuse clips or by a cross bar.

3

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-79

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Fuses General

Disconnect Mounting The disconnect mounting allows the fuse unit to be removed (off load) using an insulated hook stick. The hookstick grabs a pull ring and disconnects the fuse unit, which may then be lifted out of its mounting. Dropout Mounting Dropout mountings are used in outdoor applications. The fuse unit is equipped with a mechanical trigger that unlatches the upper contact, allowing the fuse unit to drop out, increasing the dielectric separation, and providing visible indication of a blown fuse. Live Parts Live parts were briefly discussed as part of the “Mounting” definition. Everything above the insulators on the mounting excluding the fuse unit, fuse holder, and the fuse end fittings (if required) are considered the live parts. Fuse end fittings are discussed next and are not required with non-disconnect live parts, but are required and included with disconnect live parts. Live parts may be sold separately as replacement parts or for new OEM applications.

End Fittings End fittings are metal parts that attach to each end of a fuse unit’s ferrules (end caps). As previously mentioned, they are used solely with disconnect fuse applications or when converting a nondisconnect to a disconnect fuse configuration. When end fittings are ordered, a fitting for each end of the fuse is included. Keep in mind that end fittings can become damaged in use and, therefore, are sold separately from the live parts when necessary. It is not necessary to purchase an entire set of live parts when only the end fittings are required.

General High Voltage Fuse Comparison Expulsion

Current Limiting

Vented

Sealed

Electromechanical

Static

Interrupts at current zero

Limits fault current

Generally higher voltage and current application capabilities

Generally higher interrupting ratings

Different time/current characteristics

Different time/current characteristics

Fuse Types Protection Range i max. — Maximum rated interrupting current i min. — Minimum rated interrupting current i hr. — Current causing element melting in 1 hour i — Any current melting element with no time limit

Current Limiting Type

3.3

BACKUP GENERAL PURPOSE FULL RANGE

i

Interrupting Current

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V4-T3-80

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

i hr.

i min.

i max.

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Expulsion Fuses

3.4

Contents Description Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page V4-T3-82 V4-T3-83

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Product Description Eaton’s expulsion fuses use boric acid as the interrupting medium. Under a fault condition, arc heat decomposes the boric acid into water vapor. The water vapor blast deionizes the arc path preventing arc re-ignition after a natural current zero. Type RBA indoor expulsion fuses must be fitted with a discharge filter or condenser, that moderates the discharge exhaust. The discharge filter limits the exhaust to a small and relatively inert amount of gas and lowers the noise level without affecting the fuse interrupting rating. Steam discharge, that can effect the interrupting, is fully restricted by the condenser. Type RDB outdoor dropout fuses include an ejector spring that forces the arcing rod through the top of the fuse. The arcing rod strikes a latch on the mounting that forces the fuse to swing outward through a 180° arc into the dropout position.

Type DBU fuse units are designed for new and aftermarket utility applications. End fittings are available, in both indoor and outdoor versions, as well as live parts and mountings. Mufflers confine the arc within the fuse and substantially reduce the noise and exhaust when the fuse interrupts.

Accessories

3

The following accessories are available for expulsion fuses:

3

Mountings

3

Mountings include a base, porcelain or glass polyester insulators, and live parts. They help enable the fuse to be safely attached to the gear. Mountings can be either disconnect, nondisconnect or dropout. Non-disconnect mountings are available in bolt-on or clamp-type arrangements. Fuses may be vertical or underhung.

3 3 3 3 3 3

Live Parts RBA E-Rated Refillable Boric Acid

3

Live parts attach the fuse to the insulators and are considered part of the mounting. All parts above the insulators are live parts.

3 3

End Fittings

RDB E-Rated Refillable Outdoor Dropout Boric Acid

3

End fittings are metal parts that attach to each end of the fuse at the ferrules. They are used only on disconnect fuses or when converting a nondisconnect to a disconnect fuse.

3 3 3

Refill units can be field installed into RBA and RDB expulsion fuses. Once the operated unit has been removed, the separately purchased unit can be easily installed into the fuse holder.

3 3 3 3

DBU Dropout Boric Acid—for Use Indoors, Inside Switchgear or Outdoors

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-81

3.4 3 3 3 3 3 3

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Expulsion Fuses

Catalog Number Selection Expulsion Fuse Easy to Use, Easy to Order! Eaton’s fuse catalog numbering system makes it easy to order the right fuse. The catalog numbers are easy to remember, unique to each fuse, and are broken down in three descriptive segments: Fuse Type, Voltage Rating and Current Rating.

3 3 3 3

These Catalog numbers can be entered directly and easily: ●

●

No change in order processing will occur if you use either a style number or its corresponding catalog number. You will get the same fuse If you are ordering a replacement for an older Westinghouse fuse, it will only have the style number. Order under this style number and you will get the correct fuse

Examples: 8RBA2-10E

DBU17-30K

15RBA8-INH 15.5 max. kV, RBA-800, indicating nondisconnect holder RBA4-FLTR

RBA-400 filter

15 DBU 17 - 100 E

3

Maximum kV 8 15 25 38 48 72 92 121 145

3 3 3

Type RBA DBU DBA RDB RBT BA

Maximum kV 17 27 38

3 3

17.1 max. kV, DBU fuse unit, 30 amperes

Expulsion Fuse Units

3

3

8.3 max. kV, RBA-200 refill, 10E amperes

Amperes 0.5 50 3 65 5 80 7 100 10 125 15 150 20 200 25 250 30 300 40 400

Speed E K SE

Expulsion Fuse Accessories

15 RBA2 - P NM

3 Maximum kV 8 15 17 25 27 38

3 3 3 3 3 3

Type RBA DBU RDB BA

Insulator G = Glass polyester P = Porcelain H = High BIL

Hardware UM = Underhung mounting VM = Vertical mounting DL = Disconnect live parts NL = Nondisconnect live parts DH = Disconnect holder NH = Nondisconnect holder NM = Nondisconnect mounting UL = Underhung live parts VL = Vertical live parts I = Indicating O = Outdoor FLTR = Filter COND = Condenser MFLR = Muffler SHNT = Shunt and spring assembly

3 3 3 3 3 V4-T3-82

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

3.4

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Expulsion Fuses

Product Selection Contact Eaton for pricing.

3

Type RBA and RDB

3

Type 8RBA2 Expulsion Fuse Refill Units—8.3 kV Maximum (7.2 kV Nominal) 200A

3

RBA/RBT Refill Units Standard Speed (Fuse Refills)

Time Lag (Fuse Refills)

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

Curve Reference 36-635

Catalog Number

Curve Reference 36-635

Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)

10E

8RBA2-10E

1, 2

—

—

1.0 (0.45)

15E

8RBA2-15E

1, 2

—

—

1.0 (0.45)

20E

8RBA2-20E

1, 2

8RBT2-20E

3, 4

1.0 (0.45)

25E

8RBA2-25E

1, 2

8RBT2-25E

3, 4

1.0 (0.45)

30E

8RBA2-30E

1, 2

8RBT2-30E

3, 4

1.0 (0.45)

40E

8RBA2-40E

1, 2

8RBT2-40E

3, 4

1.0 (0.45)

50E

8RBA2-50E

1, 2

8RBT2-50E

3, 4

1.0 (0.45)

65E

8RBA2-65E

1, 2

8RBT2-65E

3, 4

1.0 (0.45)

80E

8RBA2-80E

1, 2

8RBT2-80E

3, 4

1.0 (0.45)

100E

8RBA2-100E

1, 2

8RBT2-100E

3, 4

1.0 (0.45)

125E

8RBA2-125E

1, 2

8RBT2-125E

3, 4

1.0 (0.45)

150E

8RBA2-150E

1, 2

8RBT2-150E

3, 4

1.0 (0.45)

200E

8RBA2-200E

1, 2

8RBT2-200E

3, 4

1.0 (0.45)

3 3 3 3 3 3 3

RBA Fuseholders, Mountings and Hardware (For Use with RBA/RBT Refills/Holders for Indoor or Enclosure Applications) Mounting (Including Live Parts Less Holder)

Ampere Rating 10E–200E

Porcelain Insulator

Voltage (kV)

Style

Non-Indicating Indicating Catalog Number Catalog Number Nominal

Non-disconnect

8RBA2-NH

8RBA2-INH

4.8

Live Parts

Fuse Filters and Condensers

Spring and Shunt Assy.

Glass Polyester

8RBA2-NH

8RBA2-INH

7.2

8RBA2-DH

BRBA2-IDH

4.8

Maximum

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

3

5.5

60

5RBA2-GNM

15RBA2-NL

RBA2-FLTR

8RBA2-SHNT

3

8RBA2-SHNT

3

8RBA2-SHNT

3

8RBA2-SHNT

3

8RBA2-SHNT

3

8RBA2-SHNT

3

5RBA2-PNM

8.3

75

8RBA2-PNM

8RBA2-GNM

15RBA2-NL

RBA2-FLTR

5.5

60

5RBA2-PDM

5RBA2-GDM

14RBA2-DL

RBA2-FLTR RBA2-COND

Disconnect

8RBA2-DH

BRBA2-IDH

7.2

8.3

75

8RBA2-PDM

8RBA2-GDM

14RBA2-DL

RBA2-FLTR RBA2-COND

Bolt-in

—

8RBA2-INH-B

4.8

5.5

60

5RBA8-PNM

5RBA8-GNM

15RBA8-NL

RBA2-FLTR RBA2-COND

Bolt-in

—

8RBA2-INH-B

7.2

8.3

75

8RBA8-PNM

8RBA8-GNM

15RBA8-NL

RBA2-FLTR RBA2-COND

3

Type RDB Expulsion Fuses for Use Outdoors—8.3 kV Maximum (7.2 kV Nominal) 200A 2

3

RDB Fuseholders, Mountings and Hardware (For Use with RBA/RBT Refills/Holders for Outdoor Applications) Mounting (Including Live Parts Less Holder) Fuseholder Ampere Rating 10E–200E

3

Catalog Number

RBA2-COND Disconnect

3

LIWL Catalog (BIL) Number

RBA2-COND Non-disconnect

3 3

Type RBA Expulsion Fuses for Use Indoors or in an Enclosure— 8.3 kV Maximum (7.2 kV Nominal) 200A (For Use with 8RBA2 Fuseholders) 1

Fuseholder

3

Voltage (kV)

Live Parts

Spring and Shunt Assy.

Vertical (180°) Mounting

Underhung (90°) Mounting

Vertical

Underhung

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Style

Catalog Number

Nominal

Maximum

LIWL (BIL)

Dropout

8RDB2-DH

7.2

8.3

95

8RDB2-VM

8RDB2-UM

RDB2-VL

RDB2-UL

8RDB2-SHNT

Dropout

8RDB2-DH

7.2

8.3

110

8RDB2-HVM

8RDB2-HUM

RDB2-VL

RDB2-UL

8RDB2-SHNT

Notes 1 For new installation, order one refill (Standard Speed or Time Lag), one fuseholder, one mounting, and one filter or condenser per phase. Live parts can be substituted for the mounting if the |user is supplying base support and insulators. 2 For new installation, order one refill (Standard Speed or Time Lag), one fuseholder and one mounting per phase. Live parts can be substituted for the mounting if the user is supplying base support and insulators.

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

3 3 3 3 3 3

V4-T3-83

3.4 3 3

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Expulsion Fuses

Type 8RBA4 Expulsion Fuse Refill Units—8.3 kV Maximum (7.2 kV Nominal) 400A RBA/RBT Refill Units Standard Speed (Fuse Refills)

Time Lag (Fuse Refills)

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

Curve Reference 36-635

Catalog Number

Curve Reference 36-635

Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)

3

0.5

8RBA4-.5

5, 6

—

—

2.1 (0.95)

3

8RBA4-3

5, 6

—

—

2.1 (0.95)

3

5E

8RBA4-5E

5, 6

—

—

2.1 (0.95)

7E

8RBA4-7E

5, 6

—

—

2.1 (0.95)

3

10E

8RBA4-10E

5,6

—

—

2.1 (0.95)

15E

8RBA4-15E

5, 6

—

—

2.1 (0.95)

3

20E

8RBA4-20E

5, 6

8RBT4-20E

7, 8

2.1 (0.95)

25E

8RBA4-25E

5, 6

8RBT4-25E

7, 8

2.1 (0.95)

3

30E

8RBA4-30E

5, 6

8RBT4-30E

7, 8

2.1 (0.95)

40E

8RBA4-40E

5, 6

8RBT4-40E

7, 8

2.1 (0.95)

3

50E

8RBA4-50E

5, 6

8RBT4-50E

7, 8

2.1 (0.95)

65E

8RBA4-65E

5, 6

8RBT4-65E

7, 8

2.1 (0.95)

3

80E

8RBA4-80E

5, 6

8RBT4-80E

7, 8

2.1 (0.95)

100E

8RBA4-100E

5, 6

8RBT4-100E

7, 8

2.1 (0.95)

3

125E

8RBA4-125E

5, 6

8RBT4-125E

7, 8

2.1 (0.95)

150E

8RBA4-150E

5, 6

8RBT4-150E

7, 8

2.1 (0.95)

3

200E

8RBA4-200E

5, 6

8RBT4-200E

7, 8

2.1 (0.95)

250E

8RBA4-250E

5, 6

8RBT4-250E

10, 11

2.1 (0.95)

3

300E

8RBA4-300E

5, 6

8RBT4-300E

10, 11

2.1 (0.95)

400E

8RBA4-400E

5, 6

8RBT4-400E

10, 11

2.1 (0.95)

3 3

Type RBA Expulsion Fuses for Use Indoors or in an Enclosure— 8.3 kV Maximum (7.2 kV Nominal) 400A (For Use with 8RBA4 Fuseholders) 1 RBA Fuseholders, Mountings and Hardware (For Use with RBA/RBT Refills/Holders for Indoor or Enclosure Applications) Mounting (Including Live Parts Less Holder)

3 3 3

Fuseholder

Porcelain Insulator

Voltage (kV)

Live Parts

Fuse Filters and Condensers

Spring and Shunt Assy.

Glass Polyester

Ampere Rating

Style

Non-Indicating Indicating Catalog Number Catalog Number Nominal

Maximum

LIWL Catalog (BIL) Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

0.5–400E

Non-disconnect

8RBA4-NH

5.5

60

5RBA4-GNM

15RBA4-NL

RBA4-FLTR

8RBA4-SHNT

3

8RBA4-INH

4.8

5RBA4-PNM

RBA4-COND Non-disconnect

3

8RBA4-NH

8RBA4-INH

7.2

8.3

75

8RBA4-PNM

8RBA4-GNM

15RBA4-NL

Disconnect

8RBA4-DH

BRBA2-IDH

4.8

5.5

60

5RBA4-PDM

5RBA4-GDM

14RBA4-DL

Disconnect

8RBA4-SHNT

8RBA4-DH

BRBA2-IDH

7.2

8.3

75

8RBA4-PDM

8RBA4-GDM

14RBA4-DL

RBA4-FLTR

8RBA4-SHNT

RBA4-COND Bolt-in

3

—

8RBA2-INH-B

4.8

5.5

60

5RBA8-PNM

5RBA8-GNM

15RBA8-NL

RBA4-FLTR

8RBA4-SHNT

RBA4-COND Bolt-in

—

8RBA4-INH-B

7.2

8.3

75

8RBA8-PNM

8RBA8-GNM

15RBA8-NL

3

RBA4-FLTR

8RBA4-SHNT

RBA4-COND

Type RDB Expulsion Fuses for Use Outdoors—8.3 kV Maximum (7.2 kV Nominal) 400A 2 RDB Fuseholders, Mountings and Hardware (For Use with RBA/RBT Refills/Holders for Outdoor Applications)

3

Fuseholder

Voltage (kV)

Live Parts

Vertical (180°) Mounting

Underhung (90°) Mounting

Vertical

Underhung

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

3 3

0.5–400E

3

Notes 1 For new installation, order one refill (Standard Speed or Time Lag), one fuseholder, one mounting, and one filter or condenser per phase. Live parts can be substituted for the mounting if the user is supplying base support and insulators. 2 For new installation, order one refill (Standard Speed or Time Lag), one fuseholder and one mounting per phase. Live parts can be substituted for the mounting if the user is supplying base support and insulators. V4-T3-84

Spring and Shunt Assy.

Style

Catalog Number

Dropout

8RDB4-DH

7.2

8.3

95

8RDB4-VM

8RDB4-UM

RDB4-VL

RDB4-UL

8RDB4-SHNT

Dropout

8RDB4-DH

7.2

8.3

110

8RDB4-HVM

8RDB4-HUM

RDB4-VL

RDB4-UL

8RDB4-SHNT

Nominal

Maximum

LIWL (BIL)

Mounting (Including Live Parts Less Holder)

Ampere Rating

3

RBA4-FLTR RBA4-COND

3

3

8RBA4-SHNT

RBA4-COND

3

3

RBA4-FLTR

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

Catalog Number

3.4

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Expulsion Fuses

Type 8RBA4 Expulsion Fuse Refill Units Used in 8RBA8/8RDB4 Fuseholders— 8.3 kV Maximum (7.2 kV Nominal) 800A

3

RBA/RBT Refill Units Standard Speed (Fuse Refills)

Time Lag (Fuse Refills)

Quantity

Catalog Number

Curve Reference 36-635

Quantity

Catalog Number

Curve Reference 36-635

Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)

2

8RBA4-250E

9

2

8RBT4-250E

12

1

540E

2

8RBA4-300E

9

2

8RBT4-300E

12

1

720E

2

8RBA4-400E

9

2

8RBT4-400E

12

1

Ampere Rating 450E

3 3 3

RBA Fuseholders, Mountings and Hardware (For Use with RBA/RBT Refills/Holders for Indoor or Enclosure Applications) Mounting (Including Live Parts Less Holder) Fuseholder Ampere Rating

Voltage (kV)

Non-Indicating Indicating Catalog Number Catalog Number Nominal

450E–720E Non-disconnect

8RBA8-NH

8RBA8-INH

4.8

Non-disconnect

8RBA8-NH

8RBA8-INH

7.2

Style

3 3

Type RBA Expulsion Fuses for Use Indoors or in an Enclosure— 8.3 kV Maximum (7.2 kV Nominal) 800A (For Use with 8RBA8 Fuseholders) 2

Porcelain Insulator

3

Live Parts

Fuse Filters and Condensers

Spring and Shunt Assy.

Glass Polyester

Maximum

LIWL Catalog (BIL) Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

5.5

60

5RBA8-PNM

5RBA8-GNM

15RBA8-NL

RBA4-FLTR 3

8RBA4-SHNT

8.3

75

8RBA8-PNM

8RBA8-GNM

15RBA8-NL

RBA4-FLTR 3

RBA4-COND 3 8RBA4-SHNT

RBA4-COND 3

3 3 3 3 3 3

Type RDB Expulsion Fuses for Use Outdoors—8.3 kV Maximum (7.2 kV Nominal) 800A

3

4

RDB Fuseholders, Mountings and Hardware (For Use with RBA/RBT Refills/Holders for Outdoor Applications) Mounting (Including Live Parts Less Holder) Fuseholder Ampere Rating

Voltage (kV)

Live Parts

Spring and Shunt Assy.

Vertical (180°) Mounting

Underhung (90°) Mounting

Vertical

Underhung

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Nominal

Maximum

LIWL (BIL)

450E–720E Disconnect

8RDB4-NH

7.2

8.3

95

8RDB8-VM

8RDB8-UM

RDB8-VL

RDB8-UL

8RDB4-SHNT

Disconnect

8RDB4-NH

7.2

8.3

110

8RDB8-HVM

8RDB8-HUM

RDB8-VL

RDB8-UL

8RDB4-SHNT

Style

3 3 3 3 3

Notes 1 Requires two fuse refills as shown. Price each refill individually. Example: To order refill units for a 720E, 8.3 kV fuse, order two pieces of an 8RBA4-400E. 2 For new installation, order two refills (Standard or Time Lag), one fuseholder, one mounting, and two filters or condensers per phase. Live parts can be substituted for the mounting if the user is supplying base support and insulators. 3 Two filters or condensers required. 4 For new installation, order two refills (Standard or Time Lag), one fuseholder and one mounting per phase. Live parts can be substituted for the mounting if the user is supplying base support and insulators.

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-85

3.4 3 3

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Expulsion Fuses

Type 15RBA2 Expulsion Fuse Refill Units—15.5 kV Maximum (14.4 kV Nominal) 200A RBA/RBT Refill Units Standard Speed (Fuse Refills)

Time Lag (Fuse Refills)

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

Curve Reference 36-635

Catalog Number

Curve Reference 36-635

Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)

3

10E

15RBA2-10E

1, 2

—

—

1.1 (0.5)

3

15E

15RBA2-15E

1, 2

—

—

1.1 (0.5)

20E

15RBA2-20E

1, 2

15RBT2-20E

3, 4

1.1 (0.5)

3

25E

15RBA2-25E

1, 2

15RBT2-25E

3, 4

1.1 (0.5)

30E

15RBA2-30E

1, 2

15RBT2-30E

3, 4

1.1 (0.5)

3

40E

15RBA2-40E

1, 2

15RBT2-40E

3, 4

1.1 (0.5)

50E

15RBA2-50E

1, 2

15RBT2-50E

3, 4

1.1 (0.5)

3

65E

15RBA2-65E

1, 2

15RBT2-65E

3, 4

1.1 (0.5)

3

80E

15RBA2-80E

1, 2

15RBT2-80E

3, 4

1.1 (0.5)

100E

15RBA2-100E

1, 2

15RBT2-100E

3, 4

1.1 (0.5)

3

125E

15RBA2-125E

1, 2

15RBT2-125E

3, 4

1.1 (0.5)

150E

15RBA2-150E

1, 2

15RBT2-150E

3, 4

1.1 (0.5)

3

200E

15RBA2-200E

1, 2

15RBT2-200E

3, 4

1.1 (0.5)

3 3

Type RBA Expulsion Fuses for Use Outdoors— 15.5 kV Maximum (14.4 kV Nominal) 200A (For Use with 15RBA2 Fuseholders) 1 RBA Fuseholders, Mountings and Hardware (For Use with RBA/RBT Refills/Holders for Outdoor Applications)

3 3 3 3

Mounting (Including Live Parts Less Holder) Fuseholder

Porcelain Insulator

Voltage (kV)

Live Parts

Fuse Filters and Condensers

Spring and Shunt Assy.

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

RBA2-FLTR

15RBA2-SHNT

Glass Polyester

Ampere Rating

Style

Non-Indicating Indicating Catalog Number Catalog Number Nominal

Maximum

LIWL Catalog (BIL) Number

Catalog Number

10E–200E

Non-disconnect

15RBA2-NH

15.5

95

14RBA2-GNM 15RBA2-NL

15RBA2-INH

13.8

14RBA2-PNM

RBA2-COND

3

Non-disconnect

15RBA2-NH

15RBA2-INH

13.8

15.5

110

15RBA2-PNM

—

15RBA2-NL

RBA2-FLTR

3

Disconnect

15RBA2-DH

15RBA2-IDH

13.8

15.5

95

14RBA2-PDM

14RBA2-GDM

38RBA2-DL

RBA2-FLTR

3

Disconnect

RBA2-COND

15RBA2-DH

15RBA2-IDH

13.8

15.5

110

15RBA2-PDM

—

38RBA2-DL

Bolt-in

—

15RBA2-INH-B

13.8

15.5

95

14RBA8-PNM

14RBA8-GNM 15RBA8-NL

Bolt-in

—

15RBA2-INH-B

13.8

15.5

3 3 3

RBA2-FLTR

15RBA2-SHNT

110

15RBA8-PNM

15RBA8-GNM 15RBA8-NL

RBA2-FLTR

15RBA2-SHNT

RBA2-COND

Type RDB Expulsion Fuses for Use Outdoors—15.5 kV Maximum (14.4 kV Nominal) 200A 2 RDB Fuseholders, Mountings and Hardware (For Use with RBA/RBT Refills/Holders for Outdoor Applications) Mounting (Including Live Parts Less Holder)

3 3

15RBA2-SHNT

RBA2-COND

3

3

RBA2-FLTR RBA2-COND

3

3

15RBA2-SHNT

RBA2-COND

3

3

15RBA2-SHNT

Fuseholder Ampere Rating 10E–200E

Style

Catalog Number

Voltage (kV) Nominal

Maximum

LIWL (BIL)

Spring and Shunt Assy.

Vertical (180°) Mounting

Underhung (90°) Mounting

Vertical

Underhung

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Dropout

15RDB2-DH

13.8

15.5

110

15RDB2-VM

15RDB2-UM

RDB2-VL

RDB2-UL

15RDB2-SHNT

Dropout

15RDB2-DH

13.8

15.5

150

15RDB2-HVM

15RDB2-HUM

RDB2-VL

RDB2-UL

15RDB2-SHNT

Notes 1 For new installation, order one refill (Standard Speed or Time Lag), one fuseholder, one mounting, and one filter or condenser per phase. Live parts can be substituted for the mounting if the user is supplying base support and insulators. 2 For new installation, order one refill (Standard Speed or Time Lag), one fuseholder and one mounting per phase. Live parts can be substituted for the mounting if the user is supplying base support and insulators.

V4-T3-86

Live Parts

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

3.4

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Expulsion Fuses

Type 15RBA4 Expulsion Fuse Refill Units—15.5 kV Maximum (14.4 kV Nominal) 400A

3

RBA/RBT Refill Units Standard Speed (Fuse Refills)

Time Lag (Fuse Refills)

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

Curve Reference 36-635

Catalog Number

Curve Reference 36-635

Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)

0.5 3 5E 7E 10E 15E 20E 25E 30E 40E 50E 65E 80E 100E 125E 150E 200E 250E 300E 400E

15RBA4-.5 15RBA4-3 15RBA4-5E 15RBA4-7E 15RBA4-10E 15RBA4-15E 15RBA4-20E 15RBA4-25E 15RBA4-30E 15RBA4-40E 15RBA4-50E 15RBA4-65E 15RBA4-80E 15RBA4-100E 15RBA4-125E 15RBA4-150E 15RBA4-200E 15RBA4-250E 15RBA4-300E 15RBA4-400E

5, 6 5, 6 5, 6 5, 6 5,6 5, 6 5, 6 5, 6 5, 6 5, 6 5, 6 5, 6 5, 6 5, 6 5, 6 5, 6 5, 6 5, 6 5, 6 5, 6

— — — — — — 15RBT4-20E 15RBT4-25E 15RBT4-30E 15RBT4-40E 15RBT4-50E 15RBT4-65E 15RBT4-80E 15RBT4-100E 15RBT4-125E 15RBT4-150E 15RBT4-200E 15RBT4-250E 15RBT4-300E 15RBT4-400E

— — — — — — 7, 8 7, 8 7, 8 7, 8 7, 8 7, 8 7, 8 7, 8 7, 8 7, 8 7, 8 10, 11 10, 11 10, 11

2.3 (1.0) 2.3 (1.0) 2.3 (1.0) 2.3 (1.0) 2.3 (1.0) 2.3 (1.0) 2.3 (1.0) 2.3 (1.0) 2.3 (1.0) 2.3 (1.0) 2.3 (1.0) 2.3 (1.0) 2.3 (1.0) 2.3 (1.0) 2.3 (1.0) 2.3 (1.0) 2.3 (1.0) 2.3 (1.0) 2.3 (1.0) 2.3 (1.0)

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Type RBA Expulsion Fuses for Use Outdoors—15.5 kV Maximum (14.4 kV Nominal) 400A (For Use with 15RBA4 Fuseholders) 1 RBA Fuseholders, Mountings and Hardware (For Use with RBA/RBT Refills/Holders for Outdoor Applications) Mounting (Including Live Parts Less Holder) Fuseholder

Porcelain Insulator

Voltage (kV)

Spring and Shunt Assy.

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

3

RBA4-FLTR

15RBA4SHNT

3

15RBA4SHNT

3

15RBA4SHNT

3

RBA4-COND

15RBA4SHNT

3

RBA-FLTR

15RBA4-SHNT

3

15RBA4-SHNT

3

Glass Polyester

Non-Indicating Indicating Catalog Number Catalog Number Nominal

Maximum

LIWL Catalog (BIL) Number

Catalog Number

0.5–400E

Non-disconnect

15RBA4-NH

15.5

95

14RBA4-GNM 15RBA4-NL

14RBA4-PNM

RBA4-COND Non-disconnect

15RBA4-NH

15RBA4-INH

13.8

15.5

110

15RBA4-PNM

—

15RBA4-NL

RBA4-FLTR RBA4-COND

Disconnect

15RBA4-DH

15RBA2-IDH

13.8

15.5

95

14RBA4-PDM

14RBA4-GDM

15RBA4-DL

RBA4-FLTR RBA4-COND

Disconnect Bolt-in

15RBA4-DH —

15RBA2-IDH

13.8

15RBA4-INH-B

13.8

15.5 15.5

110 95

15RBA4-PDM 14RBA8-PNM

—

15RBA4-DL

14RBA8-GNM 15RBA8-NL

RBA4-FLTR

RBA4-COND Bolt-in

—

15RBA4-INH-B

13.8

15.5

110

15RBA8-PNM

15RBA8-GNM 15RBA8-NL

RBA-FLTR RBA4-COND

3

RDB Fuseholders, Mountings and Hardware (For Use with RBA/RBT Refills/Holders for Outdoor Applications)

Fuseholder

0.5–400E

Voltage (kV)

3

3

Type RDB Expulsion Fuses for Use Outdoors—15.5 kV Maximum (14.4 kV Nominal) 400A 2

Ampere Rating

3

Fuse Filters and Condensers

Style

13.8

3

Live Parts

Ampere Rating

15RBA4-INH

3

Mounting (Including Live Parts Less Holder)

Live Parts

Spring and Shunt Assy.

Vertical (180°) Mounting

Underhung (90°) Mounting

Vertical

Underhung

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Style

Catalog Number

Nominal

Maximum

LIWL (BIL)

Dropout

15RDB4-DH

13.8

15.5

110

15RDB4-VM

15RDB4-UM

RDB4-VL

RDB4-UL

15RDB4-SHNT

Dropout

15RDB4-DH

13.8

15.5

150

15RDB4-HVM

15RDB4-HUM

RDB4-VL

RDB4-UL

15RDB4-SHNT

Notes 1 For new installation, order one refill (Standard Speed or Time Lag), one fuseholder, one mounting, and one filter or condenser per phase. Live parts can be substituted for the mounting if the user is supplying base support and insulators. 2 For new installation, order one refill (Standard Speed or Time Lag), one fuseholder and one mounting per phase. Live parts can be substituted for the mounting if the user is supplying base support and insulators.

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

3 3 3 3 3 3

V4-T3-87

3.4

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Expulsion Fuses

3

Type 15RBA4 Expulsion Fuse Refill Units Used in 15RBA8/15RDB4 Fuseholders— 15.5 kV Maximum (14.4 kV Nominal) 800A

3

RBA/RBT Refill Units

3

Ampere Rating

3

450E

3 3 3

Standard Speed (Fuse Refills)

Time Lag (Fuse Refills)

Quantity

Catalog Number

Curve Reference 36-635

Quantity

Catalog Number

2

15RBA4-250E

9

2

540E

2

15RBA4-300E

9

2

720E

2

15RBA4-400E

9

2

15RBT4-400E

3 3

Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)

15RBT4-250E

12

1

15RBT4-300E

12

1

12

1

Type RBA Expulsion Fuses for Use Outdoors— 15.5 kV Maximum (14.4 kV Nominal) 800A (For Use with 15RBA8 Fuseholders) 2 RBA Fuseholders, Mountings and Hardware (For Use with RBA/RBT Refills/Holders for Outdoor Applications)

3 3

Curve Reference 36-635

Mounting (Including Live Parts Less Holder) Fuseholder Ampere Rating

Style

450E–720E Non-disconnect

Porcelain Insulator

Voltage (kV)

Live Parts

Fuse Filters and Condensers

Spring and Shunt Assy.

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

RBA4-FLTR 3

15RBA4-SHNT

Glass Polyester

Non-Indicating Indicating Catalog Number Catalog Number Nominal

Maximum

LIWL Catalog (BIL) Number

Catalog Number

15RBA8-NH

15.5

95

14RBA8-GNM 15RBA8-NL

15RBA8-INH

13.8

14RBA8-PNM

RBA4-COND 3 Non-disconnect

3

15RBA8-NH

15RBA8-INH

13.8

15.5

110

15RBA8-PNM

14RBA8-GNM 15RBA8-NL

RBA4-FLTR 3 RBA4-COND

15RBA4-SHNT

3

3 3

Type RDB Expulsion Fuses for Use Outdoors—15.5 kV Maximum (14.4 kV Nominal) 800A 4 RDB Fuseholders, Mountings and Hardware (For Use with RBA/RBT Refills/Holders for Outdoor Applications)

3

Mounting (Including Live Parts Less Holder)

3 3

Fuseholder Ampere Rating

Style

Voltage (kV)

Catalog Number

Nominal

Maximum

LIWL (BIL)

Live Parts

Spring and Shunt Assy.

Vertical (180°) Mounting

Underhung (90°) Mounting

Vertical

Underhung

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

3

450E–720E Disconnect

15RDB4-NH

13.8

15.5

110

15RDB8-VM

15RDB8-UM

RDB8-VL

RDB8-UL

15RDB4-SHNT

Disconnect

15RDB4-NH

13.8

15.5

150

15RDB8-HVM

15RDB8-HUM

RDB8-VL

RDB8-UL

15RDB4-SHNT

3

Notes 1 Requires two fuse refills as shown. Price each refill individually. Example: To order refill units for a 720E, 15 kV fuse, order two pieces of an 8RBA4-400E. 2 For new installation, order two refills (Standard or Time Lag), one fuseholder, one mounting, and two filters or condensers per phase. Live parts can be substituted for the mounting if the user is supplying base support and insulators. 3 Two filters or condensers required. 4 For new installation, order two refills (Standard or Time Lag), one fuseholder and one mounting per phase. Live parts can be substituted for the mounting if the user is supplying base support and insulators.

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

V4-T3-88

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

3.4

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Expulsion Fuses

Type 25RBA2 Expulsion Fuse Refill Units—25.5 kV Maximum (23.0 kV Nominal) 200A

3

RBA/RBT Refill Units Standard Speed (Fuse Refills)

Time Lag (Fuse Refills)

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

Curve Reference 36-635

Catalog Number

Curve Reference 36-635

Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)

10E

25RBA2-10E

1, 2

—

—

1.3 (0.6)

15E

25RBA2-15E

1, 2

—

—

1.3 (0.6)

20E

25RBA2-20E

1, 2

25RBT2-20E

3, 4

1.3 (0.6)

25E

25RBA2-25E

1, 2

25RBT2-25E

3, 4

1.3 (0.6)

30E

25RBA2-30E

1, 2

25RBT2-30E

3, 4

1.3 (0.6)

40E

25RBA2-40E

1, 2

25RBT2-40E

3, 4

1.3 (0.6)

50E

25RBA2-50E

1, 2

25RBT2-50E

3, 4

1.3 (0.6)

65E

25RBA2-65E

1, 2

25RBT2-65E

3, 4

1.3 (0.6)

80E

25RBA2-80E

1, 2

25RBT2-80E

3, 4

1.3 (0.6)

100E

25RBA2-100E

1, 2

25RBT2-100E

3, 4

1.3 (0.6)

125E

25RBA2-125E

1, 2

25RBT2-125E

3, 4

1.3 (0.6)

150E

25RBA2-150E

1, 2

25RBT2-150E

3, 4

1.3 (0.6)

200E

25RBA2-200E

1, 2

25RBT2-200E

3, 4

1.3 (0.6)

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Type RBA Expulsion Fuses for Use Indoors or in an Enclosure— 25.5 kV Maximum (23.0 kV Nominal) 200A (For Use with 25RBA2 Fuseholders) 1

3

RBA Fuseholders, Mountings and Hardware (For Use with RBA/RBT Refills/Holders for Indoor or Enclosure Applications) Mounting (Including Live Parts Less Holder) Fuseholder

Porcelain Insulator

Voltage (kV)

Live Parts

Fuse Filters and Condensers

Spring and Shunt Assy.

Glass Polyester

3 3

Ampere Rating

Style

Non-Indicating Indicating Catalog Number Catalog Number Nominal

Maximum

LIWL Catalog (BIL) Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

3

10E–200E

Non-disconnect

25RBA2-NH

25.5

150

—

38RBA2-NL

RBA2-FLTR

25RBA2-SHNT

3

25RBA2-SHNT

3

25RBA2-INH

23.0

25RBA2-PNM

RBA2-COND Non-disconnect

25RBA2-NH

25RBA2-INH

23.0

25.5

150

25RBA2-PNM

—

38RBA2-NL

RBA2-FLTR RBA2-COND

Disconnect

25RBA2-DH

25RBA2-IDH

23.0

25.5

150

25RBA2-PDM

—

38RBA2-DL

RBA2-FLTR

Disconnect

25RBA2-DH

25RBA2-IDH

23.0

25.5

150

25RBA2-PDM

—

38RBA2-DL

RBA2-FLTR

Bolt-in

—

25RBA2-INH-B

23.0

25.5

150

25RBA8-PNM

24RBA8-GNM 38RBA8-NL

RBA2-FLTR

25RBA2-SHNT

3

25RBA2-SHNT

3

RBA2-COND

RBA2-COND 25RBA2-SHNT

RBA2-COND

3 3 3

Type RDB Expulsion Fuses for Use Outdoors—25.5 kV Maximum (23.0 kV Nominal) 200A 2

3

RDB Fuseholders, Mountings and Hardware (For Use with RBA/RBT Refills/Holders for Outdoor Applications) Mounting (Including Live Parts Less Holder) Fuseholder Ampere Rating 10E–200E

Voltage (kV)

Live Parts

Spring and Shunt Assy.

Vertical (180°) Mounting

Underhung (90°) Mounting

Vertical

Underhung

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Style

Catalog Number

Nominal

Maximum

LIWL (BIL)

Dropout

25RDB2-DH

23.0

25.5

150

25RDB2-VM

25RDB2-UM

RDB2-VL

RDB2-UL

25RDB2-SHNT

Dropout

25RDB2-DH

23.0

25.5

200

25RDB2-HVM

25RDB2-HUM

RDB2-VL

RDB2-UL

25RDB2-SHNT

Notes 1 For new installation, order one refill (Standard Speed or Time Lag), one fuseholder, one mounting, and one filter or condenser per phase. Live parts can be substituted for the mounting if the user is supplying base support and insulators. 2 For new installation, order one refill (Standard Speed or Time Lag), one fuseholder and one mounting per phase. Live parts can be substituted for the mounting if the user is supplying base support and insulators.

3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-89

3.4 3 3

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Expulsion Fuses

Type 25RBA4 Expulsion Fuse Refill Units—25.5 kV Maximum (23.0 kV Nominal) 400A RBA/RBT Refill Units Standard Speed (Fuse Refills)

Time Lag (Fuse Refills)

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

Curve Reference 36-635

Catalog Number

Curve Reference 36-635

Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)

3

0.5

25RBA4-.5

5, 6

—

—

2.7 (1.2)

3

25RBA4-3

5, 6

—

—

2.7 (1.2)

3

5E

25RBA4-5E

5, 6

—

—

2.7 (1.2)

7E

25RBA4-7E

5, 6

—

—

2.7 (1.2)

3

10E

25RBA4-10E

5,6

—

—

2.7 (1.2)

3

15E

25RBA4-15E

5, 6

—

—

2.7 (1.2)

20E

25RBA4-20E

5, 6

25RBT4-20E

7, 8

2.7 (1.2)

25E

25RBA4-25E

5, 6

25RBT4-25E

7, 8

2.7 (1.2)

30E

25RBA4-30E

5, 6

25RBT4-30E

7, 8

2.7 (1.2)

40E

25RBA4-40E

5, 6

25RBT4-40E

7, 8

2.7 (1.2)

50E

25RBA4-50E

5, 6

25RBT4-50E

7, 8

2.7 (1.2)

65E

25RBA4-65E

5, 6

25RBT4-65E

7, 8

2.7 (1.2)

80E

25RBA4-80E

5, 6

25RBT4-80E

7, 8

2.7 (1.2)

100E

25RBA4-100E

5, 6

25RBT4-100E

7, 8

2.7 (1.2)

125E

25RBA4-125E

5, 6

25RBT4-125E

7, 8

2.7 (1.2)

150E

25RBA4-150E

5, 6

25RBT4-150E

7, 8

2.7 (1.2)

200E

25RBA4-200E

5, 6

25RBT4-200E

7, 8

2.7 (1.2)

250E

25RBA4-250E

5, 6

25RBT4-250E

10, 11

2.7 (1.2)

300E

25RBA4-300E

5, 6

25RBT4-300E

10, 11

2.7 (1.2)

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Type RBA Expulsion Fuses for Use Indoors or in an Enclosure— 25.5 kV Maximum (23.0 kV Nominal) 400A (For Use with 25RBA4 Fuseholders) 1 RBA Fuseholders, Mountings and Hardware (For Use with RBA/RBT Refills/Holders for Indoor or Enclosure Applications)

3 3 3 3

Mounting (Including Live Parts Less Holder) Fuseholder

Maximum

LIWL Catalog (BIL) Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

0.5–300E

Non-disconnect

25RBA4-NH

25.5

150

—

38RBA4-NL

RBA4-FLTR

25RBA4-SHNT

25RBA4-INH

23.0

3

Disconnect

3

Bolt-in

25RBA4-NH

25RBA4-INH

23.0

25.5

3 3

150

25RBA4-PNM

—

38RBA4-NL

RBA4-FLTR

25RBA4-SHNT

RBA4-COND 25RBA4-DH

25RBA2-IDH

23.0

25.5

150

25RBA4-PDM

—

38RBA4-DL

RBA4-FLTR

25RBA4-SHNT

RBA4-COND 25RBA4-DH

25RBA2-IDH

23.0

25.5

150

25RBA4-PDM

—

38RBA4-DL

RBA4-FLTR

25RBA4-SHNT

RBA4-COND —

25RBA4-INH-B

23.0

25.5

150

25RBA8-PNM

25RBA8-GNM 38RBA8-NL

RBA4-FLTR

25RBA4-SHNT

RBA4-COND

Type RDB Expulsion Fuses for Use Outdoors—25.5 kV Maximum (23.0 kV Nominal) 400A 2 RDB Fuseholders, Mountings and Hardware (For Use with RBA/RBT Refills/Holders for Outdoor Applications)

3

3

25RBA4-PNM

RBA4-COND

Disconnect

3

Glass Polyester

Non-Indicating Indicating Catalog Number Catalog Number Nominal

3

3

Spring and Shunt Assy.

Style

Non-disconnect

3

Fuse Filters and Condensers

Ampere Rating

3

3

Porcelain Insulator

Voltage (kV)

Live Parts

Fuseholder Ampere Rating 0.5–300E

Voltage (kV)

Mounting (Including Live Parts Less Holder)

Live Parts

Vertical (180°) Mounting

Underhung (90°) Mounting

Vertical

Underhung

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Nominal

Maximum

LIWL (BIL)

Dropout

25RDB4-DH

23.0

25.5

150

25RDB4-VM

25RDB4-UM

RDB4-VL

RDB4-UL

25RDB4-SHNT

Dropout

25RDB4-DH

23.0

25.5

200

25RDB4-HVM

25RDB4-HUM

RDB4-VL

RDB4-UL

25RDB4-SHNT

Style

Notes 1 For new installation, order one refill (Standard Speed or Time Lag), one fuseholder and one mounting per phase. Live parts can be substituted for the mounting if the user is supplying base support and insulators. 2 For new installation, order one refill (Standard Speed or Time Lag), one fuseholder, one mounting, and one filter or condenser per phase. Live parts can be substituted for the mounting if the user is supplying base support and insulators.

V4-T3-90

Spring and Shunt Assy.

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

Catalog Number

3.4

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Expulsion Fuses

Type 25RBA4 Expulsion Fuse Refill Units Used in 25RBA8/15RDB4 Fuseholders— 25.5 kV Maximum (23.0 kV Nominal) 800A

3

RBA/RBT Refill Units Ampere Rating 450E 540E

Standard Speed (Fuse Refills)

Time Lag (Fuse Refills)

Quantity

Catalog Number

Curve Reference 36-635

Quantity

Catalog Number

Curve Reference 36-635

Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)

2

25RBA4-250E

9

2

25RBT4-250E

12

1

2

25RBA4-300E

9

2

25RBT4-300E

12

1

3 3 3 3

Type RBA Expulsion Fuses for Use Indoors or in an Enclosure— 25.5 kV Maximum (23.0 kV Nominal) 800A (For Use with 25RBA8 Fuseholders) 2

3

RBA Fuseholders, Mountings and Hardware (For Use with RBA/RBT Refills/Holders for Indoor or Enclosure Applications) Mounting (Including Live Parts Less Holder) Fuseholder Ampere Rating

Style

450E–540E Non-disconnect

Porcelain Insulator

Voltage (kV)

Live Parts

Fuse Filters and Condensers

Spring and Shunt Assy.

Glass Polyester

Maximum

LIWL Catalog (BIL) Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

3

25RBA8-NH

25.5

150

—

38RBA8-NL

RBA4-FLTR 3

25RBA4-SHNT

3

25RBA4-SHNT

3

25RBA8-INH

23.0

25RBA8-PNM

25RBA8-NH

25RBA8-INH

23.0

25.5

150

25RBA8-PNM

—

38RBA8-NL

RBA4-FLTR 3 RBA4-COND 3

3 3

Type RDB Expulsion Fuses for Use Outdoors—25.5 kV Maximum (23.0 kV Nominal) 800A 4 RDB Fuseholders, Mountings and Hardware (For Use with RBA/RBT Refills/Holders for Outdoor Applications) Mounting (Including Live Parts Less Holder)

Live Parts

Spring and Shunt Assy.

Vertical (180°) Mounting

Underhung (90°) Mounting

Vertical

Underhung

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Fuseholder

Voltage (kV)

Catalog Number

Nominal

Maximum

LIWL (BIL)

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

450E–540E Disconnect

25RDB4-NH

23.0

25.5

150

25RDB8-VM

25RDB8-UM

RDB8-VL

RDB8-UL

25RDB4-SHNT

Disconnect

25RDB4-NH

23.0

25.5

200

25RDB8-HVM

25RDB8-HUM

RDB8-VL

RDB8-UL

25RDB4-SHNT

Ampere Rating

Style

3

Non-Indicating Indicating Catalog Number Catalog Number Nominal

RBA4-COND 3 Non-disconnect

3

Catalog Number

Notes 1 Requires two fuse refills as shown. Price each refill individually. Example: To order refill units for a 720E, 25 kV fuse, order two pieces of an 8RBA4-400E. 2 For new installation, order two refills (Standard or Time Lag), one fuseholder, one mounting, and two filters or condensers per phase. Live parts can be substituted for the mounting if the user is supplying base support and insulators. 3 Two filters or condensers required. 4 For new installation, order two refills (Standard or Time Lag), one fuseholder and one mounting per phase. Live parts can be substituted for the mounting if the user is supplying base support and insulators.

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-91

3.4 3 3

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Expulsion Fuse

Type 38RBA2 Expulsion Fuse Refill Units—38.0 kV Maximum (34.5 kV Nominal) 200A RBA/RBT Refill Units Standard Speed (Fuse Refills)

Time Lag (Fuse Refills)

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

Curve Reference 36-635

Catalog Number

Curve Reference 36-635

Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)

10E

38RBA2-10E

1, 2

—

—

1.4 (0.6)

3

15E

38RBA2-15E

1, 2

—

—

1.4 (0.6)

3

20E

38RBA2-20E

1, 2

38RBT2-20E

3, 4

1.4 (0.6)

25E

38RBA2-25E

1, 2

38RBT2-25E

3, 4

1.4 (0.6)

3

30E

38RBA2-30E

1, 2

38RBT2-30E

3, 4

1.4 (0.6)

40E

38RBA2-40E

1, 2

38RBT2-40E

3, 4

1.4 (0.6)

3

50E

38RBA2-50E

1, 2

38RBT2-50E

3, 4

1.4 (0.6)

65E

38RBA2-65E

1, 2

38RBT2-65E

3, 4

1.4 (0.6)

3

80E

38RBA2-80E

1, 2

38RBT2-80E

3, 4

1.4 (0.6)

3

100E

38RBA2-100E

1, 2

38RBT2-100E

3, 4

1.4 (0.6)

125E

38RBA2-125E

1, 2

38RBT2-125E

3, 4

1.4 (0.6)

150E

38RBA2-150E

1, 2

38RBT2-150E

3, 4

1.4 (0.6)

200E

38RBA2-200E

1, 2

38RBT2-200E

3, 4

1.4 (0.6)

3

3 3 3

Type RBA Expulsion Fuses for Use Indoors or in an Enclosure— 38.0 kV Maximum (34.5 kV Nominal) 200A (For Use with 38RBA2 Fuseholders) 1

3

RBA Fuseholders, Mountings and Hardware (For Use with RBA/RBT Refills/Holders for Indoor or Enclosure Applications) Mounting (Including Live Parts Less Holder)

3

Fuseholder

Porcelain Insulator

Voltage (kV)

Live Parts

Fuse Filters and Condensers

Spring and Shunt Assy.

Glass Polyester

3

Ampere Rating

Style

Non-Indicating Indicating Catalog Number Catalog Number Nominal

Maximum

LIWL Catalog (BIL) Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

3

10E–200E

Non-disconnect

38RBA2-NH

38.0

150

—

38RBA2-NL

RBA2-FLTR

38RBA2-SHNT

38RBA2-INH

34.5

38RBA2-PNM

RBA2-COND

3

Non-disconnect

38RBA2-NH

38RBA2-INH

34.5

38.0

150

38RBA2-PNM

—

38RBA2-NL

RBA2-FLTR

Disconnect

38RBA2-DH

38RBA2-IDH

34.5

38.0

150

38RBA2-PDM

—

38RBA2-DL

RBA2-FLTR

38RBA2-SHNT

RBA2-COND

3 3

38RBA2-SHNT

RBA2-COND Disconnect

3

38RBA2-DH

38RBA2-IDH

34.5

38.0

150

38RBA2-PDM

—

38RBA2-DL

RBA2-FLTR

38RBA2-SHNT

RBA2-COND Bolt-in

3

—

38RBA2-INH-B

34.5

38.0

150

38RBA8-PNM

38RBA8-GNM 38RBA8-NL

RBA2-FLTR

38RBA2-SHNT

RBA2-COND

3 3

Type RBA Expulsion Fuses for Use Indoors or in an Enclosure—38.0 kV Maximum (34.5 kV Nominal) 200A 2 RDB Fuseholders, Mountings and Hardware (For Use with RBA/RBT Refills/Holders for Outdoor Applications) Mounting (Including Live Parts Less Holder)

3 3 3

Fuseholder Ampere Rating 10E–200E

3 3 3

Voltage (kV)

Spring and Shunt Assy.

Vertical (180°) Mounting

Underhung (90°) Mounting

Vertical

Underhung

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Nominal

Maximum

LIWL (BIL)

Dropout

38RDB2-DH

34.5

38.0

200

38RDB2-VM

38RDB2-UM

RDB2-VL

RDB2-UL

38RDB2-SHNT

Dropout

38RDB2-DH

34.5

38.0

250

38RDB2-HVM

38RDB2-HUM

RDB2-VL

RDB2-UL

38RDB2-SHNT

Style

Notes 1 For new installation, order one refill (Standard Speed or Time Lag), one fuseholder, one mounting, and one filter or condenser per phase. Live parts can be substituted for the mounting if the user is supplying base support and insulators. 2 For new installation, order one refill (Standard Speed or Time Lag), one fuseholder and one mounting per phase. Live parts can be substituted for the mounting if the user is supplying base support and insulators.

3 V4-T3-92

Live Parts

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

Catalog Number

3.4

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Expulsion Fuses

Type 38RBA4 Expulsion Fuse Refill Units—38.0 kV Maximum (34.5 kV Nominal) 400A

3

RBA/RBT Refill Units Ampere Rating

Standard Speed (Fuse Refills)

Time Lag (Fuse Refills)

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Curve Reference 36-635

Curve Reference 36-635

Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)

0.5

38RBA4-.5

5, 6

—

—

3.1 (1.4)

3

38RBA4-3

5, 6

—

—

3.1 (1.4)

5E

38RBA4-5E

5, 6

—

—

3.1 (1.4)

7E

38RBA4-7E

5, 6

—

—

3.1 (1.4)

10E

38RBA4-10E

5,6

—

—

3.1 (1.4)

15E

38RBA4-15E

5, 6

—

—

3.1 (1.4)

20E

38RBA4-20E

5, 6

38RBT4-20E

7, 8

3.1 (1.4)

25E

38RBA4-25E

5, 6

38RBT4-25E

7, 8

3.1 (1.4)

30E

38RBA4-30E

5, 6

38RBT4-30E

7, 8

3.1 (1.4)

40E

38RBA4-40E

5, 6

38RBT4-40E

7, 8

3.1 (1.4)

50E

38RBA4-50E

5, 6

38RBT4-50E

7, 8

3.1 (1.4)

65E

38RBA4-65E

5, 6

38RBT4-65E

7, 8

3.1 (1.4)

80E

38RBA4-80E

5, 6

38RBT4-80E

7, 8

3.1 (1.4)

100E

38RBA4-100E

5, 6

38RBT4-100E

7, 8

3.1 (1.4)

125E

38RBA4-125E

5, 6

38RBT4-125E

7, 8

3.1 (1.4)

150E

38RBA4-150E

5, 6

38RBT4-150E

7, 8

3.1 (1.4)

200E

38RBA4-200E

5, 6

38RBT4-200E

7, 8

3.1 (1.4)

250E

38RBA4-250E

5, 6

38RBT4-250E

10, 11

3.1 (1.4)

300E

38RBA4-300E

5, 6

38RBT4-300E

(0, 11

3.1 (1.4)

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

RBA Fuseholders, Mountings and Hardware (For Use with RBA/RBT Refills/Holders for Indoor or Enclosure Applications) Mounting (Including Live Parts Less Holder) Fuseholder Ampere Rating 0.5–300E

Voltage (kV)

Live Parts

Fuse Filters and Condensers

Spring and Shunt Assy.

Glass Polyester

3

Style

Maximum

LIWL Catalog (BIL) Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Non-disconnect

38RBA4-NH

38RBA4-INH

34.5

38.0

150

38RBA4-PNM

—

38RBA4-NL

RBA4-FLTR

38RBA4-SHNT

3

Non-disconnect

38RBA4-NH

38RBA4-INH

34.5

38.0

150

38RBA4-PNM

—

38RBA4-NL

RBA4-FLTR

38RBA4-SHNT

3

Disconnect

38RBA4-DH

38RBA2-IDH

34.5

38.0

150

38RBA4-PDM

—

38RBA4-DL

Disconnect

38RBA4-DH

38RBA2-IDH

34.5

38.0

150

38RBA4-PDM

—

38RBA4-DL

RBA4-FLTR

Bolt-in

—

38RBA4-INH-B

34.5

38.0

150

38RBA8-PNM

38RBA8-GNM 38RBA8-NL

RBA4-FLTR

RBA4-COND RBA4-FLTR

38RBA4-SHNT

RBA4-COND 38RBA4-SHNT

RBA4-COND 38RBA4-SHNT

RBA4-COND

RDB Fuseholders, Mountings and Hardware (For Use with RBA/RBT Refills/Holders for Outdoor Applications)

Style

Fuseholder

Voltage (kV)

Catalog Number

Nominal

Maximum

Mounting (Including Live Parts Less Holder)

Live Parts

Vertical (180°) Mounting

Underhung (90°) Mounting

Vertical

Underhung

LIWL (BIL)

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Spring and Shunt Assy.

Catalog Number

Dropout

38RDB4-DH

34.5

38.0

150

38RDB4-VM

38RDB4-UM

RDB4-VL

RDB4-UL

38RDB4-SHNT

Dropout

38RDB4-DH

34.5

38.0

200

38RDB4-HVM

38RDB4-HUM

RDB4-VL

RDB4-UL

38RDB4-SHNT

Notes 1 For new installation, order one refill (Standard Speed or Time Lag), one fuseholder, one mounting, and one filter or condenser per phase. Live parts can be substituted for the mounting if the user is supplying base support and insulators. 2 For new installation, order one refill (Standard Speed or Time Lag), one fuseholder and one mounting per phase. Live parts can be substituted for the mounting if the user is supplying base support and insulators.

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

3 3 3 3 3

Type RBA Expulsion Fuses for Use Indoors or in an Enclosure—38.0 kV Maximum (34.5 kV Nominal) 400A 2

0.5–300E

3

Non-Indicating Indicating Catalog Number Catalog Number Nominal

RBA4-COND

Ampere Rating

3 3

Type RBA Expulsion Fuses for Use Indoors or in an Enclosure— 38.0 kV Maximum (34.5 kV Nominal) 400A (For Use with 38RBA4 Fuseholders) 1

Porcelain Insulator

3

3 3 3 3 3 3 3

V4-T3-93

3.4

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Expulsion Fuses

3

Type 38RBA4 Expulsion Fuse Refill Units Used in 38RBA8/15RDB4 Fuseholders— 38.0 kV Maximum (34.5 kV Nominal) 800A

3

RBA/RBT Refill Units

3

Ampere Rating

3

450E 540E

Standard Speed (Fuse Refills)

Time Lag (Fuse Refills)

Quantity

Catalog Number

Curve Reference 36-635

Quantity

Catalog Number

Curve Reference 36-635

Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)

2

38RBA4-250E

9

2

38RBT4-250E

12

1

2

38RBA4-300E

9

2

38RBT4-300E

12

1

3 3

Type RBA Expulsion Fuses for Use Indoors or in an Enclosure— 38.0 kV Maximum (34.5 kV Nominal) 800A (For Use with 38RBA8 Fuseholders) 2

3

RBA Fuseholders, Mountings and Hardware (For Use with RBA/RBT Refills/Holders for Indoor or Enclosure Applications) Mounting (Including Live Parts Less Holder)

3 3

Fuseholder Ampere Rating

Style

3

450E–540E Non-disconnect

3

Non-disconnect

Porcelain Insulator

Voltage (kV)

Live Parts

Fuse Filters and Condensers

Spring and Shunt Assy.

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

RBA4-FLTR 3

38RBA4-SHNT

Glass Polyester

Non-Indicating Indicating Catalog Number Catalog Number Nominal

Maximum

LIWL Catalog (BIL) Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

38RBA8-NH

38.0

150

—

38RBA8-NL

38RBA8-INH

34.5

38RBA8-PNM

RBA4-COND 3 38RBA8-NH

38RBA8-INH

34.5

38.0

150

38RBA8-PNM

—

38RBA8-NL

3

Type RBA Expulsion Fuses for Use Indoors or in an Enclosure—38.0 kV Maximum (34.5 kV Nominal) 800A 4 RDB Fuseholders, Mountings and Hardware (For Use with RBA/RBT Refills/Holders for Outdoor Applications) Mounting (Including Live Parts Less Holder)

3 3 3 3 3 3 3

38RBA4-SHNT

RBA4-COND 3

3 3

RBA4-FLTR 3

Fuseholder Ampere Rating

Voltage (kV)

Live Parts

Spring and Shunt Assy.

Vertical (180°) Mounting

Underhung (90°) Mounting

Vertical

Underhung

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Nominal

Maximum

LIWL (BIL)

450E–540E Disconnect

38RDB4-NH

34.5

38.0

150

38RDB8-VM

38RDB8-UM

RDB8-VL

RDB8-UL

38RDB4-SHNT

Disconnect

38RDB4-NH

34.5

38.0

200

38RDB8-HVM

38RDB8-HUM

RDB8-VL

RDB8-UL

38RDB4-SHNT

Style

Notes 1 Requires two fuse refills as shown. Price each refill individually. Example: To order refill units for a 720E, 38 kV fuse, order 2 pieces of an 8RBA4-400E. 2 For new installation, order two refills (Standard or Time Lag), one fuseholder, one mounting, and two filters or condensers per phase. Live parts can be substituted for the mounting if the user is supplying base support and insulators. 3 Two filters or condensers required. 4 For new installation, order two refills (Standard or Time Lag), one fuseholder and one mounting per phase. Live parts can be substituted for the mounting if the user is supplying base support and insulators.

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V4-T3-94

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

Catalog Number

3.4

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Expulsion Fuses

Type DBU

DBU-EFID

3 Standard Speed

DBU17-GNM

DBU17-GDM

DBU-EFOD

3

Type DBU Expulsion Fuse Units 17.1 kV Maximum, 14.4 kV Nominal Slow Speed

K Speed

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number 12

Curve Reference 36-643

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number 12

Curve Reference 36-643

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number 12

Curve Reference 36-643

5E

DBU17-5E

11,14

—

—

—

3K

DBU17-3K

12, 15

7E

DBU17-7E

11,14

—

—

—

6K

DBU17-6K

12, 15

10E

DBU17-10E

11,14

—

—

—

8K

DBU17-8K

12, 15

13E

DBU17-13E

11,14

—

—

—

10K

DBU17-10K

12, 15

15E

DBU17-15E

11,14

15SE

DBU17-15SE

10, 13

12K

DBU17-12K

12, 15

20E

DBU17-20E

11,14

20SE

DBU17-20SE

10, 13

15K

DBU17-15K

12, 15

25E

DBU17-25E

11,14

25SE

DBU17-25SE

10, 13

20K

DBU17-20K

12, 15

30E

DBU17-30E

11,14

30SE

DBU17-30SE

10, 13

25K

DBU17-25K

12, 15

40E

DBU17-40E

11,14

40SE

DBU17-40SE

10, 13

30K

DBU17-30K

12, 15

50E

DBU17-50E

11,14

50SE

DBU17-50SE

10, 13

40K

DBU17-40K

12, 15

65E

DBU17-65E

11,14

65SE

DBU17-65SE

10, 13

50K

DBU17-50K

12, 15

80E

DBU17-80E

11,14

80SE

DBU17-80SE

10, 13

65K

DBU17-65K

12, 15

100E

DBU17-100E

11,14

100SE

DBU17-100SE

10, 13

80K

DBU17-80K

12, 15

125E

DBU17-125E

11,14

125SE

DBU17-125SE

10, 13

100K

DBU17-100K

12, 15

150E

DBU17-150E

11,14

150SE

DBU17-150SE

10, 13

140K

DBU17-140K

12, 15

175E

DBU17-175E

11,14

175SE

DBU17-175SE

10, 13

200K

DBU17-200K

12, 15

200E

DBU17-200E

11,14

200SE

DBU17-200SE

10, 13

—

—

—

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

5E–200E, 15SE–200SE, 3K–200K

Voltage (kV) Style

Style

Nominal

Maximum

LIWL (BIL)

Mounting

Live Parts 3

3 3

Type DBU Expulsion Fuse Mountings 17.1 kV Maximum, 14.4 kV Nominal Ampere Rating

3

DBU17-NL

End Fittings 3

DBU-EFID

Muffler

4

DBU-MFLR

Indoor

Non loadbreak

13.8

17.1

95

DBU17-GNM

Indoor

Loadbreak

13.8

17.1

95

DBU17-GDM 3

DBU17-DL 3

DBU-EFID 4

DBU-MFLR

Outdoor

Dropout

13.8

17.1

125

DBU-17-DM

—

DBU-EFOD

—

Notes 1 Maximum interrupting rating 14 kA symmetrical. 2 Approximate shipping weight 2.1 lb (0.95 kg). 3 To complete the mounting catalog number, specify -R for right side cale terminator or -L for left side cale terminator. 4 End fittings DBU-EFID include a muffler.

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-95

3.4 3

DBU-EFID

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Expulsion Fuses

Type DBU Expulsion Fuse Units 27.0 kV Maximum, 25 kV Nominal Standard Speed

Slow Speed

K Speed

3

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number 12

3

5E

DBU27-5E

11,17

—

—

—

3K

DBU27-3K

12, 18

7E

DBU27-7E

11,17

—

—

—

6K

DBU27-6K

12, 18

3

Curve Reference 36-643

Catalog Number 12

Ampere Rating

Curve Reference 36-643

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number 12

Curve Reference 36-643

10E

DBU27-10E

11,17

—

—

—

8K

DBU27-8K

12, 18

13E

DBU27-13E

11,17

—

—

—

10K

DBU27-10K

12, 18

15E

DBU27-15E

11,17

15SE

DBU27-15SE

10, 16

12K

DBU27-12K

12, 18

3

20E

DBU27-20E

11,17

20SE

DBU27-20SE

10, 16

15K

DBU27-15K

12, 18

25E

DBU27-25E

11,17

25SE

DBU27-25SE

10, 16

20K

DBU27-20K

12, 18

3

30E

DBU27-30E

11,17

30SE

DBU27-30SE

10, 16

25K

DBU27-25K

12, 18

40E

DBU27-40E

11,17

40SE

DBU27-40SE

10, 16

30K

DBU27-30K

12, 18

50E

DBU27-50E

11,17

50SE

DBU27-50SE

10, 16

40K

DBU27-40K

12, 18

65E

DBU27-65E

11,17

65SE

DBU27-65SE

10, 16

50K

DBU27-50K

12, 18

80E

DBU27-80E

11,17

80SE

DBU27-80SE

10, 16

65K

DBU27-65K

12, 18

DBU17-GNM

3

3

DBU17-GDM

3 3 3

DBU-EFOD

3 3

100E

DBU27-100E

11,17

100SE

DBU27-100SE

10, 16

80K

DBU27-80K

12, 18

125E

DBU27-125E

11,17

125SE

DBU27-125SE

10, 16

100K

DBU27-100K

12, 18

150E

DBU27-150E

11,17

150SE

DBU27-150SE

10, 16

140K

DBU27-140K

12, 18

175E

DBU27-175E

11,17

175SE

DBU27-175SE

10, 16

200K

DBU27-200K

12, 18

200E

DBU27-200E

11,17

200SE

DBU27-200SE

10, 16

—

—

—

Type DBU Expulsion Fuse Mountings 27.0 kV Maximum, 25 kV Nominal

3

Ampere Rating

3

5E–200E, 15SE–200SE, 3K–200K

3 3

Voltage (kV) Style

Style

Nominal

Maximum

LIWL (BIL)

Mounting

Live Parts 3

3

DBU-MFLR

Indoor

Non loadbreak

23.5

27.0

110

DBU27-GNM

Loadbreak

23.5

27.0

110

DBU27-GDM 3

DBU27-DL 3

DBU-EFID 4

DBU-MFLR

Outdoor

Dropout

23.5

27.0

150

DBU-27-DM

—

DBU-EFOD

—

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V4-T3-96

DBU-EFID

Muffler

4

Indoor

Notes 1 Maximum interrupting rating 12.5 kA symmetrical. 2 Approximate shipping weight 2.1 lb (0.95 kg). 3 To complete the mounting catalog number, specify -R for right side cale terminator or -L for left side cale terminator. 4 End fittings DBU-EFID include a muffler.

3

DBU27-NL

End Fittings 3

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

3.4

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Expulsion Fuses

DBU-EFID

Type DBU Expulsion Fuse Units 38.8 kV Maximum, 34.5 kV Nominal Standard Speed

DBU17-GNM

DBU17-GDM

DBU-EFOD

Slow Speed

3

K Speed

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number 12

Curve Reference 36-643

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number 2

Curve Reference 36-643

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number 12

Curve Reference 36-643

3

5E

DBU38-5E

11,17

—

—

—

3K

DBU38-3K

12, 18

7E

DBU38-7E

11,17

—

—

—

6K

DBU38-6K

12, 18

3

10E

DBU38-10E

11,17

—

—

—

8K

DBU38-8K

12, 18

13E

DBU38-13E

11,17

—

—

—

10K

DBU38-10K

12, 18

15E

DBU38-15E

11,17

15SE

DBU38-15SE

10, 16

12K

DBU38-12K

12, 18

20E

DBU38-20E

11,17

20SE

DBU38-20SE

10, 16

15K

DBU38-15K

12, 18

25E

DBU38-25E

11,17

25SE

DBU38-25SE

10, 16

20K

DBU38-20K

12, 18

30E

DBU38-30E

11,17

30SE

DBU38-30SE

10, 16

25K

DBU38-25K

12, 18

40E

DBU38-40E

11,17

40SE

DBU38-40SE

10, 16

30K

DBU38-30K

12, 18

50E

DBU38-50E

11,17

50SE

DBU38-50SE

10, 16

40K

DBU38-40K

12, 18

65E

DBU38-65E

11,17

65SE

DBU38-65SE

10, 16

50K

DBU38-50K

12, 18

80E

DBU38-80E

11,17

80SE

DBU38-80SE

10, 16

65K

DBU38-65K

12, 18

100E

DBU38-100E

11,17

100SE

DBU38-100SE

10, 16

80K

DBU38-80K

12, 18

125E

DBU38-125E

11,17

125SE

DBU38-125SE

10, 16

100K

DBU38-100K

12, 18

150E

DBU38-150E

11,17

150SE

DBU38-150SE

10, 16

140K

DBU38-140K

12, 18

175E

DBU38-175E

11,17

175SE

DBU38-175SE

10, 16

200K

DBU38-200K

12, 18

200E

DBU38-200E

11,17

200SE

DBU38-200SE

10, 16

—

—

—

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Type DBU Expulsion Fuse Mountings 38.0 kV Maximum, 34.5 kV Nominal Ampere Rating 5E–200E, 15SE–200SE, 3K–200K

3

Voltage (kV) Style

Style

Nominal

Maximum

LIWL (BIL)

Mounting

Live Parts

End Fittings

Muffler

Indoor

Non loadbreak

34.5

38

150

DBU38-GNM 3

DBU38-NL 3

DBU-EFID 4

DBU-MFLR

3 3

Notes 1 Maximum interrupting rating 10 kA symmetrical (outdoor dropout, 8.5 kA indoor with muffler. 2 Approximate shipping weight 2.1 lb (0.95 kg). 3 To complete the mounting catalog number, specify -R for right side cale terminator or -L for left side cale terminator. 4 End fittings DBU-EFID includes a muffler.

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-97

3.4

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Expulsion Fuses

3

Technical Data and Specifications

3

Type DBA

3

Type DBA Expulsion Fuses for Use Indoors or Outdoors DBA-1 Fuse Units

3

Ampere Rating

3

Type DBA-1 Fuse Refills 8.3 kV Maximum (7.2 kV Nominal)

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Catalog Number

Curve Reference 36-623

Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)

0.5

0.5

8DBA1-.5

10, 11

1.5 (0.7)

3

8DBA1-3

10, 11

1.5 (0.7)

5E

8DBA1-5E

10, 11

1.5 (0.7)

7E

8DBA1-7E

10, 11

1.5 (0.7)

10E

8DBA1-10E

10, 11

1.5 (0.7)

15E

8DBA1-15E

10, 11

1.5 (0.7)

20E

8DBA1-20E

10, 11

1.5 (0.7)

25E

8DBA1-25E

10, 11

1.5 (0.7)

30E

8DBA1-30E

10, 11

1.5 (0.7)

40E

8DBA1-40E

10, 11

1.5 (0.7)

50E

8DBA1-50E

10, 11

1.5 (0.7)

65E

8DBA1-65E

10, 11

1.5 (0.7)

80E

8DBA1-80E

10, 11

1.5 (0.7)

100E

8DBA1-100E

10, 11

1.5 (0.7)

3

8DBA1-125E

10, 11

1.5 (0.7)

150E

8DBA1-150E

10, 11

1.5 (0.7)

3

200E

8DBA1-200E

10, 11

1.5 (0.7)

15.5 kV Maximum (14.4 kV Nominal) 0.5

15DBA1-.5

10, 11

3

15DBA1-3

10, 11

2.1 (0.95)

5E

15DBA1-5E

10, 11

2.1 (0.95)

3

7E

15DBA1-7E

10, 11

2.1 (0.95)

10E

15DBA1-10E

10, 11

2.1 (0.95) 2.1 (0.95)

3 3 3

15E

15DBA1-15E

10, 11

20E

15DBA1-20E

10, 11

2.1 (0.95)

25E

15DBA1-25E

10, 11

2.1 (0.95)

30E

15DBA1-30E

10, 11

2.1 (0.95)

40E

15DBA1-40E

10, 11

2.1 (0.95)

50E

15DBA1-50E

10, 11

2.1 (0.95)

65E

15DBA1-65E

10, 11

2.1 (0.95)

3

80E

15DBA1-80E

10, 11

2.1 (0.95)

3

100E

15DBA1-100E

10, 11

2.1 (0.95)

125E

15DBA1-125E

10, 11

2.1 (0.95)

150E

15DBA1-150E

10, 11

2.1 (0.95)

200E

15DBA1-200E

10, 11

2.1 (0.95)

3

Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)

25DBA1-.5

10, 11

3.1 (1.4)

25DBA1-3

10, 11

3.1 (1.4)

5E

25DBA1-5E

10, 11

3.1 (1.4)

7E

25DBA1-7E

10, 11

3.1 (1.4)

10E

25DBA1-10E

10, 11

3.1 (1.4)

15E

25DBA1-15E

10, 11

3.1 (1.4)

20E

25DBA1-20E

10, 11

3.1 (1.4)

25E

25DBA1-25E

10, 11

3.1 (1.4)

30E

25DBA1-30E

10, 11

3.1 (1.4)

40E

25DBA1-40E

10, 11

3.1 (1.4)

50E

25DBA1-50E

10, 11

3.1 (1.4)

65E

25DBA1-65E

10, 11

3.1 (1.4)

80E

25DBA1-80E

10, 11

3.1 (1.4)

100E

25DBA1-100E

10, 11

3.1 (1.4)

125E

25DBA1-125E

10, 11

3.1 (1.4)

150E

25DBA1-150E

10, 11

3.1 (1.4)

200E

25DBA1-200E

10, 11

3.1 (1.4)

3 3 3 3 3 V4-T3-98

Curve Reference 36-623

3

2.1 (0.95)

3 3

Catalog Number

25 kV Maximum (23 kV Nominal)

125E

3

DBA-1 Fuse Units Ampere Rating

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Expulsion Fuses

3.4

Type DBA Expulsion Fuses for Use Indoors or Outdoors, continued DBA-1 Fuse Units Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

Curve Reference 36-623

Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)

Type DBA-1 Fuse Refills 38 kV Maximum (34.5 kV Nominal)

3 DBA-1 Fuse Units Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

Curve Reference 36-623

Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)

3 3

72 kV Maximum (69 kV Nominal)

0.5

38DBA1-.5

10, 12

4.2 (1.9)

3

38DBA1-3

10, 12

4.2 (1.9)

5E

38DBA1-5E

10, 12

4.2 (1.9)

7E

38DBA1-7E

10, 12

4.2 (1.9)

10E

38DBA1-10E

10, 12

4.2 (1.9)

15E

38DBA1-15E

10, 12

4.2 (1.9)

20E

38DBA1-20E

10, 12

4.2 (1.9)

25E

38DBA1-25E

10, 12

4.2 (1.9)

30E

38DBA1-30E

10, 12

4.2 (1.9)

40E

38DBA1-40E

10, 12

4.2 (1.9)

50E

38DBA1-50E

10, 12

4.2 (1.9)

65E

38DBA1-65E

10, 12

4.2 (1.9)

80E

38DBA1-80E

10, 12

4.2 (1.9)

100E

38DBA1-100E

10, 12

4.2 (1.9)

125E

38DBA1-125E

10, 12

4.2 (1.9)

150E

38DBA1-150E

10, 12

4.2 (1.9)

200E

38DBA1-200E

10, 12

4.2 (1.9)

0.5

72DBA1-.5

10, 12

7.1 (3.2)

3

72DBA1-3

10, 12

7.1 (3.2)

5E

72DBA1-5E

10, 12

7.1 (3.2)

7E

72DBA1-7E

10, 12

7.1 (3.2)

10E

72DBA1-10E

10, 12

7.1 (3.2)

15E

72DBA1-15E

10, 12

7.1 (3.2)

20E

72DBA1-20E

10, 12

7.1 (3.2)

25E

72DBA1-25E

10, 12

7.1 (3.2)

30E

72DBA1-30E

10, 12

7.1 (3.2)

40E

72DBA1-40E

10, 12

7.1 (3.2)

50E

72DBA1-50E

10, 12

7.1 (3.2)

65E

72DBA1-65E

10, 12

7.1 (3.2)

80E

72DBA1-80E

10, 12

7.1 (3.2)

100E

72DBA1-100E

10, 12

7.1 (3.2)

125E

72DBA1-125E

10, 12

7.1 (3.2)

150E

72DBA1-150E

10, 12

7.1 (3.2)

200E

72DBA1-200E

10, 12

7.1 (3.2)

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

48 kV Maximum (46 kV Nominal) 0.5

48DBA1-.5

10, 12

6.5 (3.0)

3

48DBA1-3

10, 12

6.5 (3.0)

5E

48DBA1-5E

10, 12

6.5 (3.0)

7E

48DBA1-7E

10, 12

6.5 (3.0)

10E

48DBA1-10E

10, 12

6.5 (3.0)

15E

48DBA1-15E

10, 12

6.5 (3.0)

20E

48DBA1-20E

10, 12

6.5 (3.0)

25E

48DBA1-25E

10, 12

6.5 (3.0)

30E

48DBA1-30E

10, 12

6.5 (3.0)

40E

48DBA1-40E

10, 12

6.5 (3.0)

50E

48DBA1-50E

10, 12

6.5 (3.0)

65E

48DBA1-65E

10, 12

6.5 (3.0)

80E

48DBA1-80E

10, 12

6.5 (3.0)

100E

48DBA1-100E

10, 12

6.5 (3.0)

125E

48DBA1-125E

10, 12

6.5 (3.0)

150E

48DBA1-150E

10, 12

6.5 (3.0)

200E

48DBA1-200E

10, 12

6.5 (3.0)

3

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-99

3.4 3 3 3 3

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Expulsion Fuses

Type DBA Expulsion Fuses for Use Indoors or Outdoors, continued DBA-1 Fuse Units Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

Curve Reference 36-623

Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)

Type DBA-2 Fuse Refills 38 kV Maximum (34.5 kV Nominal) 38DBA2-.5

10, 12

10 (4.5)

3

3

38DBA2-3

10, 12

10 (4.5)

5E

38DBA2-5E

10, 12

10 (4.5)

3

7E

38DBA2-7E

10, 12

10 (4.5)

10E

38DBA2-10E

10, 12

10 (4.5)

15E

38DBA2-15E

10, 12

10 (4.5)

3

20E

38DBA2-20E

10, 12

10 (4.5)

25E

38DBA2-25E

10, 12

10 (4.5)

3

30E

38DBA2-30E

10, 12

10 (4.5)

40E

38DBA2-40E

10, 12

10 (4.5)

50E

38DBA2-50E

10, 12

10 (4.5)

65E

38DBA2-65E

10, 12

10 (4.5)

80E

38DBA2-80E

10, 12

10 (4.5)

3

100E

38DBA2-100E

10, 12

10 (4.5)

125E

38DBA2-125E

10, 12

10 (4.5)

3

150E

38DBA2-150E

10, 12

10 (4.5)

200E

38DBA2-200E

10, 12

10 (4.5)

3 3

3

48 kV Maximum (46 kV Nominal)

3

0.5

48DBA2-.5

10, 12

12 (5.4)

3

48DBA2-3

10, 12

12 (5.4)

3

5E

48DBA2-5E

10, 12

12 (5.4)

7E

48DBA2-7E

10, 12

12 (5.4)

3

10E

48DBA2-10E

10, 12

12 (5.4)

15E

48DBA2-15E

10, 12

12 (5.4)

3

20E

48DBA2-20E

10, 12

12 (5.4)

3

25E

48DBA2-25E

10, 12

12 (5.4)

30E

48DBA2-30E

10, 12

12 (5.4)

3

40E

48DBA2-40E

10, 12

12 (5.4)

50E

48DBA2-50E

10, 12

12 (5.4)

3

65E

48DBA2-65E

10, 12

12 (5.4)

3

80E

48DBA2-80E

10, 12

12 (5.4)

100E

48DBA2-100E

10, 12

12 (5.4)

3

125E

48DBA2-125E

10, 12

12 (5.4)

150E

48DBA2-150E

10, 12

12 (5.4)

3

200E

48DBA2-200E

10, 12

12 (5.4)

Curve Reference 36-623

Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)

0.5

72DBA2-.5

10, 12

15 (6.8)

3

72DBA2-3

10, 12

15 (6.8)

5E

72DBA2-5E

10, 12

15 (6.8)

7E

72DBA2-7E

10, 12

15 (6.8)

10E

72DBA2-10E

10, 12

15 (6.8)

15E

72DBA2-15E

10, 12

15 (6.8)

20E

72DBA2-20E

10, 12

15 (6.8)

25E

72DBA2-25E

10, 12

15 (6.8)

30E

72DBA2-30E

10, 12

15 (6.8)

40E

72DBA2-40E

10, 12

15 (6.8)

50E

72DBA2-50E

10, 12

15 (6.8)

65E

72DBA2-65E

10, 12

15 (6.8)

80E

72DBA2-80E

10, 12

15 (6.8)

100E

72DBA2-100E

10, 12

15 (6.8)

125E

72DBA2-125E

10, 12

15 (6.8)

150E

72DBA2-150E

10, 12

15 (6.8)

200E

72DBA2-200E

10, 12

15 (6.8)

3 3 3 3 3 3 V4-T3-100

Catalog Number

72 kV Maximum (69 kV Nominal)

0.5

3

DBA-1 Fuse Units Ampere Rating

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Expulsion Fuses

3.4

Type DBA Expulsion Fuses for Use Indoors or Outdoors, continued DBA-1 Fuse Units Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

Curve Reference 36-623

Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)

Type DBA-2 Fuse Refills 92 kV Maximum (92 kV Nominal)

3 DBA-1 Fuse Units Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

Curve Reference 36-623

Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)

3 3

145 kV Maximum (138 kV Nominal)

3

92DBA2-3

10, 13

19 (8.6)

5E

92DBA2-5E

10, 13

19 (8.6)

7E

92DBA2-7E

10, 13

19 (8.6)

10E

92DBA2-10E

10, 13

19 (8.6)

15E

92DBA2-15E

10, 13

19 (8.6)

20E

92DBA2-20E

10, 13

19 (8.6)

25E

92DBA2-25E

10, 13

19 (8.6)

30E

92DBA2-30E

10, 13

19 (8.6)

40E

92DBA2-40E

10, 13

19 (8.6)

50E

92DBA2-50E

10, 13

19 (8.6)

65E

92DBA2-65E

10, 13

19 (8.6)

80E

92DBA2-80E

10, 13

19 (8.6)

100E

92DBA2-100E

10, 13

19 (8.6)

125E

92DBA2-125E

10, 13

19 (8.6)

150E

92DBA2-150E

10, 13

19 (8.6)

200E

92DBA2-200E

10, 13

19 (8.6)

3

145DBA2-3

10, 13

25 (11.4)

5E

145DBA2-5E

10, 13

25 (11.4)

7E

145DBA2-7E

10, 13

25 (11.4)

10E

145DBA2-10E

10, 13

25 (11.4)

15E

145DBA2-15E

10, 13

25 (11.4)

20E

145DBA2-20E

10, 13

25 (11.4)

25E

145DBA2-25E

10, 13

25 (11.4)

30E

145DBA2-30E

10, 13

25 (11.4)

40E

145DBA2-40E

10, 13

25 (11.4)

50E

145DBA2-50E

10, 13

25 (11.4)

65E

145DBA2-65E

10, 13

25 (11.4)

80E

145DBA2-80E

10, 13

25 (11.4)

100E

145DBA2-100E

10, 13

25 (11.4)

125E

145DBA2-125E

10, 13

25 (11.4)

150E

145DBA2-150E

10, 13

25 (11.4)

200E

145DBA2-200E

10, 13

25 (11.4)

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

121 kV Maximum (115 kV Nominal) 3

121DBA2-3

10, 13

22 (10)

5E

121DBA2-5E

10, 13

22 (10)

7E

121DBA2-7E

10, 13

22 (10)

10E

121DBA2-10E

10, 13

22 (10)

15E

121DBA2-15E

10, 13

22 (10)

20E

121DBA2-20E

10, 13

22 (10)

25E

121DBA2-25E

10, 13

22 (10)

30E

121DBA2-30E

10, 13

22 (10)

40E

121DBA2-40E

10, 13

22 (10)

50E

121DBA2-50E

10, 13

22 (10)

65E

121DBA2-65E

10, 13

22 (10)

80E

121DBA2-80E

10, 13

22 (10)

100E

121DBA2-100E

10, 13

22 (10)

125E

121DBA2-125E

10, 13

22 (10)

150E

121DBA2-150E

10, 13

22 (10)

200E

121DBA2-200E

10, 13

22 (10)

3

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-101

3.5

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Current Limiting Fuses

Contents

3

Description

3

Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type CLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type HLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type BHLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type HCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type CLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type CLPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type CX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type CXN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type CXF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type DSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Catalog Number Selection Easy to Use, Easy to Order! Eaton’s fuse catalog numbering system makes it easy to order the right fuse. The catalog numbers are easy to remember, unique to each fuse, and are broken down in three descriptive segments: Fuse type, voltage rating and current rating.

These catalog numbers can be entered directly and easily: ●

No change in order processing will occur if you use either a style number or its corresponding catalog number. You will get the same fuse

15CXN-45C—15.5 max. kV, CXN fuse unit, 45C amperes 5CLS-GDM-E—5.5 max. kV, CLS fuse unit, glass polyester nondisconnect mounting CLE-DL-D—CLE, disconnect live parts Size D

3 3

Examples: 5CLE-30E—5.5 max. kV, CLE fuse unit, 30E amperes

Current Limiting Fuses

15 CLE – 100 E – D

3 3

Maximum kV 2 = 2.4, 2.5, 2.75 4 = 4.3, 4.8 5 = 5.08, 5.5 7 = 7.2 8 = 8.3 15 = 15.5 25 = 25.5 38 = 38.0

3 3 3 3

Type CLE CLS75 HLE CX BHLE CXN CLPT AHLE NCLPT ACLS CLS CXI BCLS NCLS CLS70

Ampere Rating 0.5 to 1350

Class E R C X

Size A B D

3 3 3 3 3 3 V4-T3-102

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

Page V4-T3-104 V4-T3-104 V4-T3-108 V4-T3-111 V4-T3-114 V4-T3-116 V4-T3-122 V4-T3-127 V4-T3-131 V4-T3-133 V4-T3-134

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Current Limiting Fuses

3.5

Current Limiting Fuse Accessories

3

15 CLE – P NM – C Maximum kV 2 = 2.4, 2.5, 2.75 4 = 4.3, 4.8 5 = 5.08, 5.5 7 = 7.2 8 = 8.3 15 = 15.5 25 = 25.5 38 = 38.0

Type CLE CLS HLE CLS75 CLPT CX NCLPT CXN

Insulator G = Glass polyester P = Porcelain H = High BIL

DM NM DL NL DF

Hardware = Disconnect mounting = Nondisconnect mounting = Disconnect live parts = Nondisconnect live parts = Disconnect end fittings

3 3

Diameter Size A = 1-5/8 inches (41.3 mm) 0.53E–1.5E single barrel B = 1-5/8 inches (41.3 mm) 3E–10E single barrel C = 2-inch (50.8 mm) single barrel D = 3-inch (76.2 mm) single barrel E = 3-inch (76.2 mm) double barrel F = 4-inch (101.6 mm) double barrel G = 5/8-inch (15.9 mm) ferrule (CX/CXN only)

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-103

3.5 3 3

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Current Limiting Fuses

Product Selection Type CLE

3

Type CLE Current Limiting Fuses 2.75 kV Maximum (2.4 kV Nominal) Performance Curves

3

Current Rating (Amperes)

Barrel Number

Interrupting Rating rms (kA Sym.)

Heritage Product

Indoor/ Outdoor

Minimum Melting Time

Total Clearing Time

Peak Let-Through Current

Catalog Number

3

15E

1

50

H

Indoor

56353202

56353302

63931702

2CLE-15E

3

20E

1

50

H

Indoor

56353202

56353302

63931702

2CLE-20E

25E

1

50

H

Indoor

56353202

56353302

63931702

2CLE-25E

3

10E

1

50

H

Indoor

53686104

53686204

63931704

2CLE-10E

30E

1

50

H

Indoor

53686104

53686204

63931704

2CLE-30E

3

40E

1

50

H

Indoor

53686104

53686204

63931704

2CLE-40E

50E

1

50

H

Indoor

53686104

53686204

63931704

2CLE-50E

3

65E

1

50

H

Indoor

53686104

53686204

63931704

2CLE-65E

3

80E

1

50

H

Indoor

53686104

53686204

63931704

2CLE-80E

100E

1

50

H

Indoor

53686104

53686204

63931704

2CLE-100E

3

125E

1

50

H

Indoor

53686104

53686204

63931704

2CLE-125E

150E

1

50

H

Indoor

53686104

53686204

63931704

2CLE-150E

3

200E

1

50

H

Indoor

53686104

53686204

63931704

2CLE-200E

225E

1

50

H

Indoor

53686104

53686204

63931704

2CLE-225E

3

250E

2

50

H

Indoor

53690002

53690102

63931802

2CLE-250E

3

300E

2

50

H

Indoor

53690002

53690102

63931802

2CLE-300E

350X

2

50

H

Indoor

53690002

53690102

63931802

2CLE-350X

3

400X

2

50

H

Indoor

53690002

53690102

63931802

2CLE-400X

450X

2

50

H

Indoor

53690002

53690102

63931802

2CLE-450X

3 3

Type CLE Mountings and Hardware 2.75 kV Maximum (2.4 kV Nominal) Mounting (Including Live Parts, End Fittings) 2

3 3

Ampere Rating

Fuse Mounting Type 1

Voltage BIL (kV)

Diameter

Clip Center

3

15E–25E

Non-disconnect

60

2.00 (50.8)

8.13 (206.5) 9.50 (241.3)

Disconnect

60

3 3

10E–250E

300E–450E

3

Non-disconnect

60

Disconnect

60

Non-disconnect

60

Disconnect

60

3.00 (76.2)

3.00 (76.2)

3

Type CLE Fuse

3 3 3

Glass-Polyester Insulator

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2 (0.91)

2CLE-PNM-C

2CLE-GNM-C

CLE-NL-C

—

2CLE-PDM-C

2CLE-GDM-C

CLE-DL-C

CLE-DF-C

2CLE-PNM-D

2CLE-GNM-D

CLE-NL-D

—

2CLE-PDM-D

2CLE-GDM-D

CLE-DL-D

CLE-DF-D

2CLE-PNM-E

2CLE-GNM-E

CLE-NL-E

—

2CLE-PDM-E

2CLE-GDM-E

CLE-DL-E

CLE-DF-E

CLE kV

"B" Dia. "L"

“L”

“B” Dia.

15E–25E

9.50 (241.3)

2.00 (50.8)

10E–450E

10.90 (276.9)

3.00 (76.2)

Notes 1 See Page V4-T3-135 for diagram of typical mounting. 2 End fittings supplied only when required.

3.31 Ref. (84.1)

3

"L"

V4-T3-104

Catalog Number

Porcelain Insulator

7.00 (177.8) 10.90 (276.9) 15 (6.81)

Fuse Dimensional Details Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

End Fittings (Disconnect Only)

Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)

7.00 (177.8) 10.90 (276.9) 7 (3.18)

3 3

Length

Live Parts (Including End Fittings) 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

3.5

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Current Limiting Fuses

Type CLE Current Limiting Fuses 5.5 kV Maximum (4.8 kV Nominal)

3

Performance Curves Current Rating (Amperes)

Barrel Number

Interrupting Rating rms (kA Sym.)

Heritage Product

Indoor/ Outdoor

Minimum Melting Time

Total Clearing Time

Peak Let-Through Current

Catalog Number

3

15E

1

50

H

Indoor

56353204

56353304

63931702

5CLE-15E

20E

1

50

H

Indoor

56353204

56353304

63931702

5CLE-20E

3

25E

1

50

H

Indoor

56353204

56353304

63931702

5CLE-25E

10E

1

63

—

Indoor/outdoor

70548501

70548601

70548701

5CLE-10E-D

15E

1

63

—

Indoor/outdoor

70548501

70548601

70548701

5CLE-15E-D

20E

1

63

—

Indoor/outdoor

70548501

70548601

70548701

5CLE-20E-D

25E

1

63

—

Indoor/outdoor

70548501

70548601

70548701

5CLE-25E-D

30E

1

63

—

Indoor/outdoor

70548501

70548601

70548701

5CLE-30E

40E

1

50

—

Indoor/outdoor

70545801

70545901

70546701

5CLE-40E

50E

1

50

—

Indoor/outdoor

70545801

70545901

70546701

5CLE-50E

65E

1

50

—

Indoor/outdoor

70545801

70545901

70546701

5CLE-65E

80E

1

50

—

Indoor/outdoor

70545801

70545901

70546701

5CLE-80E

100E

1

50

—

Indoor/outdoor

70545801

70545901

70546701

5CLE-100E

125E

1

50

—

Indoor/outdoor

70545801

70545901

70546701

5CLE-125E

150E

1

63

—

Indoor/outdoor

70545801

70545901

70547601

5CLE-150E

175E

1

63

—

Indoor/outdoor

70545801

70545901

70547601

5CLE-175E

200E

1

63

—

Indoor/outdoor

70545801

70545901

70547601

5CLE-200E

250E

1

63

—

Indoor/outdoor

70545801

70545901

70547601

5CLE-250E

300E

2

63

—

Indoor/outdoor

70546001

70546101

70547601

5CLE-300E

350E

2

63

—

Indoor/outdoor

70546001

70546101

70547601

5CLE-350E

400E

2

63

—

Indoor/outdoor

70546001

70546101

70547601

5CLE-400E

450E

2

63

—

Indoor/outdoor

70546001

70546101

70547601

5CLE-450E

600E

2

40

—

Indoor

62908902

62908903

62908904

5CLE-600E

750E

2

40

—

Indoor

62908902

62908903

62908904

5CLE-750E

1100E

4

31

—

Indoor

62908902

62908903

62908904

5CLE-1100E

1350E

4

31

—

Indoor

62908902

62908903

62908904

5CLE-1350E

Mounting (Including Live Parts, End Fittings) 2 Approximate Porcelain Insulator Shipping Weight Lbs (kg) Catalog Number

Live Parts (Including End Fittings) 2

End Fittings (Disconnect Only)

Voltage BIL (kV)

Diameter

Clip Center

10E-D–25E-D 30E–250E

Non-disconnect

60

3.00 (76.2)

14.00 (355.6) 17.90 (454.7) 9 (4.09)

Disconnect

60

15E–25E

Non-disconnect

60

2.00 (50.8)

11.50 (292.1) 12.90 (327.7) 3 (1.36)

Disconnect

60

300E–450E

Non-disconnect

60

Disconnect

60

5CLE-PDM-E

5CLE-GDM-E

CLE-DL-E

CLE-DF-E

600E and 750E

Consult factory

60

4.00 (101.6) N/A

N/A

40 (18.16)

—

—

—

—

1100E and 1350E Consult factory

—

4.00 (101.6) N/A

N/A

80 (36.32)

—

—

—

—

3.00 (76.2)

5CLE-PNM-D

14.00 (355.6) 17.90 (454.7) 19 (8.63)

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Glass-Polyester Insulator

Fuse Mounting Type 1

Length

3

3

Type CLE Mountings and Hardware 5.5 kV Maximum (4.8 kV Nominal)

Ampere Rating

3

Catalog Number

Catalog Number Catalog Number

5CLE-GNM-D

CLE-NL-D

—

5CLE-PDM-D

5CLE-GDM-D

CLE-DL-D

CLE-DF-D

5CLE-PNM-C

5CLE-GNM-C

CLE-NL-C

—

5CLE-PDM-C

5CLE-GDM-C

CLE-DL-C

CLE-DF-C

5CLE-PNM-E

5CLE-GNM-E

CLE-NL-E

—

3 3 3 3 3

Fuse Dimensional Details Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3 3

Type CLE Fuse

"B" Dia. "L"

CLE kV

“L”

“B” Dia.

15E–25E

12.90 (327.7)

2.00 (50.8)

10E–450E

17.90 (454.7)

3.00 (76.2)

3 3

Notes 1 See Page V4-T3-135 for diagram of typical mounting. 2 End fittings supplied only when required.

3.31 Ref. (84.1)

3 3 3

"L"

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-105

3.5

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Current Limiting Fuses

3

Type CLE Current Limiting Fuses 8.3 kV Maximum (7.2 kV Nominal)

3

Current Rating (Amperes)

Barrel Number

Interrupting Rating rms (kA Sym.)

Heritage Product

Indoor/ Outdoor

Minimum Melting Time

Total Clearing Time

Peak Let-Through Current

Catalog Number

3

15E

1

50

H

Indoor

56353204

56353304

63931703

8CLE-15E

20E

1

50

H

Indoor

56353204

56353304

63931703

8CLE-20E

3

25E

1

50

H

Indoor

56353204

56353304

63931703

8CLE-25E

3

10E

1

50

—

Indoor/outdoor

70548501

70548601

70548801

8CLE-10E-D

15E

1

50

—

Indoor/outdoor

70548501

70548601

70548801

8CLE-15E-D

3

20E

1

50

—

Indoor/outdoor

70548501

70548601

70548801

8CLE-20E-D

25E

1

50

—

Indoor/outdoor

70548501

70548601

70548801

8CLE-25E-D

3

30E

1

50

—

Indoor/outdoor

70548501

70548601

70548801

8CLE-30E

40E

1

50

—

Indoor/outdoor

70546201

70546301

70547301

8CLE-40E

3

50E

1

50

—

Indoor/outdoor

70546201

70546301

70547301

8CLE-50E

3

65E

1

50

—

Indoor/outdoor

70546201

70546301

70547301

8CLE-65E

80E

1

50

—

Indoor/outdoor

70546201

70546301

70547301

8CLE-80E

3

100E

1

50

—

Indoor/outdoor

70546201

70546301

70547301

8CLE-100E

125E

1

50

—

Indoor/outdoor

70546201

70546301

70547301

8CLE-125E

3

150E

1

50

—

Indoor/outdoor

70546201

70546301

70547301

8CLE-150E

3

175E

1

50

—

Indoor/outdoor

70546201

70546301

70547301

8CLE-175E

200E

2

50

—

Indoor/outdoor

70546401

70546501

70547301

8CLE-200E

3

250E

2

50

—

Indoor/outdoor

70546401

70546501

70547301

8CLE-250E

300E

2

50

—

Indoor/outdoor

70546401

70546501

70547301

8CLE-300E

3

350E

2

50

—

Indoor/outdoor

70546401

70546501

70547301

8CLE-350E

3

Performance Curves

Type CLE Mountings and Hardware 8.3 kV Maximum (7.2 kV Nominal)

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Mounting (Including Live Parts, End Fittings) 2 Fuse Mounting Type 1

Voltage BIL (kV)

Diameter

Clip Center

15E–25E

Non-disconnect

75

2.00 (50.8)

14.00 (355.6) 15.50 (393.7) 3 (1.36)

Disconnect

75

10E-D–25E-D 30E–175E 200E–350E

Non-disconnect

75

Disconnect

75

Non-disconnect

75

Disconnect

75

3.00 (76.2)

3.00 (76.2)

Length

14.00 (355.6) 17.90 (454.7) 9 (4.09)

14.00 (355.6) 17.90 (454.7) 19 (8.63)

Catalog Number

Catalog Number Catalog Number

8CLE-PNM-C

8CLE-GNM-C

CLE-NL-C

—

8CLE-PDM-C

8CLE-GDM-C

CLE-DL-C

CLE-DF-C

8CLE-PNM-D

8CLE-GNM-D

CLE-NL-D

—

8CLE-PDM-D

8CLE-GDM-D

CLE-DL-D

CLE-DF-D

8CLE-PNM-E

8CLE-GNM-E

CLE-NL-E

—

8CLE-PDM-E

8CLE-GDM-E

CLE-DL-E

CLE-DF-E

Type CLE Fuse

3

"B" Dia.

3

CLE kV

“L”

“B” Dia.

15E–25E

15.50 (393.7)

2.00 (50.8)

10E–350E

17.90 (454.7)

3.00 (76.2)

"L" Notes 1 See Page V4-T3-135 for diagram of typical mounting. 2 End fittings supplied only when required.

3.31 Ref. (84.1)

3 "L"

3 3 V4-T3-106

End Fittings (Disconnect Only)

Glass-Polyester Insulator

Fuse Dimensional Details Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3

3

Approximate Porcelain Insulator Shipping Weight Lbs (kg) Catalog Number

Ampere Rating

Live Parts (Including End Fittings) 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

3.5

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Current Limiting Fuses

Type CLE Current Limiting Fuses 15.5 kV Maximum (4.8 kV Nominal)

3

Performance Curves Current Rating (Amperes)

Barrel Number

Interrupting Rating rms (kA Sym.)

Heritage Product

Indoor/ Outdoor

Minimum Melting Time

Total Clearing Time

Peak Let-Through Current

Catalog Number

3

15E

1

31.5

H

Indoor

56353204

56353304

63931703

15CLE-15E

20E

1

31.5

H

Indoor

56353204

56353304

63931703

15CLE-20E

3

25E

1

31.5

H

Indoor

56353204

56353304

63931703

15CLE-25E

10E

1

63

—

Indoor/outdoor

70548501

70548601

70548802

15CLE-10E-D

15E

1

63

—

Indoor/outdoor

70548501

70548601

70548802

15CLE-15E-D

20E

1

63

—

Indoor/outdoor

70548501

70548601

70548802

15CLE-20E-D

25E

1

63

—

Indoor/outdoor

70548501

70548601

70548802

15CLE-25E-D

30E

1

63

—

Indoor/outdoor

70548501

70548601

70548802

15CLE-30E

40E

1

63

—

Indoor/outdoor

70546801

70546901

70547501

15CLE-40E

50E

1

63

—

Indoor/outdoor

70546801

70546901

70547501

15CLE-50E

65E

1

63

—

Indoor/outdoor

70546801

70546901

70547501

15CLE-65E

80E

1

63

2

Indoor/outdoor

70546801

70546901

70547501

15CLE-80E

100E

1

63

2

Indoor/outdoor

70546801

70546901

70547501

15CLE-100E

125E

1

63

2

Indoor/outdoor

70546801

70546901

70547501

15CLE-125E

150E

1

63

2

Indoor/outdoor

70546801

70546901

70547501

15CLE-150E

175E

2

63

2

Indoor/outdoor

70547001

70547101

70547501

15CLE-175E

200E

2

63

2

Indoor/outdoor

70547001

70547101

70547501

15CLE-200E

250E

2

63

2

Indoor/outdoor

70547001

70547101

70547501

15CLE-250E

300E

2

63

2

Indoor/outdoor

70547001

70547101

70547501

15CLE-300E

80E

2

85

H2

Indoor

59878302

59878402

63931604

15CLE2-80E

100E

2

85

H2

Indoor

59878302

59878402

63931604

15CLE2-100E

125X

2

85

H2

Indoor

59878302

59878402

63931604

15CLE2-125X

150E

3

50

H2

Indoor

59878302

59878402

63931604

15CLE3-150E

175E/200X

3

50

H2

Indoor

59878302

59878402

63931604

15CLE3-175E/200X

Mounting (Including Live Parts, End Fittings) 2 Approximate Porcelain Insulator Shipping Weight Lbs (kg) Catalog Number

Fuse Mounting Type 1

Voltage BIL (kV)

Diameter

Clip Center

15E–25E

Non-disconnect

95

2.00 (50.8)

20.00 (508.0) 21.50 (546.1) 4.5 (2.04)

Disconnect

Length

Non-disconnect Disconnect

End Fittings (Disconnect Only)

15CLE-PNM-C

15CLE-GNM-C

CLE-NL-D

—

110

15CLE-HPNM-C

—

—

—

95

15CLE-PDM-C

15CLE-GDM-C

CLE-DL-C

CLE-DF-C

15CLE-HPDM-C

—

—

—

15CLE-PNM-D

15CLE-GNM-D

CLE-NL-D

—

110

15CLE-HPM-D

—

—

—

95

15CLE-PDM-D

15CLE-GNM-D

CLE-DL-D

CLE-DF-D

95

3.00 (76.2)

20.00 (508.0) 23.90 (607.1) 11 (4.99)

Non-disconnect

110

Disconnect

110

3.00 (76.2)

20.00 (508.0) 23.90 (607.1) 23 (10.44)

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Glass-Polyester Insulator Catalog Number Catalog Number

110 175E–300E

Live Parts (Including End Fittings) 2

Catalog Number

110 10E-D–25E-D 30E–150E

3

3

Type CLE Mountings and Hardware 15.5 kV Maximum (4.8 kV Nominal)

Ampere Rating

3

3 3 3

15CLE-HPDM-D

—

—

—

15CLE-PNM-E

—

CLE-DL-E

CLE-DF-E

15CLE-PDM-E

—

—

—

3 3 3

Fuse Dimensional Details Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3 3

Type CLE Fuse

"B" Dia. "L"

CLE kV

“L”

“B” Dia.

15E–25E

21.50 (546.1)

2.00 (50.8)

10E–300E

23.90 (607.1)

3.00 (76.2)

3 3

Notes 1 See Page V4-T3-135 for diagram of typical mounting. 2 For mountings, consult factory. 3 End fittings supplied only when required.

3.31 Ref. (84.1)

3 3 3

"L"

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-107

3.5 3

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Current Limiting Fuses

Type HLE

3

Type HLE Current Limiting Fuses 5.5 kV Maximum (4.8 kV Nominal) Interrupting Rating 63 (kA rms Sym.)

3

Performance Curves Current Rating (Amperes)

Barrel Number

Indoor/ Outdoor

Minimum Melting Time

Total Clearing Time

Peak Let-Through Current

Catalog Number

Bolt-In Ferrule Catalog Number

AMPGARD Catalog Number

10E

1

Indoor/outdoor

70548507

70548607

70548703

5HLE-10E

5BHLE-10E

5AHLE-10E

3

15E

1

Indoor/outdoor

70548507

70548607

70548703

5HLE-15E

5BHLE-15E

5AHLE-15E

3

20E

1

Indoor/outdoor

70548507

70548607

70548703

5HLE-20E

5BHLE-20E

5AHLE-20E

25E

1

Indoor/outdoor

70548507

70548607

70548703

5HLE-25E

5BHLE-25E

5AHLE-25E

3

30E

1

Indoor/outdoor

70548507

70548607

70548703

5HLE-30E

5BHLE-30E

5AHLE-30E

40E

1

Indoor/outdoor

70545805

70545905

70547603

5HLE-40E

5BHLE-40E

5AHLE-40E

3

50E

1

Indoor/outdoor

70545805

70545905

70547603

5HLE-50E

5BHLE-50E

5AHLE-50E

65E

1

Indoor/outdoor

70545805

70545905

70547603

5HLE-65E

5BHLE-65E

5AHLE-65E

3

80E

1

Indoor/outdoor

70545805

70545905

70547603

5HLE-80E

5BHLE-80E

5AHLE-80E

3

100E

1

Indoor/outdoor

70545805

70545905

70547603

5HLE-100E

5BHLE-100E

5AHLE-100E

125E

1

Indoor/outdoor

70545805

70545905

70547603

5HLE-125E

5BHLE-125E

5AHLE-125E

3

150E

1

Indoor/outdoor

70545805

70545905

70547603

5HLE-150E

5BHLE-150E

5AHLE-150E

175E

1

Indoor/outdoor

70545805

70545905

70547603

5HLE-175E

5BHLE-175E

5AHLE-175E

3

200E

1

Indoor/outdoor

70545805

70545905

70547603

5HLE-200E

5BHLE-200E

5AHLE-200E

250E

1

Indoor/outdoor

70545805

70545905

70547603

5HLE-250E

5BHLE-250E

5AHLE-250E

3

300E

2

Indoor/outdoor

70546005

70546105

70547603

5HLE-300E

5BHLE-300E

5AHLE-300E

3

350E

2

Indoor/outdoor

70546005

70546105

70547603

5HLE-350E

5BHLE-350E

5AHLE-350E

400E

2

Indoor/outdoor

70546005

70546105

70547603

5HLE-400E

5BHLE-400E

5AHLE-400E

450E

2

Indoor/outdoor

70546005

70546105

70547603

5HLE-450E

5BHLE-450E

5AHLE-450E

Live Parts (Including End Fittings) 2

End Fittings (Disconnect Only)

3

3 3

Type HLE Mountings and Hardware 5.5 kV Maximum (4.8 kV Nominal)

3 3 3 3

Mounting (Including Live Parts, End Fittings) 2 Fuse Mounting Type 1

Voltage BIL (kV)

Diameter

Clip Center

10E–250E

Non-disconnect

60

3.00 (76.2)

12.00 (304.8) 15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

Disconnect

60

Non-disconnect

60

Disconnect

60

300E–450E

3

3.00 (76.2)

3

Fuse Dimensional Details Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3

Type HLE Fuse

3 L ±0.03

3

Length

12.00 (304.8) 15.90 (403.9) 17 (7.72)

3.00 Dia. (76.2)

3 3

Approximate Porcelain Insulator Shipping Weight Lbs (kg) Catalog Number

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number Catalog Number

5HLE-GNM-D

CLE-NL-D

5HLE-PDM-D

5HLE-GDM-D

CLE-DL-D

CLE-DF-D

5HLE-PNM-E

5HLE-GNM-E

CLE-NL-E

—

5HLE-PDM-E

5HLE-GDM-E

CLE-DL-E

CLE-DF-D

HLE kV

L ± 0.03

5.5

15.88 (403.4)

Notes 1 See Page V4-T3-135 for diagram of typical mounting. 2 End fittings supplied only when required.

3 L ±0.03

3 V4-T3-108

Catalog Number

5HLE-PNM-D

3.31 (84.1)

3

Glass-Polyester Insulator

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

—

3.5

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Current Limiting Fuses

Type HLE Current Limiting Fuses 8.3 kV Maximum (7.2 kV Nominal) Interrupting Rating 50 (kA Sym.) Performance Curves

3

Current Rating (Amperes)

Barrel Number

Indoor/ Outdoor

Minimum Melting Time

Total Clearing Time

Peak Let-Through Current

Catalog Number

Bolt-In Ferrule Catalog Number

AMPGARD Catalog Number

3

10E

1

Indoor/outdoor

70548507

70548607

70548804

8HLE-10E

8BHLE-10E

8AHLE-10E

15E

1

Indoor/outdoor

70548507

70548607

70548804

8HLE-15E

8BHLE-15E

8AHLE-15E

3

20E

1

Indoor/outdoor

70548507

70548607

70548804

8HLE-20E

8BHLE-20E

8AHLE-20E

25E

1

Indoor/outdoor

70548507

70548607

70548804

8HLE-25E

8BHLE-25E

8AHLE-25E

30E

1

Indoor/outdoor

70548507

70548607

70548804

8HLE-30E

8BHLE-30E

8AHLE-30E

40E

1

Indoor/outdoor

70546203

70546303

70547201

8HLE-40E

8BHLE-40E

8AHLE-40E

50E

1

Indoor/outdoor

70546203

70546303

70547201

8HLE-50E

8BHLE-50E

8AHLE-50E

65E

1

Indoor/outdoor

70546203

70546303

70547201

8HLE-65E

8BHLE-65E

8AHLE-65E

80E

1

Indoor/outdoor

70546203

70546303

70547201

8HLE-80E

8BHLE-80E

8AHLE-80E

100E

1

Indoor/outdoor

70546203

70546303

70547201

8HLE-100E

8BHLE-100E

8AHLE-100E

125E

1

Indoor/outdoor

70546203

70546303

70547201

8HLE-125E

8BHLE-125E

8AHLE-125E

150E

1

Indoor/outdoor

70546203

70546303

70547201

8HLE-150E

8BHLE-150E

8AHLE-150E

175E

1

Indoor/outdoor

70546203

70546303

70547201

8HLE-175E

8BHLE-175E

8AHLE-175E

200E

2

Indoor/outdoor

70546403

70546503

70547201

8HLE-200E

8BHLE-200E

8AHLE-200E

250E

2

Indoor/outdoor

70546403

70546503

70547201

8HLE-250E

8BHLE-250E

8AHLE-250E

300E

2

Indoor/outdoor

70546403

70546503

70547201

8HLE-300E

8BHLE-300E

8AHLE-300E

350E

2

Indoor/outdoor

70546403

70546503

70547201

8HLE-350E

8BHLE-350E

8AHLE-350E

Mounting (Including Live Parts, End Fittings) 2 Approximate Porcelain Insulator Shipping Weight Lbs (kg) Catalog Number

Live Parts (Including End Fittings) 2

End Fittings (Disconnect Only)

Glass-Polyester Insulator

Ampere Rating

Fuse Mounting Type 1

Voltage BIL (kV)

Diameter

Clip Center

10E–175E

Non-disconnect

75

3.00 (76.2)

12.00 (304.8) 15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

Disconnect

75

8HLE-PDM-D

8HLE-GDM-D

CLE-DL-D

CLE-DF-D

200E–350E

Non-disconnect

75

8HLE-PNM-E

8HLE-GNM-E

CLE-NL-E

—

Disconnect

75

8HLE-PDM-E

8HLE-GDM-E

CLE-DL-E

CLE-DF-E

8HLE-PNM-D

Catalog Number

Catalog Number Catalog Number

8HLE-GNM-D

CLE-NL-D

—

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Fuse Dimensional Details Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3

Type HLE Fuse

3.00 Dia. (76.2) L ±0.03

3

3

Type HLE Mountings and Hardware 8.3 kV Maximum (7.2 kV Nominal)

Length

3

HLE kV

L ± 0.03

8.3

15.88 (403.4)

3 3

Notes 1 See Page V4-T3-135 for diagram of typical mounting. 2 End fittings supplied only when required.

3 3

3.31 (84.1)

3 3

L ±0.03

3 3 3 3 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-109

3.5

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Current Limiting Fuses

3

Type HLE Current Limiting Fuses 15.5 kV Maximum (14.4 kV Nominal)

3

Current Rating (Amperes)

Barrel Number

Interrupting Rating rms (kA Sym.)

Indoor/ Outdoor

Minimum Melting Time

Total Clearing Time

Peak Let-Through Current

Catalog Number

Bolt-In Ferrule Catalog Number

3

10E

1

63

Indoor/outdoor

70548507

70548607

70548805

15HLE-10E

15BHLE-10E

15E

1

63

Indoor/outdoor

70548507

70548607

70548805

15HLE-15E

15BHLE-15E

3

20E

1

63

Indoor/outdoor

70548507

70548607

70548805

15HLE-20E

15BHLE-20E

3

25E

1

63

Indoor/outdoor

70548507

70548607

70548805

15HLE-25E

15BHLE-25E

30E

1

63

Indoor/outdoor

70548507

70548607

70548805

15HLE-30E

15BHLE-30E

3

40E

1

63

Indoor/outdoor

70546601

70546701

70547401

15HLE-40E

15BHLE-40E

50E

1

63

Indoor/outdoor

70546601

70546701

70547401

15HLE-50E

15BHLE-50E

3

65E

1

63

Indoor/outdoor

70546601

70546701

70547401

15HLE-65E

15BHLE-65E

80E

1

63

Indoor/outdoor

70546601

70546701

70547401

15HLE-80E

15BHLE-80E

3

100E

1

63

Indoor/outdoor

70546601

70546701

70547401

15HLE-100E 15BHLE-100E

3

125E

1

63

Indoor/outdoor

70546601

70546701

70547401

15HLE-125E 15BHLE-125E

150E

2

63

Indoor/outdoor

70546601

70546701

70547401

15HLE-150E 15BHLE-150E

3

175E

2

63

Indoor/outdoor

70546601

70546701

70547401

15HLE-175E 15BHLE-175E

200E

2

63

Indoor/outdoor

70546601

70546701

70547401

15HLE-200E 15BHLE-200E

250E

2

63

Indoor/outdoor

70546601

70546701

70547401

15HLE-250E 15BHLE-250E

Performance Curves

3 3

Type HLE Mountings and Hardware 15.5 kV Maximum (14.4 kV Nominal)

3 3 3

Mounting (Including Live Parts, End Fittings) 2 Fuse Mounting Type 1

Voltage BIL (kV)

Diameter

Clip Center

10E–175E

Non-disconnect

95

3.00 (76.2)

15.00 (381.0) 18.90 (480.1) 10 (4.54)

Disconnect

95

Non-disconnect

95

3.00 (76.2)

15.00 (381.0) 18.90 (480.1) 21 (9.53)

Disconnect

95

3 3 3 3

150E–250E

Catalog Number

Catalog Number Catalog Number

15HLE-PNM-D

15HLE-GNM-D

CLE-NL-D

15HLE-PDM-D

15HLE-GDM-D

CLE-DL-D

CLE-DF-D

15HLE-PNM-E

—

CLE-NL-E

—

15HLE-PDM-E

—

CLE-DL-E

CLE-DF-E

Type HLE Fuse

3.00 Dia. (76.2)

3 3 3

Length

L ±0.03

HLE kV

L ± 0.03

15.5

18.88 (479.6)

Notes 1 See Page V4-T3-135 for diagram of typical mounting. 2 End fittings supplied only when required.

3.31 (84.1)

3

L ±0.03

3 3 3 3 3 V4-T3-110

End Fittings (Disconnect Only)

Glass-Polyester Insulator

Fuse Dimensional Details Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3

3

Approximate Porcelain Insulator Shipping Weight Lbs (kg) Catalog Number

Ampere Rating

Live Parts (Including End Fittings) 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

—

3.5

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Current Limiting Fuses

Type BHLE

3

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3 Type BHLE Current Limiting Fuses 5.5 kV Maximum (4.8 kV Nominal), Indoor, Bolt-In

3

Length

Performance Curves Approximate Shipping Minimum Total Weight Lbs (kg) Melting Time Clearing Time

Peak Let-Through Current

Catalog Number

3 3

Current Rating (Amperes)

Barrel Number

Interrupting Rating rms (kA Sym.)

10E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

15.90 (403.9)

8 (3.63)

70548507

70548607

70548703

5BHLE-10E

15E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

15.90 (403.9)

8 (3.63)

70548507

70548607

70548703

5BHLE-15E

20E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

15.90 (403.9)

8 (3.63)

70548507

70548607

70548703

5BHLE-20E

25E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

15.90 (403.9)

8 (3.63)

70548507

70548607

70548703

5BHLE-25E

30E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

15.90 (403.9)

8 (3.63)

70548507

70548607

70548703

5BHLE-30E

40E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

15.90 (403.9)

8 (3.63)

70545805

70545905

70547603

5BHLE-40E

50E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

15.90 (403.9)

8 (3.63)

70545805

70545905

70547603

5BHLE-50E

65E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

15.90 (403.9)

8 (3.63)

70545805

70545905

70547603

5BHLE-65E

80E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

15.90 (403.9)

8 (3.63)

70545805

70545905

70547603

5BHLE-80E

100E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

15.90 (403.9)

8 (3.63)

70545805

70545905

70547603

5BHLE-100E

125E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

15.90 (403.9)

8 (3.63)

70545805

70545905

70547603

5BHLE-125E

150E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

15.90 (403.9)

8 (3.63)

70545805

70545905

70547603

5BHLE-150E

175E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

15.90 (403.9)

8 (3.63)

70545805

70545905

70547603

5BHLE-175E

200E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

15.90 (403.9)

8 (3.63)

70545805

70545905

70547603

5BHLE-200E

250E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

15.90 (403.9)

8 (3.63)

70545805

70545905

70547603

5BHLE-250E

300E

2

63

3.00 (76.2)

15.90 (403.9)

17 (7.72)

70546005

70546105

70547603

5BHLE-300E

350E

2

63

3.00 (76.2)

15.90 (403.9)

17 (7.72)

70546005

70546105

70547603

5BHLE-350E

400E

2

63

3.00 (76.2)

15.90 (403.9)

17 (7.72)

70546005

70546105

70547603

5BHLE-400E

450E

2

63

3.00 (76.2)

15.90 (403.9)

17 (7.72)

70546005

70546105

70547603

5BHLE-450E

Diameter

3 3 3 3

Fuse Dimensional Details

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Type BHLE Fuse Indicator to be Located Here

3.31 (84.1)

2.12 (53.8)

3 3 3

3.00 (76.2) Ref.

17.88 0.06 (454.2)

17.88 0.06 (454.2)

19.25 Ref. (488.9)

19.25 Ref. (488.9)

Single Barrel

3.00 (76.2) Ref.

2.12 (53.8)

3 3 3

Double Barrel Type 5BHLE and 8BHLE Fuses 3 6

3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-111

3.5 3 3 3

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Current Limiting Fuses

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Type BHLE Current Limiting Fuses 8.3 kV Maximum (7.2 kV Nominal), Indoor, Bolt-In

Length

Performance Curves Approximate Shipping Minimum Total Weight Lbs (kg) Melting Time Clearing Time

Peak Let-Through Current

Catalog Number

3.00 (76.2)

15.90 (403.9)

8 (3.63)

70548507

70548607

70548804

8BHLE-10E

3.00 (76.2)

15.90 (403.9)

8 (3.63)

70548507

70548607

70548804

8BHLE-15E

50

3.00 (76.2)

15.90 (403.9)

8 (3.63)

70548507

70548607

70548804

8BHLE-20E

50

3.00 (76.2)

15.90 (403.9)

8 (3.63)

70548507

70548607

70548804

8BHLE-25E

1

50

3.00 (76.2)

15.90 (403.9)

8 (3.63)

70548507

70548607

70548804

8BHLE-30E

40E

1

50

3.00 (76.2)

15.90 (403.9)

8 (3.63)

70546203

70546303

70547201

8BHLE-40E

50E

1

50

3.00 (76.2)

15.90 (403.9)

8 (3.63)

70546203

70546303

70547201

8BHLE-50E

65E

1

50

3.00 (76.2)

15.90 (403.9)

8 (3.63)

70546203

70546303

70547201

8BHLE-65E

Current Rating (Amperes)

Barrel Number

Interrupting Rating rms (kA Sym.)

Diameter

10E

1

50

3

15E

1

50

3

20E

1

25E

1

3

30E

3

3

3

80E

1

50

3.00 (76.2)

15.90 (403.9)

8 (3.63)

70546203

70546303

70547201

8BHLE-80E

3

100E

1

50

3.00 (76.2)

15.90 (403.9)

8 (3.63)

70546203

70546303

70547201

8BHLE-100E

125E

1

50

3.00 (76.2)

15.90 (403.9)

8 (3.63)

70546203

70546303

70547201

8BHLE-125E

3

150E

1

50

3.00 (76.2)

15.90 (403.9)

8 (3.63)

70546203

70546303

70547201

8BHLE-150E

175E

1

50

3.00 (76.2)

15.90 (403.9)

8 (3.63)

70546203

70546303

70547201

8BHLE-175E

3

200E

2

50

3.00 (76.2)

15.90 (403.9)

17 (7.72)

70546403

70546503

70547201

8BHLE-200E

3

250E

2

50

3.00 (76.2)

15.90 (403.9)

17 (7.72)

70546403

70546503

70547201

8BHLE-250E

300E

2

50

3.00 (76.2)

15.90 (403.9)

17 (7.72)

70546403

70546503

70547201

8BHLE-300E

350E

2

50

3.00 (76.2)

15.90 (403.9)

17 (7.72)

70546403

70546503

70547201

8BHLE-350E

3 3

Fuse Dimensional Details Type BHLE Fuse

3

Indicator to be Located Here

3

2.12 (53.8)

3 3 3

3.31 (84.1)

3.00 (76.2) Ref.

3

17.88 0.06 (454.2)

17.88 0.06 (454.2)

19.25 Ref. (488.9)

19.25 Ref. (488.9)

Single Barrel

Double Barrel Type 5BHLE and 8BHLE Fuses

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V4-T3-112

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

3.00 (76.2) Ref.

2.12 (53.8)

3.5

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Current Limiting Fuses

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3 3

Type BHLE Current Limiting Fuses 15.5 kV Maximum (14.4 kV Nominal), Indoor/Outdoor, Bolt-In

3

Performance Curves

Current Rating (Amperes)

Barrel Number

Interrupting Rating rms (kA Sym.)

Length

Approximate Shipping Minimum Weight Lbs (kg) Melting Time

Diameter

Total Clearing Time

Peak Let-Through Current

Catalog Number

10E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

18.90 (480.1)

10 (4.54)

70548507

70548607

70548805

15BHLE-10E

15E

1

20E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

18.90 (480.1)

10 (4.54)

70548507

70548607

70548805

15BHLE-15E

63

3.00 (76.2)

18.90 (480.1)

10 (4.54)

70548507

70548607

70548805

15BHLE-20E

25E 30E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

18.90 (480.1)

10 (4.54)

70548507

70548607

70548805

15BHLE-25E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

18.90 (480.1)

10 (4.54)

70548507

70548607

70548805

15BHLE-30E

40E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

18.90 (480.1)

10 (4.54)

70546601

70546701

70547401

15BHLE-40E

50E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

18.90 (480.1)

10 (4.54)

70546601

70546701

70547401

15BHLE-50E

65E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

18.90 (480.1)

10 (4.54)

70546601

70546701

70547401

15BHLE-65E

80E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

18.90 (480.1)

10 (4.54)

70546601

70546701

70547401

15BHLE-80E

100E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

18.90 (480.1)

10 (4.54)

70546601

70546701

70547401

15BHLE-100E

125E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

18.90 (480.1)

10 (4.54)

70546601

70546701

70547401

15BHLE-125E

150E

2

63

3.00 (76.2)

18.90 (480.1)

21 (9.53)

70546601

70546701

70547401

15BHLE-150E

175E

2

63

3.00 (76.2)

18.90 (480.1)

21 (9.53)

70546601

70546701

70547401

15BHLE-175E

200E

2

63

3.00 (76.2)

18.90 (480.1)

21 (9.53)

70546601

70546701

70547401

15BHLE-200E

250E

2

63

3.00 (76.2)

18.90 (480.1)

21 (9.53)

70546601

70546701

70547401

15BHLE-250E

Fuse Dimensional Details

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Type BHLE Fuse 3.56 (90.4)

1.53 (38.9)

3 3

3.00 Ref. (76.2)

2.12 (53.8)

3.00 (76.2) Ref.

3

3

3.31 (84.1) 3.00 (76.2) Ref.

2.12 (53.8)

3 3

20.88 0.06 (530.4)

20.88 0.06 (530.4)

22.25 Ref. (565.2)

22.25 Ref. (565.2)

3

Single Barrel

Double Barrel

3

Type 15BHLE Fuses

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-113

3.5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Current Limiting Fuses

Type HCL

Type HCL Current Limiting Fuses 5.5 kV Maximum (4.8 kV Nominal), Indoor Current Rating (Amperes)

Interrupting Barrel Rating rms Number (kA Sym.) Diameter

Clip Center

Approximate Shipping Mounting Weight Lbs (kg) Type

Live Parts Performance Curves (Includes End Fittings) Minimum Total Peak Let-Through Catalog Number Melting Time Clearing Time Current

Catalog Number

10E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

Clip-lock

9 (4.09)

Non-disconnect

HCL-NL-1

70548505

70548605

70548702

5HCL-10E

15E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

Clip-lock

9 (4.09)

Non-disconnect

HCL-NL-1

70548505

70548605

70548702

5HCL-15E

20E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

Clip-lock

9 (4.09)

Non-disconnect

HCL-NL-1

70548505

70548605

70548702

5HCL-20E

25E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

Clip-lock

9 (4.09)

Non-disconnect

HCL-NL-1

70548505

70548605

70548702

5HCL-25E

30E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

Clip-lock

9 (4.09)

Non-disconnect

HCL-NL-1

70548505

70548605

70548702

5HCL-30E

40E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

Clip-lock

9 (4.09)

Non-disconnect

HCL-NL-1

70545803

70545903

70547602

5HCL-40E

50E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

Clip-lock

9 (4.09)

Non-disconnect

HCL-NL-1

70545803

70545903

70547602

5HCL-50E

65E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

Clip-lock

9 (4.09)

Non-disconnect

HCL-NL-1

70545803

70545903

70547602

5HCL-65E

80E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

Clip-lock

9 (4.09)

Non-disconnect

HCL-NL-1

70545803

70545903

70547602

5HCL-80E

100E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

Clip-lock

9 (4.09)

Non-disconnect

HCL-NL-1

70545803

70545903

70547602

5HCL-100E

125E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

Clip-lock

9 (4.09)

Non-disconnect

HCL-NL-1

70545803

70545903

70547602

5HCL-125E

150E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

Clip-lock

9 (4.09)

Non-disconnect

HCL-NL-1

70545803

70545903

70547602

5HCL-150E

3

200E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

Clip-lock

10 (4.54)

Non-disconnect

HCL-NL-1

70545803

70545903

70547602

5HCL-200E

250E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

Clip-lock

10 (4.54)

Non-disconnect

HCL-NL-1

70545803

70545903

70547602

5HCL-250E

3

300E

2

63

3.00 (76.2)

Clip-lock

20 (9.08)

Non-disconnect

HCL-NL-1

70546003

70516103

70547602

5HCL-300E

400E

2

63

3.00 (76.2)

Clip-lock

20 (9.08)

Non-disconnect

HCL-NL-1

70546003

70516103

70547602

5HCL-400E

3

450E

2

63

3.00 (76.2)

Clip-lock

20 (9.08)

Non-disconnect

HCL-NL-1

70546003

70516103

70547602

5HCL-450E

500E

2

63

3.00 (76.2)

Clip-lock

20 (9.08)

Non-disconnect

HCL-NL-1

66703401

66703501

66703701

5HCL-500E

600E

2

63

3.00 (76.2)

Clip-lock

20 (9.08)

Non-disconnect

HCL-NL-1

66703401

66703501

66703701

5HCL-600E

750E

3

63

3.00 (76.2)

Bolt-in

30 (13.62)

—

—

66703401

66703501

66703701

5HCL-750E

3

63

3.00 (76.2)

Bolt-in

30 (13.62)

—

—

66703401

66703501

66703701

5BHCL-750E

3

63

3.00 (76.2)

Bolt-in

30 (13.62)

—

—

66703401

66703501

66703701

5HCL-900E

3

63

3.00 (76.2)

Bolt-in

30 (13.62)

—

—

66703401

66703501

66703701

5BHCL-900E

3 3 3

900E

3 3

Type HCL Current Limiting Fuses (15.5 kV Maximum, 14.4 kV Nominal), Indoor

3

Current Rating (Amperes)

Interrupting Barrel Rating rms Number (kA Sym.) Diameter

3

10E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

Clip Center

Approximate Shipping Mounting Weight Lbs (kg) Type

Live Parts Performance Curves (Includes End Fittings) Minimum Total Catalog Number Melting Time Clearing Time

Peak Let-Through Current

Catalog Number

Clip-lock

10 (4.54)

HCL-NL-1

70548803

15HCL-10E

Non-disconnect

70548503

70548603

3

15E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

Clip-lock

10 (4.54)

Non-disconnect

HCL-NL-1

70548503

70548603

70548803

15HCL-15E

20E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

Clip-lock

10 (4.54)

Non-disconnect

HCL-NL-1

70548503

70548603

70548803

15HCL-20E

3

25E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

Clip-lock

10 (4.54)

Non-disconnect

HCL-NL-1

70548503

70548603

70548803

15HCL-25E

30E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

Clip-lock

10 (4.54)

Non-disconnect

HCL-NL-1

70548503

70548603

70548803

15HCL-30E 15HCL-40E

3 3 3 3 3

40E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

Clip-lock

10 (4.54)

Non-disconnect

HCL-NL-1

66703201

66703301

70547402

50E

1

63

3.00 (76.2)

Clip-lock

10 (4.54)

Non-disconnect

HCL-NL-1

66703201

66703301

70547402

15HCL-50E

65E

1

50

3.00 (76.2)

Clip-lock

12 (5.45)

Non-disconnect

HCL-NL-1

66703201

66703301

70547402

15HCL-65E

80E

1

50

3.00 (76.2)

Clip-lock

12 (5.45)

Non-disconnect

HCL-NL-1

66703201

66703301

70547402

15HCL-80E

100E

1

50

3.00 (76.2)

Clip-lock

12 (5.45)

Non-disconnect

HCL-NL-1

66703201

66703301

70547402

15HCL-100E

125E

1

50

3.00 (76.2)

Clip-lock

12 (5.45)

Non-disconnect

HCL-NL-1

66703201

66703301

70547402

15HCL-125E

150E

2

50

3.00 (76.2)

Clip-lock

24 (10.90)

Non-disconnect

HCL-NL-1

66703201

66703301

70547402

15HCL-150E

200E

2

50

3.00 (76.2)

Clip-lock

24 (10.90)

Non-disconnect

HCL-NL-1

66703201

66703301

70547402

15HCL-200E

3

250E

2

50

3.00 (76.2)

Clip-lock

24 (10.90)

Non-disconnect

HCL-NL-1

66703201

66703301

70547402

15HCL-250E

300E

2

50

3.00 (76.2)

Clip-lock

24 (10.90)

Non-disconnect

HCL-NL-1

66703201

66703301

70547402

15HCL-300E

3

Note Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm). V4-T3-114

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

3.5

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Current Limiting Fuses

Fuse Dimensional Details Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Ampere Rating

Figure Number

A

B

C

Indicator Flush with Surface in Untripped Position

Interrupting Rating rms (kA Sym.)

A C

5.5 kV Maximum—Clip Lock Style—15.25-Inch (387.4 mm) Clip Centers—3.00-Inch (76.2 mm) Barrel Diameter 10E–150E

1

A

16.81 (427.0)

1

16.12 (409.4)

4.31 (109.5)

63

1

A

22.81 (579.4)

1

22.12 (561.8)

Ampere Rating

Figure Number

C

7.94 (201.7)

15.5 kV Maximum—Clip Lock Style—21.25-Inch (539.8 mm) Clip Centers—3.00-Inch (76.2 mm) Barrel Diameter 1

A

22.81 (579.4)

22.12 (561.8)

1

63

150E–300E

2

B

22.81 (579.4)

22.12 (561.8)

1

50

1.25 (31.8)

1.25 (31.8) Figure B

15.5 kV Maximum—Clip Lock Style—18.25-Inch (463.6 mm) Clip Centers—3.00-Inch (76.2 mm) Barrel Diameter 10E–50E

1

A

19.81 (503.2)

1

19.12 (485.6)

63

B D

Bolt-In Series—5.5 kV Ampere Rating

Number of Barrels

Figure Number

A

B

C

D

Interrupting Rating rms (kA Sym.)

5.5 kV Maximum—Bolt-in Style—23.73-Inch (602.7 mm) Hole Centers—3.00-Inch (76.2 mm) Barrel Diameter 750E, 900E

3

C

25.11 (637.8)

22.37 (568.2)

23.73 (602.7)

1

63

3 3

B

Interrupting Rating rms (kA Sym.)

65E–125E

3

Blown Fuse Indicator

C

B

3

Indicator Flush with Surface in Untripped Position

A

A

0.25 (6.4) 3.00 (76.2)

Figure A

63

15.5 kV Clip Lock Mounted Number of Barrels

1.25 (31.8)

1.25 (31.8)

1.50 (38.1)

3

0.25 (6.4)

3 3

3.00 (76.2)

Indicator Flush with Surface in Untripped Position Blown Fuse Indicator

11.62 (295.1) A

C

3 3 3

0.38 (9.7)

3 3

3.00 (76.2)

0.44 x 0.91 Slots (11.2 x 23.1)

3 3

Blown Fuse Indicator

B

5.5 kV Maximum—Clip Lock Style—21.25-Inch (539.8 mm) Clip Centers—3.00-Inch (76.2 mm) Barrel Diameter 200E–600E

3

Type HCL-14 Fuses

5.5 and 15.5 kV Clip Lock Mounted Number of Barrels

3

Type HCL Fuse Dimensional Details

1.50 (38.1) 0.44 Dia. Hole (11.2)

3

Figure C

3

Type HCL Fuses

3

16.38 (416.1) 0.06 for HCL- 8 19.38 (492.3) 0.06 for HCL-1 5

3 3 3

Note 1 0.5 (12.7) tripped force 2 lb (0.9 kg).

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-115

3.5

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Current Limiting Fuses

3

Type CLS

3

Type CLS Current Limiting Fuses

3

Maximum Current Interrupting Design Rating “R” Barrel Rating rms Clip Voltage (kV) (Amperes) Designation Number (kA Sym.) Diameter Center

Length

2.54

3

Performance Curves Approximate Shipping Minimum Weight Lbs (kg) Melting Time

Peak Total Let-Through Catalog Clearing Time Current Number

25

—

1

50

3.00 (76.2) 7.00 (177.8)

10.80 (274.3) 7 (3.18)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2CLS-25

70

2R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) 7.00 (177.8)

10.80 (274.3) 7 (3.18)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2CLS-2R

100

3R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) 7.00 (177.8)

10.80 (274.3) 7 (3.18)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2CLS-3R

3

130

4R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) 7.00 (177.8)

10.80 (274.3) 7 (3.18)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2CLS-4R

3

150

5R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) 7.00 (177.8)

10.80 (274.3) 7 (3.18)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2CLS-5R

170

6R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) 7.00 (177.8)

10.80 (274.3) 7 (3.18)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2CLS-6R

3

200

9R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) 7.00 (177.8)

10.80 (274.3) 7 (3.18)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2CLS-9R

230

12R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) 7.00 (177.8)

10.80 (274.3) 7 (3.18)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2CLS-12R

3

390

18R

2

50

3.00 (76.2) 7.00 (177.8)

10.80 (274.3) 16 (7.26)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2CLS-18R

450

24R

2

50

3.00 (76.2) 7.00 (177.8)

10.80 (274.3) 16 (7.26)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2CLS-24R

3

25

—

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 10.80 (274.3) 7 (3.18)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2ACLS-25

3

70

2R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 10.80 (274.3) 7 (3.18)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2ACLS-2R

100

3R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 10.80 (274.3) 7 (3.18)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2ACLS-3R

3

130

4R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 10.80 (274.3) 7 (3.18)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2ACLS-4R

150

5R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 10.80 (274.3) 7 (3.18)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2ACLS-5R

3

170

6R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 10.80 (274.3) 7 (3.18)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2ACLS-6R

3

200

9R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 10.80 (274.3) 7 (3.18)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2ACLS-9R

230

12R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 10.80 (274.3) 7 (3.18)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2ACLS-12R

3

390

18R

2

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 10.80 (274.3) 16 (7.26)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2ACLS-18R

450

24R

2

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 10.80 (274.3) 16 (7.26)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2ACLS-24R

3

25

—

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 10.80 (274.3) 8 (3.63)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2BCLS-25

3

70

2R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 10.80 (274.3) 8 (3.63)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2BCLS-2R

3

100

3R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 10.80 (274.3) 8 (3.63)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2BCLS-3R

3

130

4R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 10.80 (274.3) 8 (3.63)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2BCLS-4R

150

5R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 10.80 (274.3) 8 (3.63)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2BCLS-5R

3

170

6R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 10.80 (274.3) 8 (3.63)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2BCLS-6R

200

9R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 10.80 (274.3) 8 (3.63)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2BCLS-9R

3

230

12R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 10.80 (274.3) 8 (3.63)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2BCLS-12R

390

18R

2

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 10.80 (274.3) 17 (7.72)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2BCLS-18R

3

450

24R

2

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 10.80 (274.3) 17 (7.72)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2BCLS-24R

3

25

—

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 10.80 (274.3) 7 (3.18)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2HCLS-25

70

2R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 10.80 (274.3) 7 (3.18)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2HCLS-2R

3

100

3R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 10.80 (274.3) 7 (3.18)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2HCLS-3R

130

4R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 10.80 (274.3) 7 (3.18)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2HCLS-4R

3

150

5R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 10.80 (274.3) 7 (3.18)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2HCLS-5R

3

170

6R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 10.80 (274.3) 7 (3.18)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2HCLS-6R

200

9R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 10.80 (274.3) 7 (3.18)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2HCLS-9R

3

230

12R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 10.80 (274.3) 7 (3.18)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2HCLS-12R

390

18R

2

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 10.80 (274.3) 16 (7.26)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2HCLS-18R

3

450

24R

2

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 10.80 (274.3) 16 (7.26)

66664702

66664704

66700202

2HCLS-24R

3

Note Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm).

3 3 V4-T3-116

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

3.5

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Current Limiting Fuses

Type CLS Current Limiting Fuses, continued

3

Performance Curves Maximum Current Interrupting Design Rating “R” Barrel Rating rms Clip Voltage (kV) (Amperes) Designation Number (kA Sym.) Diameter Center 5.08

Length

Approximate Minimum Shipping Weight Lbs (kg) Melting Time

Peak Total Let-Through Catalog Clearing Time Current Number

30

—

1

50

3.00 (76.2) 12.00 (304.8)

15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5CLS-30

70

2R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) 12.00 (304.8)

15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5CLS-2R

100

3R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) 12.00 (304.8)

15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5CLS-3R

130

4R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) 12.00 (304.8)

15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5CLS-4R

150

5R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) 12.00 (304.8)

15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5CLS-5R

170

6R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) 12.00 (304.8)

15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5CLS-6R

200

9R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) 12.00 (304.8)

15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5CLS-9R

230

12R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) 12.00 (304.8)

15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5CLS-12R

390

18R

2

50

3.00 (76.2) 12.00 (304.8)

15.90 (403.9) 17 (7.72)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5CLS-18R

450

24R

2

50

3.00 (76.2) 12.00 (304.8)

15.90 (403.9) 17 (7.72)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5CLS-24R

30

—

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5ACLS-30

70

2R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5ACLS-2R

100

3R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5ACLS-3R

130

4R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5ACLS-4R

150

5R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5ACLS-5R

170

6R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5ACLS-6R

200

9R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5ACLS-9R

230

12R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5ACLS-12R

390

18R

2

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 17 (7.72)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5ACLS-18R

450

24R

2

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 17 (7.72)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5ACLS-24R

4.3

480

26R

2

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 17 (7.72)

66690602

66690702

66700203

4ACLS-26R

5.08

30

—

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5BCLS-30

5.08

70

2R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5BCLS-2R

100

3R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5BCLS-3R

130

4R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5BCLS-4R

150

5R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5BCLS-5R

170

6R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5BCLS-6R

200

9R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5BCLS-9R

230

12R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5BCLS-12R

390

18R

2

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 17 (7.72)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5BCLS-18R

450

24R

2

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 17 (7.72)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5BCLS-24R

4.3

480

26R

2

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 17 (7.72)

66690602

66690702

66700203

4BCLS-26R

5.08

30

—

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5HCLS-30

70

2R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5HCLS-2R

100

3R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5HCLS-3R

130

4R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5HCLS-4R

150

5R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5HCLS-5R

170

6R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5HCLS-6R

200

9R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5HCLS-9R

230

12R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5HCLS-12R

390

18R

2

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 17 (7.72)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5HCLS-18R

450

24R

2

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 17 (7.72)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5HCLS-24R

Note Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm).

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-117

3.5

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Current Limiting Fuses

3

Type CLS Current Limiting Fuses, continued

3

Maximum Current Interrupting Design Rating “R” Barrel Rating rms Clip Voltage (kV) (Amperes) Designation Number (kA Sym.) Diameter Center

3

Performance Curves

5.08

Length

Approximate Shipping Minimum Weight Lbs (kg) Melting Time

Peak Total Let-Through Catalog Clearing Time Current Number

70

2R

2

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 20 (9.08)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5CLS70-2R

100

3R

2

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 20 (9.08)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5CLS70-3R

130

4R

2

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 20 (9.08)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5CLS70-4R

3

150

5R

2

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 20 (9.08)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5CLS70-5R

3

170

6R

2

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 20 (9.08)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5CLS70-6R

200

9R

2

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 20 (9.08)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5CLS70-9R

3

230

12R

2

50

4.00 (101.6) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 40 (18.16)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5CLS70-12R

390

18R

2

50

4.00 (101.6) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 40 (18.16)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5CLS70-18R

3

450

24R

2

50

4.00 (101.6) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 40 (18.16)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5CLS70-24R

600

32R

2

50

4.00 (101.6) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 40 (18.16)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5CLS70-32R

650

36R

2

50

4.00 (101.6) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 40 (18.16)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5CLS70-36R

700

44R

2

50

4.00 (101.6) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 40 (18.16)

66690602

66690702

66700203

5CLS70-44R

70

2R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) 14.00 (355.6)

17.90 (454.7) 11 (4.99)

51285302

51285402

66700204

5LCLS-2R

3

100

3R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) 14.00 (355.6)

17.90 (454.7) 11 (4.99)

51285302

51285402

66700204

5LCLS-3R

130

4R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) 14.00 (355.6)

17.90 (454.7) 11 (4.99)

51285302

51285402

66700204

5LCLS-4R

3

150

5R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) 14.00 (355.6)

17.90 (454.7) 11 (4.99)

51285302

51285402

66700204

5LCLS-5R

170

6R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) 14.00 (355.6)

17.90 (454.7) 11 (4.99)

51285302

51285402

66700204

5LCLS-6R

3

200

9R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) 14.00 (355.6)

17.90 (454.7) 11 (4.99)

51285302

51285402

66700204

5LCLS-9R

3

230

12R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) 14.00 (355.6)

17.90 (454.7) 11 (4.99)

51285302

51285402

66700204

5LCLS-12R

390

18R

2

50

3.00 (76.2) 14.00 (355.6)

17.90 (454.7) 22 (9.99)

51285302

51285402

66700204

5LCLS-18R

3

450

24R

2

50

3.00 (76.2) 14.00 (355.6)

17.90 (454.7) 22 (9.99)

51285302

51285402

66700204

5LCLS-24R

70

2R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) 12.00 (304.8)

15.90 (403.9) 7 (3.18)

66700602

66700702

66700205

8CLS-2R

3

100

3R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) 12.00 (304.8)

15.90 (403.9) 7 (3.18)

66700602

66700702

66700205

8CLS-3R

3

130

4R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) 12.00 (304.8)

15.90 (403.9) 7 (3.18)

66700602

66700702

66700205

8CLS-4R

150

5R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) 12.00 (304.8)

15.90 (403.9) 7 (3.18)

66700602

66700702

66700205

8CLS-5R

170

6R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) 12.00 (304.8)

15.90 (403.9) 7 (3.18)

66700602

66700702

66700205

8CLS-6R

200

9R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) 12.00 (304.8)

15.90 (403.9) 7 (3.18)

66700602

66700702

66700205

7CLS-9R

230

12R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) 12.00 (304.8)

15.90 (403.9) 7 (3.18)

66700602

66700702

66700205

7CLS-12R

390

18R

2

50

3.00 (76.2) 12.00 (304.8)

15.90 (403.9) 16 (7.26)

66700602

66700702

66700205

7CLS-18R

450

24R

2

50

3.00 (76.2) 12.00 (304.8)

15.90 (403.9) 16 (7.26)

66700602

66700702

66700205

7CLS-24R

70

2R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 7 (3.18)

66700602

66700702

66740205

7BCLS-2R

100

3R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 7 (3.18)

66700602

66700702

66740205

7BCLS-3R

130

4R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 7 (3.18)

66700602

66700702

66740205

7BCLS-4R

150

5R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 7 (3.18)

66700602

66700702

66740205

7BCLS-5R

3

3 3

3

5.5

8.3

7.2

3 3 3

8.3

3 3

7.2

3 3

170

6R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 7 (3.18)

66700602

66700702

66740205

7BCLS-6R

200

9R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 7 (3.18)

66700602

66700702

66740205

7BCLS-9R

230

12R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 7 (3.18)

66700602

66700702

66740205

7BCLS-12R

390

18R

2

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 16 (7.26)

66700602

66700702

66740205

7BCLS-18R

450

24R

2

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 16 (7.26)

66700602

66700702

66740205

7BCLS-24R

70

2R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

66700602

66700702

66740205

8ACLS-2R

100

3R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

66700602

66700702

66740205

8ACLS-3R

3

130

4R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

66700602

66700702

66740205

8ACLS-4R

3

150

5R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

66700602

66700702

66740205

8ACLS-5R

170

6R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

66700602

66700702

66740205

8ACLS-6R

3

3

8.3

Note Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm).

3 V4-T3-118

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

3.5

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Current Limiting Fuses

Type CLS Current Limiting Fuses, continued

3

Performance Curves Maximum Current Interrupting Design Rating “R” Barrel Rating rms Clip Voltage (kV) (Amperes) Designation Number (kA Sym.) Diameter Center 7.2

8.3

Length

Approximate Shipping Minimum Weight Lbs (kg) Melting Time

Peak Total Let-Through Catalog Clearing Time Current Number

200

9R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

66700602

66700702

66740205

7ACLS-9R

230

12R

1

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 8 (3.63)

66700602

66700702

66740205

7ACLS-12R

390

18R

2

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 17 (7.72)

66700602

66700702

66740205

7ACLS-18R

450

24R

2

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 17 (7.72)

66700602

66700702

66740205

7ACLS-24R

450

24R

2

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 20 (9.08)

66700602

66700702

66740205

7CLS70-24R

650

36R

3

50

3.00 (76.2) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 30 (13.62)

66700602

66700702

66740205

7CLS70-36R

700

44R

2

50

4.00 (101.6) Not applicable 15.90 (403.9) 40 (18.16)

66700602

66700702

66740205

7CLS70-44R

15

Not applicable 1

50

3.00 (76.2) 14.00 (355.6)

17.90 (454.7) 11 (4.99)

66664202

66664302

66679802

8CLS-15

30

Not applicable 1

50

3.00 (76.2) 14.00 (355.6)

17.90 (454.7) 11 (4.99)

66664202

66664302

66679802

8CLS-30

60

Not applicable 1

50

3.00 (76.2) 14.00 (355.6)

17.90 (454.7) 11 (4.99)

66664202

66664302

66679802

8CLS-60

70

Not applicable 1

50

3.00 (76.2) 14.00 (355.6)

17.90 (454.7) 11 (4.99)

66664202

66664302

66679802

8CLS-70

90

Not applicable 1

50

3.00 (76.2) 14.00 (355.6)

17.90 (454.7) 11 (4.99)

66664202

66664302

66679802

8CLS-90

110

Not applicable 1

50

3.00 (76.2) 14.00 (355.6)

17.90 (454.7) 11 (4.99)

66664202

66664302

66679802

8CLS-110

125

Not applicable 1

50

3.00 (76.2) 14.00 (355.6)

17.90 (454.7) 11 (4.99)

66664202

66664302

66679802

8CLS-125

150

Not applicable 2

50

3.00 (76.2) 14.00 (355.6)

17.90 (454.7) 22 (9.99)

66664202

66664302

66679802

8CLS-150

200

Not applicable 2

50

3.00 (76.2) 14.00 (355.6)

17.90 (454.7) 22 (9.99)

66664202

66664302

66679802

8CLS-200

225

Not applicable 2

50

3.00 (76.2) 14.00 (355.6)

17.90 (454.7) 22 (9.99)

66664202

66664302

66679802

8CLS-225

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Note Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm).

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-119

3.5

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Current Limiting Fuses

3

Fuse Dimensional Details Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3

Type CLS Fuse

3 3

3.31 Ref. (84.1)

3 3

10.81 (274.6) 0.06 for 2CLS 15.85 (402.6) 0.06 for 5, 7 & 8CLS

3

3.00 Dia. Ref. (76.2)

3 3

10.81 (274.6) 0.06 for 2CLS 15.85 (402.6) 0.06 for 5, 7 & 8CLS

3

Type BCLS Fuse

3

0.455 (11.6) Dia. x 0.91 Slot (4)

3

2.12 (53.8)

3 3

3.00 (76.2) Ref.

3

17.88 (454.2)

17.88 0.06 (454.2)

19.25 (488.9)

19.25 Ref. (488.9)

3 3

2.12 (53.8)

3.31 (84.1)

1.53 (38.9)

3.00 (76.2) Ref.

Type 5BCLS and 7BCLS Fuses

0.455 (11.6) Dia. x 0.91 Slot (4)

3

2.12 (53.8)

3 3

3.00 (76.2) Ref.

3

12.81 (325.4) ±0.06

12.81 0.06 (325.4)

14.18 (360.2) ±0.06

14.18 0.06 (360.2)

Type 2BCLS Fuse

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V4-T3-120

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

2.12 (53.8)

3.31 (84.1)

1.53 (38.9)

3.00 (76.2) Ref.

3.5

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Current Limiting Fuses

Type CLS Mountings and Hardware Mounting (Including Live Parts, End Fittings) 1

Live Parts (Including End Fittings)

End Fittings (Disconnect Only) 1

Maximum Design Voltage (kV)

Ampere Rating

Fuse Mounting Type

Voltage BIL (kV)

Porcelain Insulator

Glass-Polyester Insulator

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

2.54

25–230

Non-disconnect

60

2CLE-PNM-D

2CLE-GNM-D

CLE-NL-D

—

Disconnect

60

2CLE-PDM-D

2CLE-GDM-E

CLE-DL-D

CLE-DF-D

Non-disconnect

60

2CLE-PNM-E

2CLE-GNM-E

CLE-NL-E

—

Disconnect

60

2CLE-PDM-E

2CLE-GDM-E

CLE-DL-E

CLE-DF-E

Non-disconnect

60

5HLE-PNM-D

5HLE-GNM-D

CLE-NL-D

—

Disconnect

60

5HLE-PDM-D

5HLE-GDM-E

CLE-DL-D

CLE-DF-D

Non-disconnect

60

5HLE-PNM-E

5HLE-GNM-E

CLE-NL-E

—

Disconnect

60

5HLE-PDM-E

5HLE-GDM-E

CLE-DL-E

CLE-DF-E

Non-disconnect

60

5CLE-PNM-D

5CLE-GNM-D

CLE-NL-D

—

Disconnect

60

5CLE-PDM-D

5CLE-GDM-D

CLE-DL-D

CLE-DF-D

390–450

5.5 (CLS)

30–230

390–480

5.5 (LCLS)

70–230

390–450

8.3

75

8CLE-PDM-D

8CLE-GDM-D

CLE-DL-D

CLE-DF-D

Non-disconnect

60

5CLE-PNM-E

5CLE-GNM-E

CLE-NL-E

—

Disconnect

60

5CLE-PDM-E

5CLE-GDM-E

CLE-DL-E

CLE-DF-E

75

8CLE-PDM-E

8CLE-PDM-E

CLE-DL-E

CLE-DF-E

75

8HLE-PNM-D

8HLE-GNM-D

CLE-NL-D

—

70–100

Non-disconnect

130–230

Disconnect

75

8HLE-PDM-D

8HLE-GDM-D

CLE-DL-D

CLE-DF-D

7.2

390–450

Non-disconnect

75

8HLE-PDM-E

8HLE-GNM-E

CLE-NL-E

—

Disconnect

75

8HLE-PDM-E

8HLE-GDM-E

CLE-DL-E

CLE-DF-E

8.3

15–30

Non-disconnect

75

8CLE-PNM-D

8CLE-GNM-D

CLE-NL-D

—

60–125

Disconnect

75

8CLE-PDM-D

8CLE-GDM-D

CLE-DL-D

CLS-DF-D

Non-disconnect

75

8CLE-PNM-E

8CLE-GNM-E

CLE-NL-E

—

Disconnect

75

8CLE-PDM-E

8CLE-GDM-E

CLE-DL-E

CLE-DF-E

150–225

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Note 1 Disconnect only.

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-121

3.5 3 3

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Current Limiting Fuses

Type CLPT

Indicating

3

Type CLPT Current Limiting Fuses 2.475 kV Maximum (2.4 kV Nominal) Performance Curves Current Rating (Amperes)

Interrupting Rating rms (kA Sym.)

Diameter

Clip Center

Length

Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)

3

0.25E

63

0.81 (20.6)

—

4.50 (114.3)

0.25 (0.11)

56357202

59883702

63933702

2NCLPT-.25E

0.5E

63

0.81 (20.6)

—

4.50 (114.3)

0.25 (0.11)

56357202

59883702

63933702

2NCLPT-.5E

1E

40

0.81 (20.6)

—

4.50 (114.3)

0.25 (0.11)

56357202

59883702

63933702

3

2NCLPT-1E

2E

40

0.81 (20.6)

—

4.50 (114.3)

0.25 (0.11)

56357202

59883702

63933702

2NCLPT-2E

3

5E

25

0.81 (20.6)

—

4.50 (114.3)

0.25 (0.11)

56357202

59883702

63933702

2NCLPT-5E

3

Note Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm).

3

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V4-T3-122

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

Minimum Melting Time

Total Clearing Time

Peak LetThrough Current

Catalog Number

3.5

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Current Limiting Fuses

Type CLPT Current Limiting Fuses 5.5 kV Maximum (4.8 kV Nominal)

3

Performance Curves Current Rating (Amperes) Non-Indicating

Indicating

Interrupting Rating rms (kA Sym.)

Diameter

Clip Center

Length

Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)

Minimum Melting Time

Total Clearing Time

Peak LetThrough Current

Catalog Number

Non-Indicating

3 3 3

0.5E

63

0.81 (20.6)

—

5.63 (143.0)

0.25 (0.11)

66702402

66702502

66704101

5NCLPT-.5E

1E

63

0.81 (20.6)

—

5.63 (143.0)

0.25 (0.11)

66702402

66702502

66704101

5NCLPT-1E

2E

63

0.81 (20.6)

—

5.63 (143.0)

0.25 (0.11)

66702402

66702502

66704101

5NCLPT-2E

3E

63

0.81 (20.6)

—

5.63 (143.0)

0.25 (0.11)

66702402

66702502

66704101

5NCLPT-3E

4E

63

0.81 (20.6)

—

5.63 (143.0)

0.25 (0.11)

66702402

66702502

66704101

5NCLPT-4E

5E

63

0.81 (20.6)

—

5.63 (143.0)

0.25 (0.11)

66702402

66702502

66704101

5NCLPT-5E

0.5E

50

1.00 (25.4)

—

5.63 (143.0)

0.25 (0.11)

66702402

66702502

66704101

317B487H02

1E

50

1.00 (25.4)

—

5.63 (143.0)

0.25 (0.11)

66702402

66702502

66704101

317B487H06

2E

50

1.00 (25.4)

—

5.63 (143.0)

0.25 (0.11)

66702402

66702502

66704101

317B487H03

3E

50

1.00 (25.4)

—

5.63 (143.0)

0.25 (0.11)

66702402

66702502

66704101

317B487H04

5E

50

1.00 (25.4)

—

5.63 (143.0)

0.25 (0.11)

66702402

66702502

66704101

317B487H05

0.5E

63

1.60 (40.6)

8.10 (205.7)

9.50 (241.3)

1.2 (0.54)

70548302

70548402

63934002

5NCLPT-.5E-A

1E

63

1.60 (40.6)

8.10 (205.7)

9.50 (241.3)

1.2 (0.54)

70548302

70548402

63934002

5NCLPT-1E-A

2E

63

1.60 (40.6)

8.10 (205.7)

9.50 (241.3)

1.2 (0.54)

70548302

70548402

63934002

5NCLPT-2E-A

3E

63

1.60 (40.6)

8.10 (205.7)

9.50 (241.3)

1.2 (0.54)

70548302

70548402

63934002

5NCLPT-3E-A

5E

63

1.60 (40.6)

8.10 (205.7)

9.50 (241.3)

1.2 (0.54)

70548302

70548402

63934002

5NCLPT-5E-A

10E

63

1.60 (40.6)

8.10 (205.7)

9.50 (241.3)

1.2 (0.54)

70548302

70548402

63934002

5NCLPT-10E-A

3

80

1.60 (40.6)

8.10 (205.7)

9.50 (241.3)

1.2 (0.54)

56353206

56353306

63934001

5CLPT-.5E

3

Indicating 0.5E 1E

80

1.60 (40.6)

8.10 (205.7)

9.50 (241.3)

1.2 (0.54)

56353206

56353306

63934001

5CLPT-1E

1.5E

80

1.60 (40.6)

8.10 (205.7)

9.50 (241.3)

1.2 (0.54)

56353206

56353306

63934001

5CLPT-1.5E

3E

80

1.60 (40.6)

8.10 (205.7)

9.50 (241.3)

1.2 (0.54)

56353206

56353306

63934001

5CLPT-3E

5E

80

1.60 (40.6)

8.10 (205.7)

9.50 (241.3)

1.2 (0.54)

56353206

56353306

63934001

5CLPT-5E

10E

80

1.60 (40.6)

8.10 (205.7)

9.50 (241.3)

1.2 (0.54)

56353206

56353306

63934001

5CLPT-10E

End Fittings (Disconnect Only)

Porcelain Insulator

Glass-Polyester Insulator

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Non-disconnect

60

5CLPT-PNM-A

5CLPT-GNM-A

CLPT-NL

—

Disconnect

60

5CLPT-PDM-A

5CLPT-GDM-A

CLPT-DL

CLPT-DF

Non-disconnect

60

5CLPT-PNM-B

5CLPT-GNM-B

CLPT-NL

—

Disconnect

60

5CLPT-PDM-B

5CLPT-GDM-B

CLPT-DL

CLPT-DF

Fuse Mounting Type 1

0.5–2

3–10

Live Parts (Including End Fittings) 2

Voltage BIL (kV)

Ampere Rating

3 3 3 3 3 3 3

3 3 3 3

Type CLPT Mountings and Hardware 5.5 kV Maximum (4.8 kV Nominal) 3 Mounting (Including Live Parts, End Fittings) 2

3

Notes 1 See Page V4-T3-135 for diagram of typical mounting. 2 End fittings supplied only when required. 3 Refers only to 5CLPT and 5NCLPT-A fuses only.

3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm).

3 3 3 3 3 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-123

3.5

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Current Limiting Fuses

3

Type CLPT Current Limiting Fuses 8.3 kV Maximum (7.2 kV Nominal)

3

Current Rating (Amperes)

3

Performance Curves

Non-Indicating

3

Interrupting Rating rms (kA Sym.)

Diameter

Clip Center

Length

Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)

0.81 (20.6)

—

8.00 (203.2)

0.25 (0.11)

Minimum Melting Time

Total Clearing Time

Peak LetThrough Current

Catalog Number

56357206

59883706

63933704

8NCLPT-2E

Non-Indicating 2E

25

4E

25

0.81 (20.6)

—

8.00 (203.2)

0.25 (0.11)

56357206

59883706

63933704

8NCLPT-4E

3

10E

50

1.10 (27.9)

—

5.00 (127.0)

0.5 (0.23)

56357206

59883706

63933704

8NCLPT-0E

3

1E

50

1.10 (27.9)

—

5.00 (127.0)

0.5 (0.23)

56357206

59883706

63933704

8NCLPT-1E

5E

50

1.10 (27.9)

—

5.00 (127.0)

0.5 (0.23)

56357206

59883706

63933704

8NCLPT-5E

3

0.5E

50

1.60 (40.6)

8.10 (205.7)

9.50 (241.3)

1.5 (0.70)

70548303

70548403

63934002

8NCLPT-.5E-A

1E

50

1.60 (40.6)

8.10 (205.7)

9.50 (241.3)

1.5 (0.70)

70548303

70548403

63934002

8NCLPT-1E-A

3

2E

50

1.60 (40.6)

8.10 (205.7)

9.50 (241.3)

1.5 (0.70)

70548303

70548403

63934002

8NCLPT-2E-A

3E

50

1.60 (40.6)

8.10 (205.7)

9.50 (241.3)

1.5 (0.70)

70548303

70548403

63934002

8NCLPT-3E-B

3 3

Indicating

5E

50

1.60 (40.6)

11.50 (292.1) 12.90 (327.7)

1.6 (0.73)

70548303

70548403

63934002

8NCLPT-5E-B

10E

50

1.60 (40.6)

11.50 (292.1) 12.90 (327.7)

1.6 (0.73)

70548303

70548403

63934002

8NCLPT-10E-B

Indicating

3

.5E

80

1.60 (40.6)

8.10 (205.7)

9.50 (241.3)

1.5 (0.70)

56353206

56353306

63934001

8CLPT-.5E

3E

80

1.60 (40.6)

8.10 (205.7)

9.50 (241.3)

1.6 (0.73)

56353206

56353306

63934001

8CLPT-3E

3

5E

50

1.60 (40.6)

8.10 (205.7)

9.50 (241.3)

1.6 (0.73)

56353206

56353306

63934001

8CLPT-5E

10E

50

1.60 (40.6)

8.10 (205.7)

9.50 (241.3)

1.6 (0.73)

56353206

56353306

63934001

8CLPT-10E

3 3

Type CLPT Mountings and Hardware 8.3 kV Maximum (7.2 kV Nominal) 3

3

Mounting (Including Live Parts, End Fittings) 2

3 3 3

Fuse Mounting Type 1

Voltage BIL (kV)

Porcelain Insulator

Glass-Polyester Insulator

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

0.5–2

Non-disconnect

75

8CLPT-PNM-A

8CLPT-GNM-A

CLPT-NL

—

Disconnect

75

8CLPT-PDM-A

8CLPT-GDM-A

CLPT-DL

CLPT-DF

Non-disconnect

75

8CLPT-PNM-B

8CLPT-GNM-B

CLPT-NL

—

Disconnect

75

8CLPT-PDM-B

8CLPT-GDM-B

CLPT-DL

CLPT-DF

Notes 1 See Page V4-T3-135 for diagram of typical mounting. 2 End fittings supplied only when required. 3 Refers only to 8CLPT and 8NCLPT-A or -B fuses only.

3 3

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm).

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V4-T3-124

End Fittings (Disconnect Only)

Ampere Rating

3–10

3

Live Parts (Including End Fittings) 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

3.5

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Current Limiting Fuses

Type CLPT Current Limiting Fuses 15.5 kV Maximum (7.2 kV Nominal)

3

Performance Curves Current Rating (Amperes) Non-Indicating

Interrupting Rating rms (kA Sym.)

Diameter

Clip Center

Length

Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)

Minimum Melting Time

Total Clearing Time

Peak LetThrough Current

Catalog Number

Non-Indicating 0.5E

63

1.60 (40.6)

11.50 (292.1) 12.90 (327.7)

1.6 (0.73)

70548303

70548403

63934002

15NCLPT-.5E

1E

63

1.60 (40.6)

11.50 (292.1) 12.90 (327.7)

1.6 (0.73)

70548303

70548403

63934002

15NCLPT-1E

2E

63

1.60 (40.6)

11.50 (292.1) 12.90 (327.7)

1.6 (0.73)

70548303

70548403

63934002

15NCLPT-1.5E

3E

63

1.60 (40.6)

16.10 (408.9) 17.60 (447.0)

2 (0.91)

70548303

70548403

63934002

15NCLPT-3E

3 3 3 3

5E

63

1.60 (40.6)

16.10 (408.9) 17.60 (447.0)

2 (0.91)

70548303

70548403

63934002

15NCLPT-5E

10E

63

1.60 (40.6)

16.10 (408.9) 17.60 (447.0)

2 (0.91)

70548303

70548403

63934002

15NCLPT-10E

3

0.5E

80

1.60 (40.6)

11.50 (292.1) 12.90 (327.7)

1.6 (0.73)

56353206

56353306

63934001

15CLPT-.5E

1E

80

1.60 (40.6)

11.50 (292.1) 12.90 (327.7)

1.6 (0.73)

56353206

56353306

63934001

15CLPT-1E

3

2E

80

1.60 (40.6)

11.50 (292.1) 12.90 (327.7)

1.6 (0.73)

56353206

56353306

63934001

15CLPT-1.5E

3E

80

1.60 (40.6)

16.10 (408.9) 17.60 (447.0)

2 (0.91)

56353206

56353306

63934001

15CLPT-3E

Indicating Indicating

3

5E

80

1.60 (40.6)

16.10 (408.9) 17.60 (447.0)

2 (0.91)

56353206

56353306

63934001

15CLPT-5E

10E

50

1.60 (40.6)

16.10 (408.9) 17.60 (447.0)

2 (0.91)

56353206

56353306

63934001

15CLPT-10E

3 3

Glass-Polyester Insulator

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Non-disconnect

95

15CLPT-PNM-A

15CLPT-GNM-A

CLPT-NL

—

Disconnect

95

15CLPT-PDM-A

15CLPT-GDM-A

CLPT-DL

CLPT-DF

Non-disconnect

95

15CLPT-PNM-B

15CLPT-GNM-B

CLPT-NL

CLPT-DF

Disconnect

95

15CLPT-PDM-B

15CLPT-GDM-B

CLPT-DL

—

0.5–2

3–10

End Fittings (Disconnect Only)

Porcelain Insulator

Fuse Mounting Type 1

3

Live Parts (Including End Fittings) 2

Voltage BIL (kV)

Ampere Rating

3 3

Type CLPT Mountings and Hardware 15.5 kV Maximum (14.4 kV Nominal) Mounting (Including Live Parts, End Fittings) 2

3

3 3 3

Notes 1 See Page V4-T3-135 for diagram of typical mounting. 2 End fittings supplied only when required.

3

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm).

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-125

3.5 3 3 3

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Current Limiting Fuses

Type CLPT Current Limiting Fuses 25.5 kV Maximum (23.0 kV Nominal) Current Rating (Amperes)

Interrupting Rating rms (kA Sym.)

0.5E 1E

Performance Curves

Length

Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)

Minimum Melting Time

Total Clearing Time

Peak Let-Through Current

Catalog Number

16.10 (408.9)

17.60 (447.0)

2 (0.91)

56353208

56353308

63933901

25CLPT-.5E

16.10 (408.9)

17.60 (447.0)

2 (0.91)

56353208

56353308

63933901

25CLPT-1E

Diameter

Clip Center

44

1.60 (40.6)

44

1.60 (40.6)

3 3 3 3

Type CLPT Mountings and Hardware 25.5 kV Maximum (23.0 kV Nominal) Mounting (Including Live Parts, End Fittings) 2

3 3 3 3

Fuse Mounting Type 1

Voltage BIL (kV)

Porcelain Insulator Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

0.5E–1E

Non-disconnect

150

25CLPT-PNM-A

—

25CLPT-NL

—

Disconnect

150

25CLPT-PDM-A

—

25CLPT-DL

CLPT-DF

Interrupting Rating rms (kA Sym.)

0.5E

44

Diameter

Clip Center

1.60 (40.6)

17.10 (434.3)

Performance Curves

Length

Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)

Minimum Melting Time

Total Clearing Time

Peak Let-Through Current

Catalog Number

18.60 (472.4)

2 (0.91)

56353208

56353308

63933901

38CLPT-.5E

Type CLPT Mountings and Hardware 38.0 kV Maximum (34.5 kV Nominal) Mounting (Including Live Parts, End Fittings) 2 Voltage BIL (kV)

3

Ampere Rating

Fuse Mounting Type 1

3

0.5E

Disconnect

—

Non-disconnect

—

3

Glass-Polyester Insulator

Type CLPT Current Limiting Fuses 38.0 kV Maximum (34.5 kV Nominal) Current Rating (Amperes)

3

3

End Fittings (Disconnect Only)

Ampere Rating

3 3

Live Parts (Including End Fittings) 2

End Fittings (Disconnect Only) Catalog Number

Porcelain Insulator

Glass-Polyester Insulator

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Not applicable

Not applicable

25CLPT-NL

CLPT-DF

Not applicable

Not applicable

25CLPT-DL

—

Notes 1 See Page V4-T3-135 for diagram of typical mounting. 2 End fittings supplied only when required. Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm).

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V4-T3-126

Live Parts (Including End Fittings) 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

3.5

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Current Limiting Fuses

Type CX

Type CX

3 3

Type CX Current Limiting Fuses 4.3 kV Maximum (2.4 kV Nominal) Current Interrupting Fuse Rating Barrel Rating rms Mounting (Amperes) Number (kA Sym.) Code Diameter

3

Length

Approximate Performance Curves Minimum Total Shipping Melting Clearing Weight Time Time Lbs (kg)

Peak Let-Through Current I2t

Catalog Number

Non-Indicating 18C

1

50

G

1.13 (28.7)

10.00 (254.0)

1 (0.45)

TC70544101 TC70544501

TC70544901 TC70545101

4CX-18C

25C

1

50

G

1.13 (28.7)

10.00 (254.0)

1 (0.45)

TC70544101 TC70544501

TC70544901 TC70545101

4CX-25C

35C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

1 (0.45)

TC70544101 TC70544501

TC70544901 TC70545101

4CX-35C

45C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544101 TC70544501

TC70544901 TC70545101

4CX-45C

50C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544101 TC70544501

TC70544901 TC70545101

4CX-50C

60C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544102 TC70544502

TC70544901 TC70545101

4CX-60C

65C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544102 TC70544501

TC70544901 TC70545101

4CX-65C

75C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544102 TC70544501

TC70544901 TC70545101

4CX-75C

80C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544102 TC70544502

TC70544901 TC70545101

4CX-80C

100C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544102 TC70544501

TC70544901 TC70545101

4CX-100C

Indicating 18C

1

50

G

1.13 (28.7)

10.00 (254.0)

1 (0.45)

TC70544101 TC70544501

TC70544901 TC70545101

4CXI-18C

25C

1

50

G

1.13 (28.7)

10.00 (254.0)

1 (0.45)

TC70544101 TC70544501

TC70544901 TC70545101

4CXI-25C

35C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

1 (0.45)

TC70544101 TC70544501

TC70544901 TC70545101

4CXI-35C

45C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544101 TC70544501

TC70544901 TC70545101

4CXI-45C

50C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544101 TC70544501

TC70544901 TC70545101

4CXI-50C

60C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544102 TC70544502

TC70544901 TC70545101

4CXI-60C

65C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544102 TC70544501

TC70544901 TC70545101

4CXI-65C

75C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544102 TC70544501

TC70544901 TC70545101

4CXI-75C

80C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544102 TC70544502

TC70544901 TC70545101

4CXI-80C

100C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544102 TC70544501

TC70544901 TC70545101

4CXI-100C

Ampere Rating 18C–100C

Fuse Mounting Type 1

Size

Voltage BIL (kV)

Porcelain Insulator

Glass-Polyester Insulator

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Type CX Mountings and Hardware 4.3 kV Maximum (2.4 kV Nominal) Mounting (Including Live Parts, End Fittings) 2

3

Live Parts (Including End Fittings) 2

End Fittings (Disconnect Only)

3

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

3

Non-disconnect

A

60

—

5CX-GNM-G

CX-NL

—

Disconnect

A

60

—

5CX-GDM-G

CX-DL

CX-DF

3 3

Notes 1 See Page V4-T3-135 for diagram of typical mounting. 2 End fittings supplied only when required.

3

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm).

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-127

3.5 3

Type CX

3

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Current Limiting Fuses

Type CX Current Limiting Fuses 5.5 kV Maximum (4.8 kV Nominal) Current Interrupting Fuse Rating Barrel Rating rms Mounting (Amperes) Number (kA Sym.) Code Diameter

3

Performance Curves

Length

Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)

Minimum Melting Time

Total Clearing Time

Peak Let-Through Current I2t

Catalog Number

Non-Indicating

3

10C

1

50

G

1.13 (28.7)

10.00 (254.0)

1 (0.45)

TC70544201 TC70544601

TC70544902 TC70545201

5CX-10C

12C

1

50

G

1.13 (28.7)

10.00 (254.0)

1 (0.45)

TC70544201 TC70544601

TC70544902 TC70545201

5CX-12C

3

18C

1

50

G

1.13 (28.7)

10.00 (254.0)

1 (0.45)

TC70544201 TC70544601

TC70544902 TC70545201

5CX-18C

3

20C

1

50

G

1.13 (28.7)

10.00 (254.0)

1 (0.45)

TC70544201 TC70544601

TC70544902 TC70545201

5CX-20C

21C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544202 TC70544602

TC70544902 TC70545201

5CX-21C

3

25C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544201 TC70544601

TC70544902 TC70545201

5CX-25C

30C

1

50

G

1.13 (28.7)

10.00 (254.0)

1 (0.45)

TC70544201 TC70544601

TC70544902 TC70545201

5CX-30C

3

35C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544202 TC70544602

TC70544902 TC70545201

5CX-35C

40C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544201 TC70544601

TC70544902 TC70545201

5CX-40C

3

50C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544201 TC70544601

TC70544902 TC70545201

5CX-50C

3

60C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544202 TC70544602

TC70544902 TC70545201

5CX-60C

65C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544201 TC70544601

TC70544902 TC70545201

5CX-65C

3

75C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544201 TC70544601

TC70544902 TC70545201

5CX-75C

3

10C

1

50

G

1.13 (28.7)

10.00 (254.0)

1 (0.45)

TC70544201 TC70544601

TC70544902 TC70545201

5CXI-10C

12C

1

50

G

1.13 (28.7)

10.00 (254.0)

1 (0.45)

TC70544201 TC70544601

TC70544902 TC70545201

5CXI-12C

3

18C

1

50

G

1.13 (28.7)

10.00 (254.0)

1 (0.45)

TC70544201 TC70544601

TC70544902 TC70545201

5CXI-18C

3

20C

1

50

G

1.13 (28.7)

10.00 (254.0)

1 (0.45)

TC70544201 TC70544601

TC70544902 TC70545201

5CXI-20C

21C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544202 TC70544602

TC70544902 TC70545201

5CXI-21C

3

25C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544201 TC70544601

TC70544902 TC70545201

5CXI-25C

30C

1

50

G

1.13 (28.7)

10.00 (254.0)

1 (0.45)

TC70544201 TC70544601

TC70544902 TC70545201

5CXI-30C

3

35C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544202 TC70544602

TC70544902 TC70545201

5CXI-35C

3

40C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544201 TC70544601

TC70544902 TC70545201

5CXI-40C

50C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544201 TC70544601

TC70544902 TC70545201

5CXI-50C

3

60C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544202 TC70544602

TC70544902 TC70545201

5CXI-60C

65C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544201 TC70544601

TC70544902 TC70545201

5CXI-65C

3

75C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544201 TC70544601

TC70544902 TC70545201

5CXI-75C

Indicating

3

Type CX Mountings and Hardware 5.5 kV Maximum (4.8 kV Nominal)

3

Mounting (Including Live Parts, End Fittings) 2

3

Ampere Rating

3

10C–75C

3

Fuse Mounting Type 1

Size

Voltage BIL (kV)

Porcelain Insulator

Glass-Polyester Insulator

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

A

60

—

5CX-GNM-G

CX-NL

—

A

60

—

5CX-GDM-G

CX-DL

CX-DF

3 3 3 3 V4-T3-128

Catalog Number

Non-disconnect

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm).

3

End Fittings (Disconnect Only)

Disconnect

Notes 1 See Page V4-T3-135 for diagram of typical mounting. 2 End fittings supplied only when required.

3

Live Parts (Including End Fittings) 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

3.5

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Current Limiting Fuses

Type CX

Type CX Current Limiting Fuses 8.3 kV Maximum (7.2 kV Nominal) Current Interrupting Fuse Rating Barrel Rating rms Mounting (Amperes) Number (kA Sym.) Code Diameter

3

Performance Curves

Length

Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)

Minimum Melting Time

Total Clearing Time

Peak Let-Through Current I2t

Catalog Number

Non-Indicating 3.5C

1

50

G

1.13 (28.7)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544302 TC70544702

TC70545001 TC70545301

8CX-3.5C

4C

1

50

G

1.13 (28.7)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544302 TC70544702

TC70545001 TC70545301

8CX-4C

4.5C

1

50

G

1.13 (28.7)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544301 TC70544701

TC70545001 TC70545301

8CX-4.5C

6C

1

50

G

1.13 (28.7)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544301 TC70544701

TC70545001 TC70545301

8CX-6C

7C

1

50

G

1.13 (28.7)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544302 TC70544702

TC70545001 TC70545301

8CX-7C

8C

1

50

G

1.13 (28.7)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544301 TC70544701

TC70545001 TC70545301

8CX-8C

10C

1

50

G

1.13 (28.7)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544301 TC70544701

TC70545001 TC70545301

8CX-10C

12C

1

50

G

1.13 (28.7)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544301 TC70544701

TC70545001 TC70545301

8CX-12C

15C

1

50

G

1.13 (28.7)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544302 TC70544702

TC70545001 TC70545301

8CX-15C

18C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544301 TC70544701

TC70545001 TC70545301

8CX-18C

20C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544301 TC70544701

TC70545001 TC70545301

8CX-20C

25C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544301 TC70544701

TC70545001 TC70545301

8CX-25C

30C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544301 TC70544701

TC70545001 TC70545301

8CX-30C

35C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544302 TC70544702

TC70545001 TC70545301

8CX-35C

40C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544301 TC70544701

TC70545001 TC70545301

8CX-40C

Indicating 3.5C

1

50

G

1.13 (28.7)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544302 TC70544702

TC70545001 TC70545301

8CXI-3.5C

4C

1

50

G

1.13 (28.7)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544302 TC70544702

TC70545001 TC70545301

8CXI-4C

4.5C

1

50

G

1.13 (28.7)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544301 TC70544701

TC70545001 TC70545301

8CXI-4.5C

6C

1

50

G

1.13 (28.7)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544301 TC70544701

TC70545001 TC70545301

8CXI-6C

7C

1

50

G

1.13 (28.7)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544302 TC70544702

TC70545001 TC70545301

8CXI-7C

8C

1

50

G

1.13 (28.7)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544301 TC70544701

TC70545001 TC70545301

8CXI-8C

10C

1

50

G

1.13 (28.7)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544301 TC70544701

TC70545001 TC70545301

8CXI-10C

12C

1

50

G

1.13 (28.7)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544301 TC70544701

TC70545001 TC70545301

8CXI-12C

15C

1

50

G

1.13 (28.7)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544302 TC70544702

TC70545001 TC70545301

8CXI-15C

18C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544301 TC70544701

TC70545001 TC70545301

8CXI-18C

20C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544301 TC70544701

TC70545001 TC70545301

8CXI-20C

25C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544301 TC70544701

TC70545001 TC70545301

8CXI-25C

30C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544301 TC70544701

TC70545001 TC70545301

8CXI-30C

35C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544302 TC70544702

TC70545001 TC70545301

8CXI-35C

40C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

10.00 (254.0)

2 (0.91)

TC70544301 TC70544701

TC70545001 TC70545301

8CXI-40C

Ampere Rating 3.5C–40C

Fuse Mounting Type 1

Size

Voltage BIL (kV)

Porcelain Insulator

Glass-Polyester Insulator

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Type CX Mountings and Hardware 8.3 kV Maximum (7.2 kV Nominal) Mounting (Including Live Parts, End Fittings) 2

3

Live Parts (Including End Fittings) 2

End Fittings (Disconnect Only)

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Non-disconnect

B

75

—

8CX-GNM-G

CX-NL

—

Disconnect

B

75

—

8CX-GDM-G

CX-DL

CX-DF

3 3 3 3

Notes 1 See Page V4-T3-135 for diagram of typical mounting. 2 End fittings supplied only when required.

3 3

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm).

3 3 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-129

3.5 3

Type CX

3

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Current Limiting Fuses

Type CX Current Limiting Fuses 15.5 kV Maximum (14.4 kV Nominal) Current Interrupting Fuse Rating Barrel Rating rms Mounting (Amperes) Number (kA Sym.) Code Diameter

3

Performance Curves

Length

Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)

Minimum Melting Time

Total Clearing Time

Peak Let-Through Current I2t

Catalog Number

Non-Indicating

3

4C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

14.30 (363.2)

2 (0.91)

TC70544401 TC70544801

TC70545002 TC70545401

15CX-4C

6C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

14.30 (363.2)

2 (0.91)

TC70544401 TC70544801

TC70545002 TC70545401

15CX-6C

3

7C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

14.30 (363.2)

2 (0.91)

TC70544402 TC70544802

TC70545002 TC70545401

15CX-7C

3

8C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

14.30 (363.2)

2 (0.91)

TC70544401 TC70544801

TC70545002 TC70545401

15CX-8C

10C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

14.30 (363.2)

2 (0.91)

TC70544401 TC70544801

TC70545002 TC70545401

15CX-10C

3

12C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

14.30 (363.2)

2 (0.91)

TC70544401 TC70544801

TC70545002 TC70545401

15CX-12C

15C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

14.30 (363.2)

2 (0.91)

TC70544402 TC70544802

TC70545002 TC70545401

15CX-15C

3

18C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

14.30 (363.2)

2 (0.91)

TC70544401 TC70544801

TC70545002 TC70545401

15CX-18C

20C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

14.30 (363.2)

2 (0.91)

TC70544401 TC70544801

TC70545002 TC70545401

15CX-20C

3

25C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

14.30 (363.2)

2 (0.91)

TC70544401 TC70544801

TC70545002 TC70545401

15CX-25C

3

30C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

14.30 (363.2)

2 (0.91)

TC70544401 TC70544801

TC70545002 TC70545401

15CX-30C

40C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

14.30 (363.2)

2 (0.91)

TC70544401 TC70544801

TC70545002 TC70545401

15CX-40C

3

Indicating 4C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

14.30 (363.2)

2 (0.91)

TC70544401 TC70544801

TC70545002 TC70545401

15CXI-4C

3

6C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

14.30 (363.2)

2 (0.91)

TC70544401 TC70544801

TC70545002 TC70545401

15CXI-6C

7C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

14.30 (363.2)

2 (0.91)

TC70544402 TC70544802

TC70545002 TC70545401

15CXI-7C

3

8C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

14.30 (363.2)

2 (0.91)

TC70544401 TC70544801

TC70545002 TC70545401

15CXI-8C

3

10C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

14.30 (363.2)

2 (0.91)

TC70544401 TC70544801

TC70545002 TC70545401

15CXI-10C

12C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

14.30 (363.2)

2 (0.91)

TC70544401 TC70544801

TC70545002 TC70545401

15CXI-12C

3

15C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

14.30 (363.2)

2 (0.91)

TC70544402 TC70544802

TC70545002 TC70545401

15CXI-15C

18C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

14.30 (363.2)

2 (0.91)

TC70544401 TC70544801

TC70545002 TC70545401

15CXI-18C

3

20C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

14.30 (363.2)

2 (0.91)

TC70544401 TC70544801

TC70545002 TC70545401

15CXI-20C

3

25C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

14.30 (363.2)

2 (0.91)

TC70544401 TC70544801

TC70545002 TC70545401

15CXI-25C

30C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

14.30 (363.2)

2 (0.91)

TC70544401 TC70544801

TC70545002 TC70545401

15CXI-30C

40C

1

50

G

2.00 (50.8)

14.30 (363.2)

2 (0.91)

TC70544401 TC70544801

TC70545002 TC70545401

15CXI-40C

3 3

Type CX Mountings and Hardware 15.5 kV Maximum (14.4 kV Nominal) Mounting (Including Live Parts, End Fittings) 2

3

Live Parts (Including End Fittings) 2

End Fittings (Disconnect Only) Catalog Number

3

Ampere Rating

Fuse Mounting Type 1

Voltage BIL (kV)

Porcelain Insulator

Glass-Polyester Insulator

Size

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

3

4C–40C

Non-disconnect

C

95

—

15CX-GNM-G

CX-NL

—

Disconnect

C

95

—

15CX-GDM-G

CX-DL

CX-DF

3

Notes 1 See Page V4-T3-135 for diagram of typical mounting. 2 End fittings supplied only when required.

3

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm).

3 3 3 3 3 3 V4-T3-130

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

3.5

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Current Limiting Fuses

Type CXN

Type CXN

3 3

Type CXN Current Limiting Fuses 8.3 kV Maximum (7.2 kV Nominal)

3

Length

Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)

Performance Curves Minimum Melting Time

Total Clearing Time

Peak Let-Through Current

Catalog Number

3

18.80 (477.5)

8 (3.63)

66675102

66675202

66664902

8CXN-60C

3.00 (76.2)

18.80 (477.5)

8 (3.63)

66675102

66675202

66664902

8CXN-100C

3

50

4.00 (101.6)

18.80 (477.5)

14 (6.36)

66675102

66675202

66664902

8CXN-125C

50

4.00 (101.6)

18.80 (477.5)

14 (6.36)

66675102

66675202

66664902

8CXN-150C

1

50

4.00 (101.6)

18.80 (477.5)

14 (6.36)

66675102

66675202

66664902

8CXN-200C

1

50

4.00 (101.6)

18.80 (477.5)

14 (6.36)

66675102

66675202

66664902

8CXN-250C

120C

2

50

3.00 (76.2)

18.80 (477.5)

16 (7.26)

66675104

66675204

66664902

2 X 60C

8CXN-120C

200C

2

50

3.00 (76.2)

18.80 (477.5)

16 (7.26)

66675104

66675204

66664902

2 X 100C

8CXN-200C

250C

2

50

3.00 (76.2)

18.80 (477.5)

16 (7.26)

66675104

66675204

66664902

2 X 125C

8CXN-250C

300C

2

50

4.00 (101.6)

18.80 (477.5)

28 (12.71)

66675104

66675204

66664902

2 X 150C

8CXN-300C

Current Rating (Amperes)

Barrel Number

Interrupting Rating rms (kA Sym.)

Diameter

60C

1

50

3.00 (76.2)

100C

1

50

125C

1

150C

1

200C 250C

Ampere Rating 60C–100C Single barrel

125C–250C Single barrel

Glass Polyester Insulator Mounting (Including Live Parts, End Fittings) 2

Live Parts 2

End Fittings (Disconnect Only)

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

95

15CXN-GNM-D

15CXN-NL-D

—

Non-disconnect

95

15CXN-GNM-G

15CXN-NL-G

—

Disconnect

95

15CXN-GDM-G

15CXN-DL-G

15CXN-DF-G

Voltage LIWL (BIL)

Non-disconnect

3 3 3 3 3

Type CXN Mountings and Hardware 8.3 kV Maximum (7.2 kV Nominal) Fuse Mounting Type 1

3

3 3 3 3

Non-disconnect

95

15CXN-GNM-F

15CXN-NL-F

—

Non-disconnect

95

15CXN-GNM-G

15CXN-NL-G

—

Disconnect

95

25CXN-GDM-G

15CXN-DL-G

15CXN-DF-G

120C, 200C Double barrel

Non-disconnect

95

15CXN-GNM-D

15CXN-NL-D

—

3

250C, 300C Double barrel

Non-disconnect

95

15CXN-GNM-F

15CXN-NL-F

—

3

3

3

Notes 1 See Page V4-T3-135 for diagram of typical mounting. 2 End fittings supplied only when required.

3

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm).

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-131

3.5 3

Type CXN

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Current Limiting Fuses

Type CXN Current Limiting Fuses 15.5 kV Maximum (14.4 kV Nominal) Performance Curves

Length

Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)

Minimum Melting Time

Total Clearing Time

Peak Let-Through Current

Catalog Number

3.00 (76.2)

18.80 (477.5)

8 (3.63)

66674802

66675002

66665002

15CXN-45C

3.00 (76.2)

18.80 (477.5)

8 (3.63)

66674802

66675002

66665002

15CXN-60C

50

4.00 (101.6)

18.80 (477.5)

14 (6.36)

66674802

66675002

66665002

15CXN-75C

50

4.00 (101.6)

18.80 (477.5)

14 (6.36)

66674802

66675002

66665002

15CXN-85C

1

50

4.00 (101.6)

18.80 (477.5)

14 (6.36)

66674802

66675002

66665002

90C

2

50

3.00 (76.2)

18.80 (477.5)

16 (7.26)

66674804

66675004

66665002

2 X 45C

15CXN-90C

3

120C

2

50

3.00 (76.2)

18.80 (477.5)

16 (7.26)

66674804

66675004

66665002

2 X 60C

15CXN-120C

150C

2

50

4.00 (101.6)

18.80 (477.5)

28 (12.71)

66674804

66675004

66665002

2 X 75C

15CXN-150C

3

175C

2

50

4.00 (101.6)

18.80 (477.5)

28 (12.71)

66674804

66675004

66665002

2 X 85C

15CXN-175C

3

Current Rating (Amperes)

Barrel Number

Interrupting Rating rms (kA Sym.)

Diameter

45C

1

50

60C

1

50

75C

1

3

85C

1

3

100C

3 3

3

15CXN-100C

Type CXN Mountings and Hardware 15.5 kV Maximum (14.4 kV Nominal)

3

Fuse Mounting Type 1

Voltage LIWL (BIL)

Glass Polyester Insulator Mounting (Including Live Parts, End Fittings) 2

Live Parts 2

End Fittings (Disconnect Only

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Non-disconnect

95

15CXN-GNM-D

15CXN-NL-D

—

Non-disconnect

95

15CXN-GNM-G

15CXN-NL-G

—

Disconnect

95

15CXN-GDM-G

15CXN-DL-G

15CXN-DF-G

Non-disconnect

95

15CXN-GNM-F

15CXN-NL-F

—

Non-disconnect

95

15CXN-GNM-G

15CXN-NL-G

—

Disconnect

95

25CXN-GDM-G

15CXN-DL-G

15CXN-DF-G

3

90C, 120C Double barrel

Non-disconnect

95

15CXN-GNM-D

15CXN-NL-D

—

3

150C, 175C Double barrel

Non-disconnect

95

15CXN-GNM-F

15CXN-NL-F

—

3

Notes 1 See Page V4-T3-135 for diagram of typical mounting. 2 End fittings supplied only when required.

3

Ampere Rating 45C–60C Single barrel

3 3

75C–100C Single barrel

3

3

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm).

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V4-T3-132

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

3.5

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Current Limiting Fuses

Type CXF

3 3

Type CXF Indicated Full-Range Current-Limiting Fuses Mountings and Hardware Maximum Design Voltage (kV) 5.5

10

8.3

17.2

15.5

23

Ampere Rating

Mounting Fuse Mounting Type

Live Parts

End Fittings

Voltage BIL (kV)

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

80–100

Non-disconnect

—

—

CXN-NL-G

—

125–200

Disconnect

—

—

CXN-GL-G

CXN-DF-G

6–18

Non-disconnect

75

8CX-GNM-G

CX-NL

—

20–50

Disconnect

75

8CX-GDM-G

CX-DL

CX-DF

65–80

Non-disconnect

—

—

CXN-NL-G

—

100–125

Disconnect

—

—

CXN-DL-G

CXN-DF-G

6–18

Non-disconnect

95

15CX-GNM-G

CX-NL

—

20–50

Disconnect

95

15CX-GDM-G

CX-DL

CX-DF

65–80

Non-disconnect

—

—

CXN-NL-G

—

100

Disconnect

—

—

CXN-DL-G

CXN-DF-G

6–18

Non-disconnect

—

—

CX-NL

—

20–50

Disconnect

—

—

CX-DL

CX-DF

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-133

3.5 3 3

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Current Limiting Fuses

Type DSL

6DSL-B1600

3

Type DSL Low Voltage Current Limiting Fuse Interrupting Rating rms (kA Sym.)

Application Data (Time Current Curves)

Approximate Ship Wt. Lbs (kg)

Catalog Number

200

33–792 (2)

3.00 (1.4)

6DSL-A150

200

33–792 (2)

3.00 (1.4)

6DSL-A200

200

33–792 (2)

3.00 (1.4)

6DSL-A250

3

200

33–792 (2)

3.00 (1.4)

6DSL-A300

3

200

33–792 (2)

3.00 (1.4)

6DSL-A400

200

33–792 (2)

3.00 (1.4)

6DSL-A600

3

200

33–792 (2)

3.00 (1.4)

6DSL-A800

200

33–792 (2)

4.00 (1.8)

6DSL-B1200

3

200

33–792 (2)

4.00 (1.8)

6DSL-B1600

200

33–792 (2)

4.00 (1.8)

6DSL-B2000

3

200

33–792 (3)

5.50 (2.5)

6DSL-C800

3

200

33–792 (3)

5.50 (2.5)

6DSL-C1000

200

33–792 (3)

5.50 (2.5)

6DSL-C1200

3

200

33–792 (3)

5.50 (2.5)

6DSL-C1600

200

33–792 (3)

5.50 (2.5)

6DSL-C2000

3

200

33–792 (3)

8.50 (3.9)

6DSL-D2500

3

200

33–792 (3)

8.50 (3.9)

6DSL-D3000

200

33–792

20.00 (9.1)

6DSL-E2500

3

200

33–792

20.00 (9.1)

6DSL-E3000

200

33–792

20.00 (9.1)

6DSL-E4000

3

200

33–792

24.00 (10.9)

6DSL-F5000

Fuse Type/Voltage

3

Type DSL fuse units 600V nominal

3

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V4-T3-134

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Current Limiting Fuses

3.5

Typical Fuse Mounting for Current Limiting Fuses Single Barrel Disconnect with 2.00-Inch (50.8 mm) Diameter CLE Fuses

Non-Disconnect (CX)

Double-Barrel NonDisconnect All 2.00-Inch (50.8 mm) and 3.00-Inch (76.2 mm) Diameter CL Fuses

3 Non-Disconnect (15CXN-GNM-F and 15CXNGNM-D)

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Single Barrel Disconnect All 3.00-Inch (76.2 mm) Diameter CLE Fuses

3 Non-Disconnect (15CXNGNM-G)

Disconnect (CX)

Disconnect (15CXN-GNM-F)

3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Double Barrel Disconnect All 3.00-Inch (76.2 mm) Diameter CLE Fuses

Single-Barrel NonDisconnect All 2.00-Inch (50.8 mm) and 3.00-Inch (76.2 mm) Diameter CL Fuses

3 3

Disconnect (15CXN-GNM-G)

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com

V4-T3-135

Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions Effective Date: November 1, 2008

Contents

Eaton Terms & Conditions

Description

Page

Terms and Conditions of Sale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terms of Payment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Freight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V4-A1-1 V4-A1-2 V4-A1-3 V4-A1-3

Selling Policy (Supersedes Selling Policy 25-000, dated February 20, 2006) Terms and Conditions of Sale The Terms and Conditions of Sale set forth herein, and any supplements which may be attached hereto, constitute the full and final expression of the contract for the sale of products or services (hereinafter referred to as Product(s) or Services by Eaton Corporation (hereinafter referred to as Seller) to the Buyer, and supersedes all prior quotations, purchase orders, correspondence or communications whether written or oral between the Seller and the Buyer. Notwithstanding any contrary language in the Buyer’s purchase order, correspondence or other form of acknowledgment, Buyer shall be bound by these Terms and Conditions of Sale when it sends a purchase order or otherwise indicates acceptance of this contract, or when it accepts delivery from Seller of the Products or Services.

THE CONTRACT FOR SALE OF THE PRODUCTS OR SERVICES IS EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE STATED HEREIN. ANY ADDITIONAL OR DIFFERENT TERMS PROPOSED BY BUYER ARE REJECTED UNLESS EXPRESSLY AGREED TO IN WRITING BY SELLER. No contract shall exist except as herein provided. Complete Agreement No amendment or modification hereto nor any statement, representation or warranty not contained herein shall be binding on the Seller unless made in writing by an authorized representative of the Seller. Prior dealings, usage of the trade or a course of performance shall not be relevant to determine the meaning of this contract even though the accepting or acquiescing party had knowledge of the nature of the performance and opportunity for objection.

Quotations Written quotations are valid for 30 days from its date unless otherwise stated in the quotation or terminated sooner by notice. Verbal quotations, unless accepted, expire the same day they are made. A complete signed order must be received by Seller within 20 calendar days of notification of award, otherwise the price and shipment will be subject to re-negotiation.

Volume 4—Circuit Protection

CA08100005E—April 2015

Termination and Cancellation Any order may be terminated by the Buyer only by written notice and upon payment of reasonable termination charges, including all costs plus profit. Seller shall have the right to cancel any order at any time by written notice if Buyer breaches any of the terms hereof, becomes the subject of any proceeding under state or federal law for the relief of debtors, or otherwise becomes insolvent or bankrupt, generally does not pay its debts as they become due or makes an assignment for the benefit of creditors.

www.eaton.com

V4-A1-1

Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions Effective Date: November 1, 2008

Prices All prices are subject to change without notice. In the event of a price change, the effective date of the change will be the date of the new price or discount sheet, letter or telegram. All quotations made or orders accepted after the effective date will be on the new basis. For existing orders, the price of the unshipped portion of an order will be the price in effect at time of shipment. Price Policy—Products and Services When prices are quoted as firm for quoted shipment, they are firm provided the following conditions are met: 1. The order is released with complete engineering details. 2. Shipment of Products are made, and Services purchased are provided within the quoted lead time. 3. When drawings for approval are required for any Products, the drawings applicable to those Products must be returned within 30* calendar days from the date of the original mailing of the drawings by Seller. The return drawings must be released for manufacture and shipment and must be marked “APPROVED” or “APPROVED AS NOTED.” Drawing re-submittals which are required for any other reason than to correct Seller errors will not extend the 30-day period.

If the Buyer initiates or in any way causes delays in shipment, provision of Services or return of approval drawings beyond the periods stated above, the price of the Products or Services will be increased 1% per month or fraction thereof up to a maximum of 18 months from the date of the Buyer’s order. For delays resulting in shipment or provision of Services beyond 18 months from the date of the Buyer’s order, the price must be renegotiated. Price Policy—BLS Refer to Price Policy 25-050. Minimum Billing Orders less than $1,000 will be assessed a shipping and handling charge of 5% of the price of the order, with a minimum charge of $25.00 unless noted differently on Product discount sheets. Taxes The price does not include any taxes. Buyer shall be responsible for the payment of all taxes applicable to, or arising from the transaction, the Products, its sale, value, or use, or any Services performed in connection therewith regardless of the person or entity actually taxed.

Terms of Payment Products Acceptance of all orders is subject to the Buyer meeting Seller’s credit requirements. Terms of payment are subject to change for failure to meet such requirements. Seller reserves the right at any time to demand full or partial payment before proceeding with a contract of sale as a result of changes in the financial condition of the Buyer. Terms of Payment are either Net 30 days from the date of invoice of each shipment or carry a cash discount based on Product type. Specific payment terms for Products are outlined in the applicable Product discount schedules. Services Terms of payment are net within 30 days from date of invoice for orders amounting to less than $50,000.00. Terms of payment for orders exceeding $50,000.00 shall be made according to the following: 1. Twenty percent (20%) of order value with the purchase order payable 30 days from date of invoice. 2. Eighty percent (80%) of order value in equal monthly payments over the performance period payable 30 days from date of invoice.

* 60 days for orders through contractors to allow time for their review and approval before and after transmitting them to their customers.

V4-A1-2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection

CA08100005E—April 2015

www.eaton.com

Except for work performed (i) under a firm fixed price basis or (ii) pursuant to terms of a previously priced existing contract between Seller and Buyer, invoices for work performed by Seller shall have added and noted on each invoice a charge of 3% (over and above the price of the work) which is related to Seller compliance with present and proposed environmental, health, and safety regulations associated with prescribed requirements covering hazardous materials management and employee training, communications, personal protective equipment, documentation and record keeping associated therewith. Adequate Assurances If, in the judgment of Seller, the financial condition of the Buyer, at any time during the period of the contract, does not justify the terms of payment specified, Seller may require full or partial payment in advance. Delayed Payment If payments are not made in accordance with these terms, a service charge will, without prejudice to the right of Seller to immediate payment, be added in an amount equal to the lower of 1.5% per month or fraction thereof or the highest legal rate on the unpaid balance.

Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions Effective Date: November 1, 2008

Freight

Warranty

Freight policy will be listed on the Product discount sheets, or at option of Seller one of the following freight terms will be quoted.

Risk of Loss Risk of loss or damage to the Products shall pass to Buyer at the F.O.B. point.

F.O.B.—P/S—Frt./Ppd. and Invoiced Products are sold F.O.B. point of shipment freight prepaid and invoiced to the Buyer.

Concealed Damage Except in the event of F.O.B. destination shipments, Seller will not participate in any settlement of claims for concealed damage.

F.O.B.—P/S—Frt./Ppd. and Allowed Products sold are delivered F.O.B. point of shipment, freight prepaid and included in the price. F.O.B. Destination—Frt./Ppd. and Allowed At Buyer’s option, Seller will deliver the Products F.O.B. destination freight prepaid and 2% will be added to the net price. The term “freight prepaid” means that freight charges will be prepaid to the accessible common carrier delivery point nearest the destination for shipments within the United States and Puerto Rico unless noted differently on the Product discount sheets. For any other destination contact Seller’s representative. Shipment and Routing Seller shall select the point of origin of shipment, the method of transportation, the type of carrier equipment and the routing of the shipment. If the Buyer specifies a special method of transportation, type of carrier equipment, routing, or delivery requirement, Buyer shall pay all special freight and handling charges. When freight is included in the price, no allowance will be made in lieu of transportation if the Buyer accepts shipment at factory, warehouse, or freight station or otherwise supplies its own transportation.

When shipment has been made on an F.O.B. destination basis, the Buyer must unpack immediately and, if damage is discovered must: 1. Not move the Products from the point of examination. 2. Retain shipping container and packing material. 3. Notify the carrier in writing of any apparent damage. 4. Notify Seller representative within 72 hours of delivery. 5. Send Seller a copy of the carrier’s inspection report. Witness Tests/Customer Inspection Standard factory tests may be witnessed by the Buyer at Seller’s factory for an additional charge calculated at the rate of $2,500 per day (not to exceed eight (8) hours) per Product type. Buyer may final inspect Products at the Seller’s factory for $500 per day per Product type. Witness tests will add one (1) week to the scheduled shipping date. Seller will notify Buyer fourteen (14) calendar days prior to scheduled witness testing or inspection. In the event Buyer is unable to attend, the Parties shall mutually agree on a rescheduled date. However, Seller reserves the right to deem the witness tests waived with the right to ship and invoice Products.

Held Orders For any order held, delayed or rescheduled at the request of the Buyer, Seller may, at its sole option (1) require payment to be based on any reasonable basis, including but not limited to the contract price, and any additional expenses, or cost resulting from such a delay; (2) store Products at the sole cost and risk of loss of the Buyer; and/ or (3) charge to the Buyer those prices under the applicable price policy. Payment for such price, expenses and costs, in any such event, shall be due by Buyer within thirty (30) days from date of Seller’s invoice. Any order so held delayed or rescheduled beyond six (6) months will be treated as a Buyer termination.

Warranty for Products Seller warrants that the Products manufactured by it will conform to Seller’s applicable specifications and be free from failure due to defects in workmanship and material for one (1) year from the date of installation of the Product or eighteen (18) months from the date of shipment of the Product, whichever occurs first.

Drawing Approval Seller will design the Products in line with, in Seller’s judgment, good commercial practice. If at drawing approval Buyer makes changes outside of the design as covered in their specifications, Seller will then be paid reasonable charges and allowed a commensurate delay in shipping date based on the changes made.

Seller requires all nonconforming Products be returned at Seller’s expense for evaluation unless specifically stated otherwise in writing by Seller.

Drawing Re-Submittal When Seller agrees to do so in its quotation, Seller shall provide Buyer with the first set of factory customer approval drawing(s) at Seller’s expense. The customer approval drawing(s) will be delivered at the quoted delivery date. If Buyer requests drawing changes or additions after the initial factory customer approval drawing(s) have been submitted by Seller, the Seller, at its option, may assess Buyer drawing charges. Factory customer approval drawing changes required due to misinterpretation by Seller will be at Seller’s expense. Approval drawings generated by Bid Manager are excluded from this provision.

Volume 4—Circuit Protection

CA08100005E—April 2015

In the event any Product fails to comply with the foregoing warranty Seller will, at its option, either (a) repair or replace the defective Product, or defective part or component thereof, F.O.B. Seller’s facility freight prepaid, or (b) credit Buyer for the purchase price of the Product. All warranty claims shall be made in writing.

This warranty does not cover failure or damage due to storage, installation, operation or maintenance not in conformance with Seller’s recommendations and industry standard practice or due to accident, misuse, abuse or negligence. This warranty does not cover reimbursement for labor, gaining access, removal, installation, temporary power or any other expenses, which may be incurred in connection with repair or replacement. This warranty does not apply to equipment not manufactured by Seller. Seller limits itself to extending the same warranty it receives from the supplier.

www.eaton.com

V4-A1-3

Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions Effective Date: November 1, 2008

Extended Warranty for Products If requested by the Buyer and specifically accepted in writing by Seller, the foregoing standard warranty for Products will be extended from the date of shipment for the period and price indicated below: ●

●

●

24 months—2% of Contract Price 30 months—3% of Contract Price 36 months—4% of Contract Price

Special Warranty (In and Out) for Products If requested by the Buyer and specifically accepted in writing by Seller, Seller will, during the warranty period for Products, at an additional cost of 2% of the contract price, be responsible for the direct cost of: 1. Removing the Product from the installed location. 2. Transportation to the repair facility and return to the site. 3. Reinstallation on site. The total liability of Seller for this Special Warranty for Products is limited to 50% of the contract price of the particular Product being repaired and excludes expenses for removing adjacent apparatus, walls, piping, structures, temporary service, etc.

V4-A1-4

Warranty for Services Seller warrants that the Services performed by it hereunder will be performed in accordance with generally accepted professional standards. The Services, which do not so conform, shall be corrected by Seller upon notification in writing by the Buyer within one (1) year after completion of the Services. Unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Seller, Seller assumes no responsibility with respect to the suitability of the Buyer’s, or its customer’s, equipment or with respect to any latent defects in equipment not supplied by Seller. This warranty does not cover damage to Buyer’s, or its customer’s, equipment, components or parts resulting in whole or in part from improper maintenance or operation or from their deteriorated condition. Buyer will, at its cost, provide Seller with unobstructed access to the defective Services, as well as adequate free working space in the immediate vicinity of the defective Services and such facilities and systems, including, without limitation, docks, cranes and utility disconnects and connects, as may be necessary in order that Seller may perform its warranty obligations. The conducting of any tests shall be mutually agreed upon and Seller shall be notified of, and may be present at, all tests that may be made.

Volume 4—Circuit Protection

CA08100005E—April 2015

Warranty for Power Systems Studies Seller warrants that any power systems studies performed by it will conform to generally accepted professional standards. Any portion of the study, which does not so conform, shall be corrected by Seller upon notification in writing by the Buyer within six (6) months after completion of the study. All warranty work shall be performed in a single shift straight time basis Monday through Friday. In the event that the study requires correction of warranty items on an overtime schedule, the premium portion of such overtime shall be for the Buyer’s account. Limitation on Warranties for Products, Services and Power Systems Studies THE FOREGOING WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE EXCEPT FOR WARRANTY OF TITLE. SELLER DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. CORRECTION OF NONCONFORMITIES IN THE MANNER AND FOR THE PERIOD OF TIME PROVIDED ABOVE SHALL CONSTITUTE SELLER’S SOLE LIABILITY AND BUYER’S EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR FAILURE OF SELLER TO MEET ITS WARRANTY OBLIGATIONS, WHETHER CLAIMS OF THE BUYER ARE BASED IN CONTRACT, IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY), OR OTHERWISE.

www.eaton.com

Asbestos Federal Law requires that building or facility owners identify the presence, location and quantity of asbestos containing material (hereinafter “ACM”) at work sites. Seller is not licensed to abate ACM. Accordingly, for any contract which includes the provision of Services, prior to (i) commencement of work at any site under a specific Purchase Order, (ii) a change in the work scope of any Purchase Order, the Buyer will certify that the work area associated with the Seller’s scope of work includes the handling of Class II ACM, including but not limited to generator wedges and high temperature gaskets which include asbestos materials. The Buyer shall, at its expense, conduct abatement should the removal, handling, modification or reinstallation, or some or all of them, of said Class II ACM be likely to generate airborne asbestos fibers; and should such abatement affect the cost of or time of performance of the work then Seller shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the schedule, price and other pertinent affected provisions of the contract. Compliance with Nuclear Regulation Seller’s Products are sold as commercial grade Products not intended for application in facilities or activities licensed by the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission for atomic purposes. Further certification will be required for use of the Products in any safety-related application in any nuclear facility licensed by the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission.

Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions Effective Date: November 1, 2008

Returning Products Authorization and shipping instructions for the return of any Products must be obtained from Seller before returning the Products. When return is occasioned due to Seller error, full credit including all transportation charges will be allowed. Product Notices Buyer shall provide the user (including its employees) of the Products with all Seller supplied Product notices, warnings, instructions, recommendations, and similar materials. Force Majeure Seller shall not be liable for failure to perform or delay in performance due to fire, flood, strike or other labor difficulty, act of God, act of any governmental authority or of the Buyer, riot, embargo, fuel or energy shortage, car shortage, wrecks or delays in transportation, or due to any other cause beyond Seller’s reasonable control. In the event of delay in performance due to any such cause, the date of delivery or time for completion will be extended by a period of time reasonably necessary to overcome the effect of such delay. Liquidated Damages Contracts which include liquidated damage clauses for failure to meet shipping or job completion promises are not acceptable or binding on Seller, unless such clauses are specifically accepted in writing by an authorized representative of the Seller at its headquarters office.

Patent Infringement Seller will defend or, at its option, settle any suit or proceeding brought against Buyer, or Buyer’s customers, to the extent it is based upon a claim that any Product or part thereof, manufactured by Seller or its subsidiaries and furnished hereunder, infringes any United States patent, other than a claim of infringement based upon use of a Product or part thereof in a process, provided Seller is notified in reasonable time and given authority, information and assistance (at Seller’s expense) for the defense of same. Seller shall pay all legal and court costs and expenses and courtassessed damages awarded therein against Buyer resulting from or incident to such suit or proceeding. In addition to the foregoing, if at any time Seller determines there is a substantial question of infringement of any United States patent, and the use of such Product is or may be enjoined, Seller may, at its option and expense: either (a) procure for Buyer the right to continue using and selling the Product; (b) replace the Product with non-infringing apparatus; (c) modify the Product so it becomes noninfringing; or (d) as a last resort, remove the Product and refund the purchase price, equitably adjusted for use and obsolescence. In no case does Seller agree to pay any recovery based upon its Buyer’s savings or profit through use of Seller’s Products whether the use be special or ordinary. The foregoing states the entire liability of Seller for patent infringement.

The preceding paragraph does not apply to any claim of infringement based upon: (a) any modification made to a Product other than by Seller; (b) any design and/or specifications of Buyer to which a Product was manufactured; or (c) the use or combination of Product with other products where the Product does not itself infringe. As to the aboveidentified claim situations where the preceding paragraph does not apply, Buyer shall defend and hold Seller harmless in the same manner and to the extent as Seller’s obligations described in the preceding paragraph. Buyer shall be responsible for obtaining (at Buyer’s expense) all license rights required for Seller to be able to use software products in the possession of Buyer where such use is required in order to perform any Service for Buyer. With respect to a Product or part thereof not manufactured by Seller or its subsidiaries, Seller will attempt to obtain for Buyer, from the supplier(s), the patent indemnification protection normally provided by the supplier(s) to customers.

Volume 4—Circuit Protection

Compliance with OSHA Seller offers no warranty and makes no representation that its Products comply with the provisions or standards of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, or any regulation issued thereunder. In no event shall Seller be liable for any loss, damage, fines, penalty or expenses arising under said Act. Limitation of Liability THE REMEDIES OF THE BUYER SET FORTH IN THIS CONTRACT ARE EXCLUSIVE AND ARE ITS SOLE REMEDIES FOR ANY FAILURE OF SELLER TO COMPLY WITH ITS OBLIGATIONS HEREUNDER. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY PROVISION IN THIS CONTRACT TO THE CONTRARY, IN NO EVENT SHALL SELLER BE LIABLE IN CONTRACT, IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY) OR OTHERWISE FOR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY OR EQUIPMENT OTHER THAN PRODUCTS SOLD HEREUNDER, LOSS OF PROFITS OR REVENUE, LOSS OF USE OF PRODUCTS, COST OF CAPITAL, CLAIMS OF CUSTOMERS OF THE BUYER OR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, REGARDLESS OF WHETHER SUCH POTENTIAL DAMAGES ARE FORESEEABLE OR IF SELLER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. THE TOTAL CUMULATIVE LIABILITY OF SELLER ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO THIS CONTRACT WHETHER THE CLAIMS ARE BASED IN CONTRACT, IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY) OR OTHERWISE, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT OR SERVICES ON WHICH SUCH LIABILITY IS BASED.

CA08100005E—April 2015

www.eaton.com

V4-A1-5

Appendix 2—Catalog Parent Number Index A AAL . . . . . . . . . . . AA1 . . . . . . . . . . . AA11 . . . . . . . . . . AA21 . . . . . . . . . . AA31 . . . . . . . . . . ALM . . . . . . . . . . AUX . . . . . . . . . . . A1L . . . . . . . . . . . A1X . . . . . . . . . . . A2L . . . . . . . . . . . A2X . . . . . . . . . . . A3X . . . . . . . . . . . A4X . . . . . . . . . . .

V4-T2-279, V4-T2-365 V4-T2-109, V4-T2-365 V4-T2-280 V4-T2-280 V4-T2-280 V4-T2-109, V4-T2-365, V4-T2-391 V4-T2-109, V4-T2-365, V4-T2-391, V4-T2-429 V4-T2-109, V4-T2-275, V4-T2-276, V4-T2-365, V4-T2-391 V4-T2-109, V4-T2-277, V4-T2-278, V4-T2-345, V4-T2-365, V4-T2-391 V4-T2-109, V4-T2-275, V4-T2-276, V4-T2-391 V4-T2-109, V4-T2-277, V4-T2-278, V4-T2-345, V4-T2-365, V4-T2-391 V4-T2-109, V4-T2-278 V4-T2-109, V4-T2-278, V4-T2-391

B BAB . . . . . . . . . . . BBMK . . . . . . . . . BB-UL . . . . . . . . . BIM . . . . . . . . . . . BMH . . . . . . . . . . BRR . . . . . . . . . . . B20 . . . . . . . . . . . B201 . . . . . . . . . . B25 . . . . . . . . . . . B250 . . . . . . . . . . B300 . . . . . . . . . .

V4-T1-12, V4-T1-32, V4-T1-38, V4-T1-41–V4-T1-45 V4-T2-318 V4-T1-76, V4-T1-77 V4-T2-325 V4-T2-69, V4-T2-311, V4-T2-334, V4-T2-364 V4-T1-32 V4-T2-80 V4-T2-249, V4-T2-355 V4-T2-80 V4-T2-249, V4-T2-355 V4-T2-355

C CFDPV. . . . . . . . . CHK . . . . . . . . . . . CHKD . . . . . . . . . CHL . . . . . . . . . . . CHLD. . . . . . . . . . CHMDL . . . . . . . . CHND . . . . . . . . . CJGPVS. . . . . . . . CKD . . . . . . . . . . . CKDPV. . . . . . . . . CKDPVS . . . . . . . CLD . . . . . . . . . . . CLDC. . . . . . . . . . CLE . . . . . . . . . . . CLGPV. . . . . . . . . CLPT . . . . . . . . . . CLR . . . . . . . . . . . CMDL . . . . . . . . . CMDLPV . . . . . . . CND. . . . . . . . . . . CNDC . . . . . . . . . CRD. . . . . . . . . . . CTF . . . . . . . . . . . CTK . . . . . . . . . . . CX . . . . . . . . . . . .

V4-T2-363 V4-T2-166 V4-T2-176, V4-T2-178 V4-T2-189 V4-T2-198, V4-T2-201 V4-T2-215 V4-T2-227, V4-T2-229 V4-T2-362 V4-T2-166, V4-T2-175, V4-T2-177 V4-T2-363 V4-T2-362 V4-T2-189, V4-T2-197, V4-T2-200 V4-T2-199, V4-T2-202 V4-T3-104–V4-T3-110, V4-T3-121 V4-T2-363 V4-T3-123–V4-T3-126 V4-T1-32 V4-T2-215 V4-T2-363 V4-T2-227, V4-T2-229 V4-T2-228, V4-T2-230 V4-T2-240, V4-T2-242, V4-T2-244, V4-T2-246, V4-T2-248 V4-T2-150 V4-T2-107, V4-T2-316 V4-T3-127–V4-T3-130, V4-T3-133

CXN . . . . . . . . . . C361 . . . . . . . . . C37 . . . . . . . . . . C371 . . . . . . . . .

V4-T3-133 V4-T2-326, V4-T2-429 V4-T2-444 V4-T2-443

D DBU . . . . . . . . . . DBU17 . . . . . . . . DBU27 . . . . . . . . DBU38 . . . . . . . . DIGI . . . . . . . . . . DK . . . . . . . . . . . DOPT . . . . . . . . .

V4-T3-96, V4-T3-97 V4-T3-95 V4-T3-96 V4-T3-97 V4-T2-36, V4-T2-52, V4-T2-69, V4-T2-81, V4-T2-106, V4-T2-150, V4-T2-325 V4-T2-167, V4-T2-168 V4-T2-324

E ED . . . . . . . . . . . EDB . . . . . . . . . . EDC . . . . . . . . . . EDH . . . . . . . . . . EDS . . . . . . . . . . EEC . . . . . . . . . . EFH . . . . . . . . . . EFP . . . . . . . . . . EFR . . . . . . . . . . EFS . . . . . . . . . . EFT. . . . . . . . . . . EF1. . . . . . . . . . . EF3. . . . . . . . . . . EGB . . . . . . . . . . EGC . . . . . . . . . . EGD . . . . . . . . . . EGE . . . . . . . . . . EGF . . . . . . . . . . EGG . . . . . . . . . . EGH . . . . . . . . . . EGK . . . . . . . . . . EGS . . . . . . . . . . EG3 . . . . . . . . . . EG4 . . . . . . . . . . EHD . . . . . . . . . . EHM. . . . . . . . . . EIP . . . . . . . . . . . ELC . . . . . . . . . . ELE . . . . . . . . . . ELJ. . . . . . . . . . . ELL. . . . . . . . . . . EOP . . . . . . . . . . EOP5 . . . . . . . . . E1X1 . . . . . . . . . E2. . . . . . . . . . . . E2X1 . . . . . . . . .

V4-T2-138 V4-T2-139 V4-T2-139 V4-T2-138 V4-T2-140 V4-T2-25 V4-T2-107 V4-T2-107 V4-T2-107 V4-T2-107 V4-T2-25, V4-T2-114 V4-T2-25 V4-T2-25 V4-T2-17, V4-T2-22 V4-T2-21, V4-T2-97 V4-T2-25 V4-T2-18, V4-T2-350 V4-T2-428 V4-T2-25 V4-T2-20, V4-T2-23, V4-T2-350, V4-T2-420 V4-T2-21 V4-T2-19, V4-T2-22, V4-T2-350 V4-T2-107 V4-T2-107 V4-T2-140, V4-T2-146 V4-T2-425, V4-T2-426, V4-T2-428 V4-T2-25, V4-T2-97 V4-T2-269 V4-T2-93 V4-T2-93 V4-T2-93 V4-T2-107, V4-T2-318, V4-T2-319 V4-T2-319 V4-T2-277 V4-T2-378–V4-T2-388 V4-T2-277

F FAZ-B . . . . . . . . . FAZ-C . . . . . . . . . FAZ-D. . . . . . . . . FAZ-K . . . . . . . . .

V4-T1-51, V4-T1-69 V4-T1-52–V4-T1-54, V4-T1-69, V4-T1-70 V4-T1-53, V4-T1-71 V4-T1-72

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015

www.eaton.com

V4-A2-1

Appendix 2—Catalog Parent Number Index FAZP . . . . . . . . . . FAZ-S. . . . . . . . . . FAZ-X. . . . . . . . . . FAZ-XAA . . . . . . . FAZ-XUA . . . . . . . FAZ-Z . . . . . . . . . . FCWT . . . . . . . . . FD . . . . . . . . . . . . FDC . . . . . . . . . . . FDE . . . . . . . . . . . FDMP . . . . . . . . . FDPV . . . . . . . . . . FD1 . . . . . . . . . . . FD2 . . . . . . . . . . . FD3 . . . . . . . . . . . FD4 . . . . . . . . . . . FG . . . . . . . . . . . . FHMV . . . . . . . . . FJC . . . . . . . . . . . FJH . . . . . . . . . . . FJI . . . . . . . . . . . . FJP . . . . . . . . . . . FJR . . . . . . . . . . . FJS . . . . . . . . . . . FJT. . . . . . . . . . . . FJ3. . . . . . . . . . . . FJ4. . . . . . . . . . . . FPH . . . . . . . . . . . FPS . . . . . . . . . . . F0S0 . . . . . . . . . . F1S0 . . . . . . . . . . F1S1 . . . . . . . . . . F2S0 . . . . . . . . . . F2S1 . . . . . . . . . . F3S0 . . . . . . . . . . F3S1 . . . . . . . . . . F4S0 . . . . . . . . . . F4S1 . . . . . . . . . . F5S . . . . . . . . . . . F5S0 . . . . . . . . . . F5S1 . . . . . . . . . . F6S0 . . . . . . . . . . F7S0 . . . . . . . . . . F7S1 . . . . . . . . . .

V4-T1-55 V4-T1-73 V4-T1-75 V4-T1-55, V4-T1-75 V4-T1-75 V4-T1-74 V4-T2-309 V4-T2-141, V4-T2-142, V4-T2-146 V4-T2-144, V4-T2-145, V4-T2-271 V4-T2-145 V4-T2-268 V4-T2-363 V4-T2-142 V4-T2-142 V4-T2-142 V4-T2-142 V4-T2-343 V4-T2-439 V4-T2-41 V4-T2-425 V4-T2-41 V4-T2-107 V4-T2-107 V4-T2-107 V4-T2-41, V4-T2-114 V4-T2-41, V4-T2-339 V4-T2-41 V4-T2-336 V4-T2-336 V4-T2-443 V4-T2-443 V4-T2-443 V4-T2-443 V4-T2-443 V4-T2-443 V4-T2-443 V4-T2-443 V4-T2-443 V4-T2-428 V4-T2-428, V4-T2-443 V4-T2-443 V4-T2-428, V4-T2-443 V4-T2-443 V4-T2-443

G GBHS. . . . . . . . . . GCH. . . . . . . . . . . GCWT . . . . . . . . . GD . . . . . . . . . . . . GDB. . . . . . . . . . . GFAU. . . . . . . . . . GFMB . . . . . . . . . GFR . . . . . . . . . . . GHB. . . . . . . . . . . GHBS. . . . . . . . . . GHC. . . . . . . . . . . GHMV . . . . . . . . .

V4-A2-2

V4-T1-35 V4-T2-433 V4-T2-310 V4-T2-123, V4-T2-124 V4-T2-124 V4-T2-324 V4-T1-38 V4-T2-416, V4-T2-417 V4-T2-127, V4-T2-129, V4-T2-134 V4-T1-35 V4-T2-132–V4-T2-134 V4-T2-439

Volume 4—Circuit Protection

CA08100005E—October 2015

GHQ . . . . . . . . . . GKOA . . . . . . . . . GMCP . . . . . . . . GMH . . . . . . . . . GPHB . . . . . . . . . GPS . . . . . . . . . . GTSK . . . . . . . . .

V4-T1-35 V4-T2-313 V4-T2-258 V4-T2-259, V4-T2-433 V4-T2-314 V4-T2-336 V4-T2-312

H HBA . . . . . . . . . . HCL . . . . . . . . . . HEX . . . . . . . . . . HFD . . . . . . . . . . HFDMP . . . . . . . HGHB. . . . . . . . . HGHC. . . . . . . . . HJD . . . . . . . . . . HKD . . . . . . . . . . HLD . . . . . . . . . . HLK . . . . . . . . . . HM . . . . . . . . . . . HMC . . . . . . . . . HMCP . . . . . . . . HMCPS . . . . . . . HMDL . . . . . . . . HMV. . . . . . . . . . HND . . . . . . . . . . HQP . . . . . . . . . . HRG . . . . . . . . . .

V4-T1-13 V4-T3-114 V4-T2-58, V4-T2-69, V4-T2-80, V4-T2-445 V4-T2-143, V4-T2-145, V4-T2-146, V4-T2-351 V4-T2-268 V4-T2-127 V4-T2-132 V4-T2-155, V4-T2-156, V4-T2-352 V4-T2-164–V4-T2-165, V4-T2-166, V4-T2-168, V4-T2-170, V4-T2-173, V4-T2-353 V4-T2-188–V4-T2-189, V4-T2-190, V4-T2-192, V4-T2-195, V4-T2-354 V4-T2-107, V4-T2-315, V4-T2-389 V4-T2-437 V4-T2-441 V4-T2-86–V4-T2-88, V4-T2-260, V4-T2-261, V4-T2-263–V4-T2-266 V4-T2-262 V4-T2-213–V4-T2-216, V4-T2-355 V4-T2-425, V4-T2-441 V4-T2-224, V4-T2-226, V4-T2-230 V4-T1-6, V4-T1-41–V4-T1-45 V4-T2-259, V4-T2-441

I ICK . . . . . . . . . . . INK . . . . . . . . . . . IPB . . . . . . . . . . .

V4-T2-293 V4-T2-345 V4-T2-58, V4-T2-69, V4-T2-313, V4-T2-364

J JD . . . . . . . . . . . JDB . . . . . . . . . . JDC . . . . . . . . . . JFDN . . . . . . . . . JG . . . . . . . . . . . JGC . . . . . . . . . . JGE . . . . . . . . . . JGF . . . . . . . . . . JGH . . . . . . . . . . JGK . . . . . . . . . . JGMP . . . . . . . . . JGPVS . . . . . . . . JGS . . . . . . . . . . JGU . . . . . . . . . . JGX . . . . . . . . . . JG3 . . . . . . . . . .

www.eaton.com

V4-T2-155, V4-T2-156 V4-T2-156 V4-T2-155, V4-T2-156 V4-T2-345 V4-T2-343 V4-T2-33, V4-T2-35, V4-T2-38 V4-T2-31, V4-T2-35, V4-T2-37, V4-T2-39, V4-T2-40, V4-T2-351 V4-T2-36–V4-T2-38, V4-T2-40, V4-T2-81, V4-T2-428 V4-T2-32, V4-T2-35, V4-T2-37, V4-T2-39, V4-T2-40, V4-T2-352, V4-T2-420 V4-T2-34 V4-T2-90 V4-T2-362 V4-T2-31, V4-T2-35, V4-T2-37, V4-T2-39, V4-T2-40, V4-T2-352 V4-T2-33, V4-T2-35, V4-T2-38 V4-T2-34, V4-T2-35, V4-T2-38 V4-T2-107, V4-T2-115

Appendix 2—Catalog Parent Number Index JG4 . . . . . . . . . . . JHM . . . . . . . . . . JHMV . . . . . . . . . JJDN . . . . . . . . . . JKDN . . . . . . . . . . JLDN . . . . . . . . . . JNDN. . . . . . . . . . JT . . . . . . . . . . . . JT2 . . . . . . . . . . . JT3 . . . . . . . . . . . JT4 . . . . . . . . . . .

V4-T2-107, V4-T2-115 V4-T2-426, V4-T2-428 V4-T2-439 V4-T2-345 V4-T2-345 V4-T2-345 V4-T2-345 V4-T2-155 V4-T2-35 V4-T2-35, V4-T2-36, V4-T2-351, V4-T2-352 V4-T2-35, V4-T2-36

LHMV. . . . . . . . . LKD . . . . . . . . . . LPH . . . . . . . . . . LPS . . . . . . . . . . LRC . . . . . . . . . . LST. . . . . . . . . . . LT. . . . . . . . . . . . LTS. . . . . . . . . . . LT3. . . . . . . . . . . LT4. . . . . . . . . . . L3R . . . . . . . . . . L4R . . . . . . . . . .

V4-T2-309 V4-T2-164–V4-T2-166, V4-T2-167, V4-T2-168, V4-T2-169, V4-T2-172 V4-T2-166, V4-T2-168 V4-T2-164–V4-T2-165, V4-T2-171, V4-T2-174 V4-T2-363 V4-T2-362 V4-T2-165, V4-T2-166 V4-T2-343 V4-T2-439 V4-T2-425 V4-T2-339, V4-T2-366 V4-T2-308, V4-T2-389 V4-T2-389 V4-T2-308 V4-T2-337 V4-T2-164, V4-T2-353 V4-T2-107, V4-T2-316

M

V4-T2-439 V4-T2-107, V4-T2-314, V4-T2-364 V4-T2-107, V4-T2-337, V4-T2-389 V4-T2-337 V4-T2-107 V4-T2-110, V4-T2-285 V4-T2-188, V4-T2-353, V4-T2-354 V4-T2-58, V4-T2-114 V4-T2-51, V4-T2-52, V4-T2-57, V4-T2-353 V4-T2-51, V4-T2-52, V4-T2-353 V4-T2-58, V4-T2-339, V4-T2-389 V4-T2-58, V4-T2-366

K KCWT . . . . . . . . . KD . . . . . . . . . . . . KDB . . . . . . . . . . . KDC . . . . . . . . . . . KDPV . . . . . . . . . . KDPVS. . . . . . . . . KES . . . . . . . . . . . KG . . . . . . . . . . . . KHMV . . . . . . . . . KLH . . . . . . . . . . . KPE . . . . . . . . . . . KPEK . . . . . . . . . . KPEM . . . . . . . . . KPR . . . . . . . . . . . KPS . . . . . . . . . . . KT . . . . . . . . . . . . KYK . . . . . . . . . . .

L LBH . . . . . . . . . . . LD . . . . . . . . . . . . LDB . . . . . . . . . . . LDC . . . . . . . . . . . LES . . . . . . . . . . . LFD . . . . . . . . . . . LG . . . . . . . . . . . . LGC . . . . . . . . . . . LGE . . . . . . . . . . . LGF . . . . . . . . . . . LGH . . . . . . . . . . . LGK . . . . . . . . . . . LGMP . . . . . . . . . LGPV . . . . . . . . . . LGS . . . . . . . . . . . LGT . . . . . . . . . . . LGU . . . . . . . . . . . LGX . . . . . . . . . . . LG3 . . . . . . . . . . . LG4 . . . . . . . . . . . LHH . . . . . . . . . . . LHM . . . . . . . . . .

MA . . . . . . . . . . . MAA. . . . . . . . . . MA1 . . . . . . . . . . MA2 . . . . . . . . . . MB . . . . . . . . . . . MD. . . . . . . . . . . MDL. . . . . . . . . . MDLB . . . . . . . . MDLPV . . . . . . . MES . . . . . . . . . . MOP . . . . . . . . . MPS . . . . . . . . . . MT . . . . . . . . . . . MTS . . . . . . . . . . MTST . . . . . . . . . MUVH . . . . . . . .

V4-T3-13 V4-T2-279 V4-T2-275 V4-T2-275 V4-T3-13 V4-T3-13 V4-T2-213, V4-T2-215, V4-T2-216 V4-T2-214 V4-T2-363 V4-T2-215 V4-T2-107, V4-T2-113, V4-T2-318 V4-T2-337 V4-T2-213, V4-T2-355 V4-T2-36, V4-T2-52, V4-T2-69, V4-T2-81, V4-T2-106 V4-T2-150 V4-T2-288

N V4-T2-107 V4-T2-188–V4-T2-189, V4-T2-190, V4-T2-191, V4-T2-194, V4-T2-196 V4-T2-189, V4-T2-190 V4-T2-189, V4-T2-193, V4-T2-196 V4-T2-189 V4-T2-324 V4-T2-344 V4-T2-50, V4-T2-51, V4-T2-54, V4-T2-57 V4-T2-49, V4-T2-51, V4-T2-53, V4-T2-55–V4-T2-57, V4-T2-353 V4-T2-52–V4-T2-54, V4-T2-56, V4-T2-57 V4-T2-49, V4-T2-51, V4-T2-53, V4-T2-55–V4-T2-57, V4-T2-354, V4-T2-420 V4-T2-51 V4-T2-90 V4-T2-363 V4-T2-49, V4-T2-51, V4-T2-53, V4-T2-55, V4-T2-56, V4-T2-57, V4-T2-107, V4-T2-353 V4-T2-58 V4-T2-50, V4-T2-51, V4-T2-54, V4-T2-57 V4-T2-50, V4-T2-51, V4-T2-54, V4-T2-57 V4-T2-107, V4-T2-115 V4-T2-107, V4-T2-115 V4-T2-102 V4-T2-426, V4-T2-428

NB . . . . . . . . . . . ND . . . . . . . . . . . NDC . . . . . . . . . . NG . . . . . . . . . . . NGF . . . . . . . . . . NGH . . . . . . . . . . NG3 . . . . . . . . . . NG4 . . . . . . . . . . NHH . . . . . . . . . . NTS . . . . . . . . . . NTS3 . . . . . . . . .

V4-T2-355 V4-T2-224, V4-T2-226, V4-T2-230 V4-T2-225, V4-T2-226 V4-T2-344 V4-T2-69 V4-T2-67, V4-T2-68, V4-T2-421 V4-T2-115 V4-T2-115 V4-T2-102 V4-T2-69 V4-T2-313

O OPTIM . . . . . . . . ORPK . . . . . . . . . ORPL . . . . . . . . . ORPN. . . . . . . . . ORPR . . . . . . . . .

V4-T2-325 V4-T2-169–V4-T2-178 V4-T2-191–V4-T2-202 V4-T2-224–V4-T2-230 V4-T2-247, V4-T2-248

P PAD . . . . . . . . . . PHB . . . . . . . . . . PHL . . . . . . . . . . PIIL. . . . . . . . . . . PLK . . . . . . . . . .

V4-T2-107, V4-T2-114, V4-T2-319, V4-T2-320 V4-T2-314 V4-T2-314, V4-T2-315 V4-T2-114 V4-T2-107, V4-T2-315, V4-T2-364, V4-T2-389

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015

www.eaton.com

V4-A2-3

Appendix 2—Catalog Parent Number Index SNT2 SNT3 SNT4 SNT5 SNT6 STK2

PLN2 . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-309 PMP. . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-319 PM3. . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-339 PRTB . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-325

Q QBAF. . . . . . . . . . QBCAF . . . . . . . . QBGF. . . . . . . . . . QBH. . . . . . . . . . . QC . . . . . . . . . . . . QCD. . . . . . . . . . . QCF . . . . . . . . . . . QCG. . . . . . . . . . . QCH. . . . . . . . . . . QCHW . . . . . . . . . QCR. . . . . . . . . . . QHCW . . . . . . . . . QHCX . . . . . . . . . QHP. . . . . . . . . . . QL . . . . . . . . . . . . QPGF. . . . . . . . . . QPH. . . . . . . . . . . QPHG . . . . . . . . .

V4-T1-15 V4-T1-15 V4-T1-18, V4-T1-19 V4-T1-12, V4-T1-15 V4-T1-21, V4-T1-41–V4-T1-45 V4-T1-23 V4-T1-26, V4-T1-44 V4-T1-29 V4-T1-29 V4-T1-22 V4-T1-25, V4-T1-27 V4-T1-22 V4-T1-22 V4-T1-7 V4-T1-43, V4-T1-45, V4-T1-46 V4-T1-9, V4-T1-10, V4-T1-18 V4-T1-6 V4-T1-9

R RBA2 . . . . . . . . . . RBA4 . . . . . . . . . . RD . . . . . . . . . . . . RDB2 . . . . . . . . . . RDB4 . . . . . . . . . . RDB8 . . . . . . . . . . RDC . . . . . . . . . . . RFDN. . . . . . . . . . RG . . . . . . . . . . . . RGC . . . . . . . . . . . RGH. . . . . . . . . . . RGK . . . . . . . . . . . RJDN . . . . . . . . . . RKDN. . . . . . . . . . RLDN. . . . . . . . . . RNDN . . . . . . . . . RP6R . . . . . . . . . .

V4-T3-83, V4-T3-86, V4-T3-89, V4-T3-92 V4-T3-84, V4-T3-85, V4-T3-87, V4-T3-88, V4-T3-90, V4-T3-91, V4-T3-93, V4-T3-94 V4-T2-239, V4-T2-241, V4-T2-243, V4-T2-245, V4-T2-247, V4-T2-248 V4-T3-83–V4-T3-92 V4-T3-84, V4-T3-87, V4-T3-90, V4-T3-93 V4-T3-85–V4-T3-94 V4-T2-239, V4-T2-241, V4-T2-243, V4-T2-245, V4-T2-247 V4-T2-345 V4-T2-355 V4-T2-77–V4-T2-79 V4-T2-76, V4-T2-78, V4-T2-79, V4-T2-421 V4-T2-77 V4-T2-345 V4-T2-345 V4-T2-345 V4-T2-345 V4-T2-78, V4-T2-79, V4-T2-239–V4-T2-246

S SBK . . . . . . . . . . . SFDN . . . . . . . . . . SJDN . . . . . . . . . . SKDN. . . . . . . . . . SLA . . . . . . . . . . . SLBK . . . . . . . . . . SLDN . . . . . . . . . . SNDN . . . . . . . . . SNT . . . . . . . . . . . SNT1 . . . . . . . . . .

V4-A2-4

V4-T2-107, V4-T2-317 V4-T2-345 V4-T2-345 V4-T2-345 V4-T3-63 V4-T1-32 V4-T2-345 V4-T2-345 V4-T2-110, V4-T2-345 V4-T2-281, V4-T2-365, V4-T2-391

Volume 4—Circuit Protection

CA08100005E—October 2015

......... ......... ......... ......... ......... .........

V4-T2-282, V4-T2-391 V4-T2-282, V4-T2-365, V4-T2-391 V4-T2-283, V4-T2-391 V4-T2-284, V4-T2-391 V4-T2-284, V4-T2-391 V4-T2-324

T TAD3 . . . . . . . . . TA1 . . . . . . . . . . TA10 . . . . . . . . . TA12 . . . . . . . . . TA16 . . . . . . . . . TA2 . . . . . . . . . . TA20 . . . . . . . . . TA25 . . . . . . . . . TA250 . . . . . . . . TA3 . . . . . . . . . . TA30 . . . . . . . . . TA35 . . . . . . . . . TA40 . . . . . . . . . TA45 . . . . . . . . . TA60 . . . . . . . . . TA7 . . . . . . . . . . TA70 . . . . . . . . . TA8 . . . . . . . . . . TA80 . . . . . . . . . TBRD . . . . . . . . . TEC . . . . . . . . . . TRIP . . . . . . . . . . TS33. . . . . . . . . . TS34. . . . . . . . . . T10 . . . . . . . . . . . T100 . . . . . . . . . . T12 . . . . . . . . . . . T120 . . . . . . . . . . T16 . . . . . . . . . . . T225 . . . . . . . . . . T250 . . . . . . . . . . T30 . . . . . . . . . . . T300 . . . . . . . . . . T35 . . . . . . . . . . . T350 . . . . . . . . . . T401 . . . . . . . . . . T600 . . . . . . . . . . T602 . . . . . . . . . . T70 . . . . . . . . . . . T700 . . . . . . . . . . T800 . . . . . . . . . .

V4-T2-309 V4-T2-69, V4-T2-80 V4-T2-231, V4-T2-345, V4-T2-355, V4-T2-407 V4-T2-231, V4-T2-345, V4-T2-355, V4-T2-407 V4-T2-249, V4-T2-389 V4-T2-80, V4-T2-407 V4-T2-249, V4-T2-389 V4-T2-41, V4-T2-155–V4-T2-157, V4-T2-345 V4-T2-99 V4-T2-366 V4-T2-164, V4-T2-179, V4-T2-353 V4-T2-58, V4-T2-164, V4-T2-179, V4-T2-334, V4-T2-345, V4-T2-353, V4-T2-354 V4-T2-407 V4-T2-203 V4-T2-188, V4-T2-203, V4-T2-309, V4-T2-334, V4-T2-354, V4-T2-407 V4-T2-69, V4-T2-366 V4-T2-213, V4-T2-214, V4-T2-217, V4-T2-231, V4-T2-345, V4-T2-355, V4-T2-389, V4-T2-407 V4-T2-366 V4-T2-213, V4-T2-214, V4-T2-217, V4-T2-355, V4-T2-389, V4-T2-407 V4-T2-293 V4-T2-313 V4-T2-36, V4-T2-52, V4-T2-69, V4-T2-106, V4-T2-150, V4-T2-325 V4-T2-313 V4-T2-313 V4-T2-69 V4-T2-231, V4-T2-389, V4-T2-407 V4-T2-69, V4-T2-97 V4-T2-231, V4-T2-389, V4-T2-407 V4-T2-80, V4-T2-249 V4-T2-407 V4-T2-41, V4-T2-157, V4-T2-271, V4-T2-351, V4-T2-352, V4-T2-389 V4-T2-366 V4-T2-179, V4-T2-389 V4-T2-366 V4-T2-58, V4-T2-179, V4-T2-389, V4-T2-407 V4-T2-407 V4-T2-217, V4-T2-389, V4-T2-407 V4-T2-203, V4-T2-309, V4-T2-389 V4-T2-69 V4-T2-231, V4-T2-389 V4-T2-217, V4-T2-389, V4-T2-407

U UVH . . . . . . . . . .

www.eaton.com

V4-T2-110, V4-T2-288–V4-T2-292, V4-T2-365, V4-T2-390

Appendix 2—Catalog Parent Number Index UVM . . . . . . . . . . UVR . . . . . . . . . . .

V4-T2-390 V4-T2-110, V4-T2-365

W WBL . . . . . . . . . . WHM. . . . . . . . . .

V4-T2-107, V4-T2-317 V4-T2-437

Z Z-EB. . . . . . . . . . . Z-EK. . . . . . . . . . . ZGK . . . . . . . . . . . ZGPK . . . . . . . . . . Z-IS . . . . . . . . . . . Z-NH . . . . . . . . . . Z-SV. . . . . . . . . . . ZV-BS . . . . . . . . .

V4-T1-55 V4-T1-55 V4-T2-293 V4-T2-293 V4-T1-55 V4-T1-55, V4-T1-89, V4-T1-95 V4-T1-55 V4-T1-55

Numerics 05B7 . . . . . . . . . . 1223 . . . . . . . . . . 1225 . . . . . . . . . . 1227 . . . . . . . . . . 1228 . . . . . . . . . . 1229 . . . . . . . . . . 1231 . . . . . . . . . . 1234 . . . . . . . . . . 1241 . . . . . . . . . . 1253 . . . . . . . . . . 1255 . . . . . . . . . . 1256 . . . . . . . . . . 1257 . . . . . . . . . . 1260 . . . . . . . . . . 1261 . . . . . . . . . . 1262 . . . . . . . . . . 1264 . . . . . . . . . . 1266 . . . . . . . . . . 1283 . . . . . . . . . . 1288 . . . . . . . . . . 1290 . . . . . . . . . . 1291 . . . . . . . . . . 1294 . . . . . . . . . . 1373 . . . . . . . . . . 14RB . . . . . . . . . . 1480 . . . . . . . . . . 1482 . . . . . . . . . . 149 . . . . . . . . . . . 15BH . . . . . . . . . . 15BHLE . . . . . . . . 15CL . . . . . . . . . . 15CLE . . . . . . . . . 15CLE2 . . . . . . . . 15CLE3 . . . . . . . . 15CLPT . . . . . . . . 15CX . . . . . . . . . . 15CXI. . . . . . . . . . 15CXN . . . . . . . . . 15HCL . . . . . . . . . 15HLE . . . . . . . . .

V4-T2-408 V4-T2-314 V4-T2-259, V4-T2-313 V4-T2-404, V4-T2-405 V4-T2-409 V4-T2-404, V4-T2-405 V4-T2-319 V4-T2-417 V4-T2-408 V4-T2-322 V4-T2-416 V4-T2-416 V4-T2-416 V4-T2-319 V4-T2-408 V4-T2-408 V4-T2-324, V4-T2-406 V4-T2-312 V4-T2-416 V4-T2-259, V4-T2-275, V4-T2-277, V4-T2-320 V4-T2-320 V4-T2-403, V4-T2-405 V4-T2-259, V4-T2-314 V4-T2-259, V4-T2-281, V4-T2-286 V4-T3-83–V4-T3-88 V4-T2-319 V4-T2-278, V4-T2-279 V4-T2-422, V4-T2-433 V4-T3-110 V4-T3-110 V4-T3-125 V4-T3-107 V4-T3-107 V4-T3-107 V4-T3-125 V4-T3-130, V4-T3-133 V4-T3-130 V4-T3-131, V4-T3-132 V4-T3-114 V4-T3-110

15NC . . . . . . . . . 15RB . . . . . . . . . 15RBT . . . . . . . . 15RD . . . . . . . . . 167. . . . . . . . . . . 176C . . . . . . . . . 179C . . . . . . . . . 2ACLS . . . . . . . . 2BCLS . . . . . . . . 2CLE . . . . . . . . . 2CLS . . . . . . . . . 2HCLS . . . . . . . . 2NCL . . . . . . . . . 2TA4 . . . . . . . . . 2TA6 . . . . . . . . . 2T40. . . . . . . . . . 207B . . . . . . . . . 208B . . . . . . . . . 24RB . . . . . . . . . 25CL . . . . . . . . . 25CXN . . . . . . . . 25RB . . . . . . . . . 25RD . . . . . . . . . 2600. . . . . . . . . . 2602. . . . . . . . . . 2603. . . . . . . . . . 2605. . . . . . . . . . 2606. . . . . . . . . . 2609. . . . . . . . . . 2610. . . . . . . . . . 2611. . . . . . . . . . 2614. . . . . . . . . . 3TA . . . . . . . . . . 3TA1 . . . . . . . . . 3TA2 . . . . . . . . . 3TA4 . . . . . . . . . 3TA5 . . . . . . . . . 3TA6 . . . . . . . . .

3T1. . . . . . . . . . . 3T10. . . . . . . . . . 3T15. . . . . . . . . . 3T2. . . . . . . . . . . 3T20. . . . . . . . . . 3T22. . . . . . . . . . 3T40. . . . . . . . . . 3T6. . . . . . . . . . . 313C . . . . . . . . . 314C . . . . . . . . . 315C . . . . . . . . . 317B . . . . . . . . . 32B9 . . . . . . . . . 373B . . . . . . . . . 374D . . . . . . . . .

V4-T3-125 V4-T3-83–V4-T3-88 V4-T3-86 V4-T3-86–V4-T3-88 V4-T1-88, V4-T1-94 V4-T2-319 V4-T2-416 V4-T3-116 V4-T3-116 V4-T3-104, V4-T3-121 V4-T3-116 V4-T3-116 V4-T3-122 V4-T2-164, V4-T2-179, V4-T2-203 V4-T2-188, V4-T2-190, V4-T2-203, V4-T2-309 V4-T2-179 V4-T2-313 V4-T2-313, V4-T2-322, V4-T2-323 V4-T3-89 V4-T3-126 V4-T3-132 V4-T3-89–V4-T3-91 V4-T3-89–V4-T3-91 V4-T2-322, V4-T2-406 V4-T2-406 V4-T2-406 V4-T2-409 V4-T2-409 V4-T2-403–V4-T2-406 V4-T2-406 V4-T2-406 V4-T2-320 V4-T2-23–V4-T2-25, V4-T2-41, V4-T2-58, V4-T2-366 V4-T2-147, V4-T2-310 V4-T2-147, V4-T2-271, V4-T2-310, V4-T2-334, V4-T2-345 V4-T2-164, V4-T2-179, V4-T2-203, V4-T2-310, V4-T2-334, V4-T2-345, V4-T2-353, V4-T2-389 V4-T2-147 V4-T2-188, V4-T2-190, V4-T2-203, V4-T2-309, V4-T2-334, V4-T2-345, V4-T2-353, V4-T2-354, V4-T2-389 V4-T2-24 V4-T2-147, V4-T2-271, V4-T2-334, V4-T2-345, V4-T2-389 V4-T2-147, V4-T2-334, V4-T2-389 V4-T2-366 V4-T2-147, V4-T2-356 V4-T2-147 V4-T2-179, V4-T2-389 V4-T2-58 V4-T2-321 V4-T2-313, V4-T2-321, V4-T2-323, V4-T2-408 V4-T2-323 V4-T3-123 V4-T2-321 V4-T2-321, V4-T2-408 V4-T2-321

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015

www.eaton.com

V4-A2-5

Appendix 2—Catalog Parent Number Index 38CL . . . . . . . . . . 38RB . . . . . . . . . . 38RD . . . . . . . . . . 4ACLS . . . . . . . . . 4BCLS . . . . . . . . . 4CX . . . . . . . . . . . 4CXI. . . . . . . . . . . 4TA . . . . . . . . . . . 4TA4 . . . . . . . . . . 4TA6 . . . . . . . . . . 4T4 . . . . . . . . . . . 4T40 . . . . . . . . . . 4T6 . . . . . . . . . . . 4210 . . . . . . . . . . 4212 . . . . . . . . . . 4217 . . . . . . . . . . 4218 . . . . . . . . . . 451D . . . . . . . . . . 456D . . . . . . . . . . 4995 . . . . . . . . . . 5ACLS . . . . . . . . . 5AHLE . . . . . . . . . 5BCLS . . . . . . . . . 5BHCL . . . . . . . . . 5BHLE . . . . . . . . . 5CLE . . . . . . . . . . 5CLPT . . . . . . . . . 5CLS . . . . . . . . . . 5CX . . . . . . . . . . . 5CXI. . . . . . . . . . . 5HCL . . . . . . . . . . 5HCLS . . . . . . . . . 5HLE . . . . . . . . . . 5LCL . . . . . . . . . . 5NCLPT . . . . . . . . 5RBA . . . . . . . . . . 5010 . . . . . . . . . . 504C . . . . . . . . . . 505C . . . . . . . . . . 506C . . . . . . . . . . 507C . . . . . . . . . . 510 . . . . . . . . . . . 5108 . . . . . . . . . . 5652 . . . . . . . . . . 5672 . . . . . . . . . . 5685 . . . . . . . . . . 6DSL . . . . . . . . . . 623B . . . . . . . . . . 624B . . . . . . . . . . 625B . . . . . . . . . . 656D . . . . . . . . . . 66A . . . . . . . . . . . 6631 . . . . . . . . . . 6636 . . . . . . . . . . 6641 . . . . . . . . . . 6642 . . . . . . . . . .

V4-A2-6

V4-T3-126 V4-T3-89–V4-T3-94 V4-T3-92–V4-T3-94 V4-T3-117 V4-T3-117 V4-T3-127 V4-T3-127 V4-T2-24, V4-T2-58, V4-T2-366 V4-T2-164, V4-T2-179, V4-T2-203 V4-T2-188, V4-T2-190, V4-T2-203, V4-T2-309 V4-T2-366 V4-T2-179 V4-T2-58, V4-T2-366 V4-T2-312 V4-T2-322 V4-T2-437 V4-T2-311 V4-T2-321 V4-T2-321, V4-T2-408 V4-T2-409 V4-T3-117 V4-T3-108 V4-T3-117 V4-T3-114 V4-T3-108 V4-T3-105, V4-T3-121 V4-T3-123 V4-T3-117, V4-T3-118 V4-T3-127, V4-T3-128 V4-T3-128 V4-T3-114 V4-T3-117 V4-T3-108, V4-T3-121 V4-T3-118 V4-T3-123 V4-T3-83–V4-T3-85 V4-T2-321 V4-T2-320 V4-T2-323 V4-T2-319, V4-T2-320, V4-T2-323 V4-T2-319 V4-T2-36, V4-T2-52, V4-T2-69, V4-T2-81, V4-T2-326 V4-T2-106, V4-T2-150, V4-T2-326 V4-T2-25, V4-T2-310 V4-T2-409 V4-T2-403–V4-T2-406 V4-T3-134 V4-T2-321, V4-T2-408 V4-T2-259, V4-T2-310, V4-T2-311, V4-T2-322, V4-T2-323, V4-T2-407 V4-T2-312 V4-T2-408 V4-T2-422, V4-T2-433 V4-T2-312 V4-T2-320 V4-T2-312 V4-T2-321

Volume 4—Circuit Protection

CA08100005E—October 2015

6648 . . . . . . . . . . 673B . . . . . . . . . 68C . . . . . . . . . . 69D . . . . . . . . . . 7ACLS . . . . . . . . 7BCLS . . . . . . . . 7CLS . . . . . . . . . 752B . . . . . . . . . 8ACLS . . . . . . . . 8AHLE . . . . . . . . 8BHLE . . . . . . . . 8CLE . . . . . . . . . 8CLP . . . . . . . . . 8CLPT . . . . . . . . 8CLS . . . . . . . . . 8CX . . . . . . . . . . 8CXI . . . . . . . . . . 8CXN . . . . . . . . . 8HLE . . . . . . . . . 8NCL . . . . . . . . . 8RBA . . . . . . . . . 8RBT . . . . . . . . . 8RDB . . . . . . . . . 8703 . . . . . . . . . .

www.eaton.com

V4-T2-437 V4-T2-322 V4-T2-420, V4-T2-422, V4-T2-434 V4-T2-422, V4-T2-433 V4-T3-119 V4-T3-118 V4-T3-118, V4-T3-119 V4-T2-417 V4-T3-118 V4-T3-109 V4-T3-109 V4-T3-106, V4-T3-121 V4-T3-124 V4-T3-124 V4-T3-118, V4-T3-119 V4-T3-129, V4-T3-133 V4-T3-129 V4-T3-131 V4-T3-109, V4-T3-121 V4-T3-124 V4-T3-83–V4-T3-85 V4-T3-83–V4-T3-85 V4-T3-83–V4-T3-85 V4-T2-310

Appendix 3—Alphabetical Product Index A Accessories Expulsion Fuses End Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-81 Live Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-81 Mountings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-81 Industrial Circuit Breakers, QUICKLAG . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-27 Dummy Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-45 Factory Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-46 Handle Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-43 Handle Tie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-45 Mounting Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-44 Quick-Connect Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-27 Ring or Spade Lug Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-27 Spare Terminal Hardware Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-46 Standard Box Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-27 Medium Voltage Power Contactors Mechanical Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-71, V4-T3-75 Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Definite Purpose Base Mounting Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-334 End Cap Accessory Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-334 Line and Load Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-334 Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, External Auxiliary Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-325 Base Mounting Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-310 Base Mounting Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-313 Breaker Interface Module (BIM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-325 Cause of Trip Display/Remote Mount Cause of Trip Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-325 Cause of Trip LED Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-325 Cylinder Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-315 Digitrip OPTIMizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-325 DIN Rail Adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-313 Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-259, V4-T2-441 Electrical Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-318 Flex Shaft Accessories (F- through R-Frame) . . . . . V4-T2-326 Ground Fault Alarm Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-324 Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-445 Interphase Barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-313 IQ Energy Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-324 Key Interlock Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-316 Key Operated Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-313 Lock Dog (Non-Padlockable). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-314 Non-Padlockable Handle Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-314 Padlockable Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-314 Padlockable Handle Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-314 Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-315 Panelboard Connecting Straps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-322 Plug-In Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-319 Potential Transformer Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-324 Rear Connected Studs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-321 Series C Rotary Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-326 Sliding Bar Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-317 Snap-On Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp . . . . . . . . V4-T2-314 Solid-State (Electronic) Test Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-324 Terminal End Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-313 Terminal Shields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-312 Termination Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-308 Type LFD Current Limiter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-324

Walking Beam Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-317 Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, Internal Alarm Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-275 Auxiliary/Alarm Switch Combination . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-279 Shunt Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-281 Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-293 Undervoltage Release Mechanism . . . . V4-T2-286–V4-T2-292 Zone Interlock Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-293 Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series G, External Electrical Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-107 Handle Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-107 Handle Lock Hasps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-107 Interlock Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-107 Plug-In Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-107 Rear Connected Studs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-107 Rear Wohner busbar adpater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-107 Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series G, Internal Alarm Lockout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-109 Auxiliary Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-109 Auxiliary Switch/Alarm Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-109 Shunt Trip—Low Energy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-110 Shunt Trip—Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-110 Undervoltage Release Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-110 Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Specialty Breakers, Add-On Ground Fault Protection Ammeter Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-417 Face Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-417 Ground Fault Warning Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-417 Test Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-417 Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Specialty Breakers, Classic Mining Breakers Line and Load Terminal Shields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-408 Rear Connected Studs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-408 Shunt Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-409 Undervoltage Release Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-409 Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Specialty Breakers, Direct Current Auxiliary Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-357 Shunt Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-357 Undervoltage Release Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-357 Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Specialty Breakers, E2 Mining Service Alarm (Signal/Lockout Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-391 Auxiliary Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-391 End Cap Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-389 Line and Load Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-389 Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-389 Shunt Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-391 Undervoltage Release Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-390 Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Specialty Breakers, Engine Generator Auxiliary Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-345 Neutral Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-345 Shunt Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-345 Standard Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-345 Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Specialty Breakers, PVGard Solar Photovoltaic Alarm Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-365 Auxiliary and Alarm Combo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-365 Auxiliary Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-365 End Cap Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-366

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015

www.eaton.com

V4-A3-1

Appendix 3—Alphabetical Product Index Imperial Base Mounting Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-364 Interphase Barrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-364 Metric Base Mounting Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-364 Non-Padlockable Handle Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-364 Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-364 PVGard Solar Circuit Breaker Terminal . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-366 Shunt Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-365 Undervoltage Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-365 Power Circuit Breakers, Magnum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-30 Auxiliary Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-30 Bell Alarm/Overcurrent Trip Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-30 Key Off Lock Provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-30 Latch Check Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-30 Mechanical Operations Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-30 Mechanical Trip Indicator Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-30 Padlockable Pushbutton Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-30 Shunt Trip Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-30 Spring Charge Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-30 Spring Release Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-30 Undervoltage Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-30 UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB 208Y/120 Vac . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-95 Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-95 Padlock Hasp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-95 Protective Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-95 UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB 480/277 Vac . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-89 Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-89 Padlock Hasp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-89 Protective Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-89 UL 1077 DIN Rail Supplementary Protectors, FAZ . . . V4-T1-75 Auxiliary Contact. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-75 Busbar End Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-77 Busbar System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-76 Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-75 Protective Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-77 Supply Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-77 Voltage Trips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-75 UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers, FAZ Shunt Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-75 UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers, FAZ-NA . V4-T1-55 Auxiliary Contact. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-55 Bus Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-55 Busbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-55 Busbar Shroud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-55 Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-55 Extension Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-55 Padlock Hasp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-55 Protective Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-55 Shunt Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-55 Supply Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-55 UL Lockoff Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-55 Voltage Trips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-55 Accessories, Digitrip 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series G Electronic Portable Test Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-106 Wire Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-106 Add-On Ground Fault Protection—Type GFR Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Specialty . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-415

V4-A3-2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection

CA08100005E—October 2015

Alarm (Signal/Lockout Switch) Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Speciality Breakers, E2 Mining Service Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-391 Alarm Lockout Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series G, Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-109 Alarm Switch Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-275 Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Speciality Breakers, PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-365 Ammeter Kit Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Add-On Ground Fault Protection Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-417 Auxiliary and Alarm Combo Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Speciality Breakers, PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-365 Auxiliary Contact UL 1077 DIN Rail Supplementary Protectors, FAZ Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-75 UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers, FAZ-NA Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-55 Auxiliary Power Module Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, External Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-325 Auxiliary Switch Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-277 Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series G, Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-109 Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Speciality Breakers, Direct Current Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-357 Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Speciality Breakers, E2 Mining Service Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-391 Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Speciality Breakers, Engine Generator Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-345 Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Speciality Breakers, PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-365 Power Circuit Breakers, Magnum Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-30 Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-279 Auxiliary Switch/Alarm Lockout Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series G, Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-109

B Base Mounting Hardware Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Definite Purpose Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-334

www.eaton.com

Appendix 3—Alphabetical Product Index Type CLS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type CX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type CXF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type CXN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type DSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type HCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type HLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-310 Base Mounting Plate Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-313 Bell Alarm/Overcurrent Trip Switch Power Circuit Breakers, Magnum Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-30 Bolt-On, QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers . . . . . . V4-T1-11, V4-T1-14, V4-T1-17 Breaker Interface Module (BIM) Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-325 Bus Connector UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers, FAZ-NA Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-55 Busbar UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers, FAZ-NA Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-55 Busbar End Cap UL 1077 DIN Rail Supplementary Protectors, FAZ Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-77 Busbar Shroud UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers, FAZ-NA Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-55 Busbar System UL 1077 DIN Rail Supplementary Protectors, FAZ Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-76

C Cable-In/Cable-Out, QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers . . . . . . V4-T1-20, V4-T1-24, V4-T1-28 Cause of Trip Display/Remote Mount Cause of Trip Display Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-325 Cause of Trip LED Module Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-325 Classic Mining Breakers Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Specialty . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-401 Contact UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB 208Y/120 Vac Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB 480/277 Vac Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UL 1077 DIN Rail Supplementary Protectors, FAZ Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers, FAZ-NA Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V4-T1-95 V4-T1-89 V4-T1-75 V4-T1-55

Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-270 Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series G . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-96 Current Limiting Fuses Power Breakers, Contactors & Fuses . . . V4-T3-102–V4-T3-135 Type BHLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-111 Type CLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-104 Type CLPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-122

V4-T3-116 V4-T3-127 V4-T3-133 V4-T3-131 V4-T3-134 V4-T3-114 V4-T3-108

Cylinder Lock Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, External Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-315

D Definite Purpose Breakers Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-331–V4-T2-337 GP-, FP-, KP-, LP-, MP-Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-331 Digitrip OPTIMizer Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, External Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-325 DIN Rail Adapter Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, External Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-313 Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms Handle Mechanisms—Series C Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-440 Handle Mechanisms—Series G Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-426 Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, External Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-259, V4-T2-441 Direct Current Circuit Breakers Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Specialty. . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-347 Drawout Cassette Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series G . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-115 Dummy Breakers Industrial Circuit Breakers, QUICKLAG Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-45

E E2 Mining Service Breakers Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Specialty. . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-372 E2VAC Mining Vacuum Circuit Breaker Specialty Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-398 Eaton Terms & Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-1 Freight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-3 Limitation of Liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-5 Terms and Conditions of Sale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-1 Terms of Payment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-2 Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-3 EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series G . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-15 Electrical Operator Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, External Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-318 Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series G, External Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-107 Electronic Portable Test Kit Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series G Accessories, Digitrip 310+ Electronic Trip Unit . . . V4-T2-106

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015

www.eaton.com

V4-A3-3

Appendix 3—Alphabetical Product Index End Cap Accessory Kit Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Definite Purpose Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-334 End Cap Terminals Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Speciality Breakers, E2 Mining Service Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-389 End Fittings Expulsion Fuses Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-81 Endcap Kits Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Speciality Breakers, PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-366 Engine Generator Circuit Breakers Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Specialty . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-341 Expulsion Fuses Power Breakers, Contactors & Fuses . . . . V4-T3-81–V4-T3-101 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-81 Type DBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-95 Type RBA and RDB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-83 Extension Terminal UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers, FAZ-NA Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-55

F Face Plate Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Add-On Ground Fault Protection Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-417 Factory Modifications Industrial Circuit Breakers, QUICKLAG Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-46 FAZ UL 1077 DIN Rail Supplementary Protectors Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-67–V4-T1-86 FAZ-NA UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-49–V4-T1-66 F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-135 Flex Shaft Handle Mechanisms—Series C Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-442 Handle Mechanisms—Series G Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-427 Flex Shaft Accessories (F- through R-Frame) Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-326 FP-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Definite Purpose . . . V4-T2-331 Fuses Current Limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-102–V4-T3-135 Expulsion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-81–V4-T3-83 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-78

V4-A3-4

Volume 4—Circuit Protection

CA08100005E—October 2015

G G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-121 GP-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Definite Purpose . . . V4-T2-331 Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Modules Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series G . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-92 Ground Fault Alarm Unit Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, External Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-324 Ground Fault Warning Indicator Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Add-On Ground Fault Protection Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-417

H Handle Blocks Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series G, External Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-107 Handle Extension Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, External Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-445 Handle Lock Hasp Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series G, External Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-107 Handle Locks Industrial Circuit Breakers, QUICKLAG Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-43 Handle Mechanisms Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-418–V4-T2-445 Handle Mechanisms—Series C Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Handle Mechanisms Molded Case Circuit Breakers, High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C Rotary . . . . Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Through-the-Door Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Universal Rotary . . . . Handle Mechanisms—Series G Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Handle Mechanisms Molded Case Circuit Breakers, High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Universal Rotary . . . .

V4-T2-440 V4-T2-442 V4-T2-430 V4-T2-432 V4-T2-436 V4-T2-437 V4-T2-438

V4-T2-426 V4-T2-427 V4-T2-418 V4-T2-419 V4-T2-424

Handle Tie Industrial Circuit Breakers, QUICKLAG Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-45 High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series G . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-101 High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms Handle Mechanisms—Series C Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-432

www.eaton.com

Appendix 3—Alphabetical Product Index Handle Mechanisms—Series G Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-419

I Imperial Base Mounting Hardware Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Speciality Breakers, PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-364 Industrial Circuit Breakers, QUICKLAG Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-27, V4-T1-43 Bolt-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-11, V4-T1-14, V4-T1-17 Cable-In/Cable-Out . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-20, V4-T1-24, V4-T1-28 International Rated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-37 Plug-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-5–V4-T1-10 Solenoid-Operated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-31, V4-T1-34 Special Application Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-40

LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series G . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-47 Line and Load Terminal Shields Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Speciality Breakers, Classic Mining Service Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-408 Line and Load Terminals Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Definite Purpose Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-334 Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Speciality Breakers, E2 Mining Service Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-389 Live Parts Expulsion Fuses Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-81

Interlock Kits Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series G, External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-107

Lock Dog (Non-Padlockable) Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, External Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-314

International Rated, QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-37

LP-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Definite Purpose . . . V4-T2-331

Interphase Barriers Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-313 Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Speciality Breakers, PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-364

M

IQ Energy Sentinel Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-324

J J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-153 JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series G . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-29

K Key Interlock Kit Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-316 Key Off Lock Provisions Power Circuit Breakers, Magnum Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-30 Key Operated Attachment Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-313 K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-161 KP-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Definite Purpose . . . V4-T2-331

L Latch Check Switch Power Circuit Breakers, Magnum Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-30 L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-185

Magnum DC (Direct Current) Low Voltage Switches Power Circuit Breakers Power Breakers, Contactors & Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-33 Magnum DS Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers Power Circuit Breakers Power Breakers, Contactors & Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-6 Magnum IEC Rated Air Circuit Breakers Power Circuit Breakers Power Breakers, Contactors & Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-23 Magnum MDSL Current Limiting Power Circuit Breakers Power Circuit Breakers Power Breakers, Contactors & Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-12 Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated Case Circuit Breakers Power Circuit Breakers Power Breakers, Contactors & Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-15 Mechanical Latch Medium Voltage Power Contactors Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-71 Mechanical Operations Counter Power Circuit Breakers, Magnum Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-30 Mechanical Trip Indicator Flag Power Circuit Breakers, Magnum Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-30 Medium Voltage Circuit Breakers Power Circuit Breakers Power Breakers, Contactors & Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-42 Medium Voltage Power Contactors Power Breakers, Contactors & Fuses Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-71, V4-T3-75 SL MV Power Contactor . . . . . V4-T3-61, V4-T3-70, V4-T3-74 Metering and Communications Molded Case Circuit Breakers PM3 Monitoring and Metering Module . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-338

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015

www.eaton.com

V4-A3-5

Appendix 3—Alphabetical Product Index Metric Base Mounting Hardware Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Speciality Breakers, PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-364 M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-211 Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-1–V4-T1-98 Industrial Circuit Breakers QUICKLAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-2–V4-T1-48 UL 1077 DIN Rail Supplementary Protectors FAZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-67–V4-T1-86 UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers FAZ-NA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-49–V4-T1-66 Molded Case Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-1–V4-T2-445 Definite Purpose Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-331–V4-T2-337 Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-418–V4-T2-445 Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-427 Handle Mechanisms—Series C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-430 Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-418 High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . . . V4-T2-419 Handle Mechanisms—Series C Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . . . V4-T2-440 Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-442 High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . . . V4-T2-432 Series C Rotary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-436 Through-the-Door Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-437 Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-438 Handle Mechanisms—Series G Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . . . V4-T2-426 Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-424 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-2, V4-T2-3 Metering and Communications. . . . . . . . V4-T2-338–V4-T2-340 Series C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-116–V4-T2-330 Series G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-4–V4-T2-115 Specialty Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-341–V4-T2-417 Motor Circuit Protectors Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series G . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-85 Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-256 Motor Operators Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series G . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-112 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-267 Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series G . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-89 Mounting Hardware Industrial Circuit Breakers, QUICKLAG Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-44

N Neutral Kits Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Speciality Breakers, Engine Generator Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-345 N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-222 NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series G . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-65 Non-Padlockable Handle Block Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, External Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-314 Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Speciality Breakers, PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-364

P Padlock Hasp UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB 208Y/120 Vac Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-95 UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB 480/277 Vac Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-89 UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers, FAZ-NA Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-55 Padlockable Handle Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, External Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-314 Padlockable Handle Lock Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, External Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-314 Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, External Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-315 Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Speciality Breakers, E2 Mining Service Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-389 Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Speciality Breakers, PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-364 Padlockable Pushbutton Cover Power Circuit Breakers, Magnum Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-30 Panelboard Connecting Straps Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, External Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-322 Plug-In Adapters Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, External Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-319 Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series G, External Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-107

Mountings Expulsion Fuses Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-81

Plug-In Blocks Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series G . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-114

MP-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Definite Purpose . . . V4-T2-331

Plug-On, QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-5–V4-T1-10 PM3 Monitoring and Metering Module Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Metering and Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-338

V4-A3-6

Volume 4—Circuit Protection

CA08100005E—October 2015

www.eaton.com

Appendix 3—Alphabetical Product Index Potential Transformer Module Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-324 Power Breakers, Contactors & Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-1–V4-T3-135 Current Limiting Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-102–V4-T3-135 Type BHLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-111 Type CLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-104 Type CLPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-122 Type CLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-116 Type CX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-127 Type CXF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-133 Type CXN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-131 Type DSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-134 Type HCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-114 Type HLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-108 Expulsion Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-81–V4-T3-101 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-81 Type DBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-95 Type RBA and RDB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-83 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-78–V4-T3-80 Medium Voltage Power Contactors . . . . . . V4-T3-59–V4-T3-77 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-71, V4-T3-75 SL MV Power Contactor. . . . . . V4-T3-61, V4-T3-70, V4-T3-74 Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-2–V4-T3-58 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-2 Magnum DC (Direct Current) Low Voltage Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-33 Magnum DS Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . V4-T3-6 Magnum IEC Rated Air Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-23 Magnum MDSL Current Limiting Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-12 Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-15 Medium Voltage Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-42 Series NRX Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . V4-T3-35 Power Circuit Breakers, Magnum Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-30 Power Circuit Breakers Power Breakers, Contactors & Fuses Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-2 Magnum DC (Direct Current) Low Voltage Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-33 Magnum DS Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . V4-T3-6 Magnum IEC Rated Air Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-23 Magnum MDSL Current Limiting Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-12 Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-15 Medium Voltage Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-42 Series NRX Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . V4-T3-35 Protective Accessories UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB 208Y/120 Vac Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB 480/277 Vac Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UL 1077 DIN Rail Supplementary Protectors, FAZ Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers, FAZ-NA Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V4-T1-95 V4-T1-89 V4-T1-77

PVGard Solar Circuit Breaker Terminal Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Speciality Breakers, PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-366 PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Specialty. . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-360

Q Quick-Connect Terminals Industrial Circuit Breakers, QUICKLAG Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-27 QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-2–V4-T1-48 Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-27, V4-T1-43 Bolt-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-11, V4-T1-14, V4-T1-17 Cable-In/Cable-Out . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-20, V4-T1-24, V4-T1-28 International Rated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-37 Plug-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-5–V4-T1-10 Solenoid-Operated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-31, V4-T1-34 Special Application Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-40

R Rear Connected Studs Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, External Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-321 Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series G, External Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-107 Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Speciality Breakers, Classic Mining Service Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-408 R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-237 RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series G . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-74 Ring or Spade Lug Terminals Industrial Circuit Breakers, QUICKLAG Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-27

S Series C Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-116–V4-T2-330 Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . V4-T2-270 External Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-304 F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-135 G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-121 Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-273 J-Frame (70–250 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-153 K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-161 L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-185 M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-211 Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-256 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-267 N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-222 R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-237 Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-269 Series C Rotary Handle Mechanisms—Series C Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-436

V4-T1-55

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015

www.eaton.com

V4-A3-7

Appendix 3—Alphabetical Product Index Series C Rotary Accessories Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-326

Sliding Bar Interlock Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, External Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-317

Series G Molded Case Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-4–V4-T2-115 Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-96 Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-115 EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-15 Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Modules . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-92 High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-101 JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-29 LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-47 Motor Circuit Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-85 Motor Operators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-112 Motor Protection Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-89 NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-65 Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-114 RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-74 Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-104

Snap-On Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, External Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-314

Series NRX Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers Power Circuit Breakers Power Breakers, Contactors & Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-35 Shunt Trip Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-281 Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Speciality Breakers, Classic Mining Service Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-409 Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Speciality Breakers, Direct Current Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-357 Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Speciality Breakers, E2 Mining Service Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-391 Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Speciality Breakers, Engine Generator Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-345 Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Speciality Breakers, PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-365 UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers, FAZ Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-75 UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers, FAZ-NA Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-55 Shunt Trip Device Power Circuit Breakers, Magnum Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-30 Shunt Trip—Low Energy Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series G, Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-110 Shunt Trip—Standard Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series G, Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-110 SL MV Power Contactor Medium Voltage Power Contactors Power Breakers, Contactors & Fuses . . . . . . . . V4-T3-61, V4-T3-70, V4-T3-74

V4-A3-8

Volume 4—Circuit Protection

CA08100005E—October 2015

Solenoid-Operated, QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-31, V4-T1-34 Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test Kit Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, External Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-324 Spare Terminal Hardware Screws Industrial Circuit Breakers, QUICKLAG Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-46 Special Application Breakers, QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-40 Specialty Breakers E2VAC Mining Vacuum Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-398 Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-341–V4-T2-417 Add-On Ground Fault Protection—Type GFR . . . . . V4-T2-415 Classic Mining Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-401 Direct Current Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-347 E2 Mining Service Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-372 Engine Generator Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-341 PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-360 Spring Charge Motor Power Circuit Breakers, Magnum Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-30 Spring Release Device Power Circuit Breakers, Magnum Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-30 Standard Box Terminals Industrial Circuit Breakers, QUICKLAG Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-27 Standard Terminals Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Speciality Breakers, Engine Generator Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-345 Supplementary Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-1–V4-T1-98 Supply Terminals UL 1077 DIN Rail Supplementary Protectors, FAZ Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-77 UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers, FAZ-NA Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-55

T Terminal Block Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-293 Terminal End Covers Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, External Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-313 Terminal Shields Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, External Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-312

www.eaton.com

Appendix 3—Alphabetical Product Index Termination Hardware Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-308 Test Panel Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Add-On Ground Fault Protection Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-417 Type BHLE Current Limiting Fuses Power Breakers, Contactors & Fuses . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-111 Type CLE Current Limiting Fuses Power Breakers, Contactors & Fuses . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-104 Type CLPT Current Limiting Fuses Power Breakers, Contactors & Fuses . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-122 Type CLS Current Limiting Fuses Power Breakers, Contactors & Fuses . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-116 Type CX Current Limiting Fuses Power Breakers, Contactors & Fuses . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-127 Type CXF Current Limiting Fuses Power Breakers, Contactors & Fuses . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-133 Type CXN Current Limiting Fuses Power Breakers, Contactors & Fuses . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-131 Type DBU Expulsion Fuses Power Breakers, Contactors & Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-95 Type DSL Current Limiting Fuses Power Breakers, Contactors & Fuses . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-134 Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-269 Type HCL Current Limiting Fuses Power Breakers, Contactors & Fuses . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-114 Type HLE Current Limiting Fuses Power Breakers, Contactors & Fuses . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-108 Type LFD Current Limiter Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-324 Type RBA and RDB Expulsion Fuses Power Breakers, Contactors & Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-83

U UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB 208Y/120 Vac Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-95 Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-93–V4-T1-98

UL 1053 DIN Rail RCCB 480/277 Vac Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-89 Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-87–V4-T1-92 UL 1077 DIN Rail Supplementary Protectors, FAZ Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-75 UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors FAZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-67–V4-T1-86 FAZ-NA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-49–V4-T1-66 UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers, FAZ-NA Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-55 UL Lockoff Device UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers, FAZ-NA Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-55 Undervoltage Release Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Speciality Breakers, PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-365 Power Circuit Breakers, Magnum Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-30 Undervoltage Release Mechanism Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series G, Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Speciality Breakers, Classic Mining Service Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Speciality Breakers, Direct Current Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Speciality Breakers, E2 Mining Service Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V4-T2-286 V4-T2-110

V4-T2-409

V4-T2-357

V4-T2-390

Universal Rotary Handle Mechanisms—Series C Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-438 Handle Mechanisms—Series G Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-424

V Voltage Trips UL 1077 DIN Rail Supplementary Protectors, FAZ Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-75 UL 489 DIN Rail Miniature Circuit Breakers, FAZ-NA Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T1-55

W Walking Beam Interlock Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, External Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-317 Wire Seal Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series G Accessories, Digitrip 310+ Electronic Trip Unit . . . V4-T2-106 Wohner busbar adpater Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series G, External Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-107

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015

www.eaton.com

V4-A3-9

Appendix 3—Alphabetical Product Index Z Zone Interlock Kits Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series C, Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-293

V4-A3-10

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015

www.eaton.com